The Sleep Studies

Bob Ozment

The Sleep Studies is a website dedicated to the bliss of sleep. If it's about sleep, we're interested, from wellness, interviews with experts and research to reviews of sleep related products like mattresses, air beds, toppers or pads.

Most comfortable air mattress

The list of our picks for the most comfortable air mattress is based on firsthand experiences from both our in-house testing, that the far future that’s testers and statistical analysis of over 40,000 owner experiences from 6 separate sources.



It’s envisioned to separate the wheat from the chaff and spare you what will likely be days of research.



So far, we have analyzed over 130 products in this category. In this guide, we narrow it all down to 8 products with highest comfort ratings.









Most comfortable air mattress - top 8



Most comfortable air mattress overall - Cloud 9



The Cloud 9 has been dominating the comfort category for 8 updates now, which is an equivalent of 16 months since we update bi-monthly.



It’s fair to say that the company behind it (SoundAsleep) changed the landscape of the industry a few years ago by introducing their staple model, the Dream Series (which also made it to this list, you’ll see it as our 3rd pick).



They built on that success by taking the time to design a product that includes pretty much every feature that makes an air mattress comfortable. The one feature that changes the game is the smart pump.



Current comfort ratings: 98/100



What makes it more comfortable?


Comfort is a more intricate category with inflatables than regular mattresses.



It goes beyond how well the bed feels, and it’s more about the balance between core support, air retention and weight distribution of the top layer.



In our stats, we have seen a very low air leak incidence %s. More importantly, even if there is a pinhole leak, you would never notice it because of the smart pump equipped with pressure-drop sensors. It turns on automatically when the sensors are triggered.



In concept terms, this kind of pump is not revolutionary, there a few major manufacturers that use similar technology, but we found the smart pump of the cloud nine to be more efficient, quieter and overall more seamless.



This kind of comfort comes with a slightly higher price tag but, in our opinion, it’s worth every cent.



The owners club nine seem to agree with us since the owner satisfaction is an unparalleled 93%.



The small percentage of new owners who are not satisfied with the Cloud 9 can always claim the 1-year warranty - something you don’t commonly see in the industry.



See what owners are sharing about Cloud 9 on Amazon here



Runner-up - Lazery Sleep



In terms of design, the Lazery sleep is pretty similar to the two models from SoundAsleep.



The appearance similarities are not where it ends, we’ve also seen similar stats in a few other categories – from the thickness of the vinyl, the performance of the support core to the warranty terms.



We gave the Cloud 9 a slight edge because of the smart pump & the way the top layer distributes weight.



Pump aside, the design of the top with Lazery is akin to that of the Dream Series. The internal coils run top to bottom.



We feel that the side-to-side top chambers create a slightly more cradling for the sleeper.



On the other hand, there is the fact that Lazery costs a bit less and comes with a remote control with 7 firmness settings compared to 3 of the Cloud 9.



Dream Series



We already mentioned this product a few times, and it’s well-deserved. As we said, it’s the airbed that re-vamped the competition in the industry.



When it hit the market in 2013, it did so with a bang. It quickly became by far the most popular among new owners. Looking back to those days, we weren’t sure how well it would stand the test of time.



We had no doubts about that now, the consistency of high comfort ratings (among others) resulted in this bed steadily holding one of the top spots pretty much every quality category that matters.



Who will choose it?



The main difference between this bed and the upgraded Cloud 9 is the pump. This one comes one classic built-in vs. two pumps on Cloud 9 (the main one and the smart for pressure retention).



This would make it more of a difference if the number of air retention issues was significantly higher – this would compromise the overall quality.



Bottom line – the decision will come down to whether you think the smart pump of the Cloud 9 adds enough value to justify the higher price tag.



Comfortable air mattress for outdoors & camping - our 2 picks - Coleman Cot & Coleman SupportRest



For outdoors and camping, we have a tie between two Coleman models. Both rated at 90/100 in comfort.



The difference between the two is obvious. The cot is pretty much the closest you can get to the stable, yet snug feel of your home bed on a camping site, but it’s also bulkier and takes up more and more space in the trunk.



However, the inflatable part detaches from the cot, and the two can be used separately - you can decide whether to pack the whole thing for a camping trip or the inflatable part only.



The versatility is also a significant factor should you decide to take the inflatable out on the camping site carry it on a day-hike.



Among the classic high-rise designs, we're choosing the Coleman SupportRest. This airbed type is where the competition was the closest and subjectivity played a role - we’re giving the minor advantage to the time-tested classic.



A choice for those who prefer firmness and support



Comfort means different things to different people.



It’s a cliche, but we don’t shy away from it, because it’s true. Including this model might be counter-intuitive because a common complaint about it is that it’s too firm.



That’s precisely the reason why we decided to list it as an option for those whose sweet spot of comfort is different, like people with back pain problems.



It might be confusing so let’s take a moment to explain. The firmness comes from the sturdy layering of the vinyl (strengthened by a layer of nylon).



The included topper balances well with the firmness and keeps the spine of the sleeper aligned.



Comfort Anywhere



by Aerobed



If you’re not a fan of the look and feel of classic models, this headboard design might catch your eye.



It’s equipped a with powerful internal pump operated by and corded remote.



At first glance, one might expect a higher price tag, which is not the case. It’s conservatively priced product from a reputable company.



It also might seem more intricate to operate (inflate/deflate). Again, that’s not the case, especially deflation part. It features what’s known in the industry as a Woosh valve that deflates it in mere seconds.



King Koil



We said it a few times; the industry has seen some significant changes over the last few years. The good news is that the changes are for the better.



This comfy airbed is a part of that new wave of products we keep mentioning.



It’s earned its place here for 3 reasons:





Consistently high ratings over the past year


The percentage of owners who have nothing but praise for it


Being the only product here comes in California King




If we’re talking about popularity patterns and bank for your buck, it’s following the footsteps of the highly acclaimed Dream Series.



It’s fair to say that it’s a “young” product. Our stats include what we call a “maturity adjustment factor.” We have it in place so that only time-tested, proven products make it to our list of recommendations.



Based on everything we’ve seen so far, this competitively-priced bed has “arrived,” and it’s here to stay.



Recognizing comfort



The remaining part of this guide is dedicated to reference information about comfort. We’ll go over some reference information, starting from what comfort used in the industry to how it changed over the decades, especially in the last few years.



Superior comfort of air-coils vs. beams



Based on how the core is put together, one can crudely group all the models into two groups – those based on beams and those based on chambers.



It’s the evolution of the latter made of the difference. A chambered core is not new per se; it has been around for long. However, it did significantly change for the better.



It happened in a few aspects that improve on the comfort:





A higher number of chambers that to her better weight distribution and keep the sleeper more comfortable


Better craftsmanship and materials that resulted in lower numbers of air leaks




But first things first, let’s go back to the beam designs.



Today, majority of companies are moving away from this kind of inner structure in favor of chambers.



Beams are somewhat inferior in the way they distribute weight and support the sleeper.



A typical bed based on beams has one or two layers of long, one-piece air beams that run either top to bottom or side-to-side.



You’ll find these in the lower price range, which is only natural because they’re cheaper to make.



The downside comes to two things:





Sub-par support, and indirectly sub-par comfort they lack structural integrity. To be more explicit, it’s easier for these to give in under the weight of the sleeper’s shoulders and hips. The result is an arched spine.


A lower number of support points means more stress and pressure on the connections, which increases the risk of air loss. To put it simply, there’s a higher chance of waking up to a half-deflated bed.




Even the brands that still rely on this design have changed it to address these issues.



An excellent example of that is Intex with their new Durabeam fiber tech series. They kept the beams but connected beams by using high-tech fibers that don’t stretch – the company calls them fiber tech.



The primary role of these fiber connections is to minimize relative movement between the beams and stabilize the bed.



You’re probably noticing a pattern here - many of the improvements address the stability.



The 3 Ss of Comfort - sliding, swaying and sinking



From a layman’s perspective, improving the comfort would probably be limited to making the surface cozier and softer by adding a layer of foam.



We have seen this in the industry, but in the long term, it doesn’t do much if you don’t address the structural integrity.



The three Ss we mentioned above (sliding, swaying, sinking) all refer to the structural component of comfort.



Sliding used to be a common issue – the bed not staying in place because the bottom surface is too slippery. In other words, it’s the lack of friction between the bottom layer of the vinyl and the floor.



In modern products, sliding is addressed by using different kinds of material for the bottom – materials with higher friction that keep the bed and place. Different brands have different names for these materials (sure-grip, non-slip, etc.) but most of the time, it’s all based on the rubberized bottoms.



Swaying is the term that describes the sideways movements - relative position between the top and bottom.



If you’ve slept on an air mattress of inferior comfort, you might know what we’re talking about. It’s that wobbly feel that makes it difficult to switch positions because the chambers underneath you are not sturdy enough.



With modern inflatables, this comfort aspect is addressed in a few ways:





Strengthening the vinyl or even using a thicker material for the sides


Using vertical air coils instead of beams


Improving the connections in the core




Sinking is probably the paramount among the 3 Ss. Based on the polls that we’ve conducted over the years, it’s the one comfort aspect commonly mentioned is a difference between an inflatable and a classic mattress.



The term is pretty self-explanatory and has everything to do with spine alignment and sinking of the hip and shoulder area.



Apart from the direct connection to structural integrity, sinking is closely related to the ability of your bed to maintain your preferred firmness.



Even if everything else perfectly crafted, if the bed loses air, you or your guests are unlikely to sleep comfortably.



Apart from the improvements in the materials used, companies addressed the issue is by introducing smart pumps.



To be precise, these mattresses have a two-part inflation system. The main and the secondary pump that silently adds air through the night.



Type of vinyl as a comfort factor



With the new arrivals and an increasingly competitive market, we’ve also seen improvements in the kind of materials used.



Back in the day, the materials were similar to that of the beach Lilo, only thicker. Those days are gone.



Today, it’s hard to find the company or a product that hasn’t improved in this area. You can see straightforward approaches (like merely making the material thicker) to more elegant solutions, like multilayer materials. All of these have a significant impact on the 3 comfort aspects we analyzed.



Toppers and pillow tops



This is probably the most straightforward approach. In our opinion, just slapping a topper or a pillow top layer on a bed doesn’t do much on its own if the overall comfort isn’t there.



It is, however, a nice finishing touch to everything we talked about thus far.



Summary, updates and our giveaway



If you have experiences to share or questions to ask, you can do it either in the comment section at the bottom of this page or by directly emailing us.



We strive to address number one of those within a day.



Taking part in our giveaway



We are currently running a yearly giveaway of $1000 sleep products for our contributors. All you have to do to take part is contact us and share your thoughts.



If you’re already have something in mind, share away. Alternatively, if you want to some point in the future, just bookmark this page and get back to us.



Don’t be a stranger,



The Sleep Studies team



The following article Most comfortable air mattress was first published to www.thesleepstudies.com







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/most-comfortable-air-mattress/

Best RV mattress short queen

Our initial idea when we set out to put this guide together was to include all shapes and sizes. In the process, we only got some feedback from "RVers" indicating that it would be too broad and confusing. So, we decided to narrow it all down to the most sought after-size and present a list of our picks and reviews of the best short Queen RV mattresses.



We made an effort to diversify and include products that will fit different preferences and budgets. When we say "preferences" we primarily mean memory-foam vs. innerspring.



The ratings you’ll see are a combination of our statistical model and apply some tips from bloggers living the road life, who tested the products first-hand.



To get to the top 5 we analyzed 42 products and rated them in five quality categories. From a statistical perspective, the analysis is intricate and includes quite a few subcategories but, for the sake of simplicity, we summed it all up into 5 ratings and one main number – the overall rating. Without much ado, let’s get right to it.









Best RV mattress short queen - Top 5





CoolBreeze Dynasty


Travel Happy by Premium Sleep


Zinus Deluxe Innerspring


Live and Sleep Resort


Zinus Ultima




Top-rated overall - CoolBreeze by DynastyMattress



Dynasty obviously made the CoolBreeze to be a competitor to the highly-praised I-comfort Genius by Serta.



They even say so in the advertising, by stressing that it delivers similar quality and comfort at a fraction of the price (at the time of the last update the price of the Serta Genius was well over $1,000).



The materials of the CoolBreeze top to bottom premium - from the 4 foam layers (the top layer is cooling open-cell foam) to the soft cover that features a fire barrier and luxurious brown suede.



In other words, it ticks all the boxes a top-tier RV mattress at a much lower price.



The most important part



The crucial part when investing in a product like this without going to a store and trying it yourself is the warranty and the trial.



The Dynasty CoolBreeze offers the longest warranty of all the products we listed. More importantly, they offer a 120 days trial, meaning that you can get the mattress and see if it’s a good fit for you. In that time span, you can return it no-questions-asked.



It’s the only mattress in our top five that offers a trial and warranty this long.



Runner up - Travel Happy by Premium Sleep Products



Compared to the other models on the list, the Travel Happy is a fairly young product. Hence the delay in including it in our top picks. Our statistical model includes what we call “a maturity factor”. In other words, when a product hits the market we wait for one year or hundred experiences shared by owners, whichever comes first.



It’s a way for us to separate the wheat from the chaff, because not to products with high ratings are the real deal.



So, the first time the Travel Happy made it to the list was about a year ago and it did it with a bang. It’s shut its way right to the top 5, with an unparalleled owner satisfaction of 97%. You can see all the ratings below.



Bottom line



The owners we talked to keep stressing one thing about the travel happy - how much of a bargain it is.



There are models that match the quality, but they come with a higher price tag. This is what makes the travel happy our top choice overall and a runner-up in value for money.



It’s the only product on the list with an owner satisfaction rating of over 95%.



Zinus Ultima Comfort review



Zinus dominates the category, with seven models on our broader list of 20. It’s also the only company represented with two products in the top 5.



The Ultima comfort is a classic and there is a high chance you already heard about it.



We mentioned that the travel happy is the runner-up in value for money – it’s the Zinus Ultima that holds the top spot in that category with a rating of 95/100.



Who will choose the Zinus Ultima?



Zinus will be the choice of a conservative buyer looking to buy a top-tier product from a reputable company without breaking the bank.



Currently, it’s both the most budget-friendly solution and most popular, with over 6,000 owner experiences shared on Amazon alone.



Zinus deluxe RV short Queen innerspring mattress



The Zinus Deluxe Innerspring is the only product here that’s not all-foam. It’s a hybrid with a 10 year limited warranty.



Obviously, the main difference between this Zinus Deluxe and the other products on the list is obviously the structure.



Comparison between an all-foam models and hybrid designs is borderline unfair, especially when it comes to prolonged use and shape retention.



Long-term, the support of springs can’t be compared to a foam core, no matter how firm it is.



Who’s it for?



The answer here is obvious, it will be the choice of people who prefer long-term stability and support of coils over memory foam.



We did analyze a few other products of this type, but the structure of this Zinus performs significantly better than other models in its price range.



The i-coil system consists of hundreds independently encased pocketed springs and stands tall, even when compared to products that cost two or three times more.



Live and sleep Resort - Classic & Ultra



The resort classic boasts a more intricate structure of the foam layers. The top layer is the one with the most significant impact on our ratings. The company calls it “the deluxe layer.”



It’s infused with air to make it more breathable and allow it to conform better to the body of the sleeper. On the other hand, the core is high density foam which balances while with the cradling of the soft top layer.



The important part here is the balance between the two – it’s fairly common to see a thick comfort foam used for the top layer, especially in this price range. But, what we often see in models like this is the core lacking in support. As a result in the long run, the surface can become too soft and lumpy without enough bounce for a comfortable night’s sleep.



Who will choose it?



If you’re a hot sleeper, you’ll probably find it to be worth every cent of the hefty price tag.



The breathability of the air infused top foam will make all the difference.



Going by the owner satisfaction as an indicator, it delivers on the bold promises made by the manufacturer.



It comes in two versions - the Classic (10 inch thick) and the upgraded Ultra (12 inches thick).



The Classic currently has over 2,000 reviews shared on Amazon, and the Resort Ultra has 700+.



RV short queen mattress size



Most of the products are approximately of the same size, and when there is a difference it comes down to one or 2 inches in length.



To be specific, three out of five recommendations we listed above are 75 inches long and two of them are an inch shorter.



When it comes to the thickness, most of the better ones are in the range of 10 to 12 inches. Obviously, the thicker ones cost more. There are two products we listed here with the thickness of 12 “ and one of them is the highest-rated overall - the Cool Breeze by Dynasty. As we mentioned, this kind of comfort is only comparable to the Serta Genius.



Classic vs. short Queen



The difference between these two sizes is one of the most common questions. Again, the answer comes down to length – the former is 80 inches long and the latter is, obviously shorter – 74-75 “.



Materials typically used – memory foam vs. innerspring



Majority of the models with highest ratings are entirely made of foam. There’s only one RV short Queen innerspring mattress that made it to our top 5 - the Zinus deluxe.



People who are privy to the manufacturing processes can probably guess the reason – it’s more intricate (read: more expensive) to manufacture the innerspring models, which amps up the price.



If we take a broader look and consider the models that made it to our list of 20 products labeled as best RV mattress short queen, there were only two candidates in the group. The Zinus deluxe is significantly more budget-friendly.



Update policy for our reviews and ratings



We regularly update the ratings and reviews to reflect any changes on the market.



Sharon questions or thoughts you might have in the comment section at the bottom. We strive to respond within 24 hours.



If you are from the RV arena, drop us a line you can become our contributor/tester and qualify for our $1000 yearly giveaway.



Stay smart,



The Sleep Studies reviews team



Best RV mattress short queen Read more on: The Sleep Studies







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/best-rv-mattress-short-queen/

Best floor mattress

We'll cover a lot of ground about floor sleeping in this guide (pun-intended), but let us be very specific from the get-go. The first thing we'll do is present the results based on research gathered from 4 separate sources and look at our recommendations among floor mattresses.



5 picks among 44 we looked at



On our side, getting to the ratings involved some serious elbow grease - from consulting our panel of sleep and material experts (it's how we made the 44 picks for further analysis) to processing the data using our proprietary rating system.



On your side, it's all boils down to a single number - the total rating. Long story short - what you'll see is envisioned to replace hours or days of research and eliminate any subjectivity in the process. So, let us get right to it.









Best floor mattress - Top 6





Milliard Tri Fold


6-Inch Memory Foam Mattress by Best Price


EMOOR Traditional Japanese


Leewadee Thai Mattress


Zinus floor mat


SleepReady floor sleeping mat




Best floor mattress overall - Milliard Tri Fold 6-inch



The user satisfaction stats of this Milliard are not something you commonly see. You can trust us on that, we've been analyzing and testing mattresses for over a decade now and the better part of our team has been a of of industry for much longer than that. So, we know the ins and outs and we still find the stats impressive - the satisfaction of floor-sleepers with this mattress has never dropped below 93 %.



To put it in perspective, this is equivalent of 93 out of 100 owners either rating it as a 5 or 4-star product. Some of our data sources have rating system not presented with stars, that's why we're saying "equivalent."



It's just as thick and comfortable as some classic foam mattresses but specifically designed for sleeping on the floor (non-slip bottom and soft jacquard top). What you typically see in floor-dedicated mats and pads is 3-4 inch of foam - this Milliard boasts 3.5 inches of high-density in the support layer alone. That paints a pretty clear picture of what's better about it.



Our rating: 96 /100



6-Inch Mattress by Best Price



This is not your classic floor models, yet, with all things considered, it keeps finding its way to the very top because of the ratio between value, "floor-ability" (a word we made up just for the purposes of this guide) and price. With all other things equal, size vs. size, it's even more budget-friendly than most floor mats (including the ones that made it to our Top 5). It's also the only model on the list available larger sizes (including King size and California King).



We tweaked our ratings to include this type of mattress for two reasons:





The feedback we got from our readers - it seems that many people make the mistake of over-estimating how prepared they are for sleeping on the floor


A common long-term issue with floor mats and pads is maintenance. As time goes by, the classic models tend to hold on to smells and dust. In the long run, it's a common reason for spending more.




Enter active charcoal



The first question that likely pops to mind is what makes this mattress different (better suited for floor use) compared to other classics. The answer lies is that this one is infused with active charcoal to minimize odor, moisture and dust-retention and keep the mattress "fresh". The company calls the technology ActiveFRESH.



On top of that, if chemicals are a concern, it's CertiPUR certified, which means that it adheres to strict safety standards of manufacturing and traces of chemicals.



On their own, the factors we described above are not a big deal because it's not the only mattress to boast them, which brings us back to the price. It's what sets it apart - you don't commonly see a combination of features we mentioned in its price range.



It's one of the most popular mattresses among people who want to place their mattress directly on the floor but are not into sacrificing comfort along the way. The main upside of getting a mattress like this one is that, should you decide to use it with a platform of any kind, take a break from floor-sleep or give it up all-together, you won't need an additional investment. It comes in 6 sizes and 4 thickness versions (6, 8, 10 or 12 inch).



The popularity is an objective category, since it has over 5,000 experienced shared (just on Amazon) with many of the owners talking about comfortably using it for floor sleeping.



Our rating: 94 /100



EMOOR floor sleeping mat



(Traditional Japanese)



From the get-go, we were somewhat surprised with the lack of top-tier products of this type available for online shopping of an American buyer. We had the growing popularity of this type of floor mats in mind and expected at least a dozen of similar products battling it out for the top spots.



Instead, when all said and done, the competition came down to the Emoor and only one runner-up. We gave the Emoor an edge for two reasons: the versatility of sizes and colors available and the fact that it's actually made in Japan.



Obviously, that alone doesn't a product is worth your buck, the rest of story about it's quality can be boiled down to how well-liked it is by owners and the user satisfaction with the Emoor paints a similar picture.



Our rating: 94 /100



Zinus floor mattress



In terms of design, this Zinus is similar to the Milliard. Both are tri-folds and made of safety and durability-certified premium foam.



But there are significant difference, from the thickness (6 inches of the Milliard vs. 4 of the Zinus), through the fact that Zinus only comes in one size (Twin) to the price (Zinus costs less).



Our rating: 82 /100



With all that in mind, the choice between the two is clear - this Zinus might be your choice if you want to save, you're no stranger to sleeping on the floor & your body is already used to a thinner mattress. In other scenarios, like a transition to floor sleeping or welcoming guests, you might find it too thin.



SleepReady floor sleeping mat by Better Habitat



The SleepReady floor mat is in a category of its own and the comparison of floor mattresses don't really apply.



The foam is 2.75 inches thick and the design is focused on balancing comfort, portability, ease of use and weight capacity. It's a fine balance to aim and what we've seen with most similar products is significantly higher number of foam breakage. This type of structural issues can form indentations with prolonged use and, ultimately, render the mattress useless.



That especially goes for sleepers on the heavier side and most floor mats of this type don't even list the recommended weight capacity. For the Better Habitat mat, the capacity is listed as "up to 230 lbs."



Finally, Better Habitat stands behind their floor mat with a 12-month warranty on all manufacturing defects.



Reference info - history, trivia & choosing the best floor mattress for your needs



In the rest of this guide, we’ll go over some reference information about four mattresses, their history, some interesting trivia and some specific tips on choosing right (if none of the products we listed above your eye).



History - from straw mats & pads to the cushy floor model mattress



Digging into the history presents a bit of a challenge, primarily because of the very definition.



Where does one start?



Should we go all the way back to the Paleolithic times or start with the first instances in history where a mattresses we know it today was described.

Instead of dwelling between the two, let’s the both.



First floor sleeping mats go back to 25 centuries ago



It goes without saying that these were primitive and can be only described as “mats” in a historic context.



The first is instances we found of people covering the cave floor go back Paleolithic times. These coverings were made using tree bark to craft a more comfortable sleep surface.



Granted, it wasn’t hard to put together a surface that would be more comfortable than a rock. To be precise, the coverings we’re talking about here were not even weaved - there were just a pile of bark in cave corners that are predecessors used to rest after long days of mastodon hunting.



First instances of weaving



It wasn’t long after that people started weaving plants. This made life easier in many ways, but we’d say that the 3 most heavily impacted of Paleolithic life were clothes, gathering and sleep.

Clothes and gathering are pretty self-explanatory - the Neanderthal started crafting rugs for clothing and baskets for gathering.



In terms of sleep, this meant weaving plants into mats. On the timeline of human history, the Paleolithic times qualify as pre-history – so, long story short, a sleeping floor mat goes way back.



To be precise, the first description that would fit that awful floor mat as we know it today goes 6,000 years back to ancient Mesopotamia.



Biblical times


If you say “floor mat” without context today, you’d have to explain yourself further - are we talking about mats for cleaning footwear?



In this context, that would be a ,”no.”



Since the floor was still just dirt, the mats we’re talking about here refer to sleeping pads.



No significant change for 15,000 years


In the time range between 6,000 BC and 9,000 AC, these mats and pads have not evolved significantly.



The 9000 AC mark is a milestone because that’s when the nobility of Japan introduced sitting and sleeping on pad made of rice and rush straw.



Based on historic data, these were aristocrat-only for about eight centuries. One has to skip forward to the 17th century to see these mats were widely available to a “commoner.”



Thrum as a material for floor sleeping pads



Fast-forward about 1000 years and we see historic data a new material for floor mats known as “thrum.” It was made from the discarded parts used in fine clothes-weaving and straw base.



The discarded fiber was not only a smart use for the leftovers but, because it wasn’t so fine, it sturdier and more durable.



These fibers were interwoven into a strong base to craft a mat (rug) that retains shape well (because of the sturdy base) and yet has a soft finish of thrum. It became widely popular in England.



Buying a floor model mattress



The products we recommended above have a wide appeal, meaning that whatever your body type is, one of the mattresses is likely to be a good fit for you.



With that said, if none of these catches your eye, let’s take the time here to go over some paramount factors of choosing well.



First things first - are you an experienced floor sleeper?



Most people simply skip this step which is, if you ask us, a huge mistake. For a newbie, the transition should involve a mid-step, like a floor sleeping pad.



If you’ve never slept on the floor, you don’t just dive in and opt for a thin pad. It takes a while for your body to adjust and for you to find the sweet spots and positions, especially if you have back problems.



A lot of misleading information out there



While researching all aspects of choosing a good floor model mattress, we’ve seen a lot of shallow information. We’ve seen articles talking about floor sleep as “getting back to our roots,” with little regard for the fact that our bodies evolved and adjusted to modern mattresses.



If you make a leap of faith based on information like this, you might end up giving up the “project” of transitioning to floor sleep altogether.



Instead, the choice should be made with due diligence and factor in the specifics of your body type and how experienced (or not) you are.



To make it all clear and precise, we’ll go over some questions that you need to ask yourself before choosing.



After each question, we’ll mention a specific product that could be our recommendation in the different scenarios.



Have you ever slept on the floor before?


This is an important one. If you’re starting out, chances are that you’ll find most floor sleeping pads too thin for long-term comfort.



This is one of the reasons that we included mattresses that are, strictly speaking, neither here nor there.



What we mean by this?



When we say “neither here nor there,” we’re referring to the type that’s not floor-dedicated.



In this class, our top pick is the overall runner-up.



It’s a mattress that can be used on the floor or on a platform.



To sum it up, if you’re just making the transition or you want to be as comfortable as possible, we’d go with the second product in the list - the Best Price.



We did mention it being budget friendly as one of its main upsides but, just so that we’re clear, this is the actual name of the product and not our commentary.



Comfort-wise, the thinnest version is on-par with the top-rated Milliard Tri-fold foldable floor mattress and performs just as well in most aspects and even better in others.



One caveat would be that it’s not portable, since it’s primarily intended for home use.



Click here to skip back to the best choice mattress.



How often do you plan to use it?



Another important question to ask yourself is the intended use.



Are you getting a floor mattress for guests / occasional use or daily use?



This is also where portability/storage comes into play.



Scenario one: you have no plans to store it away on daily basis.



For long-term use, our recommendation would (again) be the second product on the list.



Scenario two: floor mattress for guests



(or occasional use)



The choice in this scenario is pretty clear since the Milliard tri fold roll up floor mattress is the product that ticks all the boxes. It’s portable, relatively cheap, comes in three sizes (Twin, Full & Queen), the cover is soft, retains shape (made of bamboo fiber, with a similar feel to that of cotton) & resistant to mold.



Scenario three: floor sleeping mat for outdoor use



For outdoor use, our recommendation is the SleepReady mat/bad by better habitat.



Side note: we already mentioned that we excluded inflatables from this guide on purpose, since we already have an existing guide in that arena (both classic and self inflatable).



Do you have back problems?



Another question that we rarely see addressed and research papers and articles.



Making general statements about a floor sleeping mat or pad being good or bad for people with back problems is misleading at best and downright wrong at worst.



That’s why we had to dig deeper and look into available large-scale studies on the topic. Some of our findings were surprising.



If you talk to people about back pain, the conversation is likely to touch on the matter of sleeping on a hard surface.



The evidence for this are mostly rooted in pop-culture and quasi-science.



If the pain is acute, you probably want to stay away from thin pads and mats. In most cases, the pain comes from nerve pressure. If this is the case, you won’t be doing your back and favors by sleeping on surfaces that don’t allow your shoulders and hips to sink in enough so that your spine is aligned.



There’s no widely accepted consensus among professionals when it comes to chronic back pain and the firmness of the surface you're sleeping on. Most of the data we found in our research suggests that a mattress of medium firmness offers more relief in the long run.



To quote a study we found to be most specific (published in the Lancet magazine, 2003 issue, PMID: 14630439):



“A mattress of medium firmness improves pain and disability among patients with chronic non-specific low-back pain”



You can see the full study here.



What it means applied to choosing the best floor mattress



Our top 2 picks qualify as “medium” firmness. There are floor models of similar foam density and structure, but it’s the thickness that makes a difference here. Anything under 6 inches cannot be taken at face value because the floor surface underneath becomes a significant factor. Compared to thinner mats, these are not as cheap, but are well worth it in the long run.



Summary and updates



To keep the ratings of the floor mattresses relevant, we do your best to stick to bimonthly or quarterly updates. Those include both new data and new arrivals to the market.



You can always use the comment section below for any questions, either about specific products or general. We aim to respond to all correspondence within 24 hours.



Become our contributor



If you have the time to share your experience, feel free to contact us and contribute with personal impressions.



This would qualify you for our annual giveaway sleep products ($1000). To do that, you can drop us a line right now or bookmark this page and do it at your convenience.



The Sleep Studies review team



Best floor mattress is republished from thesleepstudies







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/best-floor-mattress/

Warmest Blanket

Top 12 out of 75



If you’re looking for the best / warmest blanket for winter, this guide is likely where your search ends. Since we initially published it, we tweaked the types and price ranges to fit a wide range of needs, preferences & budgets.



Most of these (11 out of 12) are for home use, but the latest update includes one recommendation for the outdoors (5th on the list).



The ratings you'll see are fruit of over 2,000 work hours & 75 products analyzed based on data from 6 separate sources - we update the ratings monthly to keep the information fresh and relevant at all times.



We’ll go through it all – from types of winter blankets to choose from, through the quality analysis to the ever-so-important satisfaction of the owners.









Warmest blanket - Top 12





Poyet Motte


Biddeford Micro Sherpa Electric


Barber Velvet


BEIZLSS Luxury


Zefabak outdoors


Shavel reversible


Creswick wool


Warmzone


Super Warm Freelife


Qbedding Extra


Langria Ribbed


Fishers Finery throw




Best blanket for winter overall



Poyett Motte Aubisque



If you’re looking for a regular blanket (without added heat sources), nothing beats natural wool and, within that category, in our opinion and based on the stats, no blankets we looked at beats the time-tested quality of Poyet Motte.



It’s hard to choose where to start and what quality aspects to stress when talking about this blanket. The tradition of the company probably deserves an article of its own, since we are 10 years away from Poyet Motte celebrating their 200th anniversary. Currently, they are the leading European blankets manufacturer.



But let’s get back to things that can directly affect your decision.



First of all, it’s one of the few blankets that are consistently above the rating of 92% in user satisfaction. That’s no small thing if you have in mind fact that there are similar blankets with a lower price tag.



As we said, we simplify the results by boiling down the ratings to a few simple numbers but, on our side of things, getting to that number is anything but simple. With objective ratings we go into the nitty-gritty like craftsmanship, both general and imperfections on arrival and developed with prolonged use. This includes things like loose stitches, changes in shape, pilling (when applicable).



On the subjective side, we analyze how satisfied the users are with specific aspects. For this guide, we adjusted our statistical model to put more emphasis on aspects that the more important for winter blankets.



Long story short, in most of the categories above, Poyet Motte was either dominant or in the top 3 in each update.



In terms of Temperature regulation for the winter, this blanket is at the sweet spot between the nature of the fabric (virgin wool), the density of the weave (warmth) and breathability.



If you look at other similar blankets, 9 out of 10 times, you won’t even see the 3 most important aspects mentioned – density (thickness of the fibers used), weight per square meter and whether it’s recycled.



There’s a reason for that - most of the times, the reason is that these aspects of blankets are nothing to write home about. Poyet Motte is an exception.



The fibers are so fine (33 microns) that they can be we weaved into a blanket of 500 g/m² (GSM). Also, it’s important to mention that the company uses Woolmark licensed Virgin wool.



What it all means for you



Most of us shut that conversation about how products are made these days. There are two sides typically involved in this kind of conversation. You are either on the more experienced side talking about “the good old days” or on the other side that shrugs it off and saying that “it’s just the way things are today.”



Poyet Motte taste type of product that would satisfy the criteria of both sides. In terms of longevity it’s fair to say that this is an heirloom blanket that’s likely to be in your family for decades.



In terms of value for money, in our opinion, it’s worth every cent.



One downside could be the fact that it’s not always available in all sizes and color combinations. Over the course of the last 3 years (since we first published this guide), we have seen it go in and out of stock in some sizes and colors.The bottom line is that if Poyet Motte is available in your preferred size-color combo, our advice would be not to over think. Chances of being disappointed by this blanket are slim to none.



You can see what the owners are saying about it, current price and size-color combos currently available by following the link below.



Warmest electric blanket



Subeam Luxurious Velvet



The competition among the independently heated winter blankets is fierce. For the potential buyer, this is a good thing because it means higher quality products at lower prices.



In this category, we’re choosing the Sunbeam Luxurious as the best blanket for winter.



What gave it an edge over similar products is the category of value for money. This chunk of the market has made significant leaps over the past decade or so, primarily in terms of safety and seamlessness/versatility of the controls.



The difference in those paramount quality aspects is not as significant as it was when we talked about wool. A few products from top companies have been locking horns for the top spots in pretty much every update.



This is one of the blankets that kept its place in the top 5 - it’s been there since we first published the guide and all subsequent updates, both in this guide and in the top 10 heated blankets with you can see here.



Rating this type of blanket is slightly different than simply rating the quality. We included a slight adjustment to account for the balance between the weight and the warmth.



Initially, this adjustment wasn’t a part for statistical analysis and we only included it based on the feedback from our featured testers and readers. The reason is that it’s not only about the warmth. The soothing effect of thicker blanket is now a part of our statistical analysis. Granted, it is a secondary factor, but it is there as means to adjust the ratings to what people are looking for in a good winter blanket.



If it wasn’t there, there would be a number of blankets with an independent heat source that could be practically rated the same. We’re including this explanation to make the ratings clearer.



Let’s get back to the quality analysis


We mentioned that these blankets have seen some significant improvements. Two that stand out are the auto shutoff function and preheating.

Initially, the products that included both were more expensive, but things leveled down with time and this sunbeam is the perfect example. It comes with both features and yet, it’s in the same price range as blankets that include only one (and in some cases none) of the two.



It’s also worth noting that the blanket is covered by a 5-year warranty.



You can see what owners are saying as well as all color options by following the link on the red button below.



Velvet Berber Premium Soft



We have been reviewing blankets for years now and it's only once in a blue moon that you see a product with the kind of stats the Velvet Berber has in user satisfaction.



To be specific, we have seen overall rating in this category this high, but almost never see a blanket with a 5-star rating from 9 out of 10 people.



That's what makes the Velvet Berber unique.



It might not be the warmest per se, but in the bigger picture (balance between all quality aspects), the fact that it has been among the Top 5 winter blankets for 12 consecutive updates now is well-deserved.



BEIZLSS Luxury



If there is a blanket on the list that made us subjective, it's the Beilzss. It's significantly more expensive than any other on this list, but, well...look at it.



On the downside, we have seen the Beilzss go in and out of stock with various suppliers. So, if you really need to treat yourself and do find the Beilzss available, it might the indulgence you need. Also, the data volume that we have is not big enough to rate it in the category of owner satisfaction - that's why you'll see that rating ommited below.



There is no blanket on the list that can transform the look of a bedroom more than this luxurious piece.



It's also one of two products we listed as "exceptions" because we don't have the data volume to rate it. With this one, we just couldn't help ourselves.



You can check whether its currently available below.



Warm outdoor blanket



Our pick - ZEFABAK duck down



Our top pick for warm outdoor blanket is the ZEFABAK duck down, with one caveat - since the ZEFABAK is filled with natural down, it might not be your best bet for humid conditions.



For that scenario, we'd reccomend the Rumpl (you can see the complete review of the Rumpl blanket here - https://thesleepstudies.com/rumpl-blanket-review/).



The competition in this category was close - between the ZEFABAK and a few other products. Without getting into the nitty-gritty of it all, what made the difference is the power (density vs. weight) of the natural fill.



In other words, blankets that would be as warm for the outdoors cost more and those in its price range or lower don't really come close to the heat-retention & reflection properties.



Warmest electric blanket among reversibles



Shavel Micro Plush



This Shavel is one of the blankets that made us make an exception in terms of our rules for the statistical analysis. When we say that we’re referring to the fact that it’s yet to meet the volume standards for the data we have, which is why we don’t yet have a rating for it.



The reason for making an exception are the numbers in user satisfaction category that we have seen so far. We’ve been reviewing blankets for over a decade now and, in the that time, one develops a “nose” for patterns.



Unless Shavel changes something significant about this blanket, we’re confident that this product “arrived” and is here to stay.



Another reason that made us include it in the group of best winter blankets is the reversible construction.



As we mentioned previously, it’s our opinion that a good winter blanket is not simply warmest, it’s more about the balance between all of its properties.



To be more specific, a thicker, cozier blanket like this will be warmer at a lower heat setting.



Again, we rarely make exceptions, and the fact that we did for this Shavel speaks volumes.



Creswick Luxurious by Australian Mills



The runner-up in the wool category is the Creswick Luxurious by Creswick Australian Mills.



In many ways, it’s similar to the Poyet Motte above with the main difference being the weave.



The fibers are even finer (23 micron) which means that it feels somewhat lighter. With the fibers being fine as they are, the finish of the Creswick feels less rugged. Since it initially appeared on Amazon, its popularity grew to the point where counterfeit products started appearing.



At one point, the company itself pointed this out in their listing of the product, warning about the counterfeits.



Our stats



We made sure to only closely follow the original blanket and base our stats on that.



If wool is your choice, the decision will come down to the fact that Creswick is a bit lighter and thinner than Poyet Motte, which is only natural if you have the fine fibers in mind.



It’s also worth noting that, typically, the finer the fibers the more luxurious the blanket feels and the price usually follows.



What this means for you



It means that the blankets made of fibers this fine are not cheap. With that said, we did look at other blankets in the same micron range and most of them were significantly expensive than the Creswick.



That’s why one of our ratings is “value for money” instead of simply price.



It also means that the blanket is not as heavy and not as a warm as those of “sturdier weave”. On the other hand, it’s better in terms of adjusting to the shape of the sleeper’s body - a category we like to call “hug.”



The bottom line is that if you’re looking for a moderate winter blanket that won’t be heavy, the Creswick Luxurious might be just right for you.



To get a full understanding the type of winter blanket this is, follow the link below and read the reviews of people who currently own the Creswick.



Warmest blanket among poly-fiber products - WarmZone



You might have already heard about the WarmZone.



Apart from the electric models, it's the only blanket on the list designed specifically with warmth in mind.



"Designed" means that it's heat-reflecting - in other words, the polyester surface is coated with extra insulation layer that reflects back the heat dissipated by your body.



Granted, this also means that it's not as breathable or versatile as wool, but it's crafted to do one job - be warm.



And it does the job well - especially with the price range in mind. So, if you need a budget-friendly throw to curl up under and watch re-runs of Friends, Warmzone might be the blanket for you.



Warmest blanket among fleeces



FreeLife Super Warm



If you prefer a minky blanket to wool and if you’re not interested in the self-heating products, our top choice among classics is the FreeLife Super Warm.



You would think that choosing a good, warm fleece blankets is simpler.



Not really, understanding a few aspects of micro-fabrics is a must if you don’t want to end up with a blanket that will lose the delicate texture you initially got it for. It’s all about the type of polyester / polyamide combo.



Indications of quality



The type of machines used to make good microfiber are not cheap (especially if it’s split microfiber), so there are many companies out there that compromise in the manufacturing process.



The tricky part here is that, while new, you won’t be able to tell the difference between the types of blankets. That’s why microfiber earned the label of cheap fabric. In reality, a well-made blanket of this type can last just as long as any other. More importantly, it won’t be prone to losing the “feel”, shape or look.



If you look at things that way, choosing right becomes just as intricate as with any other type.





Let’s cut the long story short:

go with a blanket that’s rated both for the dryer and the machine (if the instructions list “hand-wash” only, it can be an indicator of the low-quality blend)


go with blankets that include a warranty that pertains to shrinking and fading (if that’s not mentioned, most of the time, you’re looking at a product that will do just that – change shape or not be as soft and warm)


go with the blanket that offers a full refund (if there’s an all-in-one indication of quality it’s this – if the company uses a sub-par blend, it doesn’t make financial sense for them to offer a warranty)




Freelife Super Warm ticks all the boxes



If you compare the price of the free life to other blankets of this type (all-fleece), it might seem expensive. That’s why the analysis above is important – because not all fleece or microfiber is created equal.



This is a premium 330 GSM blanket with a price tag to match. More importantly, it’s time-tested product with 100s of user reviews. You can see them all at the link below.



Qbedding Extra Big - Warm Fuzzy Faux Fur



This Qbedding blanket is one of those products that you either fall in love with at first sight or be confused about why people like it. The part comes down to taste and what you think about faux fur.



That’s one part of the story - the arguable part.



What’s not arguable about this Qbedding is the impressive owner satisfaction numbers.



What this means for you



We did look at other warm fleece blankets, but none of them was even close in the owners stats. For you this means that what you see is what you get. This part is important because faux fur is probably the one material that can be misleading in the pictures.



It’s available in two sizes and colors – you can see the details below.



Langria ribbed - soft, warm blanket for those on a budget



If you’re looking for a budget-friendly solution that still looks luxurious, there’s little chance that this line Langria won’t catch your eye.



It’s a classic polyester blanket with a modern twist in appearance. The chunky ribbed design gives it a glamorous look.



The flannel side is 300 GSM, while the Sherpa fabric is 200 GSM. That adds up to 500 grams per meter square which is the same as our top overall pick (The Poyet Motte).



To be fair, a combination of flannel and Sherpa fabric can’t really be compared to wool in terms of warmth and temperature isolation, but then again, the Poyet Motte costs significantly more.



Honorable mention - Fishers Finery thin throw



Let’s be clear from the get-go here - on its own, this is not the warmest blanket ever and does not qualify to be a good choice for winter as a standalone product - it's too thin & light for that.



We’re including it because, since we first published our picks, we've been getting questions from people asking how to add a bit of balm without piling up weight.



Cashmere is the answer


Cashmere that would be thick enough to keep you cozy in the winter on its own would cost a small fortune. As reference, it takes two goat undercoats for just one sweater.



Note that we’re not saying wool but “undercoat” (which is the fine layer under the wool). The undercoat is hand-combed before it can be used in confectionery products - that's why these blankets are so thin.



It’s not realistically possible to compare heat-retention qualities of a throw like this to that of wool, let alone flannel or other materials. To do that, you’d have to have two products of same ply and yarn.



With that said, comparison of fiber-to-fiber can come as a shock - Cashmere is 7 to 8 times warmer than wool. The catch is that it is scarce and expensive, so it's not used for thick blankets - when it isused used in bedding, it's typically light throws like this.



So, the bottom line here is that this Fishers Finery blanket might be to choice of people looking to cozy up on the sofa with a thin and lightweight, yet soft, warm blanket throw for a nice winter nap.



Reference info & tips on choosing the best blanket for winter



If for some reason you didn’t like any of our top picks, the remainder of this guide we’ll go over some reference info on choosing right.



It also might be useful insight into why the blankets we mentioned are a good choice.



Warmest blanket material



It’s not simple to choose the material and describe it as "warmest" because some image the materials we mentioned are not used in the same way as others.



A good example of that is Cashmere. We already mentioned that, if you compared it to wool (same fiber thickness) cashmere can be up to 800% warmer.



That fact alone doesn’t qualify it as warmest when it comes to blankets because there are no blankets of this type that there as thick. The ones that are available are typically thin, lightweight throws.



So, cashmere aside, it’s fairly accurate to say that wool is the warmest material.



Warmth alone doesn’t mean much



In our testing and analysis (based in the owners we talked to and publicly available experiences), we would say that the title of “the warmest blanket for winter” typically goes to products with most well-balanced warmth/weight/hug properties.



In case you missed it, “hug” is a quality that we introduced to our testing and rating. To put it simply, it describes how well a blanket contours around your body.



The decision process



It’s easy to get lost in all the lingo that describes warmth when choosing the warmest blanket for winter. So let us take a step back and craft a system of sorts that outlines the steps a smart buyer will make.



Think about the size


Most people skip this step because it seems pretty straightforward. Nonetheless, when we analyzed the complaints of people who weren’t satisfied and had complaints, almost 7% of those were regarding the size.



In some cases, this is a result of companies using the descriptive sizing. In case you have your eye on a product that doesn’t release specific dimensions, let’s clarify what it typically means.



For example, a King size winter blanket would be 108×90 inches, while Double/full/Queen size will be 90 x 90 “. In some cases, the product listings might deviate from these standards. It’s rarely happens in the bigger sizes like King and when it does, it’s almost never smaller. What you might see is a king-size measuring 108 times x 108 “.



A good rule of thumb here is to go with a bed blanket that’s big enough to cover the top of your mattress and has a few extra inches on the sides.



The material


We don’t have a lot of ground to cover here because we mentioned the mist material aspect of the choice in pretty much every section of this guide.



So let’s is just reiterate:



Wool - we already labeled wool is the warmest material (with a few caveats about ply and yarn). It would be an oversimplification to label it as “top choice” because there are other factors at play (like the price and versatility). What we mean when we say versatility is whether you can use it in other seasons besides winter.



When it comes to price, it’s somewhat more expensive than fleece or microfiber. On the other hand, that ties into “seasonal value.” A thick warm fleece blanket that would be a good choice for winter will probably be too warm for other seasons.



That’s not the case with wool - it has a unique property to keep you warm on cold nights and isolate you from the heat come spring or autumn.



Fleece/microfiber - combination of microfiber and other synthetics that feel natural and plush are one of the most popular choices. Based on the conversations and, in some cases, full interviews with the owners, the appearance plays a big role here.



About 80% of the people we talked to sound the cozy, luxurious look of minky micro fabrics or fuzzy combinations to be visually more appealing.



We also mentioned that not all blankets of this type are created equal and that most of those that are on the cheaper side tend to be sub-par in retention, both in terms of weight and tactile qualities (the softness).



Knitted /crochet acrylic - not the most popular choice, but a viable one, especially for people allergic to wool.



How comfortable are you with added weight?


This should be an important step when choosing the best blanket for winter. We already said a few times that the warmer doesn’t necessarily mean superior.



Some people will be more comfortable with a thin, lightweight winter blanket while others find the added weight and thickness to be soothing. In our research, we found that the ratio between the two groups of people is approximately 2 to 8.



This means that 2 out of 10 people will be more comfortable with lightweight throws. If you belong to this group, you’ll probably be better off with a heated blanket. These allow you to get the extra warmth without the weight. You can see our complete guide and list of top-rated electric heated blankets here.



On the other hand, if you belong to the majority, you’re not likely to be disappointed by any of the products we listed as our top picks.



Is your skin sensitive?


The wool products we listed don’t have that scratchy quality that most people don’t like, both have a delicate finish with satin edges.



If you’re researching beyond that, do bear it in mind and.



Fabric strength


Strength of the fabric is the quality category for doesn’t make much sense on its own unless you’re planning a window escape.



In our ratings, strength is incorporated as a secondary factor into the shape retention and longevity ratings, because it does it play a part.



Fiber to fiber comparison between synthetics and wool will have an obvious winner every time – this synthetics fiber. So that’s not a discussion to be had.



If we’re talking wool, the rankings in terms of fiber strength would be the following (weakest to strongest):





South down


Lincoln


Merino


Mohair


Alpaca




So, since Mohair & Alpaca are typically used in smaller throws and cost much more, the conclusion is pretty much the same and leads us back to our Merino as the warmest material.



Choosing a warm outdoor blanket



If you're looking for a warm outdoor blanket, things get a bit trickier because you have to factor in the elements. For dry and cold weather, down is superior, but for humid conditions, you're better of with down alternative.



Winter blanket vs. all-season



Another thing to keep in mind is how you plan to use the blanket - is it a winter-dedicated or multi-season. Materials like wool are both warm and breathable. This type allow for multi-season use while others are primarily made to be warm and are likely to be stored come spring. On the other hand, you have the lightweight options that do offer warmth but are not very likely to be enough on their own for harsh winters.



If you ask us, we're always for simplifying life. In this case, it means getting a soft, warm blanket that will play one role. The more you get into the nitty-gritty of the balance between heat-isolation, weight, moisture wicking...the complicated the choice. That's just our 2 cents.



Share your thoughts & qualify for our giveaway



If you have questions or feel like there are aspects of choosing that we haven’t covered, drop us a comment below or email us directly. Do you have an opinion on what's the warmest blanket ever?



Sharing your experience with a specific product would make your contributor and qualify you for our $1000 worth annual giveaway in sleep products.



Don’t be shy, we love hearing from our readers and respond to all correspondence within one day.



The Sleep Studies team



The following article Warmest Blanket is republished from TheSleepStudies







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/warmest-blanket/

Best rollaway and folding beds

The top 10 picks you’ll see below as best rollaway / folding beds are fruit of 2700 work hours & 84 beds we reviewed so far. Initial picks were made by our panel of expert contributors (material technology engineers and sleep experts) and the pool of data we have so far includes over 15,000 personal experiences from 5 independent sources.



This guide is updated either when the pool of data we’re using for the statistical analysis grows by type 10% or every three months, whichever comes first.









All types and sizes included



With each subsequent update, we adjusted our picks o make the list as well-rounded (based on reader feedback) as possible. We kept adding new types of roll away, foldable, portable and collapsible beds, cots and mattresses to cater to different needs and pocket-depths.



Not to toot our own horn but it’s fair to say that, whatever the type of foldable / portable beds for adults you’re looking for (including folding cots, which is our latest addition), you’ll find it represented among our picks.



Best rollaway bed – top 11



Best rollaway bed overall - Milliard Diplomat with extra-firm folding foam mattress



This guide has seen about two dozen updates so far and the milliard premium has been our top pick from the get-go.



Is about seven months to initially publish our picks and it’s been well over two years since then. So, that’s almost 3 years now of this milliard being the top dog in the category.



That almost never happens in home products



We’ve been reviewing sleep-related products for longer than we care to remember and we rarely see a product being the top pick for so long. It happened only a few times, but it’s almost a rule that we only see it in less competitive niches (typically outdoor sleep).



In a niche as competitive as guest beds for home use (excluding air mattresses), it’s a small miracle. We usually see at least 3 to 4 products locking horns for the top spot. If we exclude the milliard premium and look at our data, the longest we’ve seen a bed occupying the very top is 14 months.



In those terms, this milliard is an exception. It’s now closing in on 36 months of being the best rollaway bed, which is a phenomenon in its own right.



One main reason for the dominance



As we mentioned, both the formula and the product range are tweaked over time to paint a clearer picture. The tweaks in the statistical analysis are most frequent in the value for money category.



So, the explanation for the dominance of milliard premium can be summed up as being at the sweet spot between price and quality.



Simply put, there beds that are similar in quality cost much more than the beds in its price range are of sub-par quality in at least one aspect we rate.



With that in mind, it’s not a surprise that milliard premium is also one of the most popular models among users.



Hundreds of them shared their experience with the milliard on Amazon alone. It’s so popular, that we have seen products and new arrivals trying to mimic the look & design of the mechanism. None of them stood the test of time, primarily because of the foam quality.



You can copy a mechanism/design, but including high-quality foldable memory foam mattress with it is a whole different story. That’s why we see similar products hitting the market, having some initial success but not lasting, as the foam starts to break and lose shape. In our experience, the one year mark is typically when user complaints start pouring in and dramatically affect the rating.



The link to the original milliard premium is below.



Runner up - LUCID "Fold & Hide" folding bed



The runner-up in the category comes from a reputable company and it’s very similar in design and foam quality is the milliard. It’s also a time-tested product with a solid 10 year warranty backing by the manufacturer (on the foam).



Another thing that’s constant and similar to the milliard is the satisfaction of users.



With the warranty in mind, the social doesn’t come as a surprise because it’s the foam that makes or breaks a fold up bed in the long run. It’s rarely the frame.



Who will choose it?


At the time of the last update to this guide the lucid rollaway bed with folding memory foam mattress has a somewhat lower price tag compared to the milliard premium and diplomat.



So, if you’re a conservative buyer on a budget, this model from lucid might be your choice.



You can see the hundreds of user reviews it currently has an Amazon alone by following the link below.



Milliard Premium fold away bed



Milliard is the only manufacturer with two models in our top 10. If you have in mind the volume of roll away beds we reviewed so far, that fact alone speaks volume about the quality of their beds.



So, let’s take a moment here to explain the differences between the premium and the top-rated Diplomat. First of all (and possibly most important), the mattress of the premium version is not as thick (5 vs. 4 inches) and not as firm. Milliard describes the foam used for the month as “extra-firm,” while the foam of the premium as medium firm (the density of the foam is the same – 2.5 lbs).



Secondly, the premium comes on the cot size, one of the comment is available both as folding Cot and in twin size.



Lastly, there is a difference in the base material – the premium uses mesh and the Diplomat is wire lattice.



Zinus resort roll away bed with a folding memory foam mattress



The main difference between Zinus resort and other models that made it to the list our picks for the best roll away bed is obvious - it’s the design of the frame and the thickness of the foldable mattress.



The foldable bed frame is more intricate and includes side covers that hide the space under the bed and the mattress is 5 inches thick. Four inches out of five are high-density foam and one in which is memory foam.



Finally, it’s fair to mention that our statistical model includes what we call a “data volume adjustment factor”. It’s a fancy way of saying that we have less data to go on with this model than the Milliard Diplomat.



A caveat about price comparison



Granted, comparing the price without talking about sizes is not really fair. The Twin is 38 inches wide and the Milliard Diplomat is Cot size (3.05 inches wide).



If you go a size down (narrow Twin for guest room, 30 inches wide), this version of the Zinus is in the sun price range as the Milliard Diplomat or the lucid fold and hide.



Who will choose it?



At first glance, this Zinus doesn’t look like a rollaway bed at all. Add the fact that it boasts a 5-inch thick mattress and you get what can easily be best guest bed for you if you like the design with the covered sides.

Without getting to the nitty-gritty of how we rate the foam quality, we can say that it’s every bit as good (if not better if you account for the thickness) as any.



Folding Bed (box-spring) - Edward Original



If we didn’t have the value for money rating, the original Edward guest folding bed with a box-spring mattress would probably be at the very top.



In terms of the word durability and longevity, comparing foam-only roll out beds to the Edward box-spring is not really an option.



We said that this would be our pick for the most comfortable and best guest bed overall, were it not for the price.



Who will choose the Edward?



Edward Original roll out bed is significantly costlier than any other option on the list.



The price is not a surprise if you have in mind the fact that the Edward original is the rollaway guest bed that combines foam and springs.



To put it differently - it’s the closest you can get to the longevity, durability & feel of a regular bed with rollaway models.



So, if price is not the primary decision point but rather the comfort of guests and long-term value, we’d say that your search can easily end with Edward Original.



Lucid fold up bed



Since we initially published this guide, we received at least a dozen of requests include Queen rollaway beds. The response to each of those emails was the same - they rarely come in queen-size and the ones that do are not foldable - they’re basically Queen or Full sized bed on wheels.



So, we did the next best thing – include a queen-size fold up bed that pairs well with a queen rollaway frame, but is collapsible / portable and can be used on its own (as a sofa) or stored away during the day.



A combo not many people think of



Our choice here comes from Lucid. It wasn’t a hard decision since the lucid also makes queen-size frames to go with it. As we mentioned, strictly speaking, there are no Queen or Full size rollaway bed that are of the same type we're analyzing here (fold up).



On top of that, if you get two of these in Twin XL size, you get a King. This combo is a great idea for guest rooms – two nice sofas for the days and a guest bed for 3 adults (76 x 80 inches).



Obviously, this is a unique product and list, which is why we have a separate more in depth review for it, you can see it here.



If you go by the number of reviews, this would be by far the most popular bed here, with over 1,200 reviews just on Amazon. To see what people are saying about it, follow the link to the original product below.



ibed in a box and ibed corner collapsible



There are two products for my ibed that we feel deserve a mention here - I ibed in a box fold up bed cot and the ibed corner.



The former is more of an honorary mention because we don’t have enough data to rate it. The fact that we are mentioning it here is a result of about 20 people emailing us with their experiences praising I bed in a box and asking us to review it.



The latter (ibed corner) is one of the most popular fold away bed for guests and the budget-friendly option. The foldable foam mattress of this ibed is 1 inch thinner compared to the top choices (3 inches thick), but the compactness (if that’s a word) is second to none.



If those two factors are crucial, this ibed will definitely catch your eye.



Folding ottoman bed



If you’re looking for a fold out ottoman bed, our top two choices are the milliard guest hideaway and the handy living sleeper.



The overall rating of two is the same (90/100). With that said, we give the handy living sleeper a slight edge, primarily because of the versatility in colors available and slight difference in the price.



On the other hand, the milliard is slightly bigger when folded into an ottoman.



The difference is other aspects like the material of the cover, sturdiness of the ottoman frame and the cushions are too small to report on. Finally, if company reputation is a concern, both companies are in good standings. The latter company is well-known for chairs and sectionals (like the Handy Living convert-a-couch).



Bottom line - both folding ottoman beds are top-tier and, ultimately, the choice comes down to personal preference.



Fold up cot by Coleman



The category of fold up cot beds was is the "youngest" here. We only added it 6 months ago but that doesn't take away from the reliability of our ratings.



In fact, it was the easiest to work with since we have many featured contributors in the outdoors arena. The process of choosing came down to emailing 16 of them and asking about their experiences with fold up cots over the years. Twelve of them gave their vote to the Coleman ComfortRest.



Granted, in the emails, we did mention that we're looking for a cot that would perform well for indoor use, as a folding cot bed. We then proceeded to gather the necessary data on this Coleman and two other products. We ended up with a significant gap in ratings between the top pick and the runner up.



References - testing and rating



The remainder of this guide is dedicated to two things:





explaining the process we went through to review the guest beds and get to the list of products we could label as best and stand behind our words


what to look for if you’re not shopping online or if none of our recommendations catches your eye




About our ratings of the fold up beds



As you stressed a few times, we received no free products or testing samples to review. It’s a way of ensuring that the process is fully objective and based on tangible data.



We started out by consulting our panel of experts for the initial picks. The way we see it, this has two upsides.



First of all, it eliminates many sub-par products that would otherwise, to be honest, waste a lot of our time and resources.



Secondly, it allows us to be thorough in the analysis



Whenever we can, we buy the products we review. In the interest of full disclosure, this wasn’t the case with roll away beds because we simply didn’t have the resources. So the ratings is so rely heavily on the statistical model we developed years ago and tweaked over time.



Today, the core the analytics remains the same (when we can’t to buy all the beds and test them personally), but it’s tweaked to the specifics of the product. It’s only natural, because the same quality categories don’t apply for all bed types.



Even when we could buy and personally test the fold up beds we review, the analytics would still play a major role in reaching the ratings, simply because nothing beats volume. In other words, what we like is not necessarily what most people will like, no matter how objective try to be.



Bottom line, the larger the data-volume, the more accurate the ratings. It also means that each subsequent update paints a better picture about the quality of the beds.



What it all means applied specifically to reviewing rollaway beds



Primarily, it meant clearly defining what qualifies as “high-quality.” With "classic products", things are not so intricate because there are more variables here.



Speaking in broad terms, all our ratings can be grouped into primary and secondary (by how much of an impact they have on the overall rating).



Just for reference, let’s take a moment here to look at a few.



On-arrival assembly


This is one of the quality categories that’s unique for rollaway beds. It doesn’t qualify as primary because it does this make much of a difference in the long run.



To be clear, but were talking about here is how easy/hard it is to put the bed together once it is on your doorstep (like frame and wheels assembly).



If there are on arrival problems with putting the bed together, those would be accounted for in the “on-arrival issues” along with any defects in the craftsmanship.



Stability


Stability is a primary factor with a few sub-factors. The crucial part is the stability of the bed frame and what qualifies as a sub-factor are ties (if any).



Plainly speaking, it’s meant to describe how well a bed performs in two aspects:





    Subject feeling of frame stability (beds with a lower rating in this category would feel flimsy)


    The "pieces" staying in place




Quality of the folding foam mattress


Another primary factor and possibly the most intricate one.



The grade of the foam used in fold up beds will not be as high as that used in classics.



That’s not a minus per se. Here’s why…



If the foam was of the same density and ILD (indentation load deflection) and thickness as that of a classic models, it would be much harder to fold and store the bed.



So, for a good guest bed, you’re aiming for density and ILD that would be at the sweet spot between comfort, support and malleability.



In terms of density, we found the sweet spot here to be around 2.5 lbs. The higher you go, the harder it becomes to collapse the bed away. This lowers the portability.



On this side note, this is one of the reasons we were so impressed with the Edwards original. If you know the manufacturing side of things, you know how hard it is to make portable bed for adults that includes springs.



To simplify it



Everything we said above might sound a bit too much to take in, so let us simplify it by summing it up into two factors of foam quality.



A great way to judge it are the warranty terms - it would make little financial sense for company to offer a long warranty if the foam in their products “breaks” after six months.



So if you don’t want to spend days researching, the shortcut would be looking at the warranty terms for the foam. Making a sturdy yet collapsible bed frame is not as hard as offering high-quality foldable memory foam mattress to go with the frame and base.



Sturdiness of the frame


Initially, we used durability and longevity of the frame as primary factors. That’s not the case anymore because there are too many products with similar frame quality.



Instead, sturdiness is a secondary factor included in all of the following ratings: stability, durability and longevity.



A side note



One of the more common questions we received pertains to the difference between durability and longevity. It’s pretty simple - durability describes the capacity of a bed to take on weight at one moment while longevity describes how well it performs long-term (without developing structural defects).



Customer service and Better Business Bureau rating


This is an important one - it goes beyond prompt replies to emails or return claims. Listing a warranty is one thing how efficient the company is when a customer wants to claim it paints a better picture.



It takes some elbow grease to get to this rating because we basically have to count every experience a customer had and how promptly it was addressed.



As we said, it goes beyond answering an email. To put it simply, what we like to see here is the company address them claims without giving you the runaround or avoiding your return request (if defined in their warranty policy).



To make it more accurate, we always take the time to look into the Better Business Bureau rating of the company that manufactures the foldaway beds we review.



Maintenance


The “ease of maintenance” is pretty self-explanatory. It comes down to a 2 things:





    whether the bed comes with a cover and, if yes, whether it’s machine-washable and rated for the dryer


    whether it comes with a bag/sack two-story the whole thing




Even the best folding beds often don’t include a storing bag for storing when not in use. You often have to get one separately.



Do the wheels lock in place?


Wheel-locks are not a must for a good rollaway bed for adults. If the frame is sturdy, the weight of an average adult will be enough to keep the construction stable.



With that said, if you’re an adult but on the lighter side, it’s probably a good idea to consider whether the wheels lock.



The blog post Best rollaway and folding beds was originally published to https://thesleepstudies.com/







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/best-rollaway-folding-bed/

Is it bad to sleep with wet hair?

One of the most common questions when it comes to the relationship between the way you sleep and the health of your hair is whether it’s bad to sleep with wet hair and if you’re already determined to do it how to do it properly.



In the guide below we address the issue from a few different angles, since the answers are not simple.



People who are asking the questions can be crudely separated into two groups – those who are concerned with damaging their precious locks and those who were concerned with the health related issues (like getting a cold).



That’s how will structure the guide – we’ll first address the issue of whether moist or wet here gets damaged during the eight hours of sleep, and then we’ll move on to the health implications.

We’d love to be more straightforward, but we need to dig a bit deeper.









Is it bad to sleep with wet hair?



Yes, the simplified answer would be that there are reasons why it's considered a no-no. For two reasons - the damage to your hair maternal arises from the friction of interlocking follicles and the health-related concerns (colds, headaches and, in the worst scenarios, rare cases of brain inflammation and damage to the facialis nerve).



Opinions do vary and you might even find people saying that it poses no risk, a data-driven answer suggests otherwise. Let’s take a closer look.



Hair-damage concerns



Tossing and turning in bed will make your dry hair tangled, not to mention wet one.



The actual hair shaft looses its strength when it’s wet. Literally the core of your hair becomes weaker, and that’s why the wet hair is easier to stretch.

Stretching and friction from pillowcase fabrics lead to damages. Breakages, split ends, frizz, knots… you name it. It’s not going to happen instantly, but in long terms, these are the real dangers.



Long periods of this can make your scalp prone to dandruff, or cause serious case of seborrhea and fungal infection.



Moisture that is being captured between the pillow and your head, made from oils and absorbed water from your hair, warmed by your body heat and in contact to bacteria, makes a really unhealthy environment for your scalp.



How to sleep with wet hair



Not exposing your hair to the high temperatures of a hair dryer and letting it dry naturally is one of the simplest, yet super-beneficial ways you can keep your hair healthy. This way your scalp doesn’t get dry and it keeps in all those nourishing oils that are feeding the follicles of hair.



This is easy to do on the hot summer days, but there are all other nights when you need to wash you hair and go to sleep quickly, leaving you with nothing else but letting it dry while you sleep.



If you really don’t have time to blow dry it and choose to go to bed with wet hair, please don’t ever do it with your hair being soaking wet. Below are some pointers on how to sleep with wet hair and minimize the potential damage and risks.



Protect your pillow and your hair



Use a towel to squeeze excess water without putting much pressure, gently comb it with a wide tooth comb, untangling any knots that you may find without pulling hard, and apply a bit of a leave-in conditioner.



You can also use heat protectants, anti-frizz products, or if your hair is curly try some smoothing serum, it will save you time fixing your locks in the morning.



If there is any time, try to blow dry your hair a little, just to move away from being completely wet to slightly wet. Focus on getting your scalp dry.



Consider putting clean towel over your pillow, so it can absorb the moisture from your hair. The wet pillows are perfect place for bacterial growth, which can cause acne (and a nasty smell).



Silk and satin pillowcases are also good alternative, since those fabrics cause less friction, regardless of your hair being wet or dry. Wrapping your hair in a silk scarf will also do the trick - you can see our guide on top silk pillowcases here - https://thesleepstudies.com/best-silk-pillowcases-sheets-comforter/



Let your hair down or tide it?



Braiding your hair slightly or putting it into a bun, may give you a nice, wavy look in the morning. You can even wrap your strands around pieces of cloth to take it to the next level of curly.



However, if you do this on hair that hasn't been dries at all, the chances of damaging it will get high.



If you really want to do something with it, choose a loose braid, and avoid any tight alternatives or high ponytail. Scrunchies will work better than elastic bands, so go with them.



Styling it after waking up


In most cases, you will have to re-do your hairstyle in the morning, because often it needs some tiding up and blow drying.



If you like what you see when you get up, go on with your day.



If not, you can shake it out to get volume, and add some styling product or diffuse it. You may even have to re-wet some part of your hair to get the look you want.



This can actually take more time than if you just wash it a bit earlier in the evening so you have the time to dry it out.



Health-related concerns



Some doctors say the practice has nothing to do with getting ill, other ones (and your mum) are strongly against it.



We are going to follow our common sense and say that it’s never wise to to it in a cold or windy place.



Sure it doesn’t mean you are going to get ill just because you are cold, but your body acts differently in these conditions.



Sleeping with wet hair and headaches



When sleeping in a cold climate, the blood vessels in your body and head, especially the ones in your nose and throat, will constrict. When that happens there is a less space for white blood cells (which are responsible for fighting the viruses), to come through and do their job. Having your head wet for number of hours in a cold environment, sure doesn’t help.



We don’t catch a cold, we catch a virus, but by getting our body in this state our immune system can become weaker, making our body an easy target. That can be a reason for an onset of headaches.



Our body temperature drops during the night, and because we are sleeping, we can’t control it by getting ourselves warmed. Since we loose our heat mostly through our head, it will cause some dehydration.



Any extreme change in temperature can be dangerous to our body and cause problems more serious than a fleeting headache.



If you choose to do it anyway, let it be damp instead of soaking wet, and keep your room warm and your pillow protected.



Share your thoughts



We did our best to address some of the most common concerns, but the more opinions and experiences the merrier.



What are your thoughts and experiences? Is it OK to sleep with wet hair?



If you have any questions, or would like to share your experience, please do so in the comment section below.



Sleep tight and dry



Is it bad to sleep with wet hair? Read more on: www.thesleepstudies.com







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/sleep-with-wet-hair/

Biting tongue in sleep?

"I'm biting my tongue in my sleep...," it's not something you can complain to a friend about and have a serious conversation. Spoken out-loud, the problem seems trivial and good basis for jokes and puns. But when you wake up to an irritated or even bloody mouth, it doesn't feel like a joke.



Feelings aside, it can be a real problem. In immediate terms, it can interfere with your sleep cycles because, even if you don't know about it, when you bite your tongue your brain receives a pain signal. The effects on sleep quality can range from mild to long-term deprivation of deep sleep, which is an essential sleep phase. On the other hand, it can indicate an underlying cause.



Today, we look at it all - from potential causes to what you can do to stop it.









Tongue-biting in sleep happens to more people than you might think



There are no precise stats, but the number of people suffering from common causes like teeth grinding or sleep apnea can be a good indicator. Over 30% of people grind their teeth excessively during sleep and over 20 million suffer from sleep apnea, in the USA alone. But, if you found your way here, chances are that you're not like most of them. You are probably biting your tongue beyond the point where you damage it and it feels sore in the mornings. That's the part of population we'll be focusing on.



The truth is, this happens to pretty much every one of us while we're awake. Remember how many times you accidentally bite your tongue or insides of your cheeks, while speaking or eating. It is true that it's more common in some people than others, it comes down to the size of your tongue and how your jaw is "put together." As we said, Some people are not even aware of doing it, only realizing that something happened when they feel their sore tongue in the morning.



It's fair to say that if you belong to the later group (people who commonly bite their tongue when they're awake) chances are that the same reasons are causing it when you're sleeping.



However, sometimes this little night accidents may do a serious damage, and in some cases be a sign of distinct health conditions.



Potential causes of biting tongue in sleep



If it happens once every few months, chances are it's accidents and can be attributed to you being a restless sleeper or "living up" your dreams more vividly. We toss and turn while sleeping; our arms and legs sometimes end up in uncomfortable positions, so the same thing can happen to the inside of our mouth. We sometimes grind our teeth, or bite our tongue.



If you have misaligned teeth or wear braces, this can easily be the reason why it happens. Elastics used on braces to set your jaw position can be especially uncomfortable. Unconsciously, while sleeping, you can try to find a better position for your jaw and bite your tongue in the process.



There is a possibility you just have a bigger tongue than it’s suited for your mouth. This disproportion will cause accidental biting to happen often and in other daily situations, for example: when you talk. Having a “big tongue” problem is not as rare as you might think. You can’t do much about the actual size of your tongue, really, but there are some ways you can address the problem of biting your tongue while you sleep, and we are going to discuss them later on.



Disorders and health conditions that may be causing it





Stress can cause all sorts of sleeping disturbances, among them teeth grinding, which can occur and lead to tongue biting. Stress can be caused by hormones, tight schedule at your work place or school, or any other problem bothering you. We often exclude it right away, but it can really be the number one cause. Whatever is the reason behind it, try to relax, and if you can’t do it by yourself, talk to your doctor about treatment that can help you. Once you sort out the cause of the stress and get it under control, you will stop biting your tongue during sleep.


Teeth grinding is a common disorder that is closely tied to the problem. Since it imitates chewing, you get how possible it is to hurt your tongue during these jaw movements while having no control in your sleep. In difference to occasionally grinding your teeth, if you have a disorder, it will need to be treated more serious. Teeth grinding or bruxism is usually a symptom of anxiety and stress, which can be treated with therapy and drugs.


Nocturnal or night seizure is basically a state when person makes uncontrollable jerking movements of limbs without conscious consent, while sleeping. All seizures are caused involuntarily, and can include stiffening of the muscles and losing control of bladder or bowels. Some seizures might manifest in calmer ways, without any movements, therefore be harder to notice. The traces of tongue biting might be noticed on the side of the tongue. A person may not have seizures during the day, so diagnose can only be done by doctors through the observation of brainwaves. To treat this condition, medication is prescribed. When taken, medication will stop the seizures and tongue biting.


Similar to that, there is a Rhythmic movement disorder. In this case, all the movements are usually restricted to the head and neck area. It includes sudden repeated shakes and banging of the head, while unconscious, and as a result can have severe injuries, including ones caused by strong bites. This can happen before or in the middle of sleep, and one seizure can last few minutes. It affects children the most, and although there is medical treatment, they usually stop completely as child gets older.


Sleep apnea is a condition that causes problems with breathing during sleep, including shallow breaths and long pauses between each breath. With that happening, a tongue tends to relax, so it can slip between the teeth, which can lead to injuries. Each episode of sleep apnea (and there can be many of them during the night) can bring new tongue injury, leaving you with bloody traces in the morning. There are effective treatments for this condition.


Lyme disease affects the nervous system and the brain itself, and with those two inflicted and not working properly, muscles receive wrong signals and they start to move involuntarily and unpredictably.




Other causes





If you have dentures and the fitting is not right, this can also be a cause behind the problem. If that’s the case, you will need to visit your dentist to make proper adjustments.


Taking psychoactive substances, often leads to people grinding their teeth, biting their tongues and inner cheeks. With their increased energy and changed state of perception, they can do this even for pleasure, since the receptors for pain are influenced by drug and are not working properly. This can cause to serious injuries.


Some antidepressants and other medications can cause night seizures and movements that may cause a problem. When the medication is changed, this usually stops.




Damages you may suffer from biting tongue in sleep



Although injuries from are usually not life threatening, they are painful. The situation gets trickier because of the fact that the injury is placed in our mouth, which is full of bacteria.



If you think the situation is serious, you should immediately visit a doctor, but usually there is no need to do that.



If it happens often, or you did it once, but with a lot of strength, you will probably notice some nasty results from it. Soreness and bleeding are most common, but there is also possibility of developing ulcers, that can take days to heal.



Morsication lingarum is a condition that affects borders of the tongue, when it’s being physically injured by chronic biting. In this case the sides of tongue are irritated and painful, and it needs to be treated.



"Biting my tongue in my sleep"



How to talk to your physician



As we said, it can be nothing but like with all problems that might seem trivial but persevere, you'll want to talk to your doctor. In these situations people tend to try and "steer" the opinion of the doctor by either diminishing or exaggerating the problem. The best practice here is to visit a doctor right after an episode so that they can see the damage and be very precise about how often it happens.



This can as simple as taking pictures after each episode. This will give them useful insight into how often it happens and the extent of the damage it causes - it's the frequency and the severity that tell the full story.



How to fix the damage?



There are ways to treat the injury or relieve the pain before going to the doctor’s.



Applying ice cubs or anything cold on your tongue will help with soreness and numb the pain. You would also want to rinse your mouth with salty water to clean the wound and protect from infection. Repeat the process few times or until you feel better.



Rest of the day avoid eating spicy and hot food, and restrain yourself from meals that require much chewing.



Can you prevent tongue biting?



We said that it can be caused by some disorders and illnesses, in which case the conclusion is that the cure for the tongue biting is the treatment for the initial cause/health issue.



Whatever is the reason behind the issue, you're probably wonder if there's something that can actually protect your tongue from being damaged?



The answer is yes.



There are several types of mouth guards or night guards.



Boil and bite guards, that you need to boil in water before using to soften the plastic they’re made from, and partially custom fit them to your mouth. They can be found in some stores.



Back to you



We hope that reading this guide helped you find useful advice and clarity on the matter.



If you are biting your tongue in sleep, or have any experience related to this issue, please do share with us and comment in the section below.



Sleep tight and don’t bite.



Biting tongue in sleep? Find more on: https://www.thesleepstudies.com/







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/biting-tongue-in-sleep/

Bookcase headboard – Top 10 Picks in Twin, Full, Queen & King size

This guide on bookcase headboards is planned to be a one-stop shop for all the information you’ll ever need to choose right.



What you’ll see



We are a month late with this update because we wanted to make sure that was covered everything. So, no matter what you’re looking for in terms of size and materials (mostly solid wood), we’re confident you’ll find it here.



It took us this long because we needed in our statistical data to make specific recommendations. That’s the first thing you’ll see - our top five picks among bookcase headboards in all styles, colors & sizes (twin, full, Queen and King). So let us get right to it.









Bookcase headboards with sizing details - Queen, King, Full and Twin



Kansas Solid wood bookcase headboard by Palace Imports



Most of the complaints we’ve seen while gathering data for this guide were about assembly, stability and longevity of the assembled headboard.



In those quality categories there is simply no comparison between composites and solid wood pieces like this one. It’s 100% solid wood (pine) available in 3 colors (mahogany, cherry and java) and two sizes (twin & full).



Between the sizes and colors, it’s hard to imagine a room that one of the versions one be a good fit for.



Bottom line – all the other solid wood pieces that we looked at cost way more and shed lower user satisfaction numbers.



In terms of value for money it’s worth noting that this solid piece is in the same price range as most composites.



You can read more about it and see what the users are saying below.



Bookcase headboard King



Prepac Sonoma



If you’re looking for clean, minimal look and value for money, this classic Prepac Sonoma might be where your search ends - especially if you're after a King size.



The doesn’t come as a surprise that it’s the most popular product on the list because it’s at the sweet spot between price, and versatility in both size and color.



The Prepac Sonoma is available as Twin, Queen and King size bookcase headboard. The twin is only available in white, one of the Queen and King are available in 5 colors: white, cherry, warm cherry, drifted gray and washed black.



We say that its popularity and high user satisfaction ratings are not a surprise because between the sizes, colors and minimal lines, it’s hard to imagine a room where one of the versions won’t be a good fit.



One caveat you should be aware of is that it’s a standalone, meaning that it doesn’t actually attached to the bed but is held in place by the weight of the bed. Some people we talked to find this to be a plus because it’s easier to clean around the bed while others prefer fixed models.



It’s just something to be aware of when it arrives without attachment hinges – it’s supposed to be like that.



The wood



It’s not a solid wood headboard bookcase and one doesn’t expect to be in this price range. It’s composite wood with a thick, solidly crafted laminate.



Most of the complaints we’ve seen about this Sonoma are regarding two aspects that go hand-in-hand - assembly and structural integrity over time.



Like most pieces like this (composite wood), a bit of extra care while putting together base dividends in the long run. If the screws are not properly aligned and angles are not right, it might affect how stable the final assembly is.



Based on our statistics, about 1 in 10 people have the complaint about the assembly or the longevity. In this price range, it’s fair to say that the percent of pieces are faulty on-arrival. So, the best practice here is to get someone experienced to put it together.



A trained eye will notice any on arrival issues with the angles or screws. In this scenario, it’s wise to replace the package instead of improvising.



Sauder County Line bookcase headboard Queen / Full



At the time of the last update to this guide, this Sauder County Line is one of the highest numbers in the category of user satisfaction. Granted, the number of reviews it had is currently nowhere near as high as, say, that of the Prepac Sonoma.



It’s only natural because this Sauder comes in only one color (salt oak) and it’s not as versatile as some of the other pieces of the list in terms of color scheme of the room.



It’s designed to be attached to pretty much and standard bed in full or queen-size. What do we especially liked about it is the thickness of the side boards in the frame and the minimal yet practical segmentation of the shelves.



If the salt oak finish works for your intended space, you can see all the details of this Sauder by following the link below.



Sauder Orchard Hills



Sauder Orchard Hills is one of the most popular pieces on the list.



The company stresses that the Orchard Hills have significantly lower return rate compared to similar headboards.



The design is minimal and can work with most spaces will, from modern to traditional. Of course, the fact that it only comes in Carolina Oak is a limiting factor.



Dimensions



It’s 62.75 inches long and 40 5/8 inches high. Total height of the shelves is 10 7/8 inches with the central shelf of 29.25 “.



Solid wood bookcase headboard Queen by Barrister



Finding a solid wood headboard bookcase in Queen size is proven to be a more difficult task than we anticipated. That’s why this Barrister is an amazing find.



We had to dig a bit deeper around carpentry forums, but once we stumbled upon it was a dear in headlights moment.



We were taken back by the price range first and foremost. Once we researched more, we found some answers. It’s made of plantation hardwood. This is a medium density hardwood that you typically find on rubber wood plantations.



This type of wood is also known as Malaysian Oak. Widespread use of Malaysian Oak in furniture is yet to enter the mainstream - that’s the most likely explanation for the low price of this piece.



If this was the ‘80s, we could talk about the susceptibility of Malaysian Oak to fungus or insects. It was in the 80s that manufacturing treatments were developed to protect the sensitive wood.



One would think that 30 years would be enough for the industry to catch up, but this piece is proof of sorts that it’s yet to happen.



But, talking about furniture industry trends is besides the point here. The point is that this Barrister offers the quality of solid wood at a price range of composites.



Prepac Espresso bookcase headboard Queen / Full



If you’re looking for a more intricate design (read: more shelf space) this slanted piece might be right for you.



Size



Total height adds up to 55.75 “. The width of 65.75 makes a good fit for Queen and the full beds.



The central storage space measures 29.75 x 16.75 inches, with three smaller separated shelves on top of it and some generous space on the sides.



As you can see in the images, it has more than enough space to organize both your books and smaller stuff like alarm clocks or boxes.



In terms of design, what separates this Prepac is the slanted front-end, the bottom shelf is 10.25 inches, while the highest self is 6.5.



Again, the limiting factor is the color since it only comes with an espresso finish. In the cold works for you, you can read more about it below.



Sauder Shoal Creek



The first thing that stands out about the Sauder Shoal Creek are the drawers. If you have any knick-knacks that belong in the bedroom but you don’t want them displayed this Sauder might be right for you.



While the width is similar to most bookcase headboards for Full and Queen beds (64 inches), the Sauder Shoal Creek is the lower and not as imposing.



Measured from the bottom to the top shelf, it’s 41 7/8 inches. In the central storage area is 11.5 inches high and 28.75 inches wide.



It comes in five colors: white and soft white, brown, diamond ash gray and Jamocha (the best we can describe the mocha that it somewhere between dark brown and black).



South Shore Summer Breeze Bookcase Headboard Full



The South Shore Summer breeze clearly stands out in terms of design, with the dominant top arch. One look at it and it should be clear enough whether it can work for your room.



It’s available in two colors – chocolate and vanilla cream.



Dimensions and weight



Height – 48 “, width – 56 “, depth 9.25 “. It weighs 58 lbs.



South Shore Little Treasures



The South Shore Little Treasures is one of the pieces on the list that will obviously work primarily with rustic spaces.



In the country pine finish with knotted patterns is what defines the look.



The design relies on straight lines and right angles, which gives it a simple and minimal “feel.”



Its 57 inches wide, 36 1/8 “ high and 9 inches deep. The biggest (central) shelf measures 23 x 9 1/8 “.



South Shore Step One headboard bookcase Twin



The South Shore step one is clearly designed to be a good fit for modern spaces.



The shelves separation is not as intricate, the total with 56 inches is simply separated into three shelves, each 17 3/4 inches wide and 14 5/8 inches high.



Total height is 40 1/8 inches.



In spite of being minimal, it doesn’t look boring – the top arch is a nice designer's touch.



Twin bookcase headboard



Sauder Beginnings



The Sauder Beginnings belongs to the top five pieces in terms of user satisfaction numbers.



Furthermore, Sauder goes out of their way to stress how much lower the return and replace numbers are.



All the statistics we looked at do confirm the advertising claims about this Sauder. With that said, we’re not sure why the company is not offering it in more size and color choices.



It’s only available in dark cinnamon cherry color finish and twin size.



Reference info on bookcase headboards



In this section of our guide will offer some insights and tips about what to think about when choosing a bookcase headboard.



Composite or solid wood



As you saw in our analysis above, composite wood is more commonly used for headboard bookcases than solid. Our list of top 10 includes only 2 solid wood pieces and one of them is not classic wood but Malaysian Oak otherwise known as para wood.



The reason is that composite is much easier to work with and assemble. However, all composite’s are not created equal, so in the following section, we’ll take a look of the different types we saw used for the pieces.



Before we get talking about densities and the manufacturing process let us answer a basic question.



What is the wood composite in the first place?


We all know the type of “wood” but we don’t know much about how it’s made, where it comes from or how to judge its quality. So, we’ll try to simplify the definition, it to make the rest of this section easier to understand.



A composite derives from wood and it’s created from fibers, compressed boards, strands and other pieces pressed together and binded. Apart from wood-only, a composite can be WPC (WP stands for wood-plastic), this means that fibers and thermoplastics are mixed together.



It might sound strange, but this type of “wood” doesn’t have to include wood derivatives at all. It can be made using vegetable fibers like sugarcane, wheat straw or hemp stock. These fibers and are done pressed together by adding binding chemicals.



Roughly speaking, all composite wood belongs to four categories: plywood, fiberboard, oriented strand board and laminated timber.



Headboard bookcases are typically made from laminated timber



We did see some sub-par pieces made using fiberboard or strand board but, most of the time, companies use laminated timber to make headboard bookcases.



It’s at the sweet spot between malleability, density and sturdiness. In other words, it’s easier to work with and it assembled right, it holds shape pretty well…more on that in a minute.



The construction of headboard bookcases



If you look at the pieces and analyze the weak spots, the first thing to look at is the shelves (and drawers, if any). If we look at our statistics, most complaints about assembly are not regarding the frame but the shelves.



It’s only natural because the better pieces have a thicker frame that can withstand more force, both because the material is sturdier and more screws are applied to keep it in place. Shelves are a different story, they are much more sensitive.



Shelf sagging



Even if you don’t know much about woodworking, intuitively, you understand the issue were talking about when we say “shelf sagging”.



If the screws that go in the sides of the frame and through the shelf are not perfectly aligned, the assembly can quickly become rackety, sag or move.



Some of the pieces that we saw above have predrilled holes for the shelves. With these, the bookshelves lay on metal notches that go into the hopes. Some of the woodworking experts we talked to preferred this design because it minimizes the chances of the bookcase shelves becoming loose in the short run or sagging in the long run.



Dimensional factors of the bookcases



There’s nothing more important for the structural integrity of the bookcase frame than the thickness of the shelf.



Let’s try and explain bookcase sagging in plain terms


The two other dimensional factors (width and length) are directly proportional. This simply means that you if you had 5% of with the bookcase shelf gains 5% in rigidity.



The same directly proportionate math applies to length - the shorter it is, the more rigid it will be.



Thickness is not so straightforward



Thickness of a bookcase has, mathematically speaking, exponential connection with sagging. If you make a shelf 10% thicker, it becomes 21% stronger.



What this means for you



With all other factors equal, thickness of the wood will have more impact on bookcase sagging.



Simply put, if you’re looking for longevity from your bookcase headboard, choose thicker lumber.



“Creep” of the bookcases



What we talked about above (sagging) only applies in the long run as the woods changes shape. There’s another woodworking term that describes the small changes is in shape (arching) as you put on weight (books).



Creep is only a secondary factor with the pieces that we listed above because, typically, the bookcase shelves are not long enough for you to see significant creep.

It can, however, become a factor in the composite is low-density and creep forces become a factor that pulls on the screw connections between the frame and the inner case.



For example, if you get a two-section headboard bookcase in King size, the length can be a factor if you substantially burden it.



Strength of the wood used for the bookcases


We’re only briefly address solid wood strength because the range of choices is limited and the detailed analysis would be futile.



But, if you’re making a DIY headboard bookcase, it might be worth having some basic knowledge when choosing the wood. For our purposes, the more important part is the comparison between solid wood (primarily pine), medium density fiberboard (MDF) and plywood.



Solid


The harder to wood the stiffer and stronger the bookcase. Naturally, a piece made of solid wood will cost more, whether you’re making it yourself or buying it.



Medium density fiberboard


Probably the most cost-effective option, MDF is not as strong and stiff, but it does a good job for a bookcase.



Plywood


Compared to pine, plywood is about 64.5% “weaker.” On the other hand, it’s about 67% stronger than MDF.



For reference purposes, we are including comparison table of wood strength for bookcases. The numbers below describe how much weight a 36 x 12 x 1 “shelf can take and not sag more than 0.25 “.





Pine: 200 pounds


Oak: 313 pounds


Plywood: 129 pounds


MDF: 87 pounds




Rigidity of composites versus solid bookcase headboards


Man-made wood is nowhere near as strong as solid pieces. Let’s take the example of plywood - the rigidity is about 50% lower than hardwood (on average).



MDFs and particleboards are not a great choice if they are not strengthened. On their own, and they are about 75% weaker than average wood. With this in mind, the thickness of the shelves that we analyzed previously and the quality of the laminate finish becomes crucial important.



This is where he to ties in – our top picks in the table at the very top of this guide are superior to similar products from competitors in most of these aspects, especially in the craftsmanship of the laminate.

Granted, you won’t be burdening your headboard with heavy objects, but if there is space, they might fit a set of encyclopedias.



To that end, we’re including a reference table about maximum length between supports for moderate and heavy loads (25 & 50 pounds per running foot).



Talk to us and apply for our giveaway



If we haven't covered something in the guide, feel free to ask us about it. We respond to all comments and questions with 1 day.



If you do end up getting one of the pieces above or already have experiences you'd like to share, make a note to contact us and tell us about it. That would make you a contributor and qualify you for our annual 1K Amazon gift card giveaway.



Don't be a stranger,



The Sleep Studies Team



Bookcase headboard – Top 10 Picks in Twin, Full, Queen & King size See more on: thesleepstudies







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/bookcase-headboard/

Glass beads and plastic pellets for weighted blankets

[et_pb_section fb_built="1" fullwidth="on" _builder_version="3.0.47"][et_pb_fullwidth_post_title date="off" comments="off" featured_image="off" _builder_version="3.0.106" title_text_color="#333333" background_color="#ffffff" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat"][/et_pb_fullwidth_post_title][/et_pb_section][et_pb_section fb_built="1" specialty="on" _builder_version="3.0.47" custom_padding="8px|0px|0px|0px"][et_pb_column type="3_4" specialty_columns="3" _builder_version="3.0.47" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0||0|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet" _builder_version="3.0.106" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text _builder_version="3.0.106" background_color="#FFF77D" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat" custom_padding="40px|40px|40px|40px"]



We’ve received a few dozen questions about choosing and buying glass beads and plastic pellets in the last few months.



So, we decided to put together a guide that would give you all the information necessary chose right - from the type and size that would work well for this DIY project to the more specific questions like, “Where to buy glass beads?”



First things first



For those of you who like to get straight to the point, we’ll to just do just that - offer specific recommendations with links to the original products.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="29.6875px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="20px|||" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone" _builder_version="3.0.106"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text _builder_version="3.0.106" background_color="#ee3233" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat" custom_padding="||10px|50px" custom_padding_tablet="|||65px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



Where to buy glass beads for weighted blankets



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="20px||20px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet" _builder_version="3.0.106" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text _builder_version="3.0.106" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat" custom_padding="|40px||40px"]



If you’re looking for glass beads choice and you’re not the company that can import in bulk from China, the choice is very limited.



In fact, we only found one product that’s large enough in the amateur so that the beads don’t pass through the fabric or shift between the chambers.



You can see the details below:



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0||30px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" module_id="glass-bead-table" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet" _builder_version="3.0.106" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text _builder_version="3.0.106" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat"]



[table id=69 /]



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="29.6875px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="20px|||" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone" _builder_version="3.0.106"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text _builder_version="3.0.106" background_color="#ee3233" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat" custom_padding="||10px|50px" custom_padding_tablet="|||65px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



Plastic pellets for weighted blankets



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="20px||20px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet" _builder_version="3.0.106" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text _builder_version="3.0.106" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat" custom_padding="0px|40px||40px"]



If you chose to fill your blankets with plastic pellets, things are much simpler and have much more leeway in choosing.



We’ll get straight to the point by listing our choices that are just the right size, weight, chemical structure and price for the project.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0||30px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" module_id="plastic-pellets-table" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet" _builder_version="3.0.106" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text _builder_version="3.0.106" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat"]



[table id=69 /]



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="24px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="20px|||" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone" _builder_version="3.0.106"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text _builder_version="3.0.106" background_color="#707070" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat" custom_padding="||10px|50px" custom_padding_tablet="|||65px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



Reference info



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px||21px|" padding_top_2="20px" admin_label="Row" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone" _builder_version="3.0.106" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat"][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text _builder_version="3.0.106" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat" custom_padding="30px|20px||20px"]



We’ll do our best to simplify things here avoid technical lingo.



As we stressed in the title of section were providing this information for reference purposes and all the products listed above meet the guidelines.



Weight properties



We could get into more depth here, but most of the weight aspects are not that important for our purposes.



Two weight properties that had an impact on our choices are density of the material itself and bulk density.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" padding_top="20px" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/04/measuring-the-weight-of-poly-pellets-per-cup.jpg" alt="kava kava extract bottle" title_text="kava kava extract bottle" align="center" _builder_version="3.0.106" custom_margin="30px|||" custom_margin_tablet="0px|||" custom_margin_phone="0px|||" custom_margin_last_edited="on|phone" animation="off"][/et_pb_image][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="15px||6px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet" _builder_version="3.0.47" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text _builder_version="3.0.106" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat" custom_padding="|20px||20px"]



Here’s the difference between the two density properties:



Actual density refers to the material itself. To put it simply, if you took to pellets from different manufacturers and measured them, they’ll have different weight.



Bulk density is slightly different because it refers to how much a cup (or another measure for volume) will weigh. The unit measurements are the same (lbs per cube-inch, oz per cup, etc.)



It will, however, always be lower than the actual density. It's only natural because "bulk" includes the space between the tiny spheres.



If the pellets are of the same size, shape and plastic density, they’ll also have the same bulk density.



If they are of the same size and shape but the material density is higher, bulk will be higher too - 1 cup will weight more.



On the other hand, the finer the beads and pellets, the less space between them and, again, higher bulk.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px||0px|" padding_top_1="30px" padding_bottom_1="20px" padding_left_1="10px" padding_top_2="30px" padding_right_2="10px" padding_bottom_2="20px" _builder_version="3.0.106" custom_margin="|||"][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" padding_bottom="20px" padding_left="10px" padding_top="30px" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_button button_url="#glass-bead-table" button_text="Click here to skip back to our glass bead reccomendation" button_alignment="center" _builder_version="3.0.106" custom_button="on" button_text_size="25px" button_text_color="#0044cc" button_bg_color="#87ceeb" button_font="||||on||||" button_icon="%%33%%" button_icon_color="#0060ba" button_on_hover="off" button_text_color_hover="#0044cc" button_bg_color_hover="rgba(124,226,244,0.74)" button_border_color_hover="#0044cc"][/et_pb_button][/et_pb_column_inner][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" padding_bottom="20px" padding_right="10px" padding_top="30px" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_button button_url="#glass-bead-table" button_text="Click here to skip back to the plastic pellets reccomendations" button_alignment="center" _builder_version="3.0.106" custom_button="on" button_text_size="25px" button_text_color="#0044cc" button_bg_color="#98fb98" button_font="||||on||||" button_icon="%%33%%" button_icon_color="#0060ba" button_on_hover="off" button_text_color_hover="#0044cc" button_bg_color_hover="rgba(56,183,78,0.44)" button_border_color_hover="#0044cc"][/et_pb_button][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0|0px||0px" _builder_version="3.0.47" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_divider color="#0066cc" show_divider="on" divider_weight="5px" height="20" disabled_on="on|on|off" _builder_version="3.0.106"][/et_pb_divider][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="24px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="20px|||" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone" _builder_version="3.0.106"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text _builder_version="3.0.106" background_color="#707070" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat" custom_padding="||10px|50px" custom_padding_tablet="|||65px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



Plastic pellets for blankets - bulk density rule of thumb



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px||2px|" padding_top_2="20px" admin_label="Row" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone" _builder_version="3.0.106" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat"][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text _builder_version="3.0.106" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat" custom_padding="30px|20px||20px" custom_padding_tablet="20px|||" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



The rule of thumb when choosing poly pellets is 4-7 oz per cup.



Practically, this means that the higher bulk density you go with, the lower the loft (thinner blanket).



Let us explain this on an example of the top two products we listed above.



The first one (ReachTherapy) is 6 ounces per cup and second one (Victory) is 5.



This doesn’t change anything in terms of weight. It’s like that famous question, “Which is heavier, 1 pound of iron or 1 pound of cotton?”



Of course they weight the same.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" padding_top="20px" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/04/pellets-close-up.jpg" alt="kava kava extract bottle" title_text="kava kava extract bottle" align="center" _builder_version="3.0.106" custom_margin="15px|||" custom_margin_tablet="0px|||" custom_margin_phone="0px|||" custom_margin_last_edited="on|phone" animation="off"][/et_pb_image][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="20px||8px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet" _builder_version="3.0.47" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text _builder_version="3.0.106" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat" custom_padding="|20px||20px" custom_padding_tablet="0px|||" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



But, if you make two blankets of, say, 15 lbs - the one filled with 5 oz-per-cup plastic will be loftier and slightly thicker. The higher the difference in density, the more difference you’ll see in loft and thickness.



When you should (or should not) think about this



If you go with any of the plastic filling we listed in the table above, it’s fair to say that you can forget about bulk density - the differences are minuscule and all of them are just right for weighted products.



When to consider it



The density analysis is more important if you’re still deciding whether to go with beads or pellets.



The former is much finer (smaller pieces, higher bulk density) and the end result will be different - you’ll need less volume to fill the blanket and it will be thinner (compared weight to weight).



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px||0px|" padding_top_1="30px" padding_bottom_1="20px" padding_left_1="10px" padding_top_2="30px" padding_right_2="10px" padding_bottom_2="20px" _builder_version="3.0.106" custom_margin="|||"][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" padding_bottom="20px" padding_left="10px" padding_top="30px" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_button button_url="#glass-bead-table" button_text="Click here to skip back to our glass bead reccomendation" button_alignment="center" _builder_version="3.0.106" custom_button="on" button_text_size="25px" button_text_color="#0044cc" button_bg_color="#87ceeb" button_font="||||on||||" button_icon="%%33%%" button_icon_color="#0060ba" button_on_hover="off" button_text_color_hover="#0044cc" button_bg_color_hover="rgba(124,226,244,0.74)" button_border_color_hover="#0044cc"][/et_pb_button][/et_pb_column_inner][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" padding_bottom="20px" padding_right="10px" padding_top="30px" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_button button_url="#plastic-pellets-table" button_text="Click here to skip back to the plastic pellets reccomendations" button_alignment="center" _builder_version="3.0.106" custom_button="on" button_text_size="25px" button_text_color="#0044cc" button_bg_color="#98fb98" button_font="||||on||||" button_icon="%%33%%" button_icon_color="#0060ba" button_on_hover="off" button_text_color_hover="#0044cc" button_bg_color_hover="rgba(56,183,78,0.44)" button_border_color_hover="#0044cc"][/et_pb_button][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0|0px||0px" _builder_version="3.0.47" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_divider color="#0066cc" show_divider="on" divider_weight="5px" height="20" disabled_on="on|on|off" _builder_version="3.0.106"][/et_pb_divider][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="24px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="20px|||" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone" _builder_version="3.0.106"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text _builder_version="3.0.106" background_color="#707070" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat" custom_padding="||10px|50px" custom_padding_tablet="|||65px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



How to choose between the two



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="28px|0px|0|0px" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone" _builder_version="3.0.47" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/04/plastic-pellets-vs-glass-beads-side-by-side-view.jpg" alt="side height measuring of aerobed opticomfort" title_text="side height measuring of aerobed opticomfort" align="center" _builder_version="3.0.106" animation="off"][/et_pb_image][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0||8px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet" _builder_version="3.0.47" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text _builder_version="3.0.106" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat"]



Safety



As soon as someone mentions plastic, the first thing that comes to mind is safety from any potentially harmful chemicals.



All the products we listed are completely safe. They are made of virgin plastic (meaning that it’s not recycled) and free of any toxins like BPAs, traces of fire retardants or phthalates.



So, if you go with any of them, this is a non-issue.



Texture and feel



Pellets have the texture and feel of miniature pebbles. They are, however, too small for most people to feel the pebbled-shapes when sleeping.



On the other hand, the beads are so fine that they practically feel like sand and look like sugar (if it was spherical).



Bottom line



For most people, the slight “bumpiness” of pellets will be a non-issue, especially if you plan to use your blanket with a cover.



If you’re particularly sensitive, beads are a great alternative. One caveat here is that beads call work well with dense materials like satin and close stitching.



In other words, if you’re using them to make a blanket you’ll need to make sure that the stitches are crafted with precision (especially at the edges). Otherwise, you might see some movement and shifting between the chambers.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px||0px|" padding_top_1="30px" padding_bottom_1="20px" padding_left_1="10px" padding_top_2="30px" padding_right_2="10px" padding_bottom_2="20px" _builder_version="3.0.106" custom_margin="|||"][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" padding_bottom="20px" padding_left="10px" padding_top="30px" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_button button_url="#glass-bead-table" button_text="Click here to skip back to our glass bead reccomendation" button_alignment="center" _builder_version="3.0.106" custom_button="on" button_text_size="25px" button_text_color="#0044cc" button_bg_color="#87ceeb" button_font="||||on||||" button_icon="%%33%%" button_icon_color="#0060ba" button_on_hover="off" button_text_color_hover="#0044cc" button_bg_color_hover="rgba(124,226,244,0.74)" button_border_color_hover="#0044cc"][/et_pb_button][/et_pb_column_inner][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" padding_bottom="20px" padding_right="10px" padding_top="30px" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_button button_url="#plastic-pellets-table" button_text="Click here to skip back to the plastic pellets reccomendations" button_alignment="center" _builder_version="3.0.106" custom_button="on" button_text_size="25px" button_text_color="#0044cc" button_bg_color="#98fb98" button_font="||||on||||" button_icon="%%33%%" button_icon_color="#0060ba" button_on_hover="off" button_text_color_hover="#0044cc" button_bg_color_hover="rgba(56,183,78,0.44)" button_border_color_hover="#0044cc"][/et_pb_button][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0|0px||0px" _builder_version="3.0.47" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_divider color="#0066cc" show_divider="on" divider_weight="5px" height="20" disabled_on="on|on|off" _builder_version="3.0.106"][/et_pb_divider][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="24px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="20px|||" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone" _builder_version="3.0.106"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text _builder_version="3.0.106" background_color="#707070" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat" custom_padding="||10px|50px" custom_padding_tablet="|||65px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



Polymers used for the pellets



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0||8px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet" _builder_version="3.0.47" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text _builder_version="3.0.106" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat" custom_padding="30px|20px||20px" custom_padding_tablet="20px|||" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



There are two types polymers used to make pellets – thermoplastic and thermosetting. The classification is based on the forming of the bonds and flow properties.



A vast majority of products used for DIY projects (like blankets) belong to the group of thermoplastic. This is types plastic that will melt.



Thermosetting polymers form a much stronger bond and will not melt or “flow” when heated.



Thermoplastic vs. thermosetting plastic pellets for blankets



There’s not much to think about here and all the products in the table at the beginning of the guide thermoplastic.



The reason behind using them is simple – the price vs. the job they’re intended for.



The strong bonds in thermosetting plastics are formed through expensive manufacturing processes like electron beams, UV or chemical agents.



Using this type pellets for blanket filling would be like using bulletproof glass for your flower garden. You can do it, but it’s going to cost much more and there is no common sense reason to do it.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="30px|0px|0|0px" custom_padding_tablet="20px|||" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" module_id="choosing" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone" _builder_version="3.0.106"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text _builder_version="3.0.106" background_color="#ee3233" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat" custom_padding="||10px|50px" custom_padding_tablet="|||65px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



Ask, share and apply for our giveaway



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0||0|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet" _builder_version="3.0.47" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text _builder_version="3.0.106" background_color="#d6d6d6" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat" custom_margin="|||" custom_padding="30px|40px|30px|40px"]



If you do end up making a blanket, it would be great to share your experience. This should make you a contributor to our site and you’d qualify for our $1,000 yearly giveaway of sleep products.



All you need to do to apply is bookmark this page and contact us after you’ve made the blanket to share your thoughts.



Finally, if you have any questions or feel like we failed to mention something, use the comment section below to ask us anything.



The Sleep Studies team



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px||0px|" padding_top_1="30px" padding_bottom_1="20px" padding_left_1="10px" padding_top_2="30px" padding_right_2="10px" padding_bottom_2="20px" _builder_version="3.0.106" custom_margin="|||"][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" padding_bottom="20px" padding_left="10px" padding_top="30px" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_button button_url="#glass-bead-table" button_text="Click here to skip back to our glass bead reccomendation" button_alignment="center" _builder_version="3.0.106" custom_button="on" button_text_size="25px" button_text_color="#0044cc" button_bg_color="#87ceeb" button_font="||||on||||" button_icon="%%33%%" button_icon_color="#0060ba" button_on_hover="off" button_text_color_hover="#0044cc" button_bg_color_hover="rgba(124,226,244,0.74)" button_border_color_hover="#0044cc"][/et_pb_button][/et_pb_column_inner][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" padding_bottom="20px" padding_right="10px" padding_top="30px" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_button button_url="#plastic-pellets-table" button_text="Click here to skip back to the plastic pellets reccomendations" button_alignment="center" _builder_version="3.0.106" custom_button="on" button_text_size="25px" button_text_color="#0044cc" button_bg_color="#98fb98" button_font="||||on||||" button_icon="%%33%%" button_icon_color="#0060ba" button_on_hover="off" button_text_color_hover="#0044cc" button_bg_color_hover="rgba(56,183,78,0.44)" button_border_color_hover="#0044cc"][/et_pb_button][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0|0px||0px" _builder_version="3.0.47" background_size="initial" background_position="top_left" background_repeat="repeat"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" box_shadow_position="outer" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_divider color="#0066cc" show_divider="on" divider_weight="5px" height="20" disabled_on="on|on|off" _builder_version="3.0.106"][/et_pb_divider][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][/et_pb_column][et_pb_column type="1_4" _builder_version="3.0.47" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_sidebar orientation="right" area="et_pb_widget_area_11" _builder_version="3.0.106"][/et_pb_sidebar][/et_pb_column][/et_pb_section]



The blog post Glass beads and plastic pellets for weighted blankets was originally published on The Sleep Studies Reviews







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/glass-beads-plastic-pellets-for-weighted-blanket/

Couple Sleep Positions Meaning

Most of our communication is actually based on non-verbal gestures. Body language is something we are familiar with in everyday life, but it doesn’t stop when we fall asleep.



The position of our body while sleeping can tell a lot about person’s character and emotional state. In terms of love, the way we sleep with our partner can indicate the state of our relationship.



Subconsciously, we choose the position in which we are sleeping. Since we can’t control it, it can be a great way to shed a light on feelings that may not be spoken while we are awake.



Let’s take a look at some of the most common positions couples sleep in their meaning.









1. Tangled, honeymoon hug



We’re starting with the one that is very rare, because it’s not really comfortable to stay in this position all through the night. It usually happens when the emotions are running high (after sex) or at the beginning of relationship, when partners want to be physically close to each other as much as possible. If this is a regular sleeping position for couple, or if you spend all night in this tight knot, it can indicate a lack of independence in relationship.



2. The unraveling knot



It starts like honeymoon hug, but later partners untangle. This is actually a good thing, it shows that love and intimacy are definitely there, but independence is present as well. It usually happens (although not often) when couple has been together for a while



3. Spooning



We are all familiar with this one. Spooning indicates intimacy, trust and closeness in relationship. Although there is a lot of physical contact in this position and it’s very sensual, the erotic vibe of it is not as important as the feeling of comfort that it provides. Person who takes the role of “big spoon” feels protective of his partner and this way he/she is trying to create a safe zone for a loved one.



4. Loose spoon



This is a more popular variation of classic spooning. Couples who like to sleep in spoon position will choose this one after some time, simply because it’s more comfortable. On psychological level, this doesn’t mean something is going wrong between the two of you, it actually shows you trust each other and are comfortable to have some space between you, in bed and in life.



5. The Chase



It looks like spooning, but in this position one partner has turned back and moved away to the side of the bed, and the other one is playing the role of “chaser”. There are two ways to interpret this: this person needs more space in bed, or wants to be pursued by his partner.



6. Head on chest aka. the nuzzle



At the start of relationship or when the passions are rekindled, couples will sleep in this snuggling position. Partner who rests hand or head on the chest of other, shows healthy independence in relationship, but is still willing to be dependent on their partner. Usually this partner will place their leg on the body of the other, or they’ll intertwine their legs. Person who sleeps on back and hugs his partner is confident and offers protection. This position is open and is saying that partners are companions who trust each other.



7. The Shingles



When both partners sleep on their back, but one is placing their head on the other’s shoulder, this shows confidence and understanding in relationship.



8. The leg hug



This position can be interpreted in few ways. If just one partner is “hugging” it can mean that he/she needs attention from the other. If both of partners participate in this “hug” that’s a sign of balanced and comfortable relationship. In casual relationships, this often can be confusing, since some people don’t show their affection openly, so this can be either just a random contact or a “call” for closeness.



9. Back to back - touching



If you sleep back to back, but the butts are touching, don’t worry, you are good. This is very popular sleep position, especially among established couples. Each partner has its space, but there is a contact which speaks about closeness and sexual connection.



10. Back to back- no touching



If you and your partner usually hug when sleeping, this could be a red flag. With all that space between the two of you maybe it’s time for a conversation. On the other hand, maybe you cuddle in bed, but it’s just too warm to sleep skin on skin. Some couples don’t need much contact during the night, just a good rest, and there’s nothing wrong in their relationship.



Keep in mind that if you toss and turn a lot throughout the night, its natural if other person wants to keep more space between the two of you. This doesn’t indicate you have an underlying problem in relationship, instead it says you have bad sleeping manners.



11. Face to face - touching



If your heads are at the same level and touching, and your arms are tangled, this speaks about closeness, like-mindedness and general good atmosphere in relationship.



12. Face to face - not touching



This can be a sign of high emotional demands from both sides. Both partners are craving attention and intimacy, and both are doing nothing about it. You should listen to one another and talk about your feelings.



13. Sleeping on your stomach



When we sleep on our stomach we hide the front of our body, and that may be a sign of vulnerability, lack of sexual trust and anxiety. You should speak with your partner and if he is the one sleeping this way, use hugs to make them feel protected.



14. One partner dominates the bed



This is a classic case of power play. If one partner sleeps in a starfish position, and even pushes the other to the side of the mattress, it’s a cause for concern and honest conversation. This selfish position tells which partner is dominant in relationship. Also, take a look if your heads are at the same level. Partner whose head is closer to headboard is usually the one who feels like he is in control and has more confidence, while the partner whose head is positioned lower plays a submissive role and probably has a lack of confidence.



The following blog post Couple Sleep Positions Meaning is available on https://thesleepstudies.com







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/couple-sleep-positions-meaning/

Sleep Dread aka. Fear Of Going To or Dying in Sleep – We Asked Experts About It

Sleep dread is real and nothing to be shrugged of. Over the past few years, we interviewed a few dozen of of sleep therapists and one of the questions was always regarding sleep dread - its causes, whether it's a phobia or not, the forms it can take and finally, what you can do if you can relate to what you'll read you'll see below.



Having a good night’s sleep is vital for our overall health and daily functioning. During the 7, 8 or 9 hours, our brain process information gathered during the day and helps our body heal and re-energize.



Disturbance of this process night after night, leads to chronic discomfort, panic attacks, sleep disorders and it can develop into a sleep phobia known as "sleep dread."









What’s causing the fear of going to sleep?



Sleep dread can be caused by number of reasons, including come conditions like PTSD, depression, anxiety disorders or fear of sleep paralysis - https://thesleepstudies.com/sleep-paralysis/ (if you already experienced episodes).



Most commonly, however, it’s a side effect of insomnia.



However, in most cases the main trigger is one simple, everyday thing- fear, irrational and exaggerated fear, to be precise.



How our body reacts to this



When we are scared, our body’s natural reaction is to activate the “flight or fight” mode. This is normal and necessary human reaction, and when it’s reasonable we can benefit from it.



But our sleep is time when we need to go completely opposite from it. Having this mode on when you need to rest is counterproductive. And that’s an understatement. When your mind is telling that you need to be prepared to run from a threat, you can’t rest.



If you do manage to fall asleep at some point, the brain will stay highly alerted during whole time, making the quality of sleep low. Because of the hyper arousal of your nervous system, you will feel more aware of your surroundings, and will probably have nightmares. In this case it’s common to wake up few times during the night, which breaks sleep cycle, so don’t be surprise when you get up in the morning feeling like you worked the graveyard shift.



When mornings feel everything but good



After sleeping in this state you wake up feeling less rested and refreshed. The brain not only didn’t get the chance to store all the data from previous day, but was infused with new information throughout the night.



This leaves you feeling tired, forgetful, and with weakened state of awareness, prone to injuries and accidents during the day. It’s easier to break a glass or cut yourself feeling this way, not to mention more serious stuff.



Bad quality of sleep is often a main reason for the poor performance at job or school, and it also affects our emotional state.



In the long term, disturbance of sleep can play a significant role in causing the variety of health problems, from mood disorders to heart diseases and stroke.



What causes sleep dread



Think about the quality of your life. If you are often isolated and your social life is close to non-existing, this can make you more subjective to influence of bad news. We are social beings; we need to be in touch with each others and share our thoughts and experiences. When a lot of ordinary good things are happening to you on a daily basis, you feel happier and calmer.



If you watch TV and read newspapers, you are probably up to date with all sorts of bad and disturbing news out there. It’s hard to avoid them, to be honest. The world is definitely not a rosy place these days.



This is not something that can be tossed aside. Remember, our brain process information, and the source of information is everywhere. If you think that doesn’t have any effect on you, think again.



Beside that, try to remember all of the movies and TV shows with violent and aggressive scenes in them. Personally, I’ve lost count. And if you are highly sensitive person, or have a wild imagination that likes to visit dark places, even worse. It can take you further and the dread can turn into fear of dying in sleep.



So, even if you’re not suffering from anxiety, or any other mental disorder per se, if you are scared to fall asleep for no real reason, that’s a problem that needs to be taken care of.



The fear of sleeping alone



If you are scared of sleeping because you have bad dreams, that’s one thing, but in most cases, sleep dread gets triggered when sleeping alone.



It’s proven that women are battling this problem more often than man. They usually don’t have trouble sleeping when their family members or partner are in the house. My friend once told me that she feels safer sleeping when “man is in the house”, and I am talking here about the girl that trained martial arts for years.



This irrational fear comes from the idea that we might get attacked during the night, and staying awake will keep us safe. When there are no men to protect us, we must rely on ourselves. This feeling of vulnerability makes our primal fears alive.



We can talk about the century’s old roll of women being a “weaker sex” embedded in our minds, but it’s not just that. For this we can also thank a huge number of movies with highly aggressive scenes that include women getting attacked in the middle of the night in their beds. We are not accusing anyone, this is a simple fact.



How to threat sleep dread and stop it from happening again



Bear in mind that even if you get rid of your fear for a night, or week, the feeling itself casts a very long shadow that can affect you for months or even years, and can make sleep dread episodes reoccur at any time.



This problem needs to be approached directly and systematically. You really need to work on this, by yourself or with doctor’s help.



It takes time, but it’s worth it.



Let’s start simple, small steps



Minimize the flow of violent images and stories that comes to your mind. If you watch a lot of horror movies or crime shows, stop doing that, or at least don’t watch them right before you go to bed. You don’t need to have a sleep phobia to feel frightened to fall asleep after watching some of those, so think logically. Good idea is to move the TV from your bedroom, if you have one there. If you really can’t stop watching movies at night, switch to something relaxing and funny.



Restrain yourself from short-term solutions, like sleeping with your TV on, or lights on, or asking your friend to stay the night. It may help you once, but not in the long run. You can’t erase the fear this way, it will keep coming back.



If you don’t exercise, this is something you really need to consider doing. Not just because of obvious health benefits, but as they say “make your body tired and the brain will follow”. When we exercise, our bodies release serotonin and dopamine, hormones that are responsible for feeling of happiness. With tired body and happy mind it’s a lot easier to hit the bed.



Meditation, positive affirmations and mindfulness have a strong positive influence on our mind. If you think that’s a bit silly, let’s talk about how silly it is to deprive yourself from sleep due to irrational thoughts.



Fight the bad thoughts with positive ones. You already know that the sleep dread is caused by fears that are not justified, that negative state of mind didn’t come from nowhere. Change the way you talk to yourself, and you will change the way you see the world. Practicing yoga, keeping a journal in which you can write down things you are grateful for every day, or just saying positive phrases few times a day like “I am safe in my home”, can be really helpful.



You should also work on your bedtime routine. Your sleep time should be sacred, literally. In general, your bedroom should be dark, well aired and peaceful, so that vibe can be transferred to you. Make your bedroom as cozy as possible, and avoid using computer or telephone before going to bed. Take a bath, or read a nice, relaxing book, or play some of your favorite music. There is even music for sleeping; tracks with calming sounds that help you fall asleep. If you like to sleep with radio on, you should do it, but because you are enjoying it, not because you are terrified of sleeping in silent room.



A more serious approach to sleep dread



In cases of anxiety disorders that affect sleeping and cause insomnia, cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT) has proven to have great results. In sessions with the therapist the focus is on indentifying the fear and getting over it. Your doctor will lead you to confront the actual cause of the problem and together you will work on establishing a healthy sleeping routine. The key thing is to stick to the therapy even if it’s hard to handle in the beginning.



In some cases, medications like alpha-blockers are prescribed to keep the sympathetic nervous system under control.



We believe that consulting with your doctor is the way to go, and that with a right treatment you can overcome sleep dread. This is something it should be discussed with psychologist, especially if you are already battling some type of mental disorder. It can be solved and there is no need to panic.



If the situation is less serious, natural ways we talked about are proven to be effective (even doctors agree on this), and you should try at least one of them.



One step at a time...



We understand how troubling sleep dread can be, and that’s why we worked very carefully on this guide. We hope you will find it useful and follow the advices.



If you are experiencing the fear of sleep, or have a story related to it, please share it with us in the section below.



Don’t be scared to go to bed. Good night



The article Sleep Dread aka. Fear Of Going To or Dying in Sleep – We Asked Experts About It was originally published to www.thesleepstudies.com







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/sleep-dread-fear/

Sleep Innovations Shiloh Review

The review of the Sleep Innovations Shiloh 12-inch memory foam mattress has been “in the pipe” for over 8 months now.



We took our time because we wanted to make sure that the analysis is the most complete it can possibly be.



We consulted experts (both of memory foam and sleep therapists), we gathered a large pool of information from owner feedback and we directly contacted people already sleeping on the Shiloh - as many of them as we could.



It took about 4000 work hours, but we believe that the detailed analysis you’ll see below is a one-stop shop on all the information you’ll ever meet about the Shiloh.



On the other hand, we made an effort to present the results in simple and concise way. The bottom line is that it should only take a few minutes of your time to get a good feel on whether the Shiloh might be the right mattress for you.



[toc]









Sleep Innovations Shiloh Review - all quality ratings



[wp-review id="211161"]



It was clear from the get-go that the Sleep Innovations Shiloh is a top-tier mattress. We say that because for a product of this type (layered all-foam), there is one aspect that’s critically important and that’s the quality of the foam.



For an average buyer, a typical fact sheet can be confusing, misleading even. It’s easy to say that the foam is “high-quality.” But what does that mean to a person that’s not particularly savvy when it comes to the industry lingo?



Foam quality goes well beyond the density and firmness. That’s why the fact that we know the type of foam Sleep Innovation uses was an important factor.



Top to bottom US-made



Outsourcing is not a minus on its own but, based on what we’ve seen when it comes to memory foam, there is a pattern. The quality ratings of the foam with the same density and firmness start to vary with prolonged use.



We revisit and update the quality ratings at 1, 2 and 5-year marks. Based on what we’ve seen, the gap in ratings (shape retention and structural integrity) appears at these time milestones.



Statistically speaking, those ratings speak in favor of US-made foam. To be clear, we don’t want to make and blanket statements, and there are companies out there that import foam that stands its ground when compared to a US-made product.



To simplify - all we want to say here is that an average buyer can be more comfortable with spending money on US-made foam that passed all the rigorous testing and obtained the staple quality certificates.



That’s what the Shiloh is made of and, if you ask us, it’s a big plus.



What we expected to see



Having in mind that sleep innovations are making an effort in their advertising to stand out from the crowd by stressing that there is no one-size-fits-all mattress, we expected the Shiloh to be top-tier.



Why?



Because a company like this wouldn’t risk their reputation by putting a product on the market that’s sub-par compared to the manufacturers they’re trying to distinguish themselves from.



What do we mean by that?



The Shiloh is designed to be a good fit for most people. In a market where many companies simply make one mattress and advertise it as one-size-fits-all, Sleep Innovations is an exception.



They make a range of mattresses for different body frames. The Shiloh is their flagship product with the widest appeal - average to large person.



In other words - it’s designed to find the sweet spot between comfort and support.



Airflow and heat dissipation of the Sleep Innovations Shiloh 12-inch



The foam used to make the Shiloh is patented, with cell structure designed to improve airflow and heat dissipation.



We wouldn’t go as far as describing it as “cooling”, but the heat dissipation numbers we’ve seen do justify the claims the company makes. In that quality aspect, it belongs to the top 5% of mattresses we ever analyzed.



Firmness vs. support



If you prefer an extra soft feel, this mattress might not be right for you. In terms of firmness, we would describe it as medium.



That doesn’t mean much in its own



When you’re looking to buy a mattress, the proper analysis should include “firmness versus support” rather than each of these separately.



Based on the pool of numbers we have, we’d say that 8 out of 10 people will find this mattress to be “just right.”



Here’s why



Shiloh is not just a lump of foam. The layers work together to balance between firmness and support.



This means that the top layer (2.5 inches thick SureTemp foam) is there to allow your shoulders and hips to sink just enough for proper spinal alignment. The SureTemp foam is trademarked by Sleep Innovations and 3rd-party tested to do what the company claims in the advertising.



The base layer is denser and thicker (9.5 inches). It’s the base that’s “responsible” for the structural integrity, shape retention and support.



To be more precise



Putting it simply - for body frames ranging from medium to large, the Shiloh is at the sweet spot. The base is just firm enough so that your spine doesn’t arch downwards, while the top has enough “give” to prevent the spine arching upwards.



That especially goes for side and back sleepers.



Hot versus cold sleepers



In terms of heat dissipation, the only scenario where Shiloh might not feel right is if you’re an especially cold sleeper and the temperature of your bedroom is also low.



In all other scenarios, the mattress does a solid job of both dissipating heat and not trapping the cold. The user satisfaction numbers we’ve seen were slightly higher with people more concerned about heat retention.



Sagging and edge support



Before we get into this, let us this mention that we have separate statistical model when we rate this quality aspect in all-foam models (different formulas from those we use for innerspring and hybrids).



Why?



It’s because you can’t reasonably expect the same level of edge support from foam and mattresses that have a thick wire encircling the edges.



To put it simply - it only makes sense to compare apples to apples.



With that said, this mattress belongs in the top 10% in its category.



What this means for you



It means that the edge support is nothing to write home about, but we also don’t see it as a red flag. It’s solid enough to sit on the edges as you preparing for sleep, but you might find it too soft to read a book or watch TV show while seated on the very edge.



Motion isolation of the – only a secondary factor



This is where Shiloh truly shines. With the layered structure in mind, this doesn’t come as a surprise.



To be honest, the motion isolation properties contribute less towards our final ratings than other quality factors. We all remember those commercials with a bowling ball dropping on a mattress without spilling a glass of wine.



It is impressive when you see it, but how many times did you actually wake up because your sleep partner was moving too much. Our guess is – not many.



The bottom line here is that Shiloh has excellent motion isolation properties, but we wanted to be clear that we find other quality aspects more important.



Durability and longevity of the Sleep Innovations Shiloh 12-inch



There’s confusion with the terminology here and we want to address that first. You might see a Sleep Innovations Shiloh review on other sites lumping these two aspects together, which is not the way to go about it.



Here’s difference



Durability describes how much pressure and weight a mattress can take without compromising the structural integrity.



Longevity describes, as the word itself indicates, how long the mattress is expected to live.



As we mentioned, our ratings reflect 1, 2 and 5-year milestones.



Rating a mattress in these two categories is tricky because we don’t have enough clear-cut data and it comes down to the warranty terms.



Let’s try to be as precise as we can



Typically, this type of mattress from other brands is covered by a 10 year warranty (even the ones that cost much more).



We’re stressing that because Shiloh comes with a 20-year warranty. Sleep Innovations estimates the serviceability the last as long as 15 years (given that you sleep on it every night).



Off-gassing, smell and safety certification



This is an important one because it’s not only about the smell. It’s more about long-term safety.



This is where the fact that the foam is US-made following strict safety standards is a big plus for the Shiloh.



The crucial part here is that it carries the Centripur label, which means that it’s tested to be free of:





Traces of heavy metals (mercury, lead, etc.)


Polybrominated diphenyl ethers or PBDEs – these are flame retardant chemicals and while Shiloh is flame-retardant, none of these are used in manufacturing.


Phthalates


Ozone depleting chemicals


Volatile Organic Compounds (these are typically responsible for significant off-gassing)




Even the manufacturing process is environment-friendly. For the finished product that will arrive at your doorstep, this is not a big deal. But if you like the idea of sleeping on a mattress that was made with minimal footprint on the environment, this does deserve a mention.



Mandatory factory air out



With most foam products, there will be an initial smell that lingers around your bedroom. It can take anywhere from a few days to a few months to dissipate.



None of that here



This is one of the few mattresses we’ve seen with a mandatory factory airing out.



For you, this means that there is no initial smell and no need to wait or air out the mattress on your own. That part is taken care of in the factory and the product is shipped with zero smell.



No need for add-ons



We see this one way to often - you get the mattress and your enthusiasm about it is quickly curbed because you feel you need an extra topper or pad for it (most often because it feels too hot).



Here, the top layer is designed to eliminate the need for a topper. In fact, the company advises against using any add-ons because they can interfere with the breathability.



Maintenance



Since the structure is not symmetrical, the mattress should not be flipped.



Many of us are still trapped and the perception that flipping a mattress will prolong the lifespan. With modern mattress technologies and materials, it’s not so simple.



Here’s why



With mattresses that shouldn’t be flipped, the manufacturer has to be extra careful, especially when they offer a 20-year warranty.



This means that they have to make sure that the structure can take the prolonged use and maintain shape. Otherwise, they would be faced with people claiming their warranties too often, which would affect their bottom line.



The important part here is that the numbers we’ve seen when it comes to foam breaking or develop indentations with prolonged every-night use are low.



Rotation



The mattress is symmetrical (top to bottom) which means that you can rotate it but, based on what we’ve seen, the number of people who feel the need to do it is very low with the Shiloh.



This ties into the analysis above and means that the number of people who saw structural issues is also low.



To put it simply - there are no indentations or the uneven surfaces forming over time that would call for the mattress to be rotated.



What does the warranty cover?



When you see a long warranty like this, you should be careful and make sure that you read the fine print. In some cases, a company can “dilute” the warranty terms and you might end up with additional cost when making the claim.



We looked closely and saw no red lights here, the company does what it promises - covering the full cost related to any warranty claim (replacing or repairing the bed).



These terms cover any issues with the fabric, stitching and, most importantly, potential structural defects.



Bounce-back - secondary



What we mean by “bounce-back” is the time it takes for the surface to get back to its original shape when you get up.



There are two ways to look at this:



The first one is absolute (comparing it to every mattress out there) and the second one is comparing it to mattresses in its price range.



If you do the former, it’s fair to say that there are products out there with higher bounce-back ratings. They do, however, cost much more.



If you do the latter, this puts the Shiloh in the top five products in its price range.



Similar to the motion isolation, we don’t see the bounce back is a crucial factor simply because nobody ever said, “I got up to go to the bathroom and when I got back my mattress wasn’t completely flat.”



That’s why our statistical model includes the bounce-back only as a secondary factor.



The “history”



The mattress hit the market back in 2010 (May 15, to be more precise) and was initially known as the Sleep Innovations SureTemp. So if you see it under that name, don’t get confused, it’s the same mattress.



The name SureTemp was a way for Sleep Innovations to stress the trademarked foam used for the top layer.



Cover quality



Wear and tear at the seams - testing the stitches



The number of garment issues reported by the owners we talked to was lower than those we’ve seen in 93% of other mattresses.



To be subjective for a moment, we prefer the quilted cover over the smooth one. It feels more rugged and durable and looks more luxurious. But when it comes to the numbers, we’ve seen no substantial difference in abrasion %s or stitching.



We rate the quilted cover at 92/100 and the smooth one at 90/100. These numbers are based more on our experience than the actual testing (the data pool we had here wasn’t big enough to do that). Apart from the aesthetic appeal, we find that the rugged covers are typically superior in terms of stain release.



Value for money



When all said and done, this is the category that probably does the best job of reflecting overall quality.



If you didn’t take the time to read the full analysis, let’s reiterate.



In most quality aspects, the Shiloh 12-inch performed superiorly compared to mattresses in its price range and, most of the time, it tested just as well as mattresses that cost anywhere from the 200 to 400% more.



Our rating of “value for money” is 95/100, which puts it in the top 6%.



We have five descriptive categories that we use to rank mattresses in terms of value and the Shiloh belongs to the top one “Worth every penny and then some.”



Updates to our Sleep Innovations Shiloh review



As per our regular schedule, we update the ratings quarterly, unless we see an indication of a significant quality change or learn about a change in the manufacturing practices.



We do it to make sure that our ratings always reflect the actual situation on the market. This means that you can be confident that the information you're seeing is fresh and relevant.



If you have questions or an experience you'd like to share (if you already own this mattress or if you get it after reading this), do get in touch, we have a $1000 yearly giveaway of sleep product for all interviewees who contribute to making our ratings more accurate.



To join it, all you have to do is contact us and we'll take it from there.



Stay smart,



The Sleep Studies team



Sleep Innovations Shiloh Review was first published to https://thesleepstudies.com







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/sleep-innovations-shiloh-review/

How to sleep with long hair – Best way to win the “tangled battle”

Each person with long hair knows this problem very well. You go to bed and every night you are “attacked” by your own hair. Or you have a peaceful night, but in the morning your hair looks flat and lifeless, your locks are squashed and you desperately want to call your hairdresser, but usually there is no time.



Here, we're going to present you with some solutions that might help you win this tangled battle.









How to sleep with long hair - our list of 7 tips



Her majesty- the bun



I have long hair and this is my personal favorite. It’s the easiest and quickest method to keep my hair tamed during the night, and it doesn’t change the shape much. It also looks really cute when I wake up (Brigitte Bardot style).



Of course, some people find it uncomfortable, and it can be, especially if you have a really long hair. Good solution for that can be putting the bun really high or maybe even leaning in front of your head. Also, bedtime hairstyles are probably the only fashion approved opportunity to use scrunchies and not elastic bands, since they are a lot less damaging to your hair.



Braid it all the way



If your hair is very long and it’s not layered this could work great for you. It takes more time to make, and some time to practice if you are not familiar with it, but it gets easier and faster after the first couple of times.



Do it on dry hair, leave some of it upbraided in the bottom and make it loose to avoid adding stress to your hair and split ends. This is also a great way to get a waved hairdo if you want to, and if you have locks it might get them tamed and more defined.



Some of my friends do have a problem sleeping with braids on, because it can make hair frizzy, but that depends of quality and type of your hair. It would be best if you can try braiding for one night and see if it works out for you. Also, think about using some anti-frizz hair product, especially if you have a problem with that in general.



Keep it low



If your hair is medium length, you could probably benefit the most from this quick solution. Just tie your hair into a low ponytail, it will keep it from your face and it will be less tangled in the morning.



It doesn’t really do much in comparison to the “magic of the braid” and your hair might loose its volume, especially in the roots, due to all of the hair weight just falling down flat. In all the scenarios above, it’s best to use scrunchies, or elastic bands with no metal parts on it (very important), because they can damage the hair.



Keep it high or bring some pineapple



A great option if you want volume especially at your roots. High ponytail keeps your locks from being squashed, your hair is out of your way and, as mentioned, volume won’t be something you should worry about.



The downside is that it can put pressure on your roots so they might ache.



The pineapple is a great alternative. You need a clip with a big grip to loosely grasp the hair at the top of your head. This way you’ll avoid the stress that binding inflicts on your hair and you’ll have a nice hairstyle the next day.



Stick with the loose hair



If you don’t have a problem tossing around much in your sleep, this could actually work out nice for you.



If you manage to sleep with your hair falling from the side of your bed, you will keep you locks intact. You won’t have to tie up anything, it’s very comfortable, but you hair is surely going to get tangled, at least a bit. This might help if you have oily scalp, because it let’s your hair breathe.



Cover it



This is maybe the best option for layered hair that refuses to stay in ponytails. It’s best if you use satin cap or a big scarf.



If you go for the cap, fold the edge of the cap all the way so you don’t have an imprint of the elastic band on your forehead. It might be a problem finding one that won’t slip off your head during the night.



If you go for the scarf, there are a lot of YouTube tutorials teaching you ways to tie it. It looks very fashionable actually, so you might want to bring that look outside of your bedroom. The nightcap, however, will make you look silly, for sure, but if it’s comfortable who cares, right?



Nights in white (or any) satin



Speaking of satin, no matter how long your hair is, satin or silk pillowcases are the best to sleep on. They are the least damaging materials for your hair and, let’s be honest, satin does give a touch of luxury to your bedroom, and a little luxury never hurt nobody.



Think about investing in one.



You can see our recommendations here - https://thesleepstudies.com/best-silk-pillowcases-sheets-comforter/



Back to you



Maybe you’ll choose to stick with one style that you are most comfortable with, or you’ll decide to change between the styles and that way you’ll end up with different hairdos each morning.



Personally, I’m all about diversity.



Whatever works the best for you is the way to go, but try some of these and have fun with it.



The article How to sleep with long hair – Best way to win the “tangled battle” is available on https://thesleepstudies.com/







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/how-to-sleep-with-long-hair/

Vellux blanket

If you’re in the market for a Vellux blanket, your search ends here.



The quality analysis you’re about to see is fruit of over 6, 000 work hours.



It took us about 7 months to put this guide together – we interviewed material technology engineers and analyzed over 3000 user experiences.



We also made an effort to include different types and sizes (from the Original Vellux to the premium plush designs in all sizes - Twin, Queen and King).



Vellux blankets – info of Top 5



Vellux Original blanket



This is the blanket that most people have in mind when they mention Vellux. It’s the staple product from the company and by far the most popular.



The most likely reason for that is the balance between price and quality.



The company advertises this blanket as “America’s most trusted.” While we’re not sure about the statistics they used to make the claim, it definitely seems to have a solid backing user satisfaction numbers we’ve seen in our analysis.



Current user satisfaction rating of the Vellux Plush blanket is 87%. This means that nine out of 10 people who get it found it to be worth the money.



The shape retention, durability and longevity put it in the top 5% of all blankets we reviewed (respectively rated at 92, 93 and 90 out of 100).



You can see what owners are saying about the Original Vellux below.



Vellux plush blanket



The runner-up in popularity among users is the Vellux Plush.



The difference between the plush and the Original comes down to the weight and loft. The plush is a bit heavier per square inch and extra cozy.



The density of the Plush is a bit higher - 330 GSM (grams per square meter). This makes it about 50% heavier than the Original.



Who will choose it?



The answer to that is in the analysis above – it will be the choice of people who prefer the safe and calming feel of a heavy weight blanket.



The difference in all other quality aspects, including price, is nothing to write home about. It costs a peg more, but we don’t see the slightest difference being any kind of an influence to a purchase decision.



The user satisfaction is practically the same as that of the Original.



Vellux Micro - the lightest



The only Vellux labeled as “lightweight” is the Micro.



It weighs 2 pounds (full/queen size), which is slightly lighter than the Original and about 60% lighter than the Plush.



Both sides are brushed, making it extra soft and resistant to pilling.



Who will choose it?



It will be the choice of people who prefer light blankets.



Let us also mention that the price point is the lowest of all the blankets we listed here.



Vellux Lux blanket – heaviest & currently rated highest by owners



The Plush Lux is the heaviest product on the list. The Queen size weighs 5.2 pounds.



The added weight comes from the extra loft filled with premium poly fibers.



The finish velvet -like finish is not compromised by the extra weight.



Who will choose it?



The Vellux Plush Lux is currently the highest-rated product on the list (by the users) - 96/100, in spite of the fact that the cost a bit more than the standard Plush or the Original.



We have been reviewing sleep products for more depth than a decade now and we only seen user satisfaction this high in a handful of them. That’s probably all you need to know about the Plush Lux.



Read more:



Vellux Sheared Mink



In terms of weight, this blanket is somewhere between the Plush and the Plush Lux.



The Queen weighs 4.35 pounds and the King size weighs 5.25 lbs.



To density (GSM) is also somewhere in-between – 378 grams per square meter.



Bottom line



The user satisfaction numbers of Sheared Mink are second only to the Plush Lux (95 vs. 96 %).



Size per size, the price point is slightly lower than the Lux.



Reference info



What is it made of?



Vellux is made of polyurethane.



In the manufacturing process, two layers of polyurethane are reinforced with webbing layer or scrim bonded between them. After that, an adhesive is added, which gives the base color of the blanket & nylon fibers, that are passed trough the electrostatic field, are added to the adhesive. The electrostatic field binds the fibers. This is the reason why these blankets are so soft.



Featuring a 1 inch two needle self hem way of sewing, these blankets do not come in bound or stitched alternatives.



The best thing about these blankets is their durability. They can be machined washed many times, and there will be no shrinking, pilling or any other problem, that we often have with blankets made from other fabrics.



Vellux Original blanket – frequently asked questions



There was a problem with chemical smell when you first open the blanket? What to do about it?



Machine washing and airing it out should remove any odor your blanket may have. They also become even softer after wash.



Will this blanket be enough to keep you warm in below zero temperatures?



This usually depends on the heating in your house. My wife is always cold, so she uses another cover on top of the blanket.



Is this blanket dust mite proof?



Yes. As we said, the these blankets are hypoallergenic, there for it’s perfect if you have allergies.



Does this blanket fit the king size bed?



The one in king size does.



Can I use this blanket through all seasons?



Yes, absolutely, you can use it all year long. It’s warm, but really light weighted, so using it in the spring won’t keep you over heated.



Is this blanket water resistant?



No. Fabric is not treated for water resistance.



Where is it made?



It’s imported (outsourced to China). This is not a negative per se. Over the past decade we’ve been monitoring the manufacturing practices of different companies, especially the outsourcing facilities and quality control. We know the facilities the company uses and we don’t have any negatives to report about the manufacturing.



Repair



You should try to stitch it together using a needle and a matching thread. If that doesn’t help, take it to the tailor’s.



Would this blanket work as a rug, if I include a rug pad underneath it?



We'd definitely say "no".



Is there a possibility for the blanket to be destroyed in the washing machine?



They are made to be machine washed. Although, there is a possibility that something might happen to it, but that has more to do with a washing machine. If you have a machine that tends to make some problems, try using a laundry bag. Just put a blanket in it and wash it that way.



Vellux blanket King size



Since we first published the guide, one of the most common questions we’ve been receiving is about the size available - especially the King.

The short answer is that all the products that we listed are available in three sizes: Twin, Full /Queen and King.



Vellux blanket on Amazon



Another common question is where to get to the listed products and be sure that you’re getting the real deal.



Most major online retailers (like Amazon) and store chains like Walmart, Bed, Bath and Beyond, Target, Kohl’s etc carry the whole Vellux line.



Storage


The important part about storage is avoiding the use of vacuum bags. We have seen user experiences reporting that, if left without air or in a hot space for prolonged periods of time can damage them (even de-laminate the whole thing).



So avoid airtight bags and hot-area storage.



Ask us anything



If you still have question or feel like there's information we haven't covered in the guide above, feel free to ask us anything that pops to mind. To do it, either use the comment section or email us directly.



You'll hear back from us within a day.



The Sleep Studies Team



Vellux blanket is available on TheSleepStudies







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/vellux-blanket/

Wool blanket

Wool blanket choices that you’ll see in this guide are a result of over 4,000 work hours.



We started the work about 18 months ago by consulting three material technology engineers and combined their expertise on wool quality with statistical analysis of user satisfaction with the products. We looked at over 110 blankets and rated them in five quality categories.



We made an effort to include different types of products, so no matter what kind of blanket you’re looking for, we’re confident that you find it among our top picks.









Best wool blanket – top 16 by type, intended use, design and size



Premium 100% wool blanket for home use - our top pick



If you're looking for a classic design for your bed, the search begins and ends with Poyet Motte.



It is company with tradition dating back to 1839 and it’s the leading European manufacturer of premium blankets, including wool. If you don’t know much about interpreting the label, it’s easy for company to engage in imprecise advertising (at best) and misleading at worst.



Typically, the more precise the fact sheet is, the higher the quality.



There are 4 key aspects to look for here:





how fine the wool fibers are


what’s the density (GSM - grams per square meter)


whether the wool is virgin or recycled


tightness of the weave - you can judge it by comparing the GSM and the thickness of the fibers




Poyet Motte is very precise about all 4 quality aspects:





Fine fibers – 33 micron


Weight and density – 500 GSM


Virgin wool




All the reputable companies will typically list the latter two, but it’s rare to see a precise listing of how fine the wool fibers are. In that aspect, Poyet Motte is an exception the most positive sense of the word.



The one downside that we can think of here is the scarcity of Poyet Motte – we’ve seen them go out of stock a few times while compiling this guide.



It goes without saying that this kind of work quality is more expensive than competing products but, in our opinion, if you end up being a proud owner of a Poyet Motte, it won’t take long to forget the few extra dollars invested.



You can see whether your preferred color and size is currently available and read what owners are saying about Poyet Motte by following the links below.



Merino wool blanket - Woolly Mammoth Stargazer



Woolly Mammoth is a company specializing in wool-products and the Stargazer is one of the most popular items.



We rarely see user satisfaction this high and we’ve been reviewing and testing sleep-related products and blankets for over a decade now.



The Stargazer is a 80% Merino wool (virgin), meaning that the wool used is not recycled. This is an important point to make any to see a company not explicitly listing that the wool is a virgin, it probably means that it’s been recycled.



The fact that it’s not 100% Merino wool blanket is not a minus in this case, because the small amount of weft and acrylic added is there so that the blanket can better retain shape and be easier to clean.

The Stargazer belongs to the Farmhouse collection, which is a premium series of Woolly Mammoth products. Each of the blankets from the series is brushed which adds a soft, lofty finish.



Bottom line



As mentioned above, blankets with user satisfaction this high (currently 93%) are scarce, and when you do find one, the cost much more than the stargazer.



That’s why the blanket is rated at 95/100 in the value for money category and 94/100 overall.



It measures 66 x 90 “and it’s available in six colors / plaid designs.



Military Merino wool blanket - our choice - the Company Explorer



Before we get to the quality analysis, let’s define what we mean by “military” here.



Further down in the guide you’ll find blankets from the military surplus – this is not one of them. The Company Explorer is a premium product designed in military style and it’s meant to be used for and outdoor activities - from camping and hiking to bush craft. That’s why it is especially popular among camping and preparedness enthusiasts.



Similarly to the Stargazer, the idea behind the composition of this blanket is shape retention and durability. It’s 80% Virgin Merino wool with the remaining 20% being the combo of warp, weft and acrylic.

Because it’s intended for outdoor use, the texture has a milled finish with a hefty double stitching. This kind of structure doesn’t take away from the warmth, but makes it thinner and smaller to pack.



Who will choose the Company Explorer?



Among the outdoors and camping wool blankets, the Company Explorer stands alone with a user satisfaction rating of 92% and an overall rating of 91/100.



You can see what’s owners are saying about it by following the links below.



EKTOS 100 % military wool blanket for camping, emergency preparedness & survival (big)



The runner-up in the category of outdoor use is EKTOS.



The main difference between the Ektos and the Company Explorer we talked about above is that Ektos is 100% wool and the finish is a bit more rugged. It’s large, thick and heavy, but to with a soft finish (66 x 90 “, 5.5 pounds).



Finally, this heavy military wool blanket is washable (hand or machine).



Along with the Company Explorer, Ektos is one of the most popular blankets for outdoor use. You can see the experiences of the owners by clicking on one of the two links below.



Military wool blanket (surplus) – Arcturus



When we labeled the Company Explorer as “military”, we also explained that it doesn’t come from the surplus and promised to recommend one that does.



Our top pick here is the Arcturus. Being a surplus means that the price point of this military wool blanket is lower compared to similar products.



It goes without saying that surplus grade wool is second to none in terms of wool quality (550 GSM density), but what stands out about the Arcturus is the appearance and the soft finish.



This is what makes it a great choice for both home and camping use. It’s 88 inches long , 64 inches wide and weighs slightly over 4 pounds.



Wool throw blanket - the Highland tartar



Our top pick among wool throw blankets is the premium Highland Tartar (100% sheep wool).



The company making it (Prince of Scots) advertises the Highland Tartar as a blanket made to be a family heirloom. It’s made and imported from England. All the designs currently available are checkered (plaid), ranging from vibrant color combos of red, yellow and green to calming grays and browns.



If you’re looking for a picnic blanket or an accent throw for your sofa, your search probably ends here. We found no better quality to price ratio.



The runner-up in the wool throw blanket category



The second best wool blanket among throw designs comes from well known manufacturer – Pendleton.



The Pendleton Eco-wise wool throw is similar to the Highland tartar in many ways. It is 100% sheep wool, woven and shipped from the USA.



The plaid designs and fringes are a bit more adjusted compared to the Highland tartar, which means that it will work better with minimalist interiors.



Our overall rating of the Pendleton Eco-wise wool throw blanket are 90/100.



Alpaca wool blanket and throw recommendations – Putuco & AndeanSun



If you’re looking for genuine alpaca wool blanket, you should be especially careful because there are many counterfeits out there.



A company may advertise their blanket as “alpaca wool” but include other (cheaper) fabrics. That’s why you should read the fine print.



It’s also the reason why we had a hard time in this category and found very few products that we can recommend with a straight face. Among them, the AndeanSun stands out both in price to quality ratio and user satisfaction.



Our top pick among full-size alpaca wool blankets (Twin, Queen and King) is that the genuine Peru-made Putuco, while our recommendation among alpaca throws is the AndeanSun.



You can see the designs below, followed by links to the original products.



Swiss Army and Italian – NOS surplus military wool blanket



The category of Italian wool gave us a bit of a hard time since the weren't many high-quality products available. There were blankets with the words “Italian” in the name, but as soon as you did a bit deeper you'd find that the products are not the real deal.



Out the blankets that turned out to be genuine Italian wool, our top pick is a product coming from a company counter-intuitively named “Swiss Link”. It might sound odd while it’s anything but. Swiss Link specializes in products of this type (army-related).



For us, it doesn't come as a surprise since we know the company from the time we researched ghillie pants and jackets. They only sell a handful of products and their staples are a few Swiss Army wool blankets and this Italian military surplus.



This blanket is imported, it’s super heavy and 100% wool. The current user satisfaction percentage is 88, and our overall rating is 89/100.



You shouldn’t take our word for it, but do your own rereading on it. You can do so by clicking on one of two links below and reading more about what the owners are saying (we’re also providing doing to their Swiss army style blanket).



Icelandic wool – ICEWEAR Astros blanket & LakeMono throw



In the category of Icelandic wool, two products stand out.



One of them is 100% Icelandic wool (manufactured and shipped from Iceland) - ICEWEAR Astros, and the other one is a stylish throw knit t from acrylic microfiber Iceland wool – the LakeMono. The latter comes in two styles (chenille and corrugated).



It’s only natural that the ICEWEAR Astros costs more since it’s a premium product. You can read more about the two below.



Wool saddle pad & blanket



The category of wool saddle blankets & pads gave us a bit of a hard time, because we weren’t sure how to present our top picks and cover the variety of styles available (from the western felt styles similar to the diamond wool saddle pads to traditional Navajo patterns).



Without relying too much on our guesswork, we decided to simply ask for the feedback of our readers and did a few email interviews with horse-riding and equine experts.



We believe that allowed us to present exactly the types of several blankets that the majority of our readers will be interested in. You can see the details in the table below.



Irish wool



This category was pretty straightforward because there was one product that obviously stood out from the get-go. It’s the John Hanly Irish wool blanket.



We say “obvious” because none of the other Irish wool products we looked at were even close in terms of the user satisfaction percentage - 97 %. The John Hanly plaid is Ireland-made and it’s as genuine as they come.



The five color combos are designed to fit any color scheme that you might have going in your space.



Chunky & heavy wool blanket



Our top pick among chunky designs is the Acarpo HandWoven.



The competition here was pretty stiff with a few products being praised by the owners. What gave Acarpo an edge is selection of colors and sizes and, most importantly, the value for money.



Big and heavy wool blankets and throws from chunky yarn, have been all the rage in the interior design arena for the past couple of years. When a frenzy like that happens, the market becomes confusing, primarily in terms of prices.



In those circumstances, you can easily find yourself paying for the label or a brand. That’s why we decided to ignore brands and look for the best balance between quality and price. We found it in the Acarpo.



Types of wool and quality aspects



Sheep Wool



As you know, there are many breeds of sheep and ways to classify wool fibers (fine, down, medium, long, double-coated).



In general, this is a traditional fiber, made from wool of any sheep, and on clothes labels marked simply as wool. It is more available and less expensive than other types. It goes without saying that merino wool blankets are by far the most popular.



The main characteristics are:





Great resilience. It can last longer than synthetic materials.


Ability to absorb dye without using chemicals.


Works as a great thermal insulator, perfect for the winter. It absorbs the moisture, but repels liquid.


Wide range of usage (anything from clothes to decorative fabrics).


Unless we are talking about huge flame, the wool naturally resists fire and self-extinguishes.


It can cause itchiness, depending on the thickness of the fibers, but that can be solved using chemicals to treat the wool or mixing it with other fibers.


It can shrink and pill, so it needs to be taken care of properly.




Type of sheep wool fibers:



Fine



Due to its softness, it’s used to make clothes that will be in a direct contact with our skin. If you are into knitting, this is the yarn you will probably use.



Fleece is very refined, elastic and consistent, and has a great felting ability and memory. The downside is that is not as strong as other ones, so not much stress is needed to tear a fabric.



Down



Matte to appearance, this type of wool is very resilient and elastic. Used to make fine knitted or woven fabrics.



Medium



It stands on a halfway between finer and stronger types of wool. The memory and elasticity are average, which makes it perfect for producing a wide range of woolen things. It is used for everything, from scarves to tweeds.



Long



The fibers of this type of wool are long, draped, strong and often silky to touch. They are very easy to dye, although sheep breeds with this type of wool have exceptional range of natural colors.



Long wool is not as elastic as the previous types we mentioned, but it has a nice memory.



Primitive or Double-coated



The strongest type of fleece, used to make outerwear, rugs, carpets... Usually, these breed of sheep have this bulky, strong outer part of wool to protect themselves from the weather, and underneath a finer undercoat.

It’s often blended with other types of wool for better texture.



Lamb



This is the wool obtained from the first shearing of sheep, usually around the age of 7 months. The length of this virgin hair fleece is around 50mm.



This wool is one of the softest and finest, very resilient and silky to touch.

The price for it is higher than for the regular sheep wool, since you can only once shear a lamb’s baby hair.



Merino wool blanket



Originating from Spain, now mainly produced in Australia and New Zealand, this is the most popular type of sheep wool in the world.



Since the wool of Merino sheep contains lanolin (which is used in cosmetics industry), it needs to be washed and rinsed in cycles to get rid of it. At the end of that long process, end result is a half of the initial fleece, which makes this wool expensive.



Nevertheless, the 4.5 inches staples of wool are so fine (superfine Merino wool goes even down to 17 microns) and soft to touch, that this wool is used for making some of the most luxurious pieces of clothing and bedding, which always has their buyers.



It is an excellent thermo-regulator, so you can wear garments made from this wool when it’s hot or cold, even in the gym, due to its moisture-repellent properties. It is known to be fire-resistant and anti-static. Today, most of the 100 % merino wool blankets are imported (the same goes for alpaca).



Cashmere



This luxurious, super-fine material (around 18 microns in diameter) owes its high price to the painstaking process of obtaining the wool from cashmere goats. The cashmere used comes from the undercoat in the neck region of the goat and it has to be combed over regularly.



The wool itself has lightness and resilience and the fibers are very delicate and soft. It provides amazing insulation, so you can wear cashmere cardigans in the spring, and you won’t get overheated.



Mohair



Mohair is obtained from Angora goat (don’t confuse it with angora wool) and it’s stronger and smoother than sheep wool, but not as soft and delicate like cashmere, for example. It’s easy to wash, which is a huge plus, of course.



This wool has a specific sheen to it, and it’s considered to be a luxurious material. Although it absorbs dye really well, the natural shades can be extremely beautiful. It’s often blended with sheep or other types of wool to make light-weight but warm pieces of clothes.



As mentioned, it’s not the softest of the wool fabrics, but it is one of the warmest, so mixing it with other materials can balance the flaws.



It’s used in producing anything from scarves and hats to carpets and decorative things for homes.



Angora



The finest (10-15 microns) and softest of the wool fibers comes from the Angora rabbit, to be precise, his undercoat. The most popular types of Angora rabbits come from Europe, but they are domesticated and grown all over the world.



The production of angora is small and very demanding in terms of time and money. There are, also, ethical questions raised around it, since sometimes the rabbits have to be kept alone, in darkness, to protect their undercoat.



The rabbits have to be combed regularly, and the hair is obtained by plucking or shearing. Plucking takes more time and energy, but the end result is finer wool. Angora rabbits grow hair quickly, but due to their small size they can’t produce much wool (around 400 grams and below, a year)



The yarn itself is soft, fluffy and silky. The fibers are hollow, which makes the wool lighter and warmer, but with a low resilience.



To get more stability to the fabric, angora wool is usually blended with other materials (cashmere wool or nylon). The 100% angora garment would be too warm to wear, so blending it is a great option, and it also lowers the price of the angora wool products.



Alpaca wool blanket



This fabric comes from Alpaca, animal originating from South America, although it can be made from similar wool, like mohair. Fibers can range from 15 to 40 microns and that effect the levels of softness and itchiness.



The finer, silky fibers (like baby alpaca wool) are used to make clothes. Alpaca wool is often mixed with Merino, to get more draping quality, due to its stiffness.



Naturally, the Alpacas exist in very wide range of beautiful colors and shades, although the wool can be dyed. This wool is hypoallergenic, because it contains no lanolin, and is baby and kids friendly.



Updates to the guide on best wool blankets



It's our policy to regularly update all our guide that recommend products. To stay on top of things, we do it quarterly, unless we see a "red light" that can trigger an unscheduled update (typically a significant change in ratings of a specific product).



Finally, feel free to reach out with any questions you might have - you can do it by commenting below or dropping us an email. You can expect a response within a day.



Stay smart,



The Sleep Studies team



Wool blanket was first published to The Sleep Studies Research







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/wool-blanket/

Best Toddler Travel Bed – Top 5 Kids & Toddler Air Mattresses

Over the past few years (since we first published the guide on our top picks among kids and toddler air mattresses) we have seen very little change at the very top.



The sample of data that the ratings you’re about to see are based on did significantly grow, making the ratings more reliable, but we are yet to see significant shifts in the top 5 picks.



The ratings below are a result of over 2000 work hours (just counting our in-house work on analyzing the user reviews), so it’s fair to say that our top picks are a pretty accurate representation of the products out there. We hope you find the analysis helpful in making the right choice.









Best toddler travel beds – Top 5





Aerobed for kids


Shrunks Tuckaire


Hiccapop


Intex kids inflatable travel bed set


Coleman Kids EasyStay




Aerobed for kids



This update marks two years of the Aerobed for kids dominating this category.



With the user satisfaction rating of 91% and an overall rating of 92 out of 100, Aerobed for kids is currently in a comfortable lead with a gap of hefty 2 points in the overall ratings over the runner-up - Shrunks Tuckaire.



As you can see in the ratings below, it’s the quality (durability and longevity) of the material used that primarily stand out. The market of toddler air mattresses is not a huge one & most of the bigger companies have chosen not to dabble in it, which is probably what gave Aerobed (being the well-known and trusted company it is) an extra edge over the closest competitors.



Details:



Age range – 4+ years

Dimensions of the slip surface measured side-to-side – 50×25 inches

Height of the safety cushion – 4 inches

Type of pump – electric, included

Inflation time – under one minute



Who will choose Aerobed for kids?



This bed is by far the most popular among parents in spite of the fact that there are cheaper options out there. It only makes sense because, when it comes to any product that will be in direct contact with your kids, nothing trumps safety and 10 or 20 dollars don't make much of a difference for most parents.



The doesn’t mean that the other inflatables we have chosen for the top five are not safe (the safety standards are particularly strict when it comes to kids), but there is something comforting in knowing that a bed comes from a reputable company like Aerobed.



All-in-one package



It would be hard to find a person who likes shopping for extra things to make their purchase complete. In this case, we’re referring to the thick, fitted pad/sheets that come included with this Aerobed.



It means that you don’t have to worry about purchasing extra sheets, which is a huge plus because finding the right fit can be a headache.



It’s also important to stress that the included sheets are not a flimsy piece of cloth but made of thick materials with significant padding on the sleep surface. Also, they make for a practical add-on because they're washable, and the material of the mattress itself (unlike most others) does not stain and can be easily cleaned.



In our opinion, all of the above makes the Aerobed for kids the most complete and practical product in the category.



The Shrunks toddler travel bed



With a user satisfaction rating of 89% and an overall rating of 90 out of 100, the Shrunks Tuckaire toddler travel airbed with raised side rails has been a close runner-up to Aerobed for 4 updates now.



What stands out about it is the fact that comes from a company dedicated to products for kids (most of the other air beds on the list come from companies whose primary focus airbeds for adults).



As you see the ratings below, the ratings in the main quality categories are pretty close to the Aerobed.



Who will choose the Shrunks Tuckaire?



If you want more versatility, you might choose the Shrunks over the Aerobed. If you compare the two beds (size to size), the Shrunks packs down significantly smaller and lighter.



The smallest size of the Shrunks is the Junior toddler (ages 2+, 52 x 27 “, weight capacity up to 150 pounds) which packs down to a roll of approximately 16 x 7 inches and weighs just over 2.6 pounds.



On the other hand, if you go a size up the Shrunks is available in Twin Family size which inflates to a significantly bigger sleep surface than the Aerobed (78×43, measured side-to-side).



Bottom line – the Shrunks Tuckaire is the more versatile option and, for most people, the most practical choice when it comes to kids travel beds (opposed to indoor use).



Hiccapop Inflatable Toddler Travel Bed with Safety Bumpers - honorary mention and an exciting new arrival to the market



Hiccapop is a refreshing new addition to this guide – this is the second update that finds the Hiccapop in the top three choices.



It currently has the highest user satisfaction rating of all the toddler air mattresses on the list – 96%. Just to make things clear we'd like to disclose that are rating algorithms include what we call a “maturity coefficient." To avoid confusion, this has nothing to do with the bed being age-appropriate for toddlers - the “maturity coefficient” is just part of how we calculate the ratings.



In other words, it’s our way to make the ratings more reliable by adjusting them to the period of time the product has been on the market. The Hiccapop arrived to the market in the beginning of 2017 and has been gaining momentum ever since. This also means that each new update brings the Hiccapop closer to the very top because the high user satisfaction ratings have been consistent.



That’s the reason why we currently don’t have all the quality ratings for this bed - it will take about six extra months for the bed to reach full “maturity” and for us to report on all the quality ratings.



Frequently asked questions about our top picks in the toddler travel bed category



FAQs about the Aerobed for kids



Does it come in the other size?



No, the 50×25 size of the sleep surface is currently the only one available.



What’s the total size measured side-to-side (including the rails)?



We measured the dimensions of the further-most points of the Aerobed for kids and toddlers to be approximately that of a regular twin bed.



What’s the height of the side bumpers?



Side bumpers (or safety cushion as Aerobed calls them) measures 4 inches in height.



What’s the total height and length?



Measured from the floor to the top of the side bumpers, the Aerobed for kids is about 10 inches high. Measured from side-to-side, it is approximately 60 inches long.



What’s the weight capacity?



The listed weight capacity is 150 pounds.



How does the pump work? Can it be battery-operated?



The bed comes with a standard external Aerobed pump that needs to be plugged in to work (standard outlet). That’s why we stressed that some of the other kid airbeds are a more practical choice for travel.



Is there an option to use a different pump (length or manual)?



No, the pump is specific and the nozzles of other pumps typically don’t work with Aerobed. So if you need a replacement, you would have to get one either from their site, Amazon or an Aerobed store.



Is there any significant off-gassing?



This is one of the most common questions we have been receiving since we first published guide and it only makes sense because, as was said, safety comes first when choosing an airbed for kids and toddlers.



There is a slight PVC smell out-of-the-box, but it quickly dissipates. In practice, we would advise leaving the airbed outside for a few hours to air out.



Can I take it abroad?



As was said, the pump works with a standard US outlet (110 V). This means that, to use it abroad (with outlets of typically 220 V), you would need a power adapter.



Is the issue of cold air present?



This is another common question with toddler airbeds since the air circulating inside can result in cold rushes on the sleep surface. In this quality aspect, we found this toddler inflatable to be superior because of thicker PVC and, more importantly, the hefty padding on the included fitted sheets.



What are the dimensions one deflated?



Once deflated and rolled, we measured the roll to be about 15 inches long and 7 inches in circumference.



Can be used for camping?



If you have access to power, the answer is a definitive yes, especially because the thick PVC fares pretty well and is not prone to punctures.



How to patch it if it develops a leak?



Based on what we’ve seen, the incidence of air leaks is very low, but if it does happen, it holds a patch very well since the surface is not flocked. It comes with a patch kit included and precise instructions on how to do it.



How portable is it?



It comes with a carry case for travel which we found to perfectly fit the deflated bed and be durable in the long run. This was a bit of a surprise because this is primarily an indoor inflatable bed for kids.



Is the good fit for a Pack n’ Play?



Probably not, since it’s too large.



Does it make squeaking noises?



This is a reasonable question since the surface is not flocked. If used without the fitted sheets, you’ll definitely hear some squeaking, but we don’t see a reason to use it without its dedicated pad. In this setup, the noises become a non-issue.



Frequently asked questions about the Shrunks Tuckaire portable travel bed for kids



Is there a warranty?



The Shrunks Tuckaire is known for its unparalleled warranty terms – lifetime.



Noises



The Shrunks Tuckaire is probably the single least noisy product on this list because of the combination of flocked materials and how well the two separate parts (the foundation and sleep surface) fit together. The movement between the two is minimized, and it’s one of the reasons why the design of the Shrunks Tuckaire has received many awards over the years.



Safety



It’s third-party tested to be free of any chemicals like BPAs, phthalates or lead. We haven’t noticed any significant off-gassing and lasting smells. Much like the Aerobed we mentioned above, there is a slight initial smell, but it quickly goes away once unpacked.



Does it come with sheets included?



The two smaller sizes (Junior Toddler and Youth Sleepover) do come with a soft striped fitted sheet (gray and white) while the Twin family size does not.



The pumps and inflation time



The included pump is manual (leg) for the toddler size and typical inflation time is about one minute. If you go with the medium size, the included pump is called Maxaire (also manual) while the Twin size comes with an electric pump that inflates the bed in about half a minute.



How much do the different sizes weigh?



The weight ranges from 2.65 LBS (for the Junior toddler), through 7.94 LBS (the Youth Sleepover size) to 10.8 LBS (for the Twin family size).



Packing size when deflated



The biggest size of the Shrunks Tuckaire (Twin Family) packs down to approximately 16×16 inches (when flat) and 16×7 inches (when rolled).



The two smaller sizes back down to a roll of approximately 40×18 cm (16×7 inches).



The side rails of the Shrunks Tuckaire



Measured from the flat surface of the side foundation to the top of the rail curvature, the security rails are 3.5-4.5 inches high, depending on the size.



Shipping



We have received a few questions about the shipping. We can’t precisely pinpoint the confusion here since Shrunks explicitly lists their shipping policy to be within 2 business days.



What are the sheets made of?



The fitted sheets are 100% brushed cotton.



Frequently asked questions about the Hiccapop kids air mattress



Size of the sleeping surface



Measured from rail to rail, the Hiccapop is approximately the size of a crib mattress. The security bumpers are 11 inches high and 49 inches long.



Maximum capacity



The listed maximum capacity is 300 LBS.



Age range



As per the official listing of the product, the age range is 2+ years. There is no official upper limit.



Using it with a different outlet



Strictly speaking, the manufacturer explicitly lists in that the pump is meant to be used with standard 110V outlets, but it can be adapted to a different current and used abroad if you can find the right converter for the power of the pump.



Deflation



The pump is not a two-way meaning that it doesn’t suck the air out and you would need to deflate the bed manually by pulling the plug out. Based on our experience, about half of the air goes out on its own and you would have to press and roll the bed to fully deflate it.



Can it be used with a universal pump?



As long as you have a pump with nozzles that are a good fit for the Hiccapop valve, you should have no problem using a universal pump for this kids air mattress. This also means that if the nozzles of an inflating machine are a good fit, you can use them to deflate the bed by putting the machine in reverse mode.



Safety



It's completely free of harmful chemicals like lead, BPAs and Phthalates.



The construction



The sides (foundation) you can see in the images are separate from the middle part of the bed. We’re specifically mentioning this because it makes the cleaning easier.



Intex toddler air mattress – honorary mentions



We feel that it would be unfair to exclude Intex toddler air mattresses from this guide since Intex had at least one representative in the top five since we first compiled the guide on best toddler travel beds for camping and indoor use.



The two most prominent models that have been in and out of our top picks are the budget-friendly Intex Kidz anbd the more advanced Intex travel bed set with side rails.



The user satisfaction ratings of the two portable inflatable beds for kids are respectively 78 and 85%.



Kid and toddler camping bed (inflatable)



Since we received quite a few questions about whether the travel beds for toddlers listing this guide are suitable to be used as kid camping beds, it’s only logical that we addressed the questions.



When it comes to camping, your choice will depend on the circumstances with the most important one being whether you have access to power. If you do, you can easily use even the beds that come with an external electric pump and if you don’t, you’ll be better off with some of the listed models that use a manual or a leg pump.



Updates policy & new ratings



We typically update the ratings in guide on quarterly basis and do a complete overhaul once a year (one that includes new products that have hit the market).



To make sure that the information presented are reliable at all times, we screen the user satisfaction ratings once a month and if we do notice a significant fluctuation (especially lowered ratings) we do an unscheduled update to see if it's only a statistical aberration or a real issue. We call these "red light" updates because their purpose is to find any indication that something about the products has changed (like materials or manufacturing practices).



The bottom line is that you can rest assured that the information you see here are up-do-date with what's currently happening on the market.



Finally, if you have any questions, dilemmas or simply quality aspects you feel we haven't covered, do drop us a comment below or contact us directly. It usually takes us no more than 24 hours to respond to all correspondence.



Best Toddler Travel Bed – Top 5 Kids & Toddler Air Mattresses Find more on: https://thesleepstudies.com







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/best-toddler-travel-bed/

Best sleep and meditation apps for iOS and Android

We have been working on gathering enough data to make a solid list of best sleep and relaxation apps that would go beyond popularity and user reviews for the past six months.



The results you’re about to see take into account our own testing of the apps (our featured testers to be more precise). You’ll see our top 5 picks of sleep and relaxation apps that are available for both iOS and Android.



This top 10 list is updated quarterly basis to make sure we stay on top of things and keep our picks relevant to what’s currently out there. So without further ado, let’s look at our choices and what earned them a place on the list.



Calm



Will kick things off strong by presenting an app that’s been awarded Apple’s 2017 “app of the year” award – Calm.



Currently ranked at number five in the app store (health and fitness category), come is not just a sleep app. It stands out from the crowd by offering much more than soothing sounds to help you sleep, but a chance to learn meditation skills.



It’s not an app that you would turn on only is the day comes to a close, but can be used for breathing exercises throughout the day.









For meditation



In terms of meditation, and are probably better ups out there, but they are meant to be used by people who already have some experience in the field, while Calm is a solid choice for those starting out there meditation journey.



The app offers sessions of guided meditation that can last anywhere between 3 and 25 minutes.



Stories



It might sound childish but sleep stories for adults are scientifically proven to work, especially for those suffering from chronic insomnia. Calm includes over 60 of these.



Natural sounds



With over 30 so the natural sounds to help you drift off, Calm stands tall even when compared to dedicated sound apps.



Current ratings on iTunes: 4.8 out of 5

Current ratings on Google play store: 4.6 out of five

Pricing: subscriptions ranging from the $9.99 to $59.99

Size: 151.1 MB

Requirements for iOS: iOS 9.0 or later

Requirements for Android: 4.1 and up



Sleep as Android



With over 240,000 reviews on Google play store, sleep as android the most popular sleep and relaxation up we found.

It might not be as advanced as calm, but since it comes from the orb an untreated team the compatibility with android devices is unparalleled.



Special features:





tracking of sleep cycles


smart wake up


light bulb (Phillips Hue)


sleep statistics (deficit, snoring and time spent in deep sleep)


captcha wake up verification to prevent oversleeping


pre-screening for sleep apnea




Range of sounds





natural (sea, storm, gentle rain…)


binaural sounds




Current ratings in Google play store: 4.3 out of 5

Requirements: variable by device



Sleep Sounds by Relaxio



When we set the Calm app can be compared to the best sound dedicated apps, this relax you app (and a few others) is what we had in mind. It’s beautiful in its simplicity and is calming sounds are your primary reason for getting an app, Sleep Sounds will likely meet and exceed your expectations.



The list of natural sounds ranges from a variety of rain types (refreshing regular, drops on the windshield, forest and rainforest) to evening beach or autumn woods. On the other hand, those who prefer women sounds might find the “train” soothing. Used updates include instrumental music and notification control.



All the sounds are HD and app doesn’t require an Internet connection to work.



Current ratings on Google play store: 4.8 out of five

Requirements for Android: 4.0.3 and up



Relax Melodies



Relax melodies by Ipnos software is another sleep and relaxation app that owes its popularity (35 million downloads) to the quality and range of sounds available.



What stands out about this app in particular is the option to create a mix of sounds included and create one that works best for you. It allows you to choose the sounds you want included in your mix and control the volume of each.



You can then save your mixes to the sound library and choose one for different purposes (from relaxation and meditation to naps and sleep). Over the last year the app grew in popularity, primarily because of the melodies sharing feature. This means that you can create your mix of melodies and share it with the community.



Current ratings on iTunes: 4.8 out of 5

Current ratings on Google play store: 4.5 out of 5

Size for android: variable by device

Size for iOS: 116.9 MB



Top sleep tracking app – Sleep Better Sleep Tracker



If you’re looking for an app that will reliably track your sleep and pinpoint any problems or this balance between your sleep phases you’ll probably find this app to be as reliable as dedicated sleep trackers.



Not only does it allow you to track your progress in sleep quality on your phone, but you can also upload the data Apple Health to make long-term analysis easier.



The interface is intuitive and easy to use and the reliability comes from the fact that it utilizes movement tracking to reach conclusions about your sleep. It’s the same kind of technology used by sleep trackers.



For some people, the downside of movements-based sleep tracking can be the fact that your phone has to be placed on your mattress for the app to work.



The slick minimal design of the interface and included alarm clock deserves full five stars.



Current ratings on Google play store: 4.1 out of 5

Current ratings iTunes: 3.9 out of five

Size for iOS: 79.7 MB

Requirements for iOS: 9.0 and up

Requirements for Android: 4.1 and up



Updates to this guide



With new sleep and relaxation apps sheet in the marketplace practically every day, we are bending our rules on updates (for most sleep-related products we updates the reviews and top picks annually) and go with quarterly updates.



It goes without saying that choosing an app that will be helpful for your specific circumstances includes a range of factors. The good news here is that even the apps with a hefty price tag usually include a trial period that should give you a chance to determine which of these works for you.



Best sleep and meditation apps for iOS and Android Read more on: https://www.thesleepstudies.com/







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/best-sleep-meditation-apps/

Mattress industry stats – sales, growth and trend predictions for 2018-2024

We have been doing market research and tracking the trends in the mattress industry since we first established the website all those years ago. Things have been getting increasingly complicated over the past few years. The numbers for 2016 were surprising with ISPA reporting an all-time-high gross revenue and a growth of 3.4 %.



The most important factor causing this tectonic shift is the dynamic industry of “online mattresses.” It’s fair to say that before the disruption the trends in the industry were somewhat predictable with the big mattress companies dominating.



To kick of the analysis, we’ll start by taking a look at the freshest data available (sales stats for 2016 by manufacturer shale sales, channels of distribution and mattress type). Then, we’ll analyze some of the trends we’ve seen over the past year and use our statistical projection modeling to get the impression of what we might expect in the upcoming years. So let us get to it by taking a look at the sales share by company.



Last updated: February 2018



Sales share by channel of distribution









Sales share of manufacturer









Satisfaction % by mattress type









Economic implications



The last graph shown above is probably the most important indicator of where the industry is going, although it might not appear so at first glance.



Cause of the shift



Is the new business model of buying a mattress online that caused the increase in user satisfaction rate with memory foam mattresses. Most of these companies (like Casper, Leesa, Lull - https://thesleepstudies.com/lull-mattress-review/, etc.) are memory foam mattresses that can be packed and shipped efficiently.



We firmly believe that it’s the warranty terms (typically 100 nights to try the mattress out) that are causing the spike in user satisfaction percentages with these types of mattresses. The business model is simple – making the mattress so that it suits most of the population and then offering a return policy that most stores cannot match.



Note: the category of “air” includes both classic air mattresses ( https://thesleepstudies.com/best-air-mattress-reviews/) and high end products with an air chamber core (Sleep Number and their main competitor – Personal Comfort Beds have by far the highest market share in the latter category - https://thesleepstudies.com/sleep-number-competition/).



Spending trends of the average consumer



When we analyzed the market in 2015 we reached a conclusion that it plateaued. We were wrong. The substantial growth of 3.4 % in 2016 is an obvious indicator that the average consumer is spending more on a mattress (the trend is most notable in the US and southeastern Asia).



It’s not likely that the slight job market recovery has anything to do with it. The more probable cause is that an average user is encouraged to spend more by the new warranty terms that allow him to try the mattress out before committing to the purchase.



What we can expect in the short term



The trend of growth is likely to continue for at least 5 to 6 years as the new business model is yet to gain trust of the more conservative buyers. Based on he indicators that we’ve seen over the last few years we expect a steady growth of 2.5 – 3.5% per year in the 2018 – 2024 period.



The long term effects of the change



We mentioned that the new technologies and business models used in mattress manufacturing are already showing a significant impact on the mattress marketing in South Eastern Asia.



In the short term, this might not be a big deal but in terms of long-term growth it is probably one aspect of the mattress industry that should be followed with a keen eye by anyone looking to predict where the industry is going.



We’re saying that for two reasons:





With improvements in the shipping, it would not be a surprise for the mattress-in-a-box companies to turn their attention to the giant Asian market


We could also see the local mattress companies mastering the technology and materials used for the new business model




The two factors above could result in a big spike on the market in 5 to 6 years.



The bottom line



If you were to make a list of manufacturing industries being shaped by new technologies and business models, the mattress industry would likely be at the very top.



Speaking from the economic perspective and looking at the big picture, the impact of the changes that we describe above is yet to show its full impact on the market.



With new companies and improved technologies and materials arriving at the marketplace with each passing quarter, these are as exciting times as any.



That’s the main reason why we’re moving on from our regular scheduled updates of this report (annual) to quarterly updates on any significant news in the industry.



The blog post Mattress industry stats – sales, growth and trend predictions for 2018-2024 is republished from TheSleepStudies







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/mattress-industry-statistics/

Best Beach Blanket | Top 10 Compared | 2018 Update

The guide on the best beach blankets was long in the works (probably longer than we expected) because our rating methods we used for other blankets did not exactly "translate" to this category.



Besides tweaking our rating algorithm we got outside help from 4 material technology engineers (to make the initial choices of 22 beach blankets to be tested). Once we had that part narrowed down, we proceeded to the testing phase. The testing phase included testing the blankets ourselves and sending them out to our featured testers.



The bottom line is the results you'll see are aftermath of over 4,000 work hours of statistical analysis of over 7,000 user experiences. We did our best to make the information we present as reliable as possible and eliminate any guesswork that you. the reader, need to choose right.



The guide is updated on quarterly basis to keep the information fresh. You can see the last time this guide was updated just under the table of our top picks (green text). So, without much ado, let us get to the results of the last update.









Best beach blanket - Top 5



Top-rated beach blanket overall - Wildhorn Sand Away



If you're not fan of sand filling your bags and sticking to your blanket, your search probably ends here. No blanket (or even towel for that matter) we looked it as sand-proof as the colorful Wildhorn.



The material used to make the Wildhorn Sand Away is parachute-grade rip-stop fabric. Based on what we've seen, if you buried this blanket in a pile of sand you could pick it up using two fingers without a single grain sticking to it. The combo of the material and size is unique and the extra pockets for small items like sunscreen, phones and keys are a nice plus.



The one downside is that in only comes in one size (oversized, 9 x 7 ft.) and if the beach you're traveling to is crowded, you might have a hard time finding enough space to fully spread it. Folded in half, it's just right for a couple but fully spread, it can comfortably fit 3-4 people.





Comfort: 96 / 100


Packing & Travel: 98 / 100


Sand repellent: 98 / 100


Heat isolation: 95 / 100


Water absorbency / drying: 94 / 100


Washing / maintenance ease: 95 / 100


User satisfaction: 96 / 100


Value for money: 96 / 100




Bottom line



Wildhorn Sand Away is one of the largest blanket we looked at, but the surprising part is how light and small it packs (approximately 1.3 lbs in a cylinder pouch of about 5.5 in diameter and 8.5 in length).With all that said, we found it to be solid value for money and a smart buy. Overall rating 95 / 100.



FunN'Sun beach towel blanket



Most of the blankets we listed are made of modern materials that are all about repelling sand, drying quickly and, in some cases, being waterproof. The FunN'Sun is different and will be the choice of people looking to stand out but still prefer the cozy feel of a towel to the parachute nylon fiber. It's top-to-bottom premium microfiber.



We did see some great microfiber blankets (we'll talk about one more in a minute) but the colors are usually not much fun. There's a reason behind that - if not treated to be color-fast, microfiber tends to bleed color (especially when greens & red are combined with white). That's why you'll see it used mostly in one color pieces or combos of akin colors, like hues of blue and turquoise.



If you want to stand out and be the talk of your beach section, the FunN'Sun will do it. It comes in two sizes (towel - 64 x 76 and blanket size - 64 x 76) and 10 vivid color combos. What we especially liked about is how color-fast it is. This aspect is usually a problem, especially in lower price ranges, since the blanket tend to bleed color.





Comfort: 96 / 100


Packing & Travel: 97 / 100


Sand repellent: 96 / 100


Heat isolation: 94 / 100


Water absorbency / drying: 92 / 100


Color-fast: 96 / 100


Washing / maintenance ease: 98 / 100


User satisfaction: 97 / 100


Value for money: 95 / 100




Microfiber is a combo fabric (between polyester and polyamide) and, over the last decade, we have seen a surge of low quality fabrics on the market. We're basing this on other blanket types we've tested and reviewed over the years, but the criteria is the same.



The color-fast issue we mentioned above might not be much of an issue for one-season blankets of akin colors but if you want to get a blanket with whites included without breaking the bank. The blankets that don't bleed in the white-vivid combo are much more expensive but we've seen no significant difference in the quality compared to the FunN'Sun.



Last but not least, the FunN'Sun is one of the most popular choices among users since the range of colors appeals to beach-goes of all types and sizes, from surfers to families and couples. It has hundreds of review on Amazon - you can see them all by following one of the links below.



SportLite Extra Large



The SportLite Microfiber large beach blanket is the highest rated in the category of user satisfaction and packing size. The thin microfiber packs extremely small and, in that quality, it has no real competition - it's as seamless and as ease to carry and use as they come.



Microfiber is so popular that we have even seen some companies trying to imitate the look and feel with other fabrics (like plain polyester) and pass it as micro. In the case of a beach blanket, the first thing you'd notice with one of these is how poor the insulation from the heat of the sand or pebbles is and that it doesn't absorb water.



If the imitation of the product is well-finished you won't even be able to tell until you try to dry water from your body. If it just pushes the water around, you probably have a polyester fabric on your hand "posing" as microfiber.





Comfort: 96 / 100


Packing & Travel: 97 / 100


Sand proof: 96 / 100


Heat isolation: 94 / 100


Water absorbency / drying: 92 / 100


Color-fast: 95 / 100


Washing / maintenance ease: 98 / 100


User satisfaction: 97 / 100


Value for money: 95 / 100




Bottom line



If the blanket genuine microfiber, the quality is determined by the denier and % of material. We found the SportLite to be super absorbent and great at heat insulation from the sand.



The result came as no surprise since SportLite is known for their beach products (it's the brand that makes the official towels for the LA Lifeguard Association).



To be clear, there's nothing revolutionary about this SportLite, there are dozens of good microfiber blankets and beach throw out there. The main difference here is the quality of the microfiber and the "value for money.



We do know of similar products, but a vast majority of them costs much more than this SportLite. This brought their rating in the "Value for $" down and knocked them right out of the Top 5, making the SportLite the only bproduct among the top picks that's made of microfiber.



Kahuna Next Gen sand proof beach blanket



The Next gen by Kahuna is a similar product to the iShoyu and will appeal to people with similar taste and needs (the main advantage being the sand-proof material).



Again, the material & sand-repelling properties are similar, as you can see in the ratings below. You'll notice that we don't rate the products made of parachute nylon fiber in the category of "color-fast." That would make very little sense since the material simply does't bleed color and that's true even for product of significantly lower quality than the Kahuna.



The main (objective) PROs of the Kahuna are the drying (takes only minutes), the ability to repel sand. On the subjective side, we have to say that we prefer the triangular patterns and colors of the Kahuna, but that's just us.





Comfort: 94 / 100


Packing & Travel: 96 / 100


Sand proof: 97 / 100


Heat isolation: 93 / 100


Water absorbency / drying: 91 / 100


Washing / maintenance ease: 95 / 100


User satisfaction: 95 / 100


Value for money: 95 / 100




Kahuna defines their blankets as "giant" or "over-sized" but there is significant difference in the size (10x9" vs. 8x8"). If the size of the IShoyu seems like too much, you'll find the Kahuna to be just right for one or two people (without folding it).



You can see what owners are sharing about it by following the links below.



Round beach blanket by Dock & Bay



The only round beach blanket on the list comes from one of the most trusted companies in the industry "Dock & Bay." It currently has by far the highest number of reviews from all the listed products.



The material is microfiber and you can choose between 10 round cross and 6 round maze patterns. Another company that was bold enough to combine colors that can bleed with whites. We already talked about the additional treatment this entails before the products can hit the stores.



Sizes: Large, Extra Large & Round (the circle is 75 " in diameter).



What stands out about the Dock & Bay is the fact that this round beach blanket is the only on the list that has a 30-day return policy and full year of warranty. We've seen no better return and warranty policy. In fact, you rarely see one at all with products like this.



Kudos for that, Dock & Bay.



Turkish beach blanket by Cacala



Turkish beach blanket is a throw made of 100 % Turkish cotton. They're light, the tight weaving leaves little room for stretching which also means they don't dry as easily as the modern material listed here.



Typically, a person getting a Turkish beach towel will know exactly what they're looking for. Th feel of the fabric is hard to explain and the closest we can get is that it resembles a slightly more rugged cotton throw.



The right weave and the color-fast cotton allow for the most expressive range of colors. Our top pick here, the Cacala Turkish beach towel, is available in 24 colors and measures 59 x 79 inches.



Most of the categories we used to rate the products don't really apply to Pestemal throws (another word for a Turkish beach towel) so we'll only reporting on the user satisfaction rating here.





User satisfaction: 94 / 100




Giant GO sand-free waterproof beach blanket



GO is a different product compared to blankets we talked about thus far. While parachute fabric and microfiber are designed to be quick-drying, they have no backing or layers that would be waterproof.



The material of the GO is Oxford Polyester (Ripstop), the GO offers more insulation and the moisture of the surface underneath (whether it's sand, grass or ground) practically has no chance of "breaking through". On the other hand, the top finish is still quick-drying.



The blanket is kept in place with either sand-pockets (which will be enough for a trip to the beach) or small stainless steel pegs you can use to secure the blanket even better by attaching the corner loops.





Comfort: 95 / 100


Packing & Travel: 95 / 100


Sand repellent: 93 / 100


Heat isolation: 94 / 100


Waterproof: 100 / 100


Washing / maintenance ease: 91 / 100


User satisfaction: 95 / 100


Value for money: 94 / 100




Oxford ripstop polyester is a peg stronger than parachute nylon fiber and is likely to last longer. Since it's a different type of material, you'd see the rating of "water absorbent" change to "waterproof." The ratings we reached are below.



Beach throw blanket - Seashore woven by Manual Woodworker



This beach throw blanket is probably the most stylish product on the list and will be the choice of people who prefer the luxurious woven "feel" to that or microfiber or parachute fiber.



Strictly speaking, this throw is more about the looks and feel than being water or sand-friendly, because it's all-cotton.



It's top-to-bottom US-made and we measured the size to be approximately 40 x 50 ".



User satisfaction rating: 93 %



Bottom line



This throw is in a category of its own and most of the quality ratings don't apply, so we're only reporting on its owner satisfaction rate.



You can read what users are saying about by following one of the two links below.



Reference info on choosing the best beach blanket - types & materials



Types by material used



Parachute nylon


Probably the most popular type of sand free beach blankets today are the ones made from parachute nylon. The main reason behind the trend are the sand-repellant and quick-drying properties of the materials.



The material is at the "sweet spot" between comfort, weight, toughness and longevity.



It retains color very well and doesn't change, which leaves room for using vivid colors and patterns varying from cute (soft pinks that most women will like) to and expressive for the youngsters. The nature of parachute nylon also allows for small and light packing.



Polypropylene


The main PRO of blankets made of polypropylene are the longevity and toughness. The secondary benefit is the stylish look and feel similar to that of a woven beach throw blankets.



Polypropylene is waterproof and the little water absorbed dries quickly. It's also naturally resistant to temperature changes and makes for a great insulator from the scorching heat of the summer beach sand.



Microfiber


None of the materials we talked about above compares in softness to the cozy feel of micro fibers.



It's only natural that they make one of the best beach blankets if you think about the absorbing properties of microfiber cloths. The important part here is knowing how to recognize the real thing from cheap imitations. It's one of the few materials that allows for a circle stitching to hold well and most of the round blankets are made using microfiber.



If you get that part right, you'll end with soft blanket that will last for summers with minimal changes.



Fleece and polar fleece


Because of the similar properties, fleece often plays the role of wool and offers a great substitute for those who are not fans (or are allergic) of the prickly wool fibers. It's used for beach throw blankets, especially its sub-type polar fleece.



Polar fleece is a bit more rugged and stronger than regular fleece, hence the more common use for clothes and clothes. The direction of the fibers defines the stretching - it usually stretches more along one of its dimensions (depending on the weave).



Compared to wool, it's far lighter and easier to wash and clean.



Oxford Ripstop fabric


Oxford ripstop is used for backing of waterproof beach blankets. Not only does it make them waterproof and more durable.

It's typically paired with parachute nylon on the top, making the bottom waterproof while the top remains breathable enough to dry easily, especially under the beach sun.



Cotton - used mainly for beach throw blankets


Most of us remember the days when all you could see on the beach were cotton towels. Cotton is absorbent but retains water and sand. In that quality aspect, it's fair to say that it's not as beach-friendly as other modern materials.



Today, it's used for cute beach blankets - the kind you'd use for a picnic and not rarely on its own for a full day on the beach.



More about our review process and ratings



We already talked about the basics of the methodology we use to rate the blankets, but in the section below we'll dig deeper and explain the nitty-gritty of it all - from the moment we decided to review the products to the moment we first had a list of Top 10 best beach blankets.



One of our editors is a Materials technology engineer and, in guides like this, it's usually him and a few of his colleagues (that we bring in for the project) who make the initial picks.



What are "initial picks?"



The initial picks are the products that passed the first "filter" and qualified to be looked into closer.



In this case, the broad list included over 120 products (based on user satisfaction data). The shortlist are the blankets we analyze and review in more depth. In this case that list consisted of 20 products.





We favor no brands and nothing can influence our ratings. To ensure that, we follow a few rules:


We accepted no "free samples" in the initial phase (and trust us, since we first compiled this guide, we've had many offers for that). That might change in the next update since we now have more data available and the rating algo is tweaked t make the testing blind.


Blind testing means that the ratings are reached by marking the blankets as Sample 1, Sample 2, etc & removing all visible tags. We learned so much about the blankets that this practice doesn't make much of difference anymore for in-house testing since we know the look and feel of all the blankets we list. However, it does make all the difference if we send the product out to our featured testers. If we don't share the brand, there's little to no chance of them looking up the product and basing their reviews and rating on existing data.


We update this guide on quarterly basis to include new data and accurately reflect the market. In terms of re-testing the products in the field and in-house, our budget allows us one update per year. The exception to that rule are cases of products that see an significant change in user satisfaction %s between the "small" quarterly updates. If we see any red lights here (usually a drop in ratings) we re-test the said product. Reasons for this are usually a change in price that affects the user satisfaction and, more often, a change in manufacturing or outsourcing practices.




For this guide we had no unscheduled testing so far.



Our review and rating algorithm is a "living" thing. That's especially true for this guide since the products and quality aspects are unique and the methodology we use to rate, say, heated electric blankets, hardly applies.



For this guide, it was back to the drawing board and the changes were more than tweaking since we had to include categories we've never used before like the blankets being "sand-free" (you might see this aspect referred to as "sand-repellent") and waterproof.



Ask us anything



If you reached our page and still have doubts about what you'll bask in for the few summers to come, drop us a line anytime (the comment section is below). We'll do our best to help.



If we don't know the answer, we'll find out and get back to you within 24 hours.



Bob, James and Katia aka. the blanket review team at TheSleepStudies



The following post Best Beach Blanket | Top 10 Compared | 2018 Update Read more on: https://thesleepstudies.com







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/best-beach-blanket/

Best Weighted Blanket for Adults

Our list and ratings of the best weighted blanket for adults are a fruit of over 5,000 work hours, and 11 months of testing and statistical analysis of 70 products.



Since the choice of a weighted blanket highly depends on the issue you're trying to address; it's the user satisfaction that had the most impact on the final overall rating. We rated the blankets in a few objective categories like fiber & filling quality, craftsmanship & shape retention, but the most important quality aspect are the sensory qualities.



To maintain complete objectivity, we decided not to accept any free products and bought the blankets we tested at retail (like anyone would). Also, to keep the information relevant, this guide is updated quarterly to include any new data available. With all that said, let us get straight to the results.









Best weighted blanket for adults - TOP 5



Top choice - Magic Weighted Blanket review



Since we put together the first results and ratings, the Magic weight blanket stood out along with a few products. This was only a few months into testing and gathering data for the user satisfaction category.



As the sample of data processed grew, the gap in user satisfaction rating grew, and a few products obviously stood out, with the "Magic" reaching an unexpected rating of 97/100 in user satisfaction category.



We've been testing and reviewing sleep-related products, including blankets, for well over a decade now and this is only the 4th time we see a user satisfaction this high.

The interesting thing is that, when we did see it, it was in products that were significantly more expensive than the competing products, which is not the case here.



We'd like to stress 3 things:





The magic weighted blanket outranked some significantly more expensive products


The statistical analysis of price vs. satisfaction brings is what gave this product a high rating in the "value for money" category, in spite of the fact that it is slightly more expensive that its closest competitors.


It is one of the most popular products in the niche with hundreds of review from users on Amazon.




2nd best weighted blanket for adults - ZonLi



Honorary mention - best weighted blanket for teens - Inyard Premium



With a user satisfaction of 93 % at the time of completing the last update of this guide, the runner-up comes from Inyard - a company that's famous for making specialized Therapy swings.



The product is primarily aimed at teens and, with the sizes and weights (5, 7 and 15 lbs).



The Inyard is top-to-bottom made in the US, and the craftsmanship and materials quality is nothing short of superb. If this reads like advertising, it's not; it's simply facts.



But we have to say that we liked the Inyard so much that it's the only weighted blankets for teens we're including here. The initial concept of the guide was to pinpoint the top products for adults. The fact that we deviated from that "rule" to mention Inyard speaks for itself.



What is a weighted blanket?



Weighted blankets are therapeutic products designed to offer relief to people with anxiety and sensory response problems.



Why do they work?



They work because they calm down the "fight or flight" response, lower the cortisol levels and increase mood and sleep hormones like serotonin and melatonin.



A brief history



The products that we mention in this guide and label as best weighted blankets in their respective categories are significantly different from the product that kick-started the industry, both in design, materials used and a range of people they're intended for.



The origins go back to the mental health arena. Psychiatrists experimented with weight as means of calming down the sensory response for far too long and pinpointing one person as the inventor is not straightforward.



Initially, the experiments were just about adding weight. The approach proved to have a "red line" because, at higher weights, the response has a negative in fact, it can exacerbate the sensory response and make the person even more anxious because they feel trapped.



The discovery that caused the most significant shift in the industry and led to the designs we know today is the even weight distribution. That's when people stopped experimenting with (what now seems an obviously counterproductive practice) of attaching actual weights to the edges of blankets and lap pads.



Initial issues


Even the first modern designs had a similar issue because they relied on a one-chamber filling. This filling would move through the blanket and end up in the corners with prolonged use. The corners and edges would then become too heavy causing the blanket to slide or the used to feel trapped.



The evolution - DIY weighted blankets in the autism community


First attempts of addressing the issue were nothing to write home about because they relied on simply filling the blankets and pads with more of the same filling or adding other stuffing that was supposed to stop the beads from moving. It didn't work as expected - it only made the blankets bigger and more cumbersome.



Here, we're still talking about the DIY blankets, hand-made for kids and adults with special needs. There was still no standard for the filling and people used whatever provided a similar effect (from rice and corn to pebbles). None of these were a lasting solution - the seeds can sprout and cause issues ranging from the change in the way the blanket feels to allergic reactions while the pebbles proved to be too rugged and would wear down the materials of the cloth.



Chambered (quilted) design


It was only when chambered designed and tight stitches that hold the beads in place was introduced that things changed. It seems like an obvious change, but it took years to get there.



The sectional designs pair the calming effects of weight with deep sensory pressure. We could get into the nitty-gritty of the science here but, for the purposes of this guide, it's enough to explain as even weight distribution.



Modern designs


What we know as a weighted blanket today combined the sectional design (usually quilted squares) with poly-pellets and glass beads. Both are spherical, and the main difference is the density of the materials.



As we mentioned in one of the reviews, poly-pellets make for a more "aerated" feel while the fine glass, sand-like spheres make for thinner blankets.



What the future holds


We don't see any revolutionary changes happening in the designs anytime soon.



We do expect a more diverse market in terms of pellet and bead size. This would allow further personalization of the calming effect.



History and predictions aside, let us get back to where we are today and answer some of the frequently asked questions about weighted blankets.



How heavy should a weighted blanket be?



A weighted blanket should weigh about 10 % of your body weight plus 1-2 lbs.



This is the formula commonly used for kids and teens. For adults, this means that the weight goes as high as 25-40 lbs (Queen or King size designed for heavier people). Our research also shows that the weight adults found to be "just right" largely depends on the sensory condition. The final choice of the blanket you use should always be a combo of the advice you get from your therapist, and your preference, the information we provide here are for educational purposes and reference.



You can get a good sense of how the blanket will feel in term of weight by simply gathering the blankets you have laying around and pilling them on. If you try this, ignore the feeling of the heat and focus on how the weight feels. The actual weighted blanket will not be as warm; it should offer the calming effect of the added weight without heating you up too much.



Weights of over 30 lbs are outliers and studies about the impact of the added weight.



Size



Sizes range from smaller (dedicated sizes) to Queen and King weighted blankets.



The size is another important factor because the bigger the blanket, the more of it will be on the surface on the not directly pressing your body. For example, a Queen size weighted blanket will press you more than a Twin and less than a King (of the same weight). It is common sense and pretty straightforward, but we found it to be a commonly overlooked aspect.



King size weighted blanket



King size weighted blanket with the highest satisfaction ratings (84/100) comes from YnM. It measures 80 x 87 inches and weighs 25 pounds.

The filling is sand pellets while the finish is 100 cotton. It comes in a range of colors and patterns but the "issue" we've seen here is that not all of them are available in King size.



King weighted blankets are scarce. They cost a peg more, which is to be expected, especially of this quality. They're made for adults, and that's one of the reasons the YnM in King size is not available in all colors and patterns (because some of the patterns are playful, colorful and obviously intended for kids).

The sand pellets used are certified to be free of any odor and completely non-toxic. Compared to the standard plastic, they offer a distinctly soft feel.



Queen size weighted blanket for adults



With Queen sized linen being more popular (thank King), the choices you have in the size are similar to our top overall picks.



ZonLi Queen size weighted blanket is the runner-up overall and out top pick in this size category.



The Queen is 60" wide, 80" long and weighs 20 pounds. The pellets are standard (poly) and are packed inside a cotton "chambers" (square quilt stitching). It comes in 4 colors: Black, Navy Blue, Dark Gray and Brown.



Weighted lap pads



Besides the standard sizes used for sleeping, the product is also available in specialized sizes, like weighted lap pads for adults and kids. We found the former to be scarce and only a few high-quality products in this size category had a satisfaction rating if over 80% in user reviews.



Our top pick in the category is Sensory Goods weighted lap pad.



Sizes and weights available:





Small: 12 x 16 inches (3 pounds)


Medium: 14.5 x 19.5 " (5 pounds)


Large: 17 x 23 inches (7 pounds)


Materials used: fleece and flannel


User satisfaction rating of the weighted lap pad: 93 %




It's available in 7 neutral colors with no patterns (green, blue, burgundy, pink, navy, tan & denim). The sizing, weight and colors make it an option for adults and kids both.



An issue that we've seen with other similar products is uneven weight distribution of the filling (usually glass/sand beads). They tend to shift and move around if the stitching of the parts is not deep or tight enough.



The filling in this weighted lap pad is deep and tight, and the beads can only move within their "section" and not throughout the lap pad.



Filling (Pellets)



In case you are the kind of buyer that likes to understand all about the product they're buying of you want to make a DIY weighted blanket, you might want to know what kind of filling is most commonly used.



Poly pellets


No. 1 filling are poly-pellets. When we say "no.1," we're primarily referring to how frequent the filling is used in the best weighted blankets we reviewed.



The poly-pellets are made from non-recycled, toxin-free pieces and look like round bits. The texture resembles that of a small pebble. If this is one of your concerns and you want something that feels more uniform, you'll probably prefer glass beads of sand filling.



Glass beads


The glass-bead filling sounds different than it is. If you didn't know it was glass-based, you'd have the impression that it's sand. In fact, some of the glass beads feel even finer than the finest sand.



Because the weight is distributed more evenly and less likely to move to the corners of the blanket or cover, we've seen people reporting that the subjective feeling of glass-bead or sand filling "feels" like it has more weight that one filled with plastic pellets.



Volume of the filling


You'll probably need about two times as much (in terms of volume) of plastic pellets than glass beads to fill a "pocket" of the same weight.



This means that the plastic filling will feel more "rackety" and uneven and will be thicker, while glass or sand makes for a thinner weighted blanket.



In our experience, we've seen that people preferred the "aerated" feel of the poly to sand or glass and most of our top have this type of feeling. The exception is the category of a king size weighted blanket, for a few reasons.



We found the glass-bead / sand filling to be superior in King size weighted blankets.



Besides the most important factor (the user satisfaction) we found that King size is too big of a surface to keep the filling in place. As a result, most of the products in King size we looked at had the issue of too much movement inside the quilting.



Where can I buy a weighted blanket?



In our research for this guide, we had numerous sources we looked at. It's our opinion that (for the ones that available on the site) getting a weighted blanket on Amazon has a few advantages. The main one is that you can read the reviews users shared and look for the ones that closely match your circumstances or condition.



At Bed Bath and Beyond



For some of the brands (like Brookstone) were not available on Amazon. In the case of Brookstone, you could get one through their website or at Bed Bath and Beyond.



Some brands can be found both on Amazon and at Bed Bath and Beyond. In our research, we were left with the impression that the main benefit of getting one through Amazon is the wider range of the products offered as well as more user reviews shared.



Some honorary mentions and reference info



Gravity blanket review



After the launch through Kickstarter, Gravity blanket became one of the most popular brands.



It's so popular, in fact, that there's even a confusion in the terminology and we've seen many people confusing the name of the brand with the product (weighted blanket).





Weight (sizes) available: 25, 20 and 15 lbs


Technology: Gravity calls it "Deep Touch Pressure Stimulation."


Inner material: cotton


Filling: premium grade, toxin-free


Outer finish: Micro-fleece, super-soft




At the time of the last update to this guide, the Gravity blanket was not readily available on Amazon but only through their website and only for pre-order (one that will be fulfilled when the blankets are available).



How to wash a weighted blanket?



Most weighted blankets can be machine washed on a gentle cycle, separately from other items, without using softeners, bleach or chlorine. For a majority of brands, the recommended washing temperatures are in the range from cold to lukewarm.

Drying



The best practice when it comes to drying is wither to hang it or tumble dry on low. In the section below we'll get more specific about how to wash, dry and remove stains from weight blankets of different weights and fabrics.



Is it rated for the dryer?



While the filling is not an issue when it comes do drying (both pellets and beads can usually handle it), the fabric is a different story. The companies usually recommend gentle washing and drying practices to prolong the shape and feel retention of the fabric.



If you are hanging it dry, try to spread it over two laundry lines to avoid sagging and shape changes, especially with the softer materials like fleece.



The weight - home washing vs. Laundromat



We recommend washing any weighted blanket of 15 lbs or more at the Laundromat. While they can be machine washed, the weight can prove to be too much for home washing.



Why no chlorine bleach?



Because chlorine is aggressive and can change the fiber of the fabrics.



Why no softeners?



You shouldn't use softeners because they can "stick around" the pellets or beads and build up. In the long run, this will change the soft feel and make the blanket more rugged.



No ironing



It's common sense, but let us mention it anyway - you shouldn't iron your weighted blanket.

The plastic beads can melt and most of the materials used are too sensitive for ironing. If you have a cotton-based cover with glass filling, it might be an option because the beads are resistant to high temperature and cotton is iron-friendly.



Again, while it might be possible in some fabric-filling combos, we don't see the need to do it. Most brands will come with a no-ironing label.



Specific materials



All of the best weighted blankets (including our top 5) come with recommendations on how to wash the product. So, the following analysis is included more for reference purposes than anything else, to help you in the initial process of choosing and if you to make a diy blanket and have dilemmas about the materials.



Fleece


Fleece is a sensitive material, but we feel that there is misconception about washing it. The changes in texture and shape are, more often than not, a result of aggressive detergents or washing cycles.



To prevent fleece losing its "fluffy" quality, you'll want to wash in using warm (not hot) cycles on your washing machine and go with low-heat drying cycles.

It's a good idea to rinse it twice before drying it. This will remove any remaining detergent that might change the texture in the long run. Finally, fleece is one of the few materials used that handles softeners well.



Cotton


If the weighted blanket is all-cotton (both the backing and finish), you have a bit more leeway when washing it.



The important part when washing cotton weighted (gravity) blanket is what we like to call "load control." It comes down to not overburdening your washing machine and washing it separately.



The reason is two-fold - it's gentler to the washing machine and the tear and wear of the blanket are lower.



Flannel


Flannel is sub-type of cotton. Proper maintenance comes down to a few main rules:





no hot cycles (wash it with warm or cold water)


don't over-dry it (as soon as the drying cycle is finished, remove the blanket)


rinse twice to maintain the softness




Rayon and linen


Some of the best weighted blankets are made using a combo of rayon and linen because it has superb shape retention properties while remaining "on the soft side."

These fabrics include cellulose which doesn't respond well to bleaching. You might not see it when washing, but in the long run, it will affect the lifespan of the fibers.



Updates of the guide on best weighted blankets for adults



Our standard update schedule is quarterly for the parts of the ratings that are data-driven (like the satisfaction ratings and user reviews). You can always see when this guide was last updated under the table of TOP 5 (click here to skip back to it) as well as at the very end of the guide (below).



Finally, we encourage you to ask any question that comes to mind in the comments below. We respond within 24 hours, but since we consulted 3rd party experts for this guide, it might take us a day or two to answer some questions. In other words, if we don't know the answer, we'll let you know, find out and get back to you.



Sleep well and stay calm,



The Sleep Studies review team



The following blog post Best Weighted Blanket for Adults was first published to The Sleep Studies







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/best-weighted-blanket-for-adults/

Best Sleep Mask – Top 5 Out of 32 Tested – 2018 update

It took about 8 months to put this guide on best sleep mask together. We first started working on this guide back in 2016, and it was first published in early 2017. It has seen 6 bi-monthly updates since.



The results you are about to see are the fruit of over 4,400 work-hours, both testing the masks and statistical analysis of user satisfaction. It did take a while, but we believe that we now have the most complete guide on choosing a good sleep mask based on your sleep preference (primarily position).









Total of 38 masks tested and no "free products" received



The "raw" list included over 120 masks. It was narrowed down to 32 by two of our team members (Bob & Ivan, the former a Material technology engineer and the latter a sleep therapist). The products were then tested both by our featured testes and our staff (6 of us).\We want to make a special point that we did not receive any free products from any of the companies that could potentially cloud our objectivity.



The bottom line is that the picks & their ratings in 5 quality categories are objective, completely independent and regularly updated with new data to keep the information presented fresh. With that out of the way, let's get to the results and analysis of specific products.



Best sleep masks - info and ratings of top 5



Best sleep mask for side sleepers & overall - Sweet Slumber



A good eye sleep mask does the job, but a great one does it seamlessly...in a way that will make you forget you're wearing one. We have to confess that this is not our line, it's a paraphrase that we saw when researching for this guide.



The part that we'd like to stress is the comfort ratings as per the side-sleepers among our testing crowd - 94/100. This came as a surprise because when it's a "no-Velcro" mask. This means that the straps are regulated by straps and clasps (think swimming glasses). The difference is that the placement and extra padding of the straps make it a non-issue (see the stats below).



With the thin natural silk used for the mask, we expected the clasps to be a problem for side sleepers in spite of the extra padding. We were wrong - 84 % of our side-sleeping testers reported that they "don't even notice the clasps" and 10% that "they do feel the clasp but not the point of it being an issue."\



Light isolation: 92/100

Comfort: 93/100

Materials quality: 95/100

Side-sleeping: 94/100

Back-sleeping: 91/100

Value for money: 92/100



Who will choose the Sweet Slumber?



First things first - the Sweet Slumber is more expensive than most masks, and it might not be right for you if you are looking to save money when getting a mask. However, the difference in price fades compared to its superiority if you are a side sleeper.



About 2 months into testing we realized just how tricky choosing a good eye sleep mask for side sleepers is.



Here's why:



To be a good choice for a side-sleeper the "body" of the mask can't be too rigid (like contoured models based on foam). Side sleepers reported that these masks tend to move as they turn, which beats the purpose. From the budget and value "angle," the good news here is that this eliminated some much more expensive contoured masks.



Majority of the masks that were thin and seamless put too much pressure on the eyes. The description of the issue ranged from "being too aware of the mask" to "so much pressure makes the mask unusable."



Finally, the straps should be tight enough and designed in a way to keep the mask safely into place without being uncomfortable.



Within 4 months, one mask started emerging as the product that stroke the right balance - the Sweet Slumber.



Bottom line - The Sweet Slumber is, hand down, the best sleep mask for side-sleepers and we don't see that changing anytime soon. The gap in side-sleeping rating is too big...it was significant when we first published the guide and it just got bigger since.



2nd best sleep mask overall and the top choice for back sleepers - the Alaska Bear (Natural Silk)



Update: This Alaska Bear model was somewhat changed since we first tested and reviewed it, so we had to re-test (an unscheduled test, we typically re-test products once every 18 months).



The main change was the body of the mask getting a bit smaller. That increased its ratings for side sleeping from 92 to 93, lowered the "Light isolation" rating from 92 to 91.



The ratings for back sleepers remained the same.



Light isolation: 91/100

Overall comfort: 92/100

Materials quality: 90/100

Side-sleeping: 93/100

Back-sleeping: 91/100

Value for money: 92/100



Who will choose the Alaska Bear?



If you are a combo-sleeper (side and back) and if you're looking to get a budget-friendly mask, this Alaska Bear might be right. It might be worth mentioning that we found the



Alaska sleep to be just as gentle to the skin as products that cost 3 or 4 times more.



It is THE most popular mask with thousands of user reviews on Amazon - you can see them below.



3rd top-rated overall and the best sleep mask for travel - Nidra Luxury Deep Rest



To be honest, we expected the Nidra to be one of our top picks for sleep because the light isolation is unparalleled - rated at 96/100.



But, it turned out that side sleepers found it a bit too rigid (which caused movement) and a significant % of back sleepers found the Velcro connections at the back to be too noticeable.



The two factors lowered Nidra's ratings and put it below the ratings of the Sweet Slumber & Alaska Bear in 3 quality categories: Overall Comfort, Side-sleeping & Back-sleeping.





Light isolation: 96/100


Overall comfort: 91/100


Materials quality: 94/100


Side-sleeping: 82/100


Back-sleeping: 90/100


Value for money: 91/100




Who will choose the Nidra?



Too many of our testers (18%) found the Nidra's contoured shape to be an issue for side sleeping for us to recommend it for side sleepers. It also might not be right for you if you're a hot sleeper because the "sealing" is so tight that it can get warm under it.



On the other hand, the issue for back sleepers is not as significant if your pillow is on the softer side and can nullify the connections at the back.



With all that said - Nidra is our top choice for travel and naps. For these purposes the two points above are moot.



Another point worth making is that the Comfort rating includes eye pressure as one of the components and its another quality aspect where Nidra excelled. The design practically removes all pressure from the eyes.



Jersey Slumber - 2nd best sleep mask for side sleepers



Another sleep eye mask that seems to strike the right balance between materials, padding, light isolation and strap design is the Jersey Slumber.



Jersey Slumber mask is made using smooth silk on both sides, no Velcro on the back or sides of the head that would create pressures points. The slider that controls the size is just seamless enough not to be an issue for side sleepers and, since there is no connection in the back, it makes for a good option for back sleepers.



The size of the mask itself is, according to our measurements, approximately 8.6 x 4.3 inches and 9/10 people didn't even comment on the universal unisex size, which is always a good thing. No comments usually means that it wasn't an issue.



Rigidity of the padding



This is a thin silk mask (both sides) and thin padding. What we've seen as the most common complaint with masks of this type is pressure exerted. The issue can range from it being slightly uncomfortable because it touches the eyelashes to the more "serious" complaints like direct pressure on the eyes.



This comes down to the balance between the tightness of the straps, the size range and the padding. It's not something that can be precisely defined and the best we could do here is include a question about it in our questionnaire for the testers. Here are the results of that - 91% of people reported no eye-pressure issues, 6 % found it to be too tight and 3% reported that it's too small and loose for a comfortable fit.



What's important here is that we tried to find a correlation between the %s and for most of the people we did - it's usually outliers in terms of head size. For about 1.7%, we couldn't pinpoint the exact cause, so it's probably the shape of the bones around the eyes.



The bottom line here is that 9/10 people did not find any issues with the sizing and eye pressure.





Light isolation: 94/100


Overall comfort: 91/100


Materials quality: 94/100


Side-sleeping: 92/100


Back-sleeping: 86/100


Value for money: 92/100


Bedtime Bliss - second best mask for travel




Bedtime Bliss - second best sleep mask for travel



The Bedtime Bliss is not close to the "side-sleeping" ratings of the best sleep masks for side sleepers but it is one of the most popular eye masks and our pick as the runner up in the category of the best sleep masks for travel.



The reason for the former could be pinpointed to the contoured shape and a hefty padding that is likely to move when you sleep on your side. In this scenario, a side-sleeper will find it uncomfortable because of the pressure on the nose and the light coming in through the "cracks" of the displaced masks.



It's primarily designed for travel and back-sleepers. The wide straps make for better pressure distribution and the "molded" contoured shape blocks practically all the light.



Unisex, minimally designed



The minimal unisex design makes it one of the better options for men (especially the blue version). Women on the other hand, liked the luxurious look of the purple and there were interviewees of both sexes who preferred the simple all-black (approximately 25% total).



We also found that "only" 17% of stomach-sleepers found them comfortable enough for stomach-sleeping. It's the contoured combo of cotton and bamboo that will make them (in our opinion) uncomfortable for most people sleeping in the position.



Bottom line - a solid value for money option for back-sleepers and travelers of both sexes with a high light isolation rating (94/100).

It's also worth mentioning that this Bedtime Bliss eye mask is one of the most popular products with over 10,000 user reviews on Amazon. You can see them all by following the links below.



Manta sleep mask review - 7th top-rated



Manta sleep mask is described by the company as "modular". It refers to the fact that it's somewhat more intricate design aimed at adjusting to the face of the user.



We have to admit that we didn't expect Manta eye mask to find it's way to the TOP 10 and it's fair to say that we were probably led by the prejudice of our experience with masks with (re) movable parts. The Manta did receive ratings that are close to some of the best models out there and what kept it from climbing higher is the ratings of "value for money."



To put it differently - we found it comfortable going to bed or at the beginning of travel but we also see the movable parts as an issue for long term comfort. The count of those experiences (in-house and our featured testers) was few too many to justify the higher price tag of the Manta mask.



Let's take a moment to explain what Manta (the company) means when they say "modular" and adjustable



The first things that stands out are the velcroed eye "patches" that can be moved to adjust to the shape of your head and the distance between your eyes and forehead bones above the eyes.



It's a nice idea but we found it to be more marketing-oriented than a substantial advantage over one-piece masks.



Bottom line - we like the Manta mask but if it was us, we wouldn't pay double or three times as much for it (compared to some of the other products on this list).



Light isolation: 94/100



Overall comfort: 92/100



Materials quality: 92/100



Side-sleeping: 90/100



Back-sleeping: 91/100



Value for money: 82/100



Holly Golightly sleep mask - Inspired by the movie Breakfast At Tiffany's - the most stylish lady mask



Since publication, the guide on best sleep masks for side, back and stomach sleepers has seen dozen of updates. We included this product because we received dozens of emails asking us to recommend an eye mask with the design of the now famous mask worn by Audrey Hepburn in "Breakfast at Tiffany's."



What we did is look at what's available out there and separated the wheat from the chaff.



So let us be clear - Holly Golightly is not a brand, it's a specific design. There are dozens of brands that make the Holly Golightly sleep mask but the one that stood out in terms of quality is the handmade mask by "The Sleepy Cottage."



The bottom line is that this product is more of an honorary mention (as you'll see in the ratings) than an actual contender. But, among the Holly Golightly masks, our choice is The Sleepy Cottage. This cute sleep mask is also labeled as "most stylish."



Besides Holly Golightly, you might this style described as "Breakfast At Tiffany's Sleep Mask." Don't get confused by the wording, there is no official product, it's all separate brands.



Earth Therapeutics sleep eye mask



This classic from Earth Therapeutics has been in the 10 top-rated masks since we first published the guide and reviewed the sleep mask.



To put that into perspective, along with the Alaskan Bear, Earth Therapeutics is the only brand that had a "representative in the Top 10 at all times since we first published the guide. In the case of Earth Therapeutics, it was this mask.



At the moment, this Earth Therapeutics costs slightly more than most products listed here - hence the slighly lowered rating in the "value for money" category.





Light isolation: 91/100


Overall comfort: 90/100


Materials quality: 92/100


Side-sleeping: 91/100


Back-sleeping: 88/100


Value for money: 87/100




Choosing a good sleep eye mask - reference info



Whether you are sleeping at home or on the road, unwanted light may disrupt your sleeping habits. Your body reacts to bright artificial light the same way it reacts to sunshine - it tries to keep itself awake. Any light stronger than 180 Lux will reset your circadian rhythm.One of the simplest and yet effective ways to block that unwanted light would be to try the sleep mask. And the best thing is that your body will still be able to produce Melatonin, a hormone that helps your body to fall asleep naturally, and let your brain goes through all stages of the sleeping cycle.Just make sure that you do not oversleep.



Should You Get One?



Before exploring any other means of combating insomnia or simply pursuing a better night of sleep, you'll probably want to explore the environmental factors and the role they play in your habits.



So, it's a lane that might be worth pursuing, whether on its own of combined with other less "aggressive" means of getting a better nights sleep. Combined with good sleep earplugs, a mask can offer as isolating experience as possible.



Some PROs:





less aggressive than any other sleep enhancing measures (like supplementation)


readily available & reasonable priced


you can also order them online


easy to use and travel-friendly




The main downside users tend to report is their head and eyes being pressured and hair issues, especially with female users. That's one the factors we looked at when we compiled the list of top masks. This quality aspect comes down to balance between the strength of the straps, their width and the way how much of this pressure is "relieved" by the shape of the mask itself.



Can You Use It if You Are a Side-sleeper?



If you are a side-sleeper, you may wonder if you will be able to sleep with one of these sleeping products on your face... and the answer is - yes, you will! You should choose the one that is flexible, and not the one that digs into your face. Most side-sleepers prefer a more streamlined mask profile so that it does not move that easily during the night.



What to Look for When Choosing?



When they think of choosing the best sleep mask, most people think of the one they had gotten when they were on an international flight, or of the stylish one you can see in some ads or magazines. But, today, there are so many different varieties to choose from. Yes, you can still describe them as a strip of fabric that covers your eyes, but special features make them more wearable and effective.



These are some key features to look for when searching for the right one:



Fabric (soft and breathable):There is a wide variety of materials to choose from. Silk, satin, polyester, cotton, bamboo, and some of them are even embedded with copper. Since it is going to be directly on your face, you should choose a soft and breathable material. If your skin easily gets irritated by certain materials and fabrics, you should pay some special attention to it.When it comes to flat ones, pure silk will probably be the best option, especially during hot summer nights. And if you are using the one with cavities, it should still be soft and light, but also firm enough for the cups to stay elevated during the sleep.



Strap (adjustable): In order to be able to fit heads of all sizes and shapes, the strap should be adjustable. It usually adjusts via Velcro or a buckle. If you have a long hair, choose the one with buckled straps - they will not tangle in your hair.



Cavities (yes or not): Cavities are recesses in a place where your eyes will be. That way your eyes, as well as your eyelashes, will not touch the material of the mask. You can open your eyes and just stare into the darkness. Many people find it soothing that their eyelids are gently pressed by a sleep mask, while others might find it irritating. If you are among the ones who are irritated if anything touches their eyes, opt for the mask with cavities.But keep in mind that if you are sleeping on your stomach, you might not find it as comfortable as you would if you are sitting on a plane or on a bus.



Weight (light): The lighter the better. When wearing a sleep eye mask, you should have a feeling that you do not wear any at all. Try to find the one that weighs no more than 1½ ounces.



Maintenance (durable and machine washable): If you wear it often, you will definitely want to be able to wash it from time to time.



There are also some less important features, but you should think about them, too:



Noise reduction: Some masks are wide enough to cover your ears, but if you really want to block out the noise, you should choose a pair of sleep earplugs.



Scents: Since not everyone will like the same scent, you should try it and see if it works for you. But only if you are not prone to allergies.



A flat nose cutout or a molded nose bridge: You will find a flat nose cutout on all typical masks that are designed to fit almost anyone. But, there are also some with a molded nose bridge, designed to block out the light that may come from the bottom of the mask. If you have a wider nose or you are missing a bridge, they are not the right option for you.



Gel masks: You can try them if you are having problems with puffy eyes. You can either place them in a fridge or in warm water, depending on whether you want a cold or warm therapy.



How to Clean It Properly?



After wearing your mask, you should hand wash it with a mild soap and water, in order to remove facial oils. Avoid using harsh cleansers that might damage it or leave some harmful residues. Also, you should always let it dry away from the direct sunlight. More detail information can be found in the 'user guide'.

It is also important that you know when you should replace it.



These are some indications that might help you when making this decision:





you have to tighten the strap very often


the cushion seems slippery even if you wash it




Conclusions



You should wear a sleep eye mask when travelling or in any other situation where you cannot control the lighting (in a hospital, or in the office, for power napping), but in order to reduce the brightness in your bedroom, you should always opt for a long-term solution, such as a blackout curtain. Look for heavy and well-fitted curtains and shades that will fully block the outside light, and prevent slivers of a streetlight or early morning sunlight from filtering in your room and disturbing your circadian rhythm.



Future updates



The information about the best sleep mask in a range of quality categories is updated on quarterly basis. The statistical analysis of new available data is planned to keep the information relevant between re-tests (which are done once a year or once every 18-months).



If you have any questions, feel free to contact us by leaving a comment in the section below. You can expect a response within 24 hours. If we don't know the answer to your question, we'll find out and get back to you within.



Stay smart and sleep well,



The Sleep Studies team



The blog post Best Sleep Mask – Top 5 Out of 32 Tested – 2018 update was originally published on https://thesleepstudies.com/







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/best-sleep-mask/

Lull mattress review

We've been conducting tests and gathering data for this Lull mattress review for well over a year now. We expect to see this review live after a few months, but as Lull grew more popular, new data kept pouring in.



So, to make the ratings more reliable we postponed publishing the review until we have a bigger data sample, which means more reliable ratings.



Bottom line is - the ratings of the Lull are fruit of over 5,500 work-hours spent testing, reviewing data for our statistical model. Let's get right to it...









200,000 testing cycles of the Lull mattress



What's different about the Lull?



Lull is yet another mattress-in-a-box brand, but with a twist. While most similar mattresses aspire to find that sweet spot between comfort and support that will work for most people, Lull took it one step further.



It's not just about the comfort vs. support but they made a special effort to achieve better breathability of the foam and a "cooling effect".



In the review of the Lull mattress you'll see below, we'll take it apart and put it back together until we have a full picture about it. What are its advantages and downsides? Who is it for and it's not for?



What this means for you?



If you are in the market for a new mattress, this review should make it perfectly clear if Lull is right for you...based on your body type, sleep habits and budget.



Lull mattress review part 1 - construction and foam layers



Layer 1 - 1.5 inches of cooling gel foam



First, you have the top layer that's meant to increase breathability and provide better cooling properties compared to similar mattresses. This layer is 1.5 inches thick and made of memory foam. The foam is gel-infused to be "cooler" and distribute the weight of the sleeper in a way that relieves pressure points at the hips and shoulders.



In on our experience, a finish layer like this does make a substantial difference when it comes to pressure relief for most people of average built, except for outliers like bodybuilders or heavy people.



Why is this important?



The difference here comes down to the distance between the body axis and the furthermost points (like hips and shoulders).



So, unless you belong to one of the two groups of people mentioned above, the Lull is likely to provide a good balance between support and comfort. That's probably the reason behind the fact that Lull has a user satisfaction rating of 95%.



Layer 2 - support / transition



One more layer of foam with the same thickness as the cooling foam but somewhat denser. It's meant to be a transition between the cooling layer and the core (bottom layer).



Layer 3 - core



7 inches of extra dense foam of the core are there as the main supportive element. The foam used is strong, much denser than either of the two layers we mentioned above and works with them to balance out the lower density of the cooling and the transitional layer.



The three layers together "work" together to offer proper "sinkage" for the joints and align the spine. Based on what we've seen, Lull has done a very good job balancing the 3 layers.



Bottom line


The three layers together "work" together to offer proper "sinkage" for the joints and align the spine. Based on what we've seen, Lull has done a very good job balancing the 3 layers.



On a firmness scale of 1 to 100, we'd say that the Lull is around 65-75.



Lull mattress review part 2 - quality of the foam



If you've done your homework researching mattresses, you probably know that judging the quality of the foam is tricky.



Things got especially complicated with the growing trendy of shady outsourcing practices. We're not saying that outsourcing is a bad thing per se or that you can judge the quality of the foam based on where it comes from.



We're saying not to take any claims about "high quality foam" at face value...simply because anyone can make them.



What to look for instead?



Look for things that are backed up and proven, like:



Warranty





Testing (independent)


3-rd party certification


Unless a mattress ticks all the boxes above, any claims about the quality of the foam are moot, whether they're positive or negative.




So, let us analyze and review the Lull mattress from that precise "angle".



The trial



Let's separate two things here - the trial period of hundred nights and the 10 years of warranty.



The trial is just means for the potential buyer to protect themselves from ending up with a mattress they don't like. In the modern, online-mattress-shopping market, a company wouldn't get very far without offering a trial period during.



During this period, you can sleep-test the Lull mattress and simply return it if you don't like it.



It's a big plus but not something that separates the Lull from similar brands.



The warranty



We've said it before and we'll say it again, the foam quality comes down to the warranty. There's simply no way for the company to offer a 5 or 10 year testing-backed (this is an important one and we'll get back to it in minute) warranty while using sub-par foam for their mattresses. The math simply doesn't add up.



That's why we're stressing the 10 year warranty of the Lull. There's no foam expert that can tell you more about the foam quality that the warranty terms.



Independent testing - beyond the warranty



One of the advice we always give to people buying a mattress online is to go with a brand of mattresses that's backed up by independent testing. Lull is one of those brands.



What does this mean exactly?



It means that the mattress is tested in by a 3-rd party lab in conditions designed to mimic the use within the warranty period.

Why is this important?



Lull is big player and a stable company. We see them remaining one for decades to come so the following scenario doesn't refer to the company but other sub-par mattress sellers.



But, imagine this scenario - you get a mattress based on the warranty terms and you see an issue with it halfway into the warranty period. What if the company is not there anymore?



In this scenario you would have bought a mattress based on numbers on a paper.



That's why the testing of the Lull mattresses makes all the difference



Lull machine-tests their mattresses and reviews the results based on 200,000 cycles of compression and movement.



Why 200,000?



Because this is approximate to 10 years of regular use. In other words, after testing a mattress like this you end up with a product that feels like a 10-year old mattress. The mattress is then laser-measured to see what kind of change the "abuse" caused.



There's no better way to pinpoint any structural issues and make sure that the warranty is not just numbers on a piece of paper.



We respect them for the practice.



Safety is still a big factor when choosing memory foam. That's why we avoid even reviewing mattresses that are not CertiPUR-US® Certified.



Lull is not only certified for safety from any fumes or potentially harming agents by the CertiPUR-US label but it's also a certified member of the Sustainable Furnishing Council and Mattress Recycling Council.



There are mattresses out there with some of these certificates, but you rarely see a brand certified with all the 3 safety and environmental labels.



Safety is still a big factor when choosing memory foam. That's why we avoid even reviewing mattresses that are not CertiPUR-US® Certified.



Lull is not only certified for safety from any fumes or potentially harming agents by the CertiPUR-US label but it's also a certified member of the Sustainable Furnishing Council and Mattress Recycling Council.



There are mattresses out there with some of these certificates, but you rarely see a brand certified with all the 3 safety and environmental labels.



Bottom line



Pushback vs. Hug balance rating of the Lull is one of the best we've seen in all-foam mattresses at 96/100 with the "scales" slightly tipped in the favor of "Hug."



That puts it in the Top 3 % of mattresses we ever tested.



"Pushback" (bounce) vs. "Hug" (contouring)



We've seen this quality category "break" the ratings of some otherwise outstanding mattresses.



First things first - let's explain what this rating is.



It's kind of self-explanatory but let's take a moment to precisely define it.



We defined "pushback" as an aspect of support. Mattresses with solid pushback will not allow you to sink in and will make it easy to move without feeling trapped. It's more than just about the firmness - it's about how well the thickness and the density of the foam is combined.



It's critical for all-foam mattresses like Lull.



You could say that "hug" is the opposite of the pushback. It's a way to describe how well the mattress contours to the body of sleepers with different body types.

The balance



Our rating algorithm does not include hug and pushback as separate quality categories, but the balance between the two...which is, for most people, all that really matters.



Better edge sturdiness than a vast majority of all-foam mattresses



Again, the importance of this rating is higher in all-foam mattresses because if the balance is off here you'll end up with a mattress that feels like you're sleeping on bouncy inflatable bed or you'll find yourself sinking too much, feeling "trapped" and difficult to move.



Pushback vs. Hug balance rating of the Lull is one of the best we've seen in all-foam mattresses at 96/100 with the "scales" slightly tipped in the favor of "Hug."



That puts it in the Top 3 % of mattresses we ever tested.



Motion transfer & edge sturdiness



As we said above, Lull is not a firm mattress but one that's finely balanced between firmness, comfort, pushback and hug.



That also means that it has a somewhat higher motion transfer than firmer mattresses and a it's a bit less supportive around the edges (much like most all-foam mattresses are).



However, the ratings in the edge support and motion transfer category are on the higher end among the all-foam mattresses.



Our conclusion about motion transfer of the Lull mattress



We've said it many times and we'll say it again, we feel that "motion transfer" is an overrated quality aspect. That's why we have an adjustment coefficient for the category and this rating has less impact on the Overall rating then quality aspects we feel are more important.



We've all witnessed the frenzy of ads of demonstrating the quality of the mattress by jumping on one side or throwing a bowling bowl while keeping, say, a glass of vine on the other unspilled.



These test look amazing, but what do they prove?



We've introduced the adjustment coefficient to tweak our rating formula because, at one point, we saw mattresses that are obviously inferior getting a higher score because they had low motion transfer. We see it more as an indicator of other quality aspects than a rating that's meaningful on its own.



With all that said, the rating we got to in this Lull mattress review is 92/100 for motion transfer - we've seen similar satisfaction rates in our analysis of owner reviews.



Somewhat sturdier edges than similar mattresses



We don't expect the edges of all-foam mattresses like Lull to be close to innesprings or hybrids. It's physics 101. No matter how you combine the layers or how thick you make them, the foam cannot hold an edge like a steel coil.



The ratings of the Lull in this category (86/100) put it in the top 5 % of mattresses (of its type) we ever tested or reviewed. It's due do the very dense and unyielding core.



Off-gassing of the foam and initial odor



This category is somewhat subjective because it comes down to the perception of the user. With that said, we do have extensive experience with reviewing similar mattresses.



During the period of testing and putting together this Lull mattress review and analysis, we have seen no red lights or deal-breakers.



There was a slight odor on-arrival (the kind you'd expect from any new mattress of this type) but it was fleeting. The odor did not resemble any of the smells we've seen over the decades that would indicate a presence of harmful chemical. It was more of a new mattress smell than anything else.



This comes as no surprse since we know how rigorous CentriPur is with their certification. Our rating in this category is 96/100.



Note: This rating is provided for reference and it's included in the Overall safety rating above. This means that it contributes to the overall rating in-directly, not on its own.



Heat dispersion test of the Lull



When we mentioned factors like motion isolation not getting equal "treatment" as some of the more important ones, we had quality aspects like temperature regulation in mind.



With the cooling being one of the selling points, the results we've seen here are nothing to write home about and we deem them as average.



Our notes based on Thermal imaging are that the average time for the Lull to return to room temperature after an average person laying on it for 25 minutes in a room of 70 Degrees F is about 15 minutes. As we said, these results are nothing to write home about but are not a deal-breaker either (for most people).



Higher heat retention is to be expected from mattresses like Lull compared to innerspring. This means that Lull might not be the choice for you if you are an outlier and an especially hot sleeper or have hot flashes. For an average person, we don't see it as a significant issue, but the ratings do reflect the results as well the incidence of complaints we've seen in reviews of users - 84/100.



Sizes & surface compatibility review of the Lull mattress



Without spring getting in the way, Lull makes for a "malleable" mattress that adjusts to any surface easily.



Ratings in this category are less about the versatility of being used with different fixed bed bases (like slated bars or flat boards) and more about the flexibility and easy of use with adjustable bed bases.



Lull outperformed 94% of similar mattresses here, "molding" to the base and moving with it with ease. We rate it at 97/100 here - there are very few beds we know of that adjust better and they cost 2 or 3 times as much as the Lull.



Value for money



Lull is not a cheap mattress but this category ratings is not about price but about the balance between value it offers, how it compares to similar mattresses (both online and at retail stores).



The value rating of the Lull (94/100) puts in the top 7%, meaning that if you do find it to be a right fit for you in the warranty period and decide to keep it, you will have saved a nice amount.



Available sizes: Twin, Twin XL, Full, Queen, King & California King.



Protection & cooling



In spite of the 10-years warranty, you can always use some somrt of protective mattress topper or pad to increase the lifespan of your mattress.



When we say "lifespan" we're not necessrily refering to the absolute lifespan but prolonging the period during which the Lull has that familiar "new mattress" feel. Adding a topper can also adjust the firmness to your liking (if you like the Lull but find it too firm or soft).



For some recommendations, you can see our fluid guide one mattress toppers here - https://thesleepstudies.com/best-mattress-toppers-and-pads/



Cooling it down



Lull comes with its own cooling layer but, as we reported above, the breathability can't really be compared to different mattress types (latex, innerspring, hybrids).



To add a touch of cooling, you can pair the lull with a cooling mattress pad - https://thesleepstudies.com/best-cooling-mattress-pads/



Lull mattress complaints



Most of the Lull mattress complaints we've seen when analyzing the review of existing owners are from people who found it to be either too soft or too warm. The high user satisfaction ratings on the Lull are mostly (in our opinion) due to the fact that Lull works for most people and the reviews are coming from people who understood what kind of mattress it is.



The second factor here is the customer service (especially the trial) and Lull policy about posting each review (even the complaints). They go as far as to promise a full refund to people who bough their mattress, wrote reviews or a complaint that wasn't posted on their website.



User satisfaction: 94 / 100



FAQs



In the section below, we'll address some of the frequently asked questions about the Lull in a concise way.



How long does it take to air out?



We'd say that the smell goes away in about a week. After a day of noticeable odor, it significantly decrease within 2 days. It's fair to say that it completely airs out within a week.



Is there a chance to receive a used mattress?



This is a common question and with the 100-night trial in mind, it's reasonable to ask it.



The answer is, "No." Lull either recycles or donates the returned mattresses.



The return process



Since the Lull mattress arrives vacuum-sealed in a small box (compared to the size of the set-up mattress) there's no way to get it back into the box (which also means that yoy don't have to keep the box and can return the mattress without it).



If you decide to return it



The good new is that if you purchase it from Lull directly of from Amazon, there is no hassle, packing or shipping you'll need to do. You just set it aside and somebody will pick the mattress up as is.



The difference here is that if get it directly from the company, you can contact them to arrange the return while mattresses ordered through Amazon are returned by raising a request from your Amazon account.



Where is Lull mattress made?



Lull is manufactured in the U.S. and China. There is no difference in quality standards between manufacturing locations.



Where is it shipped from?



Lull is shipped from one of their US locations.



Does the price listed include a frame?



No, the price you'll see listed on their website or on Amazon is for the mattress only.



If you order from the company directly, your mattress will be with you within 1-4 work days.



Shipping and box size



Since there are no springs, the Lull mattress is vacuum-sealed with all the air from the foam "squeezed out. That makes the box small enough to easily fit the narrowest of doorways.



The height of the box will depend on your chosen size while the width and depth are approximately 2 x 2 ft.



Summary and updates



We typically update our guides on quarterly basis, which is also the case with this one.



That doesn't mean that we update the ratings of each airbed – our statistical model is based on gathering data and if we don't have enough of new information for a specific bed, this update might happen once every 6 months or yearly.



What this means for this guide is the ratings of the more popular beds, like the Classic raised or EZ, are updated every six months, while the less popular models "wait" until we share enough new info for an update to make sense.



If you have any dilemmas, questions or any thoughts at all about the information we presented, please do share them in the comment section at the end of this page.



The article Lull mattress review was first published on www.thesleepstudies.com







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/lull-mattress-review/

Knitted Blanket – Our Top Picks Among Chunky & Cable Knit Blankets (Crochet) – Top 2 Out of 144

This guide has been in the works for longer than we expected. When we first received requests to look into the market of knit blankets and separate the wheat from the chaff, we thought that our in-house expertise was going to do the trick.



Boy, were we wrong...the subject of choosing a good knitted blanket (both crochet and chunky knit) turned out to be much more complicated and too twice the projected time. Our initial estimate of 6 months and 2-2,500 work hours ended up being almost a full year of research, testing and gathering data for our statistical analysis. Most importantly, we brought on 3 knitting experts to help us tweak our rating methods to the specifics of the product.



What you'll see



Bottom line - the results you'll see below were chosen out of over 202 products we looked in. The initial choices were made in consultations between our editor, Bob, and 3 experts in the field. That narrowed down the search from 202 to 28 [products that we proceeded to test and gather data on over a period of 8 months. Without much ado, let us get to the results.



Last updated: January 2018









Top-rated - Paulin Cable Knit Crochet Blanket (handmade)



The whole structure of this guide changed when we broadened the search from imported machine-made products to include crochet handmade blankets. We looked into 14 handmade blankets, and one brand stands out in pretty much all quality aspects. The one quality aspect that turned out to be more important than we initially anticipated was the shape retention. It turned out to be more of a problem than we expected, especially with cable knit blankets.



The blanket that outperformed all the tested products comes from a small exclusive brand - Paulin. There were a few models of similar quality to the Paulin, but what gave Paulin an "edge" is the category of value for money. Nostalgia about owning a hand-crafted piece aside, handmade blankets did outperform the machine-made products.



The downside is usually the price. It's understandable if you have in mind the fact that it takes 4-5 days to craft a piece like this...so, that part gave us pause about the pricing of the Paulin, since it was significantly cheaper than similar products.



To eliminate the guesswork, we contacted the seller directly. We got a response from a kind senior woman explaining that they can afford to sell it at these prices because the woman knitting the Paulin products is located in Eastern Europe. Yes, you read that right, there is only one person knitting Paulin on the Globe. In our interview with Paulina Ristinski we asked her about this and the response we got is that it that won't change because it's her knitting that makes Paulin different and she feels that hiring more people might compromise the quality. She also shared that she did try it and wasn't happy with the results.



Why is Paulin not as expensive as similar products?



With both the cost of living and material (yarn) being significantly lower in the part of the world.



The downside of Paulin products is the scarcity. Since it's a one-person operaton and all the products are handmade, they are not always available. Getting a Paulin knitted blanket sometimes means waiting for the exciting orders to be fulfilled. You can check the availability on Etsy - if you visit their page (orange button below) and the order button is active, it means that they women knitting Paulin are available to start working on your order right away.



Ratings of the Paulin Cable Knit Handmade Blankets:



Materials / yarn - 92 / 100

Craftmanship / design - 92 / 100

Comfort - 96 / 100

Shape retention - 94 / 100

Value for $ - 91 / 100



Choosing a good knitted blanket - step 1: the right yarn



The results above are done-for-you testing and research...ho help you minimize the guesswork when choosing. In the rest of the guide, we give way to one of our knitting experts - Katya Juris to explain the ins and outs of choosing a knitted blanket. It should shed some light on how we choose the top picks and give you some reference info on what to look for if you're knitting it yourself - from yarn to patterns.



The yarn



If you make a mistake when choosing the yarn, there's no pattern of crafty hands that can knit a good throw. The information out there can be confusing...most knitting enthusiasts know it. That's rings even more true if we're talking about knitted cable and chunky blankets. Even if you have some experience in the "arena" but this is your first time choosing a knit blanket (or making one yourself) it's the most common mistake people make. It's only natural to reach for the softest yarn with a color you like.\But, choosing yarn for a throw is a sensitive matter and goes beyond the basics. To put it simply, even if you do know your yarn and have knitted or bought knit products like caps, scarfs or stoles, choosing right when it comes to a chunky cable knit throw blanket is a whole different story.









So let us dive right in. Let us look into the yarn types available, their characteristics and why they may (or may not be) right for a knitted blanket.



All-natural yarn - animal and plant fiber



Most widely available - wool


When you hear "wool" in the context of knitting, 9/10 people will assume you're talking about sheep wool. The popularity of wool is well-earned, it's a gift from nature...moisture-wicking, breathable and yet good at temperature isolation. It's also naturally resistant to microbes and fire-retardant.\



All of the above made it a very popular choice for yarn, but doesn't necessarily apply to knitted blankets...especially if you are using it as a throw and it will be touching your skin directly in those lazy afternoons as you fall asleep on your sofa



Many people will find it a bit rough and "scratchy" if used on its own for a piece of bedding.



Types of wool most commonly used for yarn



Merino


Although the first associations are Australia and New Zealand, if you follow the traces of merino through the ages, you'll find its origins in Spain.



The reason why most of us associate it with the lands "down under" is the fact that Australia produces close to a quarter of all merino wool made in the world - closing in on 500,000 tons.



Alpaca


Alpaca wool is softer against the skin and better suited for knitting blankets and throws that might be touching your skin directly (especially for those with sensitive skin or allergic to lanolin). If you see the word "cria" on a knit blanket or yarn you're considering, it means that that the wool comes from the first shearing of an alpaca.



Leicester wool (Blue-faced)


Because it makes for a smoother finish (velvet-like) and is gentler to the skin, this dense British wool would make for a more comfortable knit blanket or throw.



Peruvian


The wool from the Peruvian highlands is known to be "tough" and hold shape well. The toughness comes at a price - the feel against the skin. The rugged Peruvian will rarely be used for blankets or throws.



Yak


Not many people fully appreciate Yak wool because, to get the most out of it, one would have to know how to combine it with other fiber. Used on its own, its likely to be too delicate to knit a blanket that would last without losing shape. Combined with, for example, some types of acrylic, yarn that include some percentage of yak can result is soft and lightweight but warm blankets.



If you get this part right, you'll be surprised by the durability of yak wool fiber.



Mohair


Expensive and not as widely known, Mohair is a luxury fuzzy yarn. It's made from Agora goats fleece. One of its main advantages is how well is takes to color and dye and how color-fast it is. This allows for more vivid colors to with low risk of the yarn "bleeding."



Bottom line - for knitted blankets and throws, even the softer wool would feel too rugged and scratchy against the skin. That's why it's combined with materials like acrylic or licra to take that "prickly" edge off.









Cable knit blanket - choosing the yarn



I wouldn't dare say that the 80:20 rule applies. It's probably more accurate to say that the choice of yarn and pattern are 65-70% and the craftsmanship and know-how are 30-35 % of ending up with a solid blanket.



Once you've chosen the yarn that meets the main criteria - you being comfortable with how it feels against the skin, the next task it choosing a pattern that's suitable for a hand, cable knit blanket or throw. Here, we have some good and some "bad" news.



The good news is that we can share a few patterns that meet the criteria (paragraph below).



The "bad" news (if one can call it that) is that most of the suitable patterns won't be easy and probably too difficult for a beginner. The ones that meet all the criteria would require at least intermediate skill like (Zigging or Garter), while the best knitting patterns for a blanket (either cable or chunky) will call for advanced knitting skills (like laced cable knit, squares).



Bottom line - appearance aside, a well-chosen pattern will ensure that the final product retains shape or pill. If you are a beginner, it's smart to start with something simple like a garter cable knit blanket or a handmade crochet throw.



To be blunt for a second, if you're not experimenting and learning and actually need the blanket for a gift for someone who appreciates handmade stuff, we would recommend doing the research. It's fairly easy to find a good, say, handmade afghan blanket for sale - made by people who have been doing it for all their lives and have perfected their skills. If the person you are getting it for is a young girl, you might even go out on the limb with a knitted mermaid tail blanket (cotton crochet works wonderfully for a project this intricate).



Now that we have the basics down, let's get a bit more specific and look at some yarn-knit (or crochet) blanket combos.



Cable knit blanket



Good handmade cable knit blankets are scarce because they require serious skill to make, the process is slow (takes about 4-5 days of full-time work). That's why getting one of these locally (in the USA) is costly. That's why the recommendations we have here are from arts & crafts websites like Etsy that connect skilled people from smaller countries (the best ones come from Eastern Europe) and people from the US who can appreciate the work.



What is a cable knit blanket?



People tend to confuse a few terms used in the "industry" (like knitting, crochet and cabling). It's understandable because the differences are subtle and they overlap. For example, cabling is just another word for cable knitting. The main difference is that the later term is broader. To put it simply - cable knit blanket is one made using cable needles of different thicknesses.



It's the most versatile type of knitting, and people skilled with a cable needle can make mind-boggling patterns. Our top pick is a cable knit throw blanket is Paulina.









Sweater knit blanket



If the pattern and yarn used match those commonly used for sweaters you might see products described as "sweater knit blankets." Don't be confused by this; it's just a way to describe cable knit blankets made of specific yarn type using specific patterns (sweater-like).



Knit throw blanket



The two terms (knit throw and blanket) are a common source of confusion because their purposes overlap. So, let us take a moment here to clarify the difference because the terms are not interchangeable.



To put it simply, a throw's primary purpose is decorative. They are smaller and can be used as an added layer of comfort for bedroom or daily naps on your sofa.



You might find it defined as a blanket sub-type in terms of size (52 x 60 inches) but knit throw blankets do come as standalone products up to 10 smaller than the size we mentioned and up to 20 or 30 larger.



Knitted mermaid tail



A knitted mermaid tail blanket is simply a specific design that has become increasingly popular over the last decade. They are typically made of the same yarn-knit combos, and it all comes down to the pattern (mermaid-tail shaped).



Crochet temperature blanket knit



This one is specific with the main (and sometimes the only) difference being the choice of colors - that's what the "temperature" stands for. The terms are a source of confusion because people tend to interpreter the wording and jump to the conclusion that a "temperature blanket knit" is somehow warmer. It's not; it is all about the color that corresponds to the "color of the day."



The idea is to knit (crochet) one row of the crochet blanket per day, depending on the temperature outside. They make for great heirloom pieces and, I dare say, a temperature handmade crochet blanket with a personalized writing pattern is as good and well thought-out as a knitted gift can get.



To get an idea about a pattern, you can use the guidelines shown in the temperature blanket chart below.



You might see similar products described as "rainbow crochet blanket."



How long does it take to knit a crochet blanket?



It can take anywhere from a day to a full year to knit a blanket, all depending on the type of yarn, pattern and size. A chunky hand knit blanket can even be finished within an hour or two, while intricate patterns and styles (like temperature heirloom throws) take a year to make.



A few popular patterns



Some of the patterns used are evergreen (like a virus pattern) while some are part of more or less fleeting trends (like owl, pizza, hexagon, rainbow, elephant and Tunisian blankets and throws.



Size of knit lap blankets, duvets (comforters), quits (coverlets) and throws



Another "gray" area is the sizing. Things got confusing as some manufacturers started using the terminology in different ways to describe their products. To clarify the size issue, let us take a moment here and look at the standards for the knitted bedding:



[table id=56 /]



Chunky knit blanket - yarn, material combos & patterns



Chunky knit blankets have grown in popularity with the increasing number of people embracing the minimal designs because they work so well in adding "texture & dynamics" to a calm space without making it "flat". They stand out more than a regular cable-knit throws (crochet) for minimal spaces. In the guide below we look at them from all angles possible, from yarn and materials to the knitting process and possible patterns.



The popularity of the luscious look led to an avalanche of information about it available online; I have to be blunt and say that some of them are misleading...you'll find tutorials on how a "beginner" can knit it in no time, which is not exactly accurate.



While researching for this guide, we've established 3 things:





Handmade chunky knit blankets are indeed superior in terms of knot and overall shape retention.


The needle crochet blankets were superior to the arm-knit products. The space between the knots with the arm knit products seems to be too "loose" for long term shape retention, washing and maintenance.


The differences between brands of hand knit chunky blankets were too significant to make any general claims...it called for extensive testing of each product in a few quality categories to precisely separate the wheat from the chaff. And there's a lot of chaff out there.




We reported on our findings above, so in the rest of this guide we'll look into a few quality aspects to look for should you decide to shop on your own, whether it's offline or online and look for a regular or super chunky knit blanket on Etsy or similar websites.



Choosing the yarn for a chunky wool blanket



Chunky Merino wool



The most popular choice for both chunky knit blankets is the soft super chunky merino wool.



It's the go-to yarn and the first choice of the knitting experts we contacted for the project of putting this guide together. It was their first recommendation for both cable-knit and braid patterns.



Skinny wool



If you are looking to make or buy a more closely knit chunky blanket, you might go for a "skinnier" version of Merino wool threads.



It's the preferred choice for clothing and footwear knitting projects (like sweaters or knitted slippers).



The project will be lengthier compared to that of merino wool chunky blanket. The result will be a closer knit. The choice between the two comes down to your taste, what works better for your space.



Finally, think about the intended use - will you be using it as decorative gray throw blanket or cuddling underneath it for weekend binge-watching of Friend re-runs.



Vegan options - synthetic yarn



For some people, natural wool might not be an option. Whether it goes against your beliefs and a vegan lifestyle or you're simply allergic to sheep wool and natural yarn, you still have options.



There are yarn options out there that "mimic" the look and feel of wool almost perfectly (like Chenille).



Chenille knit



I absolutely love chenille as an alternative to animal product-based yarn.



The durability and easy of maintenance is nothing short of amazing. I rarely use words like "amazing," but I'm making an exception for chenille.



It's also lighter and packs smaller than Merino so it makes for a better travel companion for the outdoors.



Yarn weight and ply



Yarn weight that you might see on the ball speaks towards the thickness, not the weight of the ball itself. It's related to ply (how many strands are used to make the yarn).



If you see yarn described as "chunky", it will usually mean that it's 16 or 20-ply.



The weight and the ply combined will determine the gauge of the pattern. That goes for pretty much every project - from finer cable-knit / hand crochet blankets to giant chunky (made using jumbo yarn, over 20-ply).



How we rated the products



Our regular readers will remember that we announced starting the work on this guide well over a year before it actually published. It did take more than most of our guides because we have no knitting experts on the team. This meant that even crafting the resting and reviewing process took the know-how of outside consultants. We did extensive reviews on similar sleep-related product like electric blankets (you can see our guide on best heated electric blankets here) but those turned out to be simpler.



It took 2 months only to tweak and adjust our rating methods to knitted blankets. Once we had that part in place, the next step was budgeting for the project. That's where our consultants contributed by making the initial choices to be tested and reviewed. There was no way to test the hundreds of blankets available, so we narrowed down the search to about a dozen products in each category (cable-knit, crochet and chunky) and proceeded to test the blankets.



Apart from the 4 knitting experts, our featured testers include people from all walks of life. The larger the sample (number of people testing the blankets) the more accurate the results.



We sent out 37 blankets in total and asked our testers to make notes on the use - everything from comfort to maintenance.



Materials/yarn rating


Rating the material and yarn used for the blankets was tricky and the ratings are not absolute. If it were, it would be comparing apples to oranges and taking a stand on what's the best material. Instead, this rating speaks about the quality of the yarn within its category (wool compared to wool and synthetics yarn compared to its counterparts). Simply put, this rating speaks about the yarn in terms of how accurately it was described by the seller...things like:





how uniform the thickness of the thread


the tightness of the ply


yardage for the money




Comfort rating


This is subjective category, so it was crucial to make the sample as big as possible. That's why we had each tester use the product and sent it back to us after 6 months of use. We assessed the changes, dry-cleaned the blankets and sent them back out to our second group of testers.



If it sounds like a bit of improvisation it's because it was, we simply couldn't afford to increase the testing samples in any other way. The double-testing allowed us to test more products and make the testing more versatile and include intangible quality aspects like comfort.



Craftsmanship / design rating


This was one of the simpler categories to rate - 60 % of the rating is attributed to the scores a throw received in-house, 20 % are the ratings of our testers and 20 % is attributed to the data we pooled from user satisfaction.



It was only natural to attribute more "weight" to the opinions of the people who are experts in the field and a bit less to subjective owner opinions.



Shape retention rating


This category is a median between the shape retention after 6 months and 1 year of use. Before sending the products out for the second round of testing, we rated each product in the categories of overall shape retention (like pilling, curling of the sides & size changes with washing) and gauge retention.



Value for money


This is probably the most intricate category we rated the throws & blankets in because it involved the most variables (from yardage used per inch square to craftsmanship). It's another score we couldn't have reached without outside help.



3-month updates



We don't know of any similar guide on the quality of the knitted blankets available out there. We're not saying that our rating methodology is flawless because it includes subjective ratings like "Comfort" that will be different depending on what you consider as comfortable (how lightweight, soft or warm a blanket is).



We did our best to make it more accurate by increasing the size of the testing sample and we've committed to re-rate the products on quarterly basis by including new data to keep the information relevant. If we see a significant change in the user ratings (+/- 10 %) of specific products, we might decide to re-test that product only.



As per the advice of our expert panel, we'll do a full re-testing update once every 18 months. You can see the last time this guide was updated with fresh info both at the top and the bottom of the guide.



Finally, if you have any question, feel free to ask us in the comment section. We typically respond to all inquiries within 24 hours. If we don't know the answer, we'll find out.



Stay smart in your choices,



The Sleep Studies team



Last updated: January 2018



The following blog post Knitted Blanket – Our Top Picks Among Chunky & Cable Knit Blankets (Crochet) – Top 2 Out of 144 See more on: https://www.thesleepstudies.com







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/chunky-crochet-knitted-blankets/

Best Essential Oils for Sleep Apnea & Deep Sleep Promotion – Top 5 of 32 Tested – 2017 update

Over the last 10 months we’ve been working on what we think is the most comprehensive guide on essential oils for sleep out there.



The first thing we did is put together an expert panel of 15 aromatherapy experts. They helped us make the initial list of 32 products for further testing.



We then proceeded to purchase 5 packs of each product and test - we used the oils ourselves, but more importantly, we sent the products out to our featured testers. This is a group of people with problems like sleep apnea, insomnia, anxiety or some other sleep disorder.



It took this long to come up with the results because the sample for the statistical analysis had to be substantial enough to produce relevant data. The reviews and ratings you’re about to see a result of that lengthy process.









Best essential oils for sleep - Top 5



table



Best essential oil for sleep overall - doTERRA Serenity



With 94% of users reporting substantially relief with their sleep problems, this German Chamomile from Eden Gardens is the top rated oil overall.



About a third of our testers had a problem with sleep apnea, combined with issues like anxiety and restlessness.



With that “chunk" of people, the doTERRA Serenity restful blend had a higher highest satisfaction rate of 91%.



The blend includes Roman Chamomile, sweet Marjoram, Lavender , Ylang Ylang and Hawaiian sandalwood.



The doTerra blend does cost more than your run-of-the-mill oil but, based on what we’ve seen, it’s worth every cent.



You can read the user experiences at the links below.



Eden Gardens German chamomile - 100% therapeutic grade



It was a surprise that one of the two the top-rated oil is not a blend of some kind, but Chamomile in its purest form and of highest-quality.



The German Chamomile has a different aroma compared to any other Chamomile oil we look at - it has a certain sweetness to it.



This one is scarce and won’t find it in wholesale. The explanation we got is that the company doesn’t want to risk the potency being compromised by temperature changes or improper storage.



In these 10 months, one of the quality aspects that influenced our ratings is the user satisfaction, not just with a specific product but with the brand itself. What we’ve seen with Eden Gardens is a consistent 100% positive customer feedback.



We’ve been testing and reviewing sleep-related products for almost a decade now and we have NEVER seen that.



Healing solutions blends



This set of oils tested best with people whose issues go beyond sleep and anxiety.



The doesn’t come as a surprise because the set includes a proprietary blend for a range of problems - from the brand that addresses sleep, stress and immunity blends (Health Shield) and Deep Muscle Relief.



In terms of overall well-being, it’s the most complete set.



We’re not fans of using colloquial terms, but these smell amazing.



The blend includes a range of oils…too many to list here. Some of them are: Bergamot, Peppermint, Lavender, Patchouli, Ylang Ylang and Tea Tree.



Best essential oil for sleep problems & low energy - Asutra Premium Mist - 6 blend set



When we set out to complete this guide, we were determined to only focus on oils closely related to sleep, because we had no doubts about how helpful they can be.



We didn’t want to compromise the list by including sets that stray from the purpose into a wider range.



Three months into the testing process, we found ourselves rethinking that because of some fascinating experiences we’ve seen people reporting about this Asutra set.



Apart from the two blends aimed at promoting healthy rest and deep sleep (Pure Soothing Comfort & Instant Stress Relief), the set also includes 4 blends aimed at increasing energy, focus and confidence.



The last one (confidence) was especially surprising because, to be honest, claims like these are too vague for our taste because they’re not measurable.



However, too many people reported a dramatic change in this area for us to ignore it - one of the 6 blends included is “Confidence Elixir" and it does seem to justify its name.



Reference info about essential oils for sleep apnea, deep sleep and anxiety



This guide is not just about reporting on the results of our research about to the best essential oils for sleep, we also want to offer some reference information on why the specific plants work the way they do. The following section is all about that - exploring the plants, their origins, historical and modern use.



The first thing we’ll do is go over the oils most commonly used in sleep promoting blends; we’ll recommend a few ways to use them.



Chamomile



Being the natural beauty that it is, Chamomile flowers are often used for decorative purposes, but that’s not what it’s known for.



Since the ancient times, Chamomile has been used to promote healthy sleep. It’s native to Western Europe and North Africa and has been integrated into the Western pharmacopeia for as far back as it goes.



The species


Species of Chamomile used in aromatherapy are Roman, German and feverfew.



The range of benefits goes from inflammation to the more important ones (at least for us) like anxiety, tension, insomnia and even some attention disorders.



The Chamomile essential oil is typically mixed with almond oil because the two create a soothing smell that works wonders for promoting sleep.



For insomnia, Roman Chamomile will typically be the most effective one, that’s why we mentioned that the results of our research (that puts the German Chamomile by Eden Gardens at the very top) were a bit surprising.



In blends, it’s typically mixed with Lavender because the combo of the two plants provides the most powerful synergy.



Marjoram essential oil for sleep



Another plant with soothing properties, but also one more herb that requires a bit of knowledge if you want to choose the right kind. Many oil types go under the name of Marjoram these days.



The one that’s recommended for insomnia carries the original name of Origanum marjorana but it’s widely known as Sweet Marjoram.



Apart from being a sedative, Marjoram also helps with high blood pressure and hyperactive nervous system, especially one exuberated but the feelings of anxiety and grief.



Similar to Chamomile, Marjoram is at its most potent when it works in synergy with other oils. Most commonly, you’ll see it mixed with Lavender and Chamomile.



Lavender



Some plants do a good job at helping you fall asleep, while other essential oils are best for promoting deep sleep and a healthy balance between sleep phases.



Lavender is one of the few oils that balances the two (it’s as effective in battling insomnia as it is in promoting deep sleep).



The esters and alcohols in the Lavender oil have other therapeutic uses, but none of them is as well known as relief from relaxation and anxiety.



Species of Lavender used in essential oils



The most commonly used species of Lavender is Lavandula angustifolia also known as True Lavender because it has the most potent sedating properties. Species like Spike Lavender or Hybrid Lavandine are also used in some blends but they’re not as potent.



How to use essential oils for sleep



Proper use of the oils is just as important as choosing the best ones. Below, we’ll make a couple of suggestions.



A warm bath


Including essential oils in your warm bath can be a very effective way to soothe your racing nervous system after a busy day.



The two most common mistakes people make here are using too much oil or making the bath too hot.



The water should be warm and we would recommend no more than 7-8 drops of oil. The setting can be further complemented with a bubble bath, just make sure that the scents complement each other.



Use them with a diffuser


Just before bedtime, you can use the essential oils with a diffuser. Diffusers are especially popular for helping a child fall asleep, simply because they are practical.



You have the option of choosing an electric or a candle diffuser. For an adult, a candle aromatherapy diffuser might offer a more complete experience, but for kids, electrical diffusers are the more practical option.



If you have a kid battling insomnia, the use of essential oils for sleep can go beyond the direct benefits - it can become a part of a familiar pre-sleep ritual. If you can achieve that, essential oils can go a long way in insomnia relief.



Essential oil massage


You might be noticing a pattern by now, essential oils for sleep work best when coupled with another relaxing routine, like a massage.



Note that essential oils are not intended to be used for massage on their own and you would need to dilute them into a massage blend.



Let’s take a moment here and recommend a “recipe" for a massage blend.



The rule of thumb can be to stick with 2 to 3% off essential oils diluted into a carrier oil, like jojoba wax. Here’s an example of that.



2% massage oil will look something like this:





1 oz (30 ml) of jojoba wax


3 drops of Lavender oil


1 drop of Yilang Yilang oil


5 drops of Cedarwood oil


1 drop of Vetiver oil




Darken the bedroom, put on some relaxing ambient tunes or white noise (like rain of waves crashing) and have your partner gently massage your neck and shoulder area.



Apply some oil to your linen & pillow


Using a water spritzer, dilute a small amount of an essential oil and spray some of the solution around your sleeping area.



To avoid stains, try not to spray directly into the linen or the pillow but over them, allowing the mist to gently fall onto your bed. If your bed frame is polished, do your best to avoid sprinkling the solution onto polished surfaces.



Other oils commonly included in sleep-promoting-blends



Apart from the ones listed above, blends of the best essential oils for sleep might include some of the following plants: Rose, Sage, Ylang Ylang, Neroli, Sandalwood, Valerian, Bergamot, sweet orange and others.



Other plants used in essential oils for sleep



As we outlined at the beginning of this chapter, we’ll now dig a bit deeper and explore some of the lesser-known plants with sedating and soothing properties. The "story" doesn't end there. To answer the question "What essential oils are good for sleep?", we have to dig deeper and explore some other plants commonly included in sleep aid blends.



Valerian - commonly used in essential oils for sleep apnea



Although Valerian is known for its sleep promoting action, it’s mainly used in the form of Valerian root - you can see our guide on the best Valerian root supplements here.



The knowledge about what Valerian can do for sleep dates back to ancient Greece. Some of the great physicians of the time (like Hippocrates) have used and recommended it for insomnia.



The Romans resumed the knowledge from the Greeks and explored Valerian into more depth. They used it not only for sleep related issues but physical manifestations, like heart palpitation.



Its wide use lasted all the way through the Middle-ages, when it was even used as a pill.



Following the Renaissance, it was discovered that Valerian was helpful in treating epilepsy.



During the Great War, physicians provided large quantities of Valerian to soldiers who needed help with anxiety caused by bombing and all the traumas that follow a war.



The debate about the mechanisms through which Valerian does its “magic" is ongoing and there are very few double-blind studies about it. That comes as a surprise, because Valerian is the most widely used herb for two battling insomnia.



You can see a summation of the most well-known studies here.



Some of the newer reports show that 1 in 3 people with sleep problems have tried to address them by using Valerian.



It’s fair to say that the effects of the herb still remain a mystery, but only in terms the mechanisms at work…its effectiveness is beyond doubt. There are some scientists who still claim that the results are based on placebo. To be honest, we’re not too interested in the mechanisms and the nitty-gritty and neither are the people who got relief.



The important part is that the herb is safe and is even prescribed to children with insomnia.



Effects of Valerian on restless legs syndrome


In 2009, a comprehensive study has been conducted to explore the effects of Valerian on Restless Leg Syndrome. The study reported that the consumption of 800 mg of Valerian daily for 8 weeks offered significant relief to the people suffering from the syndrome.



Apart from helping with the restless legs, it also reduced daytime sleepiness.



You can see the full results and conclusions here.



Synergy


The herb is most potent when combined with hops and lemon balm (we’ll look into the two plants in a minute).



Advantages of using Valerian essential oil for sleep



As we mentioned, the main form used is dried root, both raw or in the form of a pill.



For many people, the smell and taste will be too much to handle. That’s where essential oils come in. When combined into soothing blends, the issue of taste and smell becomes a moot point.



Lemon balm



Lemon balm origins are scattered around Europe (mostly around the Mediterranean area), Asia and North Africa.



First notes of its use date back to the beginning of our era. In France, the Emperor Charlemagne recommended lemon balm to his subjects as a remedy for nervousness and insomnia.



It’s also been reported to help with digestive problems and heart palpitations.



To date, no significant side effects of lemon balm have been reported. However, this doesn’t mean that you should consume too much of it, primarily because the body tends to get used to it, which mitigates the effects in the long run.



That’s why lemon balm is typically used on intermittent basis, like a cycle of 2 to 3 weeks followed by one week off.



Blends


Lemon balm is often mixed with Lavender , Passionflower and Valerian. In this combo, it’s reported to have positive effects that go beyond sleep, like circulation issues or digestive problems.



Lemon tree - used in essential oils for deep sleep



Lemon tree is appreciated by sculptors and furniture makers just as much as aroma therapists…for different reasons, of course. In the Roman era, the bark of lemon tree was used to make mats and ropes.



The sedative effects of its flowers are even described as hypnotic.



Apart from the sleep-related issues, lemon balm has been proven to be a mild diuretic and help with the common cold, especially in children.



All of the above has been extensively explored in a famous book “Flore laurentienne" by Marie-Victorin published in 1953.



With the discovery of the New World, the use of lemon tree flourished, because the settlers learned about it from the native Indians, who used the herb extensively.



Hops



Also known as Vineyard of the North, Hops originates from Europe, Asia and North America.



In nature, it’s a perennial climber, but today it’s grown in all climates and altitudes.



The parts used in aromatherapy are the female flowers, known for their distinctive aroma and bitter taste.



In history, the reports of its use date back to the Romans and Greeks, who primarily used it for digestive problems. The Cherokee Indians used hops to treat arthritis and kidney disease.



The first traces of hops used for certain sleep-related problems insomnia trace back to traditional Chinese medicine.



There are no studies to report here and the evidence is mostly anecdotal. The anecdote that stands is that “hop-pickers" tend to fall asleep on the job after a few hours of picking the plant.



Passionflower



The name of this plant is commonly misunderstood and people tend to mistake it for an aphrodisiac.



It has nothing to do with that.



The word “passion" refers to the shape of the central filaments and is given to the plant in reference to the passion of Christ, because it resembles the torns of the crown.



It was introduced to Europe in the 17th century and its popularity has been growing ever since, mainly because of the spectacular appearance of the multiple subspecies.



It originates from the humid forests of South America, where the original strains are currently threatened to be extinct because of the massive deforestation.



The humankind has been fascinated by the flower for so long and, today, we even have an international organization dedicated to the plant - you can see their website at Passiflorasociety.org.



The organization is dedicated to pinpointing every subspecies of the plant and it’s partly because of their work that, today, we know off over 400 Passionflower sub-species.



Used in aromatherapy in medicine


Passionflower has mainly been admired for its appearance and the anxiolytic benefits and has been vastly ignored by the Western medicine until the beginning of the 20th century.



It’s sometimes added to the best blends of essential oils for sleep as an anti-anxiolytic.



Neroli



The essence of Neroli has both sedative and antidepressant qualities.



It’s universally recognized and used to calm digestive problems in babies. When it comes to essential oil blends, Neroli is added because of the calming smell (that can even help with sleep on its own).



The pleasant smell is so strong that Neroli is widely used in the perfume industry.



From the angle aromatherapy, the best part is the potency to overcome other smells, like the unpleasant smell of Valerian root.



Vervine



You might know Vervine by one of its many names: sacred grass, blood grass, grass of the sorcerers and even “grass of all evils."



Its Latin name is Verbena Officinalis and it’s not as widely known as some of the plants we talked about thus far.



Most of the former infamy can be attributed to Paul-Victor Fournier, a famous 19th century botanist calling it an “iron wire" and shrugging off any of its potential benefits.



Today, we know better because the medicinal properties of Vervine are exceptional - ranging from anxiety to intestinal disorders related to stress.



It’s usually consumed as tea and it’s fair to say that the Vervine essential oil is a “youngster" in the aromatherapy arena.



Those who are privy to it know that it is one of the 14 plans used to make the famous balm of Saint Antoine used to treat gangrene and less serious external injuries like cuts and bruises.



Ylang-ylang



Ylang-ylang is one of the most versatile essential oils. Besides being a sedative, it’s also known as an antiseptic, hypotensive (helps lower blood pressure) and antiseborrheic (helps with dermatitis).



But let’s stick to our topic…ylang-ylang is not only a sedative but it’s used to prevent and repair minor damages to the nervous system.



With all that in mind, it comes as no surprise that the herb is extensively included in some of the best essential oils for sleep apnea and deep sleep.



Clary Sage



Most women familiar with the world of aromatherapy will know Clary Sage. It offers relief from menstrual pain and support hormonal balance.



It’s included in sleep promoting essential oils as a nerve tonic with warming properties.



Summary, final thoughts and future updates



At the beginning, we made a bold promise, to put together the most comprehensive guide possible on using essential oils to deal with issues like sleep apnea, imbalance of sleep phases (lack of deep sleep) and anxiety.



To summarize, we reported on the top five best essential oils for sleep-related issues and we did our best to explain how the plants in the oils work their “magic."



The first section of this guide (the ratings of the oils) is updated every 6 months to ensure that the info presented is fresh and relevant. The 6-month updates include the user satisfaction category that’s partly based on the data we’ve gathered from all around the web.



We’re also setting a goal to re-test the oils (including any new arrivals to the market) once every 18 months.



If you have any specific questions, feel free to reach out in the comment section or by emailing us. If we don’t have the expertise to answer, we’ll seek help from our expert panel and get back to you as soon as possible.



Stay calm and sleep well,



The Sleep Studies Team



The article Best Essential Oils for Sleep Apnea & Deep Sleep Promotion – Top 5 of 32 Tested – 2017 update was originally published to TSS







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/essential-oils-for-sleep-apnea/

Sleep Number Competition – Our Top 3 Picks from Personal Comfort Beds – 2017 Update

In November 2017, the main Sleep Number competitor, Personal Comfort Beds, have won their second back-to-back lawsuit against Sleep Number.



To put it simply, the lawsuit was about Sleep Number claiming that their competition is falsely advertised their beds by saying and they were “preferred over Sleep Number” and “upgraded versions” of the Sleep Number beds.



As far as we know, what tipped the scales was the testimony of Craig Miller (President of American National Manufacturing) who actually built 2 beds side by side (Personal Comfort A8 and Sleep Number i8) to prove that the advertising claims were not false.



The whole thing and it with Miller’s statement, "We were proud to show the jury and everyone in attendance the true difference in quality manufacturing, and it was great to have jurors approach me after the trial to and say our product was clearly better.”



The company describes their mattresses as “the last mattress you’ll ever need.” In this guide, we explore whether that statement holds water.









The guide on Sleep Number competition was long overdue



We know it’s going to be hard to convince anybody that we’re on publishing this guide after the mess of the lawsuit and we’re not even going to try, but it’s the truth.



We had requests to analyze our top picks among Sleep Number competition since we first started reviewing adjustable airbeds (years ago).



So, before we even get to specific products, we’d like to stress 2 things:





We did not receive any free products for this guide… no shenanigans like that


This guide is a result of our readers asking us to recommend beds like Sleep Number, but at a lower price




With that out of the way, let’s get back to our work, list our picks and analyze them top to bottom.



Lower price range - Personal Comfort A2 - competition of Sleep Number bed C2



Fact sheet:





dimensions - 80 x 60 inches (Queen)


thickness - 8 inches


warranty - 25 years


weight - 65 LBS


made in - USA, FDA registered facility


shipping - free




At the time of the last update to this guide, the Personal Comfort A2 was significantly less expensive than the Sleep Number C2.



Even though it’s their basic model, the Personal Comfort A2 features most of the advantages that make the adjustable beds tick.



The number of firmness settings is 45 and all foam used is guaranteed to meet the strictest standards set by CertiPUR-US.



Who is it for?



At a lower price range that most classic mattresses these days, the Personal Comfort A2 will be the choice of people who want to enjoy the luxury of an adjustable airbed without breaking the bank.



The C2 is part of the Classic Series. Beds from the series cost anywhere from 2 to 6 times less than those with more bells and whistles (like using your phone to control the firmness of the bed).



The 3 main features one should look for in a good adjustable bed are there:





    Two zone firmness technology - you can set the firmness of the two halves of the bed to different levels


    High number of firmness presets - 45


    Solid warranty - 25 years




Most importantly, even in this price range, Personal Comfort offers a 120 nights of risk-free trial to try out the bed and see if it’s right for you.



You can read what owners are sharing about it & check the current price by clicking one of the buttons below.



Medium price range - Personal comfort A5 - competition to Sleep Number P5



The Personal Comfort A5 comes with all the luxury of the competing model from Sleep Number (P5) with a much lower price tag - the difference in prices is between 35 and 45% (at the moment of completing this guide).



It’s part of the Advanced Series.



The mattress is 3 inches thicker than the basic C2 model. As you go up the price scale of the Personal Comfort beds, the A5 is the first model to offer their patented panel cover.



The zippered cover allows you to customize your bed even further by adding or removing layers of foam simply by unzipping it.



It’s one of the few models (A5 to A10) that feature a reversible top panel cover.



The company calls it “seasonal” because the two sides offer different levels of breathability - more heat retention in the winter & more breathability for the summers.



They also recommend flipping once every six months to minimize the changes of the top surface. It might be worth mentioning that, since it’s removable, you can have it dry cleaned.



The A5 comes in Queen and King size - you can see what owners are saying about the bed by following the links below.



On the high-end of the price scale - Personal Comfort A8 - competition to Sleep Number i8



Surprisingly, it’s the high end of the price range where the savings compared to the Sleep Number beds are the most significant, not just in the overall cost but in terms of percentages, too.



The A8 comes with pretty much every luxury that makes an adjustable bed special, from the dual control the firmness, customizable padding, adjustable/reversible top panel to the Bluetooth controls (using your phone).



The A8 belongs to the Elegance Series and comes as a Queen, King & and Split King.



The Split King allows you to adjust the positions and inclination of the two parts of the bed. It’s sleep luxury embodied.



You can read owner experiences and compare prices by following the links below.



Reference info and more details



In the section below, we’ll go a bit more in-depth and explain what each of the features of Personal Comfort Beds means for the owners. So, let’s see what the mattresses of the main Sleep Number competition are made of.



First of all, the company makes a special point and stresses the fact that they are the only ones in the industry to have their products manufactured by medical device company registered with the FDA and the beds manufactured in the USA.



The hand controller


The currently used generation III of hand controllers is based on touch screen technology and interface. The generation III made the firmness control more intuitive since it’s not just numbers but includes actual visualization of the firmness.



Each controller comes in its own protective encasement and allows the user to select two settings (per controller) and memorize them. What this means for the user is that, once you find your sweet spot, you can memorize the settings without meddling with the presets every time.



This typically involves a bit of experimentation on your side, but once you find that sweet spot, it’s all worth it.



Calibration


The air control unit currently used in Personal Comfort beds is also generation III. The advanced calibration makes the adjustments easier and the pressure readouts more accurate.



This might sound complicated but, for the user, it means that the controls adjust to the mattress elevation and size, simplifying the setup process.Two-zone comfort



Each of the Personal Comfort Beds that comes in either Queen King or California King size features two-zone personalization.



To put it simply, this means that all the settings available can be personalized for the two halves of the bed.



Lifetime of interchangeable sections


If you had your Personal Comfort bed for, say, five years and you decide that you want to upgrade or downgrade and interchangeable parts (like the top cover, the center panel, comfort layers or the unit of the air control) you can do so at your convenience.



Replaceable parts


Each component can be replaced, which means that you can “freshen up” your bed over the years by changing some of them (from the foam layers to the sides).



It’s an option you might use if you want to bring back the “feel of a new mattress.”



Going Series up


The beds are designed so that you’re not “stuck” with the one you got.



For example, if you got the Classic Series, you can always upgrade to some of the models that belong to the Elegance Series or even add an adjustable bed base.



Top panel


We already mentioned that the models in the range of A5 to A10 feature a reversible top panel cover patented by the company. Let’s take a moment here to explain what it is.



The two sides are made of different materials - one more suitable for the winter and the other for the summer, which is why they call it a “seasonal cover.”



One of the materials is more breathable while the other traps more of your body temperature, but it’s not just about heat retention.



To maximize the lifespan of the surface, the company recommends flipping it twice a year.



The foam


Any of the models starting from A3 uses some type of high-quality Polyurethane foam (either as one solid piece or convoluted).



The foam has contouring properties, meaning that it adjusts to the body type of the sleeper.



No risk of air leaks


The air chambers are made of vulcanized rubber (24-gauge) and are practically impenetrable.



You can see the chambers tested under extreme conditions below.



The memory foam


Memory foam used for the Personal Comfort beds is trademarked by the company as ThermaPhase Gel™.



The main difference compared to other types of memory foam is that the structure is open-cell, which distributes heat much more efficiently.



Combined with the polyurethane foam, it’s designed to minimize any pressure points and improve your circulation.



The foam adheres to the strictest standards of CertiPUR-US® for safety and durability.



The hoses


The hoses that conduct the air from the control unit to the chambers are reinforced to be kink-resistant. It ensures that the air supply is uniform.



This is especially important if you have a split model since the movement of the mattress could compromise the hoses and interfere with the air supply.



The rail system


With all the sections of foam that are reversible and can move, it’s important to have a reliable rail system to keep it all tightly in place.



Starting from A4, each of the beds features “Wrapped Rails” that do just that.



Final thoughts



Since we first started our mattress review program, thesleepstudies.com has adhered to a strict objectivity policy. As we mentioned at the beginning, we did not receive any free products for this guide that might cast a shadow over that policy.



This guide was meant to take an objective look at the main Sleep Number competition - Personal Comfort Beds and point out some advantages and shortcomings.



We hope that we did that.



To make the information presented here fresh and relevant at all times, we update this guide on 6-month basis.



You can share any questions or dilemmas in the comment section or by directly emailing us, we respond to all correspondence within 24 hours. If it’s in within our area of expertise, we’ll do our best to help.



The Sleep Studies Team



The blog post Sleep Number Competition – Our Top 3 Picks from Personal Comfort Beds – 2017 Update was first published to TSS







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/sleep-number-competition/

SleepPhones Review – AcousticSheep & Wireless – top 3 models – 2017 update

The top 3 picks among acoustic SleepPhones are a result of over 3,000 work-hours and 32 products tested.



We started gathering data for this guide about 6 months ago, and the ratings you’ll see below are a result of our in-house testing and statistical analysis of over 7000 user reviews.



We did our best to make this buyer’s guide as versatile as possible by including different types of SleepPhones, from classic to wireless (Bluetooth).



In case you reached this page and are not yet sure what exactly are you looking for, we’ll also compare the top picks among SleepPhones with products of similar type, like BedPhones. Let’s just take it one step at a time.









Table*



SleepPhones Wireless Review - SB5LM



The SB5LM is a wireless set of SleepPhones we found superior in pretty much all quality aspects, from Comfort & Fit, Ergonomics to sound quality (music, white noise and ASMR).



With the user satisfaction rating of 90/100, ergonomics rating of 93 and an overall rating of 92/100, the SB5LM outperformed in similar products we looked at, which created the significant gap in ratings.



The battery life is a solid 13 to 14 hours, while the range of the wireless signal is 15 to 30 feet.



All quality ratings





Comfort & Fit - 92/100


Ergonomics (seamlessness) - 94/100


Sound clarity - 90/100


Durability (shape retention) - 92/100


User satisfaction - 90/100


Value for money - 90/100




Who will choose the SB5LM wireless SleepPhones?



If you’re the kind of person who puts comfort first and you’re OK with spending a few more dollars to get it, the SB5LM will be your choice.



The electronics used for this set is lead-free, which might be worth mentioning if safety is one of your concerns.



The craftsmanship is unparalleled, from the seams and closures to the soft finish.



Bottom line - this set is the best-rounded product we tested & it’s backed up by a 1 year manufacturer’s warranty.



You can see what the owners are saying about it by following the links below.



SleepPhones Wireless with ultra-thin speakers & fabric



This set is a combination of the classic AcousticSheep SleepPhones and the modern wireless version based on Bluetooth technology.



As far as we can tell, they easily connect to any compatible device (such as an Android or an iPhone).



The specifications of the wireless technology are similar to that of the SB5LM (13 hours of battery life in a wireless reach of up to 30 feet).



size-chart



Who will choose them?



The user satisfaction percentage of these is somewhat lower compared to our top pick. The reason for that might be the fact that the material is ultrathin since the set is designed to be as seamless as possible.



The choice between these and the SB5LM will come down to your preference in terms of material. The company calls the material used for this set Breeze fabric, which is a good way to describe it - it’s stretchier and thinner.



You can read the user reviews and answered questions by clicking one of the links below.



AcousticSheep SleepPhones classic



If you’re looking to spend as little as possible and you are comfortable with the corded version of the SleepPhones, the classic model might be right for you.



The material is slightly different compared to the SB5LM. Having the lower price in mind, these performed pretty well.not as well as the SB5LM but they do cost significantly less.



They come in three sizes - medium (which is supposed to fit most people), extra small and extra large.



What should you look for?



The jury is still out on the way sounds, music and white noise influences sleep. You’ll find different opinions, ranging from those who advise sleeping in absolute silence (even with sleep earplugs - you can see our guide on best sleep earplugs here) to those who see the effects of relaxing music or white noise as nothing short of miraculous.



We don’t belong to either of the two groups, but the body of evidence to support the claim that sound does have a positive impact on both falling asleep and sleep quality is growing.



So if we had to choose, we would say that, for most people with sleep problems, sound is definitely worth exploring.



It’s just a matter of doing it right because it’s easy to simply throw on any headphone set and try to fall asleep. That’s not how it should work.



The choice of a specific set can make all the difference and even if you found that sound didn’t help in the past; wireless and Bluetooth SleepPhones are a whole different story.



Now that we covered some specific recommendations let us take a step back and look at the theory behind it all & what you should look - this should also give you an idea on how we compared and rated the products.



As we mentioned in the AcousticSheep SleepPhones review, both versions come from the same company.



The fabric


We mentioned that the effects of sound and music can vary significantly depending on the type of headset you use.



It’s only natural because there’s no comparing the comforts of soft suede-like fabric to a clunky headphone set.



So let’s talk about comfort



The two main types of headset specifically designed for sleep are noise-canceling headphones and headbands with padded fabric and the speakers built-in.



A while back we completed the guide on the best budget-friendly noise canceling headphones - you can see it here - https://thesleepstudies.com/best-noise-cancelling-headphones-under-100-200/



This guide is dedicated to the latter group. The seamlessness of the headband will probably be the more comfortable choice for most people when it comes to sleep.



The leader in the industry here is SleepPhones; to the point where think that the brand is a synonym for the products.



There are others similar products out there, but the company currently dominates the market in pretty much every quality aspect.



For now, let’s get back to the analysis at hand



We left things at mentioning noise-canceling headsets, so let us take a brief moment here to clearly separate the two.



The two main differences are the ability to block the outside noise and comfort.



As the name suggests, any headset that includes the words “noise-canceling” blocks the outside noise, either by simply being a physical barrier or by creating a sound wave frequency to cancel out the incoming noises.



The advantage of these sets is obvious - they’re better suited if you need to drown the noise around you, whether it’s snoring or a loud the neighborhood. The downside is the classic design that’s not of much use for side sleepers.



The main advantage of the headbands is the comfort. The seamless fabric wraps around your head. You get used to the feeling within a week or two so that you don’t even notice them.



This makes them the superior choice for side-sleepers. The downside is that the fabric can only do so much in terms of drowning out sounds like snoring.The solution in between



Between the SleepPhones and the headphones, you’ll find what might be a sweet spot for many people. It’s acoustic noise-canceling earplugs like the Bose Quiet Comfort 20.

These will offer you a significant isolation from the noise, while still being seamless and thin enough for sleep.



Who might need SleepPhones?



If you have problems falling asleep and found that music helps, you’ll definitely love the SleepPhones wireless models.



After all, for purposes of inducing sleep, the sound quality (like bass or treble) is pretty much a non-factor.



If you have tinnitus



If you suffer from the condition, there’s no need to explain it.



For those reading the guide and are not familiar with it, people with tinnitus hear buzzing or ringing sounds even when there is no source around.

For tinnitus sufferers, relaxing music, ASMR or white noise can be game-changers and finally allow you to get some decent sleep.



If you sleep with a snorer



When it comes to getting your ZZZs, there are few things more frustrating than your sleeping partner being a snorer.

Depending on how loud the snoring is, pretty much every product that we listed above can offer relief.



Our criteria for the SleepPhones reviews



To reach the overall rating that saw above we used 6 quality categories. Let’s take a moment here to explain the ones that are not so intuitive.



Sound clarity


We always listed all the quality categories so that you can get a better impression of what are the strengths and weaknesses of a particular set and make your decision accordingly.



For some people, the clarity and quality of the sound will not be a big deal, especially if the main purpose of the set is going to be sleep



Quality aspects of the sound such as the bass, treble or volume levels don’t make much difference if you’re listening to white noise, relaxing tunes or ASMR.



Comfort and fit


When it comes to comfort and fit, the SleepPhones (both Wireless of the classic AcousticSheep) are unparalleled.



They gently wrap around your head, and there are no knobs or parts sticking out that would interfere with your sleep. Speakers are flat, built into the headband and seamless.



Seamlessness - Ergonomics



We slightly tweak the statistical formula used for the different types of SleepPhones because the ergonomics rating goes beyond how well they fit.



You’ll notice in the SleepPhones reviews above, the wireless models have high ratings in the ergonomics category.



You want to pay special attention to this quality aspect if you are a side or restless sleeper.



If that’s the case, there’s little to think about because the SleepPhones Wireless will outperform the other types 9 times out of 10 when it comes to seamlessness.



Noise isolation


You’ll notice that most of the products among the Acoustic SleepPhones, including the wireless Bluetooth models, will have a similar (or even the same) rating in this quality aspect.



That’s because the differences are very slight, especially if they’re made from the same material.



Safety concerns


If you’re concerned about safety and not comfortable sleeping with a cable anywhere near you, the choice is clear - you’ll go with a pair of wireless Bluetooth acoustic SleepPhones.



How does Bluetooth work in SleepPhones wireless models?



Before we get to a more precise explanation about how Bluetooth wireless technology works with SleepPhones, let’s take a step back and look at the technology itself. That will make the issue of pairing SleepPhones with a master Bluetooth device much clearer.



The radio frequency transceiver of Bluetooth works in the ISM range which is around 2.4 GHz. Just as a piece of trivia, let us mention that it’s the same radio frequency that Wi-Fi and a microwave use.



Fading and interference in the operation of the Bluetooth transmission are minimized by what the experts call “frequency hopping.”



The technology of the whole Bluetooth system is known in the RF arena as “star.”



It’s a way of explaining that the devices are connected in a pigeoned network, which includes one master device (in this case of SleepPhones, the master is typically your phone). Using radio frequency terminology, in this pigeoned network, the SleepPhones would be called “slaves.”



The phone provides the synchronization references and SleepPhones are synchronized to the common frequency and clock.



The subdivisions units of the wireless connection are known as slots. The packets of data transmitted between the phone and the set each have a position in one of the slots.



We’re including this explanation to clarify why a set may (or may not) perform well when paired with the master device.



SleepPhones wireless - a more specific explanation and review of the pairing



The explanation above is probably not going to be of much use if you don’t know the basics of radio frequency topology, but we just wanted to lay the foundations so that we can explain the inner workings of how wireless Bluetooth SleepPhones are paired with the master device (phone).



In this part, we’ll try to be less “sciency” so that you can understand the whole thing better. The point is to establish a clear reference about why a set might be superior in transferring data (receiving it, to be more precise).



Below, we’ll outline a few steps of pairing the SleepPhones with the master device:



One - step one is obvious, placing the sound source within range. It’s usually not going to be a problem to place the headphones close enough to the master device, since the set has a decent range of up to 30 feet.



Two - find the Bluetooth feature on your phone (typically listed in Settings) and turn it on.



Three – a charged set of Bluetooth SleepPhones will be already enabled. This means that you don’t have to do anything and the phone will find the device on its own.



Four - the headset will appear in the list of Bluetooth devices on your phone. When you select the device, your phone might ask for a PIN code, which is usually supplied within the instruction manual. In most cases, the PIN code will be four zeros (0000).



Five - the devices will pair in mere seconds and you’re good to go. Anything that plays on your phone, like relaxing sleep-induction music, ASMR or white noise will now be delivered through the thin speakers of the SleepPhones.



Issues we have seen in our testing & troubleshooting



The SleepPhones have a high-quality Bluetooth unit and there were no significant issues to report, either with establishing the connection or it being interrupted once established.



With some other headsets, we did see a few issues. In most cases, it happens the first time you pair the two devices.



Here’s what to do if it happens:



The good old turning on and off usually solves the problem. In this case that applies to the phone.



The first thing you want to try is switching the Bluetooth off and turning it on again and repeat the steps outlined above. If that doesn’t work in your phone is still not finding the SleepPhones, shut it completely, turn it on again and repeat the process.



The headset might be the issue in one of the following two scenarios - either they’re not charged or, in rare cases (about 2% according to our stats), they might be faulty on arrival.



Even if that happens, you’re covered by the one year manufacturer’s warranty.



FAQs about the AcousticSheep SleepPhones



Since we compiled this guide & initially published the SleepPhones review we did receive a few questions about the sets and, 80% of the questions were regarding the classic AcousticSheep .



So, in the section below, we’ll address some of the frequently asked questions.



What is the headband made of?



The material used for the AcousticSheep set is trademarked by the company as “Sleep Cloud.” It is 5% spandex and 95% polyester woven into a smooth fleece-like fabric.



Is it comfortable enough to be used as a mask?



Yes, you can pull down the headband and use it as a mask. In our experience, we would say that the more substantial material of the as SB5LM is more comfortable and offers an experience closer to that of a real sleep mask compared to the AcousticSheep.



Can the material be washed?



Yes, you can remove the thin speakers and wash the fabric of the headband.



Just make sure that it’s completely dry before you put the speakers back in. To be clear, this is not a safety issue for you, but traces of moisture can damage the circuitry of the speakers. Both the Breeze fabric and the material of the SB5LM can be machine washed.



It’s even recommended that you machine wash them from time to time - it will help with shape retention.



With prolonged use, they tend to stretch and lose a bit of shape like any similar material. Washing them helps retain the original shape and size.



What colors are available?



We mentioned it in the digest of the AcousticSheep SleepPhones review - they come in five colors - Midnight Black, Galaxy Blue, Quiet Lavender, Sunset Pink and Soft Gray.



Are there replacement parts available?



Yes, there are replacement parts both on the website of the company and on websites like eBay. It’s important to note that using parts that don’t come from the company directly makes the warranty void.



Can they be used with a TV set?



Theoretically yes, but you would have to be close enough since these are corded.



If the setting of your living or bedroom allows you to physically plug them into the TV, you can watch your favorite shows without disturbing your sleep partner.



Noise isolation for the people around



If you’re using your the set while sitting down (like on a plane), there will be very leakage of sound and it’s not likely you’ll disturb anyone around you.



It’s the loft of the fabric the “drowns” the sound.



However, once you apply pressure to the speakers (like leaning against your seat or window), the sound leakage increases significantly.



So, if you need to listen to the music higher volume levels, the people around you will probably hear it.



Do the work in stereo (hemi-sync)?



The construction of the cord is dual, which means that if the sound is stereo, they will adjust and provide different sound levels of the two speakers.



How well they cancel out snoring?



There is no active noise-cancellation. This means that canceling out the snoring noise will depend on a few factors.



Noise-isolation relies on the speaker and the band as a physical barrier so, in those terms, they will work better for side sleepers.



Are they reversible?



Since the fabric is very thin, you can reverse them (label on the outer side) but that’s not what they’re designed for and you might find the positioning of the speakers to be slightly off.



Do they include a microphone?



The AcousticSheep SleepPhones (the classic model) doesn’t come with a microphone, but there are other products from the company that do include one.



Is there a timer setting?



The basic model has no timer setting and you control how long they stay on by setting the timer on your phone.



Are they comfortable for back sleepers?



The seam of the headband is in the back, so it’s reasonable to ask whether that can be a problem for back sleepers.



Unless you are particularly sensitive, we don’t see this as an inconvenience if you’re sleeping on your back because both the seams and fabric are very thin.



For the sleeper to feel the seam, the pillow they’re using would have to be extremely firm.



Can I replace the battery?



We didn’t see any issues with the battery, but if you do want to get an extra, you’d have to get the whole Bluetooth module (sold on their website separately).



Are they suitable for use with a CPAP mask?



We didn't mention this part in the AcousticSheep SleepPhones review digest - they can deffinitily be used with the sleep mask; it’s only a question whether you use them over the mask straps or under.



This will depend on the type of mask you have and whether you choose the classic headband or the thinner, Breeze fabric.



What’s the difference between fleece and Breeze fabric?



The classic fleece fabric is 5% spandex and 95% polyester, while the ratio of the two materials in Breeze fabric is 12 to 88%.



This means that the Breeze fabric is thinner, lighter and more breathable. It’s also more elastic and, in our experience, retains shape longer.



The conclusion will be that the Breeze variety of the material will be more convenient to use with a CPAP mask.



How to make sure the size fits?



First of all, let’s look at the table of the three available sizes. The numbers and indicators should tell you which size is the right fit for you. We found that M-size is a good fit in a vast majority of cases.



size-chart



If you’re still unsure about which size to go with it, here’s the proper way to measure the dimensions of your head (this is the number you’ll need to compare to the chart).



Use a tailor’s tape and measured the circumference of your head by placing the tape slightly above the ears (which will approximately be the middle of your forehead) & all the way around to the back of your head.



Length of the cord



Based on our measurements, the cord is approximately 49 inches long, which is approximately 4 feet.



We can’t see anybody having problems with it since it’s not sturdy and can be easily “manipulated.”



Most people use it by placing their phone under the pillow, but even if it’s on the nightstand, there’s very little chance of pulling it down, unless you tangled in the cord.



If you are a restless sleeper and there is a chance to tangle in the cord, the most elegant solution is fixing it under the headband and tucking it around the corners of your mattress.



What if I receive a faulty product?



We mentioned that we saw a very low incidence of on-arrival defects, like speakers not working. But just in case you’re unfortunate enough to belong to the small group, claim your warranty is pretty easy.



Simply go to the company website, find the return form and print it out. Once you filled in the form, enclose it in the package along with the faulty speakers and the proof of purchase (which can be your Amazon receipt).



Based on our experience, the customer service of the company is efficient and reliable and you will likely receive a new set of speakers within a week.



If your scenario is different, like an issue with the headband itself, it might be smart to contact them directly before sending the product back in.



The email to use (to the best for knowledge and at the time of completing this guide is service (at) AcousticSheep.com). Since emails can change, the more reliable way is going directly to their website and filling out their contact form.



Can the volume be controlled?



This is a common question because it’s not obvious based on the pictures of the product. But yes, you can control the volume, which is a nice plus especially if you’re into meditation and need the sound to be at a very low volume level.



Are the speakers dual?



What we mean when we say “dual” here is simply a response to one of the questions people frequently asked us - whether they should hear the sound coming from both speakers.



The answer to that is yes, both speakers should be functional and the sound should be symmetric. If you noticed that one of the speakers is not working properly, the first thing to try is adjusting the position to make sure it’s just over your ear.



If the issue persists, it’s also covered by the manufacturer’s warranty and you can claim the product is faulty by following the steps we outlined above.



The effects they have on your hair



Women are commonly concerned about the hair breakage from using the headband, so let’s put that one to rest. The band is snug but the fabric is too soft to cause any significant damage to your hair, such as breakage.



Making sure that your device is compatible with the set



The tip plug-in is a standard 3.5 mm, so AcousticSheep will be compatible with a vast majority of devices, there might be a few exceptions among white noise machines.



If you do plan to use it with a sound machine, just make sure that has a 3.5 mm outlet.



Summary and future updates of the SleepPhones review



This guide is updated every three months to include new data, which primarily applies to the user satisfaction rating.



We re-test the products if we notice a significant drop in the statistics. The whole process is designed so that we can always stay on top of things, present fresh information and reliable ratings.



We encourage you to use the comment section below to reach out with any specific questions, recommendations of products we should test or your experiences.



We’ll respond to all comments within 24 hours.



The Sleep Studies Team



The blog post SleepPhones Review – AcousticSheep & Wireless – top 3 models – 2017 update was first published to www.thesleepstudies.com







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/sleepphones/

Insta-bed Raised air mattress with Never Flat pump – 2017 review update

Back when we first started reviewing air mattresses (almost 5 years ago now), this Insta was one of the highest-rated models, especially in the air retention category.



The high ratings in air retention remain to date, but many things have changed since.



The shift in the industry started in 2013 with the arrival of some “young” products and introduction of new technologies and materials.



In this review, we’ll take a look at some of the advantages and downsides of this Insta and compare its current ratings to one of the members of the elite group of 10 top-rated air beds which you can see here.



Raised Never Flat versus Cloud 9 by SoundAsleep



To put the whole conversation about the new arrivals into perspective, we’ll do a head-to-head comparison of the Insta Raised Never Flat Queen air mattress to a similar model coming from one of those younger companies – SoundAsleep.



The reason why we chose Cloud 9 for the mano-a-mano comparison is that the two models are in a similar price range and, more importantly, they both feature a “smart” pump.



Ratings comparison



*



More in-depth look at the Insta-bed Raised air mattress with Never Flat pump



The basics



Before we move on to a more in-depth analysis of the features, let’s take a look at some of the basic facts.



It’s available in Twin in Queen size; you can see the specs of the two below.



Queen

80 x 60 x 18 inches

Twin

74 x 38 x 18 inches



When we first reviewed this mattress, the only available color was Tan.



The company added more color options since, and the interesting part is that the pricing is different for the three colors and it comes in: gray, white and the traditional tan.



There’s no substantial difference between the three options in terms of quality.



The pump



If there’s one feature the stands out about this airbed, it’s the Never Flat pump.



For those of you hearing the term for the first time, let’s take a moment to explain what it is.



The Never Flat pump system actually consists of two units – the main pump you use to inflate and deflate the bed and the secondary, smaller unit that keeps it inflated through the night by monitoring the pressure inside the chambers and adding air if it detects a loss of air.



This inflation system is probably the single biggest milestone the industry has seen in the last two decades…it’s a game changer.



Air mattresses are not on the outskirts of sleep industry anymore, they found their way into the mainstream, and one of the most important factors in the process was the technology of the smart pump.



It’s common sense because it’s air loss and deflation that people use to complain the most about.



Similar technologies



The Cloud 9 air mattress that we mentioned above uses a very similar technology, but since the name NeverFlat is patented, they simply call the pump “smart.”



Circular coils



A Queen includes 35 coils, while the Twin size comes with 21.



We’re not breaking any new ground when we say that coils are superior to beams in terms of support and weight distribution. In today’s market, you only see the beamed design in the lower price ranges.



The vast majority of products from major brands are based on coils.



Each brand has a trademarked name for the support system – Coleman calls it ComfortStrong SoundAsleep refers to it as ComfortCoil and, with Insta, the coils are simply described as “circular.”



The idea behind the systems is the same – the coils are supposed to play the same role as the spring in regular mattresses.



The differences



What separates the brands is the number of coils used in their products and how sturdy the vinyl is.



The air mattresses that “pushed out” the Insta products out of our top 10 utilize some form of structural reinforcement for the PVC.



Two good examples of that are Fox Plush Durabeam and the Best Choice.



The former is simply made of 40% thicker PVC, and the latter combines nylon laminate layers to reinforce the vinyl.



FAQs about the Insta Raised Never Flat



Capacity



The listed maximum capacity for the queen-size is 500 pounds, which is slightly lower than the 600 listed for some of the newer products.



Does it have to stay plugged in?



We’ve some confusion here, and it’s probably due to the Never Flat pump.



Keeping it plugged in at all times is optional, and you’ll want to do it on to make full use of the secondary pump.



Apart from that, once the bed is inflated, you can unplug it just like you would with any other air mattress.



In the category of air retention, this bed belongs to the top 8% (according to our statistics) regardless of whether you use the Never Flat system or not.



Firmness presets



You can choose your desired firmness, and if you keep it plugged in, it will be maintained through the night.



A small percentage of people (just over 2%, based on our data) reported that none of the presets is right for them.



If this happens, things get a bit tricky because the NeverFlat unit is designed to work with the presets.



If you feel like none of these is right for you, there’s a way around it. You can manually turn the switch on and off until you find your sweet spot.



Noise levels



The description of how the secondary unit works might lead you to the conclusion that you’ll hear some noise as it turns on and off through the night.



Let us put that’s concern to bed (pun intended) - the system is practically silent, and we can’t imagine it waking up anybody, even if you’re a very light sleeper.



Folding/storage size



As per our measurements, the box comes in is 3 x 8 x 6 “and the banks packs down to approximately the same size when deflated. This means that it won’t take much space in the trunk if you’re driving to the campsite.



Do keep in mind that you need access to a power outlet to inflates it.



The pillow-top version



It also comes as a pillow-top.



Apart from the added layer of cotton attached to an elastic band (similar to that of a fitted sheet), there are no other differences between the regular and the pillow-top version.



The pillow-top can make a difference for pet owners who want to protect the vinyl from claws.



It’s also very practical in terms of maintenance since it can be machine-washed and dried.



12-month warranty



As a new owner you’re covered by a 12-month warranty on all structural defects of the material or pump.



It’s also worth mentioning that the package includes a patch kit and you can fix any pinholes that might to develop without buying additional sealants.



Alternative power sources



The monitor of the pump works with standard US power outlet and using it abroad or with a power source of different voltage (like 220 V) is only an option if you get an add-on inverter.



Summary of the review



The Insta Raised Never Flat is still a high-quality air bed and solid value for money.



It will be the choice of people who like the reliability of the smart pump and the classic appearance.



The fact that we haven’t seen it in our top 10 for a while doesn’t mean that the quality has somehow changed; it’s only a testament to the changing trends in the industry.



For the consumer, this can only be a good thing because it sparks up a race for your business and challenges classic brands like Insta to come up with a response to the changing market and improve their products.



Finally, feel free to reach out if you have questions and dilemmas that we haven’t addressed above.



We typically respond to all comments and emails within a day.



Insta-bed Raised air mattress with Never Flat pump – 2017 review update was first published on TheSleepStudies







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/insta-bed-raised-air-mattress-never-flat-pump-2017-review-update/

Etekcity air mattress review – ratings & comparisons

Etekcity is one of the few air mattresses that can be considered a new arrival to the market, and that’s why we had to wait until we share have enough data to use for our statistical analysis and ratings.



It’s a part of the same product wave the started in 2013 with the arrival of SoundAsleep Dream Series, with both pump and materials improved.



The one add-on that we’re seeing is a big plus with Etekcity is a secondary valve, similar to that of the Fox Plush – what puts this bed between the Dream Series and the Fox.



That’s why we’ll not only review what makes this air bed tick but we’ll also do a head-to-head comparison with some airbeds and similar price range and of similar type.









Basic info and fact sheet



Queen





80x 60×22 “


Max capacity – 650 LBS


warranty – one year




Twin





75×39×18 “


Max capacity 300 LBS


warranty – one year




Materials and durability



The weight capacity of the Etekcity air mattress is higher than that of some of the best air mattresses out there – you can see our guide listing and reviewing them here.



With the weight capacity of six 650 LBS for the Queen, it’s one of the most durable and mattresses out there. The Etekcity has been on the market long enough now that we can attest to the fact that they have a solid customer service and they stand behind the warranty policy. This is a testament to the fact that the listed weight capacity is not just a number they came up with, but solid proof of durability.



Double stacking of the vinyl



The double stacked inner chambers are designed to increase the firmness of the edges, and keep the top surface flatter, even when sitting very edge of the bed.



On top of that, the lifetime support promised by the company is nothing to be shrugged off, especially in the days when the policy of most companies is that, once the warranty period is over, you’re pretty much on your own.



The company makes a special point about the PVC used in non-toxic and adhering to the strictest standards of safety.



Apart from being non-toxic, the vinyl used is pretty the industry standard in terms of thickness (0.4 mm thick), and the construction is multilayered which makes it more stable. Etekcity calls this special PVC used for the bottom “skid-free.”



It’s the stability that gives it that extra boost in needed for the company to confidently release such high maximum weight capacity.



The top is flocked and resistant to water, constructed of two-layer PVC (has slightly more friction to it to prevent moving or sliding).



Air retention of the Etekcity air mattress



Since we haven’t personally tested Etekcity, we can only speak based on the information gathered for our statistical analysis.



The user satisfaction rating of 85 out of 100 is solid and puts it in the top 10% of products we reviewed and tested over the past few years.



In terms of air retention and structural integrity, we saw about 6% of users mentioning it as an issue. That percentage is in a bit of a conflict with the overall satisfaction rate and we are looking forward to testing the bed and see what we were actually working with here.



Vinyl volatility and odors



We didn’t see any significant percentage of users mentioning that the PVC is volatile or that rubbery smells are present, at least not for long. It’s normal for an air mattress to have a slight initial odor on arrival, but based on what we’ve seen with this Etekcity air mattress, it goes away within a day or two.



The pump



The listed inflation and deflation time 5 minutes is somewhat slower than what’s an industry standard today (which is 3 to 4 minutes). The pump is similar to the box models, with the closed compartment for storing away the cable and sing shape of the knob the controls the firmness.



The secondary valve



As we said, in terms of the inflation system, Etekcity similar to the Fox plush and features the same kind of secondary valve which allows for alternative inflation (like using battery-operated, leg or manual pumps).



It’s what makes it an option for camping. We do have enough data to reach conclusions and ratings in our five quality categories, but we don’t have enough to go on in terms of camping use.



So far, it seems that it is going to be one of the contenders for the top camping models. But unless it suddenly becomes more popular and we can gather more information about camping use, we don’t see it being a part of our guide on the top 10 best camping air mattresses for at least a year.



“Refreshing” height



What we mean by “refreshing” here is that most models in queen-size are 18 to 19 inches high. Even those that used to be higher (like the aforementioned Fox) changed the design to a lower profile.



That’s one of the reasons that we like the design of the Etekcity – the profile height of the Queen-size.



Summary



We did mention that this is one of the new arrivals that we haven’t personally tested and the ratings mentioned above are based on our statistical modeling of user experiences.



In those numbers, we saw a few conflicting stats, like the overall satisfaction versus the percentage of people mentioning air retention as an issue.



It’s our plan to get and test the Etekcity air mattress within the next year so that we can come back which more reliable information and complete ratings.



For now, this review is updated every three months to include new data into our statistical model.



Based on what we have now, we can see the Etekcity standing tall in the “battle” for spots in the top 10 models for home use.



Etekcity air mattress review – ratings & comparisons See more on: The Sleep Studies Reviews







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/etekcity-air-mattress-review/

Insta-Bed air mattress – top 5 picks compared to the highest rated models in their categories – 2017 update

Over the past 5 years, we have tested and reviewed over 110 air mattresses, 12 of those coming from Insta-Bed.



What you’ll see below are the top 5 highest-rated picks from the brand, their details and ratings in five quality categories.



We’ll also compare each airbed to the top-rated counterpart, similar in type and price range.









Insta-Bed Raised with a Never Flat pump



The one reason for this bed not currently being in the top 10 is the fact that we tried to make our top 10 picks versatile and usually include 5 models for home use and 5 for outdoors and camping.



Among air beds for home use, it’s currently 7th highest-rated with an overall rating of 89/100, with the ratings of 91 and 90 in the air retention and comfort category.



Its main advantage is the Never Flat pump, which is only available in a handful of airbeds and the market and most of them have a much higher price tag. Below are the full ratings of Insta-Bed Never Flat.



Head-to-head comparison with the Dream Series by SoundAsleep



We feel like the best fit among the top 10 models for this comparison is the Dream Series from SoundAsleep.



Who will choose the Insta-Bed Never Flat?



This Insta-bed is the will be the choice of people who were looking to get the reliability of the Never Flat without breaking the bank.



With thousands of owner reviews on Amazon, it’s one of the most popular air mattresses ever made. You can see all those reviews and compare prices following the links below.



Insta-Bed EZ



This is a high-end air mattress with a price tag to match.



EZ airbeds are scarce because not many people are willing to spend the extra buck to get this kind of comfort from an air bed.



When we say “this kind of comfort,” we’re referring to the fact that it’s probably the closest you can get to the comfort of a regular mattress with an inflatable.



The reinforced vinyl consists of 42 air coils which distribute weight and reduce pressure points at the hips and shoulders. It’s mounted on a robust steel frame that automatically sets it up (no action needed on your part, you just plug it in and watch it spread).



The combo of the extra thick material, a high number of coils and the support of the frame practically eliminates that bouncy quality most airbeds have.



Insta-Bed Raised with Insta III pump



Compared to the Never Flat models we looked at above, this is a more basic air mattress that features a classic Insta III pump.



We wouldn’t say that this is a run-of-the-mill pump because it’s well known in the industry and even used by other brands, like Serta.



It’s a classic airbed with a significantly lower price tag compared to the models with the smart pump.



It comes in Twin and Queen size and, based on our measurements, it is true to size.



The Queen measures 78 x 60 inches in the Twin is 74 x 39 inches, both are 15 inches high. It’s important to make a note of this difference in height (compared to Never Flat Raised classic, which is 18 inches high).



We are stressing this because both Insta-beds have the word “raised” in the name.



Insta-Bed Raised with headboard



You’re probably noticing a pattern by now, the top-tier of Insta-Bed are all based on similar technologies, both in terms of the pump quality and inner structure.



Obviously, the main difference in this one is the headboard.



You’ll also notice that there is no difference in ratings compared to the model without the headboard and, again, the one exception is value for money. It’s only natural for this bed to cost more because it comes with a headboard.



The highest-rated product of its type is the Serta Perfect Sleeper, so let’s take a look at the head-to-head comparison of the ratings.



Insta-Bed with sure grip bottom



In terms of popularity among users, this Insta-bed is only second to the Raised Never Flat model.



It’s also the one mattress and the list that somewhat different in terms of design, both appearance and structure-wise.



While most products from the brand we looked at here feature air-coils, the construction of this one is based on dual chambers that Insta calls SecureAid.



Another major difference is the rubberized sure grip bottom designed to minimize moving and sliding and keep the bed securely in place, even on smooth surfaces like hardwood floors.



Top camping model from Insta-Bed - Stow and Go



The blowup mattresses we looked at so far are primarily designed for home use, and the only way you could use them for camping is if you have access to power on the site.



That comes as no surprise, and it’s no secret that Insta is primarily focused on the airbeds for home use.



The Stow and Go is one of the few exceptions to that rule.



The included pump is battery-operated and, based on our experience, holds a charge pretty well. One full charge will allow for 14 to 16 complete inflations / deflations.



It’s one of the better pumps in this price range - the speed of inflation is about 2 minutes.



Fact sheet of the Insta Stow and Go


Size - twin, inflated size (measured from the further most edges) - 74 x 39 x 8 inches

Type of pump - battery-operated, two-way (reversible), pump model name Insta I



Head-to-head with the top model of its type



Based on the profile type, the structure number of coils the best fit for comparison here is the Camping Series from SoundAsleep.



Insta-Bed - a closer look at the top picks



Top-rated Insta-Bed - Raised Queen with Never Flat pump



If we had to choose one air mattress to call a classic, it would be this Insta-Bed.



Back when we first started reviewing airbeds, it was stable among the top 5 for home use. But a lot happened on the market since and some new products introduced improved technologies pushed this Insta-Bed out all the top 5.



When we say that we’re primarily referring to the products by SoundAsleep, a company that introduced their first air mattress in 2013 and caused a significant shift in the industry.



It might seem odd that the head to head comparisons of Insta-Bed’s we did above were mostly which products coming from SoundAsleep. We’d like to stress here that we have no special relationship with the company that would make us favor it over Insta nor did we receive any free testing samples.



It’s just the current state of the market.



Now that we got that out of the way let’s dig a bit deeper and look into what makes this bed the superior evergreen classic that it is.



The pump used for this Insta-Bed


We did go over some of the inner workings of the pump, but let us get into the nitty-gritty of it all.



What’s better about it?



From a user standpoint, this pump type simply means that have a more reliable bed that won’t wake you up in the middle of the night because it lost air.



If we reminisce about the evolution of the technology in the airbed arena, it’s fair to say that the smart pump (call the Never Flat by Insta & Serta) is the biggest milestone of the past decade.



It’s changed the way people perceive air mattresses - from flimsy pieces of plastic into a solid choice for frequent use.



It’s practically eliminated the main complaint owners had - deflation.



Let’s make one thing clear here - the pump is not designed to deal with significant rips or seam separation but small leaks and pinholes.



That’s still a big deal, especially if you have in mind the fact that most cases of air loss come from these small mysterious leaks.



How it works


The system consists of two pumps, and it’s the second one that makes the difference. It’s equipped with sensors to detect air loss and silently turn the unit on to keep the bed at your desired firmness.



Safety from over inflation


One more feature that you don’t typically see in this price range is the auto shut-off safety that’s built into the pump.

For the owner, this means that you don’t have to be on standby as the mattress inflates. All you need to do is choose the firmness presets from three options available (plush, medium or firm and then just turn on the unit).



Once your chosen firmness presets is reached, the safety will turn off the pump.



Materials


For the top, Insta-Bed uses a finish that resembles suede. It’s there for two reasons.

The first one is to make you comfortable if you’re using the bed without sheets. The second one, and more important, is to increase the friction between the sheets and the bed and lower the chances of slipping, piling or moving.



For this type of airbed our deep-pocketed fitted sheets.



The one thing that we would like to stress here is that Insta-Bed models are true to size, which means that if you get a Queen, standard sheets in the size will be a good fit.



New colors


We remember the time when this Insta-Bed was only available in beige (tan) but, in the past few years, the company added two more color choices. Today, it comes in white and gray as well.



We’re not sure about the reasons, but there is actually a difference in price between the 3 color options.



Air coils of the Insta-Bed


One of the main reasons behind Insta standing tall in an ever-changing market is the stability of their air mattresses, both in terms of flatness of the top surface and sideways movement.



To achieve that, the company relies on their system of air coils. These not only play the role of stabilizers but also lower the strain “suffered” by the seams.



A closer look at the Insta-bed EZ



This is the 14th quarterly rating update of the Insta bed EZ.



It’s currently rated at 88 out of 100. The category that is bringing the rating down a peg is “value for money” - this is only natural because the Insta EZ is not your run-of-the-mill air bed.



Stability, Support and Ease of Use


One of the biggest advantages of Insta EZ lies in the extraordinary support provided by its robust bed frame and the aforementioned proprietary NeverFlat technology.



The frame unfolds automatically, so all you have to do is plug the bed in and flip the switch to inflate it. Many customers have wondered about the possibility of deploying separate parts of the frame but the current design doesn't offer this possibility.



We also don’t see it happening anytime soon.



The weight of the mattress is 48.9 lbs, which translates to around 22 kg. This makes it a cumbersome option for camping and outdoor activities, but provides a stable surface and mitigates the usual problem of the air mattress moving through the night.



The frame construction is sturdy and can withstand up to 500 lbs of pressure, which means the mattress can accommodate 2 adults without any threat to its structural integrity.



Frame dimensions and height


The dimensions of the frame are 64" x 54" x 9.5".



Total height is 22". You won't have any difficulties with getting in and out of bed, which is especially convenient for senior citizens.



All of these features guarantee a stable sleeping surface and the level of support uncharacteristic for an air mattress. The EZ is made to mimic the "regular bed," and the design does its job very well, especially after you add some bedding on top of it.



Durability


Insta EZ is intended for indoor use so, it's not recommended for camping (although, you CAN technically use it if you don't mind the weight and have access to power).



The frame features a solid steel construction, which doesn't wobble or make squeaking sounds, which tends to be an issue with similar beds of sub-par quality.



The mattress itself is made of heavy-duty PVC, and it's very resistant to medium-level stressors like pet claws and similar outside influences. It comes with a dedicated repair kit and the rolling case for easy and secure storage.



To maximize the longevity of your air bed, you should heed the following recommendations:





The company doesn't recommend this product for everyday use. Based on the experiences we’ve seen, it’s sturdy enough to replace your regular bed, but its lifespan will be considerably shorter if you opt for this route.


You should choose a storage location devoid of temperature fluctuations and extreme temperatures. These factors can stress the material and lead to potential failure. You should also avoid humid environments and inflating the mattress in freezing temperatures.


In order to prolong the lifespan of your pump, you should only use high-quality alkaline batteries. Also, avoid leaving batteries in the pump for too long since it can result in corrosion and potential damage


Insta-bed doesn't recommend the use of heated blankets with its airbeds.




The company offers a full 1-year warranty for all product defects in workmanship and materials. The warranty, however, doesn't cover holes and other damage caused by misuse, normal wear and tear, neglect, unauthorized disassembly, natural disaster, and similar occurrences.



Comfort and Pump


The bed features an integrated NeverFlat pump system.



In case you didn’t read the analysis that we went over when talking about the Insta-bed Raised (the classic model), let’s reiterate.



This, basically, translates to 2 separate pumps working to provide the optimal comfort. The main pump allows you to select your desired comfort level, which will adjust the overall firmness of the sleeping surface.



Forget about sore muscles, back and neck pain, and stiff joints. With Insta EZ, you'll be able to customize the overall comfort of your bed according to your particular needs and have a refreshing sleep every single night.



The primary pump inflates the EZ bed in less than 2 minutes, depending on your preferred firmness setting. It usually deflates it in around 20 seconds.



The pump also features an auto shut-off safety, do you won't have to worry about over inflation as long as you have your comfort level set.



The secondary pump comes with dedicated sensors, which monitor the overall quantity of air within the mattress at all times. Every comfort setting comes with a predetermined air level, and the secondary pump is “in charge” of maintaining it throughout the night.



It engages automatically, refills your bed with air, and shuts off without you even noticing. The noise level is surprisingly low and will never wake you up in the middle of the night.



Apart from customizable firmness, Insta EZ also provides sleepers with minimal motion transfer. This is great news for restless sleepers who tend to toss and turn a lot throughout the night, waking their partners up in the process.



Updates to the review


As we mentioned at the beginning, we typically update the reviews on quarterly basis. What might be important to mention here is that the ratings of this Insta have not significantly fluctuated since we first reviewed it.



As we are currently considering going back to the all concept of separating the home use and outdoor models, it’s very likely that this bed will find its place back in the top 10 where it lived for a long time.



Frequently asked questions about the Insta-bed with headboard



Storage



The headboard of the bed also deflates, and the total deflated weight is approximately 14.8 pounds.



In terms of size, the headboard model is not significantly bigger than the classic, which means that it’s just as easily stored.



Sturdiness of the headboard



Bear in mind that the headboard is no different in terms of rigidity compared to the rest of the bed. We are mentioning this because we received a couple of questions about it.



People ask whether they can lean against the inflated headboard like they would with their regular mattress. You might be able to do that if the bed is placed against a wall, but it’s not advisable to exert that kind of pressure on the chambers.



The headboard is there to stop the pillows from slipping over the edge of the bed.



Using fitted sheets



The body of the mattress and the headboard are attached to it each other to about two about half of the mattress height.



This means that you can’t tuck in fitted sheets the same that’s in the headboard area as the rest of the mattress.



That’s why flat sheets are probably the better choice for this mattress. The good news here is that the flocking creates enough friction for the sheets not to slip or more.



Fixing and repairing an Insta-bed



Should you find a leak, patching and Insta bed is pretty much the same as any other air mattress. It arrives with an included patch kit and instructions.



The difference between Insta and Serta



This is probably one of the most commonly asked questions we received over the past few years.



It doesn’t come as a surprise since the products from the two brands are similar. So similar in fact, that if somebody said that they are the same, we would have a hard time arguing the point.



So let’s clarify this mystery of the airbed industry once and for all.



Instant and Serta are owned by the same company, which is Serta Simmons Bedding LLC.



So what separates the two?



If you compare the counterpart models from the two brands, you’ll notice that Serta is almost always the slightly more expensive product.



We don’t have the information nor do we want to go into the intricacies of the inner workings of the company, but we can look at the facts.



One of those facts is that Serta has an unparalleled warranty, not only compared to Insta-bed, but to any brand out there. Some of the new arrivals do come with solid warranties. We still feel that the full 1-year manufacturer’s warranty of Serta airbeds is second to none.



On the other hand, Insta bed is the brand with more products in their portfolio for outdoor use (such as Insta-bed Stow-n-Go we mentioned and analyzed above).



These similarities also have an obvious impact on our ratings, since the counterpart products of the two brands usually have very “close ratings.”



This is an advantage for Insta-bed



If you’re not familiar with the industry, you’ll find that Serta is the more recognizable name and one of the most well-trusted brands in the mattress arena.



That means that being associated with Serta can only be a good thing for Insta-bed as a brand.



As far as we’re concerned, we like both brands and consider them top-tier of the industry, especially when it comes to trustworthiness of the customer support.



Using the Never Flat pump with a car inverter



The ratings of inverters (DC to AC) are based on how much power they can put out (measured in watts).



To use a car inverter without damaging the circuitry of the pump you have to make sure that the power rating of the inverter meets or exceeds the requirements listed on the pump label.



If you can’t find the specifications on the body of the pump look for a sticker attached to the power cable.



Let’s explained that on an example



The pump that comes with the classic Raised and EZ bed model from Insta-bed has a power specification of 130 Watts. The power inverter would have to exceed that number to be safely used.



The following article Insta-Bed air mattress – top 5 picks compared to the highest rated models in their categories – 2017 update Find more on: https://thesleepstudies.com







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/insta-bed/

Best flannel sheets – top 5 picks out of 42 – 2017 update

The top 5 picks you’re about to see our results of over 1,200 work-hours in the pursuit for the best flannel sheets for your money.



The initial pool of 42 sets was made about 18 month ago by our panel of three experts - all of them Material Technology Engineers.



But theory can only get you so far, so we then proceeded to analyze the statistics of each set. The goal here was to narrow down the search to 15 sets because that was within our budget to actually buy & test.



The ratings you’re about to see are a combination of the objective findings of the material experts, the subjective experience of our featured testers and ourselves and, just as importantly, statistical analysis of the user satisfaction. So without much ado, let’s get to the results.









Best flannel sheets - top 5 sets



[table id=50 /]



Pinzon Signature 190-Gram



There are flannel sheets out there that performed similar to this Pinzon set but they cost 500-600% more.



Yes, you read that right, the other flannel sheet sets that performed similarly in the quality categories cost 5-6 times more.



This Pinzon set is unparalleled in terms of the balance between durability, the soft finish and the quality of the napping (manufacturing process used to get that soft flannel finish).



Last but not least, it’s 100% cotton.



All quality ratings



Who will choose the Pinzon Signature?



The Pinzon will be the choice of the conservative buyers looking for a high-quality product that won’t to break the bank.



It might not be right for you if you’re looking for a thinner, stretchier flannel because it’s made of durable and heavy fabric with a velvet-like finish.



The quality aspects we looked at like pilling, release of lint, shape and softness retention over time were similar or superior to sets that much more.



Shavel Micro Flannel set



With the user satisfaction rating of 93, this Shavel is by far the highest-rated micro flannel set.



In rating this set, we had to tweak the formula a bit because the material is different.



Micro fleece is designed to be the sweet spot between the comfort of all-cotton flannel and the smooth finish of fleece. You can see all its quality ratings below.



Who will choose the Shavel?



If you laid down on these Shavel sheets and somebody asked you to guess the price, there’s no way you’d get it even remotely right.



The softness is unparalleled and, we dare to say, if you can find this set under $100 it’s a steal.



If you’re also the one who will be washing and caring for it, it’s worth mentioning that it’s far easier to maintain than any other set we looked at.



It’s because a well-made micro flannel does not shrink, peel or wrinkle and dries much faster.



The downside is that we’ve seen this set go out of stock in some colors and sizes, so finding the combo that’s just right for you might be tricky.



Malouf Deluxe Portuguese flannel sheets



This Malouf is one of the very few sets we considered in its price range, which is much higher than the two sets above.



The fabric comes from Portugal, which is known to produce the finest flannel in the world. That’s not just something we’re saying, it’s a consensus in the industry.



Compared to other sheets we looked at, the feel of the Malouf is somewhat different - the finish is finely brushed and feels like velvet.



What we initially expected to see with this kind of finish is substantial pilling and we were wrong about that. The surface is so finely brushed that we practically didn’t see any pilling at all.



Let’s look at the quality ratings.



*



Who will choose the Malouf?



If price is not an issue and you prefer a thick, lofty material of the steel as soft as velvet, this Malouf might be right for you.



We don’t know how to plastic lid describe the difference in how it feels against the skin.



The closest we can get is saying that it feels like an extra thin velvet cover.



Discount or clearance of the week



Our tech guys should set up some tracking algorithms (that the rest of us don’t fully understand), so that we can hunt down the best deal on flannel sheets each week and report back here.



You can see the top deal of this week below:



Reference info on choosing the best flannel sheets



Before we set out to complete this guide, it was our goal to both make specific recommendations and provide general information on how to shop for flannel sheets.



To be honest, we didn’t expect this guide to turn into so much work because we thought what we know about the materials (mostly learned from our editor Bob, who was one of the Material Technology Engineers who made the initial picks) would be enough.



Little did we know about the intricacies of choosing right. We were especially surprised by all the industry lingo involved and the ways you could be misled, starting from thread count to the yarn.



So let us address that here, if some of the language we used in the analysis above was confusing, it will hopefully be clarified here.



Common misconceptions about flannel



It’s not a pattern


Let’s first debunk the most common myth…that flannel is a pattern. This myth probably stems from the fact that most shirts made of flannel will have a distinctive pattern.



So, to be clear, flannel is a fabric and can come in any solid or patterned color scheme.



Flannel is not just cotton


Today, most flannel sheets are cotton-based but if we’re going to be precise, the definition of flannel is not about the weave. The precise definition would be that flannel is a fabric made by twill or plain-weaving of yarn (typically, the yarn will be loosely spun).



The thread count


It turns out that are initially perception of judging the quality of a flannel sheet was relying too much on the simplified idea - the higher the thread count, the better the sheets.



It’s not as simple as that.



We’re not saying that count is not important; we’re just saying that it’s not as conclusive as we initially thought.



So, instead of being the messenger and trying to convey what we learned from our expert panels, we leave you in the competent hands of the material experts to explain the rest.



by Bob Ozment



How should you look at thread count?


Let’s put it like this - if everything else about a flannel sheet is the same (type of cotton, ply, weave) it’s safe to judge the quality based on the thread count.



Before we move on, let’s look at one of the common misconceptions that an average buyer might have.



Apart from the thread count, you’ll probably see the quality of the material described using terms like 80s, 100s, 200s etc. It’s common sense to think that these numbers describe the flannel in terms of threads per square inch.



In our research for this guide we found that eight out of 10 people thinks just that.



For example, a non-expert will jump to the conclusion that 100s simply means that there are 100 threads in 1 inch square and they would be wrong.



These numbers refer to the size of the yard used - for example 100s means that 1 pound of the flannel includes 100 hanks (one hank is approximately equal to 840 yards).



Let’s not complicate things any further - the takeaway should be that when you see a description like this with flannel sheets, just know that it doesn’t directly translate into a thread count.



It is still true that 200s flannel has a higher thread count than 100s and that’s probably all you need to know.



To summarize - we included the analysis above for the people who like to get into the nitty-gritty and truly understand what they’re paying for.



But if it boggles your brain to get into it, just know that we’ve covered all this in our analysis and the recommendations that we made above are based on it.



Ply is just as important as the thread count


Let’s try to keep the ply explanation simple.



Ply of flannel is used to describe the number of yarns in a single fabric thread.



Two-ply and three-ply flannel sheets



This one is important to understand because it’s easy to manipulate the terminology and mislead you, so let’s get it right.



Single-ply flannel sheets use fabrics with threads on their own.



Two-ply or double-ply means that two threads are twisted into a single piece.



Why is that important?



Because it ties into the thread count talk that we had above.



It’s simple math - thread count of 1000 could actually be 500 threads of two-ply or double-ply fabric. The same goes for three-ply.

Let us explain what this means for the fabric



If this sounds complicated, it might be because of the fact that it is.



That’s why we’ll do our best to explain all the industry lingo by using examples - everything that we said about ply above comes down to how it all affects the durability/softness of the fabric.



An example



Let’s take the example of a 1000 thread flannel sheet.



If it’s single ply, it will be thinner and softer to the touch. It will also be more delicate to maintain and sensitive to machine-washing.



If it’s a double-ply, the same thread count will feel heavier, more rugged and durable. It will also be better at maintaining shape and less sensitive to machine washing.



Types of cotton used for flannel sheets


Another important factor - on the high-end, you’ll find Egyptian cotton that’s “famous” for being ultra absorbent and breathable.



Then you have your Pima that’s grown in some of the Southern States of the US (Texas, California, Arizona, Mississippi and Florida) and South America.



The question of Egyptian vs. Pima cotton is a sensitive one. You probably that I’m exaggerating here. That’s because you haven’t tried to bring it up on a cotton manufacturer’s convention.



Here’s my opinion



The debate will never and there will never be a decision made on “better cotton.”



To be completely honest, I don’t think that people in the industry are hoping for it either. I think it comes down to personal interests, or as I call it, “cotton politics.”



I coined the phrase after seeing brands flip-flopping from one site to the other depending on which cotton they use for their products.



The bottom line is - for you, as the buyer, it’s a non-issue.



Let me be blunt here



I believe that the fact that Egyptian cotton is still perceived as superior stems from the perception of Egyptian silk, which is a whole different story.



Egyptian silk is indeed superior and there is scientific data that allows one to make the claim. A while back, we completed the guide on best silk sheets, pillow cases and comforters which you can see here.



“Egyptian” simply sounds better, while Pima sounds more generic. To put that issue to rest, let’s take a second here to address the origin of the word Pima.



This type of cotton used to be called American-Egyptian and the name was changed to honor the Pima tribe of Indians who grew the cotton in Arizona, so there’s nothing generic about it.



It’s my opinion that you should pay more for Egyptian cotton just for the sake of the name - the focus should be on other quality aspect.



The differences are slight



Both Egyptian and Pima cotton used for flannel sheets belong to the group of the ELS cotton (Extra Long Staple), with the staples of the Egyptian type being slightly longer.



As I stressed above, the differences are small - so small in fact that you shouldn’t concern yourself with this.



Acala cotton



Acala (Gossypium hirsutum) is a variety of cotton with Mexican origins.

The recorded history of this type of cotton dates back to the beginning of the 20th century. Since then, Acala was introduced to some areas of the US (like the San Joaquin Valley in California) and parts of Israel.



It’s rare to see Acala used for sheets and you typically see it in apparel.



What does the staple length mean for the flannel sheets?


This one is simple - because a flannel sheet made of ELS cotton can fit more staples into a square inch.



This type of close weave makes for softer sheets.



Type of cotton weave used for the best flannel sheets


What you want to look for is closely woven percale.



You might see a twill weave, which is not really an option for flannel sheets because of the surface is lofty. This type of weave is typically used for covers and throws because of the “fluffy” result you get from it.



The second thing you want to look for is plain stitching (also known as jersey-knit) because it offers a bit of stretch to your sheets without making them feel flimsy.



Finally, you can opt for a satin (sateen) weave - this will look more luxurious because most of the threads are concentrated on the very surface.



The downside of satin weave is that it takes away a bit of that natural cotton feel and many people find that it resembles synthetics.



Normal and compact yarn


I feel that the difference between normal and compact yarns is something that deserves a mention, although it’s not commonly to see it in sheets.



The difference between the two is that compact yarn is superior and smoother than “normal”. This means that fabrics made of compact yarns will feel and look smoother than you would expect from the thread count.



You’ll rarely see compact yarn in flannel sheets, and if you do it will cost way more. If you ask me, the difference doesn’t justify the cost and you should stick with the basics.



Weft vs. Warp - no need to go down that rabbit hole


The two terms are used to describe which way the threads run. Warp threads are the vertical and Weft are horizontal.



This comes into play if different types of threads are used for Weft & Warp, which is not the case with the sets we looked at so there’s no need to go down that rabbit hole.



However, if you have questions about it, feel free to ask, either in the comment section at the end of this guide or by directly emailing us.



Don’t pay for brands or fall for industry lingo


The whole process of research for this guide included many brands that cost much more than the sets we ended up recommending.



We’ve been reviewing sleep-related products for over a decade now and we tweak the formula of our statistical model for each product type.



Most of the time it comes down to deciding on whether to include the value for money category or not.



When we started out the pursuit for the best flannel sheets, we didn’t expect to include the category of value for money in the guide.



We ended up doing so because the price gaps were too significant.



Our initial impression indicated that we might discover that these expensive sheets are be truly superior – enough so as to justify the difference in cost.



We didn’t feel like that’s the case.



The cost gap seems to come down to brands and perception, but we were looking for substance.



The value for money category eliminated many well-known brands



As we dug deeper and the pool of data grew, it became evident that we simply must adjust the ratings to reflect the prices.



That’s when we included the “value for money”, which knocked many well-known brands right out of the top 5.



The bottom line here is that the sets we listed as the best flannel sheets out there are also top value for your money.



Who are flannel sheets for?


The universal appeal of flannel is unparalleled. You’ll find people liking or disliking silk or microfiber sheets, but it’s going to be hard finding one who dislikes flannel.



Our explanation for this is two-fold



First of all, the way flannel feels against the skin is natural and the primary association is cotton (even when the sheets are poly-fiber). A person with a reason not to like flannel would also be the person that doesn’t like cotton. Take a moment here and try to remember someone in your life that fits the description.



Temperature range - some sheets are dedicated to warm/cold sleepers or winter and summer. Flannel doesn’t belong to either.



Because of its breathability it performs well in a wide range of temperatures. Just think about the advertising and labels you might’ve seen for flannel sheets- they range from cold cabins next to a fireplace to contemporary spaces with an open sea view that oozes heat.



There are still subtle differences that come down to the thickness, weight and weave.



Where are the best flannel sheets made?


Perhaps a better wording for this question would be where does the best flannel come from?



Before we offer our opinion on that, let’s make sure that we’re on the same page here.



We already talked about types of cotton used for flannel (like Egyptian or Pima) and that’s not what we talking about here.



We’re referring to the quality of the finished flannel fabric – whether it’s cotton or not.



In those terms, flannel coming from Portugal has a reputation of being superior.



Shape retention


One of the important quality aspects of flannel is how well it retains shape over time, especially when machine-washed.



Sub-par fabric tends to shrink, pill and lose shape & softness.



Flannel sheets superior in terms of maintenance


It’s common sense that the less you deviate from the instructions on the label, the longer your sheets will last.



When we say the “last” here, we’re referring to the retention of the feel and shape, because that’s why you get flannel sheets in the first place - for their lofty softness.



Most sets we looked at recommend either cold or warm cycles (if they do list machine washing as an option).



We are aware of the fact that not many people will hand wash their sheets and that’s why we included it as one of the factors will contributing to the fiber rating.



Finally, micro-flannel practically eliminates all those issues and I personally prefer it.



It’s one of the more common argument triggers in the Ozment home.



Drying


Practically any set out there will recommend a low tumble dry cycle.



If you invested in a more expensive and luxurious set of flannel sheets, we do recommend that you closely follow the drying instructions (in spite of the fact that we are aware that it can take a long time).



If you have the space, you can always air dry the sheets instead of using a higher heat setting on the machine.



Durability, longevity and the napping process


First let’s define what napping is - it refers to the process of finishing the fabric once it’s woven to make it softer and gentler to the skin.



Flannel can be napped either on both or one side.



Flannel versus flannelette


Highest-quality flannel will be the same on both sides (napped). Technically speaking, if only one side is napped, the more precise term for the fabric would be flannelette.



It’s all about the balance


High-end sheets will use smaller yarns. The smaller the yarn, the more sensitive it will be to the napping process.



On the other hand, it’s the napping that gives flannel that soft finish which means that finer flannel made of smaller yarn will have to be treated less aggressively not to damage it in the process.



That’s why most companies go with bigger yarn that can withstand the napping without any threads being pulled out.



The yarn thickness is not listed with the products we looked at, but it’s safe to assume that it’s not small because sheets with finer yarn cost much more.



Frequently asked questions



Available sizes of the best flannel sheets


Typically, flannel sheets are available in the following sizes: Twin, Twin XL (Xlong), full, full XL, Queen, King and California King.



The sets that we chose and the top five are not all available in the listed sizes, for example, our top choice is currently available only in Queen, King and California King.



Some of the sheets listed are also available in split king-size which is meant to be used for adjustable beds.



When it comes to sizing your focus should be on the depth of the pockets (if it’s a fitted sheet) rather than the dimensions because the listed products are true to size.



The bottom line here is to make sure to get deep-pocketed sheets that will be a good fit for the thickness of your mattress.



Colors


In the table at the beginning of the guide, we listed the number of colors available for each set, but most of them don’t come close in that category to the Shavel micro-flannel.



We have received dozens of questions about specific colors. People most commonly asked about the following colors of flannel sheets: white, red, black, blue (usually it’s aqua), purple, pink, camo and gray.



Most of our top picks are not available in all those colors and it’s only the Shavel that can meet your specific needs if you’re looking for particular color or pattern like camo.



If you’re choosing an “aggressive” color like red, purple, black or pink make sure that you wash the sheets for a few times on their own because these callers tend to bleed. That’s why most of the brands to choose to go with colorfast tones like whites in the grays.



It’s fun getting very specific questions and we keep the evidence of those. They can get very specific like, “what would you recommend for the winter”, to, “where do I get a 6 or 8 oz Portuguese flannel sheets?”



This type of questions is still in the realm of reasonable and we can often help, but it’s beyond our capabilities to recommend ultra specific products, like sheets with a moose or an owl print or Star-wars themed.



For sharing this for two reasons – to apologize to the people that we can’t help and to bring some fun into the guide.



Finally, it’s a preemptive way to tell our readers that we can’t really help with moose or owl-themed flannel sheets.



Where to buy the sheets?


Buying “cheap” flannel sheets, getting them online is a great option because you can read the user reviews see what other people have to say about the product you’re looking at.



On the other hand, if you’re investing that in the highest quality set with the price to match, it’s probably a good idea by in person so that you can feel how soft it feels, how heavy it is or whatever specific quality you’re looking for.



As we update this guide, we also fall and sales or clearances of flannel sheets and report back here so that you can get them on the cheap.



In the research for this guide, we looked at the ranges of products that stores, brands and chains carry, so let’s list a few of them but often have sales and clearances on flannel sheets: Walmart, Kohl’s, LL Bean, JCPenney, Sears, Bed Bath and Beyond, Costco, Macy’s, Kmart, Garnet Hill (German), Eddie Bauer, Company Store, QVC.



Best flannel sheet brands



Since we have the data collected for the statistical analysis, we don’t it might be a good idea to start the top brands of flannel sheets. You might see some overlap here because some of the stores also have their own products.



The list is based on the brand popularity with the consumers but in no particular order:



Martha Stewart, Cuddl Duds, Eddie Bauer, Kohl’s, Sunbeam, Pinzon, Garnet Hill (German flannel sheets), Tribeca Living, Orvis, Pottery Barn, Pendleton, Supima, Divatex, Cuddletown, Peacock Alley, Home Classic, Laura Ashley, Woolrich, Coyuchi, Tommy Hilfiger, Lodge, Cardinal…



Final thoughts and future updates



This guide is updated on either quarterly or 6-month basis to make sure that the information we present is fresh and relevant at all times.



Each update grows the pool data, making the ratings more reliable.



If we notice a significant drop in user satisfaction with a particular product, we might do an unscheduled update for that specific product to determine what might be going on – whether it’s a statistical fluke or a real issue like change manufacturing practices.



If you have your own experience to share or questions to ask, feel free to do so in the comment section below or through our contact page.



We respond to all correspondence within 24 hours.



The following post Best flannel sheets – top 5 picks out of 42 – 2017 update was first seen on thesleepstudies







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/best-flannel-sheets/

Pure Green Latex Topper review – 100% natural Dunlop, Twin to California King

The Pure Green Series of toppers has been dominating most of our categories that include latex toppers, and there are 3 reasons for that.



One - since we first started testing and reviewing latex toppers, which have seen no significant changes in quality or user satisfaction with the Pure Green Series.



Two - the versatility of sizes and firmness options, which is a pretty big deal for people looking for something in between a firm latex topper and the loft of memory foam, fiber or down.



Three - in terms of value for money, Pure Green is pretty much as good as it gets. Each product coming from the brand 3rd certified and there’s no fine print to indicate that it includes anything but natural latex.









Quality Ratings of the Pure Green Latex Topper



[wp-review id="209086"]



The adaptability



There are some new arrivals (like the Vygor series) that do offer the same kind of versatility in terms of the balance between firmness and loft but we’re still a long way from gathering enough data to reliably review and rate these.



As it is now, the Pure Green Series is the only one out there to provide the kind of versatility and adaptability to meet the needs of people with different preferences and scenarios (from classic mattresses to sofa beds).



Adjusting the firmness



What separates the Pure Green Series from other similar brands that offer a range of firmness options is that we reliably know that no fillers or synthetic latex is used and it’s all about the density.

The difference between the three options (soft, medium and firm) is simply about the LBS per cubic feet of the foam and the way it affects the ILD (Indentation Load Deflection).



Soft



The density of the latex used in the soft version is 4 LBS per cubic feet and the ILD is 20.



Medium



Five LBS per cubic feet and on ILD of 30 - this will be the choice of people who find memory foam or down too soft and firm latex not lofty or comfortable enough.



Firm



The firm version of the Pure Green offers the classic feel and firmness of latex with a density of 5 pounds per cubic feet and an ILD of 30.



Sinking / Contouring



With any memory foam topper you see significant sinking of your shoulders and hips. If the foam is sub-par and the mattress not supportive enough the sinking can misalign your spine.

With latex, you’ll see much less of that, to the point where we wouldn’t call it sinking at all. We’d say that a better way to put it is “contouring”.



Durability



The one thing that you want to look for if you’re considering a latex topper is that it’s 3rd tested, preferably using the LGA testing standards.



The Pure Green Series scored an unparalleled 99 out of 100 in the LGA physical properties tests.



Having in mind that it’s 100% natural latex that comes as no surprise. What this number means in real life is that no matter what kind of mattress you have, the topper will probably outlast it.



Property changes and breathability



One of the most important aspects of natural latex (compared to materials like polyurethane or memory foam) is that it doesn’t change with temperature.



With memory foam, especially that the low quality, you’ll see changes in the properties as the material heats up - primarily in terms of shape retention and firmness.



We have seen none of that with the Pure Green Series.



Range of sizes and thickness



All the versions above come in the range of sizes from Twin to California King and thickness of 1 to 3 inches.



Certifications



The Pure Green Series holds the 3 most important labels of 3rd testing for the volatility of the organic compounds - Oeko-Tex standard 100, the Green Guard & Eco-Institute Certificate.



Source of the latex



It’s not often to see a company specifically listing where and how the material is sourced.



In the case of the Pure Green, they specify that the latex is locally sourced in Sri Lanka (where their manufacturing facilities are).Dunlop versus Talalay processing



One of the common confusions with people looking for a latex stopper is the difference between Dunlop and Talalay.



We won’t be going into the nitty-gritty of the two processes here. What we do want to stress is that Talalay his more of a bouncy feeling while the Dunlop is supportive in a way that can be described as “springy.”



Off-gassing and odor



If you get a latex topper and there is no faint latex smell, it’s not a good sign. All natural latex has a slight odor dissipation that goes away within a day or two.



The good news is, unlike chemical smells, the smell of latex is pleasant.



It’s also not a smell that can trigger an allergic reaction since natural latex is hypoallergenic and antimicrobial. But if you are especially sensitive to odor, you can always unpack the topper and air it out for a few hours.



Can it be used on its own?


Unlike most memory foam or down toppers that come with the cover of their own, what you receive with the Pure Green is just a topper. Will



This means that you can’t use it by putting it directly on the frame and you’ll need sheets to go with it.



We would recommend fitted sheets that are that just deep enough to accommodate the height of your chosen topper combined with the mattress or sofa bed.



The bottom line



The Pure Green Series continues to dominate the ratings among latex toppers and the current gap between the brand and runner-up is significant.



To put it simply, we don’t see it locking horns and battling it out for the top spot anytime soon.



Just to illustrate that - it’s been almost a year now since we started rating and reviewing toppers and the brand has been King of the Hill since day 1.



Pure Green Latex Topper review – 100% natural Dunlop, Twin to California King is republished from https://thesleepstudies.com/







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/pure-green-latex-topper/

Types of Beds and Frames – 50 Conventional, Modern & Quirky Styles

[et_pb_section bb_built="1" admin_label="Section" fullwidth="on"][et_pb_fullwidth_post_title admin_label="Fullwidth Post Title" date="off" comments="off" featured_image="off" text_color="light" text_background="on" text_bg_color="#354e88" module_bg_color="#354e88" title_font_size="40px" title_font_size_tablet="30px" title_font_size_phone="20px" title_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" title_text_color="#ffffff" title_line_height="1.5em" meta_font_size="16" meta_text_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="20px|||" /][/et_pb_section][et_pb_section bb_built="1" admin_label="Section" custom_padding="32px|0px|0px|0px" specialty="on"][et_pb_column type="3_4" specialty_columns="3"][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="Row" custom_padding="0px||25px|" padding_top_2="20px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="10px|20px||20px"]



Most of us live lives of convention - we get the same bagel as we drag out legs to work, the same coffe with the same sprinkles. Let's face it, life has become a routine with little to none adventure involved.



There's just no time...



Well, that might be the case if you define an adveture as climbing a mountain in Nepal or canoeing in the Everglades, but who's to say what an adventure and exctimenet is.



For the homelier of us, a strange new addition to our bedrrom might just get the adrenaline pumping.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/09/unuseal-modern-bed-design.jpg" alt="unuseal modern bed design" title_text="unuseal modern bed design" animation="off" align="center" custom_margin="0px|||" custom_margin_tablet="0px|||" custom_margin_phone="0px|||" custom_margin_last_edited="on|phone" /][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="20px|0px|0px|0px"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|20px||20px"]



Today, we're setting an ambiotious goal - to look at the all the bed types that exist on the planet.



Some of these will make you nostalgic for the good ol' days and some of these will widen your pupils and make you think, "somebody actually sleeps on that".



Whatever the case, the list below has a little something for the most demanding of tastes.



Take that, Nepal.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



1. Divan bed



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/09/type1-divan-bed.jpg" alt="divan bed" title_text="divan bed" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



Divan is the simply styled bed, it can be made with or without springs. It has a firm and stable construction which serves as a base for the mattress. It als features a for storage space, so you may have seen some divan beds with drawers.



This style usually includes comfortable headboard and there are a lot of different types to choose from, but sometimes they have to be bought separately.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



2. Sofa bed



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/sofa-bed.jpg" alt="image of sofa bed" title_text="image of sofa bed" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



A multi-functional bed, it’s ideal for small apartments or for when you have guests. They come in a variety of designs, colors and sizes and can easily be customized.



Usually it has easy pull-mechanism, so the transition from sofa to bed can be made in seconds and doesn’t take much effort.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



3. Poster bed



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/poster-bed.jpg" alt="poster bed" title_text="poster bed" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



Dating from 16th century this style is still very popular and has a lot of variations. It’s made of high quality wood, with four vertical columns placed on each corner.



The sides of the bed are decorated and artistically engraved. It has a traditional, antique feel and often is a central piece in the room.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



4. Low poster bed



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/low-poster-bed.jpg" alt="low poster bed" title_text="low poster bed" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



Another very common version of a four poster bed, but in this case, the posts are not as high. All the posts have some sort of decorative top on them, in a round, square or other shape.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



5. Half poster bed



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/half-poster-bed.jpg" alt="half poster bed" title_text="half poster bed" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



The base is same like in the standard poster bed, the wood is also engraved, but the footboard columns are shorter.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



6. Classic canopy bed



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/canopy-bed.jpg" alt="canopy bed" title_text="canopy bed" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



A Canopy bed is very similar to Poster bed, it has same luxurious look and four wooden poles, but in this case they are not there just for the decorative purpose.



Poles carry the upper panel or drape, usually made of chiffon, silk or net, which falls on the sides of the bed giving you comfortable feel and privacy. Usually they are huge, so we don’t see them much in homes nowadays.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



7. Contemporary, modern Canopy bed



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/modern-canopy-bed-contemporary.jpg" alt="modern canopy bed contemporary" title_text="modern canopy bed contemporary" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



This is a canopy bed with a modern twist. The frame is thin and it’s usually made of wood or metal.



Sometimes it’s draped but often it’s left open. It looks clean and sleek and it became very popular.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



8. Platform bed



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/platform-bed.jpg" alt="platform bed" title_text="platform bed" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



Platform beds are very popular due to their simple, non-bulky style.



There are no boxsprings, the panels of wooden slats provide flexible support and ventilation to the mattress, and that makes your mattress last longer.



They come in all sorts of elegant and modern designs.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



9. Storage beds



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/storage-bed.jpg" alt="storage bed" title_text="storage bed" align="center" custom_margin="||40px|" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



This bed gives you smart storage solution and offers huge space to put your stuff in, which is often placed underneath its slatted base.



It comes in a wide range of styles and usually in simple, classic design.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



10. Day beds



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/day-sofa-bed.jpg" alt="day sofa bed" title_text="day sofa bed" align="center" custom_margin="||40px|" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



It may look like a sofa but actually it’s a single/guest bed, and at daytime you can use it as a lounger or divan. Day beds are made of high quality wood or metal and can be wrapped with fabric or leather.



They come in variety of designs, are very comfortable and can really "beautify" your home.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



11. Adjustable air beds



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/adjustable-airbed.jpg" alt="adjustable airbed" title_text="adjustable airbed" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



Air beds are permanent form of air mattresses made from PVC or other types of plastic in combination with fabric.



They are for in-home use only. The softness of bed can be regulated and that’s why they had proven great in helping people with back pain.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



12. Modern water bed



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/modern-water-bed.jpg" alt="modern water bed" title_text="modern water bed" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



Water beds are pads filled with water. Initially they were made for medical purposes but they become very popular in the 80’s.



They come in all sorts of sizes, types of firmness and with different frames.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



13. Double Decker



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/double-decker-bed.jpg" alt="double decker bed" title_text="double decker bed" align="center" custom_margin="||40px|" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



Also known as Bunk beds are ideal for bedrooms that are shared by two or more children. There are two twin beds, placed one on top of other with a ladder leading to the top bed.



Over the years, we have been many variations of this bed.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



14. Loft bunk



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/loft-bunk-bed.jpg" alt="loft bunk bed" title_text="loft bunk bed" align="center" custom_margin="||40px|" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



This is just the top portion of the bunk bed with ladders and the open space where the bottom bed should be.



Bottom space is usually used as a working area with desk and shelves. It is ideal for small rooms because of its great use of space.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



15. L-shaped bunk



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/l-shaped-bunk-bed.jpg" alt="l shaped bunk bed with desk" title_text="l shaped bunk bed" align="center" custom_margin="||40px|" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



Like a traditional bunk bed only with addition of a third bunk that sticks out making an “L” shape. The bottom bed can be futon or regular twin.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



16. Twin Over Full Bunk



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/twin-over-full-bunk-bed.jpg" alt="twin over full bunk bed" title_text="twin over full bunk bed" align="center" custom_margin="||40px|" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



In this variation of a double decker, the bottom bunk is a king size bed, so more people can sleep in it, and the top bunk is a twin sized.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



17. Futon Bunk



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/futon-bunk-bed.jpg" alt="futon bunk bed" title_text="futon bunk bed" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



It’s ideal for small spaces because it includes top bunk which is a standard twin size bed



The bottom bunk is a futon bed, which can be used as a sofa or extra bed when you have guests.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



18. Bunk with trundle



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/bunk-bed-with-trundle.jpg" alt="bunk bed with trundle" title_text="bunk bed with trundle" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



This is a traditional bunk style bed, but it also has a trundle, so it can accommodate 3 people instead of 2.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



19. Futon bed



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/futon-bed.jpg" alt="futon bed" title_text="futon bed" align="center" custom_margin="||50px|" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



The Futon bed is a great solution for small space. They can be used as a couch or bed, by simple folding it up or down.



There are a lot of designs available and can be easily customized from frames to mattresses.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



20. Cabin/Loft bed



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/cabin-bunk-bed.jpg" alt="cabin bunk bed for kids" title_text="cabin bunk bed for kids" align="center" custom_margin="||50px|" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



Similar to bunk bed, but for one person only, it contains one bed frame, with free space above, on the sides, and under the bed itself.



The space can be used for storage with shelves, drawers, or even a desk. It comes in all sorts of designs and colors and it’ very functional in places with limited space.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



21. Panel bed



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/modern-panel-bed.jpg" alt="modern panel bed" title_text="modern panel bed" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



Made with flat, tall wooden panels for the headboard and footboard, and it has side rails so there is an option of using boxspring.



Very simple and elegant in design.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



22. Murphy bed



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/murphy-bed.jpg" alt="murphy bed" title_text="murphy bed" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



Named after William L. Murphy, these beds vertically fold into walls, that way creating space when you are not using them.



They often come with storage cabinets, shelves, and nightstands.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



23. Sleigh bed



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/california-king-sleigh-bed.jpg" alt="california king sleigh bed" title_text="california king sleigh bed" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



Dating back to 19th century, famous for its sleek curves and refined look, it is usually made from heavy wood, iron or steel.



These beds make quite a statement because of their massive design and will definitely bring a style to your home



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



24. Trundle



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/trundle-kid-bed.jpg" alt="trundle kid bed" title_text="trundle kid bed" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



Popular in teen and kids rooms, not bulky as bunk beds, trundle bed is a perfect solution for saving space and having an extra bend when your kids have friends stay the night.



The spare bed is tucked under the main one, and it can be pulled out very easily, literally like when you open the drawer.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



24. Pencil poster



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/pencil-poster-bed.jpg" alt="pencil poster bed" title_text="pencil poster bed" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



Dated from 18th century, these wooden beds have four posts with points on top of them, giving them that “pencil look”.



Sometimes the frame is attached above so it can be turned into a canopy bed.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



26. Traditional Canopy



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/traditional-canopy-bed.jpg" alt="traditional canopy bed" title_text="traditional canopy bed" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



This is a true eye catcher, a very “posh” type of canopy bed, made of high quality wood or steel, heavily decorated, especially at headboard and footboard..



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



27. Hanging bed



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/hanging-suspended-bed.jpg" alt="hanging suspended bed" title_text="hanging suspended bed" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



This beds are attached to the ceiling and you reach them with the help of ladders.



This is something not many people have in their homes, but sure is unique and interesting.



You can adjust how high you want it to be placed, so if you are afraid of heights but still want to be swing to sleep, this can be your dream come true.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



28. Hammock



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/hammock-bed.jpg" alt="hammock bed" title_text="hammock bed" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



Made from stretchy net and attached to the frame, this is not something you can call a bed, but if you are a fan of hammocks, here is an opportunity to have one in your bedroom and indulge in some unconventional sleeping.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



29. Cot



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/cot-bed.jpg" alt="cot bed" title_text="cot bed" align="center" custom_margin="||40px|" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



Portable and handy, this can be your Plan C when you have guests, you just need to fold it open, put some pillows and you are all set.



Also, it can be used as a day bed when chilling in your backyard.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



30. Adjustable bed



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/adjustable-bed-base.jpg" alt="adjustable bed base" title_text="adjustable bed base" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



These bed bases are on the high-end of the sleep arena.



They can be a one-piece (like the one in the picture) or split so that the two sleepers can choose th position that works for them.



A great option for anything from using your bed as a lounger with a bowl-full of popcorn to help with medical issues like back pain or acid reflux.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



31. Ottoman pull-out bed



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/ottoman-pull-out-bed.jpg" alt="ottoman pull out bed" title_text="ottoman pull out bed" align="center" custom_margin="||40px|" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



Similar to cot bed, but during the day it serves as as sitting ottoman or foot rest. Fantastic use of space and it can be made from all sorts of fabrics.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="40px|||" custom_padding_tablet="5px||5px|" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" background_color="#0066cc" custom_padding="||15px|30px" custom_padding_tablet="|||50px" custom_padding_phone="|||65px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"]



Bed styles



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



32. Modern



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/modern-style-bed.jpg" alt="mission style bed" title_text="mission style bed" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



Modern style beds are very simple in their form. White color is one of the most used, and there is a tendency to create a light feel of the furniture, especially when it comes to the ones in the bedroom.



Beds are often thin and flat, lines are straight, there is no decoration, or if there is it’s very subtle. Beds in this style can easily find their place in most of the modern homes.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



33. Cottage



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/cottage-style-bed.jpg" alt="mission style bed" title_text="mission style bed" align="center" custom_margin="||50px|" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



This is an old fashioned style, it has a traditional feel, but with a fancy twist. There are lots of carvings and decorations on headboards and footboards, curvy lines and white finish over the wood.



Beds in this style can have painted decorations, or can be very simple, neutral and elegant in white and beige tones.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



34. Mission



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/mission-style-bed.jpg" alt="mission style bed" title_text="mission style bed" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



The style is distinguished by the use of horizontal and vertical lines on the flat panels.



The focus is on the wood and its grains. It can easily be mixed with all types of decors, and it has a modern feel to it, giving a room simple, yet unique vibe.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



35. Traditional



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/traditional-style-bed.jpg" alt="traditional style bed" title_text="traditional style bed" align="center" custom_margin="||50px|" custom_margin_last_edited="on|phone" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



It’s the mix of styles from other eras, variations of poster beds, canopy and others. It has the elegance, and history, but also modern touches.



The key is to get that timeless look that is up to date now and 20 years from now. If you want to “play safe” and not risk while decorating your home, but still want something modern and beautiful, this bed style should work for you.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



36. Country



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/country-styled-bed.jpg" alt="country styled bed" title_text="country styled bed" align="center" custom_margin="||50px|" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



Country style beds have a rustic touch. The main theme is wood, and a lot of it. Usually they are made with tall headboards and can even feature posts.



There are even some examples made from wooden logs, and often they go with a fur as a part of bedding sets.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



37. Retro



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/retro-style-bed.jpg" alt="retro style bed" title_text="retro style bed" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



A mix of vintage designs (60’s, 70’s) and old fashioned details and decorations, packed in a modern form.



These beds are unique and really can change the whole room.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



38. Vintage



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/vintage-styled-bedroom-mattress.jpg" alt="vintage styled bedroom mattress" title_text="vintage styled bedroom mattress" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



Nothing modern here, this is for the lovers of outdoors and mountains and probably hunting.



It certainly has its charm, especially in old, country houses. The style is very simple and usually there are no decorations.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



39. French style beds



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/french-styled-bed-frame-with-mattress.jpg" alt="french styled bed frame with mattress" title_text="french styled bed frame with mattress" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



French style beds have always been popular, we can say they are timeless. They are very elegant and have a romantic and comfortable feel.



Headboards are usually done in curvy lines, and if they are covered in fabrics, the pastel colors are dominant. This style is a good example of subtle ways in which traditional and modern can be mixed together.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



40. Mid-Century



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/bed-mid-century.jpg" alt="bed mid century" title_text="bed mid century" align="center" custom_margin="||40px|" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



This is a mix of designs from mid 1900’s with traditional style.



Usually they are made from wood and may have a very retro-like decorations or parts, like headboards. They give a room a vintage, comfortable feel.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="40px|||" custom_padding_tablet="5px||5px|" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" background_color="#0066cc" custom_padding="||15px|30px" custom_padding_tablet="|||50px" custom_padding_phone="|||65px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"]



Frame styles



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



41. Metal



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/metal-bed-frame.jpg" alt="metal bed frame" title_text="metal bed frame" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



These frames are very common, not as heavy and robust as wooden, there for easy to move around. They come at a really good price and usually are very adjustable, so they can go with a wide range of mattress sizes.



They are used with boxsprings, except when they are used for the bunk beds in which case they come with metal bars that will give support to the mattress.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



42. Wooden frames



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/wooden-bed-frame.jpg" alt="wooden bed frame" title_text="wooden bed frame" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



The oldest material that has been used to make furniture goes with almost any style.



You can manipulate wood any way you want, wooden frames can be cut, carved and painted so they can make a beautiful, central peace in your bedroom.



They look very stable and give a room a warm, homey feeling.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



43. Wooven frames



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/woven-bed-frame.jpg" alt="woven bed frame" title_text="woven bed frame" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



Woven or wicker furniture has become very popular although it is old fashioned. It is used in indoor and outdoor decor, and gives a country feeling, although it can be very modern.



The woven frames are lighter than the ones made from wood, but very sturdy. Materials that are used in a production are plant based or plastic.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



44. Brass



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/09/type1-divan-bed.jpg" alt="divan bed" title_text="divan bed" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



If you are looking for old fashioned and elegant look, this should be your choice.



The frames can be designed in many styles, but usually have headboard done in curved lines or with vertical bar on the top.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



45. Upholstered



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/upholstered-bed-frame.jpg" alt="upholstered bed frame" title_text="upholstered bed frame" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



Very popular because of their soft headboards, that make sitting up in the bed more comfortable than with other frames. They can be quite beautiful and elegant and often done in buttoned look.



There are some luxury pieces done with Swarovski crystals, that speak for themselves.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



46. Ornate



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/ornate-frame-for-mattress.jpg" alt="ornate frame for mattress" title_text="ornate frame for mattress" align="center" custom_margin="||40px|" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



Definitely one of the most beautiful styles of frames, often can be found in Victorian beds. They bring a touch of luxury to any place.



Easily recognizable for extreme use of details such as ornaments and elegant, curvy lines, they really stand out and are timeless.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



47. Wrought Iron frames



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/wrought-iron-mattress-frame.jpg" alt="wrought iron mattress frame" title_text="wrought iron mattress frame" align="center" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



This frame has a simple, vintage look. If there is a decoration, it’s usually a scrollwork on headboard and footboard.



These frames are durable, sturdy, but quite heavy.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



48. Bookcase



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/bookcase-mattress-frame.jpg" alt="bookcase mattress frame" title_text="bookcase mattress frame" align="center" custom_margin="||40px|" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



Ideal for small spaces or children’s room, the frame features book shelves in the headboard and sometimes on the sides.



It’s made of wood and can be attached to many types of beds.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



49. Distressed



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/distressed-mattress-frame.jpg" alt="distressed mattress frame" title_text="distressed mattress frame" align="center" disabled_on="off|off|off" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



Purposely made to have worn out look, they have a very vintage feel.



The wood is made to look old, used and imperfect, and that’s usually done manually by using sandpaper.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="30px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="10px|0px|10px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" module_id="home" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" text_orientation="center" header_font_size="1px" header_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" text_font_size="40px" text_font_size_phone="20px" text_font_size_last_edited="on|phone" text_text_color="#ffffff" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="0px||0px|60px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|0px" custom_padding_phone="5px|0px|30px|0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



50. Lighted, "floating" frame



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_image admin_label="Image" src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/lighted-floating-mattress-frame.jpg" alt="lighted floating-mattress-frame" title_text="lighted floating-mattress-frame" align="center" custom_margin="||50px|" /][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|60px||60px"]



These frames feature lights underneath the base. The illusion of floating is usually based on a sturdy base at the center of the frame.



Typically, they're low-profile, which adds to the effect.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="20px||0px|" custom_padding_tablet="5px||5px|" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" background_color="#0066cc" custom_padding="||15px|30px" custom_padding_tablet="|||50px" custom_padding_phone="|||65px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"]



Work in progress



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding="0px||30px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="30px|30px|30px|30px" background_color="#cecece"]



This list is pretty well rounded, but as our website grows and we do more research about all things sleep, including bed & mattress styles and types, we'll keep adding to this page.



The goal here is to compile the most complete resource page out there on every type of bed that has ever slept a human, that's why the next chapter added will be sub-types of beds and frames seen through the history with different cultures.



If you are a bed & mattress geek like we are, it's fun.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][/et_pb_column][et_pb_column type="1_4"][et_pb_sidebar admin_label="Sidebar" orientation="right" area="custom-sidebar-10" /][/et_pb_column][/et_pb_section]



Types of Beds and Frames – 50 Conventional, Modern & Quirky Styles is available on https://www.thesleepstudies.com







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/types-of-beds/

Nightmares vs. Night Terrors – what’s the difference and what can you to stop both?

Today we’ll be talking about one of the most misunderstood subjects in the sleep arena - the difference between nightmares and night terrors.



We’ll first address nightmares and the reasons behind them, then explain how they are different from night terrors and finally, offer some actionable tips on how to stop both.









Nightmares



Nightmares can be extremely unpleasant, because the anxiety compromises your sleep quality. This can lead to a state of chronic fatigue and constant mental tension.



It’s a serious problem for some people but to stop them, you first have to understand the reasons behind the issue.



Understanding nightmares



If you feel alone with your problem, you can let out a sigh of relief. Nightmares are common because our brain is overburdened by the sheer amount of information it receives during the day.



It’s a common misconception to associate nightmares with children only and believe that they simply disappear in adults. For some people they don’t, they go on through the teen years to adult life.



For most people this is not a big problem - most of us will have nightmares every once in a while but , depending on which statistics you look at , between 2 and 8% of adult population will experience chronic and recurrent nightmares.



The primary characteristics are very realistic images and emotions that tend to accelerate your heart rate or even wake you up.



At times, you’ll simply wake up and realize that you just had a nightmare but you won’t be able to remember it. The more stressful scenario is that you wake up and remember every detail of the horrible dream, and if it’s especially vivid, you can find it difficult to forget the terrifying images.



Ultimately, nightmares are detrimental to the quality of your sleep, which leads to physical exhaustion and mental tension.



Experiencing the problem on reappearing basis can have adverse effect to other areas of your life and lead to long-term health problems.



So, if you are one of those people who suffer chronically, you’ll want to read on and fully understand the reasons behind the terrifying experience and what you can do to stop it.



Nightmares vs. night terrors - what’s the difference?



While most people won’t to know how to precisely describe the difference between a nightmare and night terrors, they are two completely separate types of sleep disturbance.



Nightmares typically occur in the second part of the night, closer to the morning hours. They go hand-in-hand with dreaming and intense imagery.



The content of the dream varies from person-to-person, but there are some common nightmares, the most frequent ones are being chased or falling..



People who lived through a traumatic event re-experience it in the form of nightmares.



Night terrors



Night terrors of cure in the phase of deep sleep and are therefore more frequent during first few hours of sleep.



They are experienced as an intense feeling of fear with no accompanying dreams.



The sleeper will often move or rise to a sitting position, which can wake them up.



Generally, people experiencing night terrors will not remember what the experience was.



So, to summarize, the response to the question of "nightmares vs. night terrors" and the difference between the two comes down to presence of dreams/imagery or lack thereof.



Should you be worried?



It’s only common sense to be aware of the fact nightmares can be a symptom of a more serious problem.



In most cases, they will appear spontaneously as a result of our brain “crossing” one of its many wires.



“Spontaneously means” that there is no underlying reason and the most probable cause our psychological problems like anxiety, depression and stress. If a person’s life has been interrupted by a significant event traumatic in nature, such as the loss of a loved one or an accident, there will be more likely to face the issue.



The takeaway here is that an occasional nightmare happens to most of us, but if the problem persists, you should talk to a physician to check whether there is an underlying issue like sleep apnea or a restless legs syndrome.



Lastly, there is a growing body of evidence speaking towards the fact that there is such thing as being genetically predisposed to having nightmares, so talking to your parents about it is a smart idea.



If nothing else, it will put your mind at ease if you do establish that the problem runs in the family.



Preventing or stopping nightmares in different scenarios will



Addressing the underlying problem



If you nightmares are a result of problems like sleep apnea, the focus should be on the underlying issue and not the dreams that follow the pathology.



If the underlying reasons are psychological in nature, like depression and anxiety, both problems should be addressed at the same time.



While you battle your way out how to the psychological problems, you can ask your physician about the sleep problem and they will probably be able to help, either by recommending some over-the-counter sleep aids like melatonin or prescribing some sleep medication (if the problem is more severe).



In the latter scenario, most practitioners prescribe Prazosin, which is a drug commonly used to help people suffering from post traumatic stress syndrome, but it’s also known to help with nightmares.



Avoid eating before bedtime



A meal before bedtime can be a trigger, because food stimulates your metabolism and sends your brain a signal to be more active.



Even snacking is not recommended, especially if the snack is rich in sugar.



Do your best to reduce tension



Stress is a common cause of nightmares, so take the time to relax and make a conscious decision to design a quiet, soothing sleep environment.



Your bedroom should be an oasis of relaxation and an escape from your daily concerns.



Yoga and meditation are two great activities for tension relief and soothing of both body and mind.



Even if you never did it before, consider taking courses or just practice yoga a few minutes every day in the comfort of your home.



Other activities such as reading, knitting or a simple walk can go a long way towards relieving your tensions. The rule of thumb here is that the activity should be something you enjoy, something that takes your mind off of everyday problems and worries.



Doing something along those lines and then following it up with a hot bath before bedtime can do wonders to help you unwind after the hassles of a stressful day.



Medication can cause nightmares



If you notice the pattern of increased frequency or vividness of nightmares when you take certain medication, talk to your doctor about it and explore that as a potential cause.



Antidepressants and some drugs for high blood pressure are often the culprit. The good news is that we all respond in a different way to different types of medication and your doctor might be able to help by switching to something that was still address your primary concern without causing the stressful night experience.



Another scenario here can be an increase or decrease in the dosage of the medicine you’re already taking, in which case the bed dreams should go way as soon as your body adjusts to the new doses.



The spiral of sleep deprivation and nightmares



The connection between lack of sleep and nightmares is similar to the question about the chicken and the egg.



Sleep deprivation can disturb your brain in ways that can cause bad dreams and vice versa.



If this is the case the problem should be addressed holistically.



The place to start is your bedroom



It’s not news that a clean, uncluttered bedroom will with minimal distractions makes for optimal sleep environment.



Apart from minimizing the clutter, make sure that the bedroom is completely dark.



When it comes to temperatures, the rule of thumb is to aim for an environment that’s not too cold or hot.



It is worth mentioning that most people sleep better in the cold and this is congruent with what happens in our bodies as we fall asleep.



As we’re dozing off, our body temperature lowers and the space you sleep in should make that process easier.



For optimal sleep, the recommended temperature suggested by science is in the range of 60 to 67°F.



Your mattress and linen



If you’re still sleeping on that old, dingy mattress you should consider the possibility of that being one of the contributing factors.



Your mattress of choice should not only be adjusted to what feels comfortable but to your body type as well.



For heavy people, a good mattress will be well-balanced between support and comfort.



The goal here is to address issues that might be keeping your spine muscles working through the night trying to avoid any nerve damage. This tends to happen if you’re a heavy person and choose a mattress that lacks in support, like one made of low density memory foam - you can read more about choosing a good mattress for heavy people here.



Your pillow working with your mattress



The point we made about aligning your spine also applies to choosing a pillow that works for you.



If you’re a big person and go with a thin pillow, the chances of developing Mac and back pain problems increased dramatically. That also applies to the mesomorph body type, especially if your exercise regimen includes lifting weights and you are very muscular.



For a muscular body, a higher pillow will give the person enough elevation in the head area so that the shoulder doesn’t get in the way.



Bedroom is for sleep



You would think that this is an oversimplified statement, but it’s the nature of the modern life that causes the problem.



We tend to take our work with us into the bedroom. Apart from the stimulation that doesn’t allow you to relax, there’s also a secondary issue that follows.



If you bring work into an area that’s supposed to be dedicated to sleep, you may soon find yourself associating the room with stress.



The confusion surrounding physical activity



A physically fit person will generally sleep better.



We feel like there’s no need to make a special plant of physical activity to address sleep problems. The rules here are similar to what is generally considered a healthy lifestyle.



The one thing that would like to stress is exercising before bedtime. It’s a huge no-no because exercise causes your blood to rush through your body, making your brain more alert and active.



An active brain will be more difficult to soothe when you’re trying to get your ZZZs.



As a rule of thumb, avoid exercising 3 to 4 hours before bedtime. This should give your rushing blood enough time to go back to the state of stasis.



Caffeine



The issue of caffeine disturbing your sleep patterns has been rehashed so many times that you probably want to instinctively skip this part of the article.



Before you do that, let us just say that what we’ll offer here is a different, more precise take on the caffeine issue.



Instead of offering vague tips like, “don’t drink coffee in the afternoon,” we’ll go more in-depth so that you can understand what’s really going on.



Don’t hate us for what we are about to say, we’re just the messengers, but the issue is more intricate to be soled by following general advice like the one we mentioned above.



Let’s be more precise



Here is the problem - caffeine has a long half-life (5 to 6 hours). This means that the cup of double espresso at 3 PM is an equivalent to 1 cup at 8 PM.



This is the part that most people either don’t know or don’t fully understand.



It’s easy to just grab a mug of an extra large coffee and shrug it off by telling yourself that it will be long gone by nighttime.



It won’t.



It will stick around and continue to stimulate your brain through today. You might not feel it because you’re comparing it to the feeling of that initial boost it gives you.



Let us explain it on an example



What people know as a “shot” of espresso is approximately 1 lbs. and contains 63.6 mg of caffeine.



Here’s the math:


A double espresso will deliver a hefty boost of over 125 mg of caffeine.



If you drink it at, say, 3 PM there will be 64 mg still roaming your body at 8 PM.



More importantly, it means that you’ll still have about 30 mg of caffeine in your bloodstream at 1 AM.



Let’s put that into perspective



Research shows that the average American consumes about 300 mg of caffeine per day, which is 300% more than the average intake in the rest of the world.



If that sounds bad, let’s take the conversation to a more positive place and mention that the culture of heavy tea-drinking in countries like the UK brings them to the top of the list of caffeine intake.



On average, they consume twice as much as an average American adult.



That’s not an excuse



Patting ourselves on the back and taking comfort in the fact that there is “worse” out there brings us no closer to a solution.



As a conclusion, all we can say is that you should be aware of how caffeine works and its half-life but ultimately, its effects on your sleep quality will depend on how sensitive you are to it.



The alternatives



It’s easy to talk about giving up coffee but to actually do it is a whole different ballgame.



If it makes you feel any better, I have a mug full of coffee on my desk is in writing these lines.



You don’t have to go cold turkey



Does don’t so much of pleasure a person can sacrifice at the altar of optimal health. You don’t have to stop drinking coffee, but you do have to know the facts if you’re not sleeping well.The alternative to giving up coffee cold turkey is keeping that morning those in your life which, let’s face it is the one that gives us the most pleasure.



For the rest of the day you can go with alternatives that are similar in taste and texture, like Kava Kava.



It’s a beverage made of the extract of a plant, commonly found in the islands of the Western Pacific and it’s known for its anti-anxiolytic effects. The name of the beverage or originates “awa”, which is a Polynesian word for bitter.



There’s been some controversy about it and its regulation. That’s why it’s important that, if you do decide to experiment replacing coffee with, choose a good trusted brand.



A while back we did some research on the topic and came up with a list of the best cover brands for anxiety – you can see it here.



Addressing nightmares through mental imagery therapy



One of the most common approaches sleep therapists take to address severe nightmares is the technique of mental imagery.



The concept is pretty simple and it comes down to encouraging the patient to imagine an alternative end or scenario for the nightmares, especially if they’re reoccurring.



Techniques range from just imagining a more pleasant dream to writing, drawing or painting an alternative version of the nightmare.



For example, if you have a reoccurring dream of somebody chasing you, the therapy might include visualization off befriending the “chaser” or finding out that the reason for the pursuit is to deliver good news.

“Provoking” pleasant dreams



This technique is also based on visualization.



Here’s how it works


Take time during the day to wind down, close your eyes, even if it’s for five minutes only, and go to your happy place.



The technique works best if you choose one happy image that you build on and add details over time.



The happy place you visualize should be isolated, something like a mountain top with a gorgeous view. The important part here is to provoke a feeling that nothing else is important and the moment is just about you on that that mountain top admiring the view.



As you practice the technique, try to make it as real as possible by adding details like sounds, smells and atmosphere.



Happy thoughts



You should make a habit of thinking about things that bring you pleasure just before bedtime.



The science behind this is solid and it’s all about the chemicals in your brain, a small dose of dopamine/serotonin might just be enough to relax.



The experience you think about can be either imaginary or a real memory but shouldn’t be stimulant.



Here’s what we mean by that



Don’t choose an experience like a game of beach volleyball that you particularly enjoyed a decade back. It might be pleasant, but the very thought of intense physical activity will cause a similar reaction in your body and stimulate you.



Instead, go with something relaxing like lying on a beach, basking in the sun and listening to the sound of the waves.



Plan your pastime



A typical person will choose to unwind over a movie or their favorite TV show.



That’s fine if your favorite show is “The Office” but can be a problem if it’s “The Walking Dead”.



The hours before bedtime should be filled with nothing but joy and happy thoughts and violent movies have no place here.



It’s all an acquired skill



If you’re reading this you might think that you can’t possibly do it all.



That’s probably true, at least not at once.



If you’re having sleep problems, they didn’t just suddenly appear at some point in your life (even if it might like it).



They are usually a result of prolonged stress and anxiety that’s been simmering without an outlet before finding its way out through your dreams.



That’s how you should approach reversing the process - take it one step at a time, don’t get discouraged if something doesn’t work and give it time.



There’s no substitute for patience.



One something as important as sleep is at stake, it’s worth it.



Sweet dreams



The following article Nightmares vs. Night Terrors – what’s the difference and what can you to stop both? is available on https://thesleepstudies.com/







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/nightmares-vs-night-terrors-difference/

Northwest Territory Air Mattress Review – rated and compared to some of our top picks

We finally gathered enough information to statistically analyze, rate and do a reliable review of the Northeastern air mattresses - both the low-rise (Twin and Queen) and the Queen Raised.



We did make a small exception in terms of the data for statistical analysis, because we usually wait until we have a bigger data sample to work with.



We’re making an exception with the Northwest Territory because we heard good things and are eager to see what makes them tick.









What you’ll see below are its ratings in five quality categories and comparison some of our top picks in its price range and type. So without much ado, let’s get to it.



The Northwest Territory is available in two sizes - Twin & Queen, and the airbed will choose to compare it with the Sound Asleep Camping Series. The camping Series by sound asleep is a long-standing member of our list of 10 top-rated air beds - you can see the full guide on best air mattresses in the reviews here.



The two are similar in dimensions, intended purpose (both primarily camping products) so let’s compare them side-by-side.



Northwest Territory

Twin

size - 74×39×9 inches

weight 4.6 LBS

inflation time - 2 minutes



Queen

80 time 60×9 inches

weight 9 LBS

deflation times - 2.5 minutes



Northwest Territory air mattress review - a more in-depth look



The first thing that caught our eye about this inflatable and the number of coils which significantly higher than most inflatable beds it’s in its price range (32 coils for the Twin size and 48 for the Queen).



We are used to seeing beam-based inner structure in this price range and it’s refreshing to see the high number of air coils in this budget-friendly product.



That’s probably its main advantage.



The downside



What we like to see when analyzing airbeds are specific and accurate descriptions of the products in the advertising listings



We wouldn’t characterize the fact sheets that we found about the the brand as “specific”.



Let us explain what we mean by that.



If you take the example of the SoundAsleep that we mentioned above, the company is very specific about what makes the material more durable (thickness).



All the listings we found included wording like “durable” and “resistant”. For the average buyer that you to the market, these words wont mean much.



The user satisfaction


This is probably one of the more important ratings because it incorporates how the owners experience the airbed. It combines quality aspects like durability and air retention with the price tag.



The percentage of satisfies users is fairly high. In fact, the 83/100 places the brand in the top 20% among 120+ air beds we’ve reviewed over the past few years.



We couldn’t find reliable info on where it’s made


One of the things that we look at in the ratings is the manufacturing - especially whether it’s outsourced overseas and if it is, what specific facility.



Outsourcing is not a bad thing per se and most of the products in the industry are in fact made overseas.



What we find helpful in painting an accurate picture about a specific product are the manufacturing practices of specific outsourcing locations.



We’ve been doing this for so long now that we can separate the locations that are reliable from the shadier ones.



Let’s make it clear that we’re not making any specific claims, we’re just sharing that we don’t have that piece of information to include in the review..



Value for money



The brand is one of the most budget-friendly solutions out there but you shouldn’t take the price at face value.



The main reason is that it doesn’t come with the pump, which is sold separately and costs about $20. This lowered the value for money rating a peg.



Weight limit



Another piece of information that we couldn’t find is the weight limit.



In our opinion, this is serious omission because it’s a crucial piece of information for anybody considering the product, especially people on the heavier side.



Percentage of air leaks developed



Based on the stats of gathered from the experience of owners, about 10% of people have seen issues with air leaks.



This is significantly higher than what we’re used to, but to be fair, most air beds we test cost more than the products coming from the brand.



It can work with generic/universal pump



The point we made about the pump not being included becomes a non-issue if you already own one.



The good news here is that the two models from the brand do work well with generic and universal pumps.



The inflation and deflation time are short, even compared to some of the more expensive models.



For example, the two minutes it takes to inflate the Twin can only be compared to the efficiency of an Aerobed pump that you see in products like Aerobed classic.



The side-by-side comparison that we did above was weight on inflatable mattress the costs more, so let’s do the same thing and compared this Northwest territory to a product that’s closer in price.



Northwest versus Aerobed classic



Queen Raised



The pricing of this model is not as low as the low-rise that we looked at above, which gives us more leeway for a side-by-side comparison.



We choose to compare it to the Intex plush Durabeam Series.



Compared to Intex comfort plush



Northwest

size 83 x 64 x 23 inches

inflation time - 6 minutes



Based on the ratings that we saw above and user satisfaction, it’s our opinion that the Intex Comfort Plush is the superior choice in pretty much all quality aspect that makes or breaks an airbed.



Conclusions of the Northwest Territory air mattress review



As a mentioned, the main reason we decided to do a review of the brand is the fact that it’s one of the most budget-friendly solutions out there and , in those terms, it did live up to the expectations.



It’s a solid bang for your buck, especially if you don’t plan to use it frequently and only need a temporary extra bed for guests and weekend sleepovers.



We typically update our reviews and ratings every 2- 4 months, but that’s probably not going to be the case here and we’ll wait until we gather at least 150 user experiences before we revisit this review.



Feel free to ask us anything in the comments below or simply shoot us an email with any dilemmas you might have.



The following article Northwest Territory Air Mattress Review – rated and compared to some of our top picks is courtesy of https://thesleepstudies.com/







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/northwest-territory-air-mattress-review/

Twin XL air mattress – top 2 among 120 airbeds tested – 2017 update

In the last 5 years, we've tested and reviewed over 120 air mattresses.



What we have seen in this size is that Twin XL air mattresses are scarce. Let us just give you an idea of how limited the choices are - out of the 120 air beds we reviewed ONLY 2 come in Twin XL.



In case you’re looking for this specific size don’t panic just yet, because there is good news. The 2 products in this size also belong to the top 5 highest-rated airbeds overall.









What you’ll see below



In the analysis below, you’ll see the mattresses rated in 5 quality categories: Air retention, Comfort, Durability, User satisfaction & Value for money.



What’s probably even more important, we’ll go into the differences between the 2 products to give you an idea about which one suits your needs better. So let’s get to it.



Fox Plush Durabeam XL air mattress



This Fox is not only one of the Top 2 choices if you need an extra long air mattress, but it is also one of the toughest airbeds we know.



What stands out the most is the vinyl used to make it.



Here’s what we mean by that - the industry standard for vinyl thickness is 0.04 mm, while this Fox is 40% thicker - 0.06 mm.

This means lower incidence of air leaks, low risk of your mattress getting punctured and a sleep experience that’s very close to that of a regular mattress. You can see all of its ratings below.



Who will choose the Fox Plush?



The choice here is pretty simple because the second mattress (that we’ll talk about in a minute) is much firmer than this Fox.



The bottom line here is that Fox Plush will be the choice of two groups of people.



One - those who prefer a loftier, medium-firmness sleep surface.



Two - people who are not only tall but on the heavier side, too.



It’s the thickness of the vinyl that allows this air mattress to take on more weight without developing a leak or bursting a chamber.



If you belong to one of the two groups above, this is a no-brainer, especially because Fox offers 90 days warranty.



Over 1000 owners shared their experiences and reviews on Amazon; you can see them all and compare current prices by following the links below.



Bamboo Topper Twin XL air mattress



Before we move on, let’s clarify that “Best Choice” is the actual name of the product.



It belongs to the group of new arrivals to the market that have stirred the waters in the past few years.



Before 2013, the industry was pretty much dormant, with the same products dominating and no significant change in either technology or materials.



That all changed with the arrival of this air mattress and a few other models from younger companies.



What’s different about it?



With Fox (above) the approach to making the airbed stronger is to simply use thicker material.



That’s not the case here – the vinyl is improved without making it thicker.



First of all - typically, your average airbed will be made of recycled vinyl.



This is the ONLY ONE we’re certain is made of virgin vinyl. You probably get the difference - “Virgin vinyl” means that it’s the first time the material is used.



This is important because vinyl uses some of its properties in the recycling process.



Secondly - the body is not plain PVC; the vinyl is layered with a nylon laminate to stabilize it, make it more scratch and puncture-resistant and lower the incidence of defects, like splitting of the seams and pinholes.



Who is best suited for?



This mattress will be the choice of people who prefer a firmer sleeping surface.



Another plus is the included hypoallergenic bamboo topper.



Based on our statistics, about 30% of new air mattress owners will end up getting an extra topper to make their airbed more comfortable. With this one, there’s no need for that, because the one included is just as good and you don’t have to spend extra money.



Finally, if appearance is a factor, you’ll love the fact that the skirt attached to the topper covers all the plastic parts.



The terms of the warranty are as flexible as you can see in the industry - 1 year of warranty on the defects and, more importantly, a 60-day return warranty.



It’s the latter that makes all the difference - it basically means that if you don’t like the mattress for any reason at all, you can send it back within 2 months with no questions asked.



Hundreds of new owners shared their experiences and answered questions about this mattress on Amazon. You can see all of them by clicking on one of the two buttons below.



More detailed analysis of the Twin XL air mattresses



In the section below we’ll go into more depth about the two extra long Twin airbeds and analyze the features that earned them a place on this list. We’ll also address some of the frequently asked questions.



Fox Plush



Some interesting statistics



What good is pooling all that data over the years if we don’t use it to reach relevant conclusions based on the numbers, so let’s do that here.





Less than 1% of new owners of the Fox Plush Durabeam reported some type of air loss within the first month of use - which is one of the lowest numbers on the market


93% of new owners said that they find it comfortable


Let us take a moment to analyze what the numbers above mean.



Over the years of reviewing and testing airbed, we noticed a few patterns.



One of them is that beds that are sturdier and more durable are usually not as comfortable. That’s not surprising since we know what it takes to make a tough airbed.



It involves strengthening the core, reinforcing the beams and chambers so there’s less swaying (lateral movement) and sinking (stability of the top surface).



If you leave it at that, you will have one tough blow-up mattress, but you’ll “sacrifice” some of the comfort in the process.



That’s why the combo of the stats above is crucial



The smart part about the design of this Fox is the balance between sturdiness of the materials and comfort.



It's the air-flow chambers that make it possible; these mimic the effects of egg-crate or a memory foam topper.



Best of both worlds


The fact that this Fox belongs to the top 5 inflatables in both comfort and durability speaks volumes.



Here’s how it works


An airbed usually has a wobbly, unstable feel to it and we’ve yet to meet an adult person that likes it.



That’s why 1 in 3 people will get an extra topper to compensate for that bouncy feeling.



Fox resolve that issue here by separating the two structures (the inner chambers and the top sleeping surface). They did that by adding an extra layer of air chambers and the top.



Beyond the comfort


One of the common complaints people have about airbeds is the volatility of the temperatures - that’s why you hear people describing their bed as “hot” or “cold.”



Here’s the physics behind it


The air inside an inflated mattress is a closed environment.



The science of temperature distribution in any closed environments says that particles will move up and down until the energy (temperature) is evenly distributed.



To put it less “sciency” - the air inside will move until the temperature of the molecules find a balance.



Typically, a one night of sleep won’t be long enough for that to happen.



That’s why you might feel surges of hot or cold air through the night - it happens when a cluster of cold or warm air molecules hits the top surface.



Enter the Air-flow chambers


In the case of this Fox those swirls of hot/cold air will not directly hit the surface underneath the sleeper, but the air-flow layer.



What this means is real life is that there’s a barrier between the temperature volatility of the air and the sleeper.



It’s this unique design that allowed Fox to find its place on the list of top-rated inflatables both in durability and comfort.



The coils


An air bed based on coils for the inner structure will outperform chamber-only design in 70% of the cases.



To make sure that this number is relevant, about 6 months ago, we did a mini-study of our own. We compared inflatables of the two types (coils vs. no-coils) in the same price range.



The results were pretty conclusive and coils outperformed about 70% of the time.



It doesn’t come as a surprise because the very reason air-coils were introduced is to mimic the effects of steel springs in regular mattresses.



Number of coils


Most air beds on the market today rely on the coil technology and what separates the winners are two things - what kind of a “backbone” the coils have and how many of them structure includes.



There are 24 coils in the Fox Plush extra long air mattress, which is one of the highest numbers in the industry (that includes all inflatables in Twin size, not just the extra long).



Versatility - home use & camping


This extra long air mattress includes a secondary valve that can be used alternative pumps (leg, manual, battery-operated)



This makes it a good option for camping because access to a power outlet is not a must. The air release valve is labeled as “deluxe” by the company and speeds up the deflation.



It can only be compared to the Whoosh valve of Aerobed air mattresses, which is the measuring stick in terms of deflation efficiency.



FAQs about the Fox



What’s the difference a Twin and a Twin XL air mattress?



A Twin XL has the same with as a regular Twin but the length of the Queen, which is usually 80 inches.



You can see our full guide on twin air mattresses here.



What we especially like about the Fox brand is that their products are true to size.



It might sound like a given, but trust us, it’s not.



The issue of the bed not being true to size usually comes in two forms – the more common one is the product being blatantly smaller than the listed dimensions.



The other scenario is a bit more intricate and “devious.”



Here’s what we mean by that



Inflatable beds usually have arched sides, and some of the brands list the dimensions of the further-most points.



That’s misleading because, depending on how “bulged” the sides are, the difference between the dimensions can range anywhere from 1 or 2 up to 5 inches.



That’s why we’re making a special point to stress Fox being true to size - the listed dimensions are the actual inches you get for the sleep surface.



Can it be used on a platform/frame?



We don’t see this being a good idea, especially for the raised models like this Fox



If you do try to experiment with it, we would advise using protection of some sorts that would be smooth enough not to cause any pinholes.



A classic bed frame will have wooden slates and no matter how smooth they appear, there will always have tiny prickles that can damage your inflatable.



Camping use



This Fox comes with an alternative pinch-hole valve that can be used with a manual or leg pump, but most campers will find it too time-consuming to regularly inflate on the campsite.



The alternative here is getting a converter/inverter that will transform the 12 V current of the car outlet into 110 V that you need for the pump.



If you do that, make sure to factor in the power to avoid overheating and damaging the circuitry of the pump motor.



Is a remote control included?



Fox makes a wide range of airbeds and many of them are similar in appearance to this bed.



Over the past 6 months, the number of questions about this bed including remote control increased, probably because of the new arrivals from the company.



To be clear, the Fox Plush Durabeam does not include a remote control or a corded wand, the pump is built-in and you operate it by manually choosing the settings.



Speed of inflation/deflation



It takes about 3 minutes to inflate this Twin XL and about 4 for other sizes it comes in (Full, Queen and King).



Bulk and storage size



It’s common sense that the thicker material makes this Fox heavier and bulkier compared to models from competing brands.



This is not a big issue for home-use but it is relevant if you plan to take it camping since it’s only an option if you have the room in your trunk.



What sheets to choose?



The indentations in the sides of the bed are deep enough to form a good grip with fitted sheets. The depth of the sheets will depend on which of the three side “rims” you want the elastic band to grip.



You will see minimal slippage with deep-pocketed sheets and you can even get the extra deep type which will allow you cover the whole side surface of the mattress.



We would advise going with the deep-pocketed. Ideally, we’d go with 23-25 “.



Last but not least, standard Twin sheets will not be a good fit since this is an Extra-Long. They will be wide enough, but too short.



Instructions on how to deflate it



To both inflate and deflate use the round “knob” on the side of the mattress and turn it clockwise for inflation and counter-clockwise for deflation.



It can also be deflated by simply opening the valve and squeezing the air out by applying pressure, but we don’t see any reason for that unless the pump somehow malfunctions.



You’ll notice by this point that the versatility of options is a big plus for this Fox and an important part of that is the construction of the pump and valve.



Safety of the auto shut-off feature



Once of the bed reaches your pre-set firmness, the pump automatically shuts off, which means that you don’t have to ”tend” to the bed when setting it up.

Is there a dual control system?



You typically see dual controls in high-end inflatables of queen-size and up. There are no dual controls here.



For readers who don’t know what the feature means, let’s take a moment to explain.



Dual control airbed will allow you to inflate the halves to different levels of firmness.



Is the cord detachable?



No, the pump is corded and attached on both tends - to the pump on one and the plug-in on the other.



However, it doesn’t get in the way because there’s a dedicated space on the side of the bed to pack it in while not in use.



A more detailed review of the Best Choice Twin XL air mattress



A trusted company


The first thing we would like to stress about this extra long air bed is that it comes from a well-trusted company.



That might sound counter-intuitive since we already said that it’s a young product, so let’s explain.



The people behind this bed are industry veterans who run the site airmattress.com…it’s been around for decades.



Their business used to be limited to carrying and selling other brands, but the rumors about the company making the product of their own were whispered for years before this bed hit the market.



When young doesn’t mean unreliable


The company brought this mattress to the market in 2015.

We tend to be cautious with new arrivals before they reach a certain number of user reviews. We also typically weight at least a year before including a bed in our guides, but we did make an exception for this one.



Within 8 months, it was listed as one of our top picks in a wide range of categories, including the list of best air mattresses overall.



We did that for two reasons.



The first one is that the mattress quickly became one of the most popular products in the market, which gave us enough data for the statistical analysis.



Even if that weren’t the case, we would have no trust issues because of the reputation of the company behind it.



The trust factor (TF) adjustment


The formula we use for the ratings was tweaked over the years. One of those tweaks was the inclusion of the TF adjustment.



TF stands for Trust Factor - its number in the range between 0 and 1.



To assign a TF to a company, we do an in-depth analysis of both our experiences with the brand and that of users. This includes all the products from a specific brand. TF reflects things like the responsiveness of their customer service, the accuracy of their advertising claims and the reliability of the warranty policy.



Long story short - TF is crafted to reflect what kind of experience you can expect in dealing with a brand if things go south, like receiving a flawed product or claiming a warranty.



In this case, the company has a maximum TF of 1.



Measurable differences


Browsing through the market can be confusing (and that’s an understatement if there ever was one).



How is a new customer supposed to differentiate between high-quality products and “losers” if the wording in their advertising claims is practically the same?



Whichever airbed and you look at, the claims will typically include wording like “durable”, “puncture-resistant”, “heavy-duty” and similar vague statements.



That’s why the arrival of this product was refreshing since the claims made were measurable and specific.



The vinyl


As we said above, we like to see specific and accurate claims in the advertising of the product and that’s exactly the case here. Let’s take the material as an example of that.



Instead of vaguely describing why the PVC used might be better, they specifically explain the manufacturing process.



Effects of nylon lamination


With classic PVC, to get a more durable surface that’s harder to puncture you simply have to go with the lower gauge (higher thickness). The lower the gauge, the bulkier and heavier an air bed will be.



But if you get creative you can improve its properties without adding the extra weight.



The importance of material stretching


Vinyl is by far the most commonly used material for inflatables, primarily because it’s so malleable and easy to work with.



The downside of that is being prone to scratches and punctures. That’s why the protective layer of nylon encasing used here is so important.



First of all, it makes the material more resistant to scratches and punctures.



Just as important, it increases the cohesion and stabilizes the structure. This, in turn, results in less force expended on the chambers and the connections.



To put it simply - the airbed is less likely to develop a leak in the most common areas, like around the pump or at the seams.



More rugged but lighter


The secondary benefit of strengthening the PVC by applying a layer of nylon laminate is that it results in a lighter material.



Frequently asked questions



How do you clean it?



The classic finish of most air beds is a soft material that resembles velvet or felt. This type of flocking is a magnet for lint and pet hair.



A commonplace cleaning solution for most inflatables will be vacuuming the top surface with a brush attachment and then using a damp cloth to finish the job.



The topper that comes with this extra long air mattress is based on bamboo fibers, completely detachable and can be machine-washed.



If you are washing it in a machine, choose a gentle, cold to low-heat cycle to avoid the topper losing shape.



In the long run that makes it much easier to clean and maintain.



Is it portable and how small does it pack?



The secondary valve can be used with alternative pumps and its main purpose is to offer the option of camping out.



That would be much less of an advantage if the bed didn’t pack as small and light as it does.



According to our measurements, the folded size of the bed and topper is approximately 17.7 x 15.2 inches.



Using it in the cold and hot climates



If you’re camping in colder climates you might need some extra insulation.



The advice we’d have here is to use a canvas fabric between the floor/ground & the mattress to eliminate some of the cold emanating from the bottom surface.



Since the material is not your typical PVC and responds well to temperature changes it’s also an option to use a heated pad without compromising the structural stability, which would be the case if the material was vinyl-only.



This is only our opinion and it’s common sense that you should be cautious when using any electric add-ons like toppers and pads and not leave them unattended for a prolonged period.



The same logic applies for cooling it down



If you’re camping in a warmer climate and have access to power, you can use a cooling mattress pad or topper to control the temperature of the sleep environment.



Do bear in mind that this bed is still made of synthetics and take precautions to closely follow the instructions of the cooling add-on.



It’s just as important to choose a reliable cooling pad - you can see our guide on best going mattress pads and toppers here- https://thesleepstudies.com/best-cooling-mattress-pads/.



Odor and off-gassing


When we compared this bed with the stats we have on the models made from common vinyl we saw a significant difference in the % of users mentioning odor as an issue.



We think that the reason behind it is that rubbery smells that you typically see come from the vinyl off-gassing.



Since the PVC used here is a virgin and encased in nylon, the incidence and percentages of off-gassing are practically non-existent.



The on-arrival package



We measured the box (the one it arrives in), and it measures approximately 17 x 13 x 9 inches.



The size of the drawstring carry bag is slightly smaller than the above-listed dimensions of the box.



Is it prone to bedbugs?



Vinyl is not an attractive material for a bed bug, so we would limit this question to the topper and the skirt.



The bamboo fibers and topper are naturally hypoallergenic and don’t attract bedbugs or germs.



Final thoughts on choosing a Twin XL air mattress



The in-depth analysis of the two air beds that come in the extra long Twin size should give you an idea of what to look for.



The questions to ask if you’re buying in-store should primarily be about the material and the bed being true to size.



The former is pretty self-explanatory - ask about the type of vinyl used, its thickness and whether it’s recycled or virgin.



The latter question (regarding the mattress being true to size) is about being precise about the dimensions listed in the fact sheet.



It comes down to making sure that you are indeed getting an extra long air bed and the listed size is the actual sleeping surface and not to the further-most points of the inflated bed.



he ratings that you saw above are updated on quarterly basis to make sure that we only present relevant and fresh information.



If there is something that we haven’t covered in this guide, feel free to reach out in the comments below or by directly emailing us. There are 6 of us on the team and responding to reader correspondence is a priority, which means you can expect to hear back within 1 day.



Stay smart,



The Sleep Studies Team



Twin XL air mattress – top 2 among 120 airbeds tested – 2017 update See more on: https://thesleepstudies.com







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/twin-xl-air-mattress/

Aerobed classic low-rise air mattress review

Today we’re looking at one of the most popular models for Aerobed – the low-rise Classic Twin and Queen.



Along with the high-rise from the same series, this is a staple model from the brand, at least according to the number of user reviews we gathered for this statistical analysis.



The most likely reason is that, unlike some of the high-end Aerobed models (like the Luxury Collection or the Aerobed Deluxe), The Classic is in the same price range of similar mattresses from other brands.









That’s why the first thing we’ll do is compare it to the top-rated model among low-rise camping air mattress - the Camping Series from SoundAsleep - https://thesleepstudies.com/soundasleep-camping-series-air-mattress-review/.



Both air mattresses are approximately of same height and size and the construction is similar (both feature air coils)



So let’s look at what separates the two.



Ratings comparison



*



Fact sheets



Aerobed Classic



Twin





size - 74 x 39 x 9 inches


weight - 8.8 LBS


Queen





78 time 60 x 6 inches


12.2 LBS


A closer look at the Aerobed Classic low-rise



How the weight is distributed



The fact that we saw a somewhat lower rating in comfort compared to the Camping Series is not a verdict about this Aerobed because we’re comparing it to the top-rated model of its type.



In fact, the Aerobed Classic features one of the better weight distribution systems out there.



Most of that is based on two things - the sheer number of air coils and the structural stability of the vinyl.



The Classic is built on 42 air coils in the Queen and 27 in the Twin.



Very few inflatables out there come close to the weight distribution efficiency of this Aerobed.



That especially goes for the low-rises. They tend to be less stable (both in the aspect of vertical stability and sideways movement) and we’d say that this Aerobed belongs to the top 10 low-rise camping air mattresses we looked at.



Click here for the full list of best camping your mattresses - https://thesleepstudies.com/best-camping-air-mattress/



The valve



The brand is famous for its pump and the Whoosh valve. Back when the system of superfast air release valve was first introduced (over two decades ago), it was nothing short of revolutionary.



Since the original Aerobed, the brand only improved on the design of the pump and valve.



Inflation and deflation times are unparalleled.



Classic looks & a touch of color



For those of you who are our regular readers and have already stumbled upon some of our reviews, it will come as no surprise that we’re delighted to see some splash of color on the market of mainly monochromatic color schemes.



Packing and storage of the Aerobed Classical low-rise



The mega whoosh valve is very efficient in terms of deflation, which means that there is no remaining air when you pack the bed for storage.



It’s not a surprise that this air bed outperforms most models in terms of practicality of storage.



The carry bag that comes with it is pretty strong; it’s made of nylon-based synthetics includes a drawstring to pack the bed even more compactly.



Weight versus sturdiness



Generally speaking, the sturdier air mattresses are usually made of thicker materials or reinforced by fabric, nylon-encasing or TPU.



There’s none of that in this Aerobed.



The Classic relies on its ability to distribute weight well (we already mentioned the number of coils).



If we had to make a choice the most well-balanced airbed (stability, portability and packing size) we would put this air mattress in the top 5%.



When packed, it measures 15.8 x 1.9 x 2 inches.



The pump



Like with most camping models the pump is not built-in and come separately - you just attach it to the valve to fill the air mattress.



It is a two-way, which is another way of saying that it not only inflates but deflates the bed, as well.



Absence of out shut-off safety



Like most air beds in this price range, this Aerobed doesn’t feature firmness pre-sets or and an auto shut-off safety.



Not as big of a deal compared to other brands



The inherent risk of over-inflating an air mattress is a much more substantial issue with other brands with the less sophisticated pumps that just keep adding air you turn them off.



The pump of the Aerobed Classic minimizes the risk of over-inflation because it the simply stops adding air once the mattress reaches a certain maximum firmness.



Like we said, with some of the low-quality airbeds, we deem the absence of the auto shut-off to be a serious problem, but we wouldn’t say that for this air mattress, or any Aerobed, for that matter.



Alternative and generic pumps



The valve of the Aerobe Classic is unique and most generic pumps won’t be a good fit.



If you experience any problems here, the best advice we could give you is to visit the Aerobed section of the Coleman website and look at the parts and accessories.



There are replacement pumps on their website that precisely list what models they fit.



With generic pumps and air machines, a nozzle that might fit should be latch-free and round.



Practicality of camping use



The Aerobed Classic is listed as a camping your mattress, but unlike most outdoor-dedicated models, the pump needs power to work.



What this means for campers is that you need access to power or an adapter to use it with the car outlet.



Warranty



The warranty terms can be somewhat confusing for the customer, so let’s be precise here.



The official Aerobed warranty covers all defects in both the body of the mattress and the parts for 1 year.



What we like about the warranty policy that Aerobed puts forth is that resellers or stores carrying the brand cannot alter the terms in any way.



Flat design of the top surface



Some air mattresses in Queen size are designed with the top-to-bottom beam separation right across the middle. The separator is there to outline the two halves of the inflatable.



We have to say that we are not fans of the separation because it doesn’t allow you to make full use of the whole sleeping surface.



With this Aerobed the top is one piece and has no separators, which is the design we prefer.



Summary of the review



We would say that this Aerobed Classic belongs to stop 8% camping blow up mattresses in terms of value for money.



Its main advantages are the efficiency & speed of inflation/deflation and, more importantly, the sturdy structure and solid distribution of weight.



This bed in currently not in the top 10 airbeds for outdoor use, mainly because of the slightly higher incidence of air leaks, which brought its ratings in the category down a peg.



Nevertheless, it is still good bang for your buck.



Aerobed classic low-rise air mattress review was first published to The Sleep Studies Research







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/aerobed-classic-low-rise-air-mattress-review/

Aerobed One-Touch Comfort Queen review

Over the past few months, we’ve been going back and forth trying to decide whether to do a separate review for the Queen size of this air mattress, since we already did one for the Twin - you can see it here.



What finally triggered us to review this one separately is the fact we’ve seen significant differences in terms of user satisfaction between the two beds.



We’re glad we did since it does deserve it as one of the more popular models from the brand.









Main advantage of the Aerobed One-Touch Comfort Queen



This Aerobed comes with many handy add-ons like the handheld wand, but that’s not what we want to address first.



We’ve been reviewing air mattresses for over three years now what our statistics tell us is that most people are primarily interested in the “substance” like comfort, safety and air retention.



That’s why we want to address the issue of safety first



While it is true that most modern airbeds do have to adhere to the strict guidelines set by the ASTM and are considered safe, this Aerobed takes it one step further.



Here’s what we mean by that



The PVC is treated during the manufacturing process to make it more resistant to germs and odors.



This might be an important point for people suffering from allergies since the development of mildew or mold is practically a non-issue here.



Support and spine alignment



Aerobed has patented what they call a “stability base” in order to offer more support in their newer models.



What this means is that the bottom of the bed is reinforced both in terms of stability and the grip of the floor.



The former minimizes sideways movement and swaying in the latter prevents the bed from sliding.



35 coils



Apart from the extra sturdy base, this air bed features 35 air coils which is higher than 75% of air mattresses in Queen size that we reviewed.



It’s a well-known fact that the higher the number of coils, the better the bed will be at minimizing pressure points at the hips & shoulders and aligning your spine.



That’s what’s puts it in the top 15% in terms of toughness - you can see the complete list of most durable and heavy-duty air mattresses by clicking here.



Pump efficiency, deflation and storage



Like most models in its price range, the Aerobed One Touch Comfort Queen comes with a one-piece pump that’s combined with an air-release mega valve.



Inflation and deflation times



If we were only rating the efficiency of the pump and the time it takes to inflates and deflate the bed, we would probably see 5 or 6 Aerobed dominating.



While the industry standard is 3 to 4 minutes, Aerobed does it much faster by utilizing the mega valve (also known as Whoosh).



The downsides



This is where you “it gets real” because we look at some of the downsides.



Structural issues



It’s not uncommon to see air loss issues in this price range; it’s only a question of the percentage in which they occur.



This % is higher in the Aerobed One Touch Queen than 25% of air mattresses we reviewed.



To be fair, the sample of data that we had to work with for our statistical model here was somewhat smaller, since the number of user experiences we could gather is lower than what we usually go with.



An exception to the rule



In fact, we were so eager to see how the Aerobed One Touch Queen fares against similar models that we made an exception to one of the rules we have.



We have a threshold of minimum data to collect before we do a review of an air mattress, but we made an exception for this one. In our defense, that threshold probably won’t be reached within the next year or so and we’ll make sure to revisit this review once that happens.



But let’s get back to the structural issues that you mentioned.



We’ve seen experiences of people reporting development of air leaks, most of them coming from the area surrounding the pump.



This usually happens in two scenarios - the more common one is a sub-par quality of connections and seams, but we don’t think that’s the case here.



In our opinion, the more likely scenario is that the construction of the pump is too robust for the thickness of the vinyl. If that’s the case, this Aerobed is an exception because the quality of the vinyl is not an issue we commonly see with mattresses coming from the brand.



Again, we are stressing that this is just our opinion based on experience. We’ll be able to reach a more reliable conclusion once we get more information for the statistical analysis.



Summary and review updates



We are very interested to see what happens in the next update of this review.



The main reason for that are the differences we mentioned that the very beginning - between the Twin and the Queen size mattresses that are supposed to be the same.



While we wait to collect more information for the updated review (that will probably take 10 months to a year) we will also try to contact both the company and the seller and see if they have comments.



It’s only fair to hear out their side of the story, especially because we are fond of classic brands like Aerobed.



It would be good for the market and, in turn, for the consumer to reinvigorate the competition between the new arrivals and products like this…coming from the industry giants.



As always, please do share your opinions and questions in the comments below or by contacting us directly.



Aerobed One-Touch Comfort Queen review See more on: https://thesleepstudies.com/







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/aerobed-one-touch-comfort-queen-review/

Review of the Aerobed Quilted air mattress with a foam topper

Today we take a look at one of the most comfortable inflatables coming from Aerobed.



It is also one of the most stylish airbeds that we know, and before we move on with the review, we have to be unprofessional for a second and admit that we are fans of the dark tinted blue of this Aerobed.



Now that we made the disclosure let us stress that our fondness for this eye candy won’t impact the ratings in other quality aspects such as air retention, durability and comfort.









Before we move on to a more in-depth analysis, we think it would be smart to do a head-to-head comparison of this Aerobed bed with the currently top-rated model, which is the Dream Series from SoundAsleep.



Ratings comparison



An in-depth review



Comfort of this Aerobed



This is a high-end air mattress, but it also comes with a price tag to match.



This is what slightly lowers the ratings in the “value for money” quality aspect if you can call it that…since it’s more about the balance between the quality and the price.



But let’s put the price aside for a moment to take an objective look at the comfort.



Stability



This Aerobed relies on the time-tested although coils seen in most models from the brand. These have been proven to do a solid job in terms of handling the weight of the sleeper.



It’s one of the staple products from the brands – you can see our full guide and top pick among Aerobed air mattresses in Twin, Queen, King & Full size here.



Oval coils



The main advantage here is the sheer number of coils - although Aerobed doesn’t list it here, most of their models in Queen size have 48 oval air coils.



Since this is the case with their more budget-friendly models, like The Aerobed Classic which you can see here - https://thesleepstudies.com/aerobed-classic-air-mattress-review/, it’s safe to assume that the number is just as high in this bed.



It’s these coils that ensure the stability, making the sleep experience very close to that of a regular mattress.



The topper and the finish



If you’re new to our website, you probably haven’t seen some of the stats we’ve gathered over the years.



The one that applies here is the fact that about 40% of owners choose to add an egg crate or foam topper to make the bed more comfortable.



There’s no need to worry about that with this Aerobed since it comes with a zippered pillow top.



The antimicrobial treatment



The cotton finish of the foam topper has antimicrobial properties that lower the risk of allergic reactions to any mildew or mold, that is inherently present with cheaper air mattresses, especially if you’re using them in the moist environment.



In the case of this air bed, it’s not only the topper that’s antimicrobial.



The vinyl used for the body is also treated in production to be resistant to germs.



An improved pump



If there’s anything that Aerobed is known for, it is the unique construction and circuitry of the pump.



More than two decades ago, Aerobed came up with the one-of-a-kind design for the pump that broke new grounds in the industry. It’s made inflation and deflation much more efficient and user-friendly.



Today, most air mattresses coming from Aerobed feature some improved form of the original technology.



What’s usually lacking is the safety shut-off. For those of you who are buying their first air mattress this feature is designed to prevent over-inflation by switching off the pump once the pressure reaches your pre-set firmness.



Unique among uniques



We already stressed that an Aerobed pump is uncommon and exclusive to the brand.



What’s better about this model is that it comes with an indicator of full inflation.



To put it simply, a small LED light on the body of the pump turns on once of the bed is fully inflated.



Air mattresses in the lower price range of the brand usually separate the pump from the valve. How it usually works is that you inflate the bed using the standalone electric pump and deflate it by manually letting the air out through the mega Whoosh valve.



That’s not what we have here.



The pump is a one-piece and two-way



The former means that the air release valve is built into the structure, while the latter refers to the fact that the pump both inflates and deflates the bed.



The bottom line here is that the whole process is simplified and more practical for the user.



The one touch wand



On top of the practicality and user-friendliness we talked about above, you also get the convenience of the one-touch wand.



What this means for the user is that you can set up the bed standing up. You control the whole process by just pressing the one button on the wand.



Let’s be clear here…this is not a remote that you see in other high-end models like Lazery sleep air mattress. The wand is attached to a cord.



Prolonged warranty



A standard Aerobed warranty covers a new owner for one year, while this airbed comes with a two-year warranty.



The memory foam topper



In the past two years we reviewed about a dozen air mattresses with a memory foam topper or a pillow-top made of poly-fiber.



Compared to those, the topper that comes with this air bed is somewhat thinner, and according to our tests and user experiences, we would say that it is slightly less comfortable than blowup mattresses with a completely separate foam topper.



This is only natural, because the foam used in those is thicker and, in most cases, denser.



Weight capacity of this Aerobed



We did a lot of research when compiling this review and couldn’t find a listed maximum capacity for this model, so we have to say that our assessment here is based on our experience.



Our estimated weight capacity is 600 lbs.



The issue of the sheets grip



A vast majority of inflatables from the brand are designed with extra deep side “ribs” or even full separation and to a two-tier design – like the Aerobed Opti Comfort air mattress with headboard.



That is the one aspect of this mattress that we feel could be better, because the sides are too flat and you might see some slipping of the sheets. The issue can be resolved by choosing “deeper,” fitted sheets with an extra strong elastic band.



Air confinement



What slightly disappoints about this bed are the stats we’ve seen regarding the air-leak %.



Having the price in mind, we expected a lower number.



Conclusions and updates



It’s fair to say that we are fans of the Aerobed brand; we admitted that from the get-go.



But based on the stats, we can’t place this model in the top 10.



It is, however, a serious competitor for some of our other categories like pillow-top.



We update this review and the ratings every six months



In the meantime, if you have any questions about this specific model (or air mattress), do reach out in the comment section below or by directly emailing us.



The article Review of the Aerobed Quilted air mattress with a foam topper Read more on: https://thesleepstudies.com







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/aerobed-quilted-airbed-review/

Review of the Aerobed Pakmat Airbed

We typically don’t review air mattresses of this type.



What we mean by “this type” are inflatables that are closer to sleeping pads than classic air mattresses.



We used to do it back when we first started this section of the website because we had the member who is an expert now their products such as this one but they soon left the team, and we feel like don’t have the expertise to do a reliable analysis of sleeping pads.



That’s why, for this review, we brought in a special consultant to help us, and we would like to use this opportunity to thank him (shout-out to Mark).









Anyway, enough about us and let’s get to the analysis of the Aerobed Pakmat.



Before we move on to the specifics, we would like to put things into perspective by doing a head-to-head comparison of this Aerobed to our top pick among inflatables of its type and its in its price range.



In fact, the moment of writing this review, are top pick among sleeping pads the Klymit Static V which is about 30% cheaper than the Pakmat. On the other hand, if you go a size and weight level up, we get to the LightSpeed Outdoors TPU air mattress.



Compared to the Lightspeed Outdoors, the Pakmat is significantly lighter and packs much smaller - you can see our review of the LightSpeed TPU 2-person air mattress here - https://thesleepstudies.com/lightspeed-outdoors-2-person-pvc-free-air-bed/



Aerobed Pakmat



Fact sheets:




size – 78×26 inches


inflated height – 5 inches


maximum capacity-300 pounds


weight – 4 LBS (with the pump included)


Quality ratings



[wp-review id="208673"]



A more detailed analysis of the Aerobed Pakmat



The main types sleeping pads are the classic models (that you inflate, whether manually with a battery-operated pump) and the self-inflating mats that use open cell-foam technology.



The Pakmat is a smart attempt by the company to find the sweet spot between the two and offer convenience similar to that of a self-inflating mat and portability of a classic pad.



Smart packing and storage



The Pakmat is a unique product in terms of how it’s packed and stored. We don’t know of any other air bed that you pack into the pump.



Efficiency of the pump



It takes approximately one minute to inflate. To do it, you only use the manual the pump, there’s no need for blowing air into the mattress.



Safety and off-gassing



The off-gassing and the initial odor out to the box are negligible. It is noticeable but it goes away within a day.



So, unless you’re getting it on the very day of the trip, the solution is pretty simple – you just unpack and leave it out for a few hours.



It’s also relevant to mention that the percentage of people who reported initial odor as an issue is higher among those from warmer climates.



In those terms, the Pakmat is not an exception and most inflatables will have a higher percentage of reported off-gassing if the sample used for statistical analysis is limited to warmer climates.



Unique cylindrical packing



While most pads and sleeping mats of the type back into a drawstring bag the Aerobed Pakmat uses the inside of the pump as a container.



This unique use of the pump that doubles as a carry case is exclusive to this product and we don’t know if any other air mattress (or sleeping pad for that matter) that uses the pump in this way.



The dimensions of the cylindrical manual pump are 19 “ (length) and the circumference of 4.75 “.



Superior comfort



Most backpackers are always in pursuit of the optimal balance between packing size and comfort.



Enter the Aerobed Pakmat



It might not be an option for ultra-light backpacking, but it’s definitely small enough to be used for recreational hiking.



Compared to most sleeping pads that are similar in size and weight, the Pakmat is thicker and, as most experienced hikers will tell you, with every added inch of thickness the comfort increases exponentially.



The downside can be the width – when inflated, it’s 26 “ wide and that might not be enough for a male adult that’s either broad-shouldered or on the heavier side.



You can see our top picks among small and thin and mattresses here.



The surface



Compared to the Klymit Static V two mentioned above, the sleeping surface of the Pakmat is more slippery because it doesn’t have a fabric finish.



This can be an issue if you’re using a sleeping bag that’s also synthetics.



The best advice we can give here is not to pair it with a similar material but got go with a cotton sleeping bag.



You can take it one step further and put the whole thing into a cotton sleeping bag or a customized fitted sheet.



Friction between Pakmat and other synthetics



If you’re a light sleeper and pair the Pakmat with another synthetic surface, the combo will be noisy.



The noise might be enough to wake you and even the people around you up, especially in a small tent.



The points we made about the synthetic material being slippery also applies here. You can minimize the noise it makes by wrapping it in a cotton encasing.



If you’re using a sleeping bag, go with fabric instead of synthetics (cotton or cotton-like).



It might sound complicated but the process is worth every minute of your time and will pay dividends in comfort.



Let’s be specific



There are mattress encasings and bags of the size available, but if you don’t want to add extra bulk your backpack, you can always pay your local tailor a visit and ask them to make a customized fitted cotton sheet for the air mattress.



Final thoughts on the Aerobed Pakmat



The first thing to think about here is the size of the pump cylinder an if that works for your backpack, your tent-mates are likely to be envious as you unfold this lofty 5-inch thick eye-candy.



In terms of value for money, we would say that it belongs in the mid-range



As we mentioned, it’s slightly more expensive than the Klymit Static V, but it also offers more padding and comfort.



On the other hand, similar pads from outdoor-dedicated brands like Therm-a-Rest are significantly more expensive than the Aerobed Pakmat.



Review of the Aerobed Pakmat Airbed was first published to thesleepstudies







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/aerobed-pakmat-review/

Aerobed One Touch Comfort Twin air mattress review

Today we’ll be looking at one of the staple models from Aerobed - the One Touch Comfort.



It’s one of the air mattresses that are closest in terms of appearance, size and weight to models coming from other brands.



We’re mentioning that’s because we know that Aerobed tends to make products that are somewhat different - either in terms of design, the unique pump or size and weight.









Compared to the 1- year warranty, which is the official policy of the brand, the One Touch Comfort comes with a 2-years limited warranty. You can see how it compared to other airbeds from Aerobed here - https://thesleepstudies.com/aerobed/



Let’s look at some of its most important features, followed by its rating, both overall and in our 5 quality categories.



Comparison to the top-rated inflatable in twin size



One Touch vs. Dream Series



One Touch

size -17 x 13.9 x 74 inches

weight - 16 LBS



https://thesleepstudies.com/soundasleep-dream-series-air-mattress-review/



The top surface



Most inflatable beds will feature either a classic vinyl surface or reinforced PVC flocked with a velvet-like finish.



With these classic models, most people choose to get an add-on like a mattress topper or a pad - you can see our full list of best mattress toppers and pads here.



Some modern air mattresses come with a topper of their own, a good example of that is the bamboo topper included in the Best Choice.



Generally speaking, a topper like that would increase the price tag, and you usually see add-ons like this only with the top tier products - you can see our list of best air mattresses here.



But let’s get back to this Aerobed…there is no topper per se but the top surface is treated to be antimicrobial in manufacturing.



What it means



Being antimicrobial doesn’t only include resistance to germs and bacteria but mold, mildew and fungus, as well.



The implications of that are that you won’t be seeing any odor.



When we say “odor” here we’re not referring to the plastic smell that emanates while the bed is new but to the odor that can develop over time if your bed is in a moist environment.



Moisture and germs



The moisture can find its way into the chambers of the bed, make a breeding ground and practically colonize the insides the mattress.



In best case scenario you’ll notice it and you’ll get rid of the airbed.



But you also run the risk of developing allergies for no apparent reason if the mold just under the smell threshold.



This is especially true if you start using the airbed in a moist environment and allow for the molds to form and then move it to a more open space.



In this scenario, you won’t notice the smell but the germs will be in the air.



That’s why the antimicrobial treatment of the top surface in One Touch is a huge plus.



The pump and the wand



If there’s anything that Aerobed excels in, it’s the designs of the pump the include in their models and the famous Bush valve that lets you deflates the bed in your seconds.



There is no separate valve in this Aerobed and their trademarks wash well is all included in the one-piece unit of the pump.



That doesn’t mean that it works any differently than the classic air release valve -it just insufficient.



In fact, we would say that this system is even more practical because there are no two separate units to think about.



What does One Touch mean?



The One Touch in the name of this Aerobed refers to the unique design of the pump that’s simplified for an effortless inflation using the wand that’s connected to the pump.



This is not a remote, but simply a facilitated way to inflate the bed without bending down.



This might not be a big deal for most, but it can be for the elderly and those with back pain.



It’s also a nice touch for people who want to make their air mattress a bit firmer or softer without getting up.



Voltage of the pump



The One Touch pump runs on 110 V and plugs into your classic power outlet.



It doesn’t have a “range” to be used with any other voltage, which means that if you need to use it with the power outlet that’s not 110 V, you’ll have to use an adapter.



A surprise on arrival



In the modern days of the industry, including the carry bag is practically a given and that’s why the fact that we have seen complaints from people not getting it with this Aerobed was a surprise.



What’s even more surprising is that we’ve seen most owners saying that the airbed did ,in fact, come with a carry bag.



This is an odd inconsistency to see from a brand with such a long tradition like Aerobed.



However, the percentage of people that reported the issue was not significant enough for it to be a red light about the product itself.



How do sheets fit with the One Touch Twin?



The indentations on the side of this Aerobed are just deep enough for the elastic band of the fitted sheets to get a good hold.



On the other hand, the “rich” top surface does a good job of keeping them in place, and we didn’t see any significant complaints from users about the fit of the sheets.



Packs into a compact bundle



Since this air bed includes the Whoosh valve, it doesn’t come as a surprise to see that it packs compactly; because the packing size is all about complete deflation without any remaining air in the unit.



According to our measurements, the approximate dimensions of the Aerobed One Touch when packed are 29 x 13.5 x 13.7 “(if rolled).



If you fold it into a square, it’s about 25 x 25 “.



Appearance



We always like when we see a bit of color in the industry because most brands go with the safest color choices like grays and tans.



That’s probably one of the things we like most about Aerobed.



Leak percentiles and air retention



If you take a look at the ratings in the air retention and durability category you’ll notice they’re somewhat lower compared to the SoundAsleep.



This is because we have seen a slightly higher percentage of reported air leaks, both on arrival and developed within the first months.



With leak incidence of about 15% in the first few months of use, we can’t place this Aerobed in the top 10% of air mattresses regarding that quality aspect.



Weight distribution



Like most beds from the brand, the inner structure consists of air coils.



Regarding the number of coils (21), One Touch is one of the top-rated twin-size models we reviewed in the past year.



Conclusions about Aerobed One Touch Comfort Twin



The first thing you notice about this air bed is the style and appearance. The combo of the off-white top and the light blue sides is an eye candy.



Overall, we can only describe it as a solid product.



Since we started reviewing air mattresses a few years ago we didn’t see in the top 10 and, based on the statistical analysis we did for this review; we can’t reasonably expect to see it there anytime soon.



For that to happen, Aerobed would have to address the air leak issues.



The comfort is there, the usability there, but it’s the air retention that makes or breaks an air bed.



Aerobed One Touch Comfort Twin air mattress review is republished from www.thesleepstudies.com







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/aerobed-one-touch-comfort-twin-review/

Aerobed Twin, Full, Queen & King – Top Aerobed Picks Compared to Best Products Overall

Over the last few years, we reviewed over 110 air mattresses and about the dozen of them come from Aerobed.



We are aware that the brand has such of a long tradition that many people make have the misconception that Aerobed is a synonym for an air mattress, so let’s and clear that one up.



Aerobed is just one of the many brands of air mattresses - that’s why the analysis below will not only show you top picks from the brand but also compare them to the currently top-rated products of similar type & price range.



What you’ll see below are ratings in five quality categories, from air retention and comfort to value for money.









Aerobed Queen and Twin Classic high-rise air mattress



This Aerobed is the most popular among high-rises from the brand.



That’s probably the most versatile model in their portfolio.

It’s fair to say that this is the staple product of the brand, so let’s compare it’s ratings to the top-rated air mattress overall - The SoundAsleep Dream Series.



Fact sheets of the two



Aerobed Queen





dimensions - 78 x 60 x 18 inches


max capacity - 450 LBS for one person and 600 for two


weight - 22.6 lbs


pump - electric


warranty - 1 year


SoundAsleep Dream Series





78 x 68 x 19 inches


max capacity - 600 LBS


weight - 19.4 lbs


pump - electric


warranty - 1 year


https://thesleepstudies.com/soundasleep-dream-series-air-mattress-review/



Ratings comparison



The carry bag and packing size


The carry bag included with this Aerobed features a drawstring and it’s made of nylon.



The deflation is manual but the mega valve does a pretty good job of letting all the air out and allowing you to pack the bed neatly.



According to our measurements, the dimensions of the packed Aerobed Queen Classic are approximately 16 x 12 x 12 inches.



Coiled construction


The construction of the chambers is so important for an air mattress that we would go as far as to say that it can make or break a product.



We emphasize that many times before in our reviews - inflatables that feature coils tend to outperform simple horizontal or vertical beams in terms of distributing weight.



This goes beyond comfort


It’s common sense… a stable, sturdy bed that doesn’t have a rickety, bouncy quality to it will give you a better night’s sleep.



But the importance of weight distribution goes beyond that.



A wobbly air mattress will not only be less comfortable but is more likely to develop leaks because both the inner and outer seams will take more toil and are more likely to give in to wear and tear.



The importance of coil number


Think about a classic mattress - you know that the higher number of coils, the better.



The Aerobed Classic features one of the highest numbers of oval air coils in the industry (32 for the Twin-size and 48 in the Queen). This is what allows it to perform well in terms of weight distribution and motion isolation.



Two-story design


Another important feature of this Aerobed is the design that practically consists of two separate inflatables mounted on top of each other.



Why is this important?


Because the bottom layer, let’s call it “the foundation” will do most of the heavy lifting and the upper story will take less “abuse.”



The physics of it


When placed on the floor, the air inside “reacts” to the temperature of the surface until they even out.



So if you have a one-story inflatable, you will feel those changes as they happen. They will manifest as short blitzes of temperature change.



With this Aerobed, most of these changes happen in the aforementioned foundation and the upper layer will see less temperature fluctuation.



Aerobed Queen and twin Classic low-rise air mattress



Judging by the number of reviews shared online, this Aerobed is their most popular low-rise air mattress.



Before we move on to the more detailed analysis, let’s do a side-by-side comparison of this Aerobed and the highest-rated air mattress in its type and price range.



Aerobed Classic versus SoundAsleep Camping Series



Aerobed twin Classic





size - 74 x 39 x 9 “


weight - 8.8 pounds


Aerobed Queen Classic





size - 78 x 6 x 6 “


weight 12.2 pounds


SoundAsleep Twin





size - 75 x 42 x 9 “


weight – 9 lbs


SoundAsleep Queen





78 x 60 x 9 “


14 lbs


Ratings comparison



A more detailed look at the Aerobed Classic



This model used to be among the top 10 rated products when we initially started reviewing air beds all those years ago. But since then, the landscape of the market has changed significantly and, for the consumer, that’s a good thing.



The new arrivals from companies like SoundAsleep shook things up in terms of technology and materials - the market is not dormant anymore.



We have to admit that we’re a bit of nostalgic nerds and we like the classic brands like Aerobed. They did make some changes some of their new your models in a place to see that, but the gap in ratings is currently substantial – we’re excited to see what the future holds.



Oval coils construction


If you’re just stumbled upon our website and you are s new reader, let us iterate the advantages of coiled construction.



When we compared the statistics from a pool of data that is used for our statistical rating model, the conclusion was pretty straightforward. We compared products off the same brands and made of similar material.



Air coils were the better performing option than beams in terms of structural stability in about 80% of cases. That’s probably the strongest suit of this Aerobed.



The Classic features one of the highest numbers of air coils in the industry - 28 for the Twin size and 42 in for the Queen.



Less sinking, less swaying


The oval coils do a much better job at distributing weight which makes for a much more comfortable sleeping surface.



To describe it simpler, models like this have less of a wobbly feeling, since the air coils act as stabilizers and minimize side movement and swaying.



With products like this, you also see much less sinking, and that’s a frequent issue in air beds of lower quality.



With these, the chambers will make a cocoon-like nest in the middle of the bed. For heavy sleepers, it can even cause the sides to elevate from the ground.



In Queen size it’s even more of a problem because an unstable top surface will have two sleepers rolling towards the middle of the bed and ending up using just about 60% of the surface and pushing against each other.



If you’re using the bed for camping in the cold, this has its pros and cons – it is less comfortable but the two sleepers will probably be warmer.



On the other hand, if the night is warm, you’re in for one sweaty and hot snooze.



You’re not likely to see those issues with the Aerobed Classic.



Bottom line - out of all the products from the established brands (that you could call veterans) the Classic was one of the beds that stood its ground in terms of comfort.



The most likely reason for that is the high number of coils paired with solid vinyl and well-crafted connections, seams and stitching.



The legacy of the mega “ air release” valve


Aerobed has been one of the most dominant names in the air bed arena for over two decades now.



Back in the day, the valve and the pump of the Aerobed were nothing short of groundbreaking - the fact that the design remains relevant to date speaks volumes.



To be specific - the main change that the “air release” valve introduced was the unparalleled speed of inflation and deflation.



That’s true even today and this Aerobed can take on pretty much any product out there in terms of the pump efficiency. We would give it full 5/5 stars in that quality aspect.



Value for money


if we are talking about the bank for your buck, the Classic belongs to the top 5% of camping air mattresses out of 45 we reviewed so far - you can see the full list of top 10 best camping your mattresses here - https://thesleepstudies.com/best-camping-air-mattress/



Motion and temperature isolation


The motion isolation quality aspect goes back to what we talked about above - the vertical and horizontal stability and the Classic performs pretty well here.



The temperature isolation and the other hand is a bit more intricate issue



Since this is a low-rise and there are barriers between the chambers the air inside moves more freely, which is sub-optimal for temperature isolation.



Here’s why



The beds that perform better in resisting temperature change usually have some type of system in place to minimize air movement. The reason for that are micro-currents of air that swirl around inside the inflatable.



Let us try to put to the science behind it in simple terms



Any closed environment (like the inside of your airbed) will distribute energy to “achieve” equilibrium.



What does “equilibrium mean exactly?



It simply means s that the cold and warm air will move around until the temperatures even out. Speaking in those terms, the inside of an inflatable is not just one chunk of air but it consists of many clusters of cold and warm air.



Up and down


The cold air has higher density and, on initial inflation, it will be closer to the bottom surface. Once you get on the bed, your body will dissipate heat making the air that’s closer to the top surface warmer. Soon, these micro-currents will start to move up and down to re-distribute the energy.



Real life


What this means in “real life” is that you might feel warm at one moment and suddenly feel a rush of cold air.



That’s the bottom line – these cold rushes are not about the quality of the material but the inner design separation of the chambers/beams.



The downsides of the pump system


The two main downsides of the otherwise well-thought-out pump are the absence of the auto shut-off safety system and the manual deflation.



The first one means that you inflate the bed to your desired firmness and then just shut the pump off. With some of the modern air beds, this is simplified by including presets which allow you to choose your firmness and just leave the pump do its job.



The second one means that the pump is not a two-way and if you want to deflate the bed, you just open the valve and squeeze the air out.



This is a more significant issue with smaller valves and not really a red light with this Aerobed since it features the mega valve that releases air in mere moments.



Volatility of the vinyl


According to our statistics, the Aerobed Classic has a somewhat higher percentile of people who report initial rubbery smell (compared to some of the higher-rated products in its price range).



One & two person sleep


The capacity of the Aerobed Classic will depend on whether you’re sleeping alone or with a partner. The maximum weight on Aerobed Twin Classic can take on is 300 pounds.



On the other hand, the weight limit of the Queen can be either 450 or 600 lbs, the former is for one sleeper and the letter is for two people (300 pounds per person).



FAQs about Aerobed the Classic low-rise



Is it the good option to use it with a platform base?



Although the low rises are more shape-adjustable, it would be hard to effectively use it on a platform. It will likely slip and move much more than a regular mattress would.



The confusion surrounding the capacity



With most air beds the fact sheet precisely lists the recommended weight.



For this Aerobed, however, it’s a bit trickier and we have received a few questions about it.



Most of those were about the capacity of the Queen-size since two numbers appear - 450 and 600 lbs.



Let’s clarify that



The two numbers listed as recommendations of the company are for one and two-person sleep.



One sleeper will exert more pressure onto a smaller area, which is why the recommended limit in this scenario is 450 lbs.



If two people are sleeping this Aerobed in Queen size, the weight will be more evenly distributed



Hence, the 2nd listed capacity is 600 pounds.



The risk of over-inflating



We did mention that there is no auto shutoff safety. But if you do leave the pump running it will only inflate the bed to certain firmness and then cease adding air.



Alternative inflation



In case you want to take this Aerobed camping, you might be wondering if there is an alternative way to inflate it.



To the best of our knowledge a leg or manual pump can work, as long does it comes without latches and includes nozzles that would be a good fit for a round opening of the valve.



Pairing it with a car outlet



The Aerobed pump used here is meant for power outlets and if you want to use it with the car outlet, you would need a converter/adapter.



That also goes for power outlets of voltage that’s not 110 V.



Side surfaces and cord storage



The pump is built-in and the only parts that stick out are the controls. The cord neatly packs into a dedicated space on the side of the bed.



This is a nice touch since it gets the cord out of the way. You would think that that’s all always the case but we’ve seen too many beds that don’t include a dedicated space for cord storage.



Aerobed Queen Comfort Anywhere



Among air mattresses that include a headboard, the Aerobed Opti Comfort ( https://thesleepstudies.com/aerobed-opti-comfort-queen-air-mattress-with-headboard/) is our top pick, with the runner-up being the Serta Perfect Sleeper.



Fact sheets of the Aerobed and Serta Perfect Sleeper



Aerobed Comfort Anywhere





size - 78 x 60 x 18 inches


weight - 25.2 lbs


packed dimensions 22.1 x 9.4 x 14.6 inches


Serta Perfect Sleeper





size-90 x 18 x 58 inches (measured from the further most points)


actual sleeping surface - queen-size


weight - 24.2 lbs


The margin in ratings between the two is slight and the choice will come down to how much you want to spend.



The Aerobed has slightly higher ratings in comfort but it’s about 20% more expensive.



With the two beds being of similar quality, Serta Perfect Sleeper is the higher rated bed in “value for money.”



Another notable difference between the two are the dimensions



The Serta is longer but 2 inches narrower. It’s also 3.6 inches higher compared to the Aerobed.



The razor-thin margin means that choosing between the two airbeds will come down to your taste and preference.



Two-tier design



This one is pretty important because people who get an air mattress of this type are getting it for frequent use and expect long-term comfort.



Two-tier means that there are actually two separate inflatable parts; one goes on top of the other.



Why is this important?



If you read the humdrum about weight and temperature distribution, you probably found it to be too monotonous, boring even.



But this is where it comes in handy.



The two-tier structure makes for a more comfortable sleep because the bottom inflatable takes on the job of energy and heat distribution and the top layer is much better isolated.



The bottom tier does most of the “heavy lifting,” which makes the top tier less prone to temperature changes.



Sheet grip



A common concern among airbed owners is that the sheets they choose might not be good enough to tightly hold on to the site indentations (ribs).



Two-tier design with the deep side indentations found in this Aerobed makes this a non-issue.



The part that separates the two layers is deep enough to form a firm grip, especially if you’re using fitted sheets.



One thing to look out for - the height of the upper tier will make deep-pocketed sheets too loose and you’ll want to go with the lower sheet profile (shallow).



Aerobed King



Apart from the Luxury Collection, there is only Aerobed King model that we know of - it’s the stylish Elevated 14-inch.



It includes all the nifty add-ons seen in other products from the brand but has a bit more pizzazz to it.



It’s one of the best-looking air beds we know and we can only compare this Aerobed King to one product – the Best Choice with the bamboo topper and side skirt.



Below are the details and ratings of the Aerobed King and the Best Choice Bamboo.



Aerobed King





height - 14 inches


weight - 27.2 lbs


pump - electric, built-in, 120 V


Best Choice Bamboo





height - 19 inches


weight - 23.6 lbs


pump - built-in electric


Aerobed King Vs. Best Choice Bamboo - ratings comparison



Aerobed Full air mattress with quilted foam topper



The two Aerobed models we talked about above are not really your classic home air bed, so let’s take a look at one that does belong to the group.



This Aerobed in Full-size includes some nifty add-ons that 98% of inflatables do not.



First of all, it comes with an attached foam topper. Our statistics tell us that about 40% of new air mattress owners choose to get an extra topper to make their bed more comfortable - https://thesleepstudies.com/how-make-air-mattress-more-comfortable/.



With this Full-size Aerobed, there’s no need for that because it comes with a topper of its own.



The second thing that you only see in high-end air mattresses is the remote control.



We’ve seen these features other products, but it’s usually one or the other.



Air mattress that’s the closest match to this Aerobed is Lazery sleep - https://thesleepstudies.com/lazery-sleep-air-mattress/



Aerobed Full memory top





size - 74 x 54 x 20 inches


weight - 15 lbs


max capacity - not listed by the seller


Lazery sleep





sizes - comes in Twin (74 x 13 9 x 19 inches, weighs 14.8 LBS) and Queen (78 x 58 x 19 inches, weighs 19.8 LBS)


max capacity - 300 for the Twin and 600 LBS for the Queen size


You can see the ratings of the two compared below



Aerobed Twin One-Touch comfort



Aerobed tends to make air mattresses that stand out from the crowd, whether it’s the design or the way the pump works.



The One-Touch Comfort is probably the closest to a classic air mattress look.



That’s why we’ll compare it to the most popular airbed out there - the Dream Series.



Aerobed Twin One-Touch





sizing & weight-74 x 39 x 17 inches/16 LBS


pump - type-built-in, electric


Dream Series Twin





73 x 38 x 18 inches


weighs 13.8 LBS


Ratings comparison



Aerobed for kids



Aerobed also makes inflatable mattresses for kids. One of them belongs to the top 3 kid-size air mattresses.



It’s been locking horns with the Shrunks Tuckaire travel bed which you can see here - https://thesleepstudies.com/shrunks-tuckaire-toddler-travel-bed/



The Original Aerobed Queen



The Original Aerobed comes with a headboard and it’s an eye candy.



The headboard is flocked with the felt -like material



As far as appearance goes, it’s close to the look of a regular bed, especially the headboard with the bonded patterns.



The Woosh valve



The original Aerobed also includes the mega Whoosh valve that makes the deflation faster and easier.



Sheets for the Original Aerobed



As per the company, The Original Aerobed is a good fit for the standard queen-sized sheets. The two-story design is better at tightly holding the sheets in place. In that quality aspect, we place The Original Aerobed the top 4% of air mattresses.



Puncture and leak resistance



We have to admit that were not huge fans of seeing claims like “100% leak-proof.” We tested too many inflatable beds to take a claim like that at face value



We would say there is no such thing as 100% leak-resistance. No matter how good an air bed is, it can still be punctured or develop a leak.



That’s true for even the toughest and most durable and mattresses out there - you can see our top picks in the category of most durable, heavy-duty air mattresses here - https://thesleepstudies.com/heavy-duty-air-mattress-most-durable/



Aerobed Luxury Collection



The Aerobed Luxury Collection includes a range of products starting from single-size all the way up to an Aerobed King.



What’s different about the Luxury Collection are the innovative antimicrobial materials.



Perhaps it’s more accurate to say that it’s not the materials themselves but the antimicrobial treatment designed to protect the surface.



The technology used here is limited only to the Aerobed Luxury Collection and features a control wand and a built-in pump with 3 firmness pre-sets.



Deluxe Aerobed



One more high-end product coming from the brand is the Deluxe Aerobed.



The most notable difference of the Aerobed Deluxe is the surface. It’s 100% percent cotton (natural).



While the finish of the Deluxe Aerobed is cotton, the construction is heavy-duty PVC and the controls are based on their one-touch technology. The Deluxe series comes with all the neat stuff we already talked about - from the Whoosh valve to the carry bag.



Aerobed replacement pump



The Aerobed pump is unique in a few ways and we come to make specific recommendations about any other generic pumps that can work with an Aerobed.



The best we can do here is give you the information that Aerobed replacement pumps- http://www.coleman.com/aerobed-partsandaccessories/ are available on their website in the parts and accessories section.



Other Aerobed air mattresses - honorary mentions



In the table below, we’ll list a few products from Aerobed the didn’t make the least top choices in, along with their details



Aerobed warranty



The official Aerobed warranty is one year limited, starting from the date of purchase. The warranty covers any flaws in workmanship and materials and to claim it you would need the sales receipt or other form of proof.



If you’re getting your bed online, your purchase history with the retailer should be proof enough.



The good part about the Aerobed warranty is that drop-shippers, retail stores and dealers can’t change the original terms.



Claiming the warranty - authorization & returns


To claim your warranty, you’ll need a return authorization. To get it, contact the Coleman Company directly.



How it usually goes



You will be advised to include a pack with your information and the short description of why you’re returning the product along with the proof purchase. You then send the packages via FedEx Ground, Parcel Post or UPS. The package should be insured and sent to the Coleman return department in Wichita.



You will get the exact address from their customer service.



Where to buy an Aerobed air mattress?



Aerobed is widely available both for online and in-store purchase in chains like Costco and Walmart.



Availability of Aerobed at Costco, Walmart, Bed Bath & Beyond & Target


Both Costco and Walmart carry pretty much all Aerobed products that we’ve listed above and even some we haven’t. What we saw in our research is that some of the Aerobed air mattresses that are not available with other retailers can be found at Walmart.



A good example of that is one of the more popular Aerobed for camping - the All-Terrain Sports.



Aerobed at Bed Bath & Beyond


We can’t paint with a broad brush and the make general claims about the availability of Aerobed at Bed Bath and Beyond.



What we can share here is that at the time of the last update to this guide, models of Aerobed at Bed Bath and Beyond were somewhat scarce - more so than the range available at Costco and Walmart.



Aerobed history



The story of the original Aerobed brand dates back to 1992 when they patented a groundbreaking way for quicker inflation/deflation of air mattresses.

Back then, it was hard to imagine a deflation takes only 15 seconds.



Aerobed since 2000



Following the release of the original Aerobed, the company improved on it by introducing the raised version in 2001. The goal was to get as close as possible to the feel of a regular bed.

In 2002, Aerobed released what they described as an “improved model.”



The pump of this one was even faster (30%) and made their beds 20%, firmer.



In 2010, the company’s merged with Coleman and remains one of the leading brands to date.



Repairing an Aerobed



Reparation of an Aerobed is similar to that of an air mattress, but let’s reiterate here by going through the process of patching step-by-step.



1. Locate the leak



If the leak is substantial, locating it can be as simple as isolating yourself in a quiet room and simply listening for a hissing sound.



However, it won’t be at is easy is that most cases simply extend to be small and hard to find.



If the listening test doesn’t do the trick, make a solution of water and soap feel a spray bottle. If you already have a suspected area in mind spray dissolution over it and bubbles will appear at the leak.



2. Most common leak spots



In most cases, the source of the leak will be in the area surrounding the pump or at the seams.



A cautionary note



You might stumble upon some tips that advise extreme measures like submerging the whole Aerobed into water to locate a leak.If you do this, you’ll definitely pinpoint the source of air-loss but it you will probably ruin your mattress.



In other words - this might solve the problem but can cause a bigger one.



Here’s why



The inside of the bed will remain moist and probably turn into a breeding ground for mold and mildew. There is no reliable way that we know of to completely dry out an air mattress that’s been fully submerged in water.



Moving on…



3. Dry it



The next step will be to completely dry the moist area around the leak. The fastest way to do it is by using a blow dryer (the kind you would use on your hair).



4. Deflate and flatten



Completely deflate the bed and place it on a flat surface with the leak source in the middle. From that point on you have the options to use different types of sealants for the patching (glue, tape, patch fabric or combination of the three).



Sealants that are based on glue will be your safest bet for flocked surfaces, while tape and fabric will be the go-to solution for the vinyl parts.



5. If it doesn’t work



Patching vinyl is tricky and it’s hard to decide what kind of leak is more difficult to repair.



The issue of vinyl oils


If the leak is on the vinyl parts, the problem is the thin layer of oil the coats the vinyl.



It’s the only surface that gives it the shiny look.



If you use regular or even super-glue, these oils will react with the chemicals in the bond and the leak will probably re-occur.



That’s why specialized kits usually include a chemical that prevents the reaction and keep the bond stable.



Repairing the Aerobed valve


If the source of the leak is the valve, it gets even trickier.



In our opinion, it might not be worth it in the long run. You’re probably better off getting a new mattress.



Summary and a note about future updates



We’re constantly gathering new information and doing your best to stay on top of and quality changes that might happen with the air beds. Typically, we update the guides quarterly to make sure that the information presented is up-to-date and relevant.



We might deviate from the schedule if we notice and your “red lights.” These usually come in the form of a significant change in the user satisfaction ratings.



When this happens, it triggers an unscheduled update for one product only. Over the years, our database has grown to a mammoth-like size and continues to grow. With that growth, the reliability and accuracy get better.



The purpose of it all is to do the research so you don’t have to and minimize the guesswork involved in choosing an air mattress.



Our team currently has 6 members and the website is our full-time work, so if you have any questions or dilemmas feel free to share them in the comment section below.



You can expect us to respond within one day.



Stay smart,



The Sleep Studies Team



The post Aerobed Twin, Full, Queen & King – Top Aerobed Picks Compared to Best Products Overall Find more on: The Sleep Studies







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/aerobed/

Queen air mattress – top 5 picks of 68 tested – 2017 update

Over the last few years we reviewed and tested 100+ air beds and 68 of them were available in Queen size. What you’ll see below are Top 5 highest-rated products among those 68.



You’ll see their ratings, both overall and in 5 quality categories and their main advantages and shortcomings.



This should a paint pretty clear picture about which one of these might be for you.









Queen air mattresses



Dream Series Queen air mattress by Sound Asleep



Without exaggeration, this is the air mattress that changed the landscape of the industry when it the market back in 2013.



Up to that point it was pretty much smooth sailing for the industry veterans that have been the dominating for years without any significant changes, either in technology or materials used.



When the Dream Series arrived to the market with a never-before-seen 42 circular coils for the inner structure, extra strong material for the body and minuscule incidents of air leaks it quickly became the most popular air bed out there.



More importantly, it kick-started a massive shift in the industry with a significant number of new arrivals following.



[wp-review id="208428"]



Is the Dream Series right for you?



With an overall rating of 93.4 and ratings of 94 and 95 in air retention and comfort respectively, Dream Series by far to top-rated air mattress, not only in Queen size but overall.



It will be good choice for most people, especially conservative buyers, since we only see this kind of high ratings in luxury models that the cost 3 or four 4 as much.



Here’s a more “plastic“ way to illustrate its popularity - it currently has more user reviews on Amazon than all the other entries on this list combined - you can see them all by following the links below.



Coleman Queen Airbed cot



This Coleman is designed to be a camping model, but the unique design with the frame and legs made it a favored choice for home use, too.



Its versatility is unmatched.



The inflatable mounted on the frame goes into a zippered sleeve but can be taken out and used on its own as a separate sleeping surface.



It might not appear so, but the frame folds compactly into its wheeled carry case which makes it portable, easy to set up and store. It’s currently rated at 91.8 / 100.



Who will choose the Coleman Queen cot?



People who lead active lifestyles will love the idea of a versatile bed that can perform equally well both for home use and camping.



The best part about it is the fact that similar models that come with the frame usually cost much more. If it catches your eye and you can find it for under $130, there’s not much to think about - it’s great value for money.



Serta Queen Never Flat air mattress



For people who are buying their first air mattress and didn’t do much research before let’s take a moment to explain what “never flat” means.



It’s not a gimmick or industry lingo, it actually means something very specific.



The Never Flat refers to the unique pump that prevents the bed deflating - this means that, with this Serta, you or are your guests will never have to wake up to a half-deflated air bed again.



The pump is also known in the industry as “smart” and it’s actually a system of two pumps



The main, classic pump used to inflate and deflate the mattress and the secondary, smaller pump that stays plugging in through the night and adds air when it registers that the pressure inside the chambers is dropping.



The secondary pump is practically silent, so you’ll never even notice when it turns on.



Is this Serta right for you?



The Serta Never Flat comes with a 15-20% higher price tag than models with classic pumps, but let’s take a moment to put that into perspective.



Other models that include a smart pump go for much higher and that’s not just something we say.



You can check the for yourself by following the links below and typing in “Never Flat air mattress” into the search box on Amazon - the results will show this Serta and a few other high-end airbeds – all of them 200 to 300% pricier.



Best Choice Queen air bed with bamboo topper



This air mattress comes from some of the most experienced people in the industry



It’s the folks behind the website air mattress.com, which used to only sell other brands before they came up with their own product in the last quarter of 2015.



Air mattress nerds like us were excited as soon as we heard that the company is developing their own product and we were eager to see what they come up with. It’s a bit of an understatement to say that we weren’t disappointed.



This mattress stands out in a few major ways - from the virgin vinyl used (as opposed to recycling seen in 99% of air beds), the nylon-reinforced body to make it durable to the robust build.



Who is it for?



The reinforced material and structure makes it the firmest and most supportive air bed we know. We believe that the company added the bamboo-based topper to balance out the firmness and keep your spine aligned.



It will be the choice of people who are looking for an air mattress that sleeps more like a regular bed than an inflatable.



Intex Queen Comfort Plush



This Intex belongs to the Durabeam Series that the changed it all for the company.



It’s fair to say that, up to that point Intex was known as a company that offers budget inflatables aimed at people looking for a temporary bed.



The introduction of Fiber Tech in the Durabeam series was a game-changer. Fiber Tech is a Intex uses for the millions of sturdy fibers that connect top to the bottom of this air bed and minimize swaying, sinking or movement.



Who will choose the Comfort Plush?



This Intex is by far the most budget-friendly solution on this list - in fact, most of the other air beds we looked at here cost two times as much.



That’s what made it the 2nd most popular air bed today, judging by the sheer number of user reviews on Amazon.



More info about our top picks among Queen air mattresses



Dream Series Queen air bed



Basic info


This Queen size air mattress is 78 inches long, 58 inches wide and 19 inches high. It weighs just under 20 pounds.



Packing and storage


Size of an air bed when deflated and packed for storage is more than just about the materials. The more important part is how efficient the pump is at pulling out all the air.



With mattresses that you manually deflate, there will always be some air left inside which will significantly increase the packing size.



The pump of this Queen air bed automatically deflates it, which means that you don’t have to do anything, it does it all for you.



On arrival the package is about 17 x 13 x 7 inches big and the packing size is a bit smaller than that.

The carry bag is included and, more importantly, it’s made of high quality synthetic material which started solid stitching and doesn’t fall apart within a few months as he tends to happens with those that are no so well



made.



Bottom line - it includes most of the crucial technology advancements that happened over the last five years, without any bells and whistles (like remote controls) that would increase its price.



Weight handling


All the talk about the reinforced materials and the high quality connections and staging is, we believe, only the secondary benefit.



In our opinion, the main advantage of this Queen air mattress is the inner structure and how good it is at distributing weight. In this aspect of mattress quality that has a profound impact not only and comfort, but durability and lifespan of the product to.



Here’s why…



A Queen size air mattress that’s better at weight dispensation will see less movement and will be more stable. The stability, in turn, lowers the forces that the pull on the connections between the chambers and separate the surfaces of the vinyl, which is the main cause for those frustrating leaks that you can’t seem to locate.



In the analysis of our data pool (that we used for the statistical model) we have only seen about 2% of pinholes and mysteriously developed leaks within the warranty period.



This means that only one in 50 people will be faced with the issue, which puts the Dream Series in the top 3% in that quality aspect.



Behind the scenes


It’s easy to just say that a inflatable is more stable without substantiating it with an explanation on why that is or specific stats.



Chambers vs. beams


It’s not easy to compare the two to in terms of performance so we did separate research and that by facing off products from the same brand that use the same material and are in the same price range, with one being “beamed” and the other featuring chambers.



According to our data, the chambered models outperformed the beams 75% of the time.



There are a few main reasons for that.



With the beams in a Queen size air bed, the air has much more “freedom” to move around. That exerts more force on the connections.



The more air movement, the wobblier it will be. It will also sway more, both horizontally and vertically.



Apart from the fact that this means less comfort and support, it results in more wear and tear over time and the incidence of air leaks will be significantly higher.



Let’s get back to what we were saying about the Dream Series.



I-coils


The airbeds that are superior pretty much every aspect usually feature some kind of support system designed to mimic the effects of a spring coil.



Each of the major brands has a special name for their support system and the use of air coils in not new.



We try to stay on top of any new arrivals to the market and when we saw this one, we deemed it to be a good product but little did we know the implications a higher number will have.



The company calls the system ComfortCoil and, at the time, it didn’t seem much different than similar systems used by other brands.



We can’t speak to whether the material of the coils is somehow better or sturdier, because we have no way to substantiate the claim and it’s our opinion that what made the difference here is simply the higher number of “air springs”.



It’s basic physics


If the coil mimics the spring of a regular mattress, it’s a short leap from there to the conclusion that a higher number of coils will be in superior weight distribution.



Up to that point, the models that were the most popular in the industry and held in highest regard included about 30 coils tops.



Then, there was this young company from New Jersey that brought a 42-coiled bed to the market.



We didn’t think much of it


We have to be honest here and admit that, back in 2013, we didn’t expect for the extra number to make much of a difference. We were wrong.



It was less than a year later that we realized the full extent of the change.



The bottom line is that the percentile of leaks developed over time places the Dream Series Queen in the top 5 % among the airbeds we reviewed and tested.



Grip of the floor


By nature, vinyl is a slippery material. It’s not only very smooth but has a layer of oil on the surface which lowers its ability to grip and hold onto surface.



That’s one of one of the main reasons it’s hard to patch and you need dedicated glue that usually include chemicals that react with the vinyl oils to form a firm bond.



For usability, this means that when vinyl meets another slippery surface, like polished floors, it’s hard to keep it in place.



SoundAsleep addressed the issue by making the bottom surface rubberized, which changes the game completely. Rubber forms a firm grip with the floor and for the user, this means minimal sideways movement.



If you use classic vinyl for the bottom not only will it move and slide, but it can be so unstable that the restless sleeper runs the risk of the whole bed tipping over.



15 gauge PVC


The standard for the thickness of vinyl seen in most inflatables is 18 gauge, which is about 0.04 inches (1.02 mm).



Material used for this Queen air mattress is 15 gauge, which is significantly thicker than that seen in most airbeds.



The combination of these factors - increased ability, minimal movement and lower gauge makes for a bed that’s more stable and has a lower incidence of punctures and air leaks.



Patented pump


You won’t see a company doesn’t make a claim about the pump being powerful and efficient but, in most cases, they don’t offer a precise explanation of why their pump is superior compared to other brands



This mattress uses a pump that’s patented and used only by the company. The inflation and deflation times are pretty much your industry standard of about 4 minutes for a Queen size air mattress.



What separates the EZ pump is that the motor is 20% less noisy.



Backed up by solid warranty


Over the years, we did a lot of “undercover” shopping with most major brands. The main reason for that is to establish how friendly their customer service is and if they stand behind the claims made in the advertising.



We use that information to assign what we call a trust factor (TF) to a brand. We use this factor in our statistical analysis to adjust the results and ratings



For example, if the companies has a trust factor of 0.95 and their product is rated at 9 / 10 initially, the final rating will be 8.5 / 10.



SoundAsleep has a maximum TF of 1 in our book, which means that we have never seen any significant issue or problem in dealing with the customer service.



Frequently asked questions about this Queen sized air mattress



In the section below, we’ll address some of the questions about this product that we saw in our inbox or the comments.



Do I have the option to use a battery-powered pump?



With the increasing popularity of this Queen size air bed this question became more common, probably because people were considering using it outdoor use and camping.



The pump is AC and built-in and there is no extra valve that you could use with a standalone pump. Theoretically speaking, you can use it on the campsite but only if you have access to power.



Depth on the side “ribs” - how well they hold onto the sheets?



Since this is a one-piece inflatable, there’s no room for tucking in regular sheets. What this means for the owner is that your safest bet will be fitted sheets. The indentations on the side surfaces are deep enough for a good hold.



The power cord



If we could choose, the one thing we feel would improve the usability of this Queen air bed would be a longer cord. An extra 3 or 4 feet would add a lot to value in terms of usability.

Prongs of the cord



The power cord is a classic 2-prong.



More info about the Coleman Queen air bed Cot



The fact sheet



The Queen size of this Coleman air mattress is 78 inches long, 59 inches wide and 22 inches high. It weighs 40.2 lbs.



The listed maximum capacity for the Queen is 600 pounds.



It includes 2 pull-out side tables, which is convenient, especially when used for camping. They make a useful add-on for your phones and gadgets.



Other specs:





Pump-4D, battery-operated


Warranty-one year (limited)


As per the company specifications, it’s best suited for people who are 6’2” high or shorter


Air retention



As with most Coleman products, the warranty covers 1 year of potential leak development.



User-friendly valve



The valve of this Coleman is double-lock, this means that it uses two seals. The main seal is simply there to keep the air in place and the secondary seal prevents the air from escaping once you detached the pump.



It might sound like it’s only natural to use a 2-seal valve but you would be surprised by the percentage of camping inflatables that the rely on your reaction to quickly close the valve.



Construction



We did mentioned that the stability of the structure is crucial - it’s what separates the blow-up mattresses that will be worth your money and those that will frustrate you by leaking or not being supportive enough.



The vast majority of Coleman models uses 2 time-tested systems to ensure vertical and horizontal stability.



The first one are the ComfortStrong coils that increase the vertical stability and the support of the top.



The second system is, to the best of our knowledge not included in this bed. It’s called SupportLock and it usually comes in high-rise models to decrease horizontal movement and swaying.



Since the inflatable that’s mounted on this cot is a low-rise, there was no need to include the support lock strips.

The wheeled carry case



At first glance, it might appear that this bed is cumbersome and hard to set up / down but we wouldn’t say that’s the case. In fact, the design of the frame is user-friendly and it’s fair to say that packs small for this type bed.



Assembly



The steel frame doesn’t require any assembly and it just unfolds. To do it, you simply grab pull -the frame expands into place.



In our experience it takes less than two minutes to fully set it up.



Canvas top can be a separate sleeping surface



We did mention the versatility of this bed, but let’s explain it in more depth.



The complete package includes a steel frame, the inflatable bed, a sleeve the bed goes into (zippered) and a canvas top that’s attached to the frame.



There are no prominent horizontal bars that would make using the canvas top as a sleeping surface of its own. This practically means that the Queen air bed can sleep 4 adults - two on the canvas top and 2 on the airbed, if used separately.



However, there is a steel bar runs vertical and one sleeper couldn’t effectively use the whole surface of the canvas top.

Furthermore, the cotton sleeve is sewn onto the surface and practically acts as a sheet.



The sleeve



The sleeve is cotton-based fabric, feel tough and yet, soft to the touch. On the top side (where the side tables with the cup-holders are) it has two cutouts that are helpful when inserting the bed.



Batteries



The pump uses D-size batteries (D-cell) and you’ll need 4 of them.



We have seen a few questions about the batteries and the source of the confusion is the wording of the fact sheet - it mentions 4D batteries.



This can be confusing and people draw the conclusion that they need some kind of a special battery called 4D when in fact it’s just 4 batteries in D size, the kind you would use for a flashlight.



Frequently asked questions about the Coleman Queen Cot



Is there a way to use a pad on top of the inflatable?



The size of the airbed is a tight fit for the sleeve so there’s no room to fit anything between the two.



If you want to use a topper or a pad it would have to go over the mattress.

Having said, if you want to use the air bed separately and want to make it more comfortable you can fit a Queen-sized topper, either into the sleeve or on top of it.



Shipment and arrival



We’ve seen questions about how long it takes from the purchase to the moment you get your product and we have also seen some claims about it taking a month or two.



As far as we know, the Cot qualifies as a Prime product with Amazon and it only takes a few days to get it.



Are the legs of the frame sharp enough to puncture a tent floor?



It is a possibility and it depends on your weight and the tent material.



To eliminate the risk it might be smart to get some fabric sliders and place them between the frame and the tent floor.



Using it with another pump



Coleman makes a range of different pump types and most of them come with attachments and nozzles that fit a majority of their products (including this cot).

So, yes, you can get a more powerful, rechargeable pump and it will work with the valve.



Battery-powered vs. rechargeable pump



When we measured the time it takes for the 4D pump to inflate the bed and compared that to the rechargeable Quick Pump (also made by Coleman), it turned out that the later is more efficient and inflates the bed faster.



However, the difference between the times is not substantial and the reason you might consider getting a rechargeable pump could be that you don’t want to deal with batteries.

Frequently asked questions about the Serta Queen raised



Power specifics



In case you’re considering using this Serta abroad or with the car outlet, let’s give you some specifics that you might find helpful when choose a converter or an adapter.

current - 120V

frequency of the main pump - 60 Hz

power - 105 W



According to our measurements the cord is about 16 inches long.



FAQs about the Serta



Sheets



The Serta Raised has more curvature on the sides, so when choosing your sheets we would recommend going with deep-pocketed and, more importantly, a strong elastic band that will be good enough to hold the sheets into place.



It does come as a pillow-top version. This add-on in is designed for this product and can be machine-washed.

So, if you don’t want to deal with sheets we would recommend going with the pillow-top. The few extra bucks are worth it.



Noise of the secondary pump



We have seen concerns from people about the secondary pump staying plugged in and working through the night. Most of those were regarding the noise potentially waking them up as it turns on.



It’s our experience that the secondary pump is practically silent and we would say it won’t wake even the lightest of sleepers.



Can I use it on a frame?



This Queen size air mattress is robust and sturdy so using it on slatted frame or platform might prove to be difficult.



Is there an option to turn off the smaller pump?



Using the Never Flat pump is optional and if you don’t want to use it, you simply don’t plug it in.



It’s the main pump that inflates and deflates the bed and the smaller one is there if you want to maintain the firmness.



Cleaning of the Queen air mattress



With prolonged use, the Queen size air bed tends to collect some grime because of the soft velveteen surface.



The easiest way to clean it is by using a vacuum with a brush attached.



Taking it on trips



The mattress packs neatly and it’s compact, which makes it portable and convenient for trips.

If you don’t want to carry it in the included bag we would say that a suitcase of medium-size would be the right fit.



What if none of the firmness pre-sets are right for me?



The system of the smart pump is designed to complement the preset firmness levels by maintaining the one you chose.

If none of the presets is right for you and you want something in-between, you can do it by unplugging the secondary pump and adjusting the firmness by adding or letting some of the air out.



FAQs about the Best Choice Queen



Nylon encasing - what does it mean?



As we mentioned, this is the only Queen size air mattress made of a virgin vinyl. If there are others out there, we don’t know about them since none of the other companies are mentioning it.

Nylon encasing mentioned here means that the vinyl is reinforced by nylon laminate which makes it sturdier, more durable and less prone to punctures by sharp objects.



Accuracy of to dimensions



Over the years in the industry we know that not all air beds are true-to-size. We measured the Queen-size version of this air mattress and we can report back that listed sizing is accurate.



A different feel of the top



A vast majority of models have a soft top finish that feels like velvet or felt.



This bed is a bit different - the top is still soft but has more of a suede feel to it.



Specifics of the pump





current - 120 V (AC)


60 Hz frequency


1.2 Amps


Appearance



Finally, the stylish topper and the skirt cover all the vinyl parts and if you’re not fan of the look of classic air mattress, this one looks like it belongs on the cover of Home & Garden.



FAQs about the index Comfort Plush



Capacity of the Queen size



In spite of being cheaper, this Intex has a higher maximum weight capacity than most Queen air beds – it’s 600 lbs.



Time it takes to inflate



We measured the time it takes the pump to fully inflate this Intex and it was just under 4 minutes and 30 seconds.



Off-gassing



The off-gassing and odor was minimal to nonexistent and, when we did notice it, it aired out within a few hours.



Dimensions it packs down to



The box it arrives in is approximately 22 x 18 x 10 inches and the actual Queen air bed is slightly smaller when packed.



Deflation



The mechanism you use to deflate this Intex is specific to the Durabeam series.

To deflate it, turn the same round “knob” that’s used to seal the air bed after inflation. Just turn it counter-clockwise.



Final thoughts about Queen air mattresses and update to this guide



The competition in this size category is fierce, since most of the highest quality products do come in Queen-size. For us, it’s the most “exciting” guide to update.



We are aware that being excited about air mattresses sounds nerdy but it’s our work of many years and staying on top of what happens in the industry is our daily routine. What that means for you is that you get a reliable source of information about product that the worth your money.



The margins in the ratings between the top picks here are the narrowest and it’s the one category where we see most frequent changes. The one exception to that is Sound Asleep that has been the “king of the hill” for 8 updates now (16 months).



We are certain that some questions popped into your mind as you were going through this guide, so please feel free to share them in the comment section below or by emailing us directly.



You’ll get a response within one day.



Stay smart



The blog post Queen air mattress – top 5 picks of 68 tested – 2017 update was originally seen on TheSleepStudies







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/queen-air-mattress/

Air mattress vs. futon – here’s exactly what to do if you’re puzzled

If you’re reading these lines you probably have a dilemma of whether to choose an air mattress or a futon.



Hopefully, by the end of this article you will have a pretty clear picture about which of the two is better suited for your situation.



We’ll try to put ourselves in your shoes and think about the possible scenarios in which this puzzling issue might happen. If you don’t know much about furniture, we’ll also go into the nitty-gritty stuff like the materials, comfort levels, durability and design.









But that’s secondary.



Before we get to that we first have to establish what do you need the piece for –whether it’s for occasional use and welcoming guests or an actual piece of furniture that you’ll use every day.



The main difference



It’s common sense, but let’s just point out some of the most obvious differences between the two.



A futon is closer to the comfort of a regular bed and most futon mattresses are made in pretty much the same way as classic mattresses. The better ones feature innersprings wrapped in plastic materials like memory foam, cotton or polyester fibers.



The finish will also be more similar to classic piece of furniture like a sofa – in most cases it’s cotton upholstery, leather or microfiber.



On the other hand, an air mattress is made of vinyl and typically flocked with a velvet-like material.



So before we get any further let’s concisely define some of the pros and cons of each.



Futon



PROs:



sleep quality that is closer to that of a regular bed, provided that you choose a good mattress

longer lifespan

more stylish – some of the futon available today pretty much look the same as sofas the cost that two or three times as much

more support – futon typically provides a more supportive sleeping surface, especially if the core features steel coils



CONs:





some of the basic models can be to firm for comfortable sleep


a futon will typically be more expensive


you don’t have the option pack it for storage or trips


Air mattress



PROs:



they provide a softer surface for sleep

you can easily pack and store them, while not in use

they are more versatile – you can just pick an airbed into a carry bag (99% of the time it comes included) and take it with you on a trip



CONs:



If you’re comparing the same price ranges, an air bed will provide less support for sleep durability and longevity issues – while the futon is likely to be with you for years to come, an air mattress has a shelf-life

issues with the deflation – the airbed industry significantly advanced over the past decade and some models feature smart pumps. These are designed not to allow the airbed to deflate – they stay plugged in and top it off as soon as the pressure in the inner chamber drops. With that said, these tend to be more expensive and there’s only a handful of models with smart pumps that are affordable. Our top pick here is the Serta



Raised Never Flat, which you can see below.



https://thesleepstudies.com/serta-raised-air-mattress-with-never-flat-pump/



Now that you have a clear picture about the main pros and cons let’s get into the nitty-gritty and analyze the two options feature by feature.



How much space do you have?



With futons, there’s not much you can do in terms of adjusting the size while an air mattress gives you the option to choose from a range of sizes and heights.



Some mattresses do include a frame, but a majority of them are just vinyl filled with air.



This means that you can pack it down to about a size of your gym bag and store it into a closet.



It’s fair to mention that futon is also come in a range of sizes, with the chair being the smallest and queen-size being the biggest.



With that said, futon is still a standalone furniture piece that comes with a frame and it’s much harder to take it apart and store it.



What kind of comfort are you aiming for?



It you’re looking for the comfort of a classic bed your safest bet will be a futon with a sturdy frame, innerspring coils and memory foam used for the mattress.



But to get that kind of comfort you have to dig a bit deeper into your wallet and spring (pun intended) for higher quality product.



Those that are in the same price range as airbeds might be too hard to sleep on or seat for a prolonged period of time.



The reason behind that is the fact that these that don’t include coils and are typically made of various types of foam, poly-fiber and cotton.



To get the best value for money here you can always get creative and pair a futon with a good mattress topper or a pad to make it more comfortable.



Design of the futon versus the design of an air mattress



If you’re looking for a standalone furniture piece that will have a permanent place in your home, especially if it’s the living room, you’ll probably want to go with the futon.



Modern ones can only be described as eye candy and look better than air beds, even some sofas.



On the other hand, an air mattress will be more about practicality than looks, especially if you don’t want to splurge for a high-end inflatable like an EZ bed.



EZ bed as the sweet spot between the two



EZ beds are high-end inflatables. They come with steel frame and legs and are mounted on a surface. The whole setup packs into its own wheeled carry case.

A good example of that is the Insta EZ bed, which you can see the image below.



If you didn’t know about the option of the EZ bed, you might be excited to discover that there is something that’s, we believe, a more stylish sleeping solution than a futon and more supportive than a classic inflatable.



https://thesleepstudies.com/insta-bed-ez-air-mattress-queen/



Conclusions



We set out to provide some answers and compare airbeds and futons in terms of design, versatility, comfort and support and we hope that we did a good job with that.



We can’t provide you with a definitive answer on what’s best for what your situation, simply because we don’t know it.



If you feel like we haven’t addressed your specific scenario, you can always email us or, even better; drop us a comment in the section below and we’ll try to help to the best of our ability.



If you do that, we might even be able to provide some specific product recommendations based on what you need. We typically respond to all comments within one day.



The post Air mattress vs. futon – here’s exactly what to do if you’re puzzled is available on The Sleep Studies By Bob Ozment







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/air-mattress-vs-futon/

Twin air mattress – Top 5 out of 48 Tested – 2017 update

The top five picks among Twin size air mattresses you’ll see are the top-rated models among 48 we reviewed, tested and analyzed.



This guide is a result of over 4400 work hours and over 1100 user experiences we analyzed using our statistical model.



In the table below you’ll see their overall rating and basic information.









Twin size air mattress - ratings of top 5



Sound Asleep Dream Series Twin air mattress



Since we first put this guide together about 14 months ago, the Dream Series has been the top-rated product in the size category.



Compared to some of the other airbeds that have been in the in the market for much longer, it’s fair to say that this is a young product – brought to the market in 2015.



But it didn’t take much for it to become the most popular among users. Within 6 months it outranked some of the well-known industry seniors, both in terms of customer satisfaction and the sheer number of people buying it.



We believe that the main reason is the lower percentages of air leaks and superior material - multilayered vinyl (15 gauges thick). The 15 gauge vinyl translates to 0.057 inches, which is approximately 40% thicker and that the industry standard off 0.04 inches.



The remarkable comfort and weight distribution is achieved by the proprietary technology the company calls Comfort Coils. You can see our full ratings below.



Who will choose the Dream Series?



All the latest advancements in airbed the technology are incorporated into making the Dream Series.



As a mentioned we’ve seen a very low incidence of on arrival defects or air leaks. The Dream Series is backed up by a one year limited warranty and allows for maximum capacity of 300 pounds.



The pump is not your run-of-the-mill pump and the technology used for it is patented by the company, with the main difference being the fast inflation/deflation and the fact that it’s 20% quieter compared to the competition.



That’s why the price tag that’s somewhat lower compared to the competing models is a surprise.



Over 3000 owners have shared their experience with the Dream Series, you can see them all by following the link below.



Serta Never-Flat Twin air mattress



If you’re buying an airbed for the first time you might not be familiar with the term “never-flat”.



The never-flat refers to the pump used for some of the better Serta models.



In fact, it’s two pumps - the main one (which inflates and deflates the bed) and the secondary that the tops it off during the night if the sensors notice a drop in pressure.



The technology is probably one of the biggest milestones the industry has seen in the last two decades.



Who will choose the Serta Raised?



If you want to be certain that you are your guests won’t be waking up to a half-deflated mattress, Serta Raised will be the way to go.



Compared to other air mattreses that feature this pump technology, this Serta costs much less. You can read more about below.



Some Asleep Camping Series Twin air mattress



If you’re looking for a low-rise or space-saving camping air bed in Twin size is top pick is the Camping Series by Sound Asleep.



It’s not only one of the top picks in the size, it is also one of the top-rated camping models overall.



The technology used in the more expensive home models of the company are also the basis for the Camping Series.



The difference is the reinforced vinyl designed to be more durable and meet to the challenges of outdoor use.



Bottom line



The Camping Series might be right for you if you’re looking a a bed for outdoor use or if you prefer a low-rise over the elevated models.



If that describes your needs, you’re in luck, because it’s also one of the 2 top-rated products in the category of “value for money”.



Best Choice Twin air bed with the bamboo topper



If you’re confused by the wording here and the mention of the phrase “best choice” – that’s actually the name of the product.



We must say that we are not huge fans of the name they chose for it, because it’s confusing for our readers – but we do like the testing results and user satisfaction we’ve seen with this product.



The most obvious difference is the fact that this is an Extra Long Twin, which means that it is a peg longer than a classic Twin



It’s 80 inches long compared to the 78 inches that the industry standard in this size range.



It belongs to the group of new arrivals since it hit the market in 2016, but similar to the aforementioned Sound Asleep it arrived with a bang.



To those of us that know the industry it was no surprise because it comes from a company that’s an industry veteran – they used run a website selling other brands and it’s only in 2016 that they used their decades of experience to make this one.



Who is it for?


This is a firm air mattress, so it will be the choice of people who prefer a sturdier sleeping surface.



The robust construction is balanced out by the bamboo topper that comes included - the combo makes a great choice for people with back pain issues.



The 2 inches of extra length might be a factor for tall people or those who plan to use it by placing it in the middle of the room (not against the wall), because you are less likely to “chase the” pillows.



Another consideration here is that the topper is attached to a skirt that covers the vinyl sides, so if don’t you don’t like the look of a classic air mattress, you’ll love this nice touch.



Fox Plush Twin XL



There are a few things that stand out with Fox Plush Durabeam.



First of all, there’s the fact that this it’s one of the toughest airbeds we know – around the office we call it “the beast”.



The vinyl is 0.06 mm thick – which is about 43% thicker than the industry standard.

The top features what Fox calls “airflow chambers” – it’s an added layer of air-cells that make the bed more comfortable.



It’s one of the two models on the list is feature both a built-in pump and an extra valve for manual inflation, which means it’s also an option for camping.



Who will choose the Fox Plush?



The thickest material on the market, combined with the fact it’s an Extra Long Twin, make it a great choice for tall people and those on the heavier side.



More information about our top picks among Twin size air mattresses



A more detailed analysis of the Dream Series



The pump


The pump is fast and efficient -it inflates and deflates the bed in under 3 minutes.



It is what you call a two-way, which means that it’s used to both inflate-deflate the bed – no need for pushing the air out manually.



You simply switch from the off position to the right to inflate and to the left to deflate the Twin air bed.



As we mentioned above, the pump used for Sound Asleep product is specifically designed to complement the inner construction and patented by the company.



In terms of noise levels, it is about 20% less noisy than pumps used in sub-par blow-up mattresses.



Top surface


The surface of the top of this Twin inflatable is extra thick, waterproof and flocked with a material that resembles felt.



Portability


Having in mind that the this Twin air bed weighs under 14 pounds and comes with its own carry bag, we give it full five-star for portability.



Coils and weight distribution


What launched the company to the top tier of the industry can be summed up into a few things and one of the most important is the way the coils distribute to weight.



They’re not only sturdier, but there’s more of them – for the Twin size the inner chambers includes 21 coils. They do their job in a way that’s similar to that of an innerspring classic bed.



Stability and edges


The air coils are also the main “culprit” behind the fact that the edges don’t have as much “give” compared to 95% of inflatables we tested.



The edges are sturdy enough to sit on without compromising the integrity of the structure and sinking in.



Having tested over 100 inflatable beds so far (in all size combined), we can report this is one of the products with the most stable sleep surface and lowest percentage of people who report sinking-in towards the middle.



Height


Sitting it 18 inches high, it’s at the sweet spot to emulate the “feel” of a classic bed.



We are stressing this because it might be a factor for the elderly and people with back pain problems. With twin-size inflatable beds the of-lower quality you’ll see more swaying and movement.



The incidence of this kind of complaints in our testing of this products was lower than 2%.



Quality of the vinyl


In our experience what makes or breaks a blow-up-mattress is primarily the quality of the vinyl used.



For the Dream Series Twin, the vinyl is manufactured by multi-layering. It is 15 gauge thick, which translates to about 1.45 mm and 0.0 57 inches.



What’s better about multilayered vinyl is that it doesn’t stretch as much. This means that less force is exerted on the inner chambers and the seams.



The better weight distribution and the lowered stress levels on the seams and chambers, combined with the heftier material, results in a bed with one of the lowest leak percentage is we’ve seen in our tests.



Slipping and sliding - results from our test


The incidence and %s of uncomfort caused by the bed moving or sliding across the floow surface puts it in the top 3 highest-rated Twin airbeds we looked at.



More about the Serta Raised



This Twin size air bed comes from one of the most well trusted companies in the industry – Serta.



But that’s not what earned it the place and the top five – it’s more about the balance between support and comfort and, more importantly, the reliability that a never-flat pump offers.



How does a never-flat pump work in Twin size air beds?


If this is not your first time buying an inflatable or you’ve already done your research you probably understand how the secondary pump works.



The technology is based on sensors that “notice” any fluctuation in the pressure of the chambers and silently turn the “smaller” pump on to add a bit more air and compensates for the loss of pressure.



Specifics of the Twin air mattress


The main pump is your classic built-in, electric and uses 120 V. The frequency is 60 Hz and the power is 105 W.



Auto shut-off function


In this price range of Twin airbeds, combination of a smart, sensor-equipped pump and a shut-off function is very rarely seen.



That’s what allows this Serta to face the technological advancements of the new arrivals in the industry, stand its ground and remain popular among users.



It costs only about 20% more than similar Twin sizes, including the ones in on this list.



This is why the ratings in the “value for money” category are currently 93 out of 100 and compare only to that of the Dream Series.



More about the Camping Series



The initial model from Sound Asleep hit the market in 2013 and we already said multiple times that it has taken over like a force of nature, outranking some of the products that have been reigning to the category for years before that.



The reasons for the high ratings of the Camping Series are similar things to those that gave the edge to its “older cousin” – the Dream Series.



The chambers use the same weight distribution technology of coils to minimize sinkage stress, air leaks and incidence of the structural integrity being compromised.



Dream vs. Camping Series Twin


When comparing the two, the most obvious differences are the pump and the craftsmanship of the top surface. While the pump of the Dream Series is electric and built-in, this model uses one that’s rechargeable and battery-operated.



Initial charge on arrival


The battery included has enough power for about 2 full inflations. After that, you perform the initial charge, which is crucial for the battery life in the long run and should be about 12 hours.



Compared to camping Twin air beds with rechargeable pumps, we found the battery used here is in the top 3% in terms of charge-hold.



This might not be the big deal if you’re using the inflatable at home, but it certainly is for campers, especially those on prolonged camping trips. In real life, this means that you can safely take it on the trip without worrying about the battery dying loosing power on the campsite.



Safety from overheating


Based on what we’ve seen in our tests and reviews, we put this pump into the top 7% in terms of safety from overheating.



It automatically deactivates if the motor reaches a certain temperature.



Having in mind that takes about 3 minutes to full inflation and about 6 minutes of straight running for the pump to get into the overheating mode, it’s safe to say that you won’t be seeing this happen very often.



In our tests and experiences, we’ve only seen this happen in about 3% of users.



The most likely scenario is the car motor not providing enough power or not compatible with the inner circuitry of the batteries.

But, as we said, the pump works well even when used with the car outlet and the incidence of these scenarios is minuscule.



Compatibility with other inflatables


The package arrives with a few nozzles and we’ve seen many people asking about the smaller one.



That’s one is included so that the pump is compatible with other airbeds.



Durability and capacity


This Twin size air bed is designed to be used for the maximum weight of 300 lbs, while the same model in Queen size has a capacity of-500 pounds.



Quality of the cord


The cord used to charge the pump is approximately 12 inches long and, when not used, you can shuffle it in into its own unit (integrated into the side of the bed).



We have seen no other quality issues or structural damage to the court with prolonged use.



Chemicals and off-gassing


The vinyl is environment friendly which means that, as per the company, no harmful chemicals like phthalates or heavy metals are used to treat the material.



The percentage of complaints about the initial plastic odor was one of the lowest – top 5%.



More about the Best Choice with bamboo topper



We explained why we had the high expectations as soon as we learned that the website that used to be dedicated to selling other brands is making a product of their own.



It’s safe to say that we were not disappointed since this bed is one over our top picks in most of the sizes.



There are few products out there with the warranty terms that are as flexible as those provided by the company behind this product.



New owners enjoy a 1-year warranty and, what will be probably more important for most users, a 6-week return guarantee.



This means that you can use the the bed for two months and if you’re not pleased with what you got you simply get a full refund.



Customer Service


We know the industry pretty well and we have seen claim claims like this before but in real life it gets a bit more complicated.



Companies that are not as trustworthy tend to track drag out the process and have you on the phone for days asking for explanations about the return.



That’s why we decided to test their warranty claim ourselves.



After getting the airbed we made a phone call asking for a return and a refund. The responsiveness of the customer service can only be described as impressive.



Of course, we didn’t end up actually returning the product; it was more about testing whether the company truly stands behind what they say.



We’re happy to report that, in this case, they do.



The trust factor (TF)


This is a big deal for the ratings that you seen above because over the years we tweaked the formula we use to rate the product to include what we call a “trust factor”.



The maximum Trust Factor is 1.



With companies whose customer service is not as efficient, we adjust the ratings to reflect that. In our book, this company has a maximum TF of 1.



Unboxing and storage


This Twin airbed arrives in a box with the following the dimensions - 16.5 x 12.75 x 9.25.



After use, you pack it into the carry case (included) and the folded size is a bit smaller than the box it comes in.



The topper


Since this is a very firm bed, we feel like it was a good idea to include the topper to balance out the firmness and minimize the pressure points.

On a secondary note, it’s pleasing to the eye, it’s that important to you.



Versatility


Most inflatable beds will be best suited for people who prefer medium firmness and what we mean by versatility here is the fact that you can even add an extra pad to make it loftier.



For those who find most inflatables not to be supportive enough, this product might be the answer.



Quality of the vinyl


When companies in the airbed industry talk about the vinyl they use phrases like “durable” and “puncture resistant.” For an average customer, this is too vague and doesn’t mean much.



With this bed, the claims made about the vinyl are substantiated with precise definitions about how it’s made and what’s in it.



The main advantage in those terms is the fact that this is the only product out there that explicitly says that the vinyl is virgin (meaning that it’s not recycled).



More about Fox Plush



What Fox Plush has going for it is the unparalleled toughness.



As you can see in the images that we share here, the material is 0.06 mm thick which is slightly over 15 gauge.



It’s also nice plus to have the option of using the extra valve with an external pump.



True to size ratings


Another factor that we’re using is our statistical analysis is whether the airbed is true to size. It’s not uncommon to see models that are a bit shorter or not as high as the listed dimensions.



With Fox, what you see in the listing is exactly what you get. According to our stats, the incidence of complaints about size is lower than 1%.



2 extra inches


The Fox is one of the products in this guide that’s actually more accurately described as Twin XL. While most Twins are 76 to 78 inches this Fox is 80 inches, and that’s measuring only the top surface.



Another thing that we don’t like to see in the industry in the company listing the dimensions of the further-most edges – this is it especially an issue with airbeds designed with “bulges”.



For example, if the design features “bulging” sides and the company list the dimensions at, say, 78 inches without precisely defining which length the referring to (sleeping surface or the outer measurements) you can end up with a smaller product than you expect.



Based on what we’ve seen, Fox doesn’t engage in that kind of trickery with its customers and the measurements listed are actually those of the sleeping surface.



FAQs about the top picks among the Twin airbeds



FAQs about Dream Series Twin air bed



Can it be used with a battery-operated pump?



No, the pump is built-I, electric and runs on AC power. We would not recommend trying to inflate using a rechargeable pump, even if you use a converter.



How often do I need to top it off?



The question about the frequency of adding air is important. But it’s also relative and it depends on how often you use the bed and the weight of the sleepers.



For reference purposes, we would say the say that adding a bit of air once a week is the scenario most commonly reported by our testers.



Sheets



Since this is a high-rise and the one-piece model, we would go with fitted sheets in the same size

The ribs that run horizontally around the mattress will keep the elastic band safely in place.



How good is it for everyday use?



As per the company, the product is designed to be used every day and doing it might void your warranty. With that said, in our experience, people who use it frequently reported it to be comfortable and not cause any issues like back pain.



Does it have to stay plugged in?



We’ve seen this question a few times and the source of the confusion is probably people mixing up this type of pump with the never-flat.

This is a regular electric pump that you plug in, use and then store it into the dedicated chamber.



Storage size



What’s important here is the pump is efficient in draining every last bit of air, so the bed can be folded into a relatively small package.

According to our measurements, that’s approximately a roll of about 15 inches in circumference.



The cord length



Measures from the body to the very end of the cord, the length is approximately 49 inches, which is much longer than most beds.



This puts this Twin air bed in the top 4% in terms of cord length and usability.



FAQs about the Serta Raised



The pillow-top



The Serta raised is available as a pillow-top version made of poly-fiber with a cotton finish and fitted band that grips the side ribs of the mattress.

The basic model doesn’t include the topper and it’s an add-on the new that you can choose to get.



Initial stretching



It’s the nature of the material and it’s not unusual to see to see stretching and adjusting over the few first day of use. To the untrained eye, it might seem like the bed is losing air.



We would advise not to jump to conclusions here and reach for the phone right away



If the air-loss is only slight, he most probable cause is the stretching. After the few days the bed sets in and you’re not likely to see the issue.



Can it be used for camping?



In theory, yes. But that doesn’t mean that the pump has the autonomy to be used without power



The option you have here is using it at the campsite that offers a power outlet or driving to the site with the airbed already set up (we are aware that not many people will do that).



Cleaning the Twin air mattress



We’ve seen a range of methods of cleaning the top which tends to collect lint when used without the topper. Most people clean it using a handheld vacuum with the “for hair” brush attachment.



FAQs about the Camping Series Twin



How often should you read charge the pump?



What we’ve seen with frequent use is that the pump holds the charge for multiple weeks, depending on the frequency of use.



If you don’t use the bed for months at a time, it’s advisable to do a full charge every 3035 days to keep the circuitry of the batteries in its optimal “shape”.



Is the car charger included?



Yes, the pump comes with both a car and a wall charger. In case you lose the car outlet plug-in, what might work is a converter of 12 volts DC 110 volts.



Can the Twin size be used for two people?



The Twin is not large enough to comfortably fit two adults, and even if you do squeeze in, keep in mind the weight capacity of 300 pounds.



Can you use standalone batteries?



The pump is a one-piece and is built-in, there’s no need for battery replacement.



Can I use with a leg or manual pump?



There is no alternative valve that would fit a nozzle of a leg or manual pump.



FAQs about the Twin size air bed with bamboo topper



Can I use an alternative power source?



To use it you need a 110 V outlet. The current is 15 amps, and to use anything else you would need a converter.



Is there an out of shut-off feature?



No, there’s no out of shut-off safety, you just turn off the pump when the bed is inflated to your desired firmness.



Can I use batteries?



The pump is electric and can’t be used with batteries, but for campers, the important part is that it comes with an extra valve for a manual or leg pump and the appropriate nozzle.



Weight capacity of the Fox Plush Twin explained



We did say that this is the toughest inflatables in Twin size out there. This doesn’t mean that the weight capacity of the size is significantly higher than that of similar models.

The gauge of the vinyl comes into play in larger sizes (like Queen or King) and weight capacity limit for the Twin is still 300 pounds.



Generally info



Sizing of Twin air mattresses



The size of Twin air mattresses can range from 73-80 inches long, 38-39 inches wide and 6 to 25 inches high – depending on the brand.

In terms of height you can find them described as single-high or double-high but, with most brands, the description will be low or high-rise.



Weight capacity of Twin air beds



Vast majority of Twin air mattresses have the maximum weight capacity of 300 pounds.



Pumps


Twin size inflatables for home use usually come with an integrated, built-in pump, while those for camping and outdoors typically run on a rechargeable or battery-operated pump.



Self-inflating options


There are some self-inflating Twin size air mattresses. These are based on open-cell foam technology and can be as slim as 4 inches. It’s more accurate to describe them as pads or mats.



Top brands



We’d say that the top 6 brands of Twin size air mattresses are Sound Asleep, Serta, Fox, Intex, Coleman and Aerobed.



Where to buy them


Twin air mattresses are widely available for purchase both in-store and online in places like Walmart, Target and Amazon.



Final thoughts and future updates



To keep the information presented relevant, we update this guide quarterly.



The exception to that rule can happen when we see the user satisfaction percentages fluctuating with some of the products listed.



If this happens, we do an unscheduled update to the ratings for the specific product



With the time behind us we believe that we have a list here that accurately represents the market. It gets more accurate with each new update, as the pool of data we use grows.



You can always use the comment section below to reach out - you’ll see a response from us within a day.



Choose smart



Twin air mattress – Top 5 out of 48 Tested – 2017 update is courtesy of https://www.thesleepstudies.com/







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/twin-air-mattress/

Beautyrest air mattress – top Simmons models reviewed and compared to top picks in their price ranges

The guide on Beautyrest air mattresses by Simmons that you see below is a result of over 200 work-hours and statistical analysis of 2,000+ user experiences with the Simmons air beds.

What you see below are the ratings in 5 quality categories of top Beautyrest models and their comparison with the currently best air mattresses.



Simmons Beautyrest air mattress Twin, Full & Queen - Hi-Loft



In our ratings this is currently the top model from the company. Let’s look at what makes it tick and, more importantly, see how it fares up against the currently top-rated air bed overall.



The listed maximum weight capacity of 700 pounds is currently one of the highest in the industry - only a handful of other models come close.



It features channel beam design and economic top with the velvet-like finish.



Let’s look at some basic facts of the three sizes it comes in:





Twin - 74 x 38 x 16 inches with the listed weight of 9.4 pounds


Full - dimensions 74 x 53 x 16 inches, weight 13 pounds


Queen – 80 x 60 x 17 inches in size, listed weight 17 pounds


Frequently asked questions about the Simmons Beautyrest air mattress Hi-Loft



Is it an option for camping?



The pump that comes with the Beauty Rest series is electric and built-in, so using it for outdoors and camping might be an option if you have a power source at the site.



Can I use a different pump with it?



The built-in pump is AC power-operated and, for outdoor, use you will need to pair it with a power adapter or converter and make sure the nozzle fits.



Portability and storage



Because of the thicker materials used, the Hi-Loft is pretty heavy, compared to the products of similar size. The downside of that is that it doesn’t back as small or light.



The ergonomic design of the is unique in a few ways.



First of all, the outer edge is slightly raised, which is a nice plus for restless sleepers who then to lose and chase their sheets and pillows.



Vertical stability



One of the crucial features of any inflatable is vertical stability - for a number of reasons.



Not only does it influence the comfort of the bed but it’s also factor in terms of durability and longevity.



Air bed that are more stable tend to have a longer lifespan because the stitching and the seams don’t take as much “abuse”.



Floor grip and sliding



The Hi-Loft includes what the company calls lower angle beam construction which is designed to create a recessed panel at the bottom and, in turn, create a suction effect with the floor when burdened.



Sturdiness of the top edges



The beam that encircles the top surface is there to provide additional support for the edges.



This is important for sleeper school toss and turn during the night, since inflatables with a completely flat top come with the risk of rolling over the sides.



The carry bag of the Hi-Loft



The nylon-based carry bag is one of the sturdiest we’ve seen.



Carry bags that come included with the blowup mattresses are usually flimsy and the stitching tends to separate with frequent use, but we don’t see that happening with this product.



Patented system for adjusting the firmness



You can adjust the firmness of this inflatable at the push of a button - in the range from plush to firm.



The hands-free pump is one of the most powerful we have seen.



It’s a two-way, which means that it does both (inflation/deflation). The add-on adapter included with the pump (with extra nozzles )allows you to use it for other inflatables.



The quick release valve let’s all tear out in just seconds, making the deflation and storage quicker and easier.



The one downside about the pump is that, to the best of our knowledge, it doesn’t include an air-stop feature



This basically means that it’s up to you to close the valve as quick as possible after finishing the inflation.



What might be a good tip here is to slightly over-inflate the bed, which will give you a second or two to plug the valve.



How well it holds air



The percentages of air leaks developed both on arrival and within the first few weeks of use are somewhat higher compared to most of the air beds we tested and reviewed the years.



What we’ve seen people reporting as a flaw are structural issues…the chambers bursting or mysterious leaks that don’t have any apparent cause.



Based on our experience these are usually caused by pinholes, leaking around the pump area or a slight separation of the seams or stitching.



Issues with the height



One common complaint that kept seeing in reviews of the owners is related to the product is being true to size. So let’s clarify that.

The twin and full-size sit at 16 inches, while the queen-size is 7 inches high which puts the Hi-Loft (speaking in the industry lingo) in the range of mid-rises.

We believe that the confusion stems from the fact that the word “hi-loft” is included in the name.



The bottom line is to make sure that you read and fully understand the specific listed by the company before making a decision.



Sheets



We would recommend using deep-pocket fitted sheets. The site indentations are deep enough to hold them firmly.



Initial inflation and first use



The directions included with this inflatable state you should inflate/deflate the bed several times, for about a week, before you use it for the first time.



This gives the vinyl time to fully stretch and adjust so that you won’t see any significant sinking or pressure changes in the long run.



Adding air



Most owners report that they and air every few nights.



What we’re talking about here is not substantial air loss that would qualify as a leak

Rather, it’s simply a natural pressure drop caused by the stretching of the vinyl or the micro-leaks that usually happen around the area of the pump.



Simmons Beautyrest air mattress Twin and Queen - Plush Aire



The plush Aire is a very similar product to the one listed above (HI-LOFT) with the most obvious difference being the appearance and colors.



It comes in twin and queen-size. Let us take a moment here and look at the details of the two versions.





Twin - 75 x 39 x 15 inches, weight - 10.5 pounds


Queen - 79 x 59 x 17 inches, weight 16.3 pounds


Compared to the HI-LOFT



Besides the most obvious difference, which is the color, there are slight differences between the two models in terms of size and weight.

If you compare the twin versions you’ll see that the Plush Aire is an inch longer, an inch shorter and sits a peg lower.

The Queen versions of the two are the exact same height, with the Plush Aire being an inch shorter and narrower.



Weight capacities compared



Compared to the Hi-Loft, the Plush Aire has a an even higher maximum capacity - listed at 750 pounds for the Queen.



Other features



The pumps of the two models are very similar, both are quick release and hands-free.



Both products feature a quick adjustable push-button system to control the firmness (patented by Simmons).

Both include vertical beams that run top-to-bottom to minimize swaying and increased stability.



Simmons Beautyrest Smart Aire - low-profile Queen and Twin airbed



If you’re looking for low-rise Simmons Beautyrest air mattress the option you currently have available on Amazon is the low-profile Smart Aire.



Sizes and dimensions





Twin - 75 x 39 x 9 inches, weighs 7.7 LBS


Queen - 14.1 x 13.1 x 7.3 inches, weighs 10.7 pounds


Availability of the Simmons Beautyrest air mattresses



Beautyrest air beds are carried by some of the largest retail stores in the US like Walmart, Target, Wayfair and online retailers like Amazon.



As per the Walmart website, they offer a two-day shipping on the Beautyrest air beds.



The Beautyrest collection at Walmart website includes both high-rise we talked about above with additional models from the collection such as:





Beautyrest Extraordinaire Raised Air Bed Mattress with iFlex Support (available in Twin, Full and Queen)


Beautyrest 18" Queen Raised Contour Aire


This model from Simmons Beautyrest has the highest listed weight capacity we have seen, with a mind-boggling 850 pounds.





Beautyrest Comfort Suite Adjustable Raised Queen Air Bed


The Comfort Suite same impressive capacity is the Contour Aire and comes with the two year warranty.



Some of the other products available at Walmart are:




Lumbar Lux Queen Raised


Fusion Aire 18" Raised Queen


Simmons Beautyrest Memory Aire 18" Raised Queen


Beautyrest air bed Skyrise raised pillow top


Hi-Loft DeepSleep Beautyrest full size air mattress


Availability of replacement pumps


Simmons Beautyrest air mattress pump replacement can be found on Amazon.



Since it’s a pretty unique model you should be careful to make the precise fit when replacing the pump.



Comparison to other brands



When compiling this guide we went through thousands of reviews comparing the materials , capacity and other quality aspect.



Some of the conclusions we’ve reached are summarized below.



The range of Simmons air mattresses starts on the cheaper side and some of them cost as low as 40 or $50.



It’s fair to say that if you’re looking for an affordable the airbed, Simmons might be the way to go.



But the information we gathered seems to show a pattern of lower reliability in terms of structural issues on arrival and air-leak problems developed over time.



Materials


Materials used are similar, most of the time it’s multilayered of vinyl…the difference is the thickness



That’s what allows the products from the Beautyrest series to list weight limits that are 10 to 20% higher than most products we review over the past few years.



As we stressed a few times before the pump is unique and powerful. While most similar products take about 3 to 4 minutes for full inflation, our stats tell us that an average that time is shorter with Simmons products.



The downside seems to be the construction and how well it works with the valve.



It’s fair to say that if we had a degree of “usability rating for the valve” it would be lower than that of other brands because of the absence of an air-stop and the fact that you manually have to plug in the valve.



This especially goes for the products in the lower price range



About the company



Airbeds are not the primary product of the Simmons Bedding Company and their focus are classic mattresses and bedding.



Founded in 1870, Simmons Bedding is one of the companies with the longest tradition in the industry.They are based in Atlanta and best-known for the Beautyrest brand.

Manufacturing facilities operate both in the US and Puerto Rico - 18 of them combined.



International licensing


What’s interesting is that they are licensing their name to other companies internationally.



This means that if you get a Simmons airbed it might be made by another company and yet carry the Simmons name.



In the case of the products we looked at above we saw the listed manufactured to be Boyd Specialty Sleep.



Warranty


If you’re buying from Amazon the details of Simmons airbed warranty can be obtained by directly contacting the customer service. On the other hand, most products listed with Walmart come with a two-year warranty.



Growth


Simmons reported net sales of and $855 million,$1.13 billion, ,$1.228 billion in 2005, 2007 and 2013 respectively.



Market share


The latest information we have available dates back to 2011. According to that report, the company claimed 15.7% of the US mattress market share.



History


The story of Simmons dates back to 1870 when the founder, Zalmon G. Simmons, started the first manufacturing facility in Wisconsin…Kenosha, to be more precise.

Initially, the company manufactured telegraph insulators and cheese boxes and started spreading into the mattress industry after they received the rights to a patent for a bed spring based on woven wire.



The woven wire patent


With that in mind its fair to say that there beginnings in the mattress industry where result of circumstance because the initial patents was received as a debt payment.

Since receiving the patent the company turned its its focus to mass-producing mattresses based on the woven wire.



Mass production


They started mass production in 1876 and were the first company to do it.



The shift to mass produce allowed the company to make the mattresses cheaper and it wasn’t long before they introduced the spiral coil into their mattresses - that happened in 1889. The introduction of coil springs was a big deal, not only simmons, but for the mattress industry is a whole.



It’s what allowed the company to drop the price of an average mattress from $12 to under $1, which revolutionized the industry



It made the product widely available and affordable to most people.



Momentum and growth


As the momentum of the growth was increasing, Simmons reacted by acquiring and setting up new manufacturing facilities across the United States, primarily in California (San Francisco Los Angeles) and all-around Canada, including Toronto and Vancouver.



A change in the business model


Very soon, they changed the business model drastically. Instead of buying the products at face value, their customers were soon given the opportunity to test the mattresses on samples available in stores and then have their chosen products shipped within 24 hours.



The Hide-A-Bed


Another important milestone came in 1940 with the introduction of a pull-out sofa. Soon, this type of sofa became the product that Simmons was best known for.



Simmons as we know it today



Today, the company is owned by Advent international which is a US-based, privately owned equity firm.



Advent acquired both Simmons and Serta on October 2 , 2012.



Beautyrest air mattress – top Simmons models reviewed and compared to top picks in their price ranges was first published on TheSleepStudies







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/beautyrest-air-mattress/

Lazery Sleep air mattress – full review and ratings – 2017 update

We finally gathered enough data to do a reliable review and rate the Lazery Sleep air mattress in our 5 quality categories.



Since this high-end product arrived to the market back towards the end of 2015, we have been gathering info to plug into our statistical model, and we’re finally back with the results.



The main reason why we were especially interested in this air bed is that it has so much in common with some of our top-rated models from Sound Asleep (like the number of inner coils and how the weight of the sleeper is distributed).









Six months after it hit the market it was clear that it’s a high-quality product and we believed, even back then, that it deserved a “better place under the sun.”



Up to this point, the ratings of the Lazery Sleep were somewhat lowered by the fact that the initial price point was a bit too high.



That’s why we were pleased to see that the company adjusted the prices for both the Queen and twin size.



It’s only a matter of time before more people discover that there is a mattress out there that features all the milestones of technology advancement seen in more popular models with, but with an extra touch of pizzazz.



What we mean when we say “extra pizzazz” are details like the remote control that you rarely see in this price range and (if that’s important to you) the fact that it brings a splash of color into a see of gray and beige that is the current airbed market.



What you’ll see below is a detailed analysis of all the quality aspect that makes or breaks an air bed, including some of the most prominent advantages and shortcomings. So let’s get to it.



Basic info:





available sizes – twin and Queen


covered by a one year warranty


LED remote control it seven settings of firmness


details of the twin





dimensions 74 x 39 x 18 inches


shipping size 15.7 x 14.8 x 17.6 inches, weight 14.8 pounds, weight capacity 300 pounds


details of the Queen





Dimensions – 78 x 58 x 19 inches


shipping size – 17.2 x 15 x 9 inches, weighs 19.8 pounds and has the maximum weight capacity of 500 LBS


Lazery Sleep air mattress - all current ratings



[wp-review id="208362"]



The ratings above put the Lazery Sleep in the top 3% highest rated air beds we reviewed over the past two years.



Over 500 people shared their experience with this air bed on Amazon, you can see them by following the link links below.



Weight distribution



It features the cutting edge technology used to better distribute weight (the high number of air coils), which not only makes it more comfortable but it has an impact on air retention.



Why?



Because the more stable the inner structure, the less stretching is exerted on the seams – which lowers the risk of the bed developing a leak.



It’s one of the few products out there with such high number of - 40.



Pump of the Lazery sleep



The pump is electric, built-in and inflation/deflation takes about four minutes.



Movement and sliding



What we tend to see in air beds of lower quality is complaints from owners about their bed sliding and moving. This is not only a comfort issue but ties into the durability and longevity because movement means an increased risk of the bed “meeting” on micro prickle and developing a pinhole.



The issue will be especially important to you if you have hardwood floors.



What prevents this bed from sliding and moving is the rubberized material used for the bottom.



Frequently asked questions about the Lazery Sleep air mattress



Can I use any other pump to inflate it?



We see this question popping up frequently, and the most likely reason for that is people are considering it for camping and outdoor use.



We would say that theoretically, yes it can be used for camping but it does need a power outlet.



What is practically means is that this is an indoor product, which is also how the company defines it.



The pump is meant to be used with the voltage of 110 V AC. If your plan is to use it abroad, you will need a power converter.



Off-gassing and odor



Another common complaint with sub-par models is the significant presence of plastic odor, which means that the materials are for volatile and are off-gassing.



Based on what we’ve seen with the Lazery Sleep the issue is practically non-existent.



Temperature isolation



When sleeping in a particularly cold or for the room people tend to complain about the rushes of cold or warm air heating the top surface. The result of this is your bed suddenly becoming colder or warmer.



The reason that happens is because of the micro-currents are forming inside the chambers of the airbed and then moving around to recent redistribute heat.



It’s physics 101.



What this means in practice is that, the less the air moves, the lower the chance of you experiencing the phenomenon.



The point we’re trying to make here is that the issues more prevalent in air beds with beams that run side-to-side or top to bottom



With models like the Lazery sleep, which features air coils and chambers, the movement of air is limited.



This means no forming of micro-currents of cold or hot air.



Storage



The shipping box is just under 20 inches long and 12 inches high and approximately 16 x 17 inches wide.



The pump is a two-way – this means that it both inflates and deflates the bed. The important part here is that the pump does a good job of sucking every last piece of air when deflating.



The result of that is that the bed folds up pretty small - for reference we would say that the folding size is approximately 20 x 12 inches.



Do the sheets stay on?



The bed is true to size and it works just fine with fitted sheets. The indentations in the sides are not as the as deep as some of the other inflatables, but they’re just deep enough to form “ribs” that keep the sheets in place.



Do both versions come with a remote control?



Yes, both the twin and queen-size come with a LED remote control.



Is the remote wireless?



No, the remote is attached to the cord and hardwired to the bed.



Sturdiness of the edges



This is one of the more robustly built airbeds we know, and combined with the air coils it makes for a very stable surface.



Why is this important?



This will especially be important for people who don’t like the bouncy feeling of most air beds and find it difficult to get out up.



To be more precise – we would say that in terms of giving you the “feel of a regular bed”, this inflatable belongs to the top 5% of products in the market.



True to size



One of the final concerns that we want to address here is whether the bed is true to size.



Based on our experience and research, it is.



If you did somehow get a bed that significantly deviates from the listed sizes there’s a good chance that you received a flawed product and you’re covered by the one year warranty.



You just send it back and receive a new one within a few days.



Conclusions about the Lazery Sleep air mattress



With the company lowering the prices, this mattress suddenly skipped the thin margins that separated it from our top picks.



Finally, let the stress that this guide is updated every 4 months, which means that the information you’re looking at is accurate and fresh and, we believe, paints a pretty accurate picture of the high quality air mattress that is the Lazery Sleep



As things are now, we would go as far as to say that the Lazery Sleep is one of the best “value for money” products on the market.



Lazery Sleep air mattress – full review and ratings – 2017 update Read more on: https://thesleepstudies.com/







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/lazery-sleep-air-mattress/

Best camping air mattress – top 10 out of 52 tested

The top 10 best camping air mattresses you’ll see below are chosen out of 52 airbeds we tested, reviewed and rated over the last 17 months.



The table will show you our top picks, their details and overall ratings.



To skip to the complete ratings in quality categories click the link in the last column that says “see all ratings.”









Best camping air mattress - Comparison of Top 10





SoundAsleep Camping Series


Lightspeed Outdoors TPU


Coleman SupporRest


Coleman Queen Cot


Mobile Inflation car camping mattress


Coleman 4-in-1 Quickbed


KingCamp Double size


Lightspeed Outdoors XL Super Plush FlexForm


Shelterin Multifunctional Car Inflatable


AirBedz Lite


SoundAsleep Camping Series



SoundAsleep Camping Series is currently rated at 94/100 with ratings of 95 & 93 in air retention and comfort.



Since we first started gathering data and testing the airbeds it was clear that we had the winner on our hands with this one.



It’s fair to say that this is a young product (it hit the market in 2015).



Within a year, it outranked some of the models that have been dominating over a decade, both in popular popularity and user satisfaction.





Queen - 78 x 60 x 9 inches when inflated, weighs 14 lbs, capacity 500 pounds


Twin - 75 x 42 x 9 inches, weighs approximately 9 lbs, capacity 250 pounds


inner structure - I-beam coils


material - environment-friendly PVC


bottom - sure-grip rubberized material to prevent moving or sliding


top - flocked velvet- finish, waterproof


unique pump - external, patented by Sound Asleep


inflation/deflation time - ~ three minutes


warranty - one year, limited


More detailed information about the Sound Asleep Camping Series



Air retention



What we have seen with this Sound Asleep are some of the lowest leakage percentage stats, which we just what’s resulted in the 95 out of hundred ratings in air retention.

Based on our experience in the industry we would say that the advantages that “allowed” it to have such high ratings in air retention can be found in the list below:



Multi-layered PVC



Most camping air mattresses in the industry use a standard 0.4-0.45 mm thick one-layer of vinyl. In my most cases it’s been recycled multiple times and, in the process, it loses some of its properties.



The vinyl used here is multilayered to be more durable and resistant to pinholes.



Having said that, our experience tells us that the frequency of air leaks that have no apparent cause is just as high as punctures.



What this means is that not only is the vinyl more resistant to punctures but the connections between the chambers are well-crafted.

We are stressing that because, with most camping air beds, the inner structure is not as well-made as the outer seems and chambers can burst, rendering the mattress useless.



A more “plastic” explanation of the vinyl thickness



For technicality “nerds” like us, let us take a moment to explain the thickness more clearly.



For most Americans the measures mentioned above, using the metric system, won’t mean much, so let’s transfer that to inches.



The material is about 20 Mil thick which equals 0.02 “. To put in terms that you might understand better – the plastic used for credit cards is 20 Mil thick.



A note about Mil as a unit



Also known as thou, Mil 0.001 “.



We’re including this analysis because one of the confusions here can be mixing this unit up with millimeters, which are used in the metric system.



For the most scientific explanation, you can refer to the table below.

Table - aqua-calc. com/what-is/length/mil



Weight distribution



There’s no way to count how many times we mentioned the importance of the inner structure of the bed



Every time we do it we get back to one point - coils tend to perform better in weight distribution than simple side-to-side or top to bottom beams.



The weight distribution is ensured by the proprietary I-beam coils that minimize sinking towards the middle of the bed.



They do that much like a spring coil would in a regular mattress.



This is not only a comfort issue



Coil-based-models are not only the best camping mattresses in terms of support. The secondary advantage is that they leak less because the seams don't take on as much pressure.



When we say connections, we’re referring to the areas where the sides of the bed meet and, just as importantly, the area around the pump.



These kinds of leaks are the most likely cause if your air mattresses deflating and you see no hole - https://thesleepstudies.com/air-mattress-deflating-no-hole/



Superior support



This ties into the analysis above but let’s gets into the nitty-gritty of it all.



I-coils used for the Camping Series are a version of the Comfort Coil technology that launched the company to the stardom of the industry in the first place.



Inflation, deflation and the pump



The pump of the Camping Series has been developed specifically for this model.



Inflation time is pretty much your industry standard - around 3 minutes.



It’s not a two-way pump, which means that you deflate the mattress manually.



The more important aspect of the pump is how well it works with car outlets without overheating or losing power or efficiency over time.



The issue of the pump circuitry not being adjusted well to the car power outlet is prevalent in camping air mattresses and lower quality.



If this happens, you’ll smell a burning odor, in which case you should unplug the pump right away.



We’ve seen no such issues in the Sound Asleep Camping Series.



The pump stands the test of time very well doesn’t lose power or efficiency and the voltage works just right with the vast a majority of vehicles.



Charge on arrival



On arrival, the pump has enough charge for about two uses - after that, you need to charge it fully - the initial full charge is recommended to be 12 hours.



If you’re not camping frequently, it's a good practice is to charge the pump at least once a month to keep it in its optimal shape.



Comfort



As we mentioned, the weight of the sleeper is distributed evenly across the surface so we won’t be wasting any more time on that.



Here, we want to put the accent on the fact that the edges are sturdy - this will be an important factor your plan includes sleeping with a partner.



To be precise - this means that you won’t be seeing any sinking to the middle of the bed or rolling over the sides.



In camping air beds with sub-par structural integrity, you might see a cradle of sorts forming in the middle of the bed, pushing the two sleepers towards each other.



In this scenario, you end up using about 50 to 60% of the sleeping surface. This is what makes is the best camping mattress for couples.



Frequently asked questions about the the best camping bed - SoundAsleep



In the following section, we’ll address some of the questions that popped up in our inbox.



Can the pump be used for a different mattress?



The pump comes with an additional, smaller nozzle and can be used for another inflatable that fits the smaller nozzle size.



What kind of sheets will be a good fit for the Camping Series?



In our opinion and experience, fitted sheets are your safest bet.



Just make sure that you factor in the depth of the sheet because most classic beds have a higher profile.



Is it durable enough not to be ripped by cats?



Some of our testing included people who cats and dogs and we’ve seen no issues reported.



However, this is still vinyl, and the sides are more prone to be damaged by claws of your pet than the top.



Can I use the pump by directly plugging it into an outlet?



The power of the pump should come from the charged batteries; it’s not advisable to try and use it by directly plugging it into an AC outlet.



How long will it take to charge using the car outlet?



For a full charge from your vehicle motor, you would be about 6 hours. In practice, you’re not likely to be faced with the issue of doing that because the pump holds a charge very well.



Noise



Best camping beds will not be whole-body vinyl, because they tend to make squeaking noises as you turn during the night.



The noise comes from the bottom surface rubbing against the floor of the tent or from the vinyl top.



The bottom of the Camping Series features rubberized non-slip “dots.” Their primary purpose is to prevent movement and sliding against another synthetic material.



The secondary benefit here is that you won’t see any squeaking noises as you turn.



Lightspeed outdoors TPU



The Lightspeed outdoors TPU has been one of the top 3 contenders for the best air mattress for camping in the last 3 updates (9 months).



It’s currently rated at 92.4 overall - 95 and 94 in the categories of durability and air retention, respectively.



Its main advantage is the fact that it’s one of the few mattresses that’s not made of PVC but TPU fabric.



TPU is less stretchy and more durable than vinyl and doesn’t have the plastic feel of PVC - it feels like fabric and is not associated with any harmful chemicals.



TPU camping air mattresses are scarce. The reason for that is that the fabric is not as malleable as vinyl and the production is a bit more intricate.





size and weight - 77.9 x 55.9 x 8 inches, 5.34 pounds


pillow height - 10.2 inches


size when deflated - 8 x 18 inches


Boston valve


warranty - one year


color choices - navy blue, gray top and blue bottom, blue top dark gray button, green


Who will choose the Lightspeed outdoors TPU?



If you prefer a firmer sleeping surface to the bouncy quality most camping air beds have, you’ll probably love this Lightspeed.



It might be counter-intuitive, but the Lightspeed Outdoors costs the less than the above-mentioned Camping Series.



A more detailed analysis of the second best air mattress for camping



Since they belong to the same category we rated this model using the statistical model we use for all air beds (including those for car camping and for couples).



But, the Lightspeed is very different.



When we say “different,” we’re primarily referring to the feel of the finish and the firmer sleeping surface.

Stability



Lightspeed Outdoors has managed to patent the inner stabilizers used for this bed.



These connect the top and bottom, the primary purpose being to make the structure more balanced.



Unique size



The Lightspeed outdoors measures 79 x 55 “ which puts it somewhere between a twin and a Queen camping air mattress.



In our opinion, the sizing is smart because a twin size is not big enough for two people, while the queen might take too much room in your tent.



The width of 55 inches is just enough to comfortably sleep two people without excessive surface.



When you factor in the lower profile (8 inches), the end-result is a camping mattress that packs smaller than the competing models and is more portable.



Characteristics of the TPU



TPU fabric is free of chemicals like phthalates, has a coarser finish and it’s harder to scratch.

Some people might find that the downside is that the finish is not as soft as the felt-like top of the Camping Series.

For this group of people, the solution is pretty simple – simply add a cover and you’re golden.



Pump



The pump is a “two-way”, which means that you use the battery-operated unit to both inflate and deflate the airbed.



Coleman SupportRest



Among the high-rise camping airbeds, our top pick is the Coleman SupportRest.



We have that in common with the National Park Foundation because this is the air mattress they chose to label as their official airbed.



Unlike some of the models we looked at, this is an industry veteran - one of the very few that stood its ground in the past few years with the onset of new arrivals.



You can see all its quality ratings below.



Detailed analysis of the Coleman support rest



Comfort and support



What’s especially important for the high-rises is to have some sort of for support system in place to make the bed sturdy enough and minimize sinkage.

Coleman has addressed the issue thoroughly, both in lateral and vertical support.



Vertical support



What allows this Coleman to distribute the weight so well and maintain a flat top surface is their proprietary coil system which they call ComfortStrong.

It’s a construction of the inner chambers that connects the bottom to the top.



Lateral support



Unlike most high-rises of lower quality, the edges of this Coleman are robust.



To make that happen, Coleman developed a system they call SupportLock.



It connects the top & bottom to the sides so that they don’t “cave in” under the weight of the sleeper.



When we say that the edges are robust we’re not too concerned about how comfortable they are to sit on. It’s more about the secondary benefit, which is the stabilization.

When you combine all the factors above you get what is probably the best air mattress for camping in terms of support.



Added comfort of the pillow-stop



The sleeping surface is designed using slightly elevate pillow-stop that encircle the bed.



This is a nice touch if you are a restless sleeper because it keeps the pillows in place and (if you’re not using any) gives you an elevated surface for head support.



Coleman Airbed Cot



The Coleman Cot airbed with frame, legs and side tables is probably as close as you can get to the feel of a regular mattress when camping.



The robust steel structure keeps any pesky crawlers that might climb up to “keep you company.”



The mattress that fits into the zippered sleeve features all the stabilizer and support structures used in the Coleman SupportRest - ComfortStrong coils to distribute weight and SupportLock to keep the edges firm.



Versatile



The frame is solid steel and supports 600 pounds for the queen-size and 300 for the twin.



The versatility that we are mentioning above refers to the fact that you can take the air bed out of the zippered sleeve and use it on its own. This is a nice plus if you’re driving to the campsite but also need an inflatable to carry in your backpack for day-hikes.



You just deflate the air bed, pack it into a backpack (along with the pump) and hit the trail.



You can see the quality ratings of the Coleman Cot below.



Who will choose the Coleman Cot?



Coleman Cot will be the choice of people aiming to sleep as comfortably on the camp site as they do at home.



The best part is that it’s budget-friendly - similar models for home use are called EZ beds and cost twice or 3 times as much is this Coleman.



Over 1,300 shared their reviews with this Coleman on Amazon - you can see them all by following the link below.



Best car camping mattress - Mobile Inflation



Coleman EasyStay 4-in-1



If you’re looking for a reliable camping bed with a lower price tag, you’ll definitely want to look at this unique model from Coleman.



It’s the only camping air mattress in its price range with ratings higher than 88 (currently rated at 88.2/100).



We mentioned the word unique above - here’s what we mean by that

What makes it one-of-a-kind is the fact that it can be used as 2 single-high twins, one double-high twin or a single-high King air mattress.



As you can see in the image, it’s comprised of two twin-sized parts that can be joined or separated using the zipper. That makes it the most versatile camping air mattress we know.



Who will choose the Coleman 4-in-1?



You might like this Coleman for one of the two following reasons.



1 - You want to spend as little as possible but don’t want to compromise by getting an airbed from a brand that you’ve never heard of before.

2 - You like the idea of practically getting 4 airbeds for the cost of one.



KingCamp Light



In terms of sleep, you can crudely separate campers into two groups - those who are more about mobility and prefer sleeping pads and those who more about comfort and will go with an air mattress.



The KingCamp Light is designed to meet the two groups halfway.



To be honest, we didn’t really know whether to call it an air mattress or sleeping pad.



It weighs only 7.7 pounds but measures 76 x 54 inches. When inflated, it’s approximately 4 inches thick.



The inflation and deflation take about 2 minutes using the built-in foot pump (the areas with the red valves on the top edge).



Who will go with the KingCamp?



KingCamp will be just right for you if you need the portability of a sleeping pad but you’re not just satisfied with the comfort that most pads can offer.



It’s also worth mentioning is that it’s one of the most budget-friendly options on the list.



Shelterin Multifunctional - best car camping mattress for backseats



If you’re looking for an air mattress that will both make the trip to the campsite more comfortable and allow you to sleep in the backseat area, our recommendation is the Shelterin.



What gave this mattress an edge over other backseats models are the materials used.



The body is made of TPU and the finish of the top is soft, waterproof Oxford fabric.



The Oxford fabric is the latest generation of the material and makes the airbed more durable than the competing models we looked at.



Shelterin estimates the lifespan at 2 years with frequent but proper use. To see all the details and user experiences click on the button below.



AirBedz Lite Original



If you own a pickup truck and using it to drive to the campsite, you’ll love the options AirBedz Lite can offer.



Primarily, it’s meant to be used for the back of your truck.



If you look at the image you’ll see the cutouts the sites - those are there to wrap around the wheel wells so that the top surface of the mattress is flat.



Another option you have is getting inserts for the cutouts and using it as a standalone air mattress.



With over 340 user reviews on Amazon, AirBedz Lite is by far the most popular truck camping air mattress.



Best camping air mattress - the decision process



Let’s take a step back and go over some steps of choosing the best camping air mattress for your circumstances.



Portability versus comfort



Speaking in general terms, the thicker and heavier an air mattress is, the more comfortable it will be.

If that’s your primary concern you’ll probably go with some of the full-size models that are similar to those you can use at home.



What you should have in mind here is the bulk and the weight, since these will not be an option if you’re backpacking. These are only an option for car camping, but on the plus side they make the best choice for couples.



Size



They come in all the same sizes as regular beds, but because of the nature of the material they can be an inch or two shorter or narrower.



Single size camping air mattress


For one person, experience campers usually go with the Twin. But if the space is very limited you have the “go lower” and try out a single-sized camping mattress.



The choices in this size are scarce, de to the fact that most people find a single to narrow for a comfortable sleep.



Dimensions of a single –size camping air mattress are usually 72-75 long, 29-30 inches wide and 6 to 8 inches thick.



Twin size camping air mattress


A twin size is 73 to 75 inches long and 38-42 inches wide, depending on the brand. The low-rises start as thin as 4 inches, while the high-rises can be as high as 22 inches.



Twin XL camping air mattress


The XL here stands for extra long and the inflatables in the Twin Xl size are of the same height and width as a twin, but 80 inches long. They are designed for tall people.



Full & Full XL


A full-sized camping air mattress typically measures 75 x 54 inches – for most people, it will be the “first” size that can comfortably sleep two adults.



The extended version of the full will be marked as a Full-XL (extra-long) and will be 80 inches long.



Queen-size camping air mattress


With most brands, the listed dimensions of the Queen-size are 80 x 60 and they come both as a low-rise and high-rise.



You might see some companies, like Coleman, referring to the height as single-high or double-high. In most cases, campers find the Queen-size to be the best camping mattress for couples.



King size



If you want an air mattress for camping in King size your options are limited.



You can get a multifunctional model like the mentioned Coleman 4-in-1 or you can go with something heavier.



King-size will measure 80 x 76 “



If you want a classic air bed in King size, one model that comes to mind is the Fox Plush Durabeam.



This Fox is one of the most durable and heavy-duty air mattresses https://thesleepstudies.com/heavy-duty-air-mattress-most-durable/ that can be used for camping.



Most people use it indoors but it features a secondary valve than that works with a manual or leg pump, too.



California King



There’s no camping air mattress that we know of in California King size.



The few inflatable beds available as California King are meant to be used in your home and don’t include a secondary valve for an alternative pump.



Pumps



Camping inflatables rarely come with a built-in pump and it’s usually a rechargeable (electric) or battery-operated pump.



Adjusting the size of your camping care mattress to the tent floor space



Most tent types slopped walls, which is why you shouldn’t is the size of your air bed solely based on the floor space.



This is especially true if you’re going with high-rise camping bed. For reference purposes, we have put together the table below.



Top brands and honorary mentions



Apart from our top picks, we feel like there are a few brands of inflatable camping beds that deserve a mention.



Camping Aero Bed models



There’s one Camping Aero Bed air mattress we’d like to mention here.



It comes from their Aero Sport series and it’s called Aerobed Camping All-Terrain. It uses a rechargeable Nickel-cadmium pump which inflates it in under a minute.



The valve is quick release which deflates it in 15 to 20 seconds



Intex



Index models are primarily used for homes but the one product the stands out is the Intex Inflatable Fabric Mattress with Built-In Pillow.



Compared to the best camping air mattresses, it’s fair to say that this Intex inflatable with a built-in pillow is very cheap.



What we mean by “cheap” is value for money, not sub-par quality.



Conclusions and final thoughts



The guide on best camping air mattresses is updated on quarterly basis, unless we see a “red light, like a substantial change in the user satisfaction rating with specific products.



When this happens it triggers an unscheduled update to the reviews and ratings.



What this means for you



The bottom line is that the information you see here is fresh and relevant at all times.



If you have experiences you want to share or questions you want to ask, just shoot us an email or leave a comment below.



You’ll hear from us with a day.



Stay smart,



The Sleep Studies team



Best camping air mattress – top 10 out of 52 tested was first seen on https://thesleepstudies.com







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/best-camping-air-mattress/

Best futon frame – by type (wood, metal) & size (Twin, Full, Queen & King)

The results you’re about to see are based on statistical analysis of over 3,000 user reviews.



We looked at over 37 futon frames over the last 9 months and rated them in 4 quality categories.



We did our best to include all types and sizes. In the table below, you'll see the overall ratings of the frames and quick links will take you to the full reviews.









Best futon frames - top 8





Studio bi-fold frame


Eastridge frame


KD lounger


Zinus King size futon frame


DHP Vermont


Arden frame


DHP Aleesa


DHP Aiden


Studio Bi-fold wood futon frame



This is one of the most popular frames out there, primarily because of the simple design that allows versatile use, both as a couch and as a bed.



Details





positions - five angles of reclining


material-wood, tulip poplar


available sizes - Full and Queen


dimensions and weight of the full - 76 x 4 x 9 “ / 49 pounds


dimensions and weight of the Queen size 81 x 5 x 9 “ / 57 pounds


More detailed information about the Studio bi-fold wood futon frame



Seat and backrest height



The seat depth is approximately 24 “ while the backrest is, according to our measurements, about 27 “ high.



Weight capacity



We’ve seen no official listed maximum weight limit for the frame, but based on the experiences we’ve seen, we would say that it can comfortably sleep two adults, even those on the heavier side.



Overhang of the mattress



According to our measurements, the overhang is in the range of 1.5-2” on one side, which means that the combined overhang is approximately 3 to 4 “.



In couch mode, the depth of the seats is 42 “.



Clearance from the floor



Measured from the floor to the surface of the frame, the clearance is 10 “. Having the thickness of the frame in mind the clearance of the space under it is 8.5-9 “.



The lowest parts of the frame are the braces and the clearance between those and the top surface in 7 “.



The highest part in a horizontal position is the platform - according to our measurements the clearance here is 9.5 “.



Sliding



The top surface of the frame is flat, but the angle of the fold it is designed (slanted) to keep a mattress safely in place, unless your futon mattress is especially sturdy, thick and features innersprings.



Storage



The frame can be easily folded and packs pretty small so it can be stored away while not in use.



Noise



It’s common to see/hear squeaking noises in most wooden futon frames. We did see a bit of that with this Studio bi-fold model, but not nearly as much compared to other products.

We attribute that to the solid construction. The images can be a bit deceiving in those terms, because it looks kind of thin and flimsy - in person, it’s well-crafted and stable, which minimizes the squeaking, even for a restless sleeper.



Slats and spacing



The distance between the slats is 3.5 “, while the slats themselves are approximately 2 “ in width. When folded down to a horizontal position there is a clearance of about 4.5 “, measured from the seating section and the backrest.



Shipping



The company uses UPS for delivery (UPS grounds to be more precise) and no signature is required.



Wood sources and manufacturing



We have seen some claims that the wood used for the Studio bi-fold frame is imported from China and we’re not sure what the source of that is. The wood is US-made with no harmful chemicals used.



To be specific - it’s 100 % Poplar.



The angles and mechanism of the recline



The mechanism used to recline the frame into the five angles available is simple and uses notches. No springs are included.



The back legs of the frame include wheels, which makes it easier to pull it away from the wall when setting it down.



Because it’s easy to move, there’s no need for special clearance between the wall and the sofa.



What kind of mattress to use?



Ideally, the design of the mattress will be bi-fold but the other types work as well. If you’re using a hybrid between innersprings and other materials, you might see some movement or sliding, especially if the mattress



is new and thick.



Assembly, disassembly and moving



If you’re using this occasionally, for example in your vacation home, you might need to assemble and disassemble it. Unlike most of the wood futon frames the Studio bi-fold is pretty easy to disassemble and put back together.



The fasteners and other parts needed for assembly come included and there’s only a few screws in the main joint that you’ll need to drive in yourself, our advice here is to use a classic Phillips screwdriver.



Finish of the wood



As we mentioned, it’s made of Poplar and comes with a smooth finish, so there is no need for further touch-ups. We have seen, however, that some people prefer to paint it, but that’s a matter of personal preference and it’s not about wood protection.



Eastridge Wood Futon Frame - full and queen-size





Body material - solid hardwood


Wood finish - detailed finishing, multi-layer


Angles - the frame can be inclined into three positions


Warranty - five year limited from the manufacturer


Details of the full-size in the sofa position-size - 33.5 “ high, 81 “ wide, 32 “ deep / 96 “ wide one fully reclined


The height of the armrests is 23.25 “


Details of the queen-size - 86 “ wide, 36 “ high, 32 “ deep


More info about the Eastridge wood futon frame



The sturdy wooden structure is solid enough to be used with pretty much any mattress but we would say that it works as best with thicker models.



Is there any sliding?



The answer to this will be more about the mattress than the frame. With sturdy innerspring mattresses you might some sliding and if you experience the issue, we would recommend placing a slide-stop fabric between the wooden surface in the mattress.



Assembly



The Eastridge is more intricate than the Studio bi-fold (mentioned above and), according to the user experiences we’ve seen, assembly takes about 1.5 to 2 hours.

Instructions that come included are pretty simple to follow and straightforward.



KD Lounger Tri-fold Wood Futon frame - Twin, Full and Queen





type of wood - hardwood, dry kiln


finish - comes unfinished but it’s pretty easy to coat or paint


no harmful chemicals used


USA-made


Warranty - 5 years from the manufacturer


size and weight


twin - 41 x 9 x 7 “ and weighs 39 lbs


full - 53 x 9 x 6 “, 52 lbs


Queen- 61 x 9 x 6 “, for 55 lbs


loveseat - when used as a loveseat, it's 37 “ wide, 45 “ long and 10 “ high


lounger - 62 “ long


More detailed info and faqs



Folding of the footrest



The bottom footrest section can be folded under the seat, which can convert the lounger into a bi-fold or loveseat.



Type of mattress to be used



If you’re getting this tri-fold lounger and what want to make the most out of the versatility it offers, with go with a mattress that’s flexible and can be folded easily. This way you can fold it along with the footrest and make a comfy loveseat.



For sleep, even a coil-based mattress will work.



Specifics of the recline angles



The four angles mentioned in the info sheet range between 55 and an angle that’s close to the full 90 degrees.



Possible sliding

If you see issues with the mattress sliding, which can happen depending on the mattress type, it’s smart to use non-slip futon grip pads or tape grippers.



Disassembly and storage



To disassemble it, you just disengage a few bolts and fold the frame, which is especially important for people looking for a portable sleep solution.



Can it be used as the futon frame only?



If you remove the lower section, it will remain functional but won’t be a fit for a mattress. It’s designed to be used as a tri-fold.



Clearance from the wall



The support of the frame is pretty close to the back legs and you’ll only need to move it slightly. We’d say 8-10 “.



DHP Vermont metal futon frame





material - full metal, used for both the arms and the frame


the weight is approximately 47 pounds


size - 39 x 76 x 2.5 “


thickness of the arms - just over 2 “ thick


weight capacity - 600 pounds


More info and frequently asked questions


Clearance



Measured from the floor the clearance is about 18 “.



Minimum sagging



The mesh wire distributes weight very well, and combined with the steel bar that runs across the middle it makes for a very stable surface.



Warranty



The company warrants for the frame to be without any defects on arrival, both in workmanship and the materials. This extends to one year from date of purchase and it’s limited to the defective parts.



Make sure to closely follow the instructions because you can void the warranty by not assembling it properly.



To claim the warranty, keep the receipt. If you buy online, you can always print out a confirmation of purchase.



DHP Aiden metal futon frame





construction - silver or black metal frame


size and weight - 30 x 77 x 29 “, 43.5 pounds


Assembly



It comes with instruction manual and classic screwdrivers will be enough to do the job of the assembly - it can be done without using power tools.

We feel like it’s worth mentioning that the assembly is a bit more complicated than with wooden frames and takes more diligence.



Mattress fit



This is a full-sized metal futon frame and your choice of a mattress should be adjusted to that – any other size, apart from the full, will not work.



Arms



We mentioned above that the arms measure approximately 2 “ in diameter and come included.



We’ve seen a few questions about it in our inbox and we believe that the source of the confusion is the fact that there is a similar version of the frame from the same company (Dorel Home Products) that comes without the arms.



Once set up, the armrests cannot be reclined or removed without disassembling it.



Arden wooded futon frame - full and queen-size





Material - hardwood with finished decks and seat


finish - multilayer


positions - three angles of recline


warranty - five years


Full size - 75.5 x 23.5 “


Queen-size 80.5 x 36 “


Frequently asked questions and further information



Is the wood all-natural?



The Arden doesn’t include any manufactured wood – it’s hardwood top-to-bottom.



Weight capacity



As per the seller, the recommended maximum weight is approximately 250 pounds for one person. The frame can fit two people.



Clearance from the floor



In the flat position we measured the clearance between the floor and the base to be 10 “.



In couch mode, it will be somewhat lower in the areas when the frame has a certain give and bends slightly.



Shipping and assembly



The Arden comes in two separate boxes and is shipped within a few workdays (1 to 3, as per of the seller).

It’s a bit trickier to assemble than some of the above-mentioned models. We’d say that you’ll need two people to make sure that all the parts are properly aligned.



By closely following instructions, it should take about an hour for two people to fully set it up.



If you don’t want to move it when changing it from a couch to bed , we’d recommend placing it for 5 to 6 “ from the wall.



Switching between the bed and the couch position is easy, which is a huge plus for a wood futon frame.



DHP Aleesa metal futon frame





construction and finish - matte black metal


capacity - 600 pounds


size - 30 x 77 x 37 “


weight - 50 pounds


features metal slip-stops on the front end of the sitting area


What to do with if a part is missing on arrival?



Whether you buy it online or at a store, the re-sellers don’t carry individual parts and the manufacturer (DHP) has a toll-free number that you can call. They ship the missing part for free.



Safety



The mechanism includes hinges and springs so make sure to keep your fingers away from it while setting it up and down.



Reference information about choosing the best futon frame



Types of frames based on construction



Bi-fold


The most common type of futon frame is bi-fold.



With this type, you fold both the mechanism and mattress in half. For sleeping the frame folds flat using various types of mechanisms, from hinges and springs in metal frames to the simpler notches you see in wooden frames.



Loveseats and lounges


If you’re working with a limited space, a loveseat-sized futon frame might be right for you. It comes in all the same size as other frame types (Twin, Full and Queen).



It’s the most versatile type, because apart from of bed and sofa/chair, it can be used as a lounger.



To do that, you use a pullout deck.



Tri-fold


In some ways, a tri-fold is similar to a loveseat with the main difference being the two is this - the later uses a separate section to elevate the legs, while the tri-fold is a connected construction of three pieces.

To make the most of a tri-fold frame, it’s best to pair it with a thinner mattress.



Types of frames based on material



Wood futon frames



For indoor use or classic porches most people go with the wood futon frame. What our research and stats tell us is that majority of owners find it to be more stylish.



They can come finished or as raw wood, which is a less common version. You would go with an unfinished surface if you’re not sure about what color will work best with the style of your home.



There’s no upholstery included, so it’s very important that there are no notches or similar imperfection because this can damage the mattress.



The type of wood used will determine the price range. Generally speaking, softer wood will be less expensive, while hardwoods will come with a higher price tag.



You might find that many companies don’t specifically list the type of wood used for the frames, so let us get into that for a minute.



If it’s pine, it’s safe to assume it’s a Southern Yellow, which belongs in the harder and heavier spectrum among the pine types.



Southern yellow is superior to other pine types in terms of the stress it can take when used for furniture. Other sub-types can prove too brittle to withstand prolonged use.



The best futon frames in this category feature metal plates as connections between the parts.



Generally speaking, metal screws applied directly into a wooden structure can cause a structural issue by stripping the joints over time.



The bottom line is - when choosing a wood futon frame make a note of the exact type of wood and go with hardwood (if within your budget) and models that feature metal-on-metal connects for the major joints.



Softwood frames



Apart from being less expensive a frame made of softer wood variety will give you a chance to go for a customized look by painting or staining. You can even use specific colors to give the frame a more luxurious look.



Hardwood frames



We already mentioned that hardwood is superior in terms of durability and looks - the colors are richer and look more natural. The downside of hardwood is that it tends to be more expensive.



The overlap



The terms “hard” and “soft” are relative and should not be taken at face value.



Most companies won’t engage in this kind of wordplay, but there is more to separating the two types than just the hardness of the end-product.



Let’s explain that with an example - Ochroma Lagopus also known as Bolsa (the origin of the word is Spanish and it means raft) is most widely spread in Ecuador which has the ideal climate for it.



What’s interesting about this type of wood is that it belongs to the hardwood in classification but it’s actually pretty soft and light, which goes back to our point that if you see hardwoods listed as the material, just make sure that it’s actually made of superior wood types.



A few words about specific wood types



Oak


Oak is high-quality wood and used to make durable furniture. It’s heavy and hard and comes in two varieties - Red and White.



Red oak is the more popular choice in the furniture industry.



You can recognize it by its extended rings in the finished piece of furniture. If you get an unfinished, raw oak frame, you can easily customize it by staining.



Maple


On the hardness scale, maple belongs in the medium-to-hard range. The unfinished look of maple is very light (color).



If you do get an unfinished maple frame, bear in mind that it’s very stain-friendly and can be coated to look similar to cherry or other high-end wood.



Mahogany


The higher price tag of Mahogany is not just about how rare it is – it also has superior properties in terms of being resistant to shrinkage and shape-changes over time.



Not prone to decay, it’s as close as it comes to perfect wood for furniture.



That’s why you’ll see vintage, aged pieces of mahogany in a luxury furniture stores.



A mahogany futon frame will be a rarity because of the price, but you can occasionally find one with a mahogany finish.



Metal futon frames



Metal futon frames are usually more affordable but most people don’t find them as appealing to the eye is wood. That’s why this type is frequently used for porches and outdoors.



Comfort of metal futon frames



The metal bars or mesh wire used are generally less comfortable than wooden slats. The best futon frames of this type will be made of stainless steel with a matte or glossy finish.

Hybrids between metal and wood



We would say that this is a sub-type of the metal frame because it’s made with a metal base and wooden armrests.



It’s common sense that the comfort of this combo will be similar to that of a metal frame but, since the base is covered by the mattress and the wooden arms will give it a touch of style.



Classification by size



The six sizes of futon frames available out there are Full and Queen sofa, loveseat, Twin, Single and Chair.



Twin size futon frame



Twin size futon frames come in two styles – as chair or a lounger.



The chair is not intended for sleep since it doesn’t include the extended ottoman rest for the legs.



Full size futon frame



Typically, the length of full-size will be 75 “ or higher. If you measure the outer dimensions, they will vary depending on the specific design.



Loveseat size



Loveseat is approximately 20 “ shorter than a full-sized frame but, if it can be extended into a lounger, you can still use it for sleeping.



This type of loveseats is also known as a “pullout.”



Queen futon frame



Queen futon frames are usually 80 “ long to accommodate the Queen mattress and the total size depends on the add-ons like armrests.



Queen-size futon frame only (without the additions like arms and tables) will measure 78 to 81 “ (length).



King-size futon frame



King-size futon frames are not available as dedicated products for futons and the option you have is getting a king-sized foundation and pairing it with your mattress.



The king-size frames for futons are available as platform wood or metal foundations.



Alternatively, you can always improvise make a king-sized frame of your own design by placing wooden slats onto a queen-size foundation.



Japanese futon frame



A Japanese futon frame isn’t really a frame in the literal meaning of the word, but it’s sometimes used to describe the Japanese futons that include sturdier edges.



Traditionally, a Japanese futon is used by placing it directly on the floor and if you want to use his use it with a frame you’ll need a flat surface



You can improvise by putting a thin layer of plywood onto the frame.



Where to buy a futon frame



Because of their versatility futons have seen an increase in popularity in the last decade, and the pieces are now more widely available.



You can find them in stores like IKEA, Target or Walmart.



Walmart futon frames



Walmart carries a wide range of futon brands. You can see the Walmart futon frames by navigating to their sites and doing a search.



IKEA futon frames



The search results on the IKEA website return a somewhat different range of offers than those available at Walmart, Target or on Amazon.



Summary and updates



Our listing of best futon frames is updated twice a year unless we see some red light in terms of user satisfaction with particular frames. In this case, we update the guide to reflect the change we’ve seen.



Over the 6 months between the updates, we gather all the new information and data we can to make our ratings more accurate.



If you feel like we’ve missed something in this guide, feel free to contact us directly or comment below – we’ll respond within 24 hours.



The following post Best futon frame – by type (wood, metal) & size (Twin, Full, Queen & King) See more on: https://www.thesleepstudies.com







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/futon-frame/

Best futon mattress – based on statistical analysis of 4,200+ reviews – 2017 update

The Top 5 picks among futon mattresses you'll see below are a result of over 7000 work-hours, in-house testing, and statistical analysis of over 4,200 user reviews.



We initially put together this guide towards the end of 2015, and it's seen about 2 dozen updates since.









Without much ado let’s get to the results.



Best futon mattress - Top 5 compared





DHP Premium


Serta Cypress innerspring


Serta Chestnut


Home Life Premium


Signature Sleep Essential


DHP premium 8 inch futon mattress



Product details



Dimensions 58.5×12×12 inches



Weight of the mattress -approximately 70 pounds



Material of the core -coils,, independently encased



Thickness 15 gauge



Materials of the filing foam and poly-fiber



Materials the finish -microfiber



Frequently asked questions about the DHP 8-inch



The specifics of the foam



The foam used here is free of any potentially harmful chemicals -Polybrominated Biphenyl Ethers (PBDE), TDCPP (1,3-dichloro-2-propyl) phosphate, which is a known flame retardant, and TCEP (tris(2-carboxyethyl)phosphine).



The manufacturing also includes no ozone-depleting agents, lead, mercury or traces of heavy metals.



Emissions and off gassing



This DHP has a very low admission level of volatile organic compounds (under 0.5 parts per tri-million, which is some standards set by the CentriPut-US).



Foam filling used for the DHP meets standards of flammability set by CPSC (Consumer Product Safety Commission) in their laboratory test manual for flammability as per the last update.



Is it washable?



It doesn’t include an additional cover and arrives as you see it in the images. To protect the mattress you probably need some set some sort of fitted cover that you can machine wash.



Is it comfortable for heavy people?



It’s pretty firm, so you will not see a lot of sinking, but the foam is thick enough -to the point that you don’t feel the coils if even if you’re in the heavier side or arresting sleeper.



With that said, heavy person who’s a sidesleeper and prefers a loftier, soft surface might not find it uncomfortable for long term sleep.



The bottom line is that it is not as comfortable as a regular mattress, especially goes for a heavy person. If you’re looking for something truly comfortable you can see our guide best mattresses for heavy people here.



What kind of frame to use?



We would recommend a metal frame with a minimal incline for the backrest.



It’s an innerspring mattress and, as you can see in the product specs, is pretty heavy and works best with the metal frame.



The most important part about this is that this type of frame will keep that safety in place.



An important consideration here is choosing a frame with slide-guards (these are usually placed on the front of the frame).



Is it comfortable used as a bed?



Among the products we looked at, this DHP is the closest as it gets to the comfort of a regular mattress - 91% of people, according to our stats, described it as comfortable when used for sleeping.



Choosing the cover



The cover that comes with DHP is part of the mattress but company makes covers for specific sizes. With that said, if you don’t want to spend any more money, pretty much any cover that fits the height of the mattress will do.



Another option that will work well are deep-pocketed fitted sheets.



If you go with the later, we would recommend going a size up and getting a Queen cover. This will give you the versatility to use a topper or a pad if you want to make it more comfortable.



The versions available



Apart from the 8 “ that were talking about here, there is also a thinner model (a 6-inch).



For most people the 6-inch version will be the better choice if the futon is used as a couch most of the time, simply because it’s easier to fold up.



But people who will be frequently using it as a bed will find the 8-inch model more comfortable.



Arrival and boxing



As most mattresses these days, it’s sealed in a plastic bag to make it more compact for shipping.



It’s only expands when you open the bag.



We would recommend being careful when cutting the plastic so that you don’t cause any damage to the mattress.



Once opened and expanded, in becomes pretty firm and sturdy so the answer to the one of the more commonly asked questions (which is whether you can fold it up and store it) is probably a “no.”



What colors can you choose from?



It comes in seven colors: tan, cobalt, merlot red, chocolate brown, charcoal and black.



If you want more color options you can always get an extra cover.



The loook without the cover?



It looks pretty stylish so even if you don’t get an extra throw for it, the mattress itself paired with a good frame is still pleasing to the eye and will work with most spaces.



Can it sleep two people?



The answer to that depends on your weight and size -for 2 people of average build we would say yes.



For those on the heavier side (over 400 pounds combined) it still might be good to sleep on, but we don’t have enough data to judge whether it will retain shape under this weight in the long run.



Can be used without a frame?



Some models are designed to be “broken” into three parts so that they can be placed in the floor with the lower two parts used for sitting and the top third used for your back.



In this case we don’t think that’s an option, becauseit’s an innerspring mattress designed with comfort in mind (over versatility).



Weight limit



We have seen no listed weight limit with this DHP. But, based on our experience and analysis of the materials we would say that you’d see no problems with the structural integrity in the weight range of up to 400 pounds.



In terms of sleep, yes, it can be used without a frame by placing it directly on the floor.



Is it waterproof?



The finish is microfiber so if you spill something on it you would have to react quickly and remove the liquid -to make it water resistant we would recommend getting an extra waterproof cover to protect it.



Is there a tie or some other type of fixture to keep it in place?



There is no fixture like added straps of fabric that you would tie to the frame, but based on our tests, it’s less prone to slipping towards bottom side compared to similar products.



With that said, if you do see the issue it might be smart to use a linen on the frame -this will further minimize the chances of slipping.



The simplest way to make sure that it stays in place is to use it with a frame made by the same company -a good example of that the DHP Aiden metal frame.



We’d go as far as saying that this is the perfect frame for this DHP -it comes in brown or silver, which complement the colors.



More importantly, it features two metal plates at the bottom that will prevent any slipping.



Is it resistant to cats and dogs?



Having in mind that the finish material is microfiber we wouldn’t describe it as resistant to pets and you’ll probably need extra protection. If you’re looking for a cat-proof couch you can see our full guide here.



Maximizing the lifespan



Since the bottom and the top are identical, it’s adviceable to flip it occasionally to minimize the wear and prolong its lifespan.



Runner up - Serta Cypress Innerspring futon mattress



Details



Materials of the core -the core and innerspring, 288 Bonneill coils



Finish -the coils are wrapped in foam and fiber, and then tufted using lace



Dimensions and weight of the Queen -80 x 60 x 8 “ / 68.7 pounds



Full-sized -75 x 53 x 8 “ / 114 pounds



Size of the package on-arrival



The Serta Cypress arrives in a box that’s about 6 x 2 x 2 “



FAQs



Firmness on our scale



Based on what we’ve seen and the measurements that we we’ve done after 1, 3 and 6 months of use we would give it a seven out of 10 on our firmness scale.



A bonus tip for improving support



Since this is a durable mattress and will probably be with you for a long time, it’s only common sense to take some extra measures to minimize potential structural issues.



Our tips here would be is adding a few slats beneath the bottom surface or, even better, using a piece of plywood between the base and the mattress.



Volatile organic compounds, off gassing



From all the products we looked at the Serta Cypress probably had the lowest initial odor and off-gassing is practically nonexistent.



Subjectively speaking, we would say that the Serta Cypress has the most natural “feel” from all the models we reviewed.



Compacting



The initial thickness is 8 inches but, like any innerspring model, it will slightly compact with prolonged use.



To lower the effects of material compacting, we would recommend both flipping and rotating it every now and then.



This will even out the wear and tear and increase longevity.



3rd best futon mattress -Serta Chestnut



As per our stats and tests the second best foot the mattress in the Serta Chestnut.



For most people the main advantage of Serta Chestnut will be the fact that it’s made in the USA.



On our scale of 1 to 10, one being extremely soft and then being extremely firm we would place this Serta at 7.



Details



Thickness -8 inches



Material of the core -foam



Colors available the Serta Chestnut comes in six colors -natural white, khaki, brown, gray, green and black.



Finish -the outer cover of the Serta Chestnut is 100% cotton batting



Dimensions for the twin -75×53×8 inches, the weight is approximately 47 pounds



Dimensions of the Queen -80×60×8 inches, waiting at 54 pounds



Frequently asked questions about Serta Chestnut



Off gassing



We have seen a slight odor that lasts about a few hours after opening the package and we wouldn’t say it’s a significant issue.



Simply air it out for an hour or two after un-boxing and the odor goes away.



Ideally, you would give it a day to fully “plump” and set.



Shape retention



According to our measurements and tests we’ve seen no significant sagging, which is common with models that are not innerspring-based.



Yet, the ratings in shape retention are lower than the top 2 best futon mattresses (the DHP and the Cypress).



Our current rating of the Serta Chestnut futon in the category of shape retention is 88 out of 100.



What kind of base to use?



Both metal and wooden frame will work, as long as they are bi-fold.



We would not recommend it for tri- fold frames. Although it is pretty soft and yields well when folded, it’s not soft enough for a tri-fold.



What you might see initially is a slight gap (between the armrests of the frame and the edges of the mattress).



As it sets in and expands, those gaps will be filled.



Used as a couch



Compared to other products, the Serta Chestnut is a bit thinner, which makes the folding easier.



With sub-par models, we often see “breakage” in the middle of the mattress (when folded up and down on daily basis) but we’ve seen no similar issues with this Serta.



Storage



As opposed to innerspring models, this Serta is easier to fold and pack for storage. You can even fold it into a role and use a vacuum plastic bag.



Is the cover removable removal and machine-washable?



No, the cover is fixed, it doesn’t feature any zippers so it can’t be removed or machine-washed.



Sliding



Since the coils are pretty sturdy and there’s many of them (close to 300), it will be more difficult to keep it in place when, especially while it’s new.



What might help is adding a sure-grip material to the top of the frame or going with the frame that features slip-stops.



Keep it in place gets easier after a few weeks or months (depending on how often you use it).



Support



It’s our opinion that the support could be improved a few extra slats on the base.



Home Life Premium futon mattress



Details



Core -15-gauge independently pocketed coils

Size - full

Weight - 60 pounds

Material of the core combination of poly-fiber and foam

Material of the cover - plush microfiber

Size of the packaging – 8 x 6 x 4 “



Signature sleep essential



Info sheet



Coils of the core -13.5 goat, 5 inches high



Material used for the top -foam, 1 inch thick



Finish guilt that the card fabric



Colors available -black-and-white



Sizes available -twin and for



Weight - the twin size weighs 64 pounds, while the full weighs 74 pounds



Both between and full-size our 6 inches thick



Safety - third-party certified by CentiPUR-US to be free of any harmful chemicals.



Honorary mention - Classic Brands Brown



This mattress fell short from being included in the top 5 by the thinnest of margins, so we felt it’s only fair to give it a place as an honorary mention.



It features a coil innerspring structure, with each of the coils being wrapped individually - this kind of inner design places it, in our opinion, in top 3 of the category of "best futon mattress for sleeping."



The finish is microfiber, and we feel like it’s sturdier and less stretchy than the microfiber we’ve seen used in sub-par products.



It’s the thickness of the material that makes it easier to clean and maintain.



The bottom line is that, in terms of quality it stands its ground compared to any of the above listed models.



The fact that the overall rating is slightly lower is mainly because of the fact that it’s the most expensive option of listed, so its rating in the category of value for money is 84/100.



Reference tips on choosing the best futon mattress



Adjusting the size



We don’t mean to sound cliché, but this one comes down to your purpose and needs.



Most common sizes are twin and full and not many companies make them in queen-size.



If you already own a frame



The most likely scenario if you’re a long-term user will be that the lifespan of the frame will be longer than that of the mattress



If you need a replacement you’re faced with a choice.



You can either keep the frame you own, if you’re satisfied with it, or you can start from scratch or choose both a new frame and mattress.



Feel of the cover



With most modern pieces, the cover that you made of cotton, microfiber or micro suede.



The products we looked at are not water-proof and if that’s a factor you’ll probably need to a water-resistant add-on.



The good news here is that this provides you with a chance to choose the colors and patterns that will tie-in with the color scheme and the style of the space.



Choosing the right thickness



In terms of style, wooden frame will look better with the more substantial, thicker mattress. On the other hand, metal frames are better paired with a lustrous mattress that’s not as tick.



Types of futon mattresses explained



Shape retention



This one is fairly subjective and we did mention that some of the coil-based models will hold shape very well, but you shouldn’t take that at face value.



Generally speaking, a one piece, foam-based products will be better in terms of shape retention.



Frequency of use



For a guest bed, one that will be used occasionally for weekend sleepovers, you might save a few bucks by getting a cheaper model.



These will usually be filled with cotton, which tends to compact and form lumps with frequent use, but will do just fine for a guest bed.



If the futon is one of the centerpieces and used daily as a sofa and nightly as a bed , we would recommend going with something better and more durable, like the DHP or the Serta Cypress.



Best futon mattress for sleeping



As you could see in the ratings, we think that the most comfortable and the best futon mattress for sleeping is the Serta Innerspring. It's at the sweet spot between the support of the Bonell coils and the plush layer of the foam, which is the most important factor for sleeping on a futon mattress.



The balance is just right to keep your spine aligned and that goes for most body types, since it has just enough "give" to make the pressure points in the shoulders and hips minimal.



For kids



The choice here will be easier and will not make a significant dent in your budget since you can go with lighter, less expensive mattresses.



The cheaper options here are wool or cotton-filled.



For wooden frames



Wooden frames are the most popular choice because they look more stylish than metal.



Hardwood



A frame made of hardwood like cherry, maple, hickory or oak will call for special considerations.



If you make the mistake of pairing them with a thin mattress you will likely end up feeling uncomfortable with the hard wooden slats “protruding”.



To make sure you don’t feel the hardwood compressing against your body while sleeping, go with the sturdier innerspring mattress that’s at least 7 inches thick.



Conclusions



Initially, it took about 5 months to put it to put this guide together.



From that point on, we made sure to stay on top of things by updating it with new relevant information on quarterly basis.



We do it because the market is volatile and we see new arrivals practically every month, but it’s our policy to wait until the product has “aged” and we have enough information to go on.



If you have a specific situation we haven’t addressed above, feel free to use the comment sections to ask us anything - we reply to all comments within a day.



The following article Best futon mattress – based on statistical analysis of 4,200+ reviews – 2017 update is republished from The Sleep Studies By Bob Ozment







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/best-futon-mattress/

Types and common styles of futons – from a classic sofa to a comfy recliner

In today's guide we look at some of the basic facts about the futon.



People using the foot on today have one thing in mind the balance between saving some space and still getting a night of comfortable sleep. The origins of the Futon arose from that specific need in the first place they date back to ancient Japan, where big families needed a solution for their lifestyle which usually involved only one room.









The modern futon as we know it today started as humble mattress laid directly to the floor to save space.



It’s a piece of furniture with a storied history, so let us take a look at the the long travel from ancient Japan,to the a modern furniture pieces that found its way into the mainstream and modern home.



The basics – what’s a futon?



It's pretty comfortable sitting solution but it does not include springs (neither the mattress or the base) with makes which makes it a solid choice as temporary sleeping

Material of the futon mattress



Materials used to make a futon mattress range from high density memory foam to poly-fibre and cotton blends.



The futon frame



Your choice of a frame material will depend on interior design style that's dominating your home



Wooden frame this one will work best with the classic look of most spaces and some of these frames even allow for extra drawers, which is a nice plus in terms of storage space.

Bi-folding futon frames

The bi-fold frame is the most common one and it can be either wood or metal.



What we mean when we say bi-fold is that folds in half to transform a sofa into a mattress.



Love seat frame



The love seat frame is very different to the above-mentioned bi-fold and it's made to look much more like a real sofa

The foldable futon it smaller in size and designed to comfortable seat two people (hence the name “loveseat).



In terms of sleep it can (fairly comfortably) accommodate two kids or one adult.



Tri-fold frame



It's there in the name – the tri-fold futon frame is very similar to the bi-folds with the obvious difference being that it folds into three separate parts so that it can be used as comfortable lounger with slanted leg rests.

The tri-fold 3 is not as common as the other types we talked about.



Types of futon arms



Adjustable arms



This type of futon armrest allows the sidearm to be folded into a flat sleep position. It's a nice space saver.



Is it a smart way to make most of the space you have and it's a nifty solution for small city apartments.



Design styles



Classic



The classic style we see in most furniture pieces available today is pretty similar to a sofa.



It consists of a metal base mounted on either a wooden or metal frame.



Lounging futons



Opposed to the classic look of a futon, a lounger futon is a piece of furniture resembling the loungers that one commonly sees psychiatrists and psychologists offices.



The initial setup already looks much like a sofa bed and doesn't require any folding or setting up. To be used for sleep, you just throw a blanket or a cover and you got yourself a comfortable surface for those long cold November afternoons.



Bunk bed futon



Commonly seen in dorms and shared sleeping areas bunk beds with futon feature a metal base and are usually twin size.



The bottom is a futon sofa that reclines into a flat position while the top of is a classic mattress. It's also the most commonly used design for classic kids futons.



Modern arm-less style



The minimal lines of this futon style make it work best with modern spaces.



The mechanism is pretty simple, the back seat features hinges that simply fold back into a flat position and pop back up, usually using a lever.



Futon frame for the outdoors



Commonly used for porches or backyards, these the frames are usually designed to be a bit smaller but can also recline into a flat position.



The cover off the mattress used with this frame is often water-resistant to fit the needs of outdoor use.



The future of the Futon



Most people living in large cities and know that the issue of limited space is a real calm problem. With that in mind it seems that the popularity of the futon can only increase.



The race in the industry today comes down to new ways to save space while keeping the futon comfortable.



It goes without saying that there will always be room for sub-par products on the market which was the initial spark for starting this guide in the first place



We do our best to stay on top of the futon industry and track any quality changes so that we can report back in our main guide on best futons which you can see here and best futon mattresses which you can see here.



What to look for when choosing a futon?



Make sure that it comes from a reputable company that's time tested and trusted by owners



A good way to do this is to do your research before "pulling the trigger" and reading the experiences of the existing owners in similar living circumstances to your own.



If chosen right, a futon will be a nice versatile addition to your apartment and probably one of the most useful furniture pieces you'll ever get



As the years go by and the quality standards increase the futon will become increasingly closer to the comfort of standard sofa combined with the comfort of a classic mattress



Top futon brands



Well compiling this guide on the types and styles of a futon sofa, a few brands kept popping up as the most well-trusted. We list them below:





Divano Roma


DHP


Best choice product


MainStay


Pearington


Epic furnishing


OverRose


Zinus


Futon as a space-saver and portable bed



This chunk of the market is pretty competitive with the main “opponent” of a futon being inflatable sofas and foldaway beds.



The main advantage of the inflatable sofa over futon is the fact that it can be deflated and stored away into neat carry bag - you can see a guide on inflatable furniture and sofas here- https://thesleepstudies.com/best-inflatable-chairs-sofas/.



Final thoughts



A futon is a great piece of furniture when you're working with small spaces or entertain a lot of sleepover guests. It’s quickly becoming a mainstream piece of furniture, probably due to the change of our sleep habits, with apartments becoming increasingly smaller, especially in large cities.



The companies making the futons keep coming up with new ways to save space and make their products more comfortable.



The article Types and common styles of futons – from a classic sofa to a comfy recliner Read more on: thesleepstudies







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/types-of-futons/

Best futon – 10 top-rated picks – 2017 update

[et_pb_section fb_built="1" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" fullwidth="on" admin_label="Section" custom_padding_last_edited="on|desktop"][et_pb_fullwidth_post_title featured_image="off" text_color="light" text_background="on" text_bg_color="#354e88" module_bg_color="#354e88" admin_label="Fullwidth Post Title" module_id="top" title_font_size="40px" title_font_size_tablet="30px" title_font_size_phone="20px" title_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" title_text_color="#ffffff" title_line_height="1.5em" meta_font_size="16" meta_text_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="20px|||"][/et_pb_fullwidth_post_title][/et_pb_section][et_pb_section fb_built="1" custom_padding="8px|0px|0px|0px" specialty="on" admin_label="Section"][et_pb_column type="3_4" specialty_columns="3"][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="30px||14px|" custom_padding_tablet="||20px|" custom_padding_phone="||10px|" padding_top_2="20px" admin_label="Row" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="10px|||30px" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"]



[dropcap]I[/dropcap]t took about 9 months to put together this guide, and for a good reason. Choosing the best futon was beyond our expertise so we had to bring a few expert consultant to help us with the task.



We had to help of five furniture the refurbishment expert who made the initial 32 choices. We'd like to use this opportunity to thank them.



After narrowing down the list, we proceeded to do the statistical analysis of the user experiences and satisfaction with the futons. You can see the results of the whole process below.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" padding_top="20px" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/pearington-futon-brown.jpg" alt="pearington futon brown - the top rated and voted best futon of the update" title_text="pearington futon brown " animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image" custom_margin="30px|||"][/et_pb_image][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px||8px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text"]



Best futon - comparison of 10 top-rated



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="9px||30px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" module_id="comparison-top-rated-table" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text"] [table id=39 /] [/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="20px||0px|" custom_padding_tablet="5px||5px|" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" admin_label="row_inner" module_id="top-rated" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" module_id="top-couch" background_color="#333333" custom_padding="||15px|30px" custom_padding_tablet="|||50px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"]



Best futon overall

Pearington pillow-top lounger



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="16px|0px|50px|10px" custom_padding_tablet="5px||0px|" padding_top_2="10px" padding_left_2="30px" admin_label="Row" custom_padding_last_edited="on|desktop"][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="20px|||20px"]



This futon hits the sweet spot between comfort, style and functionality.



What makes it different above anything else is the quality, density and thickness of the foam used for the cushions.



In sofa mode it’s unparalleled in terms of comfort.



On the other hand, the design with the slightly raised edges is not usually optimal for sleep. But, when in a flat position, the thickness and loft of the foam turn it into a flat sleeping surface.



It comes in black, brown and gray.



Style: modern.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" padding_left="30px" padding_top="10px" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_counters bar_bg_color="#494949" admin_label="Bar Counters" title_font_size="16px" title_text_color="#2d2d2d" title_line_height="1.6em" percent_font_size="14px" percent_line_height="1.6em"][et_pb_counter percent="94" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Comfort as sofa [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="92" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Comfort as bed [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="92" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Build quality [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="91" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] User satisfaction [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="90" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Value for money [/et_pb_counter][/et_pb_counters][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="28px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/pearington-flat-futon.jpg" alt="pearington flat futon" title_text="pearington flat futon" animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image"][/et_pb_image][et_pb_accordion closed_toggle_background_color="#ffffff" admin_label="Accordion" toggle_font="Open Sans Light||||" toggle_font_size="17px" toggle_line_height="0.5em" body_font_size="17px" body_line_height="1.5em" use_border_color="on" custom_padding="0px||0px|"][et_pb_accordion_item title="blank" open="on" custom_css_main_element="display: none;"][/et_pb_accordion_item][et_pb_accordion_item title="More info - click to expand" open_toggle_text_color="#333333" closed_toggle_text_color="#00a1c1" open="off"]



Material



The upholstery is a bonded leather and the cushions of the pillow top are foam (high density)



This lounger is a bit heavier than the other products we looked at and it weighs approximately 100 punds



Dimensions - 70.9 x 37.8 x 37.34.7 inch



besides being the top-rated overall, we feel it's accurate to say that this is one of the most comfortable futons among the products we looked at. In our comfort ratings it received a high 93 out of 100.



[/et_pb_accordion_item][/et_pb_accordion][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="20px||0px|" custom_padding_tablet="5px||5px|" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" admin_label="row_inner" module_id="top-value" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" module_id="cheap-under-200" background_color="#333333" custom_padding="||15px|30px" custom_padding_tablet="|||50px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"]



Best futon in "value for money"

DHP Emily



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="16px|0px|50px|10px" custom_padding_tablet="5px||0px|" padding_top_2="10px" padding_left_2="30px" admin_label="Row" custom_padding_last_edited="on|desktop"][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="20px|30px||30px"]



This is by far the most popular futon sofa. It has more user reviews with online retailers like Amazon than all the other listed models combined.



The most probable reason for that is the price. It costs much less than a vast majority of the units we reviewed and it has no real competition in its price range.



It comes as convertible couch, chair or a chaise lounger. The colors available are: black, gray, vanilla and navy blue.



Style: modern, contemporary.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" padding_left="30px" padding_top="10px" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_counters bar_bg_color="#494949" admin_label="Bar Counters" title_font_size="16px" title_text_color="#2d2d2d" title_line_height="1.6em" percent_font_size="14px" percent_line_height="1.6em"][et_pb_counter percent="90" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Comfort as sofa [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="88" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Comfort as bed [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="89" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Build quality [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="90" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] User satisfaction [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="90" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Value for money [/et_pb_counter][/et_pb_counters][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="28px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/dhp-emily-gray-futon.jpg" alt="dhp emily gray futon" title_text="dhp emily gray futon" animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image"][/et_pb_image][et_pb_accordion closed_toggle_background_color="#ffffff" admin_label="Accordion" toggle_font="Open Sans Light||||" toggle_font_size="17px" toggle_line_height="0.5em" body_font_size="17px" body_line_height="1.5em" use_border_color="on" custom_padding="0px||0px|"][et_pb_accordion_item title="blank" open="on" custom_css_main_element="display: none;"][/et_pb_accordion_item][et_pb_accordion_item title="More info - click to expand" open_toggle_text_color="#333333" closed_toggle_text_color="#00a1c1" open="off"]



Product details





Maximum weight listed 600


Color – gray


Available types – sofa bed and chaise lounge


Assembly – from what we’ve seen in the experience of owners the Emily DHP is pretty easy to assemble and we typically takes less than 3 hours. Most new owners choose to assemble this off on their own with the most likely reason being the fact that expert assembly costs more than the product itself.



Warranty – like all the HP products this sofa comes with a one-year limited warranty, starting from the purchase date



Dimensions





When full extended its around 70 inches long


With the chair (backseat) up it’s about 60 inches


The height of the seat is 15 in


The height of the back-rest is 32 “


Width – approximately 30 “


Main advantages:



It's fair to say that this is the best cheap futon bed. Compared to the other models on this list it's inexpensive and costs under 200 dollars.



[/et_pb_accordion_item][/et_pb_accordion][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="20px||0px|" custom_padding_tablet="5px||5px|" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" admin_label="row_inner" module_id="everyday-sleeping" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" module_id="top-bed-for-sleeping" background_color="#333333" custom_padding="||15px|30px" custom_padding_tablet="|||50px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"]



Best futon for sleeping

DHP Allegra Pillow-Top



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="16px|0px|50px|10px" custom_padding_tablet="5px||0px|" padding_top_2="10px" padding_left_2="30px" admin_label="Row" custom_padding_last_edited="on|desktop"][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="20px|30px||30px"]



The Allegra pillow-top is our pick as the best futon for sleeping.



The comfort level is similar to that of the top-rated Pearington.



What gives it a slight edge in terms of sleep is the fact that it’s completely flat, while the sides of the aforementioned Pearington are slightly raised.



Design: classic, minimal.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" padding_left="30px" padding_top="10px" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_counters bar_bg_color="#494949" admin_label="Bar Counters" title_font_size="16px" title_text_color="#2d2d2d" title_line_height="1.6em" percent_font_size="14px" percent_line_height="1.6em"][et_pb_counter percent="91" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Comfort as sofa [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="92" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Comfort as bed [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="88" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Build quality [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="89" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] User satisfaction [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="90" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Value for money [/et_pb_counter][/et_pb_counters][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="28px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/dhp-allegra-back-futon-bed.jpg" alt="dhp allegra back futon bed" title_text="dhp allegra back futon bed" animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image"][/et_pb_image][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="62px||0px|" custom_padding_tablet="5px||5px|" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" admin_label="row_inner" module_id="top-rated" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" module_id="japanese" background_color="#333333" custom_padding="||15px|30px" custom_padding_tablet="|||50px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"]



Best Japanese futon

Emoor Original



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="16px|0px|50px|10px" custom_padding_tablet="5px||0px|" padding_top_2="10px" padding_left_2="30px" admin_label="Row" custom_padding_last_edited="on|desktop"][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="20px|30px||30px"]



If you are looking for an authentic Japanese floor futon, the Emoor Original has no real competition.



When we say that we’re primarily referring to the quality of the filling, versatility and, above all, authenticity.



It’s the only product that’s actually made in Japan from authentic materials.



On top of that, it’s the only product that offers the range of size choices (available in 7 sizes).



Style: traditional Japanese.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" padding_left="30px" padding_top="10px" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_counters bar_bg_color="#494949" admin_label="Bar Counters" title_font_size="16px" title_text_color="#333333" title_line_height="1.6em" percent_font_size="14px" percent_line_height="1.6em"][et_pb_counter percent="90" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Comfort [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="94" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Filling quality [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="92" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Finish quality [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="90" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] User satisfaction [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="90" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Value for money [/et_pb_counter][/et_pb_counters][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="28px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/emoor-japanese-futon.jpg" alt="emoor japanese futon" title_text="emoor japanese futon" animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image"][/et_pb_image][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="20px||0px|" custom_padding_tablet="5px||5px|" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" admin_label="row_inner" module_id="divano-roma" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" module_id="top-pick" background_color="#333333" custom_padding="||15px|30px" custom_padding_tablet="|||50px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"]



Divano Roma contemporary



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="20px|0px|50px|10px" custom_padding_tablet="5px||0px|" padding_top_2="10px" padding_left_2="30px" admin_label="Row" custom_padding_last_edited="on|desktop"][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="20px|30px||30px"]



Divano Roma is one of the most well-trusted name sin the industry of sofas and futons.



What separates this eye-candy from the crowd are the vivid color choices and the lofty, tufted linen.



Apart from the basic black, light and dark gray it comes in vivid turquoise, orange and light purple.



Style: modern.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" padding_left="30px" padding_top="10px" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_counters bar_bg_color="#494949" admin_label="Bar Counters" title_font_size="16px" title_text_color="#2d2d2d" title_line_height="1.6em" percent_font_size="14px" percent_line_height="1.6em"][et_pb_counter percent="90" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Comfort as sofa [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="91" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Comfort as bed [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="87" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Build quality [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="88" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] User satisfaction [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="89" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Value for money [/et_pb_counter][/et_pb_counters][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="28px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/divano-roma-split-back.jpg" alt="divano roma split back" title_text="divano roma split back" animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image"][/et_pb_image][et_pb_accordion closed_toggle_background_color="#ffffff" admin_label="Accordion" toggle_font="Open Sans Light||||" toggle_font_size="17px" toggle_line_height="0.5em" body_font_size="17px" body_line_height="1.5em" use_border_color="on" custom_padding="0px||0px|"][et_pb_accordion_item title="blank" open="on" custom_css_main_element="display: none;"][/et_pb_accordion_item][et_pb_accordion_item title="More info - click to expand" open_toggle_text_color="#333333" closed_toggle_text_color="#00a1c1" open="off"]



Product details





In the upright position it measures 77 x 31 x 31 “


When flat – 70 x 40 inches


The cushion of the seat is 70 x 19 inches hig


Height of the seat – 18 “


[/et_pb_accordion_item][/et_pb_accordion][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="20px||0px|" custom_padding_tablet="5px||5px|" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" admin_label="row_inner" module_id="memory-foam" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" module_id="top-pick" background_color="#333333" custom_padding="||15px|30px" custom_padding_tablet="|||50px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"]



MainStay memory foam



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="20px|0px|50px|10px" custom_padding_tablet="5px||0px|" padding_top_2="10px" padding_left_2="30px" admin_label="Row" custom_padding_last_edited="on|desktop"][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="20px|30px||30px"]



This Mainstay would probably be in the top 3 if it wasn’t for the plastic legs.



It’s not a durability issue - the listed maximum capacity is no lower than that of the other units. In fact, at 600 lbs (as listed in the instruction manual), the capacity is higher than most of the other futons we reviewed.



But, it’s still plastic, and that brought down the “build quality” ratings down to 85.



Style: modern.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" padding_left="30px" padding_top="10px" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_counters bar_bg_color="#494949" admin_label="Bar Counters" title_font_size="16px" title_text_color="#2d2d2d" title_line_height="1.6em" percent_font_size="14px" percent_line_height="1.6em"][et_pb_counter percent="91" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Comfort as sofa [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="89" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Comfort as bed [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="85" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Build quality [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="87" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] User satisfaction [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="88" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Value for money [/et_pb_counter][/et_pb_counters][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="28px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/memory-foam-convertible-futon-by-mainstay.jpg" alt="memory foam convertible futon by mainstay" title_text="memory foam convertible futon by mainstay" animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image"][/et_pb_image][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_button button_url="https://thesleepstudies.com/mainstays-memory-foam-futon/" button_text="Click here for the full review of the Mainstays memory foam futon" button_alignment="center" background_color="#7EBEC5" custom_button="on" button_text_size="18px" button_icon="%%246%%" button_on_hover="off" button_icon_color="#333333" button_font="||||on" button_text_color="#0044cc" button_text_color_hover="#00c9e3"][/et_pb_button][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="54px||0px|" custom_padding_tablet="5px||5px|" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" admin_label="row_inner" module_id="novogratz-brittany" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" module_id="top-pick" background_color="#333333" custom_padding="||15px|30px" custom_padding_tablet="|||50px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"]



Novogratz Brittany



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="20px|0px|50px|10px" custom_padding_tablet="5px||0px|" padding_top_2="10px" padding_left_2="30px" admin_label="Row" custom_padding_last_edited="on|desktop"][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="20px|30px||30px"]



What lowered the ratings of the Novogratz Brittany are two facts:





It’s costly


It won’t work with all spaces because of the vintage design


If those two factors are not an issue in your scenario, this Novogratz is more than a solid choice.



It’s one of the top-rated futons in user satisfaction ratings.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" padding_left="30px" padding_top="10px" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_counters bar_bg_color="#494949" admin_label="Bar Counters" title_font_size="16px" title_text_color="#2d2d2d" title_line_height="1.6em" percent_font_size="14px" percent_line_height="1.6em"][et_pb_counter percent="90" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Comfort as sofa [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="89" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Comfort as bed [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="88" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Build quality [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="88" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] User satisfaction [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="84" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Value for money [/et_pb_counter][/et_pb_counters][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="49px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/novogratz-futon-bed-sleeping-position.jpg" alt="novogratz futon bed sleeping position" title_text="novogratz futon bed sleeping position" animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image"][/et_pb_image][et_pb_accordion closed_toggle_background_color="#ffffff" admin_label="Accordion" toggle_font="Open Sans Light||||" toggle_font_size="17px" toggle_line_height="0.5em" body_font_size="17px" body_line_height="1.5em" use_border_color="on" custom_padding="0px||0px|"][et_pb_accordion_item title="blank" open="on" custom_css_main_element="display: none;"][/et_pb_accordion_item][et_pb_accordion_item title="More info - click to expand" open_toggle_text_color="#333333" closed_toggle_text_color="#00a1c1" open="off"]



Body and legs of the futon



The legs are wooden and the upholstery is premium linen. It comes in 5 colors: green, blue, gray, pink and mustard. The legs are solid wood and oak-colored.



It’s very comfortable, mainly because with the fact that the back is soft and features a lofty ripped design.



The filling



The filling of the cushions is a mix of foam and polyester.



Weight and size



It measures 81 x 81.5 x 34.5 x 31.5 inches and it weighs approximately 84 lbs.



[/et_pb_accordion_item][/et_pb_accordion][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="20px||0px|" custom_padding_tablet="5px||5px|" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" admin_label="row_inner" module_id="7th-top-rated" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" module_id="top-pick" background_color="#333333" custom_padding="||15px|30px" custom_padding_tablet="|||50px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"]



DHP Paxson



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="20px|0px|50px|10px" custom_padding_tablet="5px||0px|" padding_top_2="10px" padding_left_2="30px" admin_label="Row" custom_padding_last_edited="on|desktop"][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="20px|30px||30px"]



In terms of design, the Paxson is similar to the Novogratz Brittany we mentioned above but the difference in comfort as both a futon and sofa is significant.



It will be the choice of people who prefer a firm sleeping surface.



If you like the minimal look of the Paxson but still want comfort, you’ll want to get a topper to use with it.



Style: classic.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" padding_left="30px" padding_top="10px" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_counters bar_bg_color="#494949" admin_label="Bar Counters" title_font_size="16px" title_text_color="#2d2d2d" title_line_height="1.6em" percent_font_size="14px" percent_line_height="1.6em"][et_pb_counter percent="87" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Comfort as sofa [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="87" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Comfort as bed [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="90" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Build quality [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="86" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] User satisfaction [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="87" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Value for money [/et_pb_counter][/et_pb_counters][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="49px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/dhp-paxson-convertible-reclined.jpg" alt="dhp paxson convertible reclined" title_text="dhp paxson convertible reclined" animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image"][/et_pb_image][et_pb_accordion closed_toggle_background_color="#ffffff" admin_label="Accordion" toggle_font="Open Sans Light||||" toggle_font_size="17px" toggle_line_height="0.5em" body_font_size="17px" body_line_height="1.5em" use_border_color="on" custom_padding="0px||0px|"][et_pb_accordion_item title="blank" open="on" custom_css_main_element="display: none;"][/et_pb_accordion_item][et_pb_accordion_item title="More info - click to expand" open_toggle_text_color="#333333" closed_toggle_text_color="#00a1c1" open="off"]



Product details



Weight capacity – this DHP is one of the few models that precisely list the weight capacity at 600 lbs



Size





When assembled the measurements of the couch are 78.5 times 32.5 times 32 in


When reclined the sleeping services of the mattress 44 x 23 x 78.5 “


Weight of the unit is approximately 86 punds


[/et_pb_accordion_item][/et_pb_accordion][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="20px||0px|" custom_padding_tablet="5px||5px|" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" admin_label="row_inner" module_id="for-college" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" module_id="top-pick" background_color="#333333" custom_padding="||15px|30px" custom_padding_tablet="|||50px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"]



Kodiak lounger



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="20px|0px|50px|10px" custom_padding_tablet="5px||0px|" padding_top_2="10px" padding_left_2="30px" admin_label="Row" custom_padding_last_edited="on|desktop"][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="20px|30px||30px"]



The look of this Kodiak lounger might be deceiving, because it looks pretty basic.



In reality, it’s one of the best futons in our quality ratings.



What brings down the overall rating is the price point – it’s the priciest item on the list.



With 25 colors to choose from (from classics like black and brown to intricate floral patterns) it might be the choice of people looking to add some pizzaz to their space and are willing to pay extra for it.



Style: classic.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" padding_left="30px" padding_top="10px" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_counters bar_bg_color="#494949" admin_label="Bar Counters" title_font_size="16px" title_text_color="#2d2d2d" title_line_height="1.6em" percent_font_size="14px" percent_line_height="1.6em"][et_pb_counter percent="87" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Comfort as sofa [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="87" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Comfort as bed [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="90" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Build quality [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="86" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] User satisfaction [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="87" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Value for money [/et_pb_counter][/et_pb_counters][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="49px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/kodiak-futon-beige-couch.jpg" alt="kodiak futon beige couch" title_text="kodiak futon beige couch" animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image"][/et_pb_image][et_pb_accordion closed_toggle_background_color="#ffffff" admin_label="Accordion" toggle_font="Open Sans Light||||" toggle_font_size="17px" toggle_line_height="0.5em" body_font_size="17px" body_line_height="1.5em" use_border_color="on" custom_padding="0px||0px|"][et_pb_accordion_item title="blank" open="on" custom_css_main_element="display: none;"][/et_pb_accordion_item][et_pb_accordion_item title="More info - click to expand" open_toggle_text_color="#333333" closed_toggle_text_color="#00a1c1" open="off"]



Positions & settings



This Kodiak can be set to 3 position: lounge, sit and sleep. It’s a solid choice for small apartment or a college dorm. It includes a tick comfortable mattress (about six inches thick).



The frame



The frame of the Kodiak is tick metal, powder-coated in black.



Size and weight details





Dimensions of the mattress 79 x 32 x 6 inches


Dimensions of the seat – 66 x 33 x 31 inches


The lounge position it measures 72 x 33 x 31 “


[/et_pb_accordion_item][/et_pb_accordion][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="20px||0px|" custom_padding_tablet="5px||5px|" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" admin_label="row_inner" module_id="dorm-college" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" module_id="top-pick" background_color="#333333" custom_padding="||15px|30px" custom_padding_tablet="|||50px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"]



Entertainment Futon

with cup holders



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="20px|0px|50px|10px" custom_padding_tablet="5px||0px|" padding_top_2="10px" padding_left_2="30px" admin_label="Row" custom_padding_last_edited="on|desktop"][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="20px|20px||20px"]



We’re not fans of the name of the company making this unit - “Best Choice products”.



But that’s only because it makes our job harder because our readers assume that it’s our opinion that they are “the best”. It’s confusing to say the least.



With that said, we like this sofa set for a very specific customer profile.



It will appeal to the younger crowd, makes a great addition for a dorm room or a “man-cave.”



Speaking on behalf of the male part of our team, it’s easy to picture a rainy afternoon of gaming on this entertainment unit.



Style: modern, entertainment.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" padding_left="30px" padding_top="10px" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_counters bar_bg_color="#494949" admin_label="Bar Counters" title_font_size="16px" title_text_color="#2d2d2d" title_line_height="1.6em" percent_font_size="14px" percent_line_height="1.6em"][et_pb_counter percent="84" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Comfort as sofa [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="82" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Comfort as bed [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="85" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Build quality [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="85" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] User satisfaction [/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="84" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#494949" use_percentages="on"] Value for money [/et_pb_counter][/et_pb_counters][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="49px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/modern-faux-leather-futon-sleeping-position.jpg" alt="modern faux leather futon sleeping position" title_text="modern faux leather futon sleeping position" animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image"][/et_pb_image][et_pb_accordion closed_toggle_background_color="#ffffff" admin_label="Accordion" toggle_font="Open Sans Light||||" toggle_font_size="17px" toggle_line_height="0.5em" body_font_size="17px" body_line_height="1.5em" use_border_color="on" custom_padding="0px||0px|"][et_pb_accordion_item title="blank" open="on" custom_css_main_element="display: none;"][/et_pb_accordion_item][et_pb_accordion_item title="More info - click to expand" open_toggle_text_color="#333333" closed_toggle_text_color="#00a1c1" open="off"]



Fact sheet:





The dimensions of the sofa are 30 x 66 x 3.5 inches


In a flat position it measures 38.5 x 66 x 13 inches


The maximum weight capacity is listed at 500 pounds


[/et_pb_accordion_item][/et_pb_accordion][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="100px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="20px|||" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" background_color="#666666" custom_padding="||10px|50px" custom_padding_tablet="|||65px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



Reference info



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="28px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/waltz-sofa-bed-futon-gray.jpg" alt="waltz sofa bed futon gray" title_text="waltz sofa bed futon gray" animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image"][/et_pb_image][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px||30px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text"]



What you need to know to choose the best futon couch / bed



Futons and couches are both a great choice for small spaces. Both can be used as day furniture to sit on and are easily converted to a bed when needed. Let's say, you’re living in a dorm, a small apartment or need extra sleeping space for your guests, friends or relatives but you’re short on spare rooms.



This type of furniture could very well be the answer to your problems. The dual function of these pieces means that they can be used in a playroom which can easily be transformed into a guest room at night. You could even use it in the office if you find yourself working long hours.



But how do you know which ones to choose? In the rest of the guide, you'll find out more about these types of sleepers and hopefully, it will make your choice less difficult to make.



Definition of a futon


A futon is a flexible, foldable mattress originating from Japan. Traditionally, it is placed onto tatami, a type of rice straw flooring, and set up as a regular bed with a pillow and a duvet. When not in used, it can be rolled up and stored or taken out to air and beaten to prevent the filling from forming into hard lumps.



The modern, Western-style models differ greatly from their Japanese counterparts and resemble more a low, wooden sofa bed. They correspond to the dimensions of western mattresses and are often set up on a slatted bench like frame which can be wooden or metal.



The frame folds down and converts into a bed. The thickness of the mattress varies from soft to very firm, so there is something for everybody to choose from.



Material of the mattress / filling


The mattresses are made from compressed layers of materials which range from organic cotton, latex, and wool.The layers are tufted into place to keep the batting secure and ensure the longevity of the mattress. With proper care and a regular turn over, a good futon can last you between 8 to 15 years.



Since they’re so light in weight, they make a great bed for small households as they can be easily moved around, folded and stored away when no longer in use. One drawback of this type of daybed is that it is not very comfy when folded upwards into a sofa position. Oftentimes they can feel lumpy and difficult to get up from. But don't let that discourage you, there are many more positives sides to owning one than negatives.



Budget-friendly


Even the best futons couches (beds) are very budget friendly (our top inexpensive pick costs under $200) and the mattress can be removed and replaced. They cost far less than a couch and are much easier to maintain. To keep it clean, you only need to remove the fabric cover and machine wash it. When it becomes worn out, it’s much easier and cheaper to replace than having to reupholster an entire couch or buy a new one.



To get the biggest bang for your buck, opt for a thicker mattress or consider adding a mattress topper. Most often, the thinner, cheaper ones end up being too uncomfortable to even sleep on, completely defeating the purpose of getting one of these.



How is it different from a couch?


Couch (also called a sofa bed) is a type of furniture that pulls out into a bed. Usually used as a daybed, it contains a folding mattress, partially hidden inside the bottom of the couch.



The foam of the mattress can be quite thin and soft since it is designed to fold and fit into to couch.



A sofa bed can easily pass under the radar and you won't even know from the appearance of it that it can transform into a bed. They come in many sizes and colors and can be the centerpiece of the room.



It is easy to find one that perfectly blends with room decorum and ties in with the rest of the furniture to create a stylish environment. Unlike the futon, which is more casual, there many different styles of sofa beds to chose from, both formal and informal.



Easy to set up


They take a little more effort to set up than their simpler counterpart, which can be a drawback if you’re elderly or not particularly strong. To transform it into a bed, remove the cushions and pull out the tri-folding metal frame that contains the mattress. Many couches have a strap in the middle which you can pull on to take the frame out. Once that is done, you can then proceed to set your bed as you see fit. When not in use, the mattress folds back into the storage area and once again turns back into a couch.



A couch can be a fine choice if you’re someone that doesn't have guests over too often or don't plan on using it as a regular bed. Keep in mind that a good couch can be quite high on the price point and eventually they all give out and become uncomfortable to use.



This is due to the nature of the mattress, which is not removable like the mattress of a futon bed. With regular use, the mattress will become worn out and many begin to sag and lose shape after being used too many time. Over time you’ll be able to feel the metal bars and hinges underneath.



Easy to move and clean


Unlike the futon which is light and easy to move around, clean and disinfect, the sofa bed likes to stay put. Its metal construction and mattress makes it bulky and difficult to move around and transport



But it’s not all so bad. Coaches make great center points of the room and a comfy place to lounge in and watch TV after a long day. Keep in mind when buying to spend a little extra to make sure the mattress quality is up to par and won't give out too soon.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="60px||60px|" admin_label="row_inner"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_button button_url="#top" button_text="Click here to go back to the top of the page" button_alignment="center" admin_label="Button" custom_button="on" button_text_color="#3B3E3E" button_bg_color="#FDA644" button_border_width="1px" button_border_radius="2px" button_use_icon="on" button_icon="%%177%%" button_icon_color="#3B3E3E" button_on_hover="off" button_text_color_hover="#2A2C2C" button_border_radius_hover="2px" background_color="#7EBEC5"][/et_pb_button][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="29.6875px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="20px|||" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" background_color="#666666" custom_padding="||10px|50px" custom_padding_tablet="|||65px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



Types of futon bodies, frames

and mattresses



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="57px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/futon-frame-wooden.jpg" alt="futon frame wooden" title_text="futon frame wooden" animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image"][/et_pb_image][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="22px||30px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text"]



Bi-fold


Bi-fold frames are made from two panels which create the whole body of the futon, the Sitting cushion, and the Backrest cushion. They fold into the sleeping position, lift up the sitting cushion of the futon.



Lounger


These are also known as the Space-saves and rightfully so, as they are the smallest of the frames. They come with an additional part for the legs that can be tucked away into the frame to maximise space. A twin-size Lounger is large enough for two people to use comfortably and takes up 45’’ inches of wall space.



Dropleaf


These are additional parts that can be included with the frame. A dropleaf frame has two side panels that serve as small side tables.



Foam


Fairly new on the market, the memory foam mattress is quickly becoming a popular choice among the people looking for something affordable but cozy at the same time. This is because they offer equally support and comfort no matter the sleeping position. Compared to other types, foam mattresses tend to last the longest.



Spring foam


Reasonably priced and durable, these mattresses use quilt covered coils to create firmness and stability. On the downside, they tend to be quite heavy and difficult to fold. If you’re someone that uses their futon every night, consider a more flexible option.



Wool


Quite rare, but oh so soft and luxurious. Since wool is excellent at retaining heat, a wool mattress is an ideal choice if you’re someone living in a colder climate or get very cold, long winters.



Cotton


Budget-friendly and perfect in almost every way possible. They’re lightweight, flexible and hold their shape without sagging. Keep in mind that they might not last as long as a memory foam mattress would and will wear down sooner.



Foam and polyester


Blended types of mattresses most often offer the better sidess of both world when it comes to comfort and budget. The top polyester layer makes the mattress firm and supportive and since there is no cotton used, the mattress is very lightweight and easy to maneuver.



Foam and cotton


The plus side of this blend is that makes the mattress more supportive and more durable than it’s plain cotton counterpart. But on the other hand, they’re not as cheap.



Innerspring


These closely resemble a traditional innerspring mattress. The innerspring coils offer extra padding as compared to other types of mattresses and absorb the pressure points of the body. This means restful and relaxed sleep and superb comfort.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="60px||60px|" admin_label="row_inner"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_button button_url="#top" button_text="Click here to go back to the top of the page" button_alignment="center" admin_label="Button" custom_button="on" button_text_color="#3B3E3E" button_bg_color="#FDA644" button_border_width="1px" button_border_radius="2px" button_use_icon="on" button_icon="%%177%%" button_icon_color="#3B3E3E" button_on_hover="off" button_text_color_hover="#2A2C2C" button_border_radius_hover="2px" background_color="#7EBEC5"][/et_pb_button][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="29.6875px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="20px|||" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" background_color="#666666" custom_padding="||10px|50px" custom_padding_tablet="|||65px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



Other considerations



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="30px||30px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text"]



Think about the purpose your daybed will need to fulfill. Will you need it often or just sporadically? How much space you do, or better yet, don't have?



Measure out the space available


This is the most important part and it will determine the shape and the dimensions. You will want enough space for the sleeper to be able to lay out completely flat without touching other furniture. You will also need extra space to walk around and be able to freely lay in and get up.



How often do you plan to use it?


Couches don't bode well when it comes to frequent use and will soon become uncomfortable to sleep on. The frequency of use will also determine your budget. If the bed won't be in use so much, consider a basic or a mid-range option.



Think about the material you would want your couch or futon to be


Wood and metal are two of the most common types of material used in furniture making. Keep in mind that futon covers are interchangeable and easy to clean while that’s unfortunately not the case with couches and you will be stuck with the choice that you’ve made.



Keep in mind your preferred sleeping position


While a side sleeper will choose something softer to sink their shoulders into, someone that sleeps on their back will prefer a firmer bed.



Couches come in a pullout variety and “click-clack” sofas. The dimensions of the pull-out sofa will also determine its style. Wider sofas will tend to have a shorter mattress, while smaller ones will be longer. The click-clack sofas are by far the easiest to operate. Think of more like a mattress with legs that can be folded up into a couch. The plus side of the “click-clack” coaches is that most often they will have storage space underneath intended for bedding and pillows.



The mechanism


Before buying either, make sure to check the mechanism and how easy or difficult they are to operate, set up, and change position. Inexpensive furniture may be light on the budget but it can also come with mechanisms that break easily and/or are difficult to use.



There isn't much to choose from regarding mattress quality or thickness when it comes to coaches. Generally, they’re all equipped with thin foam mattresses that fold easily and aren't expected to take a lot of wear. Futons, on the other hand, offer a wide variety of mattress styles and thickness as well as the materials used in the filling. Cotton filling tends to weigh less and will hold it’s shape nicely. For an even lighter mattress try going for a cotton-polyester blend. Not are they ultra light but also very flexible.



Cotton + wool


If you always wanted to know it’s like to sleep on a cloud, go for the cotton-wool blend but keep in mind they’re not as easy to fold. For an adult, consider a mattress that is a minimum of 6 inches in thickness.



Washable covers and cushions


Invest into washable covers and cushions - not only will they protect your furniture, but they’ll also add a fashionable touch to the room.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="20px|||" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" header_text_color="#333333" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="||10px|50px" custom_padding_tablet="|||65px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



Best futon couch



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="9px||30px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text"]



To choose the best futon couch (if your primary use is seating), you'll have to do a bit of math and adjust the choice to your weight and size.



Top picks among couches usually featured a tufted lofty filling with the proper support underneath.



If you have a sofa in your house right now or if you can think of one that fits your needs, it's smart to measure the height of the back-seat and the width of the seats.



Then, you compare that to the dimensions of the unit you have your eye on and can draw conclusions what the best couch among futons might be for your specific needs.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="20px|||" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" header_text_color="#333333" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="||10px|50px" custom_padding_tablet="|||65px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



Best futon bed for sleeping



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="9px||30px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text"]



Choosing the best futon bed for sleeping is a peg more complicated because there are more factors involved.



The best futon beds are usually filled with foam rather than poly-fiber or cotton, and have thick pillow-top cushions. In rare cases, they feature an innerspring mattress.



The pillow-top models allow for better weight distribution and eliminate potential pressure points. This is especially important if the sides are raised – in this scenario the cushioning of the bed will have to be thick enough to flatten the sleeping surface once fully reclined.



The obvious advice is not to go with units that feature fixed armrests and factor in your height. The later is crucial for back-sleepers – you don’t want your feed dangling from the bed.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="20px|||" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" header_text_color="#333333" background_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="||10px|50px" custom_padding_tablet="|||65px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



Japanese futons



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="9px||30px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text"]



The traditional Japanese futons are also known as shikibuton and they don't anything like our top pick (Emoor).



They are slim, stuffed with cotton and they are close to what you can imagine if you know anything about the Japanses culture of minimalism and simple living.



Unlike the Emoor, they are not a standalone. They're too thin for that. Instead, they are placed on a traditional Japanese mat called tatami.



To make the whole setting more comfortable, the Japanese usually cover them with duvets and pillows.



You can see our top picks among shikibutons here.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="60px||60px|" admin_label="row_inner"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_button button_url="#top" button_text="Click here to go back to the top of the page" button_alignment="center" admin_label="Button" custom_button="on" button_text_color="#3B3E3E" button_bg_color="#FDA644" button_border_width="1px" button_border_radius="2px" button_use_icon="on" button_icon="%%177%%" button_icon_color="#3B3E3E" button_on_hover="off" button_text_color_hover="#2A2C2C" button_border_radius_hover="2px" background_color="#7EBEC5"][/et_pb_button][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="29.6875px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="20px|||" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" background_color="#666666" custom_padding="||10px|50px" custom_padding_tablet="|||65px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



FAQs about the best futon couches & beds



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="30px||30px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text"]



About the Pearington lounger



How do you work the recline mechanism?



To recline it you first have to disengage the lock mechanism. Once you do that you simply drop it back into horizontal position.



Durability



The bonded leather is pretty durable and tightly stitched so we'd say that the lifespan of this recliner will be a higher than most models. What makes it special is the high density foam of the cushions. The likelihood of any structural issues is substantially lower compared to the poly-fiber and foam filling.



Is it good for heavy and tall people?



In our research we didn't see any potential issues for people on the heavier side but any person taller than 5.9 feet sleeping on it will probably have the issue of the legs going beyond the bottom base of the futon, is they are a back sleeper.



The feel of the leather



It's made of PU bonded leather which is not what you would call "real leather" and we wouldn't expect that in this price range. What makes a difference here is how well the PU leather is made. You probably wouldn't be able to tell the difference just by looking at it. It's also known fact that PU is more durable and easier to clean than natural leather.



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_text admin_label="Text"]



About the DHP Emily



Where is it on the firmness scale?



Respecting the fact that sleep preferences are highly personal, we think it’s fair to say that this is a supportive and firm piece of furniture. People used to soft surfaces like memory foam might find too firm.



Are there other materials and colors available?



DHP in grey linen is not only one product in the series. Others include colors like vanilla, white and black faux leather.



Surfaces of the sides and back



All the visible surfaces are grey while the back is matte black.



Size compared to a regular mattress



In the flat position the dimensions are somewhere between a twin and a full-size and closer to the later.



How good is it for sleeping?



If you like sleeping on a firm of surface this DHP will be just right. If you’re used to a softer surface (like memory foam) an add-on (topper or pad) might be a good idea?



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_text admin_label="Text"]



About the Divano Roma



How high is the top surface?



According to our measurements the legs are about 5.50 in high which makes the sloping surface sitting at approximately 7 inches



The company doesn’t precisely list the maximum capacity allowed but it is sturdy product and it’s rsd estimate that the maximum capacity is 500 to 600 lbs.



Are the legs interchangeable?



The legs can’t be replaced, if you want something higher you might think about looking into some of the others models on the list.



Materials of the back and bottom



The fabric used for the back and the bottom of this divine aroma is the same as those used for the top.



Assembly



It is shipped in in one box that’s pretty large, so if you leave with Louis an apartment that’s not on the floor first floor you might need two people to carry it up



Is it possible to use it in the travel trailer?



The door opening of trailers is usually in the range of 24-26 ” so the box that it comes in should have no problem going to the doors. Once inside, it’s pretty easy to assemble and doesn’t require much space.



Is the design split back?



By looking at the image you might get the impression that and the sides don’t recline but in fact both sides full recline into a flat position.



Sitting vs. sleeping



Cushions are pretty lofty, but most experiences we’ve from users tell the story of a sofa that’s better used for sitting than for long-term sleeping.



What about comfort?



Again the image of this piece of furniture can be deceptive because it looks pretty soft, but in reality it’s very firm and, for long-term sleep, you might need some sort of a topper to make it better for sleep. Throw pillows that come with it are Square in shape and measure about 12 x 12 “.



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_text admin_label="Text"]



About the Novogratz Britanny



Placement



For it to snugly fit against the wall (when in a flat position) you will need to place it around 1.5 feet from the wall surface (measured from the top or the back seat).



Thickness of the cushions



The cushions are lofty and are just under 5 inches thick.



Shipping



The company doesn’t offer expedited shipping services and it usually ships within 10 days of ordering.



A common issue – missing side-arms



We’ve seen reports from people saying that their box arrived without the sidearm. In reality, the issue is most commonly attributed to the fact that the seat cushion and sidearms are packed together. You’ll need to turn the cushions over, unzip them and take the side-arms out.



The weight limit



Like with most models on this list,the manufacturers don’t precisely list the maximum weight capacity, so we decided to contact them directly. their response was that the max capacity of the futon is 600 lbs.



Height of the seating area



Measured from the floor to the top surface of the cushion it’s about 8 inches high, which is a bit higher the most models on this list.



Thickness and durability of the legs



Although the legs might seem fragile the fact there that they are solid wood and the weight is distributed between 6 of them makes the frame durable, which goes back to the question about the weight limit (600 lbs).



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_text admin_label="Text"]



About the Paxson



How sturdy is it?



It’s designed for two sleepers so the wooden legs are pretty sturdy. One issue that we’ve seen people reporting is the risk of it tipping over if not pushed against a solid surface (wall).



Comfort



When it comes to sleep the user satisfaction rate was about 80% and we think it’s fair to describe it as one of the comfiest futons out there.



How well does it work for tall people?



Based on the measurements we would say that person taller than 6 feet might not be comfortable on it. It’s described as two-persons sleeper but we have to say that that description is accurate for two people of average height and weight.



When reclined it’s approximately the size of a full mattress which means that it’s peg smaller than some of the models we’ve seen on the list.



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_text admin_label="Text"]



About the Kodiak Lounger



Height



When measured from the floor the height of the frame is approximately 10 “, which means that (combined with the mattress) it’s about 15 to 16 inch high.



Material of the body is a blend of cotton and foam (80% cotton and 20% percent foam).



Colors available



The only futon on the list that comes in this kind of color range from plain grey & black to bolder patterns like zebra or a range of floral.



How good is it to sleep on?



Unlike the other futons we mentioned, the Kodiak is intended for one sleeper.



The maximum weight is not listed by the manufacturer but based on our experience and that of our expert consultants would say that the weight limit for the Kodiak is ~ 400 lbs.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="60px||60px|" admin_label="row_inner"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_button button_url="#top" button_text="Click here to go back to the top of the page" button_alignment="center" admin_label="Button" custom_button="on" button_text_color="#3B3E3E" button_bg_color="#FDA644" button_border_width="1px" button_border_radius="2px" button_use_icon="on" button_icon="%%177%%" button_icon_color="#3B3E3E" button_on_hover="off" button_text_color_hover="#2A2C2C" button_border_radius_hover="2px" background_color="#7EBEC5"][/et_pb_button][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][/et_pb_column][et_pb_column type="1_4"][et_pb_sidebar orientation="right" area="et_pb_widget_area_9" admin_label="Sidebar"][/et_pb_sidebar][/et_pb_column][/et_pb_section]



The post Best futon – 10 top-rated picks – 2017 update See more on: The Sleep Studies Research







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/best-futon/

heavy test

[et_pb_section fb_built="1" custom_padding_tablet="||0px|" custom_padding_phone="||0px|" fullwidth="on" admin_label="Section" custom_padding_last_edited="on|desktop"][et_pb_fullwidth_post_title date="off" comments="off" featured_image="off" text_color="light" text_background="on" text_bg_color="#354e88" module_bg_color="#354e88" admin_label="Fullwidth Post Title" module_id="top" title_font_size="40px" title_font_size_tablet="30px" title_font_size_phone="20px" title_font_size_last_edited="on|desktop" title_text_color="#ffffff" title_line_height="1.5em" meta_font_size="16" meta_text_color="#ffffff" custom_padding="20px|||"][/et_pb_fullwidth_post_title][/et_pb_section][et_pb_section fb_built="1" custom_padding="8px|0px|0px|0px" specialty="on" admin_label="Section"][et_pb_column type="3_4" specialty_columns="3"][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="30px||30px|" custom_padding_tablet="40px||0px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|30px||30px"]



It’s been just over 2 years since we set out to put together the most complete guide on choosing the best mattress for heavy people. The results you’re about to see are fruit of over 2,100 man-hours and statistical modeling based on over 17,000 user experiences. But enough about us, let’s choose you a mattress.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="6px||0px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||0px|" background_color_1="#4D4D4D" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" background_color="#4D4D4D" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="40px|40px|30px|40px"]



The recommendations are based on your weight and height. Fill in the two fields below, our algorithm will calculate your body composition (BMI) and choose a mattress for you.



Then click one of the red buttons below to meet your ideal mattress.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px||0px|" custom_padding_tablet="0px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text"]



[CP_CALCULATED_FIELDS id="7"]



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="40px|0px|40px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="20px||0px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="1_3" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" use_border_color="on" border_color="#ee3233" border_width="3px" custom_padding="20px|10px|20px|10px"]



My BMI is between 25 and 30



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_button button_url="https://thesleepstudies.com/best-mattress-for-heavy-people/#overweight" button_text="Show me my mattress" button_alignment="center" admin_label="Button" custom_button="on" button_text_size="25px" button_text_color="#ffffff" button_bg_color="#ee3233" button_border_width="0px" button_border_radius="0px" button_font="|on|||on" button_icon="%%246%%" button_icon_color="#ffffff" button_on_hover="off" button_text_color_hover="#ffffff" button_bg_color_hover="#0066cc" button_border_color_hover="#0066cc" button_border_radius_hover="0px" background_color="#7EBEC5"][/et_pb_button][/et_pb_column_inner][et_pb_column_inner type="1_3" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" use_border_color="on" border_color="#ee3233" border_width="3px" custom_padding="20px|10px|20px|10px"]



My BMI is between 30 and 40



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_button button_url="https://thesleepstudies.com/best-mattress-for-heavy-people/#overweight" button_text="Show me my mattress" button_alignment="center" admin_label="Button" custom_button="on" button_text_size="25px" button_text_color="#ffffff" button_bg_color="#ee3233" button_border_width="0px" button_border_radius="0px" button_font="|on|||on" button_icon="%%246%%" button_icon_color="#ffffff" button_on_hover="off" button_text_color_hover="#ffffff" button_bg_color_hover="#0066cc" button_border_color_hover="#0066cc" button_border_radius_hover="0px" background_color="#7EBEC5"][/et_pb_button][/et_pb_column_inner][et_pb_column_inner type="1_3" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" use_border_color="on" border_color="#ee3233" border_width="3px" custom_padding="35px|10px|40px|10px"]



My BMI is over 40



[/et_pb_text][et_pb_button button_url="https://thesleepstudies.com/best-mattress-for-heavy-people/#overweight" button_text="Show me my mattress" button_alignment="center" admin_label="Button" custom_button="on" button_text_size="25px" button_text_color="#ffffff" button_bg_color="#ee3233" button_border_width="0px" button_border_radius="0px" button_font="|on|||on" button_icon="%%246%%" button_icon_color="#ffffff" button_on_hover="off" button_text_color_hover="#ffffff" button_bg_color_hover="#0066cc" button_border_color_hover="#0066cc" button_border_radius_hover="0px" background_color="#7EBEC5"][/et_pb_button][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="30px||30px|" custom_padding_tablet="0px||0px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/Tuft-and-Needle-Mattress.jpg" alt="Tuft and Needle Mattress" title_text="Tuft and Needle Mattress" animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image" custom_margin_tablet="0px|||" custom_margin_last_edited="on|tablet"][/et_pb_image][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="7px||30px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding_tablet="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"]



Best mattress for heavy people - comparison



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="4px||30px|" custom_padding_tablet="0px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|desktop"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text"]



[table id=41 /]



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="30px||30px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text"]



Firmness


As a rule of thumb, for optimal comfort and minimal pressure points, the firmness range for heavy people will be somewhere between a medium and a medium firm (4 to 7 our scale).



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="28px|0px|29.6875px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/mattress-firmness-range-for-heavy-people-illustration.jpg" alt="an illustration that indicates the optiomal firmness - 4 to 7 out of 10" title_text="mattress firmness range for heavy people illustration" animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image"][/et_pb_image][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="68px||40px|" custom_padding_tablet="5px||0px|" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" admin_label="row_inner" module_id="obese" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" background_color="#333333" custom_padding="||15px|30px" custom_padding_tablet="|||50px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"]



Tuft & Needle



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px||50px|" padding_top_2="0px" admin_label="Row" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="0px|20px||20px"]



[dropcap]O[/dropcap]ur Goldilocks stamp in this category goes to Tuft & Needle.



When you spend as much time reviewing and testing mattresses as we have, you see it all – the bells and whistles companies tend to include in order their product sound better on paper. These can double or triple the price of a mattress.



That’s not the case with this Tuft & Needle – there are no pompous claims like zillion layers of foam and whatnot



Instead, the company took the time to develop a unique kind of adaptive foam (one-of-a-kind in the industry) for the core that’s similar in support to the high-end hybrid mattresses.



As you'll see in the ratings below the stats returned an impressive rating of 96 out of 100 in the Comfort category and 94 materials quality.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" padding_top="0px" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/Tuft-Needle-Queen-Mattress-1.jpg" alt="Tuft & Needle Mattress - voted best mattress for obese people" title_text="Tuft & Needle Mattress " animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image" custom_margin="50px|||"][/et_pb_image][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/stamp-goldilocks-bmi-30-40-small-1.jpg" alt="stamp goldilocksbmi 30 40 small" title_text="stamp goldilocksbmi 30 40 small" animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image" custom_margin="20px|20px||" custom_margin_tablet="0px|||" custom_margin_phone="0px|||" custom_margin_last_edited="on|tablet"][/et_pb_image][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="42px|0px|0px|0px" admin_label="row_inner"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/tuft-and-needle-mattress-graph.jpg" alt="tuft and needle mattress materials graph" title_text="tuft and needle mattress materials graph" animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image"][/et_pb_image][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="40px|40px|15px|40px" custom_padding_tablet="40px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_counters bar_bg_color="#ecef2d" admin_label="Bar Counters" title_font="|on|||" title_font_size="16px" title_text_color="#333333" title_line_height="1.8em" percent_font_size="14px" percent_text_color="#333333" percent_line_height="1.9em"][et_pb_counter percent="96" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#ecef2d" use_percentages="on"]



Comfort



[/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="95" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#ecef2d" use_percentages="on"]



Support



[/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="92" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#ecef2d" use_percentages="on"]



Materials quality



[/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="91" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#ecef2d" use_percentages="on"]



User satisfaction



[/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="91" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#ecef2d" use_percentages="on"]



Value for money



[/et_pb_counter][/et_pb_counters][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px|0px|0px|0px" disabled_on="on|off|off" admin_label="row_inner"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_divider color="#686868" show_divider="on" height="20" divider_position="bottom" divider_weight="4px" admin_label="Divider"][/et_pb_divider][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px||0px|" custom_padding_tablet="|||" custom_padding_phone="0px|||" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_testimonial background_color="#edef70" background_layout="light" text_orientation="center" quote_icon_color="#686868" admin_label="Testimonial" body_font_size="18px" body_text_color="#333333" body_letter_spacing="1px" body_line_height="1.7em" custom_margin="|0px||0px" custom_padding="40px|20px|20px|40px"]



Is it right for you?





If your body mass index is between 30 and 40 but you don’t want to spend a small fortune on a mattress, Tuft & Needle is our recommendation.





It's been labeled as “Best Buy” in 2016 and the “#1 mattress brand” in 2015.





More importantly – when you get this mattress you get 100 days to sleep on it and see if it’s right for you. If you feel like it’s not – you return it for a full refund.





What stats tell us is that 95% of people chose to keep it.





Bottom line – if you manage to find it at a price lower than $700, there’s not much to think about and no risk included.





You can see what the users are saying about and compare current prices it by clicking on one of the buttons below.



[/et_pb_testimonial][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px|0px|0px|0px" disabled_on="on|off|off" admin_label="row_inner"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_divider color="#686868" show_divider="on" height="20" divider_weight="4px" admin_label="Divider"][/et_pb_divider][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="107px||40px|" custom_padding_tablet="5px||0px|" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" admin_label="row_inner" module_id="overweight" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" background_color="#333333" custom_padding="||15px|30px" custom_padding_tablet="|||50px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"]



Signature Sleep Signature 13 Inch



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px||50px|" padding_top_2="0px" admin_label="Row" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="0px|10px||10px"]



[dropcap]T[/dropcap]he Goldilocks stamp here category goes to Signature Sleep.



If you’re in the heavier side and have a body mass index between 25 and 30, this Signature Sleep is by far the best value for money out there.



Innerspring mattresses with independent encasing usually go for more than $1000, while this mattress costs literally a fraction of that.



Yet, it has a higher user satisfaction rate than 90% of innersprings.



We have to say that we were intrigued by the price point of the product and did our homework on every quality aspect - from the gauge of the wires, quality of foam in the core and even manufacturing locations and practices.



There are mattresses in the price range that occasionally come to the market, but they are what we call “come-and-go” mattress.



This means that they simply fade out because the quality is not there.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" padding_top="0px" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/Signature-Sleep-Signature-13-Inch-mattress-1.jpg" alt="Signature Sleep Signature 13 Inch - voted best mattress for the overweight in the BMI range of 25 to 30" title_text="Signature Sleep Signature 13 Inch mattress " animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image" custom_margin="20px|||"][/et_pb_image][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/stamp-weight-range.jpg" alt="stamp weight range BMI 25 to 30" title_text="stamp weight range BMI 25 to 30" animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image" custom_margin="30px|20px||" custom_margin_tablet="0px|||" custom_margin_phone="0px|||" custom_margin_last_edited="on|tablet"][/et_pb_image][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="23px|40px|15px|40px" custom_padding_tablet="40px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_counters bar_bg_color="#ecef2d" admin_label="Bar Counters" title_font="|on|||" title_font_size="16px" title_text_color="#333333" title_line_height="1.8em" percent_font_size="14px" percent_text_color="#333333" percent_line_height="1.9em"][et_pb_counter percent="95" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#ecef2d" use_percentages="on"]



Comfort



[/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="91" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#ecef2d" use_percentages="on"]



Support



[/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="92" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#ecef2d" use_percentages="on"]



Materials quality



[/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="88" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#ecef2d" use_percentages="on"]



User satisfaction



[/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="92" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#ecef2d" use_percentages="on"]



Value for money



[/et_pb_counter][/et_pb_counters][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px|0px|0px|0px" disabled_on="on|off|off" admin_label="row_inner"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_divider color="#686868" show_divider="on" height="20" divider_position="bottom" divider_weight="4px" admin_label="Divider"][/et_pb_divider][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px||0px|" custom_padding_tablet="|||" custom_padding_phone="0px|||" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_testimonial background_color="#edef70" background_layout="light" text_orientation="center" quote_icon_color="#686868" admin_label="Testimonial" body_font_size="18px" body_text_color="#333333" body_letter_spacing="1px" body_line_height="1.7em" custom_margin="|0px||0px" custom_padding="40px|20px|20px|40px"]



Bottom line



This Signature Sleep stood the test of time – it’s been on the market for almost a decade now.



Even with the long years of testing and reviewing mattresses, we have to say that we are still dumbfounded by the price tag.



This mattress currently has over 1200 customer reviews on Amazon; you can read the real life experiences of owners by following the links below.



[/et_pb_testimonial][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px|0px|0px|0px" disabled_on="on|off|off" admin_label="row_inner"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_divider color="#686868" show_divider="on" height="20" divider_weight="4px" admin_label="Divider"][/et_pb_divider][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="107px||40px|" custom_padding_tablet="5px||0px|" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" admin_label="row_inner" module_id="overweight-couple" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" background_color="#333333" custom_padding="||15px|30px" custom_padding_tablet="|||50px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"]



Olee Sleep Box Top



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px||50px|" padding_top_2="0px" admin_label="Row" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="10px|20px||20px"]



[dropcap]I[/dropcap]f your body mass index is over 40, finding a good mattress without breaking the bank is very hard, to say the least.



For your body type you'll need to look past the marketing lingo that most companies use, like the mattress being “supportive”.



Instead, look for specific features.



The most important one are the coils – you’ll need them to be at least 6 inches thick and, just as important, treated with heat or electricity.



This ensures shape retantion of the mattress in the long run.



For the top layer you’ll want to look for breathable foam that’s just dense and thick enough not to create any pressure points at your hips and shoulders.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" padding_top="0px" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/olee-sleep-13-inch-2.jpg" alt="olee sleep 13 inch - voted best mattress for overweight couples" title_text="olee sleep 13 inch" animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image" custom_margin="20px|||"][/et_pb_image][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/stamp-body-mass-index-over-40.jpg" alt="stamp body mass index over 40" title_text="stamp body mass index over 40" animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image" custom_margin="40px|20px||" custom_margin_tablet="0px|||" custom_margin_phone="0px|||" custom_margin_last_edited="on|tablet"][/et_pb_image][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="23px|40px|15px|40px" custom_padding_tablet="40px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_counters bar_bg_color="#ecef2d" admin_label="Bar Counters" title_font="|on|||" title_font_size="16px" title_text_color="#333333" title_line_height="1.8em" percent_font_size="14px" percent_text_color="#333333" percent_line_height="1.9em"][et_pb_counter percent="95" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#ecef2d" use_percentages="on"]



Comfort



[/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="91" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#ecef2d" use_percentages="on"]



Support



[/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="92" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#ecef2d" use_percentages="on"]



Materials quality



[/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="88" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#ecef2d" use_percentages="on"]



User satisfaction



[/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="92" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#ecef2d" use_percentages="on"]



Value for money



[/et_pb_counter][/et_pb_counters][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px|0px|0px|0px" disabled_on="on|off|off" admin_label="row_inner"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_divider color="#686868" show_divider="on" height="20" divider_position="bottom" divider_weight="4px" admin_label="Divider"][/et_pb_divider][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px||0px|" custom_padding_tablet="|||" custom_padding_phone="0px|||" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_testimonial background_color="#edef70" background_layout="light" text_orientation="center" quote_icon_color="#686868" admin_label="Testimonial" body_font_size="18px" body_text_color="#333333" body_letter_spacing="1px" body_line_height="1.7em" custom_margin="|0px||0px" custom_padding="40px|20px|20px|40px"]



Bottom line



You only find features similar to this Olee Sleeper in mattresses the cost 200-300% more.



Yes, you read that right, heat-treated coils are not cheap and the price point of this Olee Sleep comes as a surprise, even to us.



It currently has over 700 owner reviews on Amazon; you can see what people shared about it by following the links below.



[/et_pb_testimonial][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px|0px|0px|0px" disabled_on="on|off|off" admin_label="row_inner"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_divider color="#686868" show_divider="on" height="20" divider_weight="4px" admin_label="Divider"][/et_pb_divider][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="107px||40px|" custom_padding_tablet="5px||0px|" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" admin_label="row_inner" module_id="side-sleepers" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" background_color="#333333" custom_padding="||15px|30px" custom_padding_tablet="|||50px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"]



Novosbed



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="16px||30px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="10px|20px||20px"]



It’s been almost a decade now since Novosbed decided to shake up the market by offering a new approach to the way business in the industry is done.



They did it by offering 120 nights free trial before you decide if it’s right for you.



In the case of Novosbed, the model works because you can adjust the firmness of the mattress by including or excluding their trademarked top layer.



You just unzip the top cover and set the mattress up to your desired firmness.



That’s why the company is able to offer the 4-month trial period – because most people choose to keep it.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/novosbed-front-2.jpg" alt="novosbed - top-rated for heavy side-sleepers" title_text="novosbed " animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image"][/et_pb_image][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="23px|40px|20px|40px" custom_padding_tablet="40px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_counters bar_bg_color="#ecef2d" admin_label="Bar Counters" title_font="|on|||" title_font_size="16px" title_text_color="#333333" title_line_height="1.8em" percent_font_size="14px" percent_text_color="#333333" percent_line_height="1.9em"][et_pb_counter percent="94" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#ecef2d" use_percentages="on"]



Comfort



[/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="92" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#ecef2d" use_percentages="on"]



Support



[/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="92" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#ecef2d" use_percentages="on"]



Materials quality



[/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="92" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#ecef2d" use_percentages="on"]



User satisfaction



[/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="84" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#ecef2d" use_percentages="on"]



Value for money



[/et_pb_counter][/et_pb_counters][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px|0px|0px|0px" disabled_on="on|off|off" admin_label="row_inner"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_divider color="#686868" show_divider="on" height="20" divider_position="bottom" divider_weight="4px" admin_label="Divider"][/et_pb_divider][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px||0px|" custom_padding_tablet="|||" custom_padding_phone="0px|||" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_testimonial background_color="#edef70" background_layout="light" text_orientation="center" quote_icon_color="#686868" admin_label="Testimonial" body_font_size="18px" body_text_color="#333333" body_letter_spacing="1px" body_line_height="1.7em" custom_margin="|0px||0px" custom_padding="40px|20px|20px|40px"]



Is it right for you?



Firmness you can change and a 4-month trial is what earned the Novosbed a place on this list.



If you feel like it’s not right for you, the logistics and the process of returning the mattress is pretty straightforward and it all happens within a few days.



What brought down the Overall Rating is the significantly higher price tag compared to the Top 3 models.



Bottom line – for a new owner the risk of wasting money is non-existent.



[/et_pb_testimonial][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px|0px|0px|0px" disabled_on="on|off|off" admin_label="row_inner"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_divider color="#686868" show_divider="on" height="20" divider_weight="4px" admin_label="Divider"][/et_pb_divider][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="107px||40px|" custom_padding_tablet="5px||0px|" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" admin_label="row_inner" module_id="one-person" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" background_color="#333333" custom_padding="||15px|30px" custom_padding_tablet="|||50px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"]



Natural Escape mattress



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px||16px|" padding_top_2="0px" admin_label="Row" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="10px|20px||20px"]



What stands out about the Natural Escape mattress is the fact that all the materials used are 100% natural.



With other mattresses you might see claims like natural latex or natural cotton, but if you read the fine print it’s not uncommon to see that there is some form of synthetics mixed in.



That’s not the case with The Natural Escape – every single part, top to bottom, left to right is 100% natural, zero synthetics included.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" padding_top="0px" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/my-green-mattress-twin.jpg" alt="my green mattress twin" title_text="my green mattress twin" animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image" custom_margin="50px|||" custom_margin_tablet="0px|||" custom_margin_last_edited="on|tablet"][/et_pb_image][et_pb_image admin_label="Image"][/et_pb_image][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="37px|40px|20px|40px" custom_padding_tablet="40px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_counters bar_bg_color="#ecef2d" admin_label="Bar Counters" title_font="|on|||" title_font_size="16px" title_text_color="#333333" title_line_height="1.8em" percent_font_size="14px" percent_text_color="#333333" percent_line_height="1.9em"][et_pb_counter percent="93" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#ecef2d" use_percentages="on"]



Comfort



[/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="94" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#ecef2d" use_percentages="on"]



Support



[/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="95" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#ecef2d" use_percentages="on"]



Materials quality



[/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="86" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#ecef2d" use_percentages="on"]



User satisfaction



[/et_pb_counter][et_pb_counter percent="84" background_color_default="#dddddd" bar_background_color_default="#ecef2d" use_percentages="on"]



Value for money



[/et_pb_counter][/et_pb_counters][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px|0px|0px|0px" disabled_on="on|off|off" admin_label="row_inner"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_divider color="#686868" show_divider="on" height="20" divider_position="bottom" divider_weight="4px" admin_label="Divider"][/et_pb_divider][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px||0px|" custom_padding_tablet="|||" custom_padding_phone="0px|||" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_testimonial background_color="#edef70" background_layout="light" text_orientation="center" quote_icon_color="#686868" admin_label="Testimonial" body_font_size="18px" body_text_color="#333333" body_letter_spacing="1px" body_line_height="1.7em" custom_margin="|0px||0px" custom_padding="40px|20px|20px|40px"]



Is it right for you?



Apart from the fact that My Green Mattress is completely natural, what makes it a good choice for heavy people is the firmness zoning.



Let’s explain that one – the springs in the leg and head area are 15.5 coil gauge while the range from your thighs to your upper torso is more supportive and uses a 14.5 gauge wire.



You can see what people who currently own this bed are sharing about it by clicking on the links below.



[/et_pb_testimonial][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px|0px|0px|0px" disabled_on="on|off|off" admin_label="row_inner"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_divider color="#686868" show_divider="on" height="20" divider_weight="4px" admin_label="Divider"][/et_pb_divider][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="74px||30px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text"]



Choosing the right memory foam for heavy people


Let us take a moment to address the issue of the type of memory foam that will be at the sweet spot between the comfort and support for an overweight person.



Bear in mind that the foam that we talking about here are the top layers (usually 2 or 3).



Most of the information that you can get out there goes over the basic facts about the foam quality. You see information about thickness and density but not an in-depth analysis of how it affects the sleep of a heavy person in terms of temperature sensitivity.



As opposed to other types, memory foam becomes softer as it gets warmer.









The super dense foam



Typically used for the core, this should be ideally made of 6 inches or more of high-density foam (no lower than 2 pounds per cubic foot).



This kind of material will allow for the finishing layers to be supportive enough for the corpulent person.



Let’s precisely define what we mean by support.



If the core is not firm enough and the top layers are sub-par, a big person will see too much sinking and too much motion isolation.



Basically, you’ll feel trapped and find it hard to turn. This one is especially important for overweight couples.



When looking at the advertising of the mattresses you’ll see the companies bragging about the motion isolation, but for a weighty person high motion isolation is not necessarily a good thing.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="30px||1px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text"]



What’s important here is the density


The top two layers should not be made foam that is less them 3.5 pounds per square foot. Anything lower than that and the surface will feel too soft.



On the other hand, anything over 5 LBS per square feet will feel too firm.



Density and temperature sensitivity



The denser the foam the more temperature sensitive it is, which means that what might feel hard at room temperature will feel softer in a warmer sleeping environment because of the body heat.









As it conforms to the body shape, if not sturdy enough, if will form a cocoon-like “nest” around the sleeper. That's why heat dissipation is crucial.



You shouldn’t think too much about the analysis above, we’re just providing it for reference purposes. The choices mentioned in this guide are already adapted to tick all the boxes for the type of memory foam mattress that will be would be best for heavy people.



Let’s simplify things



All the talk about the density and the quality will be unclear for an average buyer, so if you want a shortcut it’s smart to simply look at the warranty.



The two things that you should be aware of, apart from how long the warranty is, are whether it is prorated (and under what terms) and whether there is a defined minimum sag requirement.



The first one means that if you want to return or replace your mattress at some point some of the costs included will come out of your pocket. The second one defines the terms of minimum sagging in that qualifies for a return or replace of the product.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="30px||30px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text"]



Types of springs


If you look at the fact sheets of most models out there that include innersprings, you will likely see the company mentioning things like “independent encased” or “high quality”.



For the average buyer these statements are too vague to understand, so let’s get let’s get into an in-depth analysis of the springs used.



Number of springs is an “oversold” feature



In the last decade or so, the space for improvement in quality was narrowing down and the companies kept coming up with new ways to describe their products using vague industry lingo.



The one area that’s rampant in that aspect is the number of coils.



Generally speaking, the higher the coil number the better the weight will be distributed.



But that has its limitations



In our opinion once you to get over 1200 coils the added numbers become less relevant.



Once you get higher than 1,200, you should be focused on the thickness of the top layers and the quality of the cover.



What makes a good quality spring?



The best mattress for an overweight person will be made using coils treated with heat or electricity. This is important because the treatment improves the ability of the steel to return to its original shape with prolonged use.



Clarifying the gauge of the wire



Ideally you’ll want the gauge to be to be 13 or lower. It might sound counterintuitive but the higher the gauge the thinner wire is.



A mattress that’s more supportive in the knee-to shoulder range will be the superior choice for overweight or obese people.



Types of coils



The coils used will belong to one of the following 5 groups:





Continuous


Karr


Offset – noted


Pocketed (Marshall)


Knotted (Bonneill)










In the opinion of our mattress repair experts (the people that were consulted when putting together this guide) the last two choice s are superior for heavy people – Marshall or Bonneill coils.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/checklist-banner-illustration-1.jpg" alt="checklist banner" title_text="checklist banner" animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image"][/et_pb_image][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="30px||30px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" custom_padding="|50px||50px"]



Requirements checklist


To simplify things, we’ll provide a list of questions that you need to answer for yourself to make sure that you’re getting the best mattress for a heavy person (it applies to the range from overweight to obese).





Is the coil system meeting the standards we set above?


Minimum number of coils for specific sizes


Full-sized – 310 coils


Queen sized – 400 coils


King-size – 480 coils


Most modern mattresses will meet these minimum requirements but we’re providing them nonetheless.



Let’s continue with our checklist





Is the wire used treated with heat or electricity?


Is the finished material (outer cover) made using tightly-woven fabric?


Is the outer layer protected by some sort of material resistant to stains?


Does the label feature both the name of the company and number (name) of the specific mattress?


Does the warranty tick the boxes that you mentioned above – the minimum sag record requirement and terms of the prorated warranty?


Is the warranty for or limited and how long is the period covered?


Does the company specifically state that they will repair or replace a defective mattress?


Is there an added support for the edges?


How long is the mattress? A good rule of thumb here is that it should be 6 to 7 inches longer than the tallest sleeper will be using it


Are the coils naked or coated? Ideally they will be treated or covered by a protective layer that’s rust-proof.


You can see whether outr top picks meet the criteria in the Frequently Asked Questions section.



Thickness of the mattress



For people under 220 lbs. a 10” thick mattress will usually provide enough support.



For those heavier than 220 lbs, you’ll want to go with a product thicker than 11.5 inches.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="29.6875px|0px|0px|0px" admin_label="row_inner"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/edge-support-close-up.jpg" alt="edge support close up" title_text="edge support close up" animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image" custom_margin="50px|||"][/et_pb_image][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="4px||0px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text"]



Support for the edges, loft &

latex as an option


The best mattress for heavy people (including the range from overweight to obese) will have sturdy edges.



It might not sound like a big deal but it has a profound impact on long-term shape retention.



What’s the best mattress for heavy people in terms of heat retention?



If you asked us a few years ago, we would frown upon the out-of-the box models. We’d laugh at the notion that 2 out of 5 picks on this list will not be innerspring.



But, to be fair, we did see significant improvements in terms of breathability of the memory foam structure.



Loft



The ideal scenario is the top two layers of foam are lofty to accommodate the pressure points at the hips and shoulders but not soft to the point where they trap heat.



That’s why I’m innerspring core is more efficient in the heat dissipation category.

If you’re set on memory foam



In this scenario you’ll want to look at a model that features at least 5 to 7 inches of extra firm support core and at least 6 to 7 let inches of foam (multiple layers of different firmness and density).



Best mattresses for heavy people will not be latex-only



Although latex has some great properties, we would not recommend latex-only mattress for heavy people. The reason for that is the fact that the firmness of the surface doesn’t allow your shoulders or hips to sink in and align your spine.



If you’re interested in latex a good option is a hybrid between a latex core and a foam top.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="0px|0px|0px|0px" admin_label="row_inner"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/sleep-deprivation-among-overweight-infographic-1.jpg" alt="sleep deprivation among overweight infographic" title_text="sleep deprivation among overweight infographic" animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image" custom_margin="50px|||"][/et_pb_image][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="61px||30px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text"]



Best mattress for heavy people – other considerations


Breathing



If you are a heavy person (whether just overweight or obese) you are likely to experience some time breathing problems especially during sleep even if you’re not aware of in the daytime might be as simple as a shortness of breath during physical activity.



If you experience shortness of breath you can simply cease the activity and recuperate.



But what happens when you’re sleeping?



Sleep issues like apnea or snoring are more prevalent among the overweight.



The prevalence of apnea in adults is in the range between three and 7% for men and 2 to 5% for women. Those numbers get higher in overweight or obese people.



Adjusting your sleep environment is a big part of addressing the issue.



Apart from adjusting your mattress choice, you might think about sleeping in a slightly inclined position. It can be as simple as using a wedge pillow to slightly elevate your upper body and prevent obstruction in your upper airways.



It's just a secondary issue and more reason to get the best mattress for a heavy person that's within your budget.



Heavy people, acid reflux and the mattress


Another common issue among the overweight and obese people is acid reflux. The severity can range from occasional heartburn to a full onset of GERD (Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease).



Your mattress plays a role here, too. If you choose one that doesn’t allow for proper weight distribution it will only makes things worse.



Like we said above (when we talked about breathing issues) pairing your mattress with a wedge pillow or slightly elevating the top part of your bed frame can be helpful.



A good mattress is more important for the overweight than the general population - here's why...


If you’re overweight, you should look at the process of choosing right in terms that go beyond comfort.



The quality of sleep you get plays a significant role in your weight loss plan (if you have one).



People that skimp on sleep are more prone to obesity and less likely to lose weight The study that confirms that is based on the data from the National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey. In this study over 9000 people where weighed and then asked to self-report for follow-up on changes.



Those who got less than seven hours of sleep were much more likely to be obese the study also found that the participants had a higher likelihood of developing obesity in the follow-up survey.



On the low-end, the results can only be described as scary because the people who slept approximately five hours a night were running a 73% higher risk to become obese or overweight than those sleeping for nine hours.



There results were reported by the professor of medicine Stephen Haymsfield and James Gangwisch from the University of Columbia.



In the mid-range the difference was not the significant – those sleeping for six hours have a 20% higher risk of becoming obese (compared to those sleeping for nine hours).



Why is this sleep study important for heavy people?


The results of this study speak towards the point that we want to make – choosing a mattress that will give you a good night’s sleep will make it easier to lose weight and less likely to worsen your condition if you’re already obese.



A bad mattress will have you reaching for comfort foods


To make our points here we’d like to start by quoting Susan Zafarlotfi, PhD, who is the Clinical Director of the Institute for Sleep and Wake Disorders based in Hackensack University in New Jersey.



Susan says “When you have sleep deprivation and are running on low energy, you automatically go for a bag of potato chips or other comfort foods.”





What this means for you?



The results of a poor night’s sleep on a bad mattress lower your chances of weight loss. The more you gain weight, the worse you sleep and the snack cravings spiral out of control.



Zafarlotfi also says that sleep debt is like credit card debt, it keeps accumulating interest rates until you forced to pay it off.



To put it more simply, an accumulated sleep debt in overweight people is a downward spiral and, if left unaddressed, it can crash your metabolism and keep you in the spiral of weight-gain, obesity and all the issues that follow.



To be clear that this doesn’t mean that you can lose weight just by getting more sleep, it simply means that the well-crafted sleep environment and a good mattress is more important for heavy people than the general population.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="29.6875px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="20px|||" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" admin_label="row_inner" module_id="faqs" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" background_color="#666666" custom_padding="||10px|50px" custom_padding_tablet="|||65px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



FAQs about the best mattresses for heavy people



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/tuft-and-needle-mattress-seting-up.jpg" alt="tuft and needle mattress seting up" title_text="tuft and needle mattress seting up" animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image"][/et_pb_image][et_pb_accordion admin_label="Accordion" toggle_line_height="0.1em" body_font_size="16px" custom_padding="|||"][et_pb_accordion_item title="Tuft & Needle" open="on"][/et_pb_accordion_item][et_pb_accordion_item title="FAQs" open="off"]



One of the questions that keeps popping up in our inbox regarding this mattress are the materials. They’re so specific to this particular product that people don’t understand it fully.



So, let right that wrong.



The mattress is composed of two different parts - to be more precise two layers of high-grade polyurethane foam.



Type of foam



Polyurethane foam is a petroleum-based product and can be tricky in terms of chemicals used in the production, but in this case the materials have gone through rigorous scrutiny and have obtained a few third-party certifications, most importantly the, Centripur–US stamp.



We know that Centripur–US is a reliable third-party certificate and if the product is approved by them it’s reliably free of any harmful chemicals like formaldehyde, traces of metal, phthalates and other carcinogens.



The sturdy core is made of a 77-inch thick support layer while the top lofty layer is about 3 inches thick. It’s made of proprietary foam which means that no other company besides Tuft & Needle uses it.



Cooling



Apart from the balance between support and comfort (that we already mentioned) it has cooling properties because it’s infused with graphite and gel.



The core and the top layer are fused using a mixture of sticky rubber and water. We believe that it’s fair to use the word “fused”. We’re stressing this because kind of substance is technically a glue but it’s so strong that it’s used for shoe soles and similar products.



Fire-resistant



Another material that we feel should be mentioned here is the fire barrier blend that’s under the tactel fabric cover – the fire resistant brand consists of ran, silica and trace amounts of polyester. In case you’re wondering the silica is infused directly into the fibers and there is no way it will ever come in contact with your skin.



What kind of frame to use?



The frame you can see in the images is, as far as we know, not available for purchase. The lines and patterns of the mattress are minimal, so it will work with most frame design styles, from classic or vintage wooden to contemporary metal or leather bonded frames.



It’s our recommendation to go with traditional box-spring rather than an



IKEA-type frame.



Is it any good for a heavy person who's also a stomach-sleeper?



Based on the statistics seen the experiences of stomach-sleepers who are also overweight are overwhelmingly positive. So yes, we would say that it’s a good choice for a heavy stomach-sleeper.



Shipping and set up



For shipping, all the air is "drained out" of to the mattress so that it can be packed up compactly.



If you have never purchased this kind of matters (out-of-the-box) before, watching it unravel can be both fun and “scary” because the moment you open the plastic bag the cells of the foam quickly suck in the air and the mattress expands like it’s alive.



This is what allows it to be packed into such a small box. The box is about as wide as the product itself and about 13 to 17.5 “ in profile.



Is there an unpleasant smell on arrival?



Once you open the sealed bag it might take a few hours for the initial venting.



The mild odor resembles that of a latex mattress. To get to its final shape, it usually takes about a few weeks and by that point you should know whether it’s right for you. Having in mind that it’s covered by warranty of a 100 nights, we don’t see a problem with that.



Size of the sheets recommended



This Tuft & Needle is true to size and standard sheets work pretty well. Our preference is fitted sheets, but your choice will depend on the kind of frame you use along with the product. If tucking in is easy, the classic flat flannel will do just fine.



For cold sleepers



It’s not very likely that you will be cold on this mattress, because we found it to be just right in terms of breathability. But if your bedroom gets especially cold during the winter nights you can use a heating topper on top and (as per the company) it will not cause any damage to the product.



Are covers included?



The only thing in the box is the mattress and no covers are included with it.



If you need an added of layer comfort it might be smart to get a good mattress topper or a pad (you can see our list of the best toppers and pads here).



How firm are the edges?



We were surprised to see that the edges are firm enough to comfortably seat on without breaking or giving in after period of time, which is a common issue with sub-par products that don’t come with innersprings.



[/et_pb_accordion_item][/et_pb_accordion][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="10px|0px|40px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_divider color="#8300e9" show_divider="on" divider_position="center" divider_weight="3px" admin_label="Divider"][/et_pb_divider][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="30px||0px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text"]



Frequently about the runner up and the best mattress for the obese – Signature Sleep 13



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="8px|0px|29.6875px|0px" admin_label="row_inner"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/Signature-Sleep-Signature-13-Inch-mattress-13.jpg" alt="Signature Sleep Signature 13 Inch mattress 13" title_text="Signature Sleep Signature 13 Inch mattress 13" animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image"][/et_pb_image][et_pb_accordion admin_label="Accordion" toggle_line_height="0.1em" body_font_size="16px" custom_padding="|||"][et_pb_accordion_item title="Signature Sleep 13 %22" open="on"][/et_pb_accordion_item][et_pb_accordion_item title="FAQs" open="off"]



Firmness



While most products on the list could be described as medium firm towards firm the most accurate description of this signature sleep would be just medium.



What’s the best size of the mattress for a heavy couple?



For a heavy, overweight or obese couple, we would say that your safest bet is to go with the King for optimal comfort (in terms of space and weight distribution).



The warranty



As it’s not precisely listed in any of the information we could find online we start to look at the fine print of the instruction manual and contact the company directly to get this answer – the warranty is one year, limited.



Can it flipped over occasionally?



Unlike the classic designs, this is a pillow top mattress which means that flipping is not an option.



However, you can rotate it occasionally (180° horizontal rotation).



This will allow for the coils that take on most of the weight (in the shoulder area) to be “rested” from time to time. This is smart with any innerspring, unless it features different levels of firmness in separate sections.



We have only seen the later design in a few “younger” arrivals.



Packaging on arrival



As most models today (including the innersprings) for efficient shipping the product is rolled up into a vacuum bag. However, that fact alone does not affect or cause any kind of damage to the springs, at least based on what we’ve seen.



Once opened, it’s true to size and looks as advertised - we have seen no indications of the coils being distorted.



Unboxing and expansion period



As the product arrives in the sealed bag you should be careful not to cause damage to the cover while opening it.

Most people will use sharp on objects like box cutters, which is okay as long as you’re careful. Another good option, probably safer than the cutter, are scissors – they will give you more control.



It will take about 48 hours for it to expand to its final shape, but because it’s coils, you can even use it next time frame without compromising structure.



Sounds coming from the springs



Our data indicates that there are no significant squeaking noises. The company goes as far as to say that it is a good choice for “amorous activities” (it’s up to you to interpret the meaning of this wording).



[/et_pb_accordion_item][/et_pb_accordion][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="10px|0px|40px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_divider color="#8300e9" show_divider="on" divider_position="center" divider_weight="3px" admin_label="Divider"][/et_pb_divider][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="30px||0px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text"]



FAQs about the Novosbed



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="8px|0px|29.6875px|0px" admin_label="row_inner"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/novosbed-front-1.jpg" alt="novosbed front" title_text="novosbed front" animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image"][/et_pb_image][et_pb_accordion admin_label="Accordion" toggle_line_height="0.1em" body_font_size="16px" custom_padding="|||"][et_pb_accordion_item title="Novosbed" open="on"][/et_pb_accordion_item][et_pb_accordion_item title="FAQs" open="off"]



How does the 120 night trial work?



It’s pretty simple and straightforward. If you get the Novosbed and end up not liking it for some reason, you simply contact the company and return it, no questions asked.



Based on what we’ve seen they efficiently honor their advertising claims and you won’t see any runarounds or delays in the process.



The cover



The cover of the numbers Novosbed is what’s known in the industry as tencel fiber. The advantages of tencel are that it wicks moisture and heat away from the body of the sleeper, which makes it just right for warm, restless or sweaty sleepers.

The tencel is combined with silica and a touch of poly-fiber. The lining is strengthened by a combo of cotton and rayon.



Foam layers



The Novosbed consists of 4 layers of foam.



At the very best base there’s the super firm 7 inch thick support (ILD 32).



The next two layers are ILD 9, with the first layer being classic memory foam and the second airflow gel.



Finally the top is what the company calls an Interlock Blue cover (trademarked by Novosbed), which is also ILD 9.



[/et_pb_accordion_item][/et_pb_accordion][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="10px|0px|40px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_divider color="#8300e9" show_divider="on" divider_position="center" divider_weight="3px" admin_label="Divider"][/et_pb_divider][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="30px||0px|" custom_padding_tablet="15px||15px|" admin_label="row_inner" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text"]



FAQs about the My Green Mattress Natural Escape



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="8px|0px|29.6875px|0px" admin_label="row_inner"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/my-green-mattress-1.jpg" alt="my green mattress" title_text="my green mattress" animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image"][/et_pb_image][et_pb_accordion admin_label="Accordion" toggle_line_height="0.1em" body_font_size="16px" custom_padding="|||"][et_pb_accordion_item title="Natural Escape" open="on"][/et_pb_accordion_item][et_pb_accordion_item title="FAQs" open="off"]



Unboxing



The Natural Escape mattress comes rolled up into a cylinder and the setup is pretty simple. You just carefully cut the nylon encasing at the edges and then tear it open.



Are the materials really all-natural?



Yes all the materials used for the My Green Mattress Natural Escape are 100 % natural, even the cover, which is wool and organic cotton.



It’s important to stress that the Dunlop latex used here is 100% certified natural, which means that it includes no synthetic latex.

If you are in doubt it might be reassuring that it holds the Green Guard Gold Certificate.



ILD



The indentation load deflection is in the range between 18 and 22.



On our firmness scale we would place it at 6.5 out of 10.



[/et_pb_accordion_item][/et_pb_accordion][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="29.6875px|0px|0px|0px" custom_padding_tablet="20px|||" custom_padding_phone="|||0px" admin_label="row_inner" module_id="faqs" custom_padding_last_edited="on|phone"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text" background_color="#666666" custom_padding="||10px|50px" custom_padding_tablet="|||65px" custom_padding_phone="|||50px" custom_padding_last_edited="on|tablet"]



Conclusions and future updates



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner admin_label="row_inner"][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_text admin_label="Text"]



As with most our guides, the updates of the ratings are done every 6 months as per our regular schedule.



If we see a significant shift in quality ratings of a specific product, we might do an un-scheduled update.



It's out policy to do the best we can to present information that is relevant at any give moment.



This guide is somewhat different and more suceptible to interpretation, so if you have any questions or need clarifications, use the commenst below and we'll respond with 24 hours.



If we're not sure about the answer, we'll respond to inform you that we have contacted our consultants and report back as soon as we hear from them.



[/et_pb_text][/et_pb_column_inner][et_pb_column_inner type="1_2" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/ask-us-anything-banner.jpg" alt="ask us anything" title_text="ask us anything banner" animation="off" align="center" admin_label="Image" custom_margin="0px|||"][/et_pb_image][et_pb_image src="https://thesleepstudies.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/05/signatures-team.jpg" alt="scan of team member signatures" title_text="signatures small" admin_label="Image"][/et_pb_image][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][et_pb_row_inner custom_padding="60px||60px|" admin_label="row_inner"][et_pb_column_inner type="4_4" saved_specialty_column_type="3_4" parallax="off" parallax_method="on"][et_pb_button button_url="#top" button_text="Click here to go back to the top of the page" button_alignment="center" admin_label="Button" custom_button="on" button_text_color="#3B3E3E" button_bg_color="#FDA644" button_border_width="1px" button_border_radius="2px" button_use_icon="on" button_icon="%%177%%" button_icon_color="#3B3E3E" button_on_hover="off" button_text_color_hover="#2A2C2C" button_border_radius_hover="2px" background_color="#7EBEC5"][/et_pb_button][/et_pb_column_inner][/et_pb_row_inner][/et_pb_column][et_pb_column type="1_4"][et_pb_sidebar orientation="right" area="custom-sidebar-10" admin_label="Sidebar"][/et_pb_sidebar][/et_pb_column][/et_pb_section]



The post heavy test was first seen on https://thesleepstudies.com/







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/heavy-test/

Coughing only at night – babies, toddlers and adults – should you be worried?

As every parent knows one of the most common issues we have to deal with is making sure that our babies and toddlers are getting a good night’s sleep.



A common sleep problem in toddlers is coughing that happens only at night.



Today, we’ll will into get some of the potential causes and what you can do about them.









Toddler coughing only at night – potential causes



Statistics say that this type of coughing are likely caused by one of the following four conditions:





Croup


Bronchitis


Asthma


Sinusitis


Although most sleep problems caused by the conditions listed above can be treated at home, it’s only common sense that you should consult your pediatrician especially if night coughs persist.



Croup



If your baby or toddler is coughing only tonight at night, croup might be causing the issue.



How to recognize it?



This cough is repetitive, aggressive and the bursts are harsher at night. It’s a result of an inflamed throat, windpipe and/or vocal cords.



Usually occurs in toddlers under the age of five and symptoms can include: difficulty breathing, fever, problems with swallowing food and high-pitched wheezing sounds.



Views expressed by the Mayo Clinic are that this type of cough can usually be soothed in your own home by increasing the moisture air (using a humidifier) and by making sure that your kid stayed hydrated.



Bronchitis



Most parents are familiar you the condition – it’s an inflammation of the bronchial tubes that is usually caused by infections or colds.



How to recognize it?



Bronchitis symptoms include white, yellow, green or clear mucus, coughing and chest discomfort followed by extreme fatigue. The condition itself usually improves waiting a week; however, the night coughs may persist for a few weeks.



Your pediatrician might decide to recommend cough syrup or some other sort of suppressant to offer relief.



Asthma



Asthma is followed by narrowing of the airways and production of mucus. It’s hard to precisely define the symptoms because they substantially vary on case-to-case basis.



Signs of the condition can be shortness of breath, wheezing from the lungs and a persistent cough. The views expressed by Mayo Clinic describe asthma as being caused by a combination of environmental and genetic factors.



If the night coughs are caused by asthma, your pediatrician will be the one to craft a treatment plan.



Sinusitis



Sinusitis is characterized by the swelling and inflammation of nasal cavities which results mucus build-up. The most common causes are infections, but it can also be caused by polyps or a deviation of the nasal septum.



Coughing caused by sinusitis usually gets worse at night.



The condition commonly goes away on its own, but should it persist for more than a few days, consult your pediatrician.



Toddler coughing only at night – other considerations



Apart from the obvious conditions that we listed above, if the night cough is chronic you should you rethink the sleeping environment off your baby or toddler.



This might include steps like rethinking the choice of the baby crib mattress ( https://thesleepstudies.com/best-crib-mattress-reviews/), optimizing the humidity of the air and making sure that the environment is clean and safe from any allergens that might be causing the night-only coughs in babies and toddlers.



If you’ve eliminated all the potential causes



If your baby or toddler is coughing only at night and you have eliminated all the other potential causes, you should look into the immediate sleep environment, primarily the sheets.



Kids that are especially sensitive to allergens such as dust mites might get relief if you change the linen more frequently. If none of the conditions we talked about above are the cause, the most likely cause for a toddler coughing only at night are allergies caused by a range of triggers - one of the more common ones being the dust mites from the linen.



The reason for this is the fact that dust mites feed on the dead skin cells that stay trapped in the sheet.



Coughing only at night – adults



One of the most common sleep is chronic night coughing especially if you’re sleeping with a partner. Not only do you keep them awake but you interfering with your own sleep patterns too.



Nocturnal coughing can be a sign of number of respiratory problems: bronchitis, pneumonia, heart problems and acid reflux.



If your cough is caused by a temporary issue like cold there’s probably no need to worry, should the coffee milk and pool after two or three nights it’s advisable to consult your physician

statistically speaking most of the knockoffs are a symptom of allergies or respiratory tract congestion, but there are still steps you can take to improve the condition.



Part 1 - tips and exercises



Tip 1 – Adjust your sleep position



If you have issues with acid reflux in the past this is probably one of the tapes card from your doctor – sleep inclined.



The easiest way to do this is to you dedicated pillows also known as wedges. This will prevent the mucus that you swallow during the day getting back to your throat and towards your lungs.



The cremation doesn’t have to be extreme. If you want don’t want to get a special pillow, the solution can be as simple as elevating the top of your mattress by 3 to 4 inches by placing within blocks, either under the frame of the top part of the mattress or the mattress itself.



The incline flipping from this position will allow you to avoid acid reflux coming back from your esophagus and irritating your throat.



If at all possible avoid sleeping on your back, because this is one of the sleep positions that makes things worse if you’re suffering from. Due to the shape of your digestive tract you’ll see many more irritation from acid reflux when sleeping on your left side



If a heart condition is cause of problems, sleeping in an inclined position can also help significantly because the water that is naturally goes down to the lower area and has minimal effect on your breathing.



Tip 2 – take a cold shower before you go to



Another common cause for nocturnal coughing can be a dry respiratory tract. To learn whether this is your scenario try taking the long soothing bath in the top of hot water.



Try to inhale as much skiing as you can, it will help with the dryness.



Cautionary note – don’t try disconnected if you’re suffering from asthma, but because it can worsen your condition



Tip 3 – avoid sleeping under a fan, radiator or another condition



Cold air blowing into your face can worsen your, or even cause it in the first place.



Move your bad so that it’s not under the air conditioner or the fan.



Tip 4 – install a humidifier



This step dies into the conversation already have about the dryness of the respiratory tract being the potential issue causing your nocturnal onset of cough.



A humidifier can help you keep a certain level committed to the house. The sting opens your respiratory tract and allows air to circulate better.



The moisture created by the humidifier will help keep your respiratory tract hydrated.



The moisture level years should be kept in the range between 40 and 50%, because dust mites and mold try and that’s about those percentages



To measure the humidity in your bedroom, get the he drama to – they are commonly available in pharmacies and stores.



Tip 5 – wash your sheets and covers at least once a week



If your nocturnal cough is persistent, it’s likely that you’re suffering from allergies and it’s crucial to keep your sheets clean.



Dust mites are small creatures feed on that skin that sheds up your body, and they thrive because there is more food – cells of your debts can.



If you are prone to allergies, chances are high that your also sensitive to dust mites.



The rule that you mentioned – washing your sheets at least once a week, also applies to your pillow and your blankets. You can minimize the risk by investing in a hypo-allergenic pillow.



Tip 6 - keep a glass of water at hand



It’s a good idea to always have a glass of water on your bedside table. If you wake up to a dry cough during the night, you can suit your throat with a sip of water. Avoid using cold or iced water, since it can only further irritate your throat.



Tip 7 – train yourself to breathe properly



Make an attempt to train yourself to breathe through your nose while you sleep, it’s just basic physiology. It’s our nature to break through the nose, while breathing through the mount exclusively is a learned behavior because most of us develop some kind of congestion in the nasal area over our lifetime.



Breathing through your nose will put less stress in your throats and relieve your night calls.



It might sound complicated, but after a few weeks of training you can learn to breathe properly.



Below is an outlines of how to do the exercises:




Sit in a comfortable, slightly reclined position


Relax your body and close your mouth


Place your tongue behind your lower teeth – make sure that your tongue doesn’t touch the top of your mouth


Place your hands on your diaphragm (belly)


Make a conscious effort to breed in using your diaphragm rather than your torso. This is important because it helps the lungs work properly while gently massaging your liver and intestines.


The secondary benefit of proper breathing is that it stimulates the elimination of toxins from your body.





Inhale deeply through your nose (for 2 to 3 seconds)


Breathe out the same way but take a bit more time (3 to 4 seconds)


Take a break of 2 to 3 seconds before breathing in again


Repeat this several times, while slightly increasing the duration of breathing in and out as well as the brakes in-between


Repeat this exercise a few times a day and you’ll soon notice a change – you’ll see that breathing through the nose comes to us naturally.



Part 2



In more persistent and severe cases of coughs your physician might advise taking a cough medicine. The first step is likely to be an OTC syrup. These help with the coughing two different ways.





They soften the mucus located in your throat and your respiratory tract


They block the natural coughing instinct


Another option is applying VapoRub on your chest before going to bed.



Both of these are universally recognized to be helpful remedies for nocturnal cough.



Part 3 – using natural remedies for nocturnal coughing



Honey is an excellent natural remedy for an irritated throat because it covers and soothes the mucous membranes of the throat. Just one spoonful can go a long way.



Rule of thumb here can be to take one or two spoonfuls of honey 3 times a day, dissolved in hot water with a touch of lemon juice.



Cautionary note – although honey is a very healthy natural remedy shouldn’t be given to children under the age of 2 because of the risk of botulism, a disease which is bacterial in origin.



Licorice root tea



Licorice root is a natural decongestant. It soothes your throat and soft in the mucus present in the respiratory tract. It also fights off and inflammation present.



You can purchase licorice feedbacks in most stores but it’s advisable to go with brands that there third party tested.



Making the licorice root tea



Unless otherwise stated on the box, infuse the licorice root in boiling water for 10 to 15 minutes. Covered the to keep the steam and the restorative oils in the tea.



During this study 1 to 2 times a day and before you go to bed.



If you want to combine the power of honey licorice root, you can always replace the water in the honey solution (see mentioned above) with a bit of added lemon.



Gargle saltwater



In some cases of nocturnal coughing saltwater might be of help. This is especially true if the causes of the night coughs are congested breeding pathways.



To make the solution these old about half of small spoon off salt worried about 250 mL of lukewarm water until it’s been so. Use the solution to gargle, but be careful not to swallow repeat the gargling until you have used up solution and then rinse your mouth with clear water.



Use water vapor and natural oils



Steam is an excellent way to absorb moisture through the respiratory tract and sued by nocturnal costs. By adding in essential oils such as eucalyptus three you will also have the added antibacterial, antiviral and the inflammatory benefits.



Here is a short outline of how to make the solution of natural essential oils:





Boil enough water to feel one bowl of medium-size


Pour the water into the bowl and let it rest for about a minute


Add 3 to 4 drops of essential oil – eucalyptus is always a good choice


Stir quickly will until the vapor start to rise


Bend your head above the bowl and try to be as close as possible to the steam (make sure that you’re not too close for steam to be unpleasant or burn your skin


Place a clean towel over your head and the bowl, making a tent of sorts to trap the steem


Breathe deeply for 5 to 10 minutes and repeat the procedure to 2×3 times a day


Essential oils are also found to be helpful for nocturnal coughs when applied directly to the skin. Always mix the essential oils with organic olive oil before applying it, because the essential oils are not meant to be applied directly to the skin.



We have gone over some basic techniques to deal with persistent nocturnal coughs, both for adults and for babies and toddlers coughing only at night – these are only provide for educational purposes and its common sense to consult your physician before using the techniques described above, especially if the cough is persistent.



Sleep tight



The following post Coughing only at night – babies, toddlers and adults – should you be worried? was first published on thesleepstudies







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/toddler-coughing-only-at-night/

Mainstays memory foam futon, multiple colors – 2017 review update

Over the past 9 months we've analyzed the data from over 2000 user reviews.



We’ve also had the help of our panel of 8 furniture repair experts to get to the quality ratings you’ll see below.



In the analysis you'll see what makes this futon tick and how does it compare to similar models, and its quality rating in 5 categories.



The first thing that sets the mainstays put on apart from products and similar quality range is the price.



It's one of the most affordable photos that include this kind of quality memory foam, in fact models of similar quality go for about 50-120 % more.



Mainstays memory foam futon compared to the DHP Emily



Currently top-rated product is DHP Emily (you can see the full list of best futons here - https://thesleepstudies.com/best-futon/), and in the analysis below you see their head to head comparison.



Info:



The weight of the futon is 95 lbs



1 folded into a couch the dimensions are 71.7 times 32.5 x x 33.5 in



Depth of the sea when measured from the front edge of the seating area to the beginning of the backrest it is about 44.2 inches



Unboxing and assembly


Would say that the DHP Emily a bit t easier to assemble out of the box, because it come as a one-piece and features hinges that hold the construction together so it just takes a few minutes to set it up.



That doesn't mean that the mainstays futon is hard to assemble that does come into boxes and an average user would meet to close to follow the instruction so that you can assemble it right.

It comes in two boxes and all the tools that you would need to assemble the mainstays coming included. If you have trouble finding them just look into the pouch that's placed under need to the cushion.



Initial impressions about the sturdiness or the legs and the bolts


The photos that we've seen people complaining about in to have one thing in common the legs use metal bolts to screw into the wooden support service



In the case of both the main stage IV on and the Emily the legs are study.com and more importantly they screw into the metal frame.



It might not sound like a big deal but think the long run, it is.



When the bolts are screwed into the metal frame, there is minimal risk of the structure getting compromised by the bolt loosening when screwed into wood.



It's also worth mentioning that the metal-on-metal combo between the bolt and the frame is much more reliable if you have plans to move the futon and need to take it apart to do so.

When metal screws are used on wood that tend not to hold as tight as the first time the unit is set up.



Sturdiness and thickness of the screws


According to a measurement in the screws used for the Mainstays memory foam futon are almost three times as thick as thick as those used for the family, which gives a slight Edge to this futon in terms of the sturdiness of the connection between the bulbs and the frame.



Firmness and comfort


We would say that both futons are similar in terms of similar durability, including the weight of the unit.



This means that if you're choosing between in the two, it'll come down to your style and firmness preference



Mainstays memory foam futon - style and design



Emily features glossy finish on the chrome legs, which means that it will work better with a contemporary space.

The mainstays on the other hand is more versatile in terms of the Styles it will work with full stop because there are no glossy surfaces it can work with both modern and temporal style and more classic designs of the room.



It's fair to say that either of the models would stick out like a sore thumb if your space has a vintage look.

The Mainstays memory futon is more versatile in terms of the positions of the parts.



While the Emily is a single unit (when flat) the mainstays allows you to raise the arm rests into an elevated position.

According to our measurements it goes up to about 75°, which makes it a good choice for lounging or reading a book without the need for an extra pillow.



Both are what's known in the industry as split back, meaning that you have the option to fold back one half of the backrest while keeping the other half in an upright position.

The filling materials



In terms of the filing, we would give the mainstays a slight edge because it includes a layer of memory foam making it more comfortable and less likely to develop lumps and uneven areas in the long run.



People who will choose the date the Mainstays over the Emily are those who are more about comfort and plan to use their futon more frequently (like long gaming sessions or a lazy day of watching TV).

It all comes down to the firmness - the Emily is the firmer of the two and does not include any kind of additional layer for comfort. So, it can become uncomfortable if you sit on it for long.



Sleep



For sleeping, we'd also say that the Mainstays is the superior choice for a few reasons.



The first one is the obvious memory foam layer that does a better job conforming to the shape of your body. What is basically means is that it feels more like a regular bad than most of its competitors.

Another thing worth mentioning is that the sides and be locked in place and slightly raised, basically turning them into a surface that can be used as pillow.



Mainstays memory foam futon, multiple colors



The Mainstays gained popularity because it's available in multiple colors at Walmart, but if you're getting one online the options you have are black PU leather and velvet-like camel Brown. As we mentioned, it's one of our top picks among memory foam futons - https://thesleepstudies.com/memory-foam-futon/



Weight capacity


With but both of these in the same durability longevity and capacity category is as they're both waste the maximum weight allowed a 600 pounds.



Sturdiness of the Mainstays memory foam futon structure (as a whole)


Both of these feel similar in terms of structural integrity and if you plan to move or flick them they can give you the impression that you might break something. In reality we've seen the know experiences of that happening and that subjective feeling is a result of how the products are put together.



Bottom line if you're moving your foot and around, there's no significant concern with doing any kind of structural damage to either of them.



Durability of the legs


Both of these feature legs that screw directly into the metal frame, which makes them superior to a vast majority of products in the price range.



The difference is that the legs of the Emily are metal. They might seem fragile because the tubing is not high gauge. In reality, we've seen no experiences of the legs bending even when used at maximum capacity.



We’d go as far as to say that there is a higher chance of a structural damage happening at the welding areas (where the legs meet the metal structure) then the legs themselves.



Is it comfortable enough for two people to sleep on?



When it comes to two-person sleep the issue is not the capacity. However the space might be.

It offers the most comfort for one sleeper or two people of average size and built.



If you are on the heavier side



It can easily accommodate even a heavy and big person.



However, if you are both a big person and a restless sleeper, you might be aware of the fact that the futon is pretty light, which means that you run the risk of flipping over if you move to the very edge or the sleeping surface at some point during the night.



Other considerations



If you're not buying the frame and the mattress separately the Mainstays memory foam futon might just be right for you. It comes with a frame (full-size) and a hinge mechanism so that it can be used both as a sofa, lounger or bed.



10 out of 10 for looks


The images don’t really do it justice; it's much more stylish-looking in person.



If we had to choose, we like the monochromatic colors from the range of multiple colors of the Mainstays futon. The back rest can be set up into three positions: upright, medium and full recline.



We especially like the fact that the side arms are attached to the main area using hinges and can be folded back into a full 90 degrees position, but can also be used elevated and used as lounger.



One of the most comfortable choices out there


A common issue models in this price range is that they're simply not comfortable enough for long hours. The main reason behind it is the absence of any kind of pillow top layer to distribute the weight.



The cushions of this unit are a combination of memory and recycled foam, which is superior to the polyester and cotton filing most commonly used in futons, even the ones that cost much more.



In conclusion



This is one of the top value-for-money futons out there and, as we mentioned, it's one of the top rated models overall.



We believe that the information we presented here are as reliable as it gets since they're based on the large pool of user experiences. We update this review on 6 -month or yearly basis, depending on whether we see a significant shift in the use of satisfaction ratings.



If you have any specific questions or comments feel free to use the comment section (at the bottom) or simply drop us a line using the contact form. We respond to all correspondence within 24 hours.



Stay comfortable



The following post Mainstays memory foam futon, multiple colors – 2017 review update is republished from https://www.thesleepstudies.com/







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/mainstays-memory-foam-futon/

Memory foam futon – Top 4 picks out of 12 reviewed – 2017 update

This guide on the top-rated memory foam futons was put together over the past 11 months.



We started the process by consulting our expert panel of 8 furniture repair experts.



After they made their initial 12 choice, we analyzed the user satisfaction %s and came up with the ratings in five quality categories.



Let's go straight to the results and list the top 5 memory foam futons based on over 2000 user experiences.









Memory foam futons - Top 4





Pearington Pillow Top Bella


DHP Allegra Pillow-Top Futon


Mainstays


DHP Premium Sofa Futon Couch


Pearington Pillow Top Bella memory foam Futon



This Pearington is not only the top-rated memory foam futon but it’s voted as the best futon overall.



What sets it apart from the competition is the thickness and the density of the memory foam used for the tufted cushions.



It won't work for all spaces because the design is modern and contemporary with glossy accents of steel.



If the design of your home is more on the classic side you’ll probably want to take a look at the runner-up that the date be Allegra.



Details



Material of the upholstery that bonded leather



Dimensions as sofa 70.29 x 37.3 x 37.7



Weight of the item 100.5 lbs



DHP Allegra memory foam futon



The Allegra is the 2nd pick among 12 futons we looked at, mainly because of the balance between the price and quality of the foam and build.



In the overall rating it received a 9/10.



It's also voted to be the most comfortable model - you can see the ratings below.

Info sheet



Material of the finish that the Allegra is upholstered in black microfiber



Features a pillow-top cushions for extra comfort



The seats have extra padding of foam



Material of the frame - solid wood



Weight of the item is 70.5 - pounds



Dimensions when folded - 71 x 34.5 x 31 inches



3rd top rated



When we started compiling data for this guide we expected this Mainstays model would to be battling it out for the top position with the Pearington and the Allegra.



Rated 88 out of 100 it's a 3 pick, but it might be important to stress that it’s the top value for money on the list.



The fact that the ratings are somewhat lower than the top 2 is mainly because of the plastic legs. The plastic used is not just any plastic – it’s actually one of the futons with the highest listed weight capacity…but the legs material did affect its ratings in build quality.

Fact sheet



Material - PU leather (black) or suede (camel brown)



Dimensions as a sofa - 71.7 x 33.5 x 32.5



Maximum weight capacity - 600 pounds



DHP premium memory foam futon



The minimal design of the DHP Premium will be appealing to home owners who prefer a modern look.



It looks much more expensive than it actually is.

It’s rated at 88/100 in both comfort categories (as couch and as bed) and in 92/100 in the category of value for money.



Fact sheet

material

steel legs and leather upholstery

maximum weight capacity is listed at 600 lbs

design style - modern



dimension in couch mode - 69 x 30.5 x 32 “

weight of the unit is 62 lbs (according to our measurement)



FAQS - Pearington Pillow Top Bella



Is it a good choice for tall and people on those on the heavier side?



The answer to that question depends on what you would define as tall person. In our experience the optimal height of person for comfortable sleep on the Pearington would be less than 6ft. This is especially important for back sleepers since you'll be using the full length.



For side sleepers it will work just fine because it performs well in terms of distributing weight.



Bottom line - for tall people, it might not be the best solution for long-term sleep but rather a temporary bed.



On the other hand, people on the heavier side will find it be comfortable, much more so than the other futons we reviewed…because of the density of the foam and the solid built of the frame.



Dimensions as a sofa vs. dimensions as a bed



Pearington is 70 inches long. Set up as a couch it's approximately 37 inches wide and in a flat position we measured it to be just a bit over 45 inches wide.



What sheets to use

Our advice would be to use fitted sheets in full size with medium deep pockets.

This will allow you to use a topper for added comfort.

How does the mechanism work?

To recline it into a horizontal position you just pull up the back seats. This disengages the hinge that's locking the mechanism. As soon as you hear the click you just fold it back down into a flat position.

What's the exact type of memory foam used?



The filling of the cushions is high density recycled foam.

Thickness of the memory foam

We measured the distance between the top of the legs and the sleeping surface and the result we got is approximately 9 inches.



Unpacking



One of the commonly asked question is about the fit of the package on arrival.

According to our measurements there should be no issues fitting the package through any doorway, even the narrow ones (as narrow as 28 “).

Clearance measured from the floor to the top of the legs



The front features a steel support bar and if you measure that clearance it's approximately 5 inches. The sides are slightly elevated and sit at 9 inches high (measured from the floor).



Measured at the back the clearance is approximately 7 “.



The downside

One question that keeps popping up is weather the armrest folds back fully.

They don't.

By looking at the side-elevation you might get the impression that is not too comfortable to sleep on, but the thickness of the foam makes that a moot point. It’s thick and dense enough for the surface to be flat when in horizontal position.



Clearance from the wall

The distance between the unit and the wall in about 20 in (measured from the wall to the top of the back seat) will be just fine to freely recline and set it back up.



FAQS about the 2nd top pick – the DHP Allegra


Can you detach on the mattress from the frame?



No the mattress is fixed and cannot be detached from the frame.



Are twin size sheets big enough?



Based on our measurements we would recommend going a size up and getting full size sheets (fitted, if possible).

Is it hard to set up from couch to bed?

The transition between a couch and a bed is pretty simple and it's the described in detail in the instructions that come with it.

Compared to a standard bed

When in full recline (flat position) the approximate size is similar to that of a double bed (in terms of width).

The height (clearance) between the ground and frame



The clearance between the floor and the bottom surface of the futon is about 6.5 inches.



People who intend to use the storage space under the sofa might find this inconvenience because standards storage containers require about 7 inches of clearance.



Thickness of memory foam

The mattress the mattresses about 8 inches tick.



Assembly

Assembly is pretty simple and most new owners choose to do it themselves. It comes down to dust screwing in the four legs into the bottom support surface. This shouldn't take more than two minutes.



FAQs about the 3rd top pick


Is it fabric or leather?

It's available as both as both black PU leather and brown fabric.



Dimensions of the seating cushions

Measured from the top edge to the beginning of the backrest it's about 44 inches wide.

Size compared to a regular bed



In the horizontal position, dimensions are somewhere between a twin and a full-size.



Folding the arms

Another common question that we received is about the armrest and the angle to which it folds.

The arms can be folded to approximately 70 to 75 degrees.

Is this a split back and what does that mean?



Yes this is a split back futon, which means that you can set one half into a reclined position while the other half can remain upright.



FAQs about the DHP Premium Sofa


Assembly



Based on the experiences of the owner's experiences it's pretty simple to assemble and an average user will do it in less than 15 minutes.

Similar to the models above, it’s just about screwing the steel legs into the frame.

The image of this DHP premium might be misleading when it comes to the thickness of the legs, they seem more fragile than they are in person - the steel is thick and sturdy.



The materials of the site and the bottom

The whole futon is made of the same material (black PU leather), which includes the bottom and the sides.

Shipping



The DHP premium is one of the few products that’s shipped within 1-2 days from purchase. This usually means that it will be with you within 3 to 5 business days.



Size when setup for sleeping



In the flat position it's bigger than a twin and slightly smaller than a full bed.



Advantages of memory foam futons



Most commonly, futons are made of cotton. The better ones have a layer of sturdy foam to make the sitting surface more rigid.



As a rule of thumb the more cotton in the filing in the firmer the futon.



The reason behind that is that cotton gets flattened and compressed in the long run, which can be an issue because it forms the lumps.



In order to avoid lumping (with models that allow for you to detach the mattress) you can flip it every once in a while to prevent the fibers of the cotton compacting into a lump.



The more foam, the better

The more foam used for a futon the more comfortable it will be. Premium models even include luxury materials such as wool.

Wool tends to retain shape longer and provide better temperature insulation, in turn making the mattress more comfortable.



Memory foam used for futons

The type of memory foam commonly used for futons is Visco-elastic, which is polyurethane with some added chemicals to improve the viscosity, firmness and the density.



Visco form was first developed in the 1960s by NASA and it's primary use was to increase the safety of the cushions used in the aircrafts.



Additional tips on choosing



Adjusting the size



The model we reviewed here come with the memory foam mattress fixed to the frame but if you want to buy them separately you have much more leeway to choose, mix and match.

The obvious start would be to adjust in the size of the mattress to the frame. Most futons of this type are made to precisely fit the frame but there will always be products that don't conform to the standards, so you would have to do your research in order not to make this basic mistake.



Types of foam used for futons



The memory foam used is usually not as good as that used in a regular mattress. So let's take a look into the options you have when you're looking at the fact sheet or the product.



Traditional foam



This type does its job of creating a supportive surface for the body by forming a “cradle” of sorts. This improves circulation and minimizes any pressure points.



Gel



Gel will be the choice of people who prefer a firmer sleeping service and/or suffer from back pain and sore muscles.



Foam density



You’ll see three types of foam mentioned in terms of density: high, medium and low.



In terms of support, the high-density will outperform medium and low.



Medium density is the sweet spot for motion isolation, which makes it a good choice if your plan is for two people to sleep on the futon.

Low density is easy to break in, meaning that it will adjust to the shape or the sleeper’s body more efficiently than medium or high.



The density doesn't tell the full story



If you're comparing the quality of the foam and just basing it on the density you might think again.



A better way to go about this is take the weight into account.



A good rule of thumb here can be that medium density should be 45 pounds per cubic feet. On the other hand, the same volume in high-density foam can you weigh as much as 10 lbs.

What is mmHG and why it’s important?



If you're looking to draw conclusions about the comfort the unit of measurement that can paint the best picture is mmHG.

This unit measures the response of the phone and the pressure full stop as a Royal stamp people looking for pressure relief will go with 32 mmHG or less.

In the futon industry this value is almost never listed and the only way to get the information is to contact the company directly and ask them about it

What is ILD?



ILD stands for in the Indentation Load Deflection and the values range from 6 at 40.

With mattresses the ILD will be between 11 and 16.



Like with the mmHG it's rare to see a futon manufacturer listing this and you might think about contacting them beforehand to see if they even have the information.



Find out where it's made



Outsourcing is not necessarily a bad thing but an average American will be more relaxed knowing that their product is made in Canada or USA

If you want to be precise about it you can always call or e-mail to the company and inquire on whether the actual materials are USA-made or only assembled locally.



How we tested the products



We first started working 9 months ago by contacting some furniture experts.

We thought that it’s smart to work with people that repair furniture (including futons).

Two members of the expert panel agreed to be mentioned by name

Martin Massey from Massey Upholstering in Boston



Martin has been in the industry for over two decades. He started out by working in a furniture factory. He left the job in 2009 and started his furniture repair company in Boston. He specializes in custom furniture.



Charlie Gilbert of the Barker Home Repair

Charlie Gilbert is an employee of the Barker Home Repair company in Tulsa Oklahoma

His narrow specialty is upholstery, which made him especially important for the initial picks.

Below is an outline of the process that resulted in the ratings



Step one

We asked our expert panel to narrow down the choice so that we can efficiently apply our statistical modeling.

That resulted in a list of 12 initial products.

From that point on we were able to apply the statistical model that we used to review all the sleep-related products.



The model is based on two things:



One - collecting all the user experiences we can find



Two - using that pool of data to rate the products in relevant quality categories



In this case the quality categories are: comfort (as sofa and as bad), build quality, user satisfaction and value for money. The average of those 5 rating is what you saw in the table as the overall rating.



Comfort ratings


The comfort ratings are based on a statistical formula that we developed and tweaked over the years (which was generally used for mattresses). That meant that we had to make some further adjustments for it to be relevant for rating futons.



The ratings you see are a combination of the two factors.



Build quality


This rating is mainly based on the percentage of structural quality issues that we extracted from our stats. What it basically does is reflect the percentage of people that saw any significant structural issues, especially during the warranty period.



This category includes factors to reflect both the quality of the finish material and quality of the frame and mechanism.



User satisfaction


This one is pretty self-explanatory and it basically comes down to collecting data from all the sources we could find.



We made further attempts to contact as many owners as we could. This is usually the hardest part because it's the most time consuming. It involves research on public forums where people mentioned the products.

Some of the futons we looked at are not the most popular ones and it wasn't easy finding owners willing to talk towards the quality of their purchase. But, we did manage to find 12 owners (combined) to give us a moment of their time and discuss the advantages and shortcomings of the futons.



Updates to this guide



Putting together a detailed guide like this involves a lot of work. We generally stick by the rule of updating our guide bi-monthly, quarterly or once a year, depending on how time-consuming the reviews are.



In this case, the guide is updated every 6 months to reflect any quality changes in the market. We deviate from that policy only if we notice a substantial drop or raise in the user satisfaction %s. If this happens, we do on an unscheduled update.



What's important for you is that we do our best to keep the information presented relevant and up-to-date at all times.



If you have a specific situation that needs addressing, feel free to drop us a line using our contact page or simply by commenting in the field below.



The Sleep Studies Team



The following post Memory foam futon – Top 4 picks out of 12 reviewed – 2017 update is republished from The Sleep Studies By Bob Ozment







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/memory-foam-futon/

The sleep problem of the modern world and what you can do about it

In the busy lives we live today, sleep often takes the proverbial backseat.



That's especially true for young people who don't truly understand the importance of proper sleep habits because they don't feel the need kicking in because their bodies are still full of energy and can take the unhealthy habits.



Their sleep habits range from staying awake for days to sleeping in for the whole weekend.









Some of the problems we're facing in a busy life of today





Too many distractions


Cluttered environment


High levels of stress


Too many things that require our attention


The first step in rectifying the issue is precisely pinpointing the cause. You can then craft the precise plan to eliminate or reduce the source of poor sleep habits.



The timeline



As with most new habits takes about 20 to 30 days for your body to get used to the changes and adapt to new patterns in your lifestyle. It's important to be aware of this fact because too many people give up on their plan because they don't see immediate results and get back to their old unhealthy habits.



The purpose of this article is to help you craft a plan, establish a routine and create new habits that will be beneficial in the long-run.



Some pointers



Limiting the number of habits you focus on in a specific time line



If you try to change it all immediately you're likely fail. If that happens to get discouraged and get back to your old ways.



Instead of tackling all the bad habits at once try changing the single thing at a time.



Let's be specific



It's preferable to take about three months to address three issues, instead of trying to change them all within the first month.



After establishing each new healthy habits, give yourself a reward - this will keep you motivated to go on.



Be patient



Some techniques for improving your sleep will work for part of the population but not all of us. For maximum efficiency it's probably smart to define a deadline and a specific objective.



What's important here is not to allow the deadline to create what we can call a “stress of performance”. If you feel like your deadline for the change is approaching and you're not seeing the results you expect, you get stressed out. It goes without saying that the added stress is counterproductive.



Instead, think of the deadlines and goals as a reference.



This is not an exact science and might take a few attempts of different techniques to craft a better sleeping plan.



Some of the common techniques for improving sleep



Exercise



This one is pretty common on you and you probably heard it before, but there's just no way around mentioning it.



The exercise doesn't have to be especially challenging or strenuous, it's just about spending energy. Once your energy pools are depleted your body will feel a greater need for a restorative sleep



Changing your eating habits



Another tip that's pretty intuitive. The good news is that the dietary habits of a healthy lifestyle have a lot in common with the those for better sleep.



Eat light meals



One of the most common problems of a sleep problems is digestion.



Instead of eating heavy meals that will clog up your digestive tract, go for lighter and more frequent ones. This is especially important in the range of the few hours just before you go to bed.



Meals that are heavy, either in calories are in volume, will cause you are feeling of discomfort and are likely to interfere with sleep.



If you don't want to or can’t change you dietary habits completely, try this - stop eating 3 hours before bedtime. If you're too hungry have a light snack that doesn't include sugar.



Exposure to sunlight



Making a good plan for sleep comes down to training your brain to recognize that the bed-time is approaching.



An important part of that is light. If you work in a dark place, your brain will have a difficult time recognizing day-time from night.



Two tips we might stress here are getting more of natural sunlight or including some form of stimulating sunlight in your work environment.



Insomnia is not as common as people think



Insomnia, as defined by science, is less common than most people think. Most of us who are having sleep problems simply don't have a medical problem but are simply overwhelmed with the frenzy of the modern life.



Trial and error



Being patient about change is a must.



The shift from your old habits is substantial and you need to realize that it's a process of trial and error.



A good plan will factor in a range of your lifestyle aspects, from the exercise when mentioned to the firmness of your mattress, your dietary habits and how your body reacts to caffeine.



Caffeine is commonly misunderstood



Most people think that just eliminating or lowering the amount of coffee we drink through the day will do the trick.



In reality, it's a bit more complicated because caffeine has a long half life (about six to eight hours) meaning that if you get a cup of coffee at 8 PM is the equivalent of getting the same Cup at midnight or 1 AM.



Coffee alternatives and over the counter sleep aids



Over the counter sleep aids like melatonin or Valerian (or a combination of both) are, we feel, overused.



Instead of the reaching for that the bottle right away, try experimenting with your lifestyle to see if you can do it without adding chemicals to your life.



For example, try replacing coffee (at least the cops you drink in the afternoon) with a nice cup of kava kava. Kava kava has many restorative benefits but is not regulated by the FDA, so if you do introduce it to your life make sure you choose a good brand - you can see our picks among brands of kava kava for anxiety and sleep here - https://thesleepstudies.com/best-kava-kava-tea-extract-for-anxiety/.



A good rule of thumb here would be to not to drink any caffeine in the afternoon.



Over the counter sleep AIDS are usually based on herbs like Valerian or hormones like melatonin.



Melatonin is one of the most potent sleep supplements out there but if you talk to medical professional most of them will tell you that, as with most hormones, it's not an ideal solution in the long term because it can form a habit. Another issue is that people tend to take too much of it. Although a melatonin overdose is not life-threatening it can cause serious side effects - you can see our guide on melatonin overdose here - https://thesleepstudies.com/can-you-overdose-on-melatonin/



Valerian is a milder option because it's a a herb, but it's action are similar to that of a sleep pill - it work by stimulating GABA production. Similar to melatonin, it's a supplement and not strictly regulated so before you decide to give it a go, make sure your product of choice comes from a trusted brand - you can see our picks for best Valerian root supplements here - https://thesleepstudies.com/best-valerian-root-reviews/



Final thoughts



Plan, be patient and smart. That would be a summary of what we talked about above.



If you feel like you’re wasting time trying to make it all work, think about the long-term effects. A few months of consistency will pay huge dividends in the long run, both in your health and the overall feeling of wellness.



The sleep problem of the modern world and what you can do about it is available on thesleepstudies







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/sleep-problem-modern-world/

Best futon – Top 10 picks – 2017 update

It took about 9 months to put together this guide and for a good reason choosing a good futon was beyond our expertise so we had to bring a few expert consultant to help us with the task



In this case we had to help of five furniture the refurbishment expert who made the initial choice of 24 ft chance to look at. We then proceeded to do the statistical analysis of the user experiences and satisfaction with the pieces. You can see the results of that's analysis below.









The best futon overall DHP Emily convertible with chrome legs



Since we first started Gathering data for this guide this dhp was among the top three products and one of the few with user satisfaction ratings of over 90



Product details





Maximum weight listed 600


Color - grey


Available types - sofa bed and chaise lounge


Assembly - from what we've seen in the experience of owners the Emily DHP is pretty easy to assemble and we typically takes less than 3 hours. Most new owners choose to assemble this off on their own with the most likely reason being the fact that expert assembly costs more than the product itself.


Warranty - like all the HP products this sofa comes with a one-year limited warranty, starting from the purchase date


Dimensions





When full extended its around 70 inches long


With the chair (backseat) up it's about 60 inches


The height of the seat is 15 in


The height of the back-rest is 32 "


Width - approximately 30 "


Where is it on the firmness scale?



Respecting the fact that sleep preferences are highly personal, we think it's fair to say that this is a supportive and firm piece of furniture. People used to soft surfaces like memory foam might find too firm.



Are there other materials and colors available?



DHP in grey linen is not only one product in the series. Others include colors like vanilla, white and black faux leather.



Surfaces of the sides and back



All the visible surfaces are grey while the back is matte black



Size compared to a regular mattress



In the flat position the dimensions are somewhere between a twin and a full-size and closer to the later.



Is it comfortable to sleep on?



If you like sleeping on a firm of surface this DHP will be just right. If you're used to a softer surface (like memory foam) an add-on (topper or pad) might be a good idea?



2nd top-rated futon - Divano Roma Tufted Splitback



Product details





In the upright position it measures 77 x 31 x 31 "


When flat - 70 x 40 inches


The cushion of the seat is 70 x 19 inches hig


Height of the seat - 18 "


Frequently asked questions about the Divano Roma futon



How high is the top surface?



According to our measurements the legs are about 5.50 in high which makes the sloping surface sitting at approximately 7 inches



What's the maximum capacity the company doesn't precisely list the maximum capacity allowed but it is sturdy product and it's rsd estimate that the maximum capacity is 500 to 600 logo



Are the legs interchangeable?



The legs can't be replaced, if you want something higher you might think about looking into some of the others models on the list.



Materials of the back and bottom



The fabric used for the back and the bottom of this divine aroma is the same as those used for the top



Assembly



It is shipped in in one box that's pretty large, so if you leave with Louis an apartment that's not on the floor first floor you might need two people to carry it up



Is it possible to use it in the travel trailer?



The door opening of trailers is usually in the range of 24-26 " so the box that it comes in should have no problem going to the doors. Once inside, it's pretty easy to assemble and doesn't require much space.



Is the design split back?



By looking at the image you might get the impression that and the sides don't recline but in fact both sides full recline into a flat position.



Sitting vs. sleeping



Cushions are pretty lofty, but most experiences we've from users tell the story of a sofa that's better used for sitting than for long-term sleeping.



How comfortable is it?



Again the image of this piece of furniture can be deceptive because it looks pretty soft, but in reality it's very firm and, for long-term sleep, you might need some sort of a topper to make it more comfortable. Throw pillows that come with it are Square in shape and measure about 12 x 12 ".



DHP Novogratz Brittany



It's fair to say that the look of the Novogratz can be described as classic, maybe even vintage. The design will work with most spaces.



Body and legs of the futon



The legs are wooden and the upholstery is premium linen. It comes in 5 colors: green, blue, gray, pink and mustard. The legs are solid wood and oak-colored.



It's very comfortable, mainly because with the fact that the back is soft and features a lofty ripped design.



The filling



The feeling of the cushions is a mix of foam and polyester.



Weight and size



It measures 81 x 81.5 x 34.5 x 31.5 inches and it weighs approximately 84 lbs.



Frequently asked questions about the third best futon in our ratings



Placement



For it to snugly fit against the wall (when in a flat position) you will need to place it around 1.5 feet from the wall surface (measured from the top or the back seat).



Thickness of the cushions



The cushions are comfortable and are just under 5 inches thick.



Shipping



The company doesn't offer expedited shipping services and it usually ships within 10 days of ordering.



A common issue - missing side-arms



We've seen reports from people saying that their box arrived without the sidearm. In reality, the issue is most commonly attributed to the fact that the seat cushion and sidearms are packed together. You'll need to turn the cushions over, unzip them and take the side-arms out.



The weight limit



Like with most models on this list,the manufacturers don't precisely list the maximum weight capacity, so we decided to contact them directly. their response was that the max capacity of the futon is 600 lbs.



Height of the seating area



Measured from the floor to the top surface of the cushion it's about 8 inches high, which is a bit higher the most models on this list.



Thickness and durability of the legs



Although the legs might seem fragile the fact there that they are solid wood and the weight is distributed between 6 of them makes the frame durable, which goes back to the question about the weight limit (600 lbs).



DHP Paxson convertible with wooden legs



Product details



Weight capacity - this DHP is one of the few models that precisely list the weight capacity at 600 lbs



Size





When assembled the measurements of the couch are 78.5 times 32.5 times 32 in


When reclined the sleeping services of the mattress 44 x 23 x 78.5 "


Weight of the unit is approximately 86 punds


FAQs about the 4th best futon



How comfortable and sturdy is it?



It's designed for two sleepers so the wooden legs are pretty sturdy. One issue that we've seen people reporting is the risk of it tipping over if not pushed against a solid surface (wall)



Comfort



When it comes to sleep the user satisfaction rate was about 80% and we think it's fair to describe it as one of the most comfortable futon out there.



How well does it work for tall people?



Based on the measurements we would say that person taller than 6 feet might not be comfortable on it. It's described as two-persons sleeper but we have to say that that description is accurate for two people of average height and weight.



When reclined it's approximately the size of a full mattress which means that it's peg smaller than some of the models we've been on the list



Most comfortable futon - Pearington Bella pillow top



This probably one of the most versatile futons on the list. The metallic finish of the legs and the leather look of the pillows also make it one of the most stylish models.



Info:


Material





The upholstery is a bonded leather and the cushions of the pillow top are foam (high density)


This lounger is a bit heavier than the other products we looked at and it weighs approximately 100 punds


Dimensions - 70.9 x 37.8 x 37.34.7 inch


We feel it's accurate to say that this is one of the most comfortable futons among the products we looked at. In our comfort ratings it received a high 81 out of 100



What about heavy and tall people?



In our research we didn't see any potential issues for people on the heavier side but any person taller than 5.9 feet sleeping on it will probably have the issue of the legs going beyond the bottom base of the futon, is they are a back sleeper.



How do you work the recline mechanism?



To recline it you first have to disengage the lock mechanism. Once you do that you simply drop it back into horizontal position.



Durability



The bonded leather is pretty durable and tightly stitched so we'd say that the lifespan of this recliner will be a higher than most models. What makes it special is the high density foam of the cushions. The likelihood of any structural issues is substantially lower compared to the poly-fiber and foam filling.



The feel of the leather



It's made of PU bonded leather which is not what you would call "real leather" and we wouldn't expect that in this price range. What makes a difference here is how well the PU leather is made. You probably wouldn't be able to tell the difference just by looking at it. It's also known fact that PU is more durable and easier to clean than natural leather.



Best Choice Entertainment futon with cup holders



The "Entertainment" in the name of this futon is there with a good reason. The side cushions use Velcro are and removable, while the middle section folds down to expose two cup holders.



Fact sheet:





The dimensions of the sofa are 30 x 66 x 3.5 inches


In a flat position it measures 38.5 x 66 x 13 inches


The maximum weight capacity is listed at 500 pounds


Mainstays memory foam futon



Info sheet:





Weight - approximately 95 pounds


Material – suede fabric


Colors available - black and camel brown


Size 32.5 x 71.7 x 32.5 "


Materials of the filling that a combo of recycled foam and memory foam.


The maximum weight capacity in the instructions manual is listed at 600 lbs


Rated it 72/100 in the comfort category indicates that it's good enough for occasional night and having overnight guests. But, in the long term, there better choices out there like the above-mentioned Pearington pillow-top.



Kodiak futon lounger



Positions & settings



This Kodiak can be set to 3 position: lounge, sit and sleep. It's a solid choice for small apartment or a college dorm. It includes a tick comfortable mattress (about six inches thick).



The frame



The frame of the Kodiak is tick metal, powder-coated in black.



Size and weight details





Dimensions of the mattress 79 x 32 x 6 inches


Dimensions of the sea - 66 x 33 x 31 inches


I then lounge position it measures 72 x 33 x 31 "


The company describe the mattress as being 5-6 in. tick. This is due to the fact that it might take a few days to fully decompress on arrival.



Height



When measured from the floor the height of the frame is approximately 10 ", which means that (combined with the mattress) it's about 15 to 16 inch high.



Material of the body is a blend of cotton and foam (80% cotton and 20% percent foam).



Colors available



The only futon on the list that comes in this kind of color range from plain grey & black to bolder patterns like zebra or a range of floral.



How comfortable is it to sleep on?



Unlike the other futons we mentioned, the Kodiak is intended for one sleeper.



The maximum weight is not listed by the manufacturer but based on our experience and that of our expert consultants would say that the weight limit for the Kodiak is ~ 400 lbs.



Mosaic 18-inch full size futon mattress



First of all, we would like to stress that the images that we're including show a metal base.



Fact sheet:





Foam wrapped in cotton


Size 75 x 54 x 8 "


Weight of the unit 42 lbs


Reference info



What you need to know to choose the best futon



Futons and couches are both a great choice for small spaces. Both can be used as day furniture to sit on and are easily converted to a bed when needed. Let's say, you’re living in a dorm, a small apartment or need extra sleeping space for your guests, friends or relatives but you’re short on spare rooms. This type of furniture could very well be the answer to your problems. The dual function of these pieces means that they can be used in a playroom which can easily be transformed into a guest room at night. You could even use it in the office if you find yourself working long hours.



But how do you know which ones to choose? In the rest of the guide, you'll find out more about these types of sleepers and hopefully, it will make your choice less difficult to make.



Definition of a futon



A futon is a flexible, foldable mattress originating from Japan. Traditionally, it is placed onto tatami, a type of rice straw flooring, and set up as a regular bed with a pillow and a duvet. When not in used, it can be rolled up and stored or taken out to air and beaten to prevent the filling from forming into hard lumps.



The modern, Western-style models differ greatly from their Japanese counterparts and resemble more a low, wooden sofa bed. They correspond to the dimensions of western mattresses and are often set up on a slatted bench like frame which can be wooden or metal.



The frame folds down and converts into a bed. The thickness of the mattress varies from soft to very firm, so there is something for everybody to choose from.



The mattresses are made from compressed layers of materials which range from organic cotton, latex, and wool.The layers are tufted into place to keep the batting secure and ensure the longevity of the mattress. With proper care and a regular turn over, a good futon can last you between 8 to 15 years.



Since they’re so light in weight, they make a great bed for small households as they can be easily moved around, folded and stored away when no longer in use. One drawback of this type of daybed is that it is not very comfortable when folded upwards into a sofa position. Oftentimes they can feel lumpy and difficult to get up from. But don't let that discourage you, there are many more positives sides to owning one than negatives.



Even the best futons are very budget friendly and the mattress can be removed and replaced. They cost far less than a couch and are much easier to maintain. To keep it clean, you only need to remove the fabric cover and machine wash it. When it becomes worn out, it’s much easier and cheaper to replace than having to reupholster an entire couch or buy a new one.



To get the biggest bang for your buck, opt for a thicker mattress or consider adding a mattress topper. Most often, the thinner, cheaper ones end up being too uncomfortable to even sleep on, completely defeating the purpose of getting one of these.



How is it different from a couch?



Couch (also called a sofa bed) is a type of furniture that pulls out into a bed. Usually used as a daybed, it contains a folding mattress, partially hidden inside the bottom of the couch.



The foam of the mattress can be quite thin and soft since it is designed to fold and fit into to couch.



A sofa bed can easily pass under the radar and you won't even know from the appearance of it that it can transform into a bed. They come in many sizes and colors and can be the centerpiece of the room.



It is easy to find one that perfectly blends with room decorum and ties in with the rest of the furniture to create a stylish environment. Unlike the futon, which is more casual, there many different styles of sofa beds to chose from, both formal and informal.



They take a little more effort to set up than their simpler counterpart, which can be a drawback if you’re elderly or not particularly strong. To transform it into a bed, remove the cushions and pull out the tri-folding metal frame that contains the mattress. Many couches have a strap in the middle which you can pull on to take the frame out. Once that is done, you can then proceed to set your bed as you see fit. When not in use, the mattress folds back into the storage area and once again turns back into a couch.



A couch can be a fine choice if you’re someone that doesn't have guests over too often or don't plan on using it as a regular bed. Keep in mind that a good couch can be quite high on the price point and eventually they all give out and become uncomfortable to use.



This is due to the nature of the mattress, which is not removable like the mattress of a futon bed. With regular use, the mattress will become worn out and many begin to sag and lose shape after being used too many time. Over time you’ll be able to feel the metal bars and hinges underneath.



Cleaning a couch is not a simple task - it can even require special, professional help.



Unlike the futon which is light and easy to move around, the sofa bed likes to stay put. Its metal construction and mattress makes it bulky and difficult to move around and transport



But it’s not all so bad. Coaches make great center points of the room and a comfy place to lounge in and watch TV after a long day. Keep in mind when buying to spend a little extra to make sure the mattress quality is up to par and won't give out too soon.



Types of Futon bodies, frames and mattresses



Bi-fold


Bi-fold frames are made from two panels which create the whole body of the futon, the Sitting cushion, and the Backrest cushion. They fold into the sleeping position, lift up the sitting cushion of the futon.



Lounger



These are also known as the Space-saves and rightfully so, as they are the smallest of the frames. They come with an additional part for the legs that can be tucked away into the frame to maximise space. A twin-size Lounger is large enough for two people to use comfortably and takes up 45’’ inches of wall space.



Dropleaf



These are additional parts that can be included with the frame. A dropleaf frame has two side panels that serve as small side tables.



Foam



Fairly new on the market, the memory foam mattress is quickly becoming a popular choice among the people looking for something affordable but comfortable at the same time. This is because they offer equally support and comfort no matter the sleeping position. Compared to other types, foam mattresses tend to last the longest.



Spring foam



Reasonably priced and durable, these mattresses use quilt covered coils to create firmness and stability. On the downside, they tend to be quite heavy and difficult to fold. If you’re someone that uses their futon every night, consider a more flexible option.



Wool



Quite rare, but oh so soft and luxurious. Since wool is excellent at retaining heat, a wool mattress is an ideal choice if you’re someone living in a colder climate or get very cold, long winters.



Cotton



Budget-friendly and perfect in almost every way possible. They’re lightweight, flexible and hold their shape without sagging. Keep in mind that they might not last as long as a memory foam mattress would and will wear down sooner.



Foam and polyester



Blended types of mattresses most often offer the best of both world when it comes to comfort and the price point. The top polyester layer makes the mattress firm and supportive and since there is no cotton used, the mattress is very lightweight and easy to maneuver.



Foam and cotton



The plus side of this blend is that makes the mattress more supportive and more durable than it’s plain cotton counterpart. But on the other hand, they’re not as cheap.



Innerspring



These closely resemble a traditional innerspring mattress. The innerspring coils offer extra padding as compared to other types of mattresses and absorb the pressure points of the body. This means restful and relaxed sleep and superb comfort.



What to consider when buying a futon or couch



Think about the purpose your daybed will need to fulfill. Will you need it often or just sporadically? How much space you do, or better yet, don't have?



Measure out the space available



This is the most important part and it will determine the shape and the dimensions. You will want enough space for the sleeper to be able to lay out completely flat without touching other furniture. You will also need extra space to walk around and be able to freely lay in and get up.



Consider how often will you need to use the spare bed



Couches don't bode well when it comes to frequent use and will soon become uncomfortable to sleep on. The frequency of use will also determine your budget. If the bed won't be in use so much, consider a basic or a mid-range option.



Think about the material you would want your couch or futon to be



Wood and metal are two of the most common types of material used in furniture making. Keep in mind that futon covers are interchangeable and easy to clean while that’s unfortunately not the case with couches and you will be stuck with the choice that you’ve made.



Keep in mind your preferred sleeping position



While a side sleeper will choose something softer to sink their shoulders into, someone that sleeps on their back will prefer a firmer bed.



Couches come in a pullout variety and “click-clack” sofas. The dimensions of the pull-out sofa will also determine its style. Wider sofas will tend to have a shorter mattress, while smaller ones will be longer. The click-clack sofas are by far the easiest to operate. Think of more like a mattress with legs that can be folded up into a couch. The plus side of the “click-clack” coaches is that most often they will have storage space underneath intended for bedding and pillows.



Before buying either, make sure to check the mechanism and how easy or difficult they are to operate, set up, and change position. Inexpensive furniture may be light on the budget but it can also come with mechanisms that break easily and/or are difficult to use.



There isn't much to choose from regarding mattress quality or thickness when it comes to coaches. Generally, they’re all equipped with thin foam mattresses that fold easily and aren't expected to take a lot of wear. Futons, on the other hand, offer a wide variety of mattress styles and thickness as well as the materials used in the filling. Cotton filling tends to weigh less and will hold it’s shape nicely. For an even lighter mattress try going for a cotton-polyester blend. Not are they ultra light but also very flexible.



If you always wanted to know it’s like to sleep on a cloud, go for the cotton-wool blend but keep in mind they’re not as easy to fold. For an adult, consider a mattress that is a minimum of 6 inches in thickness.



Test the furniture you wish to buy in the store. It’s the best way to find out which one is the best choice for you. If possible bring your partner or family with you and share experiences before making the final decision. Make sure that you’re buying a piece that is comfortable both for sitting and sleeping



Invest into washable covers and cushions - not only will they protect your furniture, but they’ll also add a fashionable touch to the room.



The article Best futon – Top 10 picks – 2017 update is courtesy of The Sleep Studies By Bob Ozment







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/best-futon/

Types and common styles of futons – from a classic sofa to a comfy recliner

In today's guide we look at some of the basic facts about the futon.



People using the foot on today have one thing in mind the balance between saving some space and still getting a night of comfortable sleep. The origins of the Futon arose from that specific need in the first place they date back to ancient Japan, where big families needed a solution for their lifestyle which usually involved only one room.









The modern futon as we know it today started as humble mattress laid directly to the floor to save space.



It’s a piece of furniture with a storied history, so let us take a look at the the long travel from ancient Japan,to the a modern furniture pieces that found its way into the mainstream and modern home.



The basics – what’s a futon?



It's pretty comfortable sitting solution but it does not include springs (neither the mattress or the base) with makes which makes it a solid choice as temporary sleeping

Material of the futon mattress



Materials used to make a futon mattress range from high density memory foam to poly-fibre and cotton blends.



The futon frame



Your choice of a frame material will depend on interior design style that's dominating your home



Wooden frame this one will work best with the classic look of most spaces and some of these frames even allow for extra drawers, which is a nice plus in terms of storage space.

Bi-folding futon frames

The bi-fold frame is the most common one and it can be either wood or metal.



What we mean when we say bi-fold is that folds in half to transform a sofa into a mattress.



Love seat frame



The love seat frame is very different to the above-mentioned bi-fold and it's made to look much more like a real sofa

The foldable futon it smaller in size and designed to comfortable seat two people (hence the name “loveseat).



In terms of sleep it can (fairly comfortably) accommodate two kids or one adult.



Tri-fold frame



It's there in the name – the tri-fold futon frame is very similar to the bi-folds with the obvious difference being that it folds into three separate parts so that it can be used as comfortable lounger with slanted leg rests.

The tri-fold 3 is not as common as the other types we talked about.



Types of futon arms



Adjustable arms



This type of futon armrest allows the sidearm to be folded into a flat sleep position. It's a nice space saver.



Is it a smart way to make most of the space you have and it's a nifty solution for small city apartments.



Design styles



Classic



The classic style we see in most furniture pieces available today is pretty similar to a sofa.



It consists of a metal base mounted on either a wooden or metal frame.



Lounging futons



Opposed to the classic look of a futon, a lounger futon is a piece of furniture resembling the loungers that one commonly sees psychiatrists and psychologists offices.



The initial setup already looks much like a sofa bed and doesn't require any folding or setting up. To be used for sleep, you just throw a blanket or a cover and you got yourself a comfortable surface for those long cold November afternoons.



Bunk bed futon



Commonly seen in dorms and shared sleeping areas bunk beds with futon feature a metal base and are usually twin size.



The bottom is a futon sofa that reclines into a flat position while the top of is a classic mattress. It's also the most commonly used design for classic kids futons.



Modern arm-less style



The minimal lines of this futon style make it work best with modern spaces.



The mechanism is pretty simple, the back seat features hinges that simply fold back into a flat position and pop back up, usually using a lever.



Futon frame for the outdoors



Commonly used for porches or backyards, these the frames are usually designed to be a bit smaller but can also recline into a flat position.



The cover off the mattress used with this frame is often water-resistant to fit the needs of outdoor use.



The future of the Futon



Most people living in large cities and know that the issue of limited space is a real calm problem. With that in mind it seems that the popularity of the futon can only increase.



The race in the industry today comes down to new ways to save space while keeping the futon comfortable.



It goes without saying that there will always be room for sub-par products on the market which was the initial spark for starting this guide in the first place



We do our best to stay on top of the futon industry and track any quality changes so that we can report back in our main guide on best futons which you can see here and best futon mattresses which you can see here.



What to look for when choosing a futon?



Make sure that it comes from a reputable company that's time tested and trusted by owners



A good way to do this is to do your research before "pulling the trigger" and reading the experiences of the existing owners in similar living circumstances to your own.



If chosen right, a futon will be a nice versatile addition to your apartment and probably one of the most useful furniture pieces you'll ever get



As the years go by and the quality standards increase the futon will become increasingly closer to the comfort of standard sofa combined with the comfort of a classic mattress



Top futon brands



Well compiling this guide on the types and styles of a futon sofa, a few brands kept popping up as the most well-trusted. We list them below:





Divano Roma


DHP


Best choice product


MainStay


Pearington


Epic furnishing


OverRose


Zinus


Futon as a space-saver and portable bed



This chunk of the market is pretty competitive with the main “opponent” of a futon being inflatable sofas and foldaway beds.



The main advantage of the inflatable sofa over futon is the fact that it can be deflated and stored away into neat carry bag - you can see a guide on inflatable furniture and sofas here- https://thesleepstudies.com/best-inflatable-chairs-sofas/.



Final thoughts



A futon is a great piece of furniture when you're working with small spaces or entertain a lot of sleepover guests. It’s quickly becoming a mainstream piece of furniture, probably due to the change of our sleep habits, with apartments becoming increasingly smaller, especially in large cities.



The companies making the futons keep coming up with new ways to save space and make their products more comfortable.



Types and common styles of futons – from a classic sofa to a comfy recliner is courtesy of www.thesleepstudies.com







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/types-of-futons/

Bed frame for air mattress – 4 top-rated – 2017 update

Over the past few months we've received about two dozen of questions on the topic of choosing a bed frame for an air mattress.



We finally got some time to address the issue and give you some pointers on choosing the right frame.



One of the most commonly asked question is using a classic wooden frame that you'd otherwise use for a mattress Is that's your intention we're afraid we don't have good news because the structure of the wooden beams in most classic frames and the limiting sides make it practically impossible to use it. The slats are usually too far apart for proper support and it's the shape is boxed.



A good bed frame for an air mattress will meet three specific criteria:





The top surface will be as flat and smooth


The slats will not be too far apart - if they are, the airbed will protrude through under the weight. It';s likely that you, the sleeper won't even notice it before one of the inner chambers bursts or it starts loosing air.


No pressure points or "cockles" - this might be OK for your classic innerspring or foam mattress, but not an inflatable one


On another note, some inflatables are better suited for mounting on a frame than others, but more on that in a minute. Let us first take a look at our top picks.



Bed frames for air mattress - 4 top-rated



Stella metal platform frame









If storage space is not a big deal for you, Stella is just right - it ticks all the boxes we mentioned above and more. It is also the most stylish frame that still meets our criteria.



The most important factor here are the wider and thicker slates with smooth top coating. The former will prevent the pressure points from forming and the later will minimize the risk of a piece of wood making a pinhole in your inflatable.



It comes in all the sizes you might need for an inflatable: Twin, Full, Queen and King.



It's also the most stylish product on the list the beams are matte brushed gold or black, and will give your a space some extra pizzazz.



Design and stability: 95



Safe to use with an air mattress: 94



Durability, longevity: 93



User satisfaction: 90



Value for money: 92



Bottom line - the Stella frame ticks all the boxes we mentioned for using it with an airbed, it's the most stylish deign among our top picks and has an impressive user satisfaction %. If you are OK with the low profile (9 inches), it's the obvious choice.



PragmaBed Quad-fold foundation



Frames with steel bars (instead of slats) are closer to each other which offers better weight distribution thus lowering the risk of pressure points. Having said that, the bars are also not as broad as wooden slats and, although they are close enough, the best practice with any frame of this type is to use some kind of a protective layer between the frame and the air mattress (ideally a piece of plywood, but a tarp or even cardboard can do the trick).



Product details:



Material construction of the frame





Coating the finish of the PragmaBed frames is powder coated to be resistant to bed bugs and dust mites


Height of the legs is approximately 13 inches


Weight of specific sizes


Twin frame measures 75 x 38 x 14 inches and weighs about 27 lbs


Twin XL frames are 78 x 39 x 14 when folded and the structure weighs 27.6 pound


Full-sized frame weighs close to 44 pounds and the dimensions are 75 x 40 x 14 "


Queen - 47.6 pounds in weight / 80 x 60 x 14 "


King frame weighs approximately 55 pounds and it measures 8 inches in length and 76 in white, similar to the queen it's 14 inches high


California King - dimensions 84 x 72 x 14 in, approximately 54 lbs in weight


Assembly



One of the best parts about the PragmaBed numbers is the fact that they don't require any tools to assemble they are designed to unfold and securely lock into place in under 10 minutes however the full security you might need a wrench and screwdriver for the nuts and bolts



Best practice



Although there are no sharp edges on the top of the frame and air mattress is still made of vinyl and it can develop a leak with prolonged use. The best practice here is to use a piece of plywood or even cardboard as a protective layer between the top surface of the frame and the bottom surface of the air bed.



DHP Maven Platform



If you want something a more stylish frame for an air mattress, the DHP upholstered with metal sides and center beam might be your choice.



This frame comes with wooden slats. The slats are not as wide and thick as those used for the Stella, but the good part is that they are secured into place on both ends using sturdy fabric.



That does two things:




It adds stability to the structure and it protects the air beds from potential damage caused by the edges of the slats.


Assembly and design



From what we've seen in user experiences with this platform it's pretty easy to assemble. The company does offer expert assembly but it's our opinion that it's not really worth it because it costs more than the platform itself. It will work with most spaces because it comes in both white and black.



Design and stability: 88



Safe to use with an air mattress: 90



Durability, longevity: 92



User satisfaction: 86



Value for money: 88



Bottom line - if you prefer this lock the good news is that despite in spite of the luxuries look this frame is actually pretty affordable. It cost about 15-20 % more than the Stella and 30 to 50% more than the naked steel frame of the PragmaBed.



Zinus 14 Inch SmartBase



The Zinus 14 inch smart base mattress foundations by far the most popular and most budget friendly. It comes in pretty much all sizes from narrow Twin to California King



There are 3 available styles: the standard, deluxe and, the one we would recommend as an frame for an air mattress, the bed skirt style.



As we mentioned, with most frames (apart from the Stella) you'd have to add some sort of a protective layer between the frame and the airbed. The skirt of this Zinus is not only a tasteful touch that covers the steel frame (which is not a joy to look at) but also lowers the risk of damaging your inflatable.



Assembly and design



Assembly from what we've seen the assembly is pretty simple and most people don't use to add the extra cost of expert assembly, especially having in mind and that the cost is much higher than the frame itself. The height of the frames 14 inches who to give us plenty of storage space.



Design and stability: 88



Safe to use with an air mattress: 89



Durability, longevity: 93



User satisfaction: 94



Value for money: 95



Reference info on using a frame for an air mattress



What kind of air mattress works best mounted on a frame



This part of the guide will only be relevant for you if you are replacing your air mattress is an option or if you want to learn whether your existing inflatable is suitable to mount on a frame.



Chambers over beams



There are two types of inflatables in terms of inner design - chambers and beams, and the former pairs with a frame much better.



If you own one with a beamed design and you plan is to use it with a metal-bar frame, the risk of damage is lower if you choose a platform with bars that don't "run" in the same direction as the bars. The bad news is that most of them do.



Let's explain that more precisely with an example.



Most lower-end Intex airbeds have beams that run top to bottom, the same direction as the metal frames we looked at (image below). In this scenario, the bottom is more likely to protrude between the bars, thus putting extra stress on the inner seams and increasing the risk of one of the walls separating the beams will give in. That risk is somewhat lowered if the beams are side-to-side, like in the Simply Sleeper below.



Whatever the case, if you're working with beams and a metal frame, it's smart to have something in place that will stabilize the structure (like ply wood).



If the inflatable is chambered (like the Aerobed below) they will distribute weight better and, lower the chances of the mattress protruding between the bars and, in turn, significantly decrease the likelihood of air leaks developing.



Materials - durability and sliding



Airbeds that are most suitable for being mounted on a frame will meet these criteria:





The material of the bottom in not plain vinyl - flocked or rubberized (sure-grip) bottom will not slide. If you are not familiar with the term, a sure-grip bottom is nothing fancy and it's actually common in most better models made today (a good example of that is the SoundAsleep Dream Series - https://thesleepstudies.com/about-soundasleep-air-mattresses/)


Low-profile - this one is just common sense but let it be mentioned nonetheless. A raised model mounted on a frame is not a great idea, for obvious reasons.


Ideally you'll want to go with an airbed that's made of a strengthened material with a matte finish (the Simply Sleeper 47-T we mentioned above is a perfect example)


The alternative - getting an airbed that comes with its own frame



If you want the comfort of sleeping on airbed raised above the floor and don't want to deal with frames, the simplest solution is getting one that comes with a frame of it's own.



These models are called EZ beds and our top pick here is Insta EZ NeverFlat. Here's why:





The structure is designed to be on a frame from the get-go


The pump is "smart" (that's what the NeverFlat in the name refers to. This means that there's no risk of waking up on a deflated mattress - the pump includes a pressure sensor and quietly ads air through the night if it registers a change in pressure.


No assembly required - these are plug-and-play. You just turn on the pump and it automatically unfolds and locks into place with zero action required on your part. It's actually fun to watch it set up.


It deflates and packs into a portable case. A nice plus if you want to pack it away during the day (takes less than 4 minutes) or bring it along on trips.


see it here - thesleepstudies.com/insta-bed-ez-air-mattress-queen/



Putting it all simply - the most common scenario



We tried to cover all scenarios and make this guide as detailed as possible and, for most people who already own an airbed, it might seem overly complicated. It isn't.



If you reached this page, chances are that you are looking for a frame for an air mattress that's in your home right now. If that's the case, you can't go wrong with the first frame we mentioned - the Stella.



It's only frame with a sturdy construction that will feel like a regular mattress paired with an inflatable rather than feeling "wobbly" and sliding. So, if you don't want to overthink it or hassle with adding plywood and whatnot, it's our recommendation to go with the Stella frame.



Bed frame for air mattress – 4 top-rated – 2017 update was first seen on https://thesleepstudies.com/







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/bed-frame-for-air-mattress/

Thin and small air mattresses – our top 12 picks – 2017 update

The results and top picks among thin and small air mattresses and pads are based on statistical modeling of over 3,100 user experiences as well as interview with some of the most prominent names in the camping blogosphere.



This is the 4th update and, this time around, we have broadened the scope to provide a more well-rounded list of recommendations - you'll see our top picks among classic airbeds, self-inflating, regular and ultra-light pads.



You'll see the products rated in 5 quality categories and then summed up into a single number - the Overall Rating.









12 top-rated thin / small air mattresses



Therm-A-Rest NeoAir XTherm



The NeoAir XTherm was one of our top picks since 2015. It's by far the top-rated classic pad and, frankly, it's hard to see that changing in the foreseeable future.



It's the only pad with consistently high user satisfaction rate of over 94 %.



What's better about it?



There are pads our there that weigh 7-10 times as much and have a much lower R-value.



When Therm-A-Rest introduced it, it was a mini-revolution in the industry. Here's what makes it the best:





Legit 4-season claim - there are many pads out there that claim to be all-season of four-season, but a fraction of them genuinely deserves the label. Below are a few reasons why.


The Triangular Core Matrix - it's what allows the pad to insulate the sleeper so well using so little material.


4-layer design - the bottom layer of the triangular baffles "absorbs" cold (or heat) of the ground without transferring it to the top sleeping surface.


ThermaCapture technology used for the top - simply put, the material used for the top reflects the warmth your body produces back. This basically turns you and the air around you into a cocoon.


Non-slip texture of the top material minimized sliding and shifting, which is a common issue with lower quality pads, especially when used with a sleeping bag that's also synthetic


Bottom line - there's no classic pad that comes close to the balance between temperature isolation, comfort and size. We'd like to stress that we did not receive any "free sample", just in case this review reads like over-praising. This is just an all round superior pad, as simple as that.



Top picks for women



NeoAir X-lite & NeoAir XTherm MAX



We've been talking and exchanging emails with the top brands for years and one question that keeps popping is regarding their efforts to make a pad to accommodate the specifics of what a woman needs in a pad.



We feel like there's too much of "pink-it-an-shrink-it" and call it a product for women.



The difference in the way a woman and a man sleeps is nothing to be shrugged off, it's a real issue. Women tend to be cold sleepers and need more insulation and comfort, especially in the hips and legs area.



We feel that two products do a great job at doing just that - the Xlite Women's and NeoAir XTherm MAX.



Who will choose which?



The former will be the pick of women who are of a smaller frame and the later with be the choice of of both men and women with a larger frame.



Top value for money - Klymit Static V Lightweight



This Klymit is a runner-up among classic pads and it deserves a mention because it is much more budget-friendly option than the Therm-A-Rest products we mentioned above.



It's the highest rated pad in the category of "value for money" and the only pad in its price range with consistent user satisfaction rate of over 90%.



The high R-value (4.4) and the low weight and packing size (25 oz and 5 x 8") make it a unique pick in its price range.



Bottom line - the Static V is the pad that we're singling out in terms of value for money There are pads of similar quality, comfort and isolation but most of them cost 2-3 more.



Top classic pick among small and thin air mattresses



LightSpeed Outdoors TPU



This is category we didn't feature in the last update, and it was a mistake. The negative feedback that we received is from people looking a small and thin air mattress...and not a pd, but a classic full airbed.



This Lightspeed stands alone



What's different about it is that it's one of the few air beds out there that uses TPU fabric (instead of vinyl). This is what allows one of the two things that makes it lighter



The other is the unique size - it's between a Full and Queen size (79 " long, 55 " wide) and it's the thinnest air bed out there (sitting at just above 6 inches high).



Bottom line - the main advantage of the LightSpeed Outdoors TPU uses the fact that TPU fabric is lighter and less stretchy than vinyl. This means that they it can be thinner and lighter without being less comfortable.



It's also surprisingly low-priced - we tested and reviewed 106 air beds (and counting) and most of the products with similar quality ratings cost anywhere from 70-300 more.



Top pick among double pads



KingCamp Light



A single unit is a much more practical solution for two people.



The issue is - the choice you have among double pads / airbeds that are thinner than 4 inches are very scarce and we feel that this KingCamp is the obvious choice.



It's surprisingly light for a double (only 7.7 lbs) and tit features a convenient leg pump - inflation time is about 2 minutes.



Bottom line - with a user satisfaction of 85 % the KingCamp Light had no real competition among double pads.



Top pick among raised models



SoundAsleep Twin



This is an raised airbed for home use, it's a category we didn't have in the guide until this update.



The choice was pretty simple - we're going with the product that's currently by far the most popular for home use - the SoundAsleep Dream Series.



With a user satisfaction rate of 91% and an Overall Quality rating of 9.2/10, it's one of the top-rated products overall since it hit the market in 2014.



Top pick in single-sized



One of the categories that's very scarce in choices, because not many brands choose to make the size.



Among the limited choices, we're going with Zaltana Navy Blue.



It has a satisfaction % of 67, which is is substantially lower than a vast majority of models we reviewed over the years. So unless space is really tight and your needs can only be met by a single-sized inflatable, we'd recommend going with a better product - like the SoundAsleep Camping Series - you can see it here - https://thesleepstudies.com/soundasleep-camping-series-air-mattress-review/



Top pick among self-inflating pads



Therm-a-Rest ProLite Plus



If you know the landscape and the price range in the industry, you know that getting a good self-inflating pad can be a bank-breaker.



The ProLite Plus is not in that category. It costs a fraction of what similar pads from premium, trusted and time-tested brands.



The downside



The one CON that stands for all self-inflating pads is that they don't pack as small and light as a classic pad. They use open-cell foam, which means that the padding of the foam adds bulk and weight.



The upside



The PRO is that, if punctured, a self-inflating pad will not become useless - the padding of the foam still offers enough padding to sleep on, even if you can't patch the leak.



Bottom line - this pad is at the sweet spot in terms of value for money vs. comfort and weight.



There are cheaper pads among the self-inflatables, but they don't really come close to the user satisfaction ratings (91%) of the ProLite Plus.



Klymit Inertia O Zone



The o Zone is somewhere between a classic pad and an ultralight frame pads.



It weighs just over 12 oz, it's 1.75 " thin and packs down to 6 x 3 ".



What makes it more comfortable is the unique design of the pillow chamber that inflates separately.



Bottom line - in the low-weight range, Klymit has the Static V series (classic pads mentioned above) and the ultralight Inertia Series.



This pad is designed combine the best of the two worlds - the comfort of V Series and the lightness of the Inertia. The competition in this category is fierce and what gave this Klymit the edge is the price - it's significantly more affordable than products of similar quality and ratings.



Top true ultralight



Klymit Inertia X Frame



Among the true ultralights, our pick is the Inertia X Frame.



As the name suggests, it's based on using a frame of baffles strategically aligned to provide support at vital points.



It's choice for ultralight hikers and backpackers when every gram matters.



Why it's our pick



This category was very close. What gave the Inertia a slight edge is the price point and the warranty.



The technology that goes into making a pad that weighs under 10 ounces is costly, but the Inertia is one of the pads that won't break the bank.



More importantly, it's backed up by a Lifetime Warranty - which you almost never see the industry.



Reference info and FAQs



Small air mattress - choosing right



Choosing a small air mattress that will be just right for your needs comes down to getting your basics right - the dimensions and the material.



Small air mattress for camping



In the scenario, you'll need to adjust your choice to the tent floor. If the sides are slanted and you're working with a high-rise, you'll have to do the math and adjust your choice by taking into account the angles of the tent sides.



Small air bed - home use



For home use, choosing small air mattress is a peg simpler. It comes down to measuring the space where the inflatable will go, looking at the specs and reading the reviews to make sure that the product you have your eye on is true to size.



Thin air mattress - materials



To choose a good thin air mattress, you'll have to take a nice hard look at the material. In order for the airbed to be as thin as some of the models we mentioned and still be comfortable, it will have to meet certain criteria.



Material - you noticed that our top picks are unique in terms of the material they're made of. That's because, for a thin air mattress to meet the minimum standards of support, it has to be sturdier and less stretchy.



Thin air mattress - inner design



For camping use, you'll want to go with either high number of chambers of a layered baffle for the inner structure. Those two designs are superior in terms of durability and weight distribution.



FAQs about the Klymit Static V Lightweight



What is the weight limit for this product?



There is no certain weight that would cause the sleeping pad to pop- however after around 300 lbs the chances of it bottoming out start to increase. Distributing weight evenly over a larger area stops this from happening.



Does it comes with an air pump?



No, but it’s really not needed with this sleeping pad. A few good, deep breaths are enough to blow it up. In case there is a need for a pump, one can be used with the right valve adapter.



How quick is it to deflate and pack up?

To deflate the pad, open the valve and roll it up. To get the remaining bit of air out, fold it sideways twice so that it’s the same width as the bag and roll it up. When packed, it’s very small, thin and lightweight.



Will it keep warm in cold weather?

Since it’s inflatable, it will keep you off the ground which does help with the cold to some degree. However, the pad itself has no insulation. A sheet of home insulation under the pad will add a bit of warmth if you’re using it outdoors.



Is it waterproof?

Yes, the material the pad is made of can handle damp and wet conditions just fine. It is suitable for difficult camping conditions as well as dry weather.



What is the R-value on this sleeping pad?

R-Value: 1.3



Since this is a blow-up mattress, are there any issues with mildew growing after a while?

To avoid moisture building up in the pad, store it unrolled with the air valve open in a dry environment. Avoid humid places like the garage or the attic.



Would it be suitable to use in a hammock?

The way that it’s made allows it to easily crease and bend to adapt to the surface it is on.

Meaning it would be perfect to use in a hammock since it is soft and comfortable.



What material is it made of?

It’s made of lightweight, durable nylon that inflates very easy and packs up small.



Is it washable?

To clean it use mild soap and water but never machine wash. By using the washing machine to clean the pad, you risk ruining the seals on the product.



Does it make crackling noises?

It shouldn't make any uncomfortable noise. But to make sure it doesn't, the pad should be blown up as tightly as possible.



Will it fit inside a sleeping bag?

As long as the sleeping bag is approximately the same dimensions as the pad or larger it should fit without a problem.



What are the measurements?

72" long, 23" wide, 2" high when rolled and packed.

3" diameter by 2" long. Weighs 18.1 oz.



FAQs about the Therm-A-Rest NeoAir XTherm



Is the pump included?

There is no need for a pump. The way you blow it up is by scooping air into a nylon sack attached to the mattress and squeezing the air in. The idea behind is to have as light and compact air mattress as possible for backpacking or hiking trips that don't need any special accessories to fill it up.



What is the R-value?

R-value is 5.7



Is this mattress noisy when you move?

It does produce a little bit of noise but nothing intolerable.



Does it come with a carrying pouch?

Yes, it does.



How can I repair it in case it tears?

Special Therm-a-Rest Repair Kits are available. But in case you find yourself without one, repairs can be done by using products commonly found in any shop that specializes in outdoor gear.

For maximum effectiveness, make sure that your mattress is clean and dry before starting the repair. For a smaller leak, a urethane based glue should be used. Dab a small amount of glue, enough to cover and seal the hole completely and let dry for 24 hours. For an instant repair, you can use a peel-and-stick bicycle tube patch on the whole.

For larger tears use a self-adhesive fabric patch. These can be found in outdoor gear shops. Cut the patch to size and apply a small amount of urethane based glue to the back of the patch and around the area you wish to cover. Stick the patch on and press firmly, wiping away any excess glue. Allow at least 24 hours to dry before blowing up the mattress again.



What can I do in case water gets inside the mattress?

Open the air valve and roll up the mattress to force the water to come out. Depending on the amount of water in the mattress, you might have to repeat this a few times. Once all of the water is out, hang the mattress upside down in a warm, dry place with the valve open.

It might take several days for it to completely dry.



How do I clean it once it gets dirty?

Cleaning with warm soapy water is recommended. The easiest way would be to place the mattress, with the air valve closed, in the bathtub or shower and wash with mild detergent.

Keep in mind, to never use the washing machine to wash it.

For more stubborn stains like tree sap or tar use a cotton rag soaked in rubbing alcohol. To eliminate any residual stickiness dust lightly with talc or baby powder when you’re done with the cleaning.



Once deflated, does all air come out?

Yes, the majority of air will come out of the mattress once deflated. To deflate, simply open the air valve and roll the mattress starting from the bottom up.



FAQs about the OutdoorsmanLab Ultralight Sleeping Pad



Is there a chemical/plastic smell?

No, it’s odorless. No chemical smell at all.



What are the dimensions of the pad when inflated?

The dimensions are 73 inch x 21.6 inch x 2.2 inch.



How small is it when packed up? How much does it weigh?

It is about 6 inches in diameter and 12 inches long when packed. Overall, very small and compact, weighing only 15 oz. with the sack.



What is the recommended weight limit on the pad?

Around 200 pounds



I plan on camping in the colder climates, will this pad be a good choice for that?

The pad has no insulation, so it’s not designed for very cold weather. However, using an insulation pad underneath should fix that problem.



Does it comes with a repair kit?

It comes with two patches but no glue. Any epoxy or strong adhesive will do the trick.



Can it be washed?

Yes, but hand wash only with warm water and mild detergent. To drain any excess water, hang the pad vertically. Since it’s waterproof, it should dry fairly quickly.



Is it good for ground insulation in a tent?

Its R-value is 1.3, so no. It wouldn't provide enough insulation to keep warm.



Does it come with an air pump?

No need for one. To inflate it simply blow air (breathe) into the air valve. An average of 15-20 deep breaths is enough to fill it up completely.



What kind of fabric is this pad made of?

It’s made of ultra lightweight, ripstop 20D, silicone coated nylon fabric.



How well would it work as an insulation in a hammock?

Considering it is not made for low temperatures, it might not do much for you if you’re using it colder conditions. However, if you place it underneath or inside of your sleeping bag, it should help to keep you both comfortable and warm. It would be ideal for outdoor trips in fair, warm weather.



How noisy is to sleep on? I’m a light sleeper and I’m worried the sound will wake me up

The pad is relatively quiet and doesn't produce any loud or uncomfortable sounds. It should be ok to sleep on, even for a light sleeper.



Could it be overinflated? I’m worried it might pop.

How much air goes into the mattress depends completely upon you. The mattress should be inflated just enough so it is firm and keeps you off the ground. The nylon fabric it is made of is very strong so there is no need to worry about it suddenly bursting.



Does it slide?

The drawback of the ultralight nylon is that it has no grit, it’s very smooth and so it will slide off of almost anything. You can use sleeping pad straps to prevent that from happening.



FAQs about the top pick among small air mattresses



LightSpeed Outdoors TPU



Which batteries do I need for the pump?

4 type D batteries



Does it smell bad right out of the box?

The issue with most airbeds is that they will have a plastic, chemical smell to them and will need to be aired out. However, this is not the case with this mattress. It has no unpleasant odor and can be used straight out of the box.



Is it treated with flame retardants or any other harsh chemicals?

No, it has not been treated with any chemicals that pose a risk to your health



What are the dimensions when inflated?

The dimensions are 55"x79", slightly smaller than a queen size mattress. Large enough to fit a 4 person tent and yet, it's



What are the dimensions when deflated and folded up?

Deflated and rolled up into its storage bag, the mattress is about the size of a sleeping bag. Approximately 2x2x1 inches with 12’’-18’’ in diameter depending on how tight you roll it.

The storage bag is quite spacious, so the mattress will fit no matter how you fold it.



Is it comfortable enough for side sleeping?

The comfort level (firmness) can be adjusted to your liking by how much air you pump in. This may take a little bit of trial and error but it is possible to adjust it to your preference.



Can it be easily popped by an animal, i.e cat or a dog?

Almost any air bed is at risk from being damaged by a pet. To add an extra protective layer try using a light mattress protector and a fitted sheet on top.



Can the pump be used with a cigarette lighter adapter rather than batteries?

No, it can only be used with batteries



What is the weight capacity?

It has been tested up to 500 pounds of weight, which is the maximum it can carry.



I’m planning a backpacking trip and I’d like to know the weight of the mattress without the pump.

When deflated, it weighs 5 pounds, 8 ounces without the pump. Keep in mind that this is a bulky, heavy mattress. It takes around 10 minutes to fully inflate with the pump. This particular mattress would be great for car camping. Consider a smaller sleeping pad as a more practical option for backpacking.



What is the warranty on this product?

The mattress comes with a 1-year limited warranty provided by the manufacturer. The warranty starts from the date of purchase.



Can it be used on water?

It’s not designed to be waterproof but it can withstand a little bit of liquid. However, it is not recommended to be used as a pool toy/mattress.



FAQs about the Klymit Inertia O Zone



What is the overall length of the pad, including the pillow?

The total length is 72’’. The exact dimensions of the entire pad are : 72" x 21.5" x 1.75"



Is the pillow detachable?

No, the pillow is the part of the pad and it’s not detachable. There are also pads without a pillow available as well as separate pillows.

The pillow has a separate valve, so it is completely up to you whether or not you wish to inflate it.



Is it flexible enough to fit into a hammock?

The material used to make the air pad is soft and it shouldn't have an issue forming to the shape of a hammock. Keep in mind it is not insulated, so you will need some sort of insulation between the hammock and the pad.



How do I inflate it?

You only need a few strong breaths to inflate it. It is designed so that there is no need for a bulky air pump. When deflated and rolled up, it packs up really small. The size makes it ideal for backpackers.



High off the ground does it get once fully inflated?

The air pad is 1.75’’ thick.



How big is it when fully deflated and packed up?

It packs down really small. About the size of a soda can. Once rolled up and packed up in its bag, it weighs 12 ounces.

The exact measurements when packed are 3.5" x 6"



What material is it made of?

The top is made of 30D and the bottom from 75D polyester fabric.

The fabric is incredibly lightweight and resistant to tears and punctures.



Does it come with a repair kit?

Yes. A patch kit for emergency repairs is included with the pad. It comes stored in a small integrated pocket located at the top of the storage bag.



What exactly is Body Mapping?

Body mapping is a technology used in producing the Klymit air pads that allow them to be ultra-lightweight and compact while adapting to the contours of the body.

The cutouts, also called loft pockets, increase warmth by trapping air underneath you and increase the breathability of the pad when used in warm conditions.



What is the R-value?

Klymit Inertia air pads use the warmth (R-value) of your sleeping bag and as such don't have an R-value of their own. The R-value depends entirely on the quality of your sleeping bag and any other insulation you use with it.



FAQs about the Klymit Inertia X Frame



Does it come with a bag?

Yes. It comes with a stuff bag large enough to fit both the pad and the pump.



Does it come with a repair kit?

Yes, it does. It comes stored in an integrated pocket on top of the storage bag. The repair kit includes several patches made from the same material as the pad.



Would it be suitable for side sleepers?

It doesn't offer much support when lying on your side. This pad would be much better if you’re someone that likes to sleep on their back or stomach.



What is the total weight, including the pump?

The pad weighs 334 grams with the pump and the stuff bag. Both the pump and the pad are very small when packed up and take up barely any space.



How long does it take to inflate?

It’s fully inflated in as little as 3 to 5 breaths. A hand pump is included for a quicker inflation and higher PSI. The design of the valve allows for micro adjustments of pressure and comfort.



Can I use it inside my sleeping bag?

Yes, it can be used both inside the sleeping bag and underneath it. Using it in the sleeping bag keeps the body on the pad the entire night, without slipping off.



How do I clean it?

To clean your pad, wash in warm water with mild detergent and hang to dry. If you have a stubborn stain or if the pad is really dirty, mix 2 cups of water with 1 tablespoon baking soda, wipe down with a washcloth and rinse thoroughly.



What are the dimensions of the pad, both inflated and deflated?

When inflated the size of the pad is 42 x 18 x 1.5 inches. Deflated and packed up, it is 2.5x5x5 inches



FAQs about the TNH Outdoors pad



What is the size of the pad when rolled out?

71 by 22 inches (1.7m)



What is the R-value?

R-value is 3-4. It is not the warmest of sleeping pads, but it’s thicker than most foam pads and offers greater insulation.



How do I inflate and deflate it?

The pad will start to inflate on its own once you’ve removed it from the compression sack and unscrewed the air valve. To finish fully inflating the pad, place your lips around the air valve and blow air into it. Once you’ve reached the desired firmness, screw the valve back to the “closed” position.

To deflate, simply unscrew the air valve, fold the pad in half lengthwise and begin to roll tightly, starting from the bottom up. This will push the remaining air out. Once completely rolled up and empty, tighten the valve to stop the pad from reinflating on its own and place back into the compression bag.



What are the dimensions when deflated and packed?

When stored in the carry bag, the pad is 5 and ¾ inches in diameter and 11 and ½ inches in length



Is it waterproof?

Yes, the pad itself is water resistant, however, the carry pouch isn't.

The weather conditions would have to be well into the extreme to experience any problems that might affect the use of the pad.



Is the pad treated with any kind of flame retardants?

No, unfortunately, it isn't. It’s not recommended to be very near an open flame.



Is the pad noisy when you move around?

Not at all. Probably one of the quietest pads on the market today.



What is the weight limit for this?

It can take well over 400 pounds. It was designed and built to be reliable as well as comfortable.



Can it be used on a cot?

As long as the dimensions of the cot are compatible with the pad, there shouldn't be a reason why not.



The blog post Thin and small air mattresses – our top 12 picks – 2017 update was originally published on https://thesleepstudies.com







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/thin-small-air-mattress/

Valerian root vs Melatonin for sleep and anxiety – which works better?

A good night’s sleep is critical for both, your physical and mental health, affecting your mood and general well-being. If you are reading this, I am sure that you have experienced the stress of not being able to wind down and dose off, especially after a long day. After numerous attempts to fall asleep, that can even become hours of tossing and turning, you become desperate to get relief from sleep deprivation.



The good news is – there is help! In their attempts, people usually reach out for medication that will help their body relax and get a good night’s rest. Besides prescribed drugs that you need a doctor’s referral for, there is a variety of over the counter aids that can help. In the text that follows we will compare two most common natural sleep aids.









Valerian root vs Melatonin for sleep



When it comes to comparing Valerian root and Melatonin in terms of sleep, the difference is pretty clear.



Valerian is milder while Melatonin has a more direct action.



Let us explain - as it gets dark your pineal gland secretes Melatonin that sends the signal to your brain and body that bed-time is close. On the other hand, Valerian is more of calming and relaxing agent and it works by promoting GABA (neurotransmitter that has the role of blocking impulses among nerve cells).



To put it simply - Melatonin might be the option if your main problem is falling asleep while Valerian might be your choice if the problem is staying asleep. Being a hormone, Melatonin is more likely to be habit-forming.



They work best in synergy



The most popular sleeping OTC sleep aids include both because they complement each other. Let's explain - if you're suffering from insomnia, it would take high doses of Valerian to put you to sleep and with the high dosages, it's common for people to report feeling fatigued the next day.



That's why a touch of Melatonin makes it easier to fall asleep while Valerian lowers the chances of waking up though the night and keeps anxiety issues at bay.



You can see the highest-rated supplements based on the Valerian-Melatonin combo below:

https://thesleepstudies.com/best-valerian-root-reviews/



More about Melatonin



A hormone that naturally occurs in every living animal and plant, although it has different roles in each. In animals, the pineal gland produces it and its function is to help regulate wakefulness and sleep.



The hormone also defends from oxidative stress. We, as mammals, naturally produce it. However imbalances may occur, especially as we get older, most commonly resulting in insomnia, anxiety and headaches. Supplementing this hormone goes a long way in improving sleeping patterns and reducing stress. It's also known for its positive effects when used for overcoming jet lag or alternating shifts.



The crucial part is to be careful now to take too much of it - we've recently published a guide on whether you can overdose on it and how much it too much - you can see it here - https://thesleepstudies.com/can-you-overdose-on-melatonin/



Valerian



It has a long history of treating sleeping disorders, especially in Europe, that dates back as far as the 16th century. This herbal, organic medication has been approved by the main worldwide drug associations, including the FDA (US Food & Drug Administration).



The herb works as an anti-anxiolytic, lowering anxiety levels. To put it in layman terms, It influences the GABA receptors in the brain through allergenic acid that reduces stress, anxiety and sleepless nights by acting as a sedative. However, with time, it is possible to develop tolerance towards the herb. Unlike hormones, this is a herb extract working in synergy with your brain.



You are probably wondering what it looks like in its natural form. Well, it is a perennial flowering plant, it has white or pink flowers that have a sweet scent and bloom in the summertime and their height can reach 1.5 meters.



Valerian root vs melatonin - safety and habit forming



The former is herb while the later is a hormone. It's a short leap from there to understand that a herb that has an influence on your brain is safer and less likely to form a habit.



Any hormones we introduce to our body sends a signal to the gland making it that there is now an outside source. In the long term, that can be a cause for the gland to become "lazy." It's something to talk about with your MD.



In terms of side effects, both are considered pretty safe in recommended doses.



Availability



Both aids are pretty common supplements and can be found in nearly any drug or health food store. Due to this, its price is pretty standard. However difference in quality can be an issue as some, not so ethical, suppliers use cheaper raw materials in order to boost profits. To be on the safe side, it is best to go for a supplier that engages unbiased third party testing to confirm purity and quality. The next question you probably have in mind is which product is right for me? It is just a matter of listening to your body’s needs and preferences. Make a distinction between your needs to fall asleep and to stay asleep. In the end, you know your body (and your MD) know what works for you.



Make sure you always read the dosage instructions on the packaging.



Always take sleeping supplements just before bedtime, rather than during the day, as they may cause drowsiness. To help enhance the effect of natural sleeping aids, you should try to improve your habits such as limit you napping during the day, introduce a daily exercise routine, try to avoid caffeine and similar stimulants before your bedtime, do not consume fatty, heavy foods right before trying to fall asleep.



Avoid consuming alcohol with sleeping aids, as they can cause low concentration, drowsiness and have an overall sleep-inducing effect. Beware of other possible drug interactions. Long term use without consultation is not recommended, so if your problems persist, be sure to consult a professional. If you notice any unusual symptoms or side effects, stop using the supplement immediately and consult a professional.



The main benefit of natural alternatives compared to prescription capsules is the absence of side effects such as agitation, dry mouth and addiction, being the most dangerous. It is not uncommon that, for people dependent on prescription sleep pills, this soon this becomes the only way that they can rest. Withdrawal symptoms can also be difficult. The good news is that many people say that natural sleeping supplements start working straight away. Also, given that health insurance is one of the most common issues in many countries worldwide, another good side to these solutions is that, since they are available off the shelf, they can reach people that do not have health insurance and therefore may not be able to afford seeking proper help by visiting a doctor.



Hope you found this information useful.



Sleep tight...



The following post Valerian root vs Melatonin for sleep and anxiety – which works better? is republished from https://www.thesleepstudies.com







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/valerian-root-vs-melatonin/

Best reclining sofa and best recliners for back pain and heavy people – based on 1300+ user experiences




The results you’ll see below are based on consultations with 4 furniture repair experts and statistical modeling of over 1300 user reviews of the recliners.

About 8 months ago the experts helped us make the initial picks of 17 products. We then analyzed all the user experiences and used that data to get to the quality ratings you’ll see below.

reclining sofa black featured image

What are you looking for?
This guide is split into 3 sections – click one of the buttons below to skip to the section you’re interested in.

Best reclining sofa / Best recliner for back pain / Best recliner for heavy people

According to the user satisfaction ratings, this is by far the best reclining sofa.

Best reclining sofa - Homelegance bonded leather
Homelegance was also one of the first brands our panel of furniture repair experts mentioned. What they stressed is the fact that it’s one of the brands with the lowest %s of malfunctions – whether it’s the classic mechanism or the power sofa (it comes in both versions).

The firmness and loft are in the medium range and what we’ve seen is that 92 % of satisfaction with the comfort.

More info:

Materials:

Leather (PU, bonded)
Percentages – Polyester (74), Leather (18), Cotton (10)
Width of the seat: 21 “
Colors available: black and brown
Design of the armrest – rolled with tufted channels and nail accents on the side
Height of the armrest: 25 “
Mechanism – double-reclining levers for the classic and power mechanism for the power recliner
Dimensions: 90 x 38.5 x 40 “
Also available: chair and loveseat in matching colors
Best recliner chairs – Merit Glider Club & Esright Ergonomic
The “race’ was too close for us to pick only one recliner – both the Merit and the Esright ended up with pretty much the same ratings overall.

The choice between the two will come down to your preference – the Merit is more of classic and it’s a “beast" in terms of comfort and size.

On the other hand, the Esright is the obvious pick if additional features like massage and heating are a factor for you.

Let’s take a moment to analyze what the two recliners have to offer.

Merit Glider Club
The overfilled baffles for the back make it unparalleled in terms of balancing support, comfort and value for money.

We’ve seen products with similar features, frame and material quality cost 300-400 % more than the Merit Glider.

The depth and width of the seat is (21.75 x 22.5m x 19.5 “) is at the sweet spot to accommodate most body frames – including people on the heavier side. The height of the sit is 36 “.

The recline mechanism is classic – meaning that the footrest comes up as you tilt the back. The mechanism is easy to unlock and lock back into place just by pressing your legs against the footrest.

Bottom line – if you’re not looking to spend a fortune on a recliner, the Merit Glider will exceed your expectations.

Best recliner for back pain and top value for money – Esright Ergonomic Heated Massage Chair
When we started working on this guide about 8 months back and we saw this Esright on the list that our furniture repair consultants put together we didn’t think it will find it’s way to our top picks.

Why?

Because when we see the word “massage" we expect a hair that costs thousands.

That’s why we were taken aback by the price – it’s a fraction of what similar chairs cost. And that’s not an exaggeration – chairs with a heating and massage features go for 500-800 % more than this Esright.

The reason behind it is that most of these high-end models come in classic leather, while this Esright is PU. The good part about PU is that, if well-made like it is with this chair, it looks and feels just like real leather and it’s more durable, resistant to stains and spills and easier to clean.

For us, as well as most users we talked to, the point about it not being real leather is moot. In fact, we’d choose this Esright over the crazy expensive leather models even if they were much closer in price - if you ask us, this Esright is THE best recliner for back pain.

Bottom line

There’s no better recliner for people with back pain out there. The one-piece arched design of the back-rest relieves the muscle tension along your spine and the nerve pressure that’s the cause of back pain in a vast majority of cases.

Add the massage and the heating feature (5 control modes and 2 levels of intensity) and you’re left with one question, “How in the world is the price tag so low?"

Best recliner for heavy people – The Stallion 500
People on the heavier side HAVE TO be extremely picky about what they spend their money on.

In these 8 months of putting this guide together – we’ve seen it all. Most products that claim to be heavy-duty had with no clear substance behind the claims…majority not even listing the capacity of the chair.

That’s what different about the Stallion 500
The 500 in the name stands for the capacity of 500 lbs and it’s by far the highest we’ve seen.

More importantly,we were able to confirm the claims by sifting through every experience of users we could find. The Stallion 500 is THE best recliner for heavy people, and the "race" is not even close.

If recliners were people, the Stallion would be the Hulk.

Reference info about choosing the best reclining sofa:
For most homeowners, one of the costliest items they purchase is the sofa. This single item of furniture must be durable, attractive, and comfortable. It also has to be ageless, able to “go with the flow" when decorating tastes change. The choice becomes even more difficult when you are looking for a living room sofa with multiple uses, such as a sleeper sofa or reclining sofa. With that in mind here are some guidelines to help you make your ultimate decision.

Fitting a Reclining Sofa
The foremost requirement for a reclining sofa is that it fits. It should fit the room, certainly, but it should also fit the person who will be sitting in it. Sit in the chair for at least 5 minutes in the showroom. Your feet should reach the floor to ensure comfort. Does the headrest push your head forward when you are in an upright position? Are there bumps in the padding or upholstery? When the recliner is fully extended, does it still fit your body? There should be proper lumbar support when reclined, as well as support for your lower legs and comfortable positioning of the headrest.

Choosing Foam
Foam density is a major indication of the comfort and durability of any piece of furniture. Foam density also affects how well the cushion keeps its shape. Upholstery foam ranges in density from 0.9 to 2.5. For a recliner which will see a lot of use, look for a foam density rating of no less than 1.9. This will be more comfortable, and the recliner sofa will keep its shape better than less-dense foam.

Frame and Structure
It is really easy to overlook the need for a good structure. Shoppers get caught up in upholstery fabrics, styles, textures, cost, and colors, and forget to look under the sofa.
If possible, look at the underside of the sofa. If the salesperson won’t turn the sofa over, ask to see the print materials for the furniture. Here are some things to watch out for:

“Solid wood" and “Real Wood"
These are designations that can be used for press-board. This is simply sawdust and wood chips that have been suspended in glue and pressed into the shape of a board. The end result is a weak plank with no wood grain running through it. There is no inherent strength to the plank, so screws will strip out of the board. In addition, this type of board is not strong enough to stand up to the rough life of a recliner. Pressboard is soft and fragile, breaking down over time.

Fasteners
Take a look at the fasteners that hold all of the mechanisms together. Are they plastic or metal? Plastic screws will break from the constant movement of the mechanisms of a sofa recliner. The screws, themselves, should be substantial rather than small.

Hardwood
The frame of the sofa should be made of solid hardwood such as birch, poplar, or oak. It is more expensive, but at least the sofa will last until you are sick of it, instead of breaking down before you have it paid off. Hardwood runs about $1000 more than the cheap stuff.

Plywood
The next top choice for frame materials is plywood. High-quality plywood is made of layers of wood glued and pressed together. These layers run in alternating directions, and can produce a nice, strong product. If you can see the edges of the plywood, look for “voids." These are what appear to be holes in the edge of the plywood, and indicate poor quality construction. This is the type of plywood used to frame houses. You want furniture-grade plywood. Good plywood construction will cost about $300 more than the base rate.

Warranty
You have probably had the experience of an item breaking the week after the warranty runs out. But, look for a reclining sofa with a warranty, anyway. Look for a warranty that will cover manufacturers’ defects and defects in materials for at least 3 years.

Upholstery
Now that we have the structure chosen for the new recliner sofa, let’s start choosing the upholstery.

Color
The first thought that comes to mind is that you may want the sofa to “match" something else in the room. If this is the case, most decorators advise you to select something in a neutral color. This will make it easier to change your decorating style or color theme.

Fabric
Most families, these days, move toward durable, washable fabric such as microfiber. This fabric is resistant to punctures and doesn’t scratch. A reclining sofa with microfiber can be very comfortable.
Printed upholstery fabrics vary in durability and thickness. In general, decorators suggest that you select a pattern that will not dominate the entire room. A small to medium print is preferred. Printed fabric also tends to hide small indiscretions that stain upholstery.

Leather
If you have allergies to either the environment or your pet, you may want to go with leather upholstery. There are many kinds of leather, with different levels of comfort available. Some leathers are so soft they scratch easily and look “used" rather quickly. Others are such thick leather that there is little flex or comfort offered. Do your research on different types of leather so that you will find one that is comfortable yet durable.

There are 8 types of leather used in upholstery. The top 3 picks are:

Full Grain Leather: The most expensive, it is the least processed leather. It will be stiff at first, but soften with use.
Top Grain Leather: Very similar to full grain, this leather is buffed, making it softer from the outset.
Split Grain Leather: When the top layer is removed from a hide to make top grain furniture, the lower section of the hide is used for split grain upholstery. It is harder to the touch and harder to maintain. Don’t confuse the texture with full grain leather.
Special Features
There are many different features available in sofa recliners. Some of them have flaps on the side which you pull out to activate the mechanism. Others have levers for the same purpose, or simply respond when you push back on the armrests. Still others have electric motors that recline the chair.

In keeping with the electronic theme, you can also find reclining sofas with built-in heating pads. Some models have laptop plugs and USB charging stations built in.

There are also the options that have storage built into the arms or center console. You can buy them with cup holders and remote caddies. Other sofa recliners have articulating headrests and offer your choices in reclining positions.

Cost
Reclining sofas vary in cost according to construction quality and fabric. Technically, a sofa has 3 seat cushions, while a loveseat has 2 cushions. Reclining sofas may be full-reclining, meaning that the middle seat is also a recliner, or it may be dual-reclining, meaning that only the two cushions on the ends are reclining seats. The two models on the ends will be operated with a flap-lever, a handle-lever, or a power switch, while the middle recliner will be operated by pushing on the back of the sofa. All of these features will affect the cost of the sofa.

Best Power Recliners
Power recliners are those that have buttons on the side rather than levers. They are operated by electricity. Power buttons will add about $200 to the cost of your recliner sofa.

Microfiber Upholstery
A microfiber full recliner sofa will cost between $1,300 and $1,500. These will be manual recliners with the inset flap-lever for operation. Some will have the handle-lever action. More intricate stitching will add to the expense of the sofa. For example, a sofa stitched with the details of an automotive bucket seat will add another $200 to $300 to the recliner sofa cost.

Leather-Look Upholstery - PU leather
You can upgrade to a leather-look recliner sofa for $200 to $300 more. However, while modern leather-look fabrics look and feel nice, they dry out and become stiff and cracked after a few years.

Leather Upholstery
It is uncommon to find an entire sofa upholstered in leather, since it is so expensive. Usually, you can find a leather recliner sofa that has leather seats, but vinyl has been used on the sides. This reduces the expense of the sofa. A sofa made with these materials will cost about $100 to $200 more.

Upscale models
Upscale models that are made with hardwood and metal mechanisms rather than plastic cost between $1,000 and $3,000 more.

General Cost
So, in general, the prices a leather/vinyl full-reclining sofa will range anywhere from $500 and a couple of thousand. For our top picks, we included the category rating of value for money, which means that our top-rated models are in the lower range of the price range.

If you want a durable piece with hardwood and metal, rather than particleboard and plastic, you will pay between $1,900 and $2,700 for a microfiber piece, and $2,800 to $4,100 for a leather, fully automatic recliner sofa.

Your quest for a good reclining sofa is fraught with peril. Don’t settle for the pretty, “real wood" model on the showroom floor.

FAQs about the top picks:
About the best reclining sofa
How far does it recline?

It’s not full-reclining, it goes back to about 7-10 % incline.

Assembly and size on arrival

It arrives in a big box including all the pieces needed for assembly:
The couch base (about 24 “ wide), backs of the chairs (three of them for the classic size), and the two sides. So, there should be no problem getting it through the width of average doors (30-33 wide doorways and up)

What if I have a narrower doorway?

If your doorway is especially narrow (like 28"), it can still pass. Some of the screws do stick out and you might have to remove those to fit it through.

Is it easy to assemble?

It shouldn’t take more than 15-20 minutes to assemble – you just slide the parts as described in the instructions.

Is it any good for tall and heavy people?

The leather is PU, so it’s heavy duty and more durable and resistant to damage and scratches. The loft and the density of the foam is solid enough to be comfortable for a people on the heavier side. However, the frame is not sturdy enough for and we’ve seen reports from heavy people that it gives in fast under weights over 300 lbs.

You can see our pick of the best recliner for heavy people here.

For tall people – we measured the dimensions between the bottom of the seat to the top of the head cushion and it’s about 28 “. The headrest cushions are broad enough to be comfortable for people of different heights, including tall.

If in doubt, measure the distance between the bottom of the seat to the to of the head rest of the couch/sofa chair you have and compare that to the 28 inches we mentioned for this sofa.

Is PU leather real?

No – PU leather is faux. It’s made from splits of the hide and then finish with polyurethane to make it more durable. It performs very well in water-resistance and fading tests. The main advantage of the PU is that any accidents and spills are easier to clean.

And of course, there is the fact that PU items are much cheaper.

How does PU look?

If made well, PU passes the look test…we dare to say that even professionals working with leather can’t tell the difference without examining it closely.
Is the inclination of the loveseat the same as the chair?

Yes, the inclination of all the items is the same as it comes close to a full flat position, which makes it good to sleep on.

Does the loveseat come with ports for USB?

No, there’s no port to be used for plugging in a USB.

What is I have a cat, how does the PU hold against the claws?

PU is a durable material, more so than real leather. But with cats that are aggressive to furniture you are likely to see some scratch marks. It’s very unlikely that your pet can do any significant damage, but as far as the scratches go – yes, you might see some marks with prolonged use.

If that’s your main concern, click here to read our top picks among cat-proof couches and sofas - https://thesleepstudies.com/cat-proof-couch/

How far should I place it from the wall?

The manufacturer recommends about 12 inches of clearance between the unit and the wall. The clearance is needed so that you can comfortably use the inclination angles without damaging the walls or the sofa.

Manual vs. power?

Based on what we’ve seen, it’s the experience of most owners that the manual levers are very easy to use and most of them don’t think that the power option justifies the extra cost.

Final thoughts
It did take more than we expected to complete this guide, but now that we have it, we believe it's the most complete source of information to help you choose the best reclining sofa for your money as well as the top options for heavy people and those with back pain issues.

The last point we'd like to make is that we update our picks quarterly or bi-monthly, depending on whether we see any significant signals or red lights about changes in quality of the products.

We do it to make sure that what you're reading stays relevant.

The Sleep Studies Team


Best reclining sofa and best recliners for back pain and heavy people – based on 1300+ user experiences is republished from https://thesleepstudies.com/







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/best-reclining-sofa-back-pain-heavy-people/

Low air loss and alternating pressure medical air mattresses, pads and overlays- 2 Top-rated products

The results you're about to see are based on over 18 months of consulting with 6 personal care professionals, followed by a statistical modeling of over 800+ user experiences.



This guide took just under a year to compile, but we wanted to make sure that what we publish is reliable and helpful.



We present 3 highest-rated products.



Drive Medical Med Aire system - best overall



This Drive Medical is both a low air loss and alternating pressure mattress. The alternating pressure mode can be turned off and the mattress used in a "static" mode".



The head region is static, meaning that that top 3 baffles are firmly in place while the rest of the chambers alternate, which eliminates the need for extra cushioning or pillows.



The low shear cover is permeable for all vapors and resistant to fluids. The capacity is 450 pounds and the dimensions are 80 x 36 x 8 inches. As shown in the image, the set comes with a cover pump, included at no extra cost.



It's made of 20 "deep-bladder" baffles and each of them is removable. The CPR (crankcase pressure regulator) inflates and deflates quickly.



Bottom line



This Drive Medical is an advanced and well-thought out system we found. The pump is "smart" so that it returns to an alternation if left in static mode for longer than two hours.



It's also equipped to handle power outage - design of the baffles (cell-on-cell) keeps it inflated for 24 hours during power outages - it also prevents a common issue with lower quality products - bottoming-out.



Most importantly - the combined power of the two pressure relief systems does a better job at minimizing maceration and distributing. It distributes weight in a way that's superior compared to products that feature only one of the two systems. This is THE system to go with



Drive Medical backs this product up with a 1-year limited warranty.



Vive alternating pressure pad / overlay



This Vive is by far the most popular among alternating pressure pads and overlays. An important difference between this Vive and the Drive Medical (above) is the fact that the former is meant to be used as a pad or overlay for an existing mattress while the later is a standalone product - mounted directly onto the frame of the bed.



The other crucial difference is that this product uses only one pressure-relief system (alternation), and the Drive Medical incorporates both. Pads and overlays like this Vive are meant to be used for less severe wounds.



The 130 heat-sealed chambers minimize the chance of potential air leaks and can support up 300 lbs.



Bottom line



While looking into the manufacturing practices and the user satisfaction ratings, we were honestly left in awe about the low price tag of this Vive, especially having in mind that the pump comes included.



Vive stands behind their product with a no-questions-asked warranties - 90 day for the pad and 1 year for the pump.



Lateral rotation mattress - Micro air by Invacare



On the high-end of both features and price, you have the Invacare lateral rotation mattress.



The experiences with lateral rotation mattresses vs. manually turning the bed-ridden person are mixed. Most of the personal care experts we talked to recommend manual turning when possible. The rotation mattress, however, is huge plus for night-time turning.



This Invacare is based on their patent called z-cell technology and can turn up to 40 degrees.



Reference information:



The construction of has improved significantly over the last decade. Alternating pressure air mattresses are used in medical facilities now, such as hospital rooms, rehab facilities, and nursing homes, because they are better for the patients. But, how do they work?



What is a low air loss mattress?



It is basically, an air-conditioned mattress made of air bladders that are inflated for the patient’s comfort. However, the bladders are manufactured with small air holes in them.



This means they constantly “leak” air. The purpose of this is to help prevent bedsores.



As the air leaks out of alternating bladders, it wicks away moisture at contact points between the mattress and the patient’s skin. By keeping the skin dry, the mattress helps to prevent bedsores. These bladders are automatically re-inflated once they reach a minimum setting of inflation, and the process begins again. Some models circulate over 100 liters of air every minute, keeping the patient dry and cool without drying out medical dressings.



At no point is the patient unsupported on any section of the unit. The air loss and re-inflation take place on alternating cylinders so that there is no loss of support.

The patient does not feel that the bed is deflating beneath them; rather, if anything, they have the feeling of floating. The pumps themselves vary in noise level, but most are designed to be whisper quiet so as to not annoy the patient.



What is an Alternating Pressure air mattress?



It's the type of a medical air mattress that uses the the pump to quietly removes air from the alternating cylinders in the bed. This creates a wave motion which gently shifts the patient’s weight slightly.



The head of the unit does not have cylinders that deflate. This helps to make their sleep more comfortable. As for the alternating cells, patients seldom notice the changes, since they are quite gradual.

They have a cycle time, during which the air is completely changed out in each cell at least once. This cycle time can be adjusted, but the average choice is 10 minutes.



Combination of the two technologies



Most health workers agree that, for more serious injuries (stage 3 and 4) the best mattresses for bed-ridden patients are the combination of the two technologies. The patient receives the benefits of the air-flow against their skin, preventing bedsores, while the patient and caretaker both benefit from the technology. It allows caretakers to deflate one side other, in order to turn or transport the patient.



Adjusting the choice based on wound staging



As of April 13, 2016, the National National Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel updated their terminology and adjusted the guidelines for wound staging. The main change is a shift from "pressure ulcer" to "pressure injury.



You can see their full guidelines here.



Types of medical air mattresses



These specialized units are valuable in health care situations both in the hospital and at home. They are available in two forms: as an overlay, and as an entire system.



If you order an overlay, you will need a mattress on which to put the system. This will serve very much as a topper and is usually used for stages 1 and 2 wounds.



A replacement system is self-sufficient. These are typically more expensive, as an entire bed would be.

Other Types of Therapy.



Some models offer additional therapies. Lateral rotation, for example, will constantly “rock” the patient from side to side. This is not a fast action, but does keep the patient constantly, gently rolling from one side to the other. This helps to reduce the risks of pneumonia and other pulmonary problems. It also helps to stimulate the gastrointestinal tract because of the shifting of the patient’s weight. The improvement of circulation and pressure relief help to prevent bedsores.



Pulse mode is available on some products. This setting will reduce the air flow in the pad every few seconds. It will reduce to 50% of the chosen setting, then re-inflate.



Medical Uses



Hospitals have never been recognized for their innate comfort. But, what about people who are bed-ridden for long periods of time? Critically ill, injured, or recovering patients often develop bedsores from pressure points. Otherwise called pressure ulcers, they are most common on the heels and ankles, as well as the tailbone and hips. Elbows and shoulders are also prone to bedsores for patients with extreme immobility. The best way to combat this is to move the patient regularly. This relieves the pressure on those specific spots, allowing circulation to resume, keeping the skin and flesh healthy.



Manual Alternating Pressure Mattresses, pads and overlays



These products have proven to be invaluable to the medical community for the relief of bedsores. Some models require manual operation to achieve the change of pressure. In these cases, the angle of the bed is changed and the operator can inflate or deflate sections of the bed with an electric pump.



Automatic Alternating Pressure pads and mattresses



More specialized products are available that offer more focused control. Each of these has a series of airtight bladders that are individually inflated from a mounted pump. This pump will inflate and deflate the bladders as programmed. This significantly increases the comfort of the bed and helps to improve circulation.



By changing the air pressure, the caregiver can keep circulation going without having to turn the patient as often. It also keeps fluid flowing and circulating through the patient’s system, delivering nutrients and medication.



Another benefit is that they can be programmed to change pressure every 30 minutes or so. This helps the patient rest better and contributes to overall skin and joint health.



Aid for Caretakers



Some models will even help turn a patient. The bladders or air chambers can be over-inflated on one side of the bed and under-inflated on the other side. This helps to painlessly turn the patient. This not only aids in circulation and skin health, it helps with sinus drainage. Models are also available with transfer capability, meaning that it will automatically inflate and deflate as needed when transferring a patient to another bed, a chair, or to a standing position.



Skin Health



These are available with anti-shearing zones. These are located at the head and foot, and are designed to prevent shearing of the heels and scapula.



Safety Improvements



In addition to making a patient more comfortable, there are some safety features included in many alternating pressure mattresses. One is the static perimeter. This will deflate automatically if a patient becomes trapped between the bed rails and the sides. There are also settings on some models to keep them inflated in the case of a power outage.



Configurations of a low air loss mattress



There are a couple of different configurations. All types are made of air-filled bladders, but the construction varies. Some models are made with parallel bladders, most commonly running across the width of the bed while others have chambers that inflate vertically, much the same shape as coils in a traditional bed.



These air bladders are available with a variety of inflation patterns. Some of them have 3-way alternating inflation. It can be set automatically to keep the patient comfortable for long periods of time, or it can be manually adjusted for individual comfort.



Sizes of an low air loss mattresses and alternating pressure pads



The most commonly purchased size of an alternating pressure mattress is Twin. The typical model is 8” thick after inflation, while the pads are much thinner. However, there are models that are thicker than this. They are not usually used in medical or care facilities. They are also available in larger sizes from a limited number of manufacturers.



Low air loss vs. alternative pressure mattress



There is no one-size-fits all rule and the choice of low air loss vs. alternating pressure mattress (or models that come with both) will depend on the severity of the injury as well as the weight and mobility of the bed-ridden person.



Based on the statistical analysis reviews, the most versatile products are those that are a combination of the two technologies for pressure relief like the Drive Medical we mentioned. Some models have switches that will operate the option for about 20 minutes and then switch off. However, most people prefer ‘round the clock option.



Health care professionals appreciate the aid in turning patients afforded by an alternating pressure mattress. However, the technology does not eliminate the need for turning patients to prevent bedsores.



FAQs



Low air loss mattress Medicare requirements



The Medicare requirements are one of the most commonly asked questions - you can see the exiting requirements here.



Are they only for hospital use?



No. They are also intended for home use. A hospital-sized pad can be placed on a bed at home. It can also be deflated and packed for a trip. They usually have a flap at the head and foot that can be tucked to prevent slipping.



How noisy are the pumps?



The pumps are very quiet, and often go unnoticed in hospital rooms with other medical equipment operating. Some say that the pump sounds a little like a ticking clock. Since the pumping technology is so intricate, providing inflation to different cylinders individually, the pumps are usually separate, rather than built-in.



Are these they complicated to set up?



Despite the intricate tubing systems that keep the cylinders inflated, most people say that the they are easy to set up.



Do they smell bad on arrival? Will it need to be aired out?



The better ones are made of vapor-permeable materials to minimize the odor.



In terms of the out-of-box vinyl smell, that quickly dissipates, even before the set up.



Do they take long to set up?



They sometimes have a longer inflation time at the beginning, up to 45 minutes for some models. However, these models will stay inflated for a day if the electricity goes out. Some of them have a cell-in-cell structure that assures a minimum amount of inflation at all times, while others incorporate layers of cells, one of which remains inflated.



Who invented the medical air mattress?



As we know it today and as it was presented above, the medical air mattress as we know it today was patented by the Picard Healthcare Technology. The patent was filed on June 10 of 2011 and published on Dec 13, 2012. You can read more on the Google patents page here.



Some people fear that their unit is defective because after a few minutes, they don’t see it inflating. Give it time, and you will see bumps forming where the air is entering the cylinders.



Are they easy to deflate?



Most come with a CPR tag. This can be removed to deflate the unit in an emergency.



What do I do if there is no air coming out of an outlet?



Since most of these models use alternating air currents to regulate inflation, it's advisable to wait and see. Air will probably come out of that outlet in a few minutes, when that side cycles on.



What is a CPR valve and why it's important for medical and bariatric use?



A crankcase pressure regulator or CPR valve is a way to reduce the pressure and control it so that it never rises above the pre-set firmness. the quality and reliability of the CPR valve plays a big role in the overall quality of the product. For this guide, we specifically looked into the manufacturing practices and potential issues with quality if the production of the valves is outsourced.



How long does it take to inflate?



Depending on the, thickness and volume it can take anywhere from a few minutes for pads and overlays to 45 minutes with more intricate systems.



What to do if one section is not inflating?



If a section seems to be lagging in inflation it doesn't necessarily mean that the product is faulty. A common issue that can cause the problem is a kink in the hose supplying the air to the baffles.



How to choose the firmness settings?



If your well-adjusted to the weight, there should be no bottoming-out.



Below is a step-by-step guide on how to perform a "bottoming-out test" and adjust the firmness accordingly.





When to perform a bottoming out test on an alternating pressure air mattress?


The test should be performed each time the patient goes to bed and each time you change the position or inclination of the base.





Use low-friction gloves so that you can easily slide your hand underneath and pull it out


The test is to be performed when the unit is inflated and the alternation has begun


The person should be laying on their side or back for the test


If there is a zip-cover, unzip it to about 60-70% of the length (covers are usually zipped top-to-bottom, which means that the lower third can remain zipped)


Do touch-test in the area below the pelvic and buttock region, usually one of the few cell sin that region will be less inflated and softer to touch


Slide your hand between the person and the cells that you determined to be softer


The rule of thumb - you should be able to easily insert your hand and the clearance should be about 2 inches, which is approximately one wrist-high


If you have problems and it's difficult to slide your hand in, it's an indication that the firmness should be higher. Adjust the setting and wait for a few minutes until the pad is fully inflated


If the clearance is higher than 2 inches, it might indicate that the firmness setting is to high. the rule of thumb is that the person should be immersed 30-50 % of the height of the top cells. If the immersion is lower, decrease the pressure settings, wait 10 minutes and repeat the test.


Re-zip the cover and remember to always perform the test when changing the inclination.


What if you puncture a cell?



With full mattress systems, the baffles are usually separate and can be replaced by getting a spare directly from the manufacturer.



Cleaning the pump and pads / cells



Use a damp cloth with a bit of a detergent (choose a mild one) for the pump and try choosing a spot that keeps it safe from dust. Best practice for cleaning the body of the unit is to use a mild laundry detergent for the cells and the cover (if there is one). After cleaning the surface, give it time to fully air dry.



Updates of this guide



The part of this guide mentioning specific products is updated quarterly so that we can keep the information presented relevant.



The Sleep Studies team



The post Low air loss and alternating pressure medical air mattresses, pads and overlays- 2 Top-rated products was first seen on https://thesleepstudies.com







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/low-air-loss-alternating-pressure-medical-air-mattress/

Melatonin and other calming aids for cats and dogs – top 5 picks from experts & their ratings

Over the last year, we have gathered a pool of data to finally complete this guide on top picks among sleep and calming aids, from dog and cat calming sprays, collars and treats to Melatonin-based chews.



The initial picks of 28 products was made by 4 experts we consulted and we'd like to thank here. This guide would not see the light of day without you guys - Jess and Robert from Back Bay Canine, Aaron and Jon from CAD Angel.



After narrowing down the search, we proceeded to gather a pool of data from a range of online sources and processed it using our proprietary rating system. the results you'll see below are fruit of this lengthy process.



Click one of the two buttons below to see our top picks.



Dog calming aids



Cat calming aids



Best dog calming aids



Calming bites by Zesty Paws



Calming bites has by far the highest user satisfaction rating of all the dog calming treats we looked at - a whooping 91 %.



What's better about it



The formula is all natural and made using only organic ingredients, but that's not what makes Calming bites the best dog calming aid among edibles. It's not the only product out there that's organic and safe.



What is it better?



Three main reasons:





Because the complex formula (25 ingredients) is balanced to calm them but (just as important) it doesn't make your pet lethargic.


Because the natural turkey and bacon flavor that, according to our stats, 94 % of dogs loved.


Because it's safe - GMP certified and US-made, both crucial.


Bottom line - two main issues we've seen with lower-quality products is that they tend to make your pet drowsy or they don't want to touch the "treat" in the first place because of the taste.



Calming bites has superior stats in both those areas - we've seen only 3 % of owners mention the drowsiness issue and only 2.7 % reported that their dog doesn't like it.



Adaptil dog calming Diffuser



This Pheromone-based dog calming diffuser has a user satisfaction % of a whooping 92%. It's THE choice if you're looking to calm your pet during both if you have a ornery rascal and if for specific situations (like anxiety and fear during thunderstorms, new home or visit from unfamiliar people).



It uses the calming potency of pheromones to appease them without turning them dull and emotionless. It was the first pick of out vet consultants and it turned to be the superior diffuser of the 4 we looked at. According to our data, it worked as advertised in 9 out of 10 cases.



Cat calming aids



Composure Pro Bite - top pick among cat calming treats



Cats are very tricky when it comes to edibles and out of 14 products we looked at Composure ProBite is the only product among cat calming treats one with a user satisfaction rate of over 90%.



More importantly, we've seen no close runner-ups and we feel like Pro Bite was the only one worth mentioning. Other similar products we looked have a very high %s of the cat refusing to touch the edible because they smell and taste like medicine.



The chicken flavor of the Pro Bite seems to be the only cat calming treat that tastes like the real deal.



Cool Kitty - best cat calming spray



Cool Kitty is a natural pheromone-based cat calming spray, it's the the highest-rated formula with a user satisfaction rate of 86%.



Just as important, the formula is very simple and safe, doesn't contain any paraban-based chemicals and NO Lavender. The later is important because recent studies show that Lavender is toxic for a feline.



Bottom line - you should be cautious with sprays, because some of the products have been in the market for years without any change to the formula. In those years, the body of studies about chemicals that are toxic for your pet has grown (like lavender).



That's why we stayed away from "blends". Because if the ingredients are not precisely listed, a calming blend might include a harmful chemical.



Cool Kitty contains natural pheromone, jasmine & passion flower and none of the potentially harmful chemicals.



Comfort Zone Feliway cat calming diffuser - top pick



By far the most popular among users, this non-pheromone cat calming diffuser has a user satisfaction rate of 86 %.



This diffuser is covered by a full warranty meaning that, if it doesn't work for you simply send it back and get a refund. ThunderEase is the kind of the hill. It's been clinically tested and proven to be effective with a 90% success rate. It's not pheromone-based, but on a formula designed to "mimic" the soothing effects of pheromones.



What we've seen with this diffuser is that the satisfaction rate fluctuates based on how long you've been using it, it significantly increases after about a month.



So, if you do decide to give it a go, we recommend getting a diffuser with at least 3 refills.



How do dogs sleep?



Depending on the size and breed, their sleeping requirements will vary. While some breeds seem to only want to nap and be lazy, there are also some breeds that are constantly active and you’re wondering where do they even get the energy.



Long hours



Adult canine will spend around 12 to 14 hour sleeping per day on average while a puppy sleeps even up to 18 hours per day, sometimes, even more, depending on the breed. Approximately half of their day will be spent on sleep and 30% of being awake but inactive.



The remaining 20% is reserved for their most basic needs such as eating, walks, and exercise. "Seniors" require a significant amount of sleep due to their age. As your they age, certain illnesses will begin to develop such as arthritis and other ailments. Living will become increasingly more difficult and they will naturally spend most of its time where it’s comfortable.



If they are is sleeping more or less than the average it is no cause for alarm. Every dog is different and their behavior and needs greatly depend on the breed, gender, and age as well as the environment.



Nap time



While you’re away at work and there isn't anything to stimulate your furry best friend, the chances are they will be spending their time blissfully snoozing- or chewing the couch cushion.



It's normal for them several short naps during the day and the duration of those naps depend on the breed and the personality. Larger breeds require a lot more rest and will generally spend up to 18 hours in total sleeping. Puppies, just like human babies, will tire out easily. Their time is spent playing and exploring their surroundings, which is very exhausting when you’re just a small curious pup.



Dogs that get enough activity and exercise in their day will also spend longer periods sleeping to recover their muscles and rest.



You will notice that your pet can not wait to slump down and sleep after a long walk or a run around it the ark. As much as they love play time, they also love to catch some Zs.



Dreams



The topic of whether or not dogs dream has long been up for debate in the science world. The behaviors and the noises that your pooch makes in their sleep seem to indicate that they do dream. Dreaming is the state of sleep in which the brain processes all of the things it has experienced during the waking state. So for your dog that might be a dream about a walk in the park, that pesky neighborhood cat that keeps teasing him or his favorite chew toy. Scientists have discovered similarities in brain activity in both humans and dogs during REM state, further confirming the theory that they do have dreams.



During REM phase they'll will make yelping noise, growl and sometimes even bark. They can go as far as moving their legs as if running and make sudden jerking motions.



In comparison, canine are much more active during REM phase. You might even say they “talk” in their sleep. If you see them twitching and it persists on regular basis you might consider dog melatonin to soothe them.



The importance of exercise



Dogs that do not get an adequate amount of activity and exercise during the day will often sleep a lot longer than those that do. In some cases, they may even suffer from insomnia. Not getting enough mental stimulation can be detrimental to the mental health as well as their overall well-being.



If they are active during the night when the rest of the family is asleep, it is most likely that it didn't get enough activity and slept throughout the day. Insomnia in dogs is most common in smaller breeds in urban environments that do not get to experience enough outside stimuli or run regularly. 30 minutes a day is a bare minimum of activity to keep them happy and healthy. Even more for the bigger and working breeds. To combat the issue of insomnia, leave interesting puzzle-like toys around the places where the dog spends most of its time. This will mentally stimulate themand motivate him to play, instead of going to sleep. These toys dispense a small treat if tampered with in the right way. This creates a positive association for the dog that if he finds a way around the toy he will be rewarded.



Indication of health



Changes in your dog's sleeping habits can be a good indication of their health. if there is a health issue, they will spend even more time sleeping and will not be energetic upon waking up.



If your furry friend is usually very active but now seems lethargic and sleepy, it is a good time for a visit to the vet’s office.



Dog Melatonin



This neurohormone occurs naturally and might be the solution to sleep problems. The body of studies suggests that it is useful, especially if the anxiety is caused by separation issues or night phobias.



Dog Melatonin - is it safe?



Although natural, melatonin is still a hormone and should be used with due diligence. The side effects are not common but when they do happen they come in the form of: stomach upset and cramps, agitation, elevated heart rate and, even less common, fertility issues.



Dog melatonin - dosage



The doses listed below are provided for reference purposes only, the exact dosage should be determined by your vet:



Dosage based on weight:





100+ lbs - 3.5-6 mg


30-100 lbs - 2.5-3.5 mg


10-30 lbs - 1.4-1.6 mg


Under 10 lbs - 1 mg


Cat and dog melatonin brands



Based on our research and stats, these are the 10 most well-trusted cat and dog melatonin brands:





    K9 Choice dog Melatonin


    VitaCalm


    NaturVet


    MelaVet


    PlanoPaws


    VetriScience Laboratories


    Elite Pet Nutrition


    Zesty Paws


    Deley Naturals


    Particular Paws


How do cats sleep?



Our furry companions are true champions when it comes to putting in long hours of sleep. There is no place or circumstances that could stop a cat from getting some shuteye.



But why do they sleep so much and what goes through their kitty minds when they’re asleep.



This information below will help you better understand the reason behind their sleeping habits and behaviors.



It’s genetic



Depending on your kitties age, they can sleep for as much as 16 hours a day, even as much as 20 for a senior. This is a result of years and years of evolution that has affected their physiology, nutritional habits, and behavior. Between meals, they will conserve energy with by getting a nap. A short period of rest to digest what they ate and to prepare for the next “hunt”.In the wild, they had to stalk and hunt their prey in order to survive which burns a lot of energy. Nowadays this behavior has been adapted to play fighting, chasing toys and crazy night marathons just as you’re about to drift to sleep.



One eye open



About three-quarters of the time, they spend sleeping is reserved for what we might call “a snooze”. Snoozing is a type of a short, light sleep that will give them all the rest it needs while staying alert at the same time. This is another evolutionary trait, should a threat appear, they are is ready to fight or flight. You can tell if they are is “snoozing” if their ears are lightly twitching or following the direction of the sound and their eyes won't be shut all the way. The wonderful things is that they can nap even when sitting upright. You never know when a nap might get you, and these tiny predators come prepared!



If you fee like this is issue, you might try soothing them using some of the sleep aids out there that include Melatonin for cats.



Daydreamers



Naturally, cats are crepuscular, meaning they’re at their most active during twilight hours, just as the day is ending. Their wild ancestors would spend all of the hours in the day sleeping and hunt in the night when the visibility is low. The structure of their eyes allows them better-seeing ability in low light which means they can see their prey in the dark and the prey will not know what hit ‘em. In the case of the modern, domesticated feline the toy mouse is also none the wiser.



Deep sleepers



As you might be already able to tell, they take sleep very seriously. Which is why the remaining quarter of their sleeping hours go towards deep sleep. "Seniors" can spend about 30 to 40% of their time in a deep sleep. As they age, their sleeping needs changee. This is to accommodate their changes in digestion and energy preservation.



When in deep sleep, they will lay curled up with their eyes closed tight. Sometimes they might even hide their faces with their paws and tail. Deep sleep is a crucial part in the regeneration of their body and keeping it healthy, this is also the point when the cat will dream. Scientists suggest that they dream about their surroundings and what they’ve experienced throughout their day. So your kitty is probably dreaming about you. How cute is that!



REM and non-REM



REM stands for Rapid Eye Movement and it’s a phase of sleep that humans experience.



But it’s not only us that go through this phase, they do as well. If you’ve noticed their ears and eyes rapidly twitching while their sleep it is most likely that they are experiencing a REM phase



Snoring



Snoring s most prominent with the brachycephalic breeds, also known as "short-nosed" such as the Persian. This happens when the cat is at it’s most relaxed and the airway is obstructed by the extra skin of the soft palate. It is no cause for alarm unless you’ve noticed discharge around the nose which would indicate an upper respiratory inflammation.



Comfort



Their s natural instinct is to find the most secure spot to sleep on, and what more of an appropriate place than your lap. Your beloved furry companion knows that when their master is around nothing dangerous can happen. The natural scent and warmth of your body is their heaven. Since, in a way, they see you as their parent, they will seek out the comfort and heat of your body to lull themselves to sleep.



Rain, rain go away…



Just like most of us, our furry friends love a good nap on a rainy day. It comes from the same reason, they’re sensitive to changes in the atmosphere. Don't be surprised if you notice them t yawning and spending long hours curled up on a soft blanket when the forecast calls for a gloomy, wet day.



Cat calming spray, diffusers and collars - do they work?



The debate on using actual pheromone-based cat calming spray vs. the synthetic "imitations" is not put to rest and it's not likely to happen any time soon.



The stats and studies



Over the past decade or so, pet numbers have increased by a whooping 18%. The current number is closing in on 90 million pet owners with over 55 % of them being proud to own more than one pet.



With people caring for the safety of their puppies and kittens, the numbers of owners who use pheromone-based calming products has gone down in favor of their synthetic counterparts. A number of reputable publications like the Applied Animal Behavior Science report that cat calming sprays and collars do work and the number of physicians who recommend them is on the rise.



When to use cat calming treats?



In a stressful situation, like a storm or fireworks, cat calming treats will be of little use because you won't be able to get the stressed pet to eat it. They are more of an option for appeasing a naturally anxious feline over a period of time.



For immediate stress, a spray will be the choice because you can spread it around the house without "harassing" your pet to eat something when their primal instincts kick in.



Melatonin for cats - how useful is it really?



Melatonin for cats comes in the form of chews and it's usually combined with other soothing herbs. These products are primarily made to address sleep issues in the feline, like twitching and restless sleep.



Among the blends we looked at that include Melatonin for cats, NaturVet Quiet Moments was the product with the highest ratings.



Comfort Zone vs. Feliway



Two brands of calming aids stand out and we've received a dozen of questions over the past year on the asking us to compare Comfort Zone vs. Feliway



The difference is in the diffusers



To compare Comfort Zone and Feliway, we first have to understand the difference between natural and synthetic pheromones.



Feliway vs. Comfort Zone vs. Ceva



A diffuser with Feliway uses artificial, while Comfort Zone uses natural pheromones. The later is similar to the Ceva and Adaptil - they use potent natural pheromones. the main difference here is the range of products and ways to disperse the substance.





The following article Melatonin and other calming aids for cats and dogs – top 5 picks from experts & their ratings is courtesy of thesleepstudies







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/melatonin-calming-for-cats-dogs/

Best Valerian root reviews – top-rated supplements based on statistical modeling

After 14 months of gathering data from over 3,000 reviews of Valerian root supplements, we bring you a finalized update of the guide on best products and brands based on statistical modeling of user satisfaction data pool.



We'd like to thank our expert consultants, who helped us narrow down the initial search to 24 products. Without much ado, let us dive right in.



Below are our TOP 3 picks. To read more about a specific product click the button that says "See the full review".









Luna



If any sleep and relaxation aid can be described as “trusted by users”, it’s Luna. It is also the top-rated supplement not only in this category of The Sleep Studies but in the whole range of sleep aids and supplements for 7 updates now.



It’s been 14 months now since started gathering data for this guide and Luna has been the top-rated supplement from the get-go. Since we update it on bi-monthly basis, that means 7 consecutive times of Luna dominating this category.



Most potent, richest in Magnesium and L-Theanine



Luna is not a valerian-only supplements, it’s much more.



What’s different about it is the complex formula. Let’s be precise – when we say “complex” we are primarily referring to the fact that it includes 6 mg of Melatonin per serving, 10 mg of Magnesium and 200 mg of L-Theanine.



Why is this a “big deal”?



First things first – the statistics and most recent studies suggest that the number of Americans deficient in Magnesium is a whooping 80%. That’s right, 4 out of 5 of us don’t have enough magnesium in our diets. The list of issues connected to Magnesium deficiency range from sleep-issues, type 2 diabetes to sudden cardiac death. If you’re thinking, “How in the world do I get all these vitamins and minerals?” we’re on the same page.



That’s why the fact that Luna includes 10 mg of Magnesium per serving is a big deal.



Valerian is a potent herb, it’s one of the few herbs that, although natural, works by stimulating the same receptors as prescription sleep pills, without the plethora of side effects.



The downside is that, to see full benefits in terms of sleep, relaxation and anxiety-relief, you’d have to go with a high dose if your supplement is Valerian-only. High doses of Valerian can cause feeling lethargic the next day (about 1 in 6 users, according to the data we gathered for this guide).



The biggest difference with Luna is the addition of a hefty dose of Melatonin. The combo of Valerian, Chamomile, GABA and Melatonin is very potent, meaning that Luna is likely to get you to sleep faster, regulate you Circadian rhythm (sleep-wake times) and allow you to get calm and uninterrupted deep sleep phase.



On the other hand, such potent sleep formula might result in feeling groggy. With Luna, that’s balanced out by the addition of L-Theanine (known for its focus and clarity-enhancing properties).



Bottom line – with Luna, it’s not about the does of Valerian, it’s about the unique blend.



If you are looking to “kill more than one fly” in one sweeping motion, Luna might be the right supplement for you.



The relaxation complex we mentioned is potent and allows you to fall asleep fast and get solid hours on restoring sleep while the L-Theanine keeps you alert and focused the next day.



High user satisfaction %



What’s better about it is that it’s more than just Valerian.



As our expert consultants shared, the "secret" to get the most out of Valerian supplementation is to find the sweet spot between getting good sleep and feeling lethargic the day after.

If it’s only Valerian, you’d have to go with higher doses and that often in feeling lethargic the day after. That’s where Driftoff formula seems to excel – the balanced ingredients complement Valerian and work with it in synergy.



What’s in it?



Two veggies capsules (one serving) gives you 150 mg of the herb, 2 mg of Melatonin and 100 mg of GABA and Tryptophan and 100 mg of the following herbs extracts:





Chamomile


Passion flower


Lemon Balm


Passion flower


Hops


The first 4 hers listed above are all whole plant extracts and Hops is added as dried flower.



Zero traces of allergens and GMO



Driftoff is lab-certified to have ZERO allergens like Preservatives & Derivatives, Gluten, Soy or any traces of animal products. That goes both for the ingredients inside and the capsule itself.

Based on our statistical model, Driftoff has an unparalleled satisfaction rate of 91%.



Vintage Bliss Night-time



Vintage Bliss Night-time is a supplement designed for active people and athletes. It comes from Old School Labs, a company with 40 years of heritage in the supplement industry.



The formula is high in Vitamin B6, Calcium, Zinc and, again, the all-important Magnesium. This is a potent supplement designed for faster recovery from physical and mental fatigue.

Highest Zinc dose on the list



The hefty 100 mg of Magnesium is the highest dose of Magnesium of all our top picks.

Apart from the Magnesium, the main difference between the Luna and Vintage Bliss is that the later bland includes a peg more of the herb per serving (200 mg vs. 150 mg) and is lower in Melatonin (Luna contains 6 mg vs. the 2.5 mg found in Vintage bliss).



In terms of sleep, this means that Vintage Bliss relies less aggressive and relies more on the mellow effects of Valerian and Magnesium and less on the potency of Melatonin.



Bottom line – Night-time Vintage Bliss might be the supplement for you is you are living a physically active lifestyle that calls for enhancing the ability of your body to recover fast.



The high dose of Magnesium in the blend is a sure-fire way to be positive that you belong to the 20% of Americans that’s not deficient in this crucial nutrient, often referred to as “miracle mineral.”



It’s third-party lab tested and backed by a 100% satisfaction guarantee – which means that if you’re not satisfied and feel like it’s not right for you, you get a full refund. What we’ve seen in our experience from getting the product for this guide, these are not just empty words. We bought the product, and then contacted their customer support to ask for a refund. They responded within a day. We ended up giving up on the refund; the only purpose of contacting their customer support was to see if they stand behind their product.



In the rest of this guide, we’ll take a full look at our top 10 picks. Again, the ratings you are about to see are based on our own experiences, opinions of a few experts we contacted to help us with this guide. Above all, they are based on a pool of data we got by using our proprietary statistical model to analyze the user reviews of the best Valerian root supplements. Let’s dive in.



Top 10 best Valerian root supplements are:



Let us take a more in-depth look at the products that didn't find their way into the 3 top-rated.



Be Calm by Komplete Balance



Be Calm is probably the most elaborate blend among our top picks. It’s lower in Valerian (75 mg per serving) and higher in other sleep and relaxation-promoting ingredients (like Magnesium and a range of Vitamin B (B-1, B-2, B-6 and B-12).



It’s also highest in Vitamin C (500 mg). The blend does not include Melatonin, which lowers the risk of forming a habit.



Be Calm is also certified to be non-GMO by a US-based laboratory and it comes with a full 30-day money-back guarantee.



It might be a choice if you are looking to avoid Melatonin altogether, while regulating your sleep-wake time cycle and focus by relying on the calming effects the high dose of Magnesium have on your central nervous system.



Frontier Co-op



If you are not a fan of capsules and prefer to use dried root, you might want to look at the USDA-Organic certified root from frontier.

It’s Non-irradiated, which means that it hasn’t gone through the process of ionization that serves the purpose of prolonging the shelf-life by destroying all the bacteria in the herb.



That raises the question of safety



Herbs and spices that are “non- irradiated” are usually those that are either anti-bacterial or on their own or they contain good bacteria that promotes a healthy intestinal flora and thus, a hostile environment for the potentially harmful bacteria.



In the case of Valerian, it’s the former, it’s famous for its anti-bacterial properties, making the dried root safe to use.

Having said that, if you do go with an organic herb in this form, you’ll want to make sure that the manufacturing practices are certified by an USDA agent, which is the case with Frontier Co-op root.



Herb Pharm



The alcohol free-tincture from Herb Pharm is our top picks among the liquid forms of the supplement.



The main advantage of a liquid extract is that it is more easily absorbed. This Herb Pharm tincture is made using only fresh root and rhizome. It also ticks all the boxes in terms of potentially harmful chemicals - it’s vegan, non-GMO, free of any traces of animal products and tested for the herb identification using the HPTLC fingerprinting method.



One bottle contains 4 oz of liquid extract based on glycerin and distilled water instead of alcohol and the extraction process does not include any synthetic solvents.



One serving is 0.7 ml and contains 810 mg of Valerian Officinalis.



Gaia herbs Phyto-capsules – second top-rated among liquid extracts



Gaia is a unique brand because the the herbs used to make the product is grown on their own certified organic farms.



As with most top products we looked at, it is 100 % vegetarian and contains zero gluten. The extract delivers 1.8 mg of Valerenic acid derivatives per serving and is lab-tested and certified to be toxin-free.



In our rating system, we’ve seen a user satisfaction rate of 84 % with this Gaia liquid extract.



Now Foods



The highest user satisfaction rate among classic formulas that only include the herb (no additional nutrients or "blends") comes from a well-known and trusted brand – NOW.



Compared to Driftoff, the main difference is that the later contains Melatonin, which is a sleep aid on its own, which makes NOW better suited for prolonged use, because melatonin can be habit-forming.



One serving of NOW (2 veggie capsules) contains 1 g of the root, which is much higher than the 150 mg that’s in one serving of the Driftoff.



So, how do you decide?



First of all, it goes without saying that it’s smart to talk to talk to your MD about the two options.



Some people we talked to shared that they have both forms on hand and use Driftoff when they need a more immediate effect. Driftoff is the more “efficient” and immediate, primarily because of the 2mg of Melatonin included.



So, the road to finding what works for you is to talk to your MD about the Melatonin or trying out the root-only caps and see how your body responds.



Nature's Way Valerian Root reviews



Probably top value-for-money product on the list – this supplement comes as a pack of 2 with 60 servings each. A capsule contains 530 mg of the herb and recommended serving is 3 capsules.

The supplement is standardized to 0.8 mg of Valerenic acid.



Since the root is in natural form and not an extract, what we’ve seen as a downside is that the smell of a freshly opened bottle is unpleasant, which is only natural and most companies making the supplement in this form even include disclaimers about the smell.



So, if you receive a bottle and it feels like something might be wrong because of the smell, you can relax (pun intended), because it’s supposed to smell like that.



Sundown Valerian root reviews



Another whole-herb supplement similar to the Nature’s way above, both in terms of standardization and the amount of root in a capsule (530 mg).



The recommended dose is 4 capsules taken 4 hour before bedtime. If 4 capsules sound like too much, bear in mind that this is a whole-herb and not an extract.



One serving delivers 2.12 g of pure root.



It’s free of any artificial flavors or coloring, preservatives and trace of animal products. It’s also guaranteed to contain zero sodium and gluten.



What we’ve seen with this supplement is a user satisfaction rate of 82%.



Where to buy Valerian root?



Valerian is a natural supplement and is not regulated as a medicine, which means that it is commonly found in any pharmacy. You can find the supplement in your local Walmart, Walgreen's or online, with retailers like Amazon. The option that might give you more insight into the quality and effectiveness of a specific brand is getting it online, where you can sift through user experiences.



If you have more questions about where to buy Valerian root, please use the comment section or contact us and we’ll do our best to provide information based on our experiences.



Valerian root Walmart - what brands are available?



Since we first published this guide we've been receiving questions about the brands of Valerian root at Walmart. We can't speak towards the quality of most brands available at Walmart, as most of the products we looked into are not available in their online store.



The smell



Yes, the root does smell, especially fresh whole-herb supplements. It’s simply the nature of the herb. What we’ve seen when talking to our testers about it is a range of adjectives used to describe the smell – anything from “medicinal” to “putrid”.



If smell is an issue, you might consider going with a liquid extract, since it absorbs fast and doesn’t release as much odor as other forms of the herb.



Best Valerian root supplement for anxiety - reviews and top pick



If anxiety is your main issue, you’ll probably want to go with a supplement that’s not high in Melatonin, but well-balanced between the extract and Magnesium. These two work in synergy and the what we’ve seen in the reviews of Valerian root for anxiety is that it might be a good idea to go with a pure extract like Gaia and add Magnesium as a separate supplement.



Best Valerian root brand





Luna


Zhou Nutrition


Vintage Bliss


Komplete Balance


Frontier


Herb Pharm


Gaia herbs


Now foods


Nature's Way


Sundown


Disclaimer: It’s hard to describe any of the brands as “best”, so the list of top brands is based on our experience and user satisfaction stats.



This perennial plant is native to Europe and Asia. It is green in color with sweetly scented pink and white flowers that bloom in the summer and grows up to 5ft tall. Its root has been used in homeopathic medicine for over 100 years to alleviate symptoms caused by stress and anxiety.



Recently it has grown in popularity with people looking for alternative ways to aid sleeping problems. Since it's a natural mild sedative, it’s calming effects has been proven to help people suffering from anxiety and those looking to improve their mood.



It is also used for conditions linked to psychological stress such as nervous asthma, hysteria, hypochondria, migraines, headaches and stomach issues caused by severe anxiety.



Some people also use to treat mood disorders like depression, ADHD, tremors, and chronic fatigue.



Women particularly favor the herb for relief from menstrual cramps, hot flashes, and premenstrual syndrome.



It can also be added to your bath to promote relaxation and prepare you for a night of calm, serene sleep.



The supplements should be taken according to the dosage recommended by the manufacturer or your homeopathic physician. The most common dosage is between 300 and 900 mg per day.

To help with insomnia the same dosage is recommended two hours before bed.



How does it work?



It is estimated that around 60 million Americans have been affected by insomnia at some point in their lives. Sleep deprivation has been a cause for over 100,000 road accidents in the US alone. It is also far more likely for workers to injure themselves at work due to fatigue caused by insomnia. It can also have great, long lasting effects on your health. It puts you at risk of severe illnesses such as high blood pressure, heart disease, stroke, and diabetes.



By taking a supplement that has beneficial effects on your mood and sleep, you’re investing in your health, safety, and quality of life.



The extract promotes relaxation by enhancing GABA signaling in the brain the brain.



GABA’s natural purpose is to reduce the activity of neurons to which it binds, meaning it controls fear and anxiety receptors and slows them down. When these neurons become over excited we experience a great amount of discomfort and anxiety which can have lasting effects on overall health.



By promoting GABA signaling in the brain, Valerian supplement acts as a sedative on the sympathetic nervous system which is the part of our bodies that is most sensitive to stress and anxiety. By taking the herb regularly you will begin to notice improvements in your mood and sleeping patterns without the harsh side effects that clinical medications have.



Modern pharmaceutical medications, but cause addiction and harsh withdrawal symptoms. This has not been seen in users taking the herb for any period of time.



On the same note, it has also been proven helpful for people who were trying to withdraw from sleeping medication and regain a healthy sleeping pattern naturally.



What's form to choose?



There's no simple answer to that question. The herb comes in a wide variety of different forms. Everything from capsules, tinctures, teas to essential oils and dried powders.



Most supermarkets and drug stores sell blends of teas made with different plants that complement the effects of each other and give you the desired, calming effects.



Some of these plants include mint, lemon balm, lavender, sage, and chamomile. Usually, these blends will have a stronger sedative effect.



Keep in mind that there is not one Go-to supplement type that has been proven most effective.



Since this is a herbal supplement, there is no danger of trying out different types and seeing which ones bodes the best for you. In the end, it all comes down to personal preference and to the way your body reacts to it.



Pure organic extracts come in capsule form and are usually the most convenient to take.



Dried root form capsules would be the least recommended choice as it is hard to determine how exactly much of the active ingredient one serving contains. It is also impossible to know the age of the batch. This is also an issue with the liquid form. Supplements that have been left out for too long or have expired are no longer safe to use and may cause side effects.



Side effects



Side effects can vary and will depend on different factors such as intake, your metabolism, general health and stress levels.



Some studies have shown that an overdose can lead to drowsiness, headache, upset stomach, brain fog, dry mouth, and indigestion. The safest duration of time for taking the herb is 4 to 8 weeks. After that, it is recommended to take a break before starting again.



It is important to be responsible when taking any kind of sedative, natural or otherwise and never take more than the recommended dosage.



Be careful when driving or doing anything that requires you to be alert and avoid drinking alcohol when taking the herb.



Remember to consult your physician if you are pregnant or breastfeeding before starting a new supplement or medication. Even though it has been proven as safe to use it is always smart to get a professional opinion.



In general, very little side effects have been experienced by actual users. Some people may feel a bit “hungover” after the effects have worn off which usually wears off very quickly.



How did we choose and test - our process of pinpoint the best Valerian root supplement?



It's the internet age and there is a lot of misinformation out there on every topic possible. There's nothing wrong with expressing your opinion on a topic, but when it comes to health-related issues like sleep supplement we always take extra care to make sure that the information we present, although intended for educational purposes only, has some kind of precise methodology behind it.



We've been reviewing sleep-related products for a while now and the system we use is based three main factors - expert opinions, our experiences and statistics we collect.



Below is a 4-step outline of our reviewing process:







Step 1 - expert consultants we bring in depending on the topic. The first step is always to narrow down the search by getting some expert opinions. In this case, the search was narrowed down to 32 products. We ten proceeded to gather data for our proprietary statistical modeling.




Step 2 - the mentioned statistical modeling is based on information we collect from experiences of users. The crucial part here is to know what to look for and what to ignore. Let us explain. for a reference guide like this we look at every possible source of user experiences. What we mean when we say that it's critical to know what to ignore is that some of the data can be misleading. For our stats and ratings, we only take into consideration the experiences we know are genuine. For example, if a product is new to the market, we have a rule of waiting at least 6 months before we consider it. the reason for this is simple - although online retailers take exhaustive measure to prevent it, attempts to "game the system" by the sellers are still a factor for us. That primarily goes for new brands that we don't know. It's not likely that a reputable brand like, say, Nature's Way, Gaia or Now Foods would be involved in this kind of shady practices. But, with new brands, we prefer to wait until the product has "matured" and we have a pretty clear picture of what we're looking at.




Step 3 - once the search in narrowed down, we put our team of data-analysts to work.They are given precise instructions and they comb pretty much all relevant information they can find. The data we collect are then processed by our in-house statisticians. The system was tweaked over the years to reflect the type of product we are looking at. In the case of supplementation, the factors are limited. To put it simply - what influences our ratings the most are user experiences.




Step 4 - we compile the data in a concise way that 's simple for you, our reader. in this case, the whole process outlines above comes down to a single number - user satisfaction percentage.


Are the brands well-trusted?



We mentioned that, with new brands, we wait until a product is matured to take it into consideration. Around the office, we call the new-comers "toddlers".



That aside, even with the companies that have been on the market for years, there's no way to skip fact-checking their claims, both about the products in question and about their past reputation. That's what we call "the trust quota" and it goes from 0 to 1. Let us give you an example, the most well-trusted companies will have a trust quota of 1. The process is simpler if a company is registered with the Better Business Bureau.



We use this number to adjust the ratings of any new products. Let's say that our "trust quota" is 0.9. To get to the final rating, we multiply the satisfaction ratings with the trust quota.



About the top brands



Let us take a look at some of of the companies behind the products, their philosophy, mission statements and stories. Before we get into it, let us just say that we are not associated with any of them, nor did we get free testing samples. The products that we used were purchased at retail, like anybody else would.



The top-rated product and the one we labeled as the best Valerian root supplement comes from Nested Natural.



About the company



Nested Naturals defines their mission to be "To provide the best natural supplements and radically honest information so that people can make the best wellness choices for themselves and the planet."



Although their product, Luna, has been among the top few natural sleep aids for as far back as we can remember, if you take a look at their website, they seem to be a pretty relaxed bunch (pun intended). Their "about us" doesn't have the "corporate feel". Instead they talk about their personal approach to a healthy lifestyle. they do however, admit that they like chocolate cake. Nice touch.



Their story starts with a personal journey and pursuit of wellness of the two founders, Jeremy and Kevin. in their words, they are all about the honesty and transparency in matters regarding of "what's in the bottle...".



Let us be honest and open, too. In our book, Nested Natural has a trust quota of 1. This rating is separate from the quality ratings and it speaks towards the reputation of the brand. In the process of completing this guide we "mystery-shopped" with them to test out the responsiveness of their customer service and whether they stand behind their mission. We've seen nothing but good, things, our messages were addressed promptly with precise answers to our questions. Again, the maximum possible trust quota of 1 speaks for itself.



About the brand that brought Driftoff to the market - Zhou Nutrition



The runner up on our list of best Valerian root supplements, Driftoff, comes from Zhou Nutrition.



The company has a Better Business Bureau rating of A+. It also carries a trust quota of 1 (not that they know about us, but we've got nothing but positive things to say, based on our experience).



Their mission statement revolves around the philosophy of "bringing out the greatness inside of you". Back when we first started working on this mega guide, it did take a moment to grasp the concept but once we did, we liked it. It goes beyond physical health and explores the trifecta of a healthy and balanced life - Physical, Emotional and relational Health.



On a more specific note, we've seen no specks on the canvas of ZHOU's reputation. The mission statement above might not speak much about the quality of the products but if you dig a bit deeper, you see a business established on the solid foundations of quality control.



What do we mean by that?



Their facilities are FDA-registered and their products are USA-made. We know that in this day and age of outsourcing, bringing a US-made product to the table at competitive prices is not a simple task. But we're more interested in the fact that the manufacturing facilities are inspected and registered with the FDA. For that to happen, one has to abide by the strict GMP Standards (Good Manufacturing Processes).



All of Zhou's products, including the Driftoff, are backed by a 60-days warranty.



Old School Labs



Vintage Bliss is a unique product on the list because it comes from a company that's primary oriented towards sports supplementation and muscle building. In their mission statement Old School Labs describes their efforts to be "Creating uncompromising, premium supplements for informed customers who demand the very best."



We admit that most members of our team (with one exception, our editor on all matters related to sleep therapy, Ivan Kolev) don't know much about the rest of the brand's product range, but if Vintage Sleep is any indication of the kind of quality Old School Labs bring to the table, the word "premium" is not used lightly to describe their supplements. Their products are US-made and come with a full refund option. based on what we've seen, not many people choose to use it, though.



In conclusion



This guide is updated every two months to make sure that the information presented is relevant. We don't re-test the products unless we see a significant fluctuation in the user ratings, we simply input new data and update the stats and ratings. It's a way to make sure that nothing slips through the cracks and we stay on top of things.



In case you have questions or comments about your experience, feel free to touch base by using the comment section below or drop us a line through our contact page.



The following article Best Valerian root reviews – top-rated supplements based on statistical modeling See more on: The Sleep Studies







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/best-valerian-root-reviews/

Full size air mattress – our top picks

For this guide on our top picks among full size air mattresses we looked at 34 products.



The results you’ll see below are based on our in-house testing and rating in 4 quality categories plus the category of “user satisfaction” which represents the pool of data we gathered from 10.000+ user reviews from every corner of the internet.



Before we move, give Andy 30 seconds to explain how to find exactly what you’re looking for if you’re looking at full sized airbed.









#1



Full size air mattress with Bamboo Topper and fitted skirt



What’s better about it?



We think it’s accurate to say that this full-sized air mattress is fairly “young”. When we say young we mean that it was introduced to the market in 2016 and it currently not only the top-rated in this size category, but also one of the 5 top-rated airbeds overall.



What makes it different is, above all, the material used to make it and the inner design of the air coils.



The fine print - Virgin vinyl vs. regular



When it comes to materials, the industry standard is 0.4 mm vinyl. Now, if all the materials were the same, we’d see the same quality and results in terms of durability, air leaks and air retention.



It’s also known that the most commonly used type of vinyl is one-layer recycled vinyl.



Not with this model.



The vinyl used for this looker is virgin and layered with nylon-encasing to make it more durable.



What we’ve seen in our tests



This is one of the models with top ratings in air retention and durability. What we’ve seen is a very low number of developed leaks (top 5%) of all the models we tested.





Less than 1% of owners reported a leak in the 1st month


Reported leaks in 6 months – around 1.15%


Reported leaks in a year – approximately 1.5%


All quality ratings



Is it right for you – main PROs and CONs?



This might be the choice for you if you are looking for reliability above anything else. It’s one of the most durable airbeds out there - you can see the full list here:



https://thesleepstudies.com/heavy-duty-air-mattress-most-durable/



It’s also the right choice if your definition of comfort is firmness - that makes it a good choice for people with back pain issues and those on the heavier side.



On the CON side, if you are used to soft surface, like memory foam, you might find it too firm, especially if you use it without the bamboo cover. You can see what people who are using it today are saying and compare price using the links below.



Frequently asked questions about our top pick among full size air mattresses:



We first reviews this model about a year ago – over that period, we’ve seen certain questions about pop-up over and over, so we’ll try to cover all our bases in the FAQ section below.



What’s the capacity?



The weight limit for the full size – we didn’t find one number that’ specifically listed for the size, but the listed weight capacity for the twin is 300 and for the Queen and King, it’s 600.



We’ve seen no problems while testing it with a 450 lbs burden and we didn’t see a significant % of user complaints for that weight range.



Do bear in mind, however, that 450 is our approximation based on the years of experience we have with similar models and doesn’t company directly. Also, the capacity of 450 lbs is for two people. If it’s one sleeper, That means more stress on the seams and more sinking to the middle, so we can’t say with confidence what the capacity would be in that scenario.



It certainly is 300+ lbs, since that’s listed for the Twin XL.



How comfortable is the provided topper? Can I use it with extra sheets?



The topper holds very well. It’s designed with the exact dimensions and surface of this model and it snugly “hugs” the top surface.



We’ve seen no significant problems when used with an extra set of fitted sheets. What we mean by “problems” here is the potential issue of the sheets slipping from the surface.



Can I use it for camping?



It comes with a pinch valve and can be inflated using a manual or a leg pump. Those two features are there to make it more versatile and make give you the option of using it outdoors.



Add the fact that it’s made of the mentioned nylon-reinforced vinyl (which means it’s less likely to be punctured and you have one of the few models out there that’s a solid choice for both indoors and outdoors.



What we especially liked about it is the fact that other models that are this sturdy are usually simply made of thicker materials, which means they are heavier and bulkier. Weighing less than 20 lbs, it’s in the same weight range as similar models that are intended for home use only.



Is it true to size?



Yes. And this is a common question with a good reason. We’ve seen many models that are peg shorter or narrower that the listed size. This one is true to the listed size.



How big is the carry bag?



Our measurement show that when deflated and packed into the carry bag, the dimensions are approximately 17.5 “ (height) and 14.7 “ (diameter). Compared to the models of similar weight, it packs a bit smaller and narrower, which speaks about the fact that it’s performs well in terms of full deflation.



We’ve seen models that tend to hold a bit of extra air and not deflate fully, which makes them more difficult to pack and store.Are then other color choices for the bed and the skirt?



No, it currently only comes in blue (the bed) and white (the bamboo topper and skirt).



What about smell and odors?



After unpacking and airing it out for a bit, we’ve seen no significant off-gassing and little to none rubbery or plastic smells. We also haven’t seen a significant % of complaints to report back while compiling the data for this review.



How to clean the topper? Can it be machine-washed?



Yes, the topper can machine-washed on “cold”. We have seen no shrinkage that would be a problem for using the topper after washing it.



How long does it take to inflate-deflate?

It takes about 3 minutes to fully inflate and deflate. The number is not a set in stone because there is no auto shut-off function and it’s up to you to choose the firmness and turn the pump off.



#2



Full size air mattress by Fox – Plush High Rise



The “Beast”



We’ve been reviewing airbeds for so long now that we started coming up with nicknames for specific models and our nickname for this Fox is “THE BEAST”.



Why?



Because it’s the single toughest model on the market. The weight capacity for the Queen is 750 lbs, we know of no other model that goes as high.



It is the only product that significantly deviates from the standard of material thickness. Every once in a while we come across a model that uses thicker materials for the bottom to increase durability, but that’s not what we’re talking about here.



Thicker top-to-bottom, left-to-right



The concept is simple – Fox simply made this one using 0.6 mm gauge, instead of the 0.4 mm. For the owner, this means that it feels different than most inflatables – it’s more stable, sturdier and feels less like an airbed and more like your regular mattress.



On the other hand, what makes it comfortable are the extra air-flow chambers added to the top. They are there so that the weight is evenly distributed, but also act as an extra layer of insulation and cushioning, a topper of sorts if you will.



All quality ratings



Is it right for you?



One of the best “value for money” beds we know of. It’s thicker and stronger and yet not more expensive.



The pillow-top chambers even out the sturdiness of the material, making it more comfortable.



On the CON side – the thickness of the material adds a bit of bulk which means it doesn’t pack as small. It does feature an extra valve for manual inflation, but for campers, it’s only an option if you’re driving to the site.



FAQs:



Does the pump come with an auto shut-off?



No, you control the level of firmness by manually shutting the pump on and off.



What sheets do I use?



We’d recommend deep-pocket fitted sheets of the same size as the bed or a size up. The elastic band of a fitted sheet will keep it safely in place.



Does it come with a warranty?



Yes, it comes with a 90-day warranty.



How good is their customer service?



We mystery-shopped with Fox a few times already, basically every time we need to re-test and update our reviews and the customer service was responsive and fairly fast each time. Usually, they addressed the issue within a day.



Is there a remote for the pump?



No, the pump is a classic A/C, built in and there is no remote. It both inflates and deflates the bed and, in our tests, both were done in under 4 minutes.



Do bear in mind that the pump is more powerful than with most similar models. This is factor if you want to use a power-converter.



What does pillow-top mean?



The description mentioning the words “pillow-top” can be confusing because people assume that it might include some form of foam on top. It doesn’t.

Pillow-top refers to the shape the air-flow chambers. There is, however a version of this Fox that comes with memory foam – you can see it here - https://thesleepstudies.com/memory-foam-air-mattress/.



Full size air mattress, third top-rated – SS-58RF from Simply Sleeper



The 3rd pick in the size category comes from Simply Sleeper. It’s one more model that is not your classic run-of-the mill product and, again, the difference is the material.



It’s 3 layers of what the company calls “air-tight” materials. To be fair, they describe it as “puncture-proof”, but we’re not a fan of the term and rarely use it in our reviews, since it’s relative, it doesn’t say much and pretty much every company will use it to describe their products.



However, we can say that Simply Sleeper has earned the right to call it that because its’ one of the top 7% in terms of air retention and puncture resistance among the 100+ airbed we reviewed so far (counting all sizes)



What’s different about it



To put it simply, what makes the most difference is the finish material. It’s not the only bed out that features a “layered” design, but instead of the classic vinyl finish, this one is made of Durmothane PVC.



To explain it better, it doesn’t have that “plastic” feel, but the finish is more similar to that of a, say, backpack.



One-piece pump



The pump is built-in, it inflates the bed in about 3 minutes, but more importantly, it’s what’s known in the industry as a one-piece. It means that it’s not assembled from dozens of components.



This makes a difference because one of the few main cause of air leaks are those that develop around the pump.



Is it right for you?



It’s main advantage is the balance between comfort and durability. To make an inflatable more durable, companies usually go with sturdier inner coils of thicker materials.



The SS-58RF is at the sweet spot between the two – because its durability is balanced by the top-surface chambers that make it loftier. The bottom material is 0.48 mm gauge PVC.



On the CON side - it might be worth mentioning that while new (first 5-6 uses) the material tends to make a squeaky noise against some floor types when you turn. After the first few uses, the noise gets milder and goes away fairly quickly.



Frequently asked questions:



What’s the power of the pump?



The pump is 105 Watts (to be used with 110 V outlets). To use it with a different outlet, you’ll need a converter.



Can the pump be used with batteries?

No, it’s a classic electric pump.



What size sheets should I use?



We’d recommend going a size up – for example, for a full size we’d go with deep-pocketed fitted queen sheets.



Because of the specific material, sheets tend to slip of with classic sheets.



What is the warranty policy?



The warranty will vary depending on the seller. If not clearly stated by the seller and you get it online, it will come down to the default policy of the retailer.



We can say, however, that what we’ve most often seen with SS-58Rf is a 1-year limited warranty.



What if I’m seeing air leaks?



It’s common for an inflatable to have an impression you got a leaky one if you are making a conclusion based on a few nights. Even though the material of the SS58-RF is not as stretchy as that of most similar models, you might see some loss or firmness over the first few nights.



Once the material “sets”, it will stop. In practice, this means that you might need to add air once or twice the first time you use it.



Are the edges sturdy?



Again, one more common issue with low-tier models are edges that are not sturdy enough and you might feel like sleeping on a balloon. The top surface of this Simply Sleeper is designed to address that.

The edges are slightly raised (about 0.25 “). It’s small touch but it does add a bit of comfort and sense of security. This part is especially important for the elderly, because it getting in and out can be an issue if the edges are not sturdy enough.



Is it cold to sleep on?



It’s physics 101 that any inflatable tends to pull heat away from your body. That’s what people describe as “being cold to sleep on”.



Here’s what happens:


Micro currents of air distribute energy throughout the chambers. The more air movement, the more likely it will feel cold.



Inner structure of this full size air mattress is oval coils. These coils limit the air movement, which is why we’ve seen better ratings in “temperature isolation” (the temperature isolation ratings are included in the comfort rating).



Having said that, it’s still air and will pull some heat away if you sleep on the surface directly. It’s not a significant issue if you use a topper with sheets.

If you use only sheets and feel that rushed of cold air, a simple solution like a blanket underneath the sheets might do the trick.



What if I have a cat?



The SS-58RF if one of our picks in the category of “cat-proof” models – you can see the full list here. The material is more resistant to claws than standard vinyl.



How big is it when packed?



The pump performs well in terms of deflation, which means that all the air is pulled out and the bed fold up pretty compactly. Our measures say that, when folded, it’s about to 14.5 inches (tall) and 10 inches in diameter.



What’s the weight capacity for the full size?



The maximum weight for the SS in both full and queen size is 600 pounds.

What’s the gauge of the bottom?



The bottom side is made of Polyester – to be more specific it’s 210D with a gauge of 0.48 mm.



Can I use it outdoors?



In theory, yes. Bear in mind that the pump is not standalone and it does need power to run.



It can be used with a car-outlet…you will need a power-inverter. There is no secondary valve to inflate it manually or by using a leg pump. Our recommendation is that, if you are using the car outlet, to do it while the motor id running. Otherwise, you might drain the power of the car-battery.



With that said, the good side is that it holds air very well. This means that if you have access to power, you’ll only need to inflate it once and the risk of it loosing air is lower than 95% of models we reviewed.



What’s the material of the top surface?



Unlike most models, the top has the same finish as the sides. On the plus side, this makes it more durable. For some people, however, this will not be an advantage, especially if you are used to a flocked, velvet-like top.



Our recommendation is to use it with a topper and fitted sheets.



The post Full size air mattress – our top picks is courtesy of TSS







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/full-size-air-mattress/

Guide on our top picks among intex air mattresses

You’ve reached the page of The Sleep Studies dedicated top Intex air mattresses. To get to the results you’re about to see, we tested and rated 24 Intex air beds in 5 quality categories.



Here is what you’ll se below:





top picks from the brand, their ratings and reviews


What makes them better


PROs & CONs of each – why they might (or might NOT) be a good choice for you


Without much ado, let’s get to the results of this month’s update.









Top Intex Queen air mattress - Fiber-tech Durabeam



Top in value for money on the market



In case you are new to our site, we test and rate airbeds in 5 quality categories. One of them is “value for money”. And this model holds the higher ratings in that category for 4 updates now (8 months).



The Durabeam series was the game-changer



The new proprietary FiberTech technology changed it all for Intex. Until this series of models hit the market, the company had the reputation of making budget-friendly inflatables but this also meant that they couldn’t really compete for the top tier of the industry. You can see the full review here - https://thesleepstudies.com/intex-comfort-plush-elevated-durabeam-airbed-review/



What we’ve seen in our tests



The introduction of the FiberTech technology eliminated what used to be the no. 1 cause of air leaks and subsequent sub-bar ratings in “air retention” – seam leaks.



These fibers connect the top and bottom surface and make the bed more stable. Besides the lowered stress on the seams, it also means better weight distribution and minimal sinking to the middle of the bed.



All quality ratings



Is it right for you?



This Intex will be the choice of people looking the maximum value for their buck. It doesn’t feature any bells and whistles (like remotes or smart pumps) but it has no true competition in its price range.



Just as food for thought – airbeds that are close to the ratings of this model cost anywhere from 70-400 % more.



Main CON - the one thing that we didn’t like is the fact that we’ve seen this particular model go out of stock.



Pillow Rest Deluxe Durabeam



In our ratings, this is the second best Intex air mattress. Not surprisingly, it’s one more model from the Durabeam Series and it also features the trademarked fiber-tech inner construction.



The “outer” design is closer to that of a classic model and we do prefer the looks of the Comfort Plush.



The main PRO



The main advantage of this Deluxe is the price point, but that only really applies if you’re comparing it to similar models from other brands. Both he Queen and Twin of the two Intex air mattresses are in the same price range.



Who will choose the Pillow Rest Deluxe?



This Intex might be for you if you need an affordable Pillow Rest model – the raised top chamber does a good job of keeping your pillow in place.



So, if your plan is to use it in the middle of the room and you are a restless sleeper, the Pillow Rest chamber will make a difference.



Pillow Rest Classic black



This model isn’t close in ratings to the Durabeam FiberTech Series of the Deluxe version. As you’ll see below the gap in ratings is full 10 points and the only category whether the two are close is “value for $”.



The main difference is that it features the traditional inner design – beams with vinyl chamber separators. What we’ve seen in our tests over the last 4 years of testing airbeds is that a classic beamed design can rarely compete with chambers or, in this case, fiber separators.



The main reason is that fibers don’t stretch as much and that results in lower %s of seam leaks and a more stable inner structure.



Ratings comparison



FAQ about the the Comfort Plush


Is the pump 120 volts or battery powered?



This mattress comes with a built-in pump with a plug that fits into a standard outlet. It turns on with a flip of a switch. No batteries needed for this mattress.



How do you inflate the mattress manually if used for camping?



With a battery operated air pump and the right size adapter. This mattress takes a lot of air and inflating it manually would take a lot of time and effort, except for minor top-ups.



What is the weight limit?



The weight limit is 600lbs



What is the best way to clean it?



Using a protective mattress pad cover and vacuuming the top part when needed should do the trick.



Would this be a good replacement for an everyday real mattress?



Yes. Air beds are adjustable, meaning you are able to adjust the firmness to your liking to best suit your needs.



Is the pump included or sold separately?



The pump is built into the mattress



Is it hard to move around and manipulate?



When it’s deflated, yes, it is fairly heavy. However, blown up it’s pretty easy to move around.



How do you adjust the firmness of the mattress?



The easiest way to do it would be to inflate it all the way up and slowly release air until you’ve reached the desired firmness.



Is it easy to pack and store away once it is deflated?



Once deflated the mattress goes back into its duffle bag fairly easily. Keep in mind the bag will be relatively heavy once compacted.



How long does it take to deflate?



Roughly around 3 to 5 minutes



Does it automatically stop inflating if it gets too full?



No, you will have to manually turn it off once you reach the desired firmness



FAQ about the Deluxe Pillow Rest Elevated



How tall is the mattress when inflated?



When inflated, the mattress is 16 inches tall



How much does it weigh when deflated?

Around 12-13 pounds



Can it be inflated using a manual pump?

Yes, it can.



Is it easy to inflate and set up?



To inflate, simply plug it in and flip the switch. Make sure the deflate valve is closed before turning it on.



How long is the power cord?



6 feet



Does it have an odor?



It smells like plastic but the odor is not strong or unpleasant



Does the pump automatically stop inflating once the mattress is full?



No, it does not. Keep an eye on the mattress while it is inflating to avoid any damage



Does it come with a repair kit in case of a rupture?



Yes, it does.



Can it be used on water?



No, it is not designed to be used on water. Water can damage the electrical components of the mattress like the air pump and the pump would no longer be of use.



What are the dimensions when storing this mattress?18 1/4" long, 14 3/4" high and 7 1/4" wide. It easily folds back into the box that it came in or into its carry bag.



Can I take it camping?



Yes. However, make sure it is not on top of anything sharp that could puncture the bottom.

To be safe, place it on a tarp or mat to create a barrier between the ground and the mattress.



Which material is the bed surface made from?



The top layer of the mattress is a flocked top. A soft, plushy kind of material. It adds comfort to the mattress while helping to keep the sheet on.



FAQ about the Pillow Rest Classic Black



Is this mattress good for camping and can I use it with a standard battery powered air pump?

Yes, it is suitable for camping. It is possible to use the air pump with the cigarette lighter socket in your car in combination with a power converter.



Will it burst if overfilled?

The built-in automatic fill will only pump air to a certain amount of pressure before it begins to change the sound. This will let you know that the mattress has reached its limit



Does it make a lot of noise if the person using it moves or rolls over?

No, this mattress is very quiet and there shouldn't be any disturbing noises coming from it.



Is it possible to use additional pillows with this mattress?

Yes, it shouldn't be a problem.



How well does this mattress hold up with cats and dogs?

The mattress is sturdy and has a fairly good weight limit (300lbs) so it shouldn't have an issue holding up pets.



Will the pump work with 220V?

With an added external converter it will.



Can the electric cord for the pump be removed to keep safe from children?

Yes. The pump and cord are separate



What is the height of the mattress when inflated?

The height is around 18 inches.



Will it work with a standard, fitted sheet?

Yes, a regular sheet will work well with this type of mattress and won't slide or pop off.



Can it be used immediately out of the box?

Yes, however, you will have to refill it every few hours or the next day as the material is still expanding at the beginning.



How fast does it deflate?

In about 2-3 minutes. The pump has an auto-deflate option which sucks the air out of the mattress. To deflate, simply plug it in and turn the dial to “deflate”.



Intex air mattress pumps



Below are our top picks among Intex pumps. The ratings are based on air flow capacity, power (or battery life for the battery-operated pumps).









FAQ about the Quick-Fill Battery Air Pump



Are power cord included with the pump, like a DC cable to plug into the cigarette socket?



No, it does not. It only operates with batteries.



Can it be used for other things like a basketball or bike tires?



No, this pump is only intended to work on an airbed



Does it have a reverse setting for deflating?



Yes, it does.



What type of batteries are needed with this pump?



6, size “C” cell batteries



How long can it run in one go?



Roughly 10 minutes.



How do I use it to deflate?



To deflate simply switch the hose attachment from one vent onto the other and turn on the pump. One vent inflates and the other deflates.



Does it come with batteries?



No, the batteries are sold separately



Is the pump loud?



It is not loud. Much quieter than the pumps that are already built in into a mattress



How many uses can one get out of one set of batteries?



Approximately 3 uses



Can it be used to blow up one of their boats or pools?



Unfortunately no. It is not powerful enough for such large products.



How long does it take to fill up a queen sized mattress?



About 3-4 minutes



FAQ about the Quick-Fill AC Electric Air Pump 110-120 Volt



Does it have adjustable air flow?



No, it does not. Just one stream speed.



What is the wattage of this pump?



The motor runs at 210W and 120 volts



Can it be used to inflate swimming rings?



Yes. I come with 3 different sized valves for inflating



Can it be used to inflate a swimming pool?



It would be suitable for a small pool.



How long is the electric cord?



Approximately 1.5 meters



Do you have to hold the switch the entire time or can you turn it on and leave it while it’s working?



The pump can be left alone while it’s working and it won't shut off until it’s shut off manually



Can it be used with a car adaptor?



Unfortunately, it can not. Only an electrical plug.



Can it be used to fill up a twin or queen-sized mattress?



As long as the attachments are compatible it shouldn't be a problem. This pump puts out a large volume of air.



Will it work on vacuum space saver bags?



No, this pump was only intended to be used on inflatable toys, floats, airbeds, and boats



What is the length of the hose?



The hose is 42 inches long





Intex- About the Company



Intex Recreation Corp. is a part an international family of companies that specializes in distributing above ground pools, airbeds, spas, pool toys, furniture, boats and more.

For over 40 years their objective has been to deliver the highest quality products at an affordable price. In their words, the company aims to be the most recognizable and innovative company on the market today with their products available in more than 100 countries around the world.









All products have been designed for fun and comfort, and have been tested to meet the highest standards of safety, quality, and value.

Committed to decreasing the carbon footprint, the company has been working for over 10 years with suppliers that help reduce the number of fossil fuels used in the creation of their products.



Intex warranty policy



All products purchased directly from Intex, either online or over the phone has a 30-day return policy. This 30 day period begins from the day the product has been delivered.

For your product to be eligible for a return, it must meet the following conditions:



Unused product return conditions:

Product must be in its original packaging and in resalable condition

Product must be returned back to their warehouse within 30 days from when it was delivered to the customer

Customer covers the return shipping costs

Shipping costs for products that meet the reimbursement criteria are not refundable.



Defective/Incorrect product return conditions

In case of receiving defective or an incorrect product, please call the company's customer service before returning the product. The issue must be reported within 15 days from the day of delivery.



How to repair an Intex air mattress



If you’ve discovered a leak or a rupture on your mattress, don't worry. There’s an easy solution on how to fix it. Some mattresses already come with repair kits but what if you find yourself without one. Here is how you can repair it at home.



Things you will need:



Glue

A patch big enough to cover the hole

Optional sandpaper

Scissors



Method:

Locate the hole and mark it before deflating the bed completely

Clean the area around the spot you wish to fix and let it completely dry

Cut out a small patch of material, big enough to cover the hole

Add adhesive to the patch and place over the hole

Place a weighted object over the spot that you’ve just patched up and leave for 12 hours or overnight to dry

Once enough time has passed for the glue to dry, inflate the mattress and check if the patch works.



Note: To assure that the patch adheres properly, lightly sand down the spot to create texture. This is necessary for mattresses with flocked tops as it’s velvet-like texture doesn't allow the patch to adhere.



How to inflate and deflate an Intex airbed



Inflating:



To inflate the airbed first lay out the air bed on the floor to its full size

Make sure that the pump is plugged into an electrical socket

Turn the arrow on the dial to the “Inflate” position

Turn on the pump by flipping the ON/OFF switch



Deflating:



To deflate the airbed turn the arrow on the dial back to the “Deflate” position

Once you’ve done that, turn the pump back on

To fully deflate, the pump will take about 2 minutes

When completely deflated, turn the pump off



Guide on our top picks among intex air mattresses is courtesy of https://thesleepstudies.com







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/guide-top-picks-among-intex-air-mattresses/

Embark air mattress review – we compared it to top tier products

It’s been a while since we looked at Embark air mattress portfolio. We do like the brand because it brought something new to the market – a splash of color in a sea of grays and tans.



However, there is a good reason that we update this guide on Embark air beds. There’s been a lot going on in the market, and we’ve seen many new arrivals, so we had our hands full with testing those.



We finally got some time to update the reviews of the Embark air beds and, more importantly, see how they compare to products that are dominating the market today – both for home and outdoor use.









Embark air mattresses – top 3 picks



Embark Queen Air Bed Review - Raised Blue



It’s a given that people looking at Embark want a budget-friendly solution, but there is a difference between a cheap and a product that provides value for money. That’s why we’ll compare this Embark to an air mattress that’s in its price range and currently highest-rated in “value for money” category – Intex Durabeam.

Every time we review a product we do our best to contact the company to better understand the product and get answers to some basic questions. We do not accept free testing samples but talking to the people making the product is always helpful.



We failed to do that with Embark, their products are usually available at Target and on Amazon, and we usually find the information at the sellers profile online.

With Embark, the orders are fulfilled by third-party sellers. We did send a few emails, but it was all dead ends because the sellers can’t provide the kind of information we are looking for.



Information like:





The type and thickness of the PVC used (whether it’s recycled or virgin) – again, at that price point we are assuming that it’s recycled vinyl


Where are the products made exactly – the fact that something is outsourced is not a bad thing by itself in terms of the quality. We’ve been reviewing air beds for almost a decade now and know the “good and the bad” hubs for outsourcing


With all that said, these are the main PROs and CONs of this Embark:



PROs





Cheap


Fast inflation and deflation


Modern, colorful design


Solid weight distribution – meaning that it’s comfortable when inflated (the downside here is that the bed tends to lose air and this cause sinking to the middle)


Packs compactly and comes with a handy carry bag


CONs





Too many issues with the air retention and pinholes developing


The air loss issue goes beyond pinholes – even with following all the instructions (inflating it and allowing it to stretch before use) we saw significant air loss


Handling the valve – we had to use pliers to loosen it up the first time we inflated the bed


Quality of the plastic parts is sub-par – that ties into the valve issue. Since the plastic is not sturdy enough, it tends to bend out of shape, making the valve feel as if it was stuck


Bottom line – as we said, is you are looking at this Embark queen air mattress, you are probably looking for something on the cheaper side. If it were us, in spite of the fact that we love the vivid blue flocked top, we’d spend our money on something else in that price range, like the mentioned Intex Durabeam.



Embark air mattress review – double-high twin with pump



What we expected (and hoped for) from the brand is an addition of an Embark Queen air bed with pump. When we say “with pump” we mean a built-in pump.



We didn’t find a model in that category that would be worth mentioning here.



If you already owned an Embark, this model will be a surprise for you. Our guess is that this model is an attempt from Embark to “bite in” into the mainstream chunk of the market – the part that used to be dominated solely by industry giants like Coleman, Serta or Intex.



This “main” chunk of the market is competitive like never before. And that’s not a cliché, its fact – the arrival of a few new companies like SoundAsleep with their Dream Series model and a few other “youngsters” in the industry, it all changed.



We’re mentioning it because we want to put into perspective the fact that Embark is having a hard time competing. We’ll illustrate that by comparing the quality ratings of this Embark air bed with a product that’s closest to it in terms of design, size, intended use and price point – the SoundAsleep Dream Series in twin size.



Bottom line – Embark is supposed to be a choice for those looking to spend as little as possible. That’s not the case with this model – the price ranges we’ve seen are close to some vastly superior products, our main pick among them being the above mentioned Dream Series.



Left to right, top to bottom, the Dream Series is the superior choice – especially when it comes to value for money.



Embark air mattress review – twin, low, with separate pump



The green flocked top is appealing. We know, we keep coming back to the color - because with our years in the industry we’re always on the lookout for some interesting new designs.



Having said that, being green and an eye-candy will not interfere with us taking an objective look at what this Embark has to offer…beyond being green and affordable.



The most efficient way to do that is to compare it to an airbed that’s similar in design, features and falls into the price range. Not surprisingly (since the company has been dominating the few main niches of the market) our top pick here is the Camping Series by SoundAsleep.



Let’s see how their quality ratings compare.



Bottom line – once more, the Embark gets the short end of the stick. The gap in ratings between the two “similar” models is far too big for us to recommend Embark with a straight face.



You can compare the prices and what users are saying about the two products in the links below.



Embark Queen air bed with pump – the options you have



Since the last time we published an update with the Embark air mattress reviews, the questions we received were mostly about how and where to get an Embark Queen air bed with pump.

So, we did our thing and dug through every corner of the web and online retailers, and we came up short.



We’re not sure what’s going on with Embark, but their products are not as widely available as the last time we updated this guide.



Amazon carries only a few models (all listed above), and we stumbled upon too many pages on the Target website saying that a specific Embark product in not available anymore.



Not for people on the heavier side



As we mentioned, Embark was always the option for people of average build that are looking to save money on the purchase.



One of the testers we used to test the Embark twin is on the heavier side. When we sent the inflatable out to him, he reported air leaks within the first few days.



We didn’t take the issue at face value because we know that the initial period of stretching can last up to a few days and, in that period, you can’t really say if the bed has a structural issue or if the vinyl is still stretching.



But the issues continued and the bed was unusable after a month. And it wasn’t just about the loss of air, one of the outer seams burst. If you know airbed you know that there’s no repairing an outer seam pop.



So, we sent another one to the same tester



The same thing happened, this time within two months. He reported the same air loss issues before one of the seams popped.



This meant one thing – the first test wasn’t a coincidence and there is an issue.



It all points to one thing



We see this kind of structural issues in models with a beam-based internal design. With beams, the weight distribution is sub-par, which in turn puts more stress both on the inner and the outer seams.



We didn’t expect this to happen with Embark because the internal chambers are not beams but air-coils, which are supposed to be superior.



Our conclusion from the whole process is that the issue is with either the vinyl itself or the binding of the seams. Whatever the case, we weren’t impressed…nor were our testers.



Manufacturing of the Embark air mattress



Embark is made in China, and that’s not news to us. Also, it’s not necessarily a bad thing.



Just last year, we sent one of our staff members, Ivan on a little road trip to China. The purpose of the trip was to visit the locations that we know airbed companies were outsourcing to, their manufacturing and quality assurance practices.



It’s fair to say that we were impressed. It won’t be in our lifetime that the label “Made in China” loses its negative connotations, but what we’ve seen in the field made us lose ours prejudice forever.

It was professional efficient and, most importantly, the products were thoroughly tested before leaving the manufacturing line.



Bottom line – it’s not whether you outsource to China; it’s about what specific facility you outsource to. We can’t pinpoint where exactly Embark is outsourcing to, but the results we’ve seen in this update aren’t favorable, to say the least.



We hope we have better thing to report back the next time we look into Embark inflatable beds, which will probably be in 6-8 months.



Conclusion - the good news



The growth in the industry is a good thing for the consumer because it means better products at lower prices.

It also means that people who would get an Embark now have other affordable options. You can see our top picks in 3 categories below – best overall, best value for money and the most durable.



The blog post Embark air mattress review – we compared it to top tier products Find more on: thesleepstudies







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/embark-air-mattress/

Cat proof couch and sofa protectors – October 2017

This guide on the best cat proof couch, sofa & covers took some creativity to put together – simply because it doesn’t fit any of the statistical models we have tweaked thus far to rate the products.



So, here’s what we did



The initial picks were made by our Editor-in-chief, Bob, who holds two relevant degrees – one in Materials Science and Technology Engineering & one in interior design (Universities of Turin, Italy and Metropolitan Institute in Syosset). He asked one more material-engineer, his friend and colleague, Vasco Tobia to make the initial choices.









The next thing we did is look through over 2000 user reviews and talked to a few pet owners. The whole process took about 8 months and the results you are about to see below are a fruit of that.



So, without much ago let’s get to out our top picks for the cat proof couch and sofa and look into what is it about them that makes them resistant to cats and dogs ands suitable for owners.



Cat-proof sofa - Divano Roma Velvet Chesterfield-Style



If you ask feline experts, they will recommend velvet as the go-to material. Lauren Haynes, a home organizing expert with the Star Domestic Cleaners (London, UK) simply puts it like this, “Velvet is a proven fabric in the war against pet scratching."



Your intuition might tell you that your best bet would be a couch or a sofa made from a more-rugged material, one that can take the “abuse". In reality, you’re the better option is discouraging your pet to scratch it in the first place – and velvet does just that.



They scratch simply because it’s in their nature; they are simply trimming their nails.



Velvet is not appealing for scratchers



Because of the fine looped threads, velvet can do very little for them because their paws can’t drive into it like they do with other materials. Once they realize that, they won’t be as interested



This type of sofas (scroll arms and button tufted) will work with pretty much any interior design style but they tend to be much more expensive than this Divano Roma. As a final touch, use citrus-based air fresheners and spray a bit of it on the legs – cats find any citrus smell repelling.



Bottom line – this sofa is our top pick because it hits the sweet spot between comfort, the pet-friendly quality of the velvet, gorgeous design, the low-laying legs (that can be easily protected) and finally, the price.



Downsides - over the period of completing this guide it went in and out of stock and the later periods simply lasted too long for our taste.

Also, velvet is not easy to clean so, to complete the cat-proofing, you might want to pair it up with a cover – they won’t be tempted to scratch the sofa and you won’t have to deal with hair and dirt, it’s the ultimate solution.



Cat and dog proof couch - Ashley Furniture Darcy Sofa



There’s no material that can withstand the abuse of cat and dog claws better than poly-fiber. The issue is, couches and sofa of this type are not common and when you do find one – they are no the most pleasing thing to look at.



Enter ultra soft poly-fibers used for this piece pieces from the Ashley Furniture Signature Series.



We didn’t really expect to find a single cat proof couch or sofa that ticks al the boxes that we were.



These were the guidelines of our Material Technology Engineers:





A material that won't be interested to scratch


Resistant to claws, including stretch marks and holes


High –density material (tightly woven) that will be thick enough to withstand the claws


Easy to remove the fur from the surface


Resistant to odors


Easy to remove the dirt


Our top pick among cat friendly couches and sofas Ashley Furniture Darcy Sofa



This one ticks all the boxes



It’s the only poly-fibers that’s soft enough not to have that unpleasant feeling of synthetics against the skin and, yet, maintain all the qualities that make i resistant to “abuse" by pets.



Much cheaper than the alternatives



There are alternatives out there that are specifically designed for pet owners, but in most cases, to get protection similar to that of this sofa, you’d have to go with a company that custom makes the pieces.



We all know that as soon as you hear the word “custom-made", it’s far to add a zero to the expected price.



That’s probably the best part about this model from the Ashley signature series – the materials are just as resistant as the custom-made models and cost a fraction of the price.



Fact sheet and ratings:





Dimensions and weight – 90 x 39 x 40 “ (3 seat), 126.2 lbs


Material – ultra soft poly-fiber


Block frame design of the corners


Feet – raised, exposed, faux-wood used for the finish


Seat cushions – loose (removable and can be cleaned separately)


Cushion material – highly resilient foam


Armrest and back cushions – fixed


Bottom line – for cat owners, it’s a small miracle in its right that this couch / sofa exist sin the first place. Whether the company designed it with pet owners in mind, we don’t know but it’s at the sweet spot between what a cat an dog owners will look in a sofa, comfort and design.



Add the fact that it is the lowest priced sofa on the list, and you have a clear winner and a God-sent for pet owners.



3rd top-rated cat proof couch - Brentwood Classics Jimmy Sofa



This Brentwood Classic is a unique product because it’s the only decent model we could find that’s made of Crypton fabric. The downside is that, as any crypton fabric soft, it comes with a hefty price tag. It costs 300-400% more than our top pick.



Crypton fabric is indeed an amazing material in terms of how much abuse it can take from sharp objects like cat claws, how easy it is to clean and how resistant to odors and stains it is.



Basic info and our ratings:





Material – cat proof Crypton fabric


Certified – Green Guard Certification


Frame – solid wood, kiln-dry (reduced moisture content in the wood frame)


Size and weight – 78 x 35 x 34 “, 119 lbs


Dog and cat proof recliner - Bonded Leather Double by Divano Roma



Among the leather sofas and couches that deserve to be labeled as cat proof, this Divano Roma recliner stands out.

It’s bonded leather, which means that the lather is layered with fiber and paper backer. That’s what made it one of our top 3 picks.



The upside



It will be the choice of people who prefer natural materials like leather to the synthetic poly-fiber and crypton. Being a recliner, it’s probably the most comfortable option on the list.



On the other hand, as you’ll see in our ratings, it’s not as resistant to cat and dog claws and the other picks.



It’s not just about being resistant to cat claws



If a cat claw does get to it, it won’t be as tough as the poly-fiber and crypton and an aggressive scratch won’t puncture but will probably leave a mark.



On the other hand, the hair doesn’t stick to the leather and it’s easy to wipe off.



Finally, leather is generally more expensive, but not this Divano Roma recliner. At the time of the last update, the price point for this recliner in the same price range as our top pick – the Darcy sofa.



Fact sheet and ratings:





Dimensions & weight – 74 x 31 x 40 inches, under 180 lbs


Seat width and depth – 61 and 20 inches


Seat height – 18 inches


Materials – the seats, back and arms are filled with high-density foam, the bonded leather is hand picked (for grain, hold and resistance)


What parts recline – the end seats fully recline, the middle one is fixed


Bottom line – this Divano recliner will be the choice of pet owners who prefer the feel of leather to that of fiber. There are similar products out there but not in that price range (not even close).

There’s also the fact that leather is a self-extinguishing material, which makes it a better choice of pet owners who are also smokers.



Cat and dog-proof couch covers and protectors



The Original SOFA SHIELD Reversible Slipcover protector



Let’s get one thing of the way before we get into the nitty-gritty, this cat and dog proof sofa cover is not recommended for leather and isn’t waterproof.



With that said, it is by far the most popular pick for cat and dog-proofing you couch or sofa. Let’s see why.





Highest quality dog and cat proof materials – the Shield is THE only cover we found that’s backed up by a “no-questions-asked" 10-year warranty. Add the fact that it’s reversible (which doubles its lifespan) and you are looking at a product to last a lifetime.


Range of sizes to protect every piece of furniture in your home – from small (loveseat ), through chair & chair and half, to the large and oversized versions for sofas and recliners


Wide range of color choices


Thick and comfortable – if you are looking for a cover that will fit with your sofa seamlessly, this might be your choice. The finish materials are durable yet soft and the filling is thin but lofty.


Strap-on band keep it in place - a common issue with this type of cover and protectors is the discomfort as they start moving and wedging. The Original SOFA SHIELD stays in place because of the elastic and thick (2 inches) strap. The strap I adjustable so it will with most sofas


Reversible – from our conversations with pet owners, the covers tend to wear out and the filling often starts dropping out of the cover. The materials of the shield are cat and dog-friendly, meaning that the cover is more resistant from damage from sharp claws.


Easy to clean – no wiping with damp cloths, this cover is machine washable


Bottom line – the Shield is, hand-down, the most well-balanced product among cat and dog proof covers / protectors. When we say well balanced we are referring to the balance between being pet friendly, comfortable, stylish and value for money.



The 10-year warranty will seal the deal for most pet owners, except those who are looking a waterproof cover that will protect their sofas, couches and chair from cat and dog pee. It’s also not designed to be used with leather furniture.



If this is what your scenario, one of the two picks bellow will be a better fit.



Petmaker Waterproof furniture Protector / Cover



This cover costs more than the Shield and has a bit more dazzle going for it. When we say “dazzle" we are referring to the design that fits side pockets. This can be handy for stuff like TV remotes but don’t get into the habit of tossing your car keys or small items in there.



If there’s a place to “lose" small house items, this will be it.



Let’s see what it has going for it:





Materials – waterproof, soft-finish polyester


Quilted patterned design


Sizes available – chair, loveseat, couch/sofa


Straps to keep it in place – not as thick and substantial as those of the SHIELD, but it gets the job done


Available colors – brown and tan


Easy to care for – machine washable and dryable


Bottom line – with the three hefty side pockets, the Petmaker cover is a peg ‘fancier" that the Shield. Another advantage it has over the Shield is the fact that it can be used for leather furniture and it’s water-proof, which means you won’t be cleaning and cat or dog pee.


If we have to choose one downside it would be the price, at the time of completing the last update it costs about twice as much as the Shield. To be honest, at these cost ranges, the price is a moot point.



3rd top-rated dog and cat proof sofa cover - Bella Kline Reversible Sofa Protector



This pet-friendly cover from Bella Kline is somewhere between the Shield and the Petmaker – it features the few quality and design aspects where the two previous covers don’t overlap.



It’s reversible (like the Shield) and it comes with hanging side pockets (two, while the Petmaker comes with 3). The company describes the finish as “water-repellent", this means that any spills won’t go right through but leaving it wet on the sofa is not a good idea.



In terms of price, it’s on the lower end of the range, hence the high rating in the “value for money category.



Basic info and ratings:





Three sizes – sofa (114 x 74 inches), chair (68 x 71 inches) and Love Seat (92 x71 inches)


Six color choices – from muted gray and brown that will work with most spaces to vivid purple, green, red and blue


Reversible – color of the other side is a toned down, lighter version of the main color


Material – hypoallergenic fiber (quilted microfiber, to be more precise)


Slipcover – so that no pet hair can “sink in" under the cushions


30-day guarantee


This cover will be the choice of pet-owners for whom water-resistance is not a priority. It’d budget friendly and hypoallergenic, so if allergies are an issue in your home, this might be your pick.



Reference info about dog and cat-proofing your couch and sofa



Keep the dog or car off the sofa in the first place



We all love our pets and not everybody will be thrilled about the option of using scare-tactics to keep your pet of the furniture. But we’re not all the same and if this is what you want to do, you have options.



The mildest ones come in the form of Sofa Scram sonic scat pads and mats for sofas.



These are so popular because they bring no harm to your pet. They work by emitting beeps that startle the pet so that it gets of furniture. They are not used as a permanent solution to keep your dog or cat off the sofa, but as a training aid.



A few times of being startled by the sound of Sofa Scram sonic scat pads and they will forget about trying it again. It works fast and you can remove the mat in a matter of days or weeks.



It’s a cheap solution if that’s what you’re looking for.



If you’re not that kind of person and you enjoy the company of your pet on those slow leisure days off lounging on the sofa (and most of us do), the better option will be getting a dog / cat proof couch in the first place or adding a protecting cover or sofa saver dog for the dog or cat.



We looked at our top picks in the two categories, so let’s take a step back and explain how we got there.



Cat and dog friendly sofa – pet proof couch materials



Choosing right here goes beyond the physical damage the claws can inflict on the material. You have to think about the pee and odors that will linger after the cat or dog peed on the sofa, you have to think about the saliva, dirt.



It’s not just about the furniture – it’s about the safety of the pet, too



The secondary factor is not the safety of the furniture but tat of your pet. With some materials, their claws can get “stuck". This usually happens when the weave of the material is wide – that’s the main reason a simple throw or blanket are the inferior choice to a dedicated piece like cat proof couch covers (you can also get them for regular or office chairs).



The materials that tick all the boxes of pet-friendliness while keeping the couch cat proof are: velvet, leather, crypton fabric and synthetic fibers.



Materials you want to avoid



You’ll wan to stay away from materials that are both textured and soft like chenille (or anything with a chenille-like finish. The wide-woven loops of these materials will not only attract them but their claws will pull out the loops and form an irreparable lump.



The history of pet-proofing a couch



History is maybe too strong of a word, but we just wanted to look at the options we had until technology stepped in.



In the past, pet owners were usually stuck with advice like choosing a patterned material so that they can mask the havoc from the claw scratches, the air and the dirt from the paws.



Designing a pet-friendly home



Before we get to the materials let’s look at what some causes of the issue starting at the very beginning - the psychology behind the scratching.



As experts explain, scratching is natural part of feline behavior patterns. It’s how they release tension, mark territory. As Dr. Cathy Meeks from the BluePearl Veterinary Partners puts it, “They see your couch as a toy and a tool."



So, we’re not just dealing with accidental damage from stretches – if your cat has nothing else to use, it will use the furniture to trim their nails.



It sounds bad but it’s actually a part of their bonding ritual with you. As the founder and director of The Paw Project, Dr. Jennifer Conrad lovingly puts it, “By marking your sofa or your chair, they are telling other cats that you belong to them and they belong to you."



Give them an alternative – a scratching post



None of the products we listed will make your furniture completely cat-proof. There are still parts that are exposed. Giving them the alternative of at least two scratching posts (ideally, one will be next to their “lair" and one next to their favorite piece of furniture) will minimize the damage.



In time, they will learn to use the posts to trim their nails and spare your furniture. Training a dog for adopted behavior like this is easier but you it can also be done with cats.



Use treats to reward the behavior you want them to adopt and, if they don’t seem to interested, experiment. If you don’t succeed at your first go, try mixing it up by changing the locations of the posts.



Sometimes, they will even be more interested in a piece of cardboard or a rugged carpet than the post.



Using pheromones plug-in



For most of us, using something like this will seem cruel. Pheromone smells calm them down and lower the scratching instinct. Bear in mind that the secondary effects of pheromones might be your cat becoming lethargic and sleepy.



If you love them for their naughty spirit, this will probably be your last resort.



A better alternative is to keep their nails in check so they don’t have to trim them against the furniture – this doesn’t mean declawing but maintaining a healthy nail-trimming regimen.



Cat proof couch and sofa protectors – October 2017 See more on: The Sleep Studies Reviews







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/cat-proof-couch/

Memory foam air mattresses – Top 3 Picks, September 2017

As per the request of a few of our readers, we looked into top products among memory foam air mattresses. This was about 6 months ago, since then, we compiled enough data to make a recommendation that we can stand behind.



It wasn't that hard



The guide on memory foam air mattress is actually one of the easiest we ever worked on, simply because the competition is so scarce. There's only two airbeds we feel are worth mentioning, yo'll see their ratings and reviews below.



Fox Premium Memory foam air mattress



Fox Webstores was founded back in 2003 as a clearance rack at ShopKo. Initially, they sold air mattresses created by other companies and launched their first proprietary line in 2008. Their early success led them to create a chain of online stores to help shoppers buy high-quality items that were difficult to find at the time.



Apart from Fox Air Beds LLC. they own brands like Best Choice and Stella Beds and e-Commerce sites such as AirBeds4Less.com and AirMattress.com. They're also preparing the launch of Bixe and CTurtle. It's reasonable to say that Fox Webstores grew a lot since their clearance gig and their plush high-rise model is definitely one of the prime suspects for that success.









Ratings





Air Retention – 93


Comfort – 92


Durability & Longevity – 97


User Satisfaction – 91


Value for $ - 92


Overall – 93


PROs and CONs



PROs:





Thickest material on the market


Optimal for in-house and outdoors use


SuperFlat sleeping surface


Sturdy seams and inner chambers


AirFlow design


Perfect body support and alignment


Memory foam topper and pillows


Built-in and external pump


90-day warranty


CONs:

• Subpar user support



Air retention



The toughest of the bunch



If there's a sturdier brand of air mattresses on the market than Fox, we haven't seen it so far. Fox is well-known for creating heavy-duty inflatable furniture able to serve you both in-house and outdoors. High-Rise Plush will never have you wake up on the floor/ground and it's your best bet against the outside factors like sharp rocks, gravel, tree roots etc.



The secret lies in the extremely durable and thick PVC, but we'll talk more about that once we start elaborating on our grade for durability.



The bed comes with an integrated high-intensity pump, but it also features a patented deluxe valve for external pumps, making it an ideal choice for camping without nearby sources of electricity.

Another advantage of FOX models is that you don't have to over-inflate them in order to reach the promised size (Twin, in this case). This puta a lot less stress on the seams, allowing for longer leak-free usage.



What does this mean for you?



Fox High-Rise Plush is a very versatile inflatable model, which can be used as your full-time or camping bed without having to worry about waking up "on the rocks". Inflating this bed with a manual pump will be a pain in the neck, to be honest, but you'll be happy you have the option, trust us.



On the other hand, the mattress is too heavy for backpackers, so you can effectively take it with you only if you're car-camping.

Comfort of Fox High-Rise Plush



Surprising performance



Even though Fox primarily focuses on durability and sturdy construction, the overall comfort index of this air bed is surprisingly high. Our 92 / 100 grade speaks volumes and bundles this model with some of the most comfortable air beds on the market.



Comfort-centric features



We'll start with SuperFlat sleeping surface, guaranteed not to develop structural deformities even after prolonged use. The bed spreads your weight evenly across the surface, providing optimal comfort while reducing the stress factor on the material. This type of sleeping exterior also provides excellent back support, aligning your spine, neck and shoulders perfectly while you sleep.



The inner construction filled with air chambers (or coils), prevents any form of motion transfer, making restless sleepers much easier to handle.



The AirFlow design prevents the general "bounciness" of the bed, which is something that plagues air mattresses since the beginning. It also makes the middle part as firm as the rest of the bed. Furthermore, this model features some of the toughest and most stable edges we've ever tested.



On top of all that, this model comes with a premium gel memory foam topper and pillows. The topper has a 2-fold role; it provides additional comfort and contrasts the firmness of the mattress, but also resolves the issue of a cold sleeping surface in low temperatures.



Durability & Longevity



How reliable is the material?



This bed performed great in all of our testing circuits, but durability is where it really got to shine. It's made of heavy-duty PVC with the overall thickness of 0.60mm. This translates to 0.025" or 22 gauges. There's a lot of wrong info out there, so be mindful of that fact when reading online reviews. We've even encountered claims of 60mm thickness or 2.36", which is just ridiculous. Note that the usual PVC thickness is 0.4mm or 0.015".



The extra thickness allows for stronger inner chambers and seams, making it less likely for this air bed to develop bulges, popped seams, leaks and other unwanted deformities. It also makes the bed much more resilient to the aforementioned outside factors, and yes, this DOES include your pets as well.

We thing our final grade of 97 / 100 speaks more loudly than words. No other model can even get close to this.



What about weight capacity?



The recommended weight for this model is up to 400 lbs (for the Full size). Just to put things into perspective, their King Size model supports up to 750 lbs or 150 more than all the other models on the market.



Is Fox Premium worth the money?



Our answer to this question won't hinge on your preferred usage of this mattress since it performs equally well both inside and outdoors. So, whatever need prompted you to think about buying an air mattress, it will be met by Fox. 93 / 100 vouches for an incredible value-to-price ratio, so you know you won't be throwing your money away.



We've seen a ton of features dedicated to comfort and anti-leaking efforts, but also overall durability and structural integrity of the mattress. Also, you don't have to be an expert in inflatable furniture in order to know that thicker vinyl means more durability, more stable seams and inner construction as well.



Bottom line, you'll get a veritable "tank" among air mattresses that'll handle anything you throw at it and ask for more.



Memory foam air mattresses – Top 3 Picks, September 2017 Read more on: thesleepstudies







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/memory-foam-air-mattress/

All About Sleep Paralysis

What is sleep paralysis?



You can call it a phenomenon, a sleep disorder, but essentially it is a (temporary) inability to move, speak and in some cases even open your eyes, while you are completely aware of everything happening around you. Your body is sleeping but your brain is awake. It happens while person is falling asleep (hypnagogic or pre-dormital sleep paralysis) or waking up (hypnopompic or post-dormital sleep paralysis) , it lasts anywhere from few seconds to a few minutes.



Sleep paralysis usually tends to hit young adults and teens and the experience itself is unpleasant and can cause a great discomfort. Some people never experienced it but to some it happens regularly, up to few times a month. The main problem is that the episode happens suddenly, when the person is relaxed and most vulnerable and it usually ends on its own, so it leaves you with a feeling of fear and helplessness.









Sometimes having other people talk to you or touch you can end it, or you can focus and try to move on your own.



A lot of people had said that while they were “paralysed” they had a feeling of something heavy sitting on their chest and blocking their breathing, or felt presence of someone in the room while they were completely alone. The hallucinations are also very frequent. We might say that the worst part of it is not the temporary paralysis but the weird and scary sensation that the person is going through.



For people that are experiencing this phenomenon it is of a great help to understand why it is happening and to have a logical explanation for the symptoms. In some cases it can be a sign of a greater health problem like narcolepsy, so if this is something that quite often happens to you or you have some other symptoms it is recommended to visit a doctor.

Sleep paralyses on it’s own is seen like an isolated, harmless episode and it’s not treated as a disease or chronic disorder.



What causes sleep paralyses?



In the past it was believed that the sleep paralysis is a “work of a demons”. Scientific explanation is that the sleep paralyses is a disruption of sleep stages. We simply wake up at the “wrong” time, a bit earlier than our muscles.



Hypnagogic (predormital) sleep paralysis happens in the beginning of a sleep cycle, in NREM (non-rapid eye movement) stages when we are just starting to fall asleep and our brain activity starts to slow down and muscles become relaxed. At that point we are less aware of our surroundings and don’t notice the changes around us or inside our body. However if we do become aware we can notice our inability to move or speak.

Hypnopompic (postdormital) sleep paralysis occurs when we become conscious before the REM (rapid eye movement) phase has finished. The REM sleep is a stage when we have dreams during which our brain is very active to a level it works when we are awake, but our muscles are paralyzed. Immobility of our limbs is actually a good thing because we can’t get up and act out the things we are dreaming of. So if our mind wakes up before our muscles in that stage we might experience sleep paralysis.



Stress, sleep deprivation, alcohol and drug abuse are known to be the triggers, and it also can be linked to other sleep disorders, from snoring to narcolepsy. Some mental conditions including anxiety, PTSD and depression are associated with it and it often “runs in family” so if one of your parents has experienced sleep paralysis it is more likely to happen to you.



Sleep paralysis and hallucinations



Sleep related hallucinations often come with sleep paralysis. They are different from dreams because they occur in the space between being awake and sleeping. They involve your senses but usually are mainly visual in a form of vivid images without any external stimulants, for example you can see a person or animal moving in your room when you know you are all alone. They can be very complex and seem extremely realistic.



The person experiencing hallucinations knows that she is awake and if that occurs in a combination with sleep paralysis it can be very disturbing. People with narcolepsy usually experience this during the day. Also, sleep paralysis and hallucinations can be followed with sleepwalking and sleep talking during the same night or as isolated episodes in different nights.

We distinguish two types of sleep related hallucinations: hypnogogic and hypnopompic. Hypnogogic can be more unpleasant because it often goes with sleep paralysis and the person is making a transition from wake state to sleep so any type of hallucination at that stage is more frightening in difference to hypnopompic when person wakes up and can relate any hallucination with a dream. There can also be the sensation of falling or being watched.



Contrast between dream and hallucination is that the person after waking up clearly knows that she was dreaming while with hallucinations the line between dreams and reality is blurred so it can be very confusing. This phenomenon tends to happen to young adults and it’s most common between females.



Sleep paralysis stories – demons and shadow people



Even if you don’t have hallucinations as an addition to sleep paralysis, the experience alone is often disturbing and frightening.



There are a lot of weird, scary stories from the people who have experienced it, but usually the base is very similar: the pleasant sleep is disrupted by suddenly waking up to notice that you can’t move or speak and you are not alone. You have trouble breathing because something is pushing down on your chest, you can’t sit up or move your limbs, you feel a presence of some entity in the room that you can’t explain, there is an intruder or a demon. You become really scared and the panic grows, may even have an out-of-body experience.









There are a lot of scientific explanations for this phenomenon, the main ones are related to brain activity in REM sleep, overlapping dreams, hallucinations and humans fight or flight defense mechanism.

The thing is that we are most vulnerable in our beds, sleeping, so if you believe in demonic forces the science is not going to help you a lot. In some countries a part of the national folklore are the stories about the demons that steal your life at night.



In Fiji it’s perceived as the dead relative who came to finish some business; in Turkey it’s the demon who literally sits on your chest and takes your breath; in China it’s a ghost; in Iran it’s a demon who takes bodies and it’s related to a dark magic performed by someone who wants to harm you.



The one of the most popular entities to be blamed is the so called “shadow person” (shadow being, black mass), a human-like living shadow. Some people describe these dark silhouettes trying to jump on them and choke them, some say they are aliens. All of them agree that they want to do harm.

The common theme is that this is some evil-doing and you should be scared, but in the end nothing really bad happened to the people who shared these stories, except for the experience itself.



The hat man stories



The “hat man” phenomenon is similar to a “shadow person” with some differences though. It is an entity that usually appears during the night, always wearing a wide-brimmed hat, a long coat, slowly floating like it has no lower body. The stories describe the hat-man like a very dark shadow with no distinct facial features. It centers around basement, doesn’t attack people and usually manifest itself when there is some sort of dysfunction in the family.



Often when one person in a household see the hat man very soon the other members will see it too.



Some say it is evil some say it’s not, but it is believed that when it appears it means that there is a family problem that needs to be resolved asap. So we can say that the hat man is perceived not necessary as a bad sign but more like a warning. What actually he warns about is yet unknown.



How to prevent or stop sleep paralysis



There is no special treatment for sleep paralysis unless it is a symptom of some bigger problem. Usually it happens just a few times in a person’s lifetime so it’s not treated as a disease. Actually the best thing is preventing it from happening.



Here are some ways of dealing with it naturally that can really help you:





Eliminate or reduce caffeine and be well hydrated – there is no need to explain why, even people with anxiety disorder are advised to stay away from it, so if you drink a lot of coffee especially in the evening try to cut it down.


Turn off electronics – you may consider getting the tv out from your bedroom, it is proven to be very efficient.


No more alcohol and heavy meals before bedtime – your digestion slows down at night so if you pump your stomach with proteins, sugar, fat and carbs before going to bed you are really not helping yourself.


Relax before sleep – have a hot bath, read a book, listen to the music that you like or go out for a nice walk. It will help you calm.


Sleep on your side – sleep paralysis usually occurs when sleeping on your back. Also, if you sleep on a high pillow try to lower it, it can effect the blood supply to the brain, so the sleep position, does play a role - https://thesleepstudies.com/sleep-positions-benefits/



Drink herbal tea or milk. The chamomile for example has calming effect. And the milk increases melatonin levels. (you can see our the brands that are voted to be the best tea for sleep here - https://thesleepstudies.com/best-tea-sleep/ )


Talk to your MD about sleep supplements like Melatonin, it might be an option for you but it has it's risks. People tend to take too much of it - you can see our guide on mush melatonin is too much and the response to questions like, "Can I overdose on melatonin?" in this guide - https://thesleepstudies.com/can-you-overdose-on-melatonin/



Sleep more – you need 7 hours sleep on a daily basis, so your sleep phases (especially REM) can make full circles.


Make a routine – try to go to bed at the same time each night and spend the same amount of hours sleeping. If you take naps may they be around the same period of the day. Try to make a schedule and stick to it.


Meditation – it is a proven, effective way of coping with the anxiety without medication. It helps you relax and be calm and in terms of couple of weeks you can see how you generally feel much better.

Keep a sleep journal – if you write about your nightmares you can look at them more objectively, often when we put our scary thoughts on a paper they tend to become less frightening. You can learn what are your sleeping patterns, notice when the sleep paralysis usually happens and maybe find out a new way to deal with it.


Sleep paralysis and lucid dreaming



If we know that the sleep paralysis is the transition between wakefulness and sleep can we do something to make that episode less tormenting or even pleasant? The answer is: possibly. But how? Maybe lucid dreams are the answer.



We don’t know the cause of sleep paralysis, but we do know what often triggers it. Some researchers think that the SP is just the falling off the usual sleep stages in the REM phase, and any lucid dreams or other strange experiences are triggered by hallucinations. Some think that it’s the path to reaching higher consciousness or out-of-body experience, it is related to spirituality and it serves to help us reach higher levels of existing. In that case it’s believed that sleep paralysis serves as a ladder to reach some sort of transcendental reality, and if you are experiencing it you are closer to achieving that than the most of the people. Of course, if you know how to do it.



If you are a believer or just want to try having a trippy experience here are some techniques for lucid dreaming:





Know the triggers – same as with trying to prevent SP, you have to know what provokes it to happen so you can induce it.


Be prepared – keep a journal next to your bed and every morning write everything you can remember about the dreams you had that night, especially details that where clear indicators that you were dreaming (unrealistic things like dragons).


Let go of fear – this one is tough, but you should start telling yourself that what you are experiencing is sleep paralysis and nothing scary is actually happening. After that you can try to shift into a dream. Close your eyes if they are not closed already, relax and just sink into the feeling. Then make a declaration of the thing you want to dream about, for example: “I want to swim in the pink ocean”. Imagine yourself doing that and if you are lucky the dream will start to form and become realistic. Don’t stop reminding yourself that you are dreaming. If you are having any trouble just go with the flow. Follow the feeling that you have, if you feel something is pulling you just let yourself go.


Don’t force it – if you feel the need to drift to sleep go for it. If you start panicking this will not work. You have to be conscious enough but relaxed.


Can sleep paralysis cause death?



Although a sleep paralysis is scary and you can experience some trouble breathing it cannot cause death directly. You just have a feeling of asphyxiation but in reality there is nobody choking you. Even a „sudden death syndrome“ has a medical explanation and it has nothing to do with sleep paralysis.

So, the answer is no, you can’t die from it, but you sure can feel like you are.



Sleep paralysis treatment options



We already said that there is no cure for sleep paralysis but there are things you can do to stop it or deal with it better. Adopting a regular sleeping pattern is probably the first and most important step, try to go to bed at approximately same time each night, avoid caffeine and try to relax as much as you can before going to bed. You can read more here.



If your attacks don’t stop there are ways that will help you going trough this experience. When the episode happens try to stay calm as possible and observe the situation objectively. Focus on controlling your breathing or moving a finger. Even trying to make a small noise can help ending the attack. Remember that it is just temporary, it’s something happening to a lot of people and it will soon pass.



Sleep paralysis in history



Although the symphtom is scientifically explained the experience itself is so special that it’s often linked to paranormal forces and spirituality. It has a place in a lot of nations folklore. Since ancient Mesopotamia we know the story about incubus, a female demon that torments people at night sitting on their chest, in Scandinavia they called her mara.

In British folklore it is known as old hag:



“This is the hag, when maids lie on their backs, That presses them and learns them first to bear, Making them women of good carriage.”



Queen Mab Speech, William Shakespeare



In Turkey people pray to Allah reading certain prayers from Qur’an to help them get rid of demons that are believed to cause sleep paralysis.



In south of US you can hear stories about „witch riding“



It is clear that in a lack of medical research people held demons responsible for this phenomenon, and you can’t really blame them for that.



All About Sleep Paralysis is available on https://www.thesleepstudies.com







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/sleep-paralysis/

Best Tea for Sleep – 7 Most Potent Herbal Teas

Fewer than 3% of people have a specific gene that lets them get by on just 6 hours of sleep.

They don’t even know how lucky they are. The rest of us mortals, on the other hand, need at least 8 hours, and they are sometimes hard to come by and we usually need help.



The help most often comes in two forms:





A calming cup of herbal tea


An OTC sleep aid








Before we get to the best and most potent herbal teas for sleep, let’s get one thing out of the way. Let’s take a moment to address why even some of the milder OTC aids are not a long term solution.



A problem with OTC aids and why you should try herbal teas for sleep first



OTC aids like Melatonin are a more aggressive approach to the issue and should be used cautiously. In spite of Melatonin being “natural” (made in the pineal gland) it is still a hormone and this kind of supplementation should only be used in controlled way under doctor’s supervision.



In the case of Melatonin two primary reasons for that:





You can develop an addiction – like with most hormones introduced artificially, the gland that secretes it “gets the message” that there is less of a need for it and it slows down. In other words – once you stop taking it, the issue might become worse because the gland is used to producing less and your body gets used to higher concentrations of the hormone. The result – falling asleep gets exponentially harder, at least until the pineal gland “recovers.” That


Melatonin overdose – if you don’t follow the guidelines on the bottle or that of your doctor, you can easily end up taking too much of it because it has a delayed response. Simply put – you don’t feel it right away and people end up taking more because “it’s not working. So, yes, the answer to the question, “Can you overdose on Melatonin?” is yes. How much Melatonin is too much will depend on your body type, age, BMR and the range of other factors.


A better and safer way is to introduce lifestyle changes that will naturally increase your melatonin levels.



Best herbal tea for sleep



Now that we have the OTC aids issue out of the way, let’s focus on the milder alternatives – teas that have shown best results in helping insomniacs get a good night’s slumber.



Chamomile Tea for sleep



The reason why Chamomile tea works so well for people with sleep problems is because it’s a mild tranquilizer. The way it works is not completely clear but the most probably reason is the fact that the falconoid from the tea bind to the benzodiazepine receptors (which regulate who calm or restless your brain is).

Image chamomile-tea-cup



The results are not hear-say; the effects of Chamomile are backed by a growing body of studies.



Secondary benefits



Chamomile is packed with antioxidants antimicrobials. It is also said to be a mild anti-inflammatory. Inflammation is the source of most physical pain – the body recognizes a damaged body part, whether that is due to arthritis or an injury, and increases circulation to that area. This causes inflammation. General inflammation causes the fascia between your skin and muscles to become gummy and less flexible, causing pain in the muscles. Chamomile will reduce that inflammation and alleviate the pain.



Lemon Balm tea



This actually sounds like something you would use on dry lips, but it makes a great tea for people suffering from insomnia. Steep lemon balm in boiling water, and it will not only make a tea that reduces your sense of anxiety, it will reduce indigestion.



Indigestion is one of the leading causes of restless sleep and insomnia, and you may not even know you have it! The discomfort may be subtle enough to just make you feel bad without allowing you to tag the problem.



Lemon balm tea is potent enough help cold sores to heal faster. Think about it – if it heals cold sores, it can soothe stomach, esophageal, and intestinal irritation, too, resulting in a better night’s sleep.



Banana Tea for sleep



Eww! But yes, this really works!!



Bananas are loaded with minerals that we often lack in our daily diet. By placing a banana in a pot of boiling water for a few minutes, you create an herbal tea rich in magnesium and potassium.



These minerals will help your muscles relax, which helps you drift off sooner. The combo of banana and cinnamon tea is reported to be the most potent.



In addition, you will stay asleep for longer periods of time. If you are prone to abruptly waking during the night, banana tea may be the answer for you



Chamomile/Turmeric Tea



Turmeric is the new Wonder Herb, touted for its abilities to reduce inflammation. It also has cancer-fighting properties. By combining chamomile and turmeric, you get a tea that is relaxing and calming, thanks to the chamomile, yet delivers boosted anti-inflammatory properties to keep your body relaxed and more pain-free.



Most chamomile/turmeric mixes include a little bit of ground ginger and cinnamon, and are sweetened with Agave juice or honey. You steep the chamomile tea bags in hot water, then stir in the spices along with coconut oil and a little plant milk. Actually, I use whole dairy milk, but I’m a rebel.



Ginger/Turmeric Tea



Here is turmeric, again, mixed with ginger. Peel and slice a two-inch piece of ginger root, and add it to boiling water. Add a half-teaspoon of turmeric and the juice from one-half of a lemon, and simmer for about 15 minutes. You’ll want to strain the tea, and maybe add honey to sweeten it since the turmeric can be a bit strong.

This tea will help you stay asleep once you finally fall asleep. The lemon, by the way, helps soothe irritated mucous membranes, which is great for a cough or indigestion. Honey is a natural sleep remedy, too.



Lavender Tea



Lavender is not a relaxing scent to many people. It kind of smells like medicine rather than a magical herb. However, it is well known for its medicinal properties, and you may well benefit from lavender herb tea.

Image dry-lavender-tea



Simply steep lavender flowers in hot water and sweeten with honey. You can certainly drink the tea after the flowers are discarded. The tea will help you relax and help your mind stop whirling so that you can fall asleep.



But, there is more! You can use the lavender tea as a chest rub for bronchitis and asthma. By drinking it and rubbing it on your chest and throat, you can reduce coughing and help bronchial swelling to relax. It’s also good for cuts and sores.



Spice Rack Tea



Let’s call this one “Spice Rack Tea” because, as you will see, it has just about everything in it. All of these ingredients are chosen for their various abilities to ease muscle pain, indigestion, stress, and insomnia.

Image spice-rack



You need a tablespoon each of: chamomile, spearmint, St. John’s Wort, dried lemon peel, rosebuds, and nettle leaf. I actually like to add turmeric to this mix, just because. Steep an infuser of these herbs in hot water for about 5 minutes, and you’ll have a tea that helps you relax, drift off to sleep, and stay asleep.



Best Tea for Sleep – 7 Most Potent Herbal Teas is courtesy of thesleepstudies







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/best-tea-sleep/

Coleman GuestRest Elite Pillow Top Double High Queen Airbed review

Coleman is one of if not THE oldest company we've ever written about. It was founded by W.C. Coleman back in 1900 and it began its story as a seller of gasoline pressure lamps.



They're currently owned by Newell Brands with corporate headquarters in Wichita and additional facilities in Texas. This was a result of a very intricate and convoluted corporate process, which started back in 1998 when Sunbeam Corporation acquired Coleman Powermate and Coleman Company Inc.



Sunbeam Corporation filed for Chapter 11 bankruptcy in 2002 and changed its name to American Household Inc. once it sprang back on its feet. Jarden acquired them (and Coleman) in 2005, which, in turn, was acquired by Newell Rubbermaid (now, Newell Brands) in 2016. This is where we're at right now.



Whether the company managed to keep its renowned quality during all these acquisitions and corporate takeovers, we'll see in this dedicated Coleman SupportRest review.









Ratings





Air Retention – 93


Comfort – 94


Durability & Longevity – 93


User Satisfaction – 90


Value for $ - 90


Overall – 92


PROs and CONs



PROs:





Removable, washable top layer


AirTight System


SupportLock reinforced construction


ComfortStrong system of inner coils


Double Lock valve for leak prevention


Operated with built-in or external pump


19" high


Up to 600 lbs of weight supported


PillowStop feature


1-year warranty


CONs:





The pillow top layer seams less durable than the rest of the mattress, over prolonged use without sheets it's prone to thinning


The specifics of the Coleman GuestRest Elite Pillow Top Double High Queen Airbed



First of all, this Coleman features an AirTight system, which is factory-tested for potential leaks. This means that the material, seams and inner construction are all working together to provide a completely leak-free experience.



Double Lock valve features a dual-sealed construction with two lines of defense against air leaks. This is the security best option the inflatable furniture of today has to offer. This model comes with a built-in pump that can be operate via 4D batteries or 120V plug-in option. On top of that, is has an additional valve compatible with most of the electric/manual pumps on the market. This also makes it an ideal camping option when electricity is nowhere to be found.



It's one of the top Coleman models, along with the Coleman SupportRest Classic (designed for camping), Colemant Cot Queen airbed and Coleman Quickbed 4-in-1 - see the reviews below:



Comfort



This is where Coleman really shines



The construction of this bed is carefully designed to provide the optimal comfort to the sleeper. There's a lot ground to cover in this section, so let's begin.



The top of the mattress is covered with a washable, removable quilted layer to provide the look and feel of a regular bed. With regular beds, though, this top upholstery in usually glued or sewn onto the surface making it rather useless once it loses its shape and softness. Note the difference between "pillow top" and "PillowStop". Coleman really hasn't make things easier with these similarities. Pillow top signifies a construction with an extra layer of upholstery added for extra comfort. We understand and approve of it in a context of an air mattress. With regular beds, though, it seems like utter flashy nonsense.



PillowStop, on the other hand, means that the mattress features elevated sides in order to prevent your pillow from slipping off. Not a feature deserving of an actual name, in our opinion, but might as well explain the difference.



Furthermore, this model features a ComfortStrong coil system encompassing separate air pockets for better body support and comfort throughout the entire night.

SupportLock reinforced construction provides additional support and prevents motion transfer. If you had any experience with air mattresses, you'll notice a significantly increased stability of Coleman as you move around the surface.



Coleman SupportRest is designed to resemble a regular bed as much as possible and 18" of height is definitely a step in the right direction. It makes getting in and out of the bed significantly easier and provides an additional space between you and the ground when camping.



Durability & Longevity



This bed is primarily made for use indoors. It's designed to provide the feel of a traditional bed and keep you as comfortable as possible all night long. That being said, it's made of heavy-duty PVC and can definitely "take a beating" if needs be.



The additional quilted layer on top will prove to be an invaluable protection you have any curious pets with sharp claws.



The maximum supported weight is 600 lbs, which is an industry standard for these types of air beds. We've tested this Coleman mattress extensively and even left 700 lbs in weights on the surface overnight, only to find it didn't lose any air whatsoever. So, technically it can support even more than the prescribed weight, but we wouldn't push it too far.



Coleman is well-known for their sturdy constructions, high-quality seams and durable materials. With that in mind, you can rest assured that you won't be needing a new inflatable mattress anytime soon.



On top of all, they offer a full 1-year guarantee for this model, which says enough about their faith in their product.



Is it worth the money?



Based on all of the tests conducted by our featured testers and in-house personnel, we have to say that this Coleman model is definitely worth every penny. We have a bit of a caveat to it, though. If you're looking for a dedicated camping mattress, this might not be the best choice. It'll get the job done, sure, but that's not what it's designed for.



This inflatable mattress is made to mimic the feel and look of a regular bed. It's created with comfort in mind, but also has an impressive score in our durability category. This doesn't mean that it can handle anything that, let's say, Fox can. It's not made to deal with sharp rocks, pointy branches, tree stumps, gravel and other factors commonly found while camping.



So, of you want a full-time inflatable bed to be used at home, this is one of the best bets on the market. If you're more into camping, however, it can perform from time to time, but it'll suffer from prolonged exposure to the grand outdoors.



Coleman GuestRest Elite Pillow Top Double High Queen Airbed review See more on: The Sleep Studies Reviews







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/coleman-guestrest-elite-pillow-top-double-high-queen-airbed-review/

Heavy duty air mattress – most durable air mattress picks – August 2017 update


The list of TOP 5 has not changed for 6 updates now



The list of 5 most durable and heavy-duty air mattresses hasn’t seen any change in a full year.



This month’s update is no different, the air beds that have been top-rated in the category of durability and longevity are still there in the exact same order.



Let’s see what’s different about these products and what makes them so tough.



Most durable and heavy duty air mattresses – TOP 5



Fox Plush – in a category of its own









The past few years have brought on more changes in the industry than the 15 years before that. The number of air coils used, the type and quality of vinyl…it’s been a hectic few years.



To be honest, it was the most challenging few years for us to, trying to stay on top of all the changes and maintain the standards of relevancy we’ve defined when we started testing inflatable beds.



This Fox, however, is not in that group



This Fox has seen very little change in the ratings, especially the “durability & longevity" category.



Why?



Because what makes it so tough is durable is not a fancy new beam design or layered vinyl, it is the simple fact that it is THE ONLY air bed in industry made from vinyl this thick.

0.4 mm vs. 0.6 mm vinyl



The industry standard for the material used is 0.4 mm thick vinyl.



The vinyl used to make this Fox is almost 50 % thicker (43% to be precise). There’s nothing quite like it on the market.



We tested over 110 products so far and none of those comes close to the durability results we’ve seen here.



Punctures vs. leaks



You would expect that the Fox plush would be more resistant to punctures, but that’s not the most important part.



If there’s something important that we’ve learned about durability & longevity is that the main reason behind loss of air are not the obvious punctures.



It’s the air leaks and pinholes.



These are the leaks that develop over time and for most users, are nearly impossible to spot and patch.



Here’s why…



Because a lot of them develop as a result of the stretching of the vinyl and separation at the seams.



Why is this FOX better in air retention?



What we’ve described above, the leaks that develop along the seams (whether external or seams of the inner chambers) are pretty much the worse thing that can happen.



If there’s a simple puncture, you still might have a chance to patch it, but a leak at a seam will render the air bed useless.



Why doe the seam leaks develop



Now, these leaks at the seams happen as a result of prolonged sustained stress of the material stretching.



The thicker the vinyl, the more sturdy and stable the air mattress. There’s no stress on the seams and the chances of the leaks developing are much lower.



There’s no two ways about it.



See the full testing results & review for the FOX plush here - https://thesleepstudies.com/fox-air-mattress-review/



Second most durable heavy duty air mattress – Best Choice Blue



Durable for completely different reasons than the Fox



We talked about the changes and innovations that have happened in the industry in the pas few years.



Well, this heavy-duty air mattress is a perfect example of the new generation.



It hit the market in the spring of 2016 and within a few months from the first tests, it dominates a few categories and is one of the Top 10 best air mattresses overall.



Nylon-encased virgin vinyl



Opposed to Fox, the material used for this sturdy air mattress is not thicker, it’s better.



While most companies still use regular vinyl, the company behind this bad boy introduced a game-changer in the form or nylon-encased, virgin vinyl.



Let’s break that down



Nylon-encased means that there’s an extra layer of sturdy nylon encasing the vinyl. What it does is minimize the stretching of the material. This makes the sleeping surface flatter and lowers the risk of seam-leaks.



Virgin vinyl means not-recycled



Now, if you are into environmental-friendly product made from recycled materials, this might bother you.



But here is a simple fact – recycled vinyl looses some of its structural integrity. The fact that this vinyl is virgin, combined with the nylon-encasing makes this one of the two most durable air mattress out there.



It does however, has its CONs and will not be right for everybody. When we say this we are primarily referring to the firmness of the sleeping surface. For the full list of testing results and the review, follow the link below.



See the full review of the Best Choice Blue here - https://thesleepstudies.com/bamboo-cover-air-mattress-review/



SoundAsleep Cloud Nine



Overall, the Cloud 9 is currently the top-rated air bed.



This bed comes from a company that started the “revolution" that we mentioned by introducing inner coil design that’s nothing like the industry has seen before.



SoundAsleep changed the industry and then improved on it



The first product that came from SoundAsleep was the Dream Series. To date, it is the most popular model on the market.



What make it more durable?



Three main factors that make this air bed more durable are:





The multi-layered material – the vinyl used to make it actually consists of a few layers of the material. This makes it less stretchy.


40 + air coils distribute weight more efficiently and lower the forces that work “on the seams"


The smart pump – we mentioned that one the main reason air mattress start leaking are seam leaks that are a result of stretching and pulling. This happens as the air bed naturally starts loosing a bit of air.


The Cloud 9 doesn’t have the problem of the material pulling on the seams as the bed gets “wobblier" from the air loss because it comes with a “smart pump".



This pump design is probably the biggest improvement in the last 10 years



Although this is a young product (hit the market towards the end of 2016), the “smart" pump that comes with it is not new technology.



We’ve already seen it in some beds coming from Serta and Insta. Serta calls their pump “NeverFlat", but the two pumps work in pretty much the same way.



The “smart" pump is a small secondary pump. It’s not used to inflate the bed but to add air if the pressure inside the chambers drops.



Why is this a big deal for Durability?



Simple – because if the inner pressure doesn’t fluctuate, there is less pulling forces on the seams and, as we said a few times before, this is one of the main cause of mysterious air leaks that happens with most lower quality models.



Bottom line – the Cloud 9 will be the choice of people who make no compromises and want to eliminate the bring the risk of air leaks to an absolute minimum. To see the complete resting results, follow the link below.



See the full review of the Cloud 9 here - https://thesleepstudies.com/soundasleep-cloud-nine-air-mattress-review/



4th top pick among heavy-duty air mattresses - SoundAsleep Dream Series



This is the air mattress that changed the industry, we’ve said dozens of time before and we’ll say it again.



What make it more durable?



The main reason it lasts longer and can take more “abuse" is the way the weight is distributed. When it arrived to the market it was the only model to feature 40+ internal air coils.



It’s these coils that make all the difference.



Blow up beds that feature a beam inner deign (or even those with a lower number of coils) the weight is not distributed evenly. The result is that unbalanced sleep surface you’ll likely see with most inflatables.



The coils in this bed make it stable, and that in turn, results in less micro currents developing inside. The primary benefit of that is the comfort.



The secondary is a more durable bed less prone to puncture and leaks. As the air inside moves less and the sleep surface is more stable, the all-important seams suffer less pulling and stretching.



See the full review of the SoundAsleep Dream Series here - https://thesleepstudies.com/soundasleep-dream-series-air-mattress-review/



The most durable camping air mattress – Lightspeed Outdoors TPU



The only dedicated camping air mattress on the list



Out of the 4 heavy-duty air mattresses mentioned above, 2 feature an extra valve that can be used to inflate and deflate without access to power – the Fox and the Best Choice.



However, these two are only an option if you have the room in your trunk and your tent for a bulky raised air mattress. That especially goes for the Fox – having the tough and thick material in mind, it’s only natural that this monster of a bed will be more bulky and weigh more (the Fox in Queen size weighs a whooping 18.7 pounds).



Lightspeed Outdoors TPU weighs only 6.48 lbs



Three times lighter than the Fox, this bed packs down to 18 x 8 “. In those terms, it’s the only heavy-duty air mattress on the list that’s a viable option for backpacking and smaller slanted tends.



How can it be so durable at that weight?



This is the only bed on the list that’s not made of vinyl. It’s made of a material called TPU.



What makes it so durable is the fact that TPU doesn’t stretch. TPU feels more like fabric than plastic (think military backpacks).



Why aren’t all air mattresses made of TPU?



Because it’s not as malleable as vinyl. This makes it harder to make an air mattress that will be sturdy at the seams.



In fact, out of the 100+ air beds we tested, we feel like this is THE ONLY TPU air bed that’s worth the money.



Lightspeed somehow managed to find the sweet spot between the toughness of the seams and the sturdiness of the material.



Bottom line – if you are looking for a heavy-duty, durable air mattress for camping, the search probably ends with this 2-person model.



Reference info on what makes these heavy duty air mattressese more durable & a few honorary mentions



The rest of this guide is dedicated to a few other brands and models that didn’t make it to the top 5 most durable air mattresses but we feel they deserve a mention.



We’ll not only go over the few honorary mentions but a few technologies used by other brands specifically aimed at making a tougher air bed.



Intex and the Fiber Tech technology



If this is not your first time buying a blow up mattress, you might be surprised to see Intex mentioned in the context of durability.



It is one of the best-known companies, but they have a bit of history and reputation for making products that are on the cheaper end of the spectrum, which usually meant they could not compete with the other brands in terms of durability.



That changed with the arrival of their Dura Beam Fiber Tech Series



What’s makes the models in the series both more comfortable and durable than other Intex models are the thousands of fibers connecting the top to the bottom surface.



The Fiber Tech fibers changed Intex as a brand forever. It’s the best thing to “happen" to them in decades.



The difference is that Fiber tech fibers do not stretch. Yes, we did mention the stretching a few times before and there’s no way around it.



Intex advertise their Durabeam Series as being “Designed for Comfort, engineered for durability" and rightfully so. The Durabeam Series beds are not even in the same category as the rest of the Intex portfolio.



Our top pick from the series is the Intex Comfort Plush Durabeam Elevated - https://thesleepstudies.com/intex-comfort-plush-elevated-durabeam-airbed-review/



Why it didn’t make it to the TOP 5 most durable air beds



Our durability ratings are based on range of factors and, in this months update, the Durabeam Series was very close to breaking into the top heavy-duty models.



Yet, it’s not there yet and this is based on the ratings of our field testers.



This is our opinion why it’s not among the TOP 5


There’s no doubt that Fiber Tech is a great addition to the Intex portfolio. Having said that, what we’ve seen in practice that, in terms of durability & longevity, coils tend to be the superior choice compared to beams.



The most probable reason is that coils are better at restricting air movement. The comfort is there, but the ratings we’ve seen from our testers over the past year placed the Fiber tech models just under the bar.



Who it might be right for?


If the money is tight, the fact that the Fiber tech Series models cost much less than any of the high-rises mentioned above.

In the end, it’s a numbers game, and if the price is an important factor for you, Intex Durabeam might still be your best bet.



What Coleman is doing to make a more heavy-duty air mattress



Another big player that was challenged by the arrival on the younger companies and models is Coleman.



The durability of their models was and still is, one of their stronger suits.



The fact that that Coleman SuportRest is the official airbed of the National Park Foundation speaks for itself.



Coleman does have a long-standing relationship with the NPF and that fact alone could not be the reason to treat their models any differently in our durability testing and rating process.



Still, both our in-house tests and field testing of our fellow camper testers earned the Coleman SuportRest a place in the top 5 best camping air mattresses and top 3 most durable camping models.



What makes it tougher?



Coleman’s durability “game" is strong and it relies on 3 technologies:





The Comfort Strong Coil Construction


The Support Lock inner chamber reinforcements


The role of the Comfort Strong Coil system



This is basically a name Coleman use to describe why the construction of some of their models is superior in durability terms.



Opposed to a beam inner design, the coils are there to provide a flatter sleeping surface and better weight distribution. Again, in terms of durability, the role of the system is to lower the impact of the weight on the material.



Simply put, it’s the coils that “deal" with the weight and not the material.



What the Support Lock System does to make Coleman airbed more heavy-duty



Sinking to the middle is common in lower-quality and less durable inflatables. It happens as a result of a few factors:





Inferior support of the inner chambers


Sides of the bed being less sturdy and more likely to give in


The Support lock system works on the latter.



The added pieces of support materials in the system connect the sides of the bed to the tom and bottom surface. This increases the durability of the airbed by minimizing the sinking, and in turn, the brunt that pulls on the material.



Who is it for?



Our two picks among the Coleman models that feature both features mentioned above is the Coleman SuportRest ( https://thesleepstudies.com/coleman-supportrest-double-high-airbed/) & DuraRest.




Two more heavy-duty camping air mattresses, the SuportRest might be the choice of campers with enough room in their tents to fit the raised sides, while the DuraRest will appeal more to those who prefer a more classic low-rise.


The blog post Heavy duty air mattress – most durable air mattress picks – August 2017 update is available on https://thesleepstudies.com







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/heavy-duty-air-mattress-most-durable/

Insta Bed EZ air mattress Queen Review

Air retention of the Insta Bed EZ air mattress Queen



Unlike other similar models which tend to deflate mid-use due to various factors such as heat, pinhole air leaks, and body weight, the bed stays inflated all night. The primary air pump, intended for quick and simple set-up, is capable of inflating and deflating the mattress in less than four minutes.









Aside from the primary pump, this mattress also utilizes patented neverFLAT pump technology to ensure that air pressure and comfort remain consistent throughout the night. This near-silent secondary pump senses when it needs to engage. Extra air is added automatically if the monitor detects any pressure level changes.



With many other queen-sized inflatable beds, it can be difficult to move around without disturbing your partner; but the bed is designed to be nearly silent. Without the annoying squeaky sound of the rubber, you’ll get a better night’s sleep. Although the primary pump is just as noisy as that of other air mattresses, it only takes a couple minutes to inflate or deflate, so the noise is short-lived.



The company recommends to inflate the mattress at least an hour prior to using it.



Comfort rating of the Insta Bed EZ



The bed is designed to be just as comfortable, if not more so, than a regular mattress. With a velour-like flocked top, many customers find that this is one of the more comfortable products on the market today.



With four comfort control settings, the user may select either plush, medium, or firm. This enables you to customize the mattress to fit your needs and preferences.



When it’s fully inflated, it measures about 80 inches long by 60 inches wide, making it spacious enough for two to sleep comfortably. Because this mattress is typically used by two people, it’s designed for minimal motion transfer. This means that as one person moves throughout the night, the other person will feel very little movement, if any. In addition, the surface is very well-balanced, so the lighter weight person won’t feel any pull from the heavier person’s side.



For those with back problems, blow up beds are a hit and miss. However, your back receives an adequate amount of support, ensuring the proper alignment of your back as you sleep.



Another great feature of the mattress does not sit on the ground due to the sturdy, elevated frame. This means the mattress doesn’t get cold, which is a frequent concern with more basic, cheaper models. Additionally, the sleep surface is designed to keep your sheets in place, preventing them from pulling at the corners. Standard queen-sized sheets fit this mattress.



Durability and longevity of the Insta Bed EZ air mattress Queen



With the utilization of a circular coil system, this mattress delivers an incredibly comfortable and supportive surface. Made of puncture-resistant PVC, the Insta EZ bed is one of the most durable options on the market.



This high-quality PVC not only gives the mattress its durability, but it makes it simple to clean.



Due to the metal frame, the is a bit heavier than others. However, this is not a bad thing, as it goes to show its quality and durability.



The weight capacity is 500 pounds, which is quite high compared to other similar products from the competition. The metal frame is incredibly well built and supportive. It’s designed to never falter under weight, making this mattress more than suitable for two full-grown adults.



The company offers a one-year warranty should you experience any issues with your mattress, which is very rare.



How satisfied are the users?



The vast majority of users have reported being highly satisfied with the Insta bed EZ.



With a self-deploying frame, the bed is designed for quick and easy set-up. Simply plug the power cord into an outlet, turn it on, and wait a few minutes. Once the mattress is completely inflated, an automatic shut-off feature activates and turns off the primary pump, enabling you to walk away worry-free.



This bed is ideal for residential use. It’s a great option for a guest room or for college students, as it’s much more comfortable than a couch. To simplify the user experience even further, a compact duffle bag with wheels is included with your mattress, making travel and storage a breeze.



Is it worth your buck?



While this Insta is a bit more expensive than most others on the market, you’re getting a very high-quality mattress with many more features and options than other models. The secondary neverFLAT air pump is the feature that really sets this model apart from others.



The comfort control settings are also worth keeping in mind when it comes to price, as very few products come with such options.



Overall



All in all, the Insta EZ bed is a very high-quality, high-end model that’s far more advanced than others on the market.



While this may not be the best option for someone looking for an bed to go camping with, it’s a great solution for those looking for a more advanced, comfortable mattress that’s suitable for long-term use.

If you’re looking for a high-quality mattress that will likely last you years, consider taking a look at the InstaEZ bed. Based on others’ experiences with this mattress, chances are, you’ll love it.



Insta Bed EZ air mattress Queen Review See more on: www.thesleepstudies.com







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/insta-bed-ez-air-mattress-queen/

Warranty Policies of the Main Air Bed Companies

Most air mattress companies provide some kind of warranty with their products. In most cases, the warranties last for a year and cover manufacturers defects. You can also buy an extended warranty on some brands. When you spend a hundred dollars or more on an inflatable product, it is nice to know that you can get such coverage. Air mattresses, whether they are in your guest room or your campsite, have one job to do – keep you comfortable when you sleep. Poor support systems that break down, seams that rip, or pumps that fail to operate can be a waste of your investment. With a warranty, you know that you can have the mattress replaced.









Aerobed Warranty



Aerobed® provides a one-year limited warranty on its products. This manufacturer’s warranty covers defects in workmanship and materials. The warranty takes effect from the date of purchase, so you will need to retain the receipt. You will have to provide proof of purchase if you plan to place a claim on the warranty.

Any distributor that sells an Aerobed® is prohibited from changing or amending the manufacturer’s warranty. They cannot alter or change the warranty in any way, and it cannot be transferred to another owner. So, if you sell the mattress, you cannot transfer the warranty to the new owner. Read the warranty information carefully when you purchase an Aerobed® product, so that you know what you can expect.



Claiming an Aerobed® Warranty



If you should discover that your Aerobed® has a manufacturer’s defect, and you are within your warranty period, you need to get return authorization and instructions from the company. Aerobed® will ask you to place a tag on the item with the following information:





Your name


Address


Daytime contact phone number


A description of the problem


You will also need to send a copy of the sales receipt. Be sure to insure the package. You can send it via any shipping service.



For more details, the return shipping address and phone numbers - visit this page on their site.



Currently top rated Aerobed on our site: https://thesleepstudies.com/aerobed-opti-comfort-queen-air-mattress-with-headboard/



Fox Warranties



Fox AirBeds provide a manufacturer’s warranty against all defects in workmanship or materials. The warranty is available only to the original purchaser and is voided if the air bed is used for commercial purposes. The Signature Series mattresses have a one year warranty, while their other products have a 90-day warranty. The warranties go into effect from the time and date of purchase, so you will need to keep the receipt. You will be expected to use the product as directed, or the warranty will be voided.



The warranty for Fox AirBeds is a repair/replacement warranty. This means that they will use their own discretion when honoring the warranty. Consult your manual for further information.



Claiming a Fox AirBed Warranty



If you don’t have an RMA number, the company will not accept the shipment. They will inspect the product when it arrives. They will expect to see that you have attempted to repair the product. Also, if they see evidence of damage from pets, splinters, knives, stones, or other sharp objects, the warranty will be voided.



For more detailed instructions - contact Fox through their official site here:



Currently top rated Fox airbed on our site: https://thesleepstudies.com/fox-air-mattress-review/



Intex Warranty



Intex does not provide a warranty for its blow up beds. The warranty that usually comes with their products is a free extended warranty for 45 days. Note that some of their products do not include a warranty, make a note of that before you choose.



You will need to be sure that the mattress is operated and used as instructed in the owner’s manual.



You will need to explain what is wrong with the mattress and include a picture. The warranty is void if the mattress is abused, past its warranty date, or unsanitary.



For a more detailed explanation - visit the warranty page on the Intex Corp. website here.



Currently, the top Intex product on TheSleepStudies.com is Intex Comfort Plush Elevated Durabeam - https://thesleepstudies.com/intex-comfort-plush-elevated-durabeam-airbed-review/



Coleman Warranty



Coleman® offers a one-year limited warranty on its product. It will cover defects in materials and workmanship. You will need to keep the sales receipt so that you can prove the date of purchase. Distributors of Coleman® products cannot alter the terms of the warranty.



Claiming a Coleman Warranty



You must obtain a Return Authorization Code (RAC) and include a copy of the original receipt. Without either of these documents, the warranty will be voided.



To return the product, attach a tag with the following information:





Your name


Address


Daytime contact phone number


A description of the problem


Ship the defective item to the address listed on their site here.



The top Coleman air bed on our site is Coleman SupportRest Double High: https://thesleepstudies.com/coleman-supportrest-double-high-airbed/



Insta-Bed Warranty



Insta-Bed is manufactured by American Recreation Products, Inc. Their one-year warranty covers defective workmanship or material. The manufacturer reserves the right to repair or replace the item at their discretion. The warranty is void if the damage is the result of normal wear and tear, abuse, or if you have disassembled or tried to repair the mattress in any way.



Claiming an Insta-Bed Warranty



You can claim your Insta-Bed Warranty by following the instructions listed on their website here.



Serta Warranty



American Recreation Products also warranties the Serta products. This line has a two-year limited warranty for defective workmanship and materials. The company retains the option to repair or replace the product. There is no charge to you for these services or for the shipping. The warranty is voided in the case of abuse, tampering, or normal wear and tear.



Claiming a Serta Warranty - for precise information and contact, follow this link to their warranty page.



Currently top Serta product on TheSleepStudies.com - https://thesleepstudies.com/serta-raised-air-mattress-with-never-flat-pump/



Warranty Policies of the Main Air Bed Companies See more on: The Sleep Studies Reviews







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/air-bed-company-warranties/

Sleep Deprivation and Hair Loss: Is There a Connection?

At this day and age of technology, data and statistics, we are used to quantifying our general health by numbers. A BMI within the range of 18.5 and 24.9 indicates a healthy weight. A normal resting heart rate begins at 60 and ends at 100 beats a minute. Losing up to 100 hairs a day is only natural. Getting 8 hours of sleep every night ensures that you will stay healthy and well-rested.



These numbers act as approximations, but they are still the most precise indicators of health problems – and because a human body is such a complex, interlaced structure, a number which is below or above the healthy range in one area often means that the numbers in other areas will be off as well. Take the last two examples – hair loss and sleep. They have not been placed side by side here for nothing.



It's one thing to see some hairs left in your brush when you run it through your locks in the morning, but having them clog your shower drain every few days is an obvious problem. If the amount of hair that you are losing clearly exceeds the designated one hundred, you might want to look at the number of hours that you dedicate to having a proper night‘s rest. The latest scientific research suggests that the connection between these two elements is much stronger than we have previously thought it to be.









What your tireless body does while you are asleep



While you are blissfully asleep in your bed, your body keeps on working and even doubles its efforts of maintaining your overall well-being. Tissues and muscles are being restored and repaired. Growth hormone is being secreted. Oxygen and various nutrients are travelling to your hair follicles and promoting the health of your locks. The body takes its time to relax, refuel and regenerate – and if you are not sleeping enough, all of these vital processes fail to materialize. Hair loss is strongly connected to such frequent disturbances.



Lack of sleep means that your body will not be able to defend itself against the stressors of daily life, and stress, in its turn, might cause hormonal imbalances that speed up hair loss, make your hair more prone to damage and stunt its growth. Your immune system weakens and it is reflected in the dullness and dryness of your beloved locks. If sleeplessness persists, much more serious issues might occur, such as a receding hair line, bald patches and even exacerbated hereditary hair loss conditions. Not getting enough shut-eye is thus a problem that should not be dismissed and getting to grips with your erratic sleeping patterns might be your first step towards healthier, shinier tresses.



Is the hair loss cause by lack of sleep reversible?



You might wonder whether, once the process of hair loss has started, it can really be reversed. The specialists at Belgravia Centre, a leading British hair loss clinic, firmly believe that it is indeed reversible, or at least can be successfully managed, in the great majority of cases. If your scalp is plagued by a genetic hair loss condition, such as androgenic alopecia, it is usually further aggravated by sleeplessness and stress. Once you get your sleeping patterns under control, the hair loss will persist due to alopecia being a permanent ailment – however, the shedding might very well become slower. On the other hand, non-genetic hair loss can be cured completely by restoring normal sleep patterns and learning to manage daily stress.



Telogen effluvium is the name of a fairly common stress-induced condition that pushes the hair roots into a premature resting state and causes excessive shedding. It might take up to half a year for the sufferers of this ailment to notice full regrowth but the scalp does recover and it is certainly good news.



If you suspect that you might be suffering from any of the above conditions, making an appointment with a trustworthy hair specialist is a great idea. The specialist will be able to determine the exact cause of your hair loss and apply suitable treatment methods to help you regain those shiny locks. A lot of professional solutions revolve around a pharmaceutical product called minoxidil. Clinical studies have proven that the medicine is capable of promoting hair growth and producing impressive final results. Keep in mind, however, that it tends to benefit female patients to a higher degree than men.



Alternative solutions you might want to try first



For those of you who are not ready to visit a hair specialist, cannot afford it or do not think that the issue at hand is quite that serious, there are a whole lot of natural remedies and DIY strategies out there that are well worth a try. If the root cause of your hair loss is indeed lack of sleep, then finding ways to sleep more is, naturally, your first step towards healthy tresses. Giving yourself time to wind down before heading to bed is extremely important. Avoid working late, as your mind will struggle to relax after a period of increased activity.



You can always try supplementing your sleep regimen with mild OTC aid like Melatonin - bear in mind, however that, melatonin is not a long term solutions and there are risks involved with using it.



Melatonin, benefits risks and dosages



The risks even extent to the possibility of taking too much Melatonin and overdosing - while it's not as bad as it sounds since there is not official lethal dose of melatonin and the question of how much melatonin is too much is still open for discussion - it is still a hormone and you don't want to use too much of it - you can see our guide on that here - https://thesleepstudies.com/can-you-overdose-on-melatonin/



Do not watch TV, use a laptop or scroll through your phone – the bright screen disturbs your natural sleeping patterns. Refraining from eating a large meal right before bedtime is also a good idea. Choose a light snack or a cup of warm milk instead.



Can kava kava help you kick your coffee habit?



Drinking caffeinated beverages, as well as smoking, is not recommended for people who struggle to fall asleep at night, so you might want to try and break those habits. Instead of a mug of your favorite strong coffee, think about alternatives like kava kava. This drink is similar to coffee and many people have reported good things when they replace a late night dose of coffee with a good Kava brand, be it a drink or a supplement.



It's just a question of choosing the best kava kava extracts and supplements - you can read about it here - https://thesleepstudies.com/best-kava-kava-tea-extract-for-anxiety/



Finally, reduce the levels of your daily stress as much as possible. There are a lot of easy and incredibly effective ways to do that: namely, taking up yoga, jogging or any other kind of exercise, utilizing special breathing techniques, adjusting your work schedule in a way that allows you to feel less rushed during the day, and much more. The key is not being afraid to experiment and give new strategies of dealing with stress a try – as long as you do that, you are sure to find something that works for you.



So is there a connection between hair loss and lack of sleep? The newest scientific discoveries surely uphold the hypothesis. It might seem worrying at first, as the recommended eight hours of sleep are rarely compatible with our modern lifestyle, but you might be surprised to find out just how much of a difference a proper night‘s rest can have on your well-being – and the state of your locks. After all, sleeping your way to shiny hair is not at all a bad deal and it is good to know that the cure for your hair loss might also be an immensely pleasurable experience!



The following article Sleep Deprivation and Hair Loss: Is There a Connection? is available on The Sleep Studies Research







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/sleep-deprivation-hair-loss-connection/

Interview with Tim Moss – the founder of TheNextChallenge.org

1. So Tim, let's not bit around the bush, has anyone ever told you that you were crazy?



I'm told that occasionally! I don't think so, though. I just like exploring.



2. OK, now that we got that awkward question out of the way, tell us a few words about yourself. Not like your hometown or a driver's license number...but, who is Tim Moss?



I'm someone who enjoys physical activity, being outdoors and going on expeditions.



That has led me to visit various countries around the world, undertaking a range of different activities. That has ranged from mountaineering in the Andes to spending 16 months cycling around the world, to running the length of every London Underground Tube line and setting a world record for the longest distance cycled on a ricksaw.



3. How did this passion for adventure come to be?



I got into walking as a kid. Every year from the age of 14, my friends and I would load our rucksacks with camping kit and travel to a national park in the summer holidays for a few days' walking and wild camping.



That naturally strayed into climbing and mountaineering. Then, at university, I saw a poster advertising expedition grants. I applied and got some funding to climb new mountains in Kyrgyzstan.



After university, I got a job at the British Schools Exploring Society (now just 'British Exploring') where I organised expeditions to the Arctic for a living. I also got to work in the Royal Geographical Society where I was surrounded by fascinating people.



From there, I decided to set up my own website to help others have adventures.



4. Why did you decide to start TheNextChallenge? What's the idea behind it?



I started The Next Challenge because people kept coming to ask me for help planning expeditions and charity challenges.



I didn't think I knew much about those things but gradually realised that even a little knowledge is more than most people have.



Adventure has had a big impact on the course of my life and I want to encourage others to try living a little more adventurously and help them to do so.



5. What do your non-adventurer friends and family think about what you do?



I get plenty of jokes at work about always being on some kind of mission and never just eating pizza in front of the TV (which I do!).



I think my friends understand most of what I do. They can see the appeal of travelling and exploring new places. Not everyone understands why I would sleep outside in a plastic bag though or why I would choose to spend my holidays sweating my way up a hill!



6. Is there an anecdote or one particular adventure that comes to mind that your family frowned upon?



Before my wife and I cycled around the world, I remember that her mum half-jokingly said that we couldn't visit any countries whose name ended in '-stan'. Presumably imagining places like Afghanistan and Pakistan (neither of which we had any intention of visiting!).



We took great pleasure in discovering that lots of the countries we travelled through referred to England as 'Inglistan'.



7. We are a website about sleep, so let's touch on that - what's your daily sleep routine like and is how do you plan your sleep arrangements on "overnight" adventures?



I like my sleep and I don't work well without it. When I wake up, I prefer to get straight out of bed rather than snooze, so that means aiming for early nights (boring!)



My favourite way to sleep in the outdoors is bivvying. I like the fact that you're really outside in the elements rather than hidden away from them. On a still, dry night, it is hard to beat.



8. Is there a particular sleep-related gear item you'd like to label as "favorite"?



My Terra Nova Jupiter bivvy bag has been with me for 16 years and feels like an old friend.



For sleeping, my preferred set up is to use an ultra-thin foam mat underneath something inflatable, like an Exped HyperLite or Thermarest ProLite.



9. Is there one hair-raising adventure from your past that stands out?



The most hair-raising adventure was my first: climbing in Kyrgyzstan. But that quickly taught me that while I like adventure, I don't like danger, so I try to avoid anything too hair-raising now.



A trip that stands out otherwise is crossing the Wahiba Sands. It is a tiny desert in Oman, comprised entirely of huge, rolling sand dunes. My wife, Laura, and I walked across it. We timed it for a full moon so we could walk late at night when it was cooler. We had to carry all of our own water and ration it very tightly. When we reached the road at the far side and stuck our thumbs out for a lift, we had 100ml left between us.



10. What does the future hold for Tim? Anything especially exciting we should pay attention to?



Laura and I recently returned from one of our toughest trips: walking across the frozen surface of Lake Baikal in Siberia. It freezes every winter and we dragged sleds across it, pitching our tent on the ice (double camping mats for that!) and melting snow for drinking water. Our stove broke half way across so we had to smash through the ice to get fresh drinking water then dash to shore so we can collect firewood to melt snow. Very dramatic.



It was fun but hard work and very cold. So I think our next trip might be somewhere warm! A desert perhaps...



11. What's Tim Moss' message to the the adventurous souls out there?



You do not need lots of time, money or expertise to have an adventure. And you do not need to be a bearded, masochist.



Adventure is available to everyone, be it climbing in the Himalayas or camping out on a school night.



12. Is there anything we haven't covered that you'd like to mention? This is your chance to brag a bit, we encourage you to use it.



I offer an annual expedition grant. It was originally funded by the money I got from the adverts on my website (£200). Then I invite 100 members of the public to donate £2 each. Following that, lots of other 'adventurers' came forward and we now get £1,500-2,000 each year.



We've funded 40 different adventures over three years, from short family trips to multi-month epics.



Anyone can apply. Details are here: www.thenextchallenge.org/grant



The following post Interview with Tim Moss – the founder of TheNextChallenge.org is courtesy of https://thesleepstudies.com







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/interview-tim-moss/

About The Top Air Bed Companies

The top companies of the industry have spent plenty of time and money developing durable, comfortable products. Sure, you can still buy products that go flat during the night and that are only good for one or two uses. But if you want a quality product, you can now choose mattresses that have inner baffles and reinforced sides that won’t roll you out onto the tent floor. Here is our overview of some of the top manufacturers.



The companies we'll list in this guide currently hold a majority of the the positions on our list of best air mattress reviews - you can see all the reviews listed here.



SoundAsleep



The parent company of SoundAsleep is Somnio LLC, and their design offices are in New Jersey. Their products have a limited 1-year manufacturer’s warranty. The company is also said to have excellent customer service, so if you have a problem with their product, you can talk to real people to have it fixed.



Since we have a separate page talking about the company in more detail - you can continue reading about SoundAsleep here.



Coleman



Who hasn’t heard of the Coleman company?



It was established 117 years ago when Oklahoma native William Coleman designed a pressurized gasoline lamp. These lamps were used to illuminate the first night time football game in the western U.S.









The company went on to develop camp stoves – including the first G.I. stove, sleeping bags, generators, tents, and backpacks.



In 1998, Sunbeam Corporation purchased the Coleman Company. Sunbeam declared bankruptcy in 2002 and re-branded as American Household, Inc., which was purchased by Newell Brands for $845 million. The company continues to thrive, adding more products to the Coleman line every year. With facilities in Kansas and Texas and manufacturing overseas, they continue to provide reliable products for outdoorsmen.



Their top airbed models are:





Cot airbed with side tables - you can see its ratings here



DoubleHigh Supportrest - you can read more about it here



Quickbed SingleHigh - click here to read more about it



Insta-bed



Insta-bed states that their goal is to provide their customers with the comfort of a permanent mattress in a portable product. Designed for use in either the guest room or campsite, the Insta-bed is constructed with their trademarked neverFLAT technology. Their products are developed with the objective of delivering a comfortable night’s sleep even when you are away from home.









The Insta-bed models are usually lightweight, making it a good choice for campers who want to backpack into their campsite.



There are two components that make the beds with Insta neverFLAT technology better: the fabric and the pump.



The fabric for these mattresses is comprised of two layers. The inside layer is PVC, which increases the puncture resistance and makes the mattress air tight. The outer layer of fabric is durable polyester. This is the thicker layer, and provides a comfortable sleeping surface.



The fabric also keeps sheets from slipping off of the mattress, and further increases the strength of the surface, making it fully puncture resistant. This double layer of fabric is used on the top and the bottom of the mattress. Since the exterior layer of polyester is so sturdy, the mattress uses less PVC. The interior of the mattress is supported with coils, which increases comfort and make the product more durable. The internal coils are said to be 80% stronger than the competition, making the mattress capable of supporting up to 700 pounds.



The neverFLAT pump is a dual pump design. This is a built-in system, so you don’t have to keep track of a separate pump. The primary pump quickly inflates and deflates the mattress, while the secondary pump quietly engages throughout the night to keep the mattress at your preset firmness. The technology is used in their most advanced-model - the Insta EZ.



Aerobed



The AeroBed brand of inflatables is designed to provide stylish, durable, and comfortable products for their customers. The company has been around since 1992, and has patented its pump technology.



In 2010, AeroBed became a registered trademark of the Coleman Company. This means you get the powerhouse customer service and history of quality products associated with Coleman.









More recently, AeroBed has developed a range of raised models. This is the same comfortable and durable mattress they have always produced, but provides the elevation of a regular mattress. This makes it much easier to get into and out of the bed, and is quite popular with people who want a spare bed in the guest room without adding a piece of permanent furniture.



The New & Improved AeroBed models build further on the original design, providing mattresses that are firmer than their predecessors by 20%. They can also inflate faster than the previous models – as if that was necessary – and containing the Whoosh™ valve for quick deflation. The pumps are now recessed so that even if you sit on the edge of the mattress, you will not feel any discomfort due to the pump. Previously, it was recommended that you keep the pump-end of the mattress at the foot of the bed.



Their top models:





Opti-comfort queen air mattress with headboard - you can see it's review here



Aerobed Classic, low and high rise - you can read more about it here



INTEX



Intex Recreation Corp. makes airbeds, pools, and spas. They also manufacture and distribute outdoor furniture and boats, and have been around for over 40 years. In the 70s, the company name was The Wet Set®, and their first inflatable item was a beach ball. They pioneered the science and design of above ground swimming pools, and, 20 years later, market spas.









Escaping the reputation of making "cheap" air beds



For decades, Intex has been followed by the aura of being at the lower end of the industry and catering to the needs of those looking for a cheap air bed.That all changed with the introduction of the Durabeam Series and the FiberTech fibers.



These Dura-beams run horizontally across the inside of the mattress, providing support and retaining the shape of the product. This keeps it from sagging in the middle or breaking down along the edges. On the other hand - the fibers used to connect top to the bottom of the bed are made of high-tensile polyester fibers.



Their top model is Intex Comfort Plush Durabeam - it comes as a high and mid-rise - you can read more about the high-rise model here.



Serta



Serta may be one of the most well-known names in the mattress industry. What many people don’t know, though, is that Serta makes inflatable beds, too. Their top models is Serta Raised Never Flat (you can see it here) and the Serta EZ (click here to read more).



All of the design and manufacturing for Serta brand mattresses are done in the U.S. They are an award winning company, receiving the Women’s Choice Award for three years straight. Consumers Digest has listed the iComfortSleep System and the Perfect Sleeper® on their Best Buys. Serta also manufactures the Bellagio at Home line of mattresses.



Serta holds exclusive licenses with many leading providers of hospitality. Hilton Worldwide, Choice Hotels International, Marriott International, Best Western International, and Bellagio Las Vegas all contract specifically with Serta to provide high-quality, comfortable, and durable mattresses for their customers.



One of their most successful lines of mattresses has been the iComfort Sleep System. Introduced in 2011, this sleep system still set industry standards for comfort, affordability, and durability.



Since 2010, Serta has worked with the National Sleep Foundation to do a complete redesign of their Perfect Sleeper. The goal, originally, was to address five of the most common sleep problems. Work continues to develop even better sleep experiences for people, providing individualized sleep parameters. As a result of this collaboration, the National Sleep Foundation has named the Serta Perfect Sleeper as it’s only Official Mattress.



The blog post About The Top Air Bed Companies is available on The Sleep Studies By Bob Ozment







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/top-air-bed-companies/

Shrunks Tuckaire Toddler Travel Bed Reviiew

Shrunks' Family Toy Company Inc. was launched from a family basement in 2007 and quickly established itself as a reputable and award-winning international brand. Its founder, David Cirjak, has over 20 years of experience in product development industry. He channeled it all into making imaginative products that'll "take the fear out of bedtime" and make it a fun experience for children.



The company portfolio had its humble beginnings with a simple children's on-the-go bed, designed for home use, camping, sleepovers or moving. Off the back of its success, the Tuckaire Toddler Travel Bed was born. It's a combination of European design and 60's chic retro style aimed at creating a fun and safe sleeping environment and alleviating "fear of the dark" and similar anxieties.



It has very little competition in the category of air beds for the young ones - to see it on our main page where we list the best air mattresses, click here.



Ratings





Air Retention – 87


Comfort – 81


Durability & Longevity – 90


User Satisfaction – 78


Value for $ - 82


Overall – 83.6


PROs and CONs



PROs:





Fun and imaginative design


The material is 100% BPA, lead and phthalate-free


Security rails


Comes with Jetaire Electric Pump


30-second inflation


Compact dimensions


Portable and easily stored


Lightweight (5 lbs)


No squeaky noises


No air loss (high-quality valve)


Soft surface with fleece-flocked center


Numerous prizes


15-day refund for unopened product


2-year guarantee


CONs:





High price


Lowered comfort index


Air Retention of Shrunks tuckaire toddler travel bed



Designed with children in mind



Given its intended users (children of 2+ years), Shrunks Tuckaire toddler travel air bed bed doesn't really need a heavy-duty PVC in order to do the job. Children do like to jump on it, however, so it does need to take that into account. Our main concern while testing it was the valve, actually. However, it has proven to be very difficult to unravel even after we put a considerable weight on the top surface of the bed. So, the valve will definitely not leak air and your child will sleep perfectly all night long.



One of the ways to recognize the original product, according to the manufacturer, is the orange band around the valve. This doesn't seem very likely to us, though, since if somebody goes through all the trouble to replicate the mattress, the little orange band certainly won't pose a challenge.



Is Shrunks tuckaire toddler travel bed comfortable?



Comfort and safety compromise



Even though Shrunks puts a much bigger emphasis on safety rather than comfort, this little bed is surprisingly comfortable as well. With inflatable products, you usually have to choose the thing you want the most and forego some other qualities. For example, if you need a sturdy camping air mattress, you'll have to sacrifice comfort to some extent. The sturdy construction will also be heavier, so you're sacrificing mobility and so on. With Shrunks, you'll have to compromise as well. Our final comfort score for this bed is 81 / 100, which is not bad by any means, but it's a far cry from a personal sleeping cloud.



But is it soft enough for kids?



The cushy flocked material provides a veritable sleeping fort for your young ones and the middle part covered with fleece is the "crown jewel" of the design. It's pretty comfortable for sleeping, and it also prevent cold rushes, a very frequent occurrence with other inflatable beds for children.



Furthermore, you can also tuck the sheets under the center pad, which means that the bed is compatible with any sort of sheets you have.

Another comfort/safety feature is the built-in railing system, which prevents your children from falling out of the bed. The rails are also inflatable and provide an additional feeling of safety.



Durability and longevity



Is it sturdy enough?



We need to get one fact out of the way at the very beginning. Children will absolutely LOVE jumping all over this bed every waking moment they have. This means that it needs to feature a reasonably sturdy construction and somewhat thick material (not all-out heavy-duty, though). Fortunately, this bed has it all, and it's able to withstand abuse like you wouldn't believe.



Separate inflation



The fact that the basis and the sleeping pad inflate separately adds an additional layer of structural strength to the Shrunks mattress. They act as separate entities, but work together at absorbing the pressure and sharp bursts of force (yeah, jumping).



Is Shrunks Tuckaire toddler travel bed worth the money?



Is it too expensive?



We would have to say yes to this. The mattress itself is a great product, as already established, but the price is just too high in our book. It provides excellent safety features, and it's specifically tailored for children, but the price simply pushes all that aside and makes you think about hard about your budget that month. In short, the price-to-quality ratio is leaning heavily in favor of the price.



82 / 100 is still a very good overall score and even our featured testers had to agree that we have an excellent product on our hands. Still, if it were a bit cheaper, it would be perfect. Users always compare the prices with regular beds, and when they encounter an expensive air mattress, such as this, they'll usually say something on the lines of being able to buy a "real bed" for that kind of money, and they would be right.



Having said all that, this is still the best inflatable mattress for toddlers out there hands down. The price is high, we won't even try to deny that, but it offers all the safety options your kids will ever need, paired with a fun design they will love.



Who is this mattress made for?



If you want to keep your kids safe all night long, you'll definitely love this little bed. It will never lose air or allow your child to fall over the edges. It can take a considerable beating and still function perfectly fine, as indicated by our tests. It's absolutely free of every toxic material you can think off and won't put the health of your child in jeopardy. It's easy to inflate/deflate and store when you don't need it. It can be used for a variety of purposes, including outdoor activities.



The two compromises you'll have to make if you want this bed regard the high price and the somewhat lower comfort index.



Shrunks Tuckaire Toddler Travel Bed Reviiew was first published to www.thesleepstudies.com







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/shrunks-tuckaire-toddler-travel-bed-reviiew/

Coleman 4-in-1 QuickBed review

Coleman Quickbed 4-in-1 is the most versatile air mattress on the market. There is nothing quite like it out there. It can be used 2 single high twins, one double high twin or a single high King.



Just a few years back this airbed was in the top 2 camping air mattresses out there. Today, rated at 88 / 100 overall and 92 /100 in the category of value for money, it is still in the top 5 choices among camping air beds.



Today, we’ll analyze all it’s advantages, shortcoming, take a look at its ratings and how it compares to other top models in its class and price range. By the end of the review, you’ll hopefully know which of these models is right for you.



You can see the best camping air mattresses here: https://thesleepstudies.com/best-air-mattress-reviews/









Ratings





Air Retention – 87


Comfort – 87


Durability & Longevity – 87


User Satisfaction – 88


Value for $ - 92


Overall – 88.2


The main "selling points" of Coleman 4-in-1 Quick Bed





Versatile design – this bed can be used in four different ways (hence the name 4-in-1), as a double-high twin, as a single King Size and as two separate low twin beds


ComfortSmart coil technology – featuring 46 air coils in each of the mattresses


Soft top flocking made of rayon, a semi-synthetic fiber


Airtight System – which prevents the loss of air but also ensures easy inflation/deflation and the "memory" of your firmness settings


Double Lock Valve – making sure the air never leaks out of the mattress with its "double gate" security mechanism


Sturdy PVC construction – makes this bed viable for camping as it can withstand rougher surroundings and inhospitable terrains. Coleman doesn't use phthalates and other toxic chemicals during the manufacturing process


Wrap-N-Roll storage – the mattress doesn't take up a lot of storage space, and it's easily rolled into the attached storage bag


You can use all your standard size sheets with this mattress, as its measurements actually correspond the established King and Twin sizes


1-year warranty – if for some reason Coleman is unable to repair or replace the product, they will replace it with a similar one of equal or higher value


PROs of the Coleman 4-in-1:





Versatile design and features


Utility of 4 different beds


Sturdy PVC construction for both camping and indoor use


Able to handle up to 600 lbs of pressure


Coleman AirTight System prevent air loss


Comfortable with 46 coils in each mattress and soft rayon flocking


Double Lock Valve


Easy Wrap-N-Roll storage


Limited 1-year warranty


CONs:





No integrated pump


It's one of the TOP Coleman models, with the other two also being in the top 5 camping airbed on the market - the Coleman Cot airbed with side tables and the Coleman SupportRest Double High.



You can see their reviews below:



Air retention of the Coleman 4-in-1 QuickBed



It keeps the air where it belongs



Coleman QuickBed features their signature AirTight technology, which means that every single mattress is factory-tested for possible leaks before leaving the production line.



The material of choice for this model is durable PVC, allowing the bed to preserve your firmness settings even in rougher environments.



The advanced Double Lock Valve serves two purposes. It allows for an easy deflation and prevents air from leaking out of the mattress. It's called "double" because it features two layers of anti-leaking protection.



What does this mean for you?



Coleman QuickBed is extremely adaptable to all the exterior circumstances. This means that you can use it at home, but also during your camping trips. Whatever purpose you have in mind, rest assured that this model will keep the air right where you want it, inside the bed.









Comfort or the Coleman Quickbed EasyStay



Successful compromise



It's a well-known fact that outdoor air mattresses aren't particularly comfortable, but that's the sacrifice we're willing to make to assure not waking up on the ground in the morning. Coleman QuickBed manages to compromise between the two offering supreme comfort AND outdoor viability.



Comfort-related specifics



The top of the bed is flocked with soft rayon, a material made of purified cellulose fibers primarily extracted from wood pulp. To be honest, rayon is considered to be a semi-synthetic fiber, but it's still much better and more natural option than, let's say polyester or nylon.



The Coleman signature ComfortSmart coil technology is also incorporated into this model with 46 coils in each of the mattresses. This ensures a proper body support while you sleep, preventing inconveniences like muscle soreness, misaligned neck and spine, joint pain and pressure points.



The AirTight system also "remembers" your firmness setting, preventing any changes throughout the night.

"This inflatable bed achieves a perfect balance between comfort, durability and puncture-resistance, allowing you to use it indoors but also during your camping adventures"



Durability and longevity



Is the material reliable?



As we already mentioned, this bed is completely made of PVC, which is one of the staples in the manufacturing of air mattresses. The material is heavy-duty, making this model extremely puncture-resistant. This is what enables it to double as a camping mattress. Note that Coleman has an exclusive PVC formula only applied to their products and hidden from other manufacturers.



The pressure level is capped at 600 lbs for each of the two mattresses.



What about the plasticizers?



In the early days, everybody used to work with plasticizers. They were cheap and enabled the manufacturers to make the PVC malleable. FYI, PVC is a very tough material and needs additional chemicals in order to shape it to a particular design. Plasticizers, especially phthalates, were perfect chemicals for the role. As our public knowledge of the phthalate grew, we realized just how dangerous they really were. Coleman doesn't use them in their production process anymore, but they did in the past. The controversy followed by a lawsuit in 2009 was the final nail in the coffin of this harmful era.



Is Coleman 4-in-1 QuickBed worth the money?



One of the best price-value ratios



The sheer utility and versatility of the mattress were enough to give it 92 / 100 in this category, even without all the additional features it has.



This category tends to be a bit vague and subjective, which is why we combine the experiences of our featured testers and customers who used it in order to form the final grade. 92 / 100 is among the highest grades we've ever given in this category and it established a trend for Coleman products since their bed with cot is also an exceptional investment of your hard-earned money.



Coleman 4-in-1 QuickBed review was originally published on TheSleepStudies







via The Sleep Studies - Feed https://thesleepstudies.com/coleman-4-1-quickbed-review/

How to make an air mattress more comfortable?

When it comes to the balance between comfort and convenience, no portable bed comes close to an air mattress.

You can keep it deflated and stored on most days and inflate it for overnight guests or camping trips.

Still, even the best air mattress needs a little “help" to feel just right – after all, each person has their own needs and preferences.

If you want to make your air mattress more comfortable, here’s what you can do and what you shoudn’t do.

air mattress with topper and sheets for comfort

9 easy ways to make an air mattress more comfortable

1. Use a mattress topper

Is the rubbery feeling of an air bed keeping you awake?

A little extra cushion makes it feel like you’re sleeping on an actual bed, and can also help if the mattress seems a bit too hard or too soft. If you don’t have a topper on hand, a foam pad or egg crate layer will do just fine. You can see our guide on best mattress toppers and pads here.

If your problem is that the airbed is getting too hot, you’ll want to look at cooling mattress pads.

2. An easier solution – get an airbed that already comes with a topper

If you’re like most of us at the office and hate buying new things for the thing you just bought (which is exactly what you’ll need to do make an air mattress more comfortable), you’ll probably be interested in airbed that already come with a memory foam or gel topper like some Fox airbeds.

It’s a one-stop-chop and makes the whole process so much easier.

You can see our top pick among memory foam air mattresses here.

making an air mattress more comfortable by using a foam topper

3. Use sheets, blankets and covers

Since air heats up and cools down much faster than solids, your air mattress will react to temperature changes before you can say Jack Robinson.

This is especially true when camping. Placing fitted bed sheets and covers on your mattress goes a long way in insulating you from unwanted temperature changes and making your air mattress more comfortable.

A spritz of linen spray on the covers won’t hurt either.

4. An easier solution – get a model that comes with a topper and skirt

Again, there’s a simpler solution. Some of the models made today already come with a topper and a “skirt" that covers all the plastic parts.

Not only are these more appealing to the eye, but they eliminate the hassle of adding bedding, sheets & toppers.

airbed with topper and side skirt

Our pick here is the Sky Blue with a bamboo-based topper and a side skirt.

5. Make sure it doesn’t slide or move

Use it on a soft surface. Some floors, like hardwood, tend to make annoying squeaking noises when it rubs against the air bed’s vinyl or plastic bottom. A carpet or even just a blanket under the bed will keep it from sliding and slipping.

If you happen to have a spare one lying around, a box spring, bed cot, or stand elevates the mattress and makes it easier for you to get in and out of bed, especially if you have bad knees.

Elevating the air bed protects its underside while keeping it from squeaking and sliding. It also keeps the bed from getting cold when the floor gets chilly, thus allowing for a more comfortable slumber on an airbed.

6. An easy solution – get an airbed with a “sure-grip" bottom

Once again, technology to the rescue – some of the modern airbeds are made using what’ know in the industry as a “sure-grip’ bottom.

The best part is – the two airbeds we mentioned above (Fox and Sky Blue) both use sure-grip materials for the bottom. No sliding, no moving, just a peaceful slumber.

7. Choose one with a headboard or improvise

A headboard keeps pillows from rolling off the air bed in the middle of the night. It also makes it easier to sit up for some late night reading. Unless your air mattress happens to have one already, you can improvise by pulling the bed up against a wall, a couch, or a cabinet.

comfortable air bed with headboard

If you prefer to own one that already comes with a headboard we recommend Aerobed Opti-comfort Queen air mattress with headboard – you can see it here.

8 . Make sure it doesn’t leak

People who wake up on the wrong side of the air bed usually complain of back or neck aches. Most of the time, it’s a result of the airbed loosing air without any visible hole and you (or worse, your guests) waking up to a half-deflated lump of vinyl.

You can always inflate the bed a few hours before going to sleep and just place something heavy on top to see if it looses air.

9. An easier solution

Voted most comfortable air bed 26 months in a row – Serta Never Flat PillowTop

Today, you have the option to go with models that will never let you or your guests down by deflating. These airbeds are more comfortable because they come with a “smart" or a “never-flat" pump.

What’s a smart pump?

A smart or NeverFlat pump is a small secondary pump that stays plugged in and silently adds air if its sensors detect a pressure drop inside the airbed. It sounds high-end (and it is) but the good news is that there are models out there that cost the same as a regular inflatable.

Our pick here is the Serta Never-Flat Raised – here’s why:

  • It features a never flat pump, so you’ll never have the problems of a deflated airbed again
  • It comes with a fitted foam-pillow top – so there’s no need for toppers or add-ons
  • The bottom is sure-grip, so it doesn’t slide or move

It’s also been voted the most comfortable air mattress in our user polls over and over again for the past two years.

You can see the full review of Serta Never Flat Here

making an air mattress more comfortable by using a pillow top cover
This article "How to make an air mattress more comfortable?" was first posted on https://thesleepstudies.com